Architectural Services Department

The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region

GENERAL SPECIFICATION

FOR

BUILDING
2012 EDITION

ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT

THE GOVERNMENT OF THE HONG KONG SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE REGION

INTRODUCTION
The 2012 Edition of the General Specification for Building comprises
considerable updating and revisions to the 2007 Edition. The review of the 2007 Edition
was carried out by the Technical Information Committee of the Architectural Services
Department (ArchSD). Principal amendments and additions in the 2012 Edition include
the updating of the BS Standards where applicable, further greening Specification to be in
line with the global consciousness for our environment and also some updated
requirements in the landscaping practice.
The updating of specification is a continuous process. With the benefit of
information technology, the electronic version of this 2012 Edition of the General
Specification will be kept up-to-date and may be viewed on the ArchSD Homepage.

CONTENTS

Section No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Index 1
Index 2
Index 3

Title of Section
Preliminaries
Demolition, Site Clearance & Alterations
Excavation & Earthwork
Steel Sheet Piling Work
Piling Work
Structural Concrete Work
Prestressed Concrete Work
Concrete for Minor & Non-structural Work
Brickwork & Blockwork
Masonry
Tanking
Roofing
Carpentry & Joinery
Ironmongery
Structural Steel Work
Curtain Walls
Metal Work
Finishes
Sanitary Appliances
Glazing
Painting
Internal Fittings and Fixtures
Plumbing and Drainage
External Works
Landscape Work
Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Pages
1-1 ~ 1-19
2-1 ~ 2-13
3-1 ~ 3-16
4-1 ~ 4-5
5-1 ~ 5-32
6-1 ~ 6-41
7-1 ~ 7-9
8-1 ~ 8-5
9-1 ~ 9-6
10-1 ~ 10-5
11-1 ~ 11-5
12-1 ~ 12-14
13-1 ~ 13-13
14-1 ~ 14-14
15-1 ~ 15-23
16-1 ~ 16-44
17-1 ~ 17-12
18-1 ~ 18-48
19-1 ~ 19-5
20-1 ~ 20-11
21-1 ~ 21-26
22-1 ~ 22-12
23-1
24-1 ~ 24-7
25-1 ~ 25-68
26-1 ~ 26-45

Not Used
Subjects and Clause Numbers
List of Standards

B1 ~ B19
C1 ~ C3

Section 1 Preliminaries

SECTION 1
PRELIMINARIES
Applicability

1.01

This General Specification for Building is applicable to all building works in

connection with the construction, alteration and maintenance of buildings
unless overridden by the General Conditions of Contract, Special
Conditions of Contract, Drawings, Bills of Quantities, Schedules of Rates
prepared by the Employer, Particular Specifications or the instructions of the
Supervising Officer.

Abbreviations

1.02

Abbreviations used shall have the following meanings:

BS
BS EN
CP
CS
GS
IEC
ISO
PS
PW
SO
DEVB List

British Standard
European Standard
Code of Practice
Construction Standard
General Specification for Building
International Electrotechnical Commission
International Organization for Standardization Publication
Particular Specification
Public Works
Supervising Officer
Development Bureau current enforced List of Approved
Suppliers of Materials or Specialist Contractors for Public
Works.

Applications of
specification

1.03

Materials and workmanship specified in one Section of this GS shall apply

to the same items in other Sections.

Form of Contract

1.04

The form of contract is either the General Conditions of Contract for

Building Works, the General Conditions of Contract for Design and Build
Contracts, the General Conditions of Contract for Term Contracts for
Building Works, or such other General Conditions for Building Works as
are specified and issued by the Government of Hong Kong Special
Administrative Region, hereinafter referred to as the "Conditions".
The Conditions include Clauses dealing specifically with the provision of
plant, equipment, labour and the quality of workmanship and samples and
testing. This GS is written for use in conjunction with the Conditions and
the Contractor shall be deemed to have knowledge of all relevant Clauses in
the Conditions. All definitions in the Conditions shall be deemed to apply
also to this GS.

Government of
Hong Kong

1.04.1

The term "Government of Hong Kong" mentioned in this GS shall mean the
Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region.

Supervising
Officer

1.05

"Supervising Officer" is the "Architect" or the "Maintenance Surveyor" or

the Supervising Officer as respectively defined in the Conditions.

British Standards
European
Standards and
Codes of Practice

1.06

"British Standards", "European Standards" and "Codes of Practice" shall be

deemed to include all amendments, revisions and standards superseding the
standards listed herein, current and published before the date of first tender
invitation for the Contract unless otherwise specified. In the case of Sections
1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 15, 25 and 26 the stated BS, BS EN, CP and similar standards
in Index 3 are to take preference over any later amendment, revision or
superseded standard. For the Codes of Practice and Construction Standards

1-1

Section 1 Preliminaries

issued by the Government of Hong Kong, the latest editions shall apply
unless otherwise specified in Index 3. Equivalent International Standards
may be used if approved by the SO.
Specification in
Manufacturer's
recommendations

1.07

"Manufacturer's recommendations" mean those recommendations or

instructions printed or in writing and produced by the manufacturer of any
specified product current and published before the date of first tender
invitation for the Contract.

Approval

1.08

"Approval" or "approved" means the approval in writing by the SO but this

shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibilities imposed by the
Contract.

Proprietary
brand name
materials or
products

1.09

The phrase or alternative materials having equivalent functions or

performance shall be deemed to be included wherever materials or
products are specified by proprietary brand names. Alternative materials or
products of different brands or manufacture having equivalent functions or
performance may substitute for the specified proprietary brand name
materials or products if prior approval from the SO has been obtained. If the
Contractor intends to use the intellectual property rights of another party in
performing his obligations under the Contract, appropriate licences shall be
obtained from the relevant rights owners.

Specified

1.10

The term "specified" means the incorporation of a particular clause or

alternative by specific reference in the Drawings, Particular Specification,
Bills of Quantities or Schedule of Rates prepared by the Employer.
Where alternatives are given in the GS, the required alternative may be
"specified". If it is not so specified the Contractor is at liberty to make his
own choice from the stated list, or the Contractor may propose alternatives
subject to the agreement and acceptance of the SO.

Regulations

1.11

"Regulations" mean any Ordinance or Regulation published by Government

of Hong Kong, byelaws of any local or duly constituted authority and rules
or regulations of public bodies and companies which may be applicable to
the Works.

Equivalent
standards and
imperial sizes

1.12

When materials or products to the appropriate standards are not available,

materials or products conforming with equivalent standards (or
performance) shall be acceptable subject to approval.
When a material is available in metric size, an imperial size equivalent shall
not be acceptable.
If a material is unobtainable in metric size, a material of the nearest
equivalent imperial size which will fully meet the specification may be
substituted if prior approval has been obtained, but the rates will not be
changed from those submitted for the materials specified.
GENERAL OBLIGATIONS

Use of the Site

1.13

Do not use the Site or permit the Site to be used by others for any purpose
other than for the execution of the Works or Specialist Works.

Advertising

1.14

Do not display, or permit advertisements to be displayed on the Site.

Fire precautions

1.15

Comply with all Regulations to prevent loss or damage from fire.

Safety

1.16

Comply with all Regulations concerning safety on the Site. Obtain posters
and display prominently on all structures or temporary huts on the Site

1-2

Section 1 Preliminaries

throughout the construction period and remove on completion. These

posters, both in English and Chinese, drawing attention to safety on site are
obtainable from the Labour Department, Government of Hong Kong and
Occupational Safety and Health Council.
Provide sufficient safety helmets, rubber boots, safety shoes, umbrella,
protective and waterproof clothing and devices such as ear mufflers and
protective glasses where appropriate for the use of the SO, the SO's
representatives, and other authorized persons visiting the Site.
Provide on the Site for the use of the SO for the duration of the Contract one
set of the latest Construction Site (Safety) Regulations, the Factories and
Industrial Undertakings Regulations concerning safety officers, safety
supervisors and any other safety matter. Provide any revisions or new Safety
Regulations that may be introduced during the duration of the Contract.
Nuisance

1.17

Comply with all Regulations concerning the prevention of nuisance arising

from vibration, noise, water, smoke, dust, accumulation of rubbish,
mosquito breeding and all other causes of nuisance.
Provide throughout the whole period of the Contract and extended period, if
any, mufflers or other suitable noise suppressors on all pneumatic drills,
compressors and other plant which may create a noise nuisance to the
general public.
Obtain posters and display prominently on all structures or temporary huts
on the Site throughout the construction period and remove on completion.
These posters, both in English and Chinese, drawing attention to the dangers
of allowing the breeding of mosquitoes on site are obtainable free of charge
from the Health Education Section of Food and Environmental Hygiene
Department of the Government of Hong Kong.
Treat any standing water on the Site with an approved insecticidal oil at least
once per week.
Store, cover or treat all items on the Site including Constructional Plant,
capable of retaining water to prevent the collection of water in them.
Provide throughout the construction period an approved central collection
point on the Site for depositing of all empty cans, oil drums, packaging and
other receptacles capable of holding water and for the regular collection and
removal of such articles from the Site.
Do not burn debris, or any other matter on the Site.

Traffic control

1.18

Comply with all regulations concerning traffic control, signing, lighting and
barriers including the "Code of Practice for Lighting, Signing and Guarding
of Road Works" issued by the Highways Department, Government of Hong
Kong.

Maintenance of
roads

1.19

Make good, or accept responsibility for the cost of making good, any
damage caused by site traffic or site operations to public or other roads,
footpaths, bridges and the like. Keep the aforementioned and the approaches
to the Site, borrow site or dump site clear of dust, mud, debris and all
obstructions. Avoid contamination and blockage of all Government drains
and sewers, as well as associated private drains & sewers.
In particular take the following precautions to prevent dusty materials such
as cement, earth, pulverized fuel ash, silt, stone fines, sand, debris, saw dust
and wooden chips, etc. or rock and hardcore material from falling into roads,

1-3

Section 1 Preliminaries

footpaths or bridges during haulage:

Trees and shrubs

1.20

(i)

Fit vehicles having an open load compartment with tightly fitting and
adequately secured side and tail boards.

(ii)

Rock or hardcore material shall be carefully stacked to prevent

dislodging during haulage.

(iii)

All materials shall not be loaded to a level higher than the side and
tail boards, and shall be covered by a suitable tarpaulin (or any other
impervious covering material as approved by the SO) in good
condition before leaving the Site. The tarpaulin shall be properly
secured and extended at least 300 mm over the edges of the side and
tail boards and maintained in a secured position throughout the
journey to the off-loading destination.

(iv)

Provide and employ at the Site, borrow site and dump site, such
labour and washing facilities as necessary or as directed by the SO to
clean the wheels and undersides of lorries free of earth prior to
leaving the Site, borrow site or dump site and, after dumping, for
sweeping out all loose material remaining in all vehicles. At the
discretion of the SO such labour and washing facilities may also be
employed in keeping clean the approach road to the Site, borrow site
or dump site.

Provide a record of existing trees, if any, within and in close vicinity (within
2000 mm) of the site boundary and works areas. (A plant is considered as a
tree if its trunk diameter measures 95 mm or more at a height of 1300 mm
above the ground level. (Guidance on measurement of tree diameter is given
in Agriculture, Fisheries and Conservation Departments Nature
Conservation Practice Note No.2)) Photographic record and location plan
for individual tree together with the Tree Schedule shall be submitted within
28 days after commencement of the Works or nomination by the SO. The
Tree Schedule shall show the following particulars:
(a)

A number identity for each tree, also marked on each photograph;

(b)

The species (scientific names and Chinese common names);

(c)

Trunk diameter (at 1300mm above the ground level);

(d)

Tree crown spread;

(e)

Overall height;

(e)

Condition of the tree;

(g)

Existing ground level at the root collar.

Protect and preserve all existing trees and shrubs on Site. No physical
disturbance including transplanting/felling/pruning of any existing tree shall
be permitted without prior written consent of the SO and the statutory
approval.
Take precaution and provide all necessary on-site protection
works/measures (including tree surgery works if so required) for individual
existing tree, if any, within or in close vicinity (within 2000 mm) of the site
boundary and/or works area throughout the Contract period.
Temporary fencing, if necessary shall be provided to prevent the

1-4

Section 1 Preliminaries

encroachment of equipment or materials and contamination of the

surrounding ground by oil or other deleterious substances. Do not bank
spoil, vegetable soil or other materials within the drip-line zone of individual
trees. If it is necessary to trim or cut back trees and shrubs, it must be done
under the direction and supervision of the SO in strict compliance with
Clauses 2.37 to 2.41 and Section 25 of the G.S.
Make allowance in method of operation and vehicular access for tree
preservation during the period of Works.
Existing features

1.21

Provide written proposals for the protection of existing buildings, gates,

walls and all other features of the Site which shall be retained for the
acceptance of the SO. Verify by dimensional confirmation all features which
form physical constraints to site development.

Existing services

1.22

Check and confirm the position of all existing utility services within the Site
at the commencement of the Works, including locating these services by
means of hand-dug trial holes.
Protect and maintain existing electric or telephone cables including
overhead wires, gas or water mains, sewers, live drains and the like. Make
all necessary arrangements for the temporary diversion or alteration of such
services to the satisfaction of the relevant authority and utility undertakings.
Do not commence work adjacent to existing services until the necessary
diversions or alterations have been completed.

Adjoining
properties

1.23

Protect, shore up and in all ways support all adjacent lands, buildings and
services which are liable to be disturbed or damaged during the execution of
the Works. Take adequate precautions to prevent excavated materials
encroaching onto adjoining properties. Set up monitor points for controlling
noise, vibration, settlement and lateral movement imposed on adjoining
properties as directed by SO.
TEMPORARY WORKS AND SERVICES

Location of
Temporary
Works

1.24

Obtain approval from the SO and utility undertakings where necessary for
the location of spoil heaps, temporary roads, services, temporary buildings,
latrines and the like.

Access and roads

1.25

Provide and maintain temporary access to the Site and working areas and
provide and maintain temporary roads, tracks, crossings and hardstandings
required for use by those engaged upon or in connection with the Works.
Comply with all the requirements of the relevant government departments
and authorities and relevant utility undertakings. Obtain authorization to
cross pavements and similar areas.
When using public roads for access purposes, co-operate with the relevant
government departments and authorities and others using such roads to
ensure that they are kept free from obstruction at all times and comply with
any restriction on access.

Drainage

1.26

Provide and maintain temporary channels, catchpits and drainage work to

keep the Site clear of water, silt or mud and prevent nuisance due to run-off
onto adjacent land.
Protect the Works and/or adjoining properties from being washed out by
rain, ensure effective diversion of stormwater and provide earth bunds or
sandbag barriers and/or any other temporary measure if necessary.

1-5

Section 1 Preliminaries

Before site water is directed into any public drain, obtain the approval of the
relevant government departments and authorities and comply with all
instructions. Provide temporary silt traps or other measures as may be
required and keep from blocking.
Watchmen

1.27

Keep efficient watchmen about the Site and on the Works, day and night.
Watch dogs shall be confined to the Site, be kept under control and properly
inoculated and licensed.

Site
accommodation
for contractor

1.28

Provide all necessary offices, mess rooms, drinking water, latrines and
washing facilities and the like for all workmen engaged upon the Works
including lighting, power, telephones, maintenance and cleaning.
On multi-storey buildings, provide one male and one female temporary
latrine accommodation on every third floor in approved locations and
maintain in a sanitary condition at all times.

Storage sheds

1.29

Provide temporary storage sheds. Partially completed buildings may be used

for storage with the permission of the SO.

Accommodation
for workmen

1.30

Workmen shall not be permitted to live on the Site except in particular and
stated circumstances.
When workmen are permitted to live on the Site, provide accommodation to
comply with the following minimum requirements:

Office for SO

1.31

(i)

Habitable floor area of 3.5 m2 per workman, with 3 m floor to ceiling

height. Window area to be 10% of floor area, with 33% to open for
ventilation.

(ii)

Kitchen constructed of fire resisting materials, located 6 m minimum

from any structure not of fire resisting materials. Provide cooking
slab with hood and chimney, or brick built cooking stoves with flues.
Floor to fall to drainage outlet.

(iii)

Ground floors of concrete or other approved material.

(iv)

Drinking water and ablution facilities.

(v)

Sufficient garbage bins, to be emptied daily.

(vi)

Provide all necessary fire fighting equipment and means of escape.

When specified, provide weatherproof office accommodation for the SO

and the SO's representatives, of sufficient strength and adequately braced
and anchored to resist typhoon conditions. Provide all facilities as specified
and separate toilet accommodation for the exclusive use of the SO and the
SO's representatives including all necessary lighting, power and water
services and maintain and keep in a clean condition.
When specified, provide a separate direct line telephone for the use of the
SO.
When specified, provide and install a room cooler heating unit or units of a
suitable capacity complete with all necessary wiring and switchgear and the
like and maintain in efficient working order.

Screens

1.32

Where work is carried out in, or adjacent to existing buildings, provide

protection against the spread of dust and other nuisances by means of dust
sheets, tarpaulins, boards and the like.

1-6

Section 1 Preliminaries

When specified, provide specially constructed dust-proof or sound

deadening screens or such other means as required by the relevant
government departments and authorities.
Hoardings and
gantries

1.33

Provide temporary fencing, barriers, guard rails, gangways, walkways, fans

and the like for protecting the public and others during the proper execution
of the Works.
When specified, provide hoardings or covered walkways with lighting as
required. All materials for hoardings, gantries and covers shall be submitted
for approval by the SO.

Scaffolding etc.

1.34

Provide all scaffolding including bamboo poles, fir poles, suitable brackets,
wooden planks, metal foil, tarpaulin sheets and other framing and covering
materials.
Ensure that all scaffolding, screens, coverings, screen framings and the like
are properly constructed, wedged, braced, secured and maintained in
accordance with best local practice. All materials shall be of good quality
and of adequate strength and stability to carry the loads to be sustained.

Signboards

1.35

When specified, provide a project signboard or boards including sign

writing in multi-coloured gloss finish over the completed board including
English letter and Chinese characters, artist's impressions or diagrammatic
plans and logos. Submit draft drawings for approval before painting.

Water

1.36

Provide an adequate temporary water supply for the Works and all Specialist
Works and for testing of installations where specified, obtained by metered
supply from Government mains where possible. If taken from a source other
than Government main supply, it shall be tested in accordance with BS EN
1008 when required by the SO. Make arrangements for storage, pumping
and distributing about the Site.

Lighting and
power

1.37

Provide an adequate temporary electricity supply and equipment for lighting

and power for the Works and all Specialist Works where and when
specified. Where a permanent supply is available, it may be used with the
permission of the SO subject to the cost being met by the Contractor.

Temporary
passenger lifts

1.38

When specified, provide temporary passenger lifts complying with all

current Regulations for the use of persons engaged in the execution of the
Works and all Specialist Works. Install the lifts in an approved location,
which shall not be in any permanent lift shaft and shall be ready for use in all
respects immediately the structural work is completed up to the 3rd floor
level.
Provide all power and maintenance and one full time operator to each lift.
Do not use passenger lifts for the movement of materials.

Maintenance of
Temporary
Works

1.39

Maintain, alter, adapt and move Temporary Works as necessary. Clear away
when no longer required and make good.
TEMPORARY WORKS (SCAFFOLD SYSTEM)

General

1.39.1

(i)

Temporary double layer scaffold (hereinafter referred to as the

Scaffold System) against the facade or perimeter of a structure or
building shall be constructed, as required, with working platforms
supported by two framed layers of vertical members (standards) tied
by cross members (bracings, transoms) and longitudinal members
(ledgers), and other ancillary members such as guard rails, toe

1-7

Section 1 Preliminaries

boards, access ladders, sloping catch-fans, safety screens, anchors,

support brackets, foundations and the like.

Codes and
standards

1.39.2

(ii)

Metal Scaffold System shall be a Scaffold System constructed, as

required, with working platform adequately supported and other
ancillary members including guard-rails, toe boards, access ladders,
sloping catch-fans, safety screens, anchors, support brackets,
foundation and the like; and all the structural members of the
scaffolding system shall be of metal construction.

(iii)

The Scaffold System shall provide a suitable and sufficient safe

means of access and workplace for carrying out work which cannot
be conveniently executed from the ground or from a floor in a
building, or from a ladder, etc.

(iv)

The Scaffold System shall be used for all construction, alteration,

repair and maintenance works. Unless otherwise specified and
subject to approval by the SO, other alternative scaffolding may be
used for screening purposes.

(v)

The Contractor shall be responsible for the design, planning and

co-ordination, transportation, fabrication, erection, maintenance,
alteration and dismantling of the Scaffold System.

The design, planning and co-ordination, transportation, fabrication, erection,

maintenance, alteration and dismantling of the Scaffold System shall comply
with:
(i)

Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance, Cap. 59;

(ii)

Occupational Safety and Health Ordinance, Cap. 509;

(iii)

Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations, Cap. 59I;

(iv)

Code of Practice for Bamboo Scaffolding Safety, issued by the

Labour Department (CPFBSS);

(v)

Code of Practice for Metal Scaffolding Safety, issued by the

Labour Department (CPFMSS);

(vi)

Guidance Notes on Safety at Work (Falsework - Prevention of

Collapse), issued by the Labour Department;

(vii)

Guidance Notes on Classification and Use of Safety Belts and their

Anchorage Systems, issued by the Labour Department;

(viii)

Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel, issued by the

Buildings Department;

(ix)

Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong 2004, issued by

the Buildings Department;

(x)

European Standard BS EN 12811-1; Temporary Works

Equipment Part 1: Scaffolds Performance requirements and
general design together with TG20.08 Technical guidance on the
use of BS EN 12811-1, and

(xi)

British Standard 5975 - Code of Practice for Temporary Works

Procedures and the Permissible Stress Design of Falsework.

1-8

Section 1 Preliminaries

The Guidelines on the Design and Construction of Bamboo Scaffolds, issued

by the Buildings Department, shall also be complied with while the CPFBSS
takes preference.
Materials for metal Scaffold System shall comply with the following
standards or other equivalent national / international standards approved by
the SO :

Submissions

1.39.3

(a)

BS 1139, Metal Scaffolding Part 1.2, Part 2.2, Part 4 and Part 6.

(b)

BS EN 39, Loose steel tubes for tube and coupler scaffolds.

Technical delivery conditions.

(c)

BS EN 74-1, Couplers, spigot pins and baseplates for use in

falsework and scaffolds Part 1: Couplers for tubes Requirements
and test procedures.

(d)

BS EN 74-2, Couplers, spigot pins and baseplates for use in

falsework and scaffolds Part 2: Special couplers Requirements
and test procedures.

(e)

BS EN 74-3, Couplers, spigot pins and baseplates for use in

falsework and scaffolds Part 3: Plain base plates and spigot pins
Requirements and test procedures.

(f)

BS EN 1004, Mobile access and working towers made of

prefabricated elements Materials, dimensions, design loads safety
and performance requirements.

(g)

BS EN 12810-1, Faade scaffolds made of prefabricated

components Part 1: Products specifications.

(i)

The Contractor shall submit for the consent of the SO the following
information in accordance with the CPFBSS and CPFMSS and
Guidelines on the Design and Construction of Bamboo Scaffolds,
issued by the Buildings Department, taking into account site and
project conditions 10 days prior to commencing the erection,
alteration or dismantling of the Scaffold System:
(a) The material specifications, test certificates, place of the origin,
and instructions and procedures supplied by the manufacturers
of the Metal Scaffold System;
(b) The intended or current use of the Scaffold System and a method
statement for the erection, alteration or dismantling of the same.
Working drawings for the Scaffold System as per Clause 1.39.4
of this Section shall be submitted with the method statement;
(c) For any portion of the Scaffold System which cantilevers up
from the top floor under construction, the method statement shall
include adequate tie and strut arrangement for the cantilevered
portion;
(d) The names, substantial training and practical experience of
the competent person, the trained workmen and the
professional engineer as referred to in CPFBSS and CPFMSS.

(ii)

The consent of the SO shall not relieve the Contractor of any duty or
responsibility under the Contract.

1-9

Section 1 Preliminaries

Design
requirements

1.39.4

(i)

The design and construction of the Scaffold System shall withstand a

combination of the following loading situations at all stages of
construction without causing overstressing, instability, bulging,
distortion, overturning, collapse, settlement or damage to any portion
of the Scaffold System or the supporting structure:
(a) Total weight of all members of the Scaffold System including all
the associated provisions e.g. working platforms, safety nets,
catch-fans etc;
(b) Construction and working loads including all traffic using the
Scaffold System; and
(c) Wind loads.

Construction

1.39.5

(ii)

For any segment of the Scaffold System exceeding 15 m in height or

if the bamboo Scaffold System does not conform with the prescribed
types of scaffolding in the CPFBSS or the Guidelines on the Design
and Construction of Bamboo Scaffolds issued by the Buildings
Department, the whole Scaffold System shall be designed and
approved by a Registered Professional Engineer who shall have
adequate relevant experience. Working drawings for the Scaffold
System shall be prepared, checked and endorsed by the Registered
Professional Engineer for submission to the SO.

(i)

The Scaffold System shall be constructed and maintained in

accordance with the following criteria:
(a) Provide firm and adequate supports to the Scaffold System at
appropriate locations. If steel brackets are used as scaffold
supports, their vertical spacing shall not exceed 15 m;
(b) Provide firm and adequate ties and struts for fastening the
Scaffold System securely onto the structure or building. All
temporary ties, fixing bolts and the like shall not be allowed to
remain within the specified concrete cover and shall be cut back
more than 40 mm (concrete cover for external elements) from
the surface of structural concrete;
(c) Provide firm and adequate longitudinal, transverse and diagonal
bracings to ensure the stability of the Scaffold System;
(d) Keep the space or clearance between working platforms and the
structure or building as small as possible but it shall not exceed
300 mm wide;
(e) Where scaffolding is provided for high rise building or structure
exceeding 15 m in height, provide a protective canopy of
nominal width 3600 mm at a maximum height of 6 m above
ground along the edges of the structure at locations as directed
by the SO;
(f) Provide safety nets comprising nylon mesh of minimum 15 core
threads with grids not more than 12 mm or of similar approved
type covering the entire face of the building. The safety nets
shall be tautly fixed with minimum lap of 450 mm in any
direction;
(g) Provide a sloping catch-fan at not more than 15 m vertical
intervals to give a minimum horizontal projection coverage of

1-10

Section 1 Preliminaries

1500 mm. The sloping catch-fan shall consist of timber

boarding covered by a layer of galvanised metal sheeting, both
of adequate thickness to capture and retain falling debris;
(h) Provide access/egress to and from the walkway at appropriate
locations;
(i) Ensure that the sloping catch-fans and safety nets remain in
place until all works are completed;
(j) Ensure that the Scaffold System will not be overloaded at any
time. The Scaffold System including the sloping catch-fans,
safety nets, walkways, protective canopies and the like shall be
kept clear of debris; and
(k) When plastic sheet is used to cover the Scaffold System, the
Scaffold System shall be reinforced to withstand strong winds.
Flame retardant sheeting shall be used at locations as specified
by the SO. Obstruction of natural ventilation and lighting by
sheeting should be avoided as far as possible.
(ii)

During any inspection of the works, if the SO is of the opinion that

part or whole of the Scaffold System is unstable, insufficient or
requires modification in the interests of safety, the SO may, by notice
in writing require the Contractor to modify the Scaffold System and
the Contractor shall comply within a reasonable time.

(iii)

On completion of the Works, the Contractor shall clean and make

good the structure or building disturbed or damaged by the Scaffold
System.

Management

1.39.6

The management and procedures for safety and health on scaffolding work
including safe erection/maintenance/alteration/dismantling of the Scaffold
System shall comply with Section 4 and 6 of CPFBSS and CPFMSS unless
otherwise approved by the SO.

Technical
requirements for
safety in bamboo
scaffolding

1.39.7

(i)

When bamboo scaffolding is used for the Scaffold System, the

Contractors attention is drawn to Section 5 of CPFBSS.

(ii)

Unless otherwise approved by the SO, all bamboo scaffolding shall

be in accordance with the following drawings:
(a) For a structure or building not exceeding 15 m in height, the
Scaffold System shall be in accordance with Drawing No. 3 at
Annex A.
(b) For a structure or building exceeding 15 m in height, the
Scaffold System shall be in accordance with Drawing No. 1 and
2 at Annex A.

(iii)

Walkways shall be constructed as follows:

(a) 400 mm (minimum) wide continuous walkway formed by 200
mm (minimum) x 25 mm thick close timber boarding as referred
in Figure 2 of CPFBSS, and
(b) 25 mm thick toe-boards 200 mm (minimum) high at each side of
walkways from which a person or any object may fall more than
a height of 2 m.

1-11

Section 1 Preliminaries

Technical
requirements for
safety in metal
scaffolding

1.39.8

(iv)

No bamboo scaffolding shall be stood for use over 24 months in a

construction site. All the overdue bamboo scaffolding deemed by
SO shall be dismantled and removed off site. Erect a new bamboo
scaffolding if deemed necessary.

(i)

When metal scaffolding is used for the Scaffold System, the

materials, foundations and erection / maintenance / alteration /
dismantling for the Scaffold System shall comply with the technical
requirements for safety in metal scaffolding in Section 5 of
CPFMSS.

(ii)

If the Scaffold System is constructed of metal, proper equi-potential

bonding and lightning protection must be provided.

ADMINISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE

Site meetings

1.40

Attend site meetings when required by the SO. Inform Nominated

Sub-contractors, Specialist Contractors and utilities undertaking when their
presence is required.

General
attendance

1.41

Provide attendance of one trade upon another.

Attendance on
Sub-contractors
and Specialists

1.42

Provide the following attendances to all Nominated Sub-contractors,

Specialist Contractors, Government Departments and utilities undertaking:
(i)

Every facility to move about the Site in the legitimate pursuit of

their work;

(ii)

The use of such plant, ladders, scaffolding or staging as may have

been provided or erected by the Contractor, provided that there is
no obligation to retain any such plant, ladders, scaffolding or
staging longer than is necessary for the Contractor's own use;

(iii)

Having regard to the nature of the Site and the Works, sufficient
space as required within the Site or within the Works under
construction for work areas and storage sheds for the storage of
materials and plant brought onto the Site. Such sheds shall be
provided, erected and cleared away by the Nominated
Sub-contractors, Specialist Contractors, Government Departments
and utility undertakings;

(iv)

Adequate temporary water and electrical supplies at convenient

positions throughout the Works under construction and to work and
storage areas and surroundings within the Site for lighting, security
lighting, operation of power tools and testing and commissioning
up to and including final acceptance of the installations by the SO;

(v)

The use of the telephone, mess rooms, latrines and the usual
conveniences of a building site;

(vi)

Such assistance as is necessary in the unloading of plant, goods and

materials brought onto the Site;

(vii)

Such watchmen guards as are reasonably necessary to safeguard

the Site and particularly storage areas. In this connection Specialist
Contractors will be required to provide reasonable access to, or
knowledge of, their materials stored on the Site in order that an
adequate service can be provided for the safe custody of such
materials;

1-12

Section 1 Preliminaries

(viii)

Such service as is necessary for the clearing away of rubbish as it

accumulates;

(ix)

Any making good on completion of work disturbed by the use or

removal of the above facilities.

Make arrangements with Nominated Sub-contractors, Specialist

Contractors, Government Departments and utilities undertaking as regards
the following:
(i)

The time and manner of the execution of their work or delivery of

their materials;

(ii)

Full particulars of their requirements for chases, recesses,

openings, holes, cuttings on formwork and the like and execute the
same including providing and fixing or obtaining from others and
fixing all slots, sleeves and the like required;

(iii)

The obtaining of approval for any cutting to structural work;

(iv)

The supplying of all dimensions and other information necessary to

ensure that their work is correctly executed or that correct goods or
materials are supplied.

Carry out all work necessitated by any failure in the above arrangements or
pay the Employer all expenses properly incurred as a result of such failure.
When specified, provide temporary electricity supply for testing for
Nominated Sub-contractors and Specialist Contractors. Where permanent
supply is available, it may be approved for use for such testing, subject to the
cost being met by the Contractor.
When specified, provide special attendance on Nominated Sub-contractors
and Specialist Contractors.
When specified, co-ordinate the programme to suit any advance completion
requirements to suit work by Specialist Contractors.
Co-ordination of
services

1.43

Generally the Drawings for services are schematic and only indicate the
approximate location of the various services. Plan the sequence of the
programme and co-ordinate the physical deployment of all services included
in the Works and the Specialist Works, if any, in accordance with the
Drawings and good practice. All services shall be installed in the correct
sequence and position. All cleaning, adjustment and control points shall be
readily accessible and that loops, cross-overs and the like shall be kept to a
minimum.

Attendance on
materials
supplied by the
Employer

1.44

Where items are to be obtained from the Employer:

(i)

Take delivery from Government Logistics Department;

(ii)

Load, transport to the Site, unload, check, examine, take to store

and protect;

(iii)

Take from store, distribute, hoist and fix in position;

(iv)

Return surplus items to Government Logistics Department;

(v)

Return all crates and other packings as required to Government

Logistics Department.

1-13

Section 1 Preliminaries

MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Material

1.45

Materials for inclusion in the permanent works shall be new unless

otherwise specified.

Quality generally

1.46

Materials and workmanship shall generally be consistent with good building

practice in Hong Kong and shall comply with the Regulations and the
relevant BS, BS EN or CP unless otherwise specified and/or approved.

Manufacturer's
recommendations

1.47

Handle, store and fix each material in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations. Submit copies of these recommendations to the SO
when requested before work is commenced.

Compliance with
standards

1.48

When specified or when requested by the SO, provide test certificates or

obtain from the manufacturer's guarantees that materials specified are to a
BS or other internationally recognized standard.

Specialist work

1.49

When specified, specialist work shall be carried out by a firm whose name is
included on the appropriate DEVB List or the list of approved specialist
contractors included in the Contract.

Specialist
materials

1.50

When specified, specialist materials shall be obtained from a firm whose

name is included on the appropriate DEVB List or the list of approved
specialist suppliers included in the Contract

Single source

1.51

When a choice of manufacturer is permitted for any material, either obtain

the entire quantity required to complete the work from one manufacturer or,
if a change in the source of supply is contemplated after deliveries of the
material has begun, obtain approval for such a change in the source of
supply.

Choice of
material

1.52

When a choice of type or size of material is allowed (e.g. glazed wall tiles,
mosaic tiles), the same type and size selected by the Contractor shall be used
throughout for all work in like locations.

Sample of
materials

1.53

Submit samples of all materials required for the Works as the SO may
reasonably direct and do not confirm orders until approval has been
obtained. Keep approved samples on the Site for comparison with materials
used in the Works. When there is a choice of material, colour or texture,
samples shall be submitted for approval.

Samples of
finished work

1.54

Make samples of finished work as specified or as required by the SO and

obtain approval before proceeding with the work. Retain samples on the
Site for comparison with the completed work.

Mix proportions

1.55

Unless otherwise specified, mix proportions shall be by volume.

Tests

1.56

Make tests on materials and workmanship as specified or as instructed by

the SO.
Provide test samples under the supervision of the SO and carry out tests by
the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) or when required, by an independent
body accredited by the Hong Kong Laboratory Accreditation Scheme
(HOKLAS) (hereinafter referred to as the Accredited Laboratory).
Submit sampling and analysis methodology, including name of the
laboratory to be appointed and procedures from collection of test samples to
submission of test results, for the SOs approval prior to conducting any
tests. Declare in writing that the Accredited Laboratory appointed has no
affiliation as a legal entity to the Contractor and its sub-contractors.

1-14

Section 1 Preliminaries

Appropriately mark and keep selected samples under the charge of the SO
securely under lock before delivery to the laboratory.
With the approval of the SO or the SOs Representative either to:
(i)

(ii)

appoint representative(s) from the Accredited Laboratory or

through collection service operated by the Public Works
Laboratories (PWL) to collect test samples on site; or
arrange the Contractors representative(s) to collect test samples on
site under the escort of the SO or the SOs Representative.

Ensure that the agreed representative(s) has strictly followed all the
procedures stated in the approved methodology. Test samples collected shall
be kept in sealed container inaccessible to unauthorized persons at all times.
Test results shall be submitted directly from the laboratory to the SO in
sealed envelopes, not via the Contractor.
Submit samples of materials, carry out tests and obtain approval before the
materials are used in the Works.
Test cube
security cages

1.57

Provide sufficient concrete test cube security cages size 1.25 x 1.00 x 0.70 m
high constructed of mild steel framing with mesh sides, hinged and lockable
top, plywood bottom and shelves.

Protection from
weather

1.58

Cover up, protect and secure the Works and the Specialist Works from
damage by inclement weather, including providing sufficient staff, adequate
plant and any other requirements necessary to ensure protection during
typhoon and heavy rainstorm conditions.

Removal of water

1.59

Keep the Site and all trenches and excavations thereon free from all water
arising from rain, springs, drains, percolating water and the like by pumping
or otherwise. Ensure that such removal of water has no detrimental effect on
adjacent property.

Cleanliness

1.60

Store materials and plant neatly, remove rubbish and debris as they
accumulate, and keep the Site and the Works clean and tidy.

Protection from
overloading

1.61

Protect the Works from damage due to overloading. Obtain details of design
loads from the SO.

Drying the
Works

1.62

When specified, provide temporary equipment, fuel and attendance for

drying and controlling the humidity of the Works.

Work at
completion

1.63

Clean the Works thoroughly inside and outside and leave the Works without
damage and ready for occupation on completion, including polishing floors,
windows and similar finishes.

Security at
completion

1.64

Leave the Works secure, with all accesses locked. Account for all keys,
which should be appropriately tagged, and transfer these to the SO.

Tolerances

1.65

Unless otherwise specified, the maximum permitted tolerances in

construction shall be in accordance with BS 5606.
The structural limits for lift shafts at any level shall be in accordance with
BS 5655:Pt. 6, where applicable.

Restrictions on
the use of
hardwood

1.66

The use of hardwood shall not be permitted for the construction of site
accommodation, storage sheds, screens, hoardings, covered walkways,
signboards, side supports to excavation, propping to formwork, etc. in
Clauses 1.28, 1.29, 1.30, 1.31, 1.32, 1.33, 1.35, 3.08(i) and 6.01. The

1-15

Section 1 Preliminaries

Contractor is free to submit for SOs approval proposed alternatives to

hardwood which will meet the same protection and aesthetic standards. If
the proposals are subsequently not approved, the Contractor shall be directed
by the SO to use other acceptable alternatives.
Conducting of
compliance tests
and surveys on
site

1.67

Compliance tests conducted on site on structural works shall be carried out

by the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) or when required, by an
Accredited Laboratory.
Surveys conducted on site shall be carried out by a Surveyor with
recognized expertise subject to the prior approval of the SO.
The Accredited Laboratory / Surveyor shall not be a holding company, an
associated company, a subsidiary company or a related party of the
Contractor and / or the piling Specialist Sub-contractor and shall not have
any financial stake in the Works to be tested or surveyed.
Test and survey reports shall be submitted directly from the laboratory /
Surveyor to the SO in sealed envelopes, not via the Contractor.

1-16

Section 1 Preliminaries
ANNEX A

1-17

Section 1 Preliminaries
ANNEX A

1-18

Section 1 Preliminaries
ANNEX A

1-19

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

SECTION 2
DEMOLITION, SITE CLEARANCE &
ALTERATIONS
Regulations,
Ordinances,
Codes of
Practice &
Practice Notes

2.01

Comply with all relevant legislation, Codes of Practice and Practice Notes.
Particular attention is drawn to the following:
(i)

Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings issued by Buildings

Department.

(ii)

Code of Practice for Site Supervision and Technical

Memorandum for Supervision Plan issued by Buildings
Department.

(iii)

Guidelines for Selective Demolition and On Site Sorting issued by

Civil Engineering and Development Department.

(iv)

Building (Demolition Works) Regulations.

(v)

Building (Administration) Regulations.

(vi)

Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations.

(vii)

Noise Control Ordinance.

(viii)

Air Pollution Control Ordinance.

(ix)

Water Pollution Control Ordinance.

(x)

Factories and Industrial Undertakings Ordinance.

(xi)

Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Lifting Appliances and

Lifting Gear) Regulations.

(xii)

Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Noise at Work)

Regulations.

(xiii)

Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Safety Officers and Safety

Supervisors) Regulations.

(xiv)

Air Pollution Control (Construction Dust) Regulation.

(xv)

Noise Control (Construction Work) Regulation.

(xvi)

The prevailing Buildings Department Practice Notes for

Authorized Persons and Registered Structural Engineers.

(xvii)

The prevailing Buildings Department Practice Notes for

Registered Contractors.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION

Specialist
Contractor
for Demolition

2.02

The demolition works shall be carried out by a Registered Specialist

Contractor for Demolition (RSC) on the Specialist Contractors list
maintained by the Buildings Department.

2-1

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

Registered
Structural
Engineer

2.03

The Contractor shall appoint a Registered Structural Engineer (RSE)

registered under the Buildings Ordinance for the preparation and
endorsement of the method statements, with drawings and design
calculations, Site Safety Supervision Plan (SSSP) for the Contractor's
Stream and any other submissions as required by SO. The duties and roles
of the RSE should include but not limited to:
(i)

Take up the full design responsibility for method statements and

all related drawings and calculations.

(ii)

Assume the role of Contractors Representative and grade T5 of

TCP in the Contractors Stream under Site Safety Supervision Plan
(SSSP).

(iii)

Check that assumptions made in the design of temporary works

and method statements are validated on Site.

(iv)

Prepare a risk assessment report with the Safety Officer including

an inspection schedule for all staff such as RSE, site engineer,
Safety Officer, site agent, site supervisor/foreman on all critical
activities in demolition works.

(v)

Pay regular site visits for proper control of the works and submit
reports after each visit to certify the work is safe.

(vi)

Carry out inspections on other activities which, in his/her

professional judgement, are critical and require close supervision.

(vii)

Should there be any formation and/or alteration to any slopes

and/or retaining walls as a result of the demolition works in the
vicinity of the work sites which require geotechnical submissions
under current statutory requirements, the RSE shall be responsible
to arrange a Registered Professional Engineer (Geotechnical)
(RPE(G)) for all necessary geotechnical submissions to
Geotechnical Engineering Office (GEO) as stipulated in DEVB
Technical Circular and other relevant authorities for comments
and approval prior to demolition of any structure in the vicinity of
the affected slopes and/or retaining walls. All geotechnical
submissions shall be prepared by a Registered Professional
Engineer (Geotechnical) (RPE(G)) who shall be under direct
supervision of the RSE. The RPE(G) shall also be required to
update the slope registrations and Maintenance Manuals to all
affected slopes and/or retaining walls with GEO where necessary.
The RSE shall ensure that all geotechnical submissions and site
supervisions are made in accordance with all current statutory
requirements of GEO and are acceptable to the relevant checking
divisions of GEO.

SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION

Submission of
Documents

2.04

Submission of documents for SO approval shall be two months before

commencement of demolition works or other specified period. The
documents shall include, inter alia, the following:
(i)

Demolition Plans and Method Statements.

(ii)

Project Safety Plan and the associated Risk Assessment Report.

(iii)

Site Safety Supervision Plan.

2-2

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

(iv)

Environmental Management Plan.

(v)

Details of hoardings, covered walkways, catch platforms,

catchfans and all necessary precautionary measures in accordance
with the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings issued by
the Buildings Department.

(vi)

Mechanical plant & equipment list.

(vii)

Details of supervisory staff.

All the above plans and reports shall be prepared in accordance with the
requirements of the Code of Practice for Demolition of Buildings. Items (i)
to (v) shall be prepared and certified by the RSE.
Pay particular attention to detailed proposals for the demolition of the
specific items including but not limited to:

Demolition Plan
and Method
Statement

2.05

(i)

Cantilevered canopies and balconies.

(ii)

External wall, parapet and features.

(iii)

Scaffolding systems with more than 1.5m projection.

(iv)

Any other structure as stated in the drawings or directed by SO.

Prepare a Demolition Plan in accordance with the requirements of the

Buildings Ordinance, Building (Administration) Regulations, Code of
Practice for Demolition of Buildings and the relevant Practice Notes issued
by the Buildings Department, and shall include a comprehensive Method
Statement prepared and certified by the RSE. The comprehensive Method
Statement of the demolition work shall include but not limited to the
following details:
(i)

A scaled plan showing the locations of the structures to be

demolished and their distances to the adjacent buildings,
structures, streets and significant street furniture. The plan should
also show the location of the site video cameras as stipulated in
item 2.20. The plan should be fully dimensioned with levels and
provide sections where appropriate. If possible, site photographs
should be included as much as possible.

(ii)

An appraisal of the structures to be demolished including an

assessment on the structural condition of the part of the structures
that are relevant to the demolition works, site condition and
adjacent properties. Any potential hazard that may be associated
with the proposed demolition works should be included.

(iii)

A description of the proposed methods used to demolish the

different parts of the structure. This should include descriptions of
the equipment used, the schedule, sequence and proposed
procedures for the demolition. Detailed instructions for
demolishing special features and critical areas that may affect the
safety of the public and on-site personnel should be included.
Specific precautionary steps for identifying these features should
also be included. The use of graphics could be particularly useful
to convey the message.

2-3

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

(iv)

A method statement includes specification and details for

precautionary measures, which are essential to safety. The type of
precautionary features should meet the requirement of the
demolition method selected and the site conditions. These features
should include scaffolds, catch platform, temporary supporting
systems to the part of the structure to be demolished and bracing
for weakened structural elements.

(v)

A proposed plan for conveyance of debris, on-site management

and off-site transportation of the debris. Anticipated traffic
condition should also be discussed to allow better planning for
off-site transportation. On-site storage of debris shall be specified.

(vi)

A method statement includes detailed plan for removal and

disposal of on-site hazardous materials, if any, and disposal in
compliance with the environmental protection regulations.

(vii)

Access route for handling emergency situations, such as accident

should be provided.

(viii)

Inspection and maintenance frequency for the precautionary

measures and on site equipment should be included.

(ix)

A method statement should also include the storage and handling

of flammable materials that would be used in the demolition
process.

(x)

A suggested scheme of on site supervision and technical support

for ensuring all works are carried out safely.

(xi)

Means to reduce dust, noise and vibration impacts.

(xii)

Detailed design for temporary supporting systems to support

machines working on the building and protection of any structure
that may be affected by the demolition.

(xiii)

Periodic inspection schedule on adjacent structures that would

potentially be affected by the demolition to evaluate their
structural conditions.

(xiv)

If the project required temporary closure of traffic, a traffic plan

with detailed locations of the temporary traffic sign.

STAFF REQUIREMENTS FOR DEMOLITION

Technically
Competent
Persons

2.06

Employ such number of technically competent persons (TCP) for the

demolition works as required, comprising not less than one person of each
grade of TCP from T1 to T5 inclusive whereas the T1 and T3 grade TCP
must be in full time, to carry out full time site supervision. The TCP should
have obtained the required qualification (a relevant certificate, diploma,
degree or registered professional engineer) and experience in the structural,
civil or building discipline and have at least the number of years of relevant
site experience in accordance with the Technical Memorandum for
Supervision Plans and Code of Practice for Site Safety Supervision issued
by the Buildings Department.
The TCP(s) shall prepare daily site supervision reports to be endorsed by the
Contractors Site Agent.

2-4

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

Site Engineer

2.07

Employ a site engineer, who shall be a Registered Professional Engineer in

the structural, civil or building discipline with the relevant experience.
Submit the particulars of the site engineer, including name, qualification
and previous experience, to the SO for approval within 7 days after
commencement of the contract.
The site engineer shall conduct site supervision, oversee the entire process
of the demolition works and prepare site supervision reports at each of the
following stages. Such report should be submitted to the SO after
completion of each stage of demolition works and before the
commencement of the next stage of demolition works. These stages shall
include:
(i)

When all site preparation works, including hoardings, covered

walkway, scaffolding, catch fans, protective wire netting, dust
screens, catch platforms, safety barriers have been erected; and

(ii)

When all temporary works for demolition of a particular structure

have been erected prior to actual demolition; and

(iii)

At any stages identified by the SO as critical stage from the

Demolition Plan submitted by the Contractor.

Registered
Electrical Worker

2.08

Appoint a relevant registered electrical worker of appropriate trade to

certify that the structures have been appropriately electrically disconnected
from all electricity supplies and the supply companys incoming supply
connected to the structures has been de-energized. The appointed
Registered Electrical Worker shall supervise and certify all electrical works
meet the relevant regulations during the contract.

Plant and
Equipment
Operator

2.09

Operator of powered mechanical plant or equipment used in demolition

work shall have at least 3 years experience in operating the particular plant
or equipment; and shall have completed a training course in Demolition of
Building Course for Plant Operators organized by the Construction
Industry Council Training Academy and obtained the relevant certificate or
other equivalent training and certificate issued by a recognized examining
body; and operate under the immediate supervision of a TCP of the
demolition works.
Submit the personal particulars, qualifications and experience of the
operators of powered mechanical plant or equipment proposed to be used in
the demolition works in accordance with Regulation 31 of the Building
(Administration) Regulations, to the SO before the commencement of the
demolition works. The Contractor shall notify the SO within 7 days of any
change in the appointment of the operator and provide personal particulars,
qualifications and experience of the new operator.

Demolition
Workers

2.10

Employ workmen who shall be registered demolition workers or registered

worker of appropriate trades and under supervision of a TCP. These
demolition workers shall have attended the Safety Training Course for
Construction Workers of Specified Trades (the "Silver Card" course)
organized by CICTA for demolition works, and possessed the relevant valid
silver card issued by CICTA. All workers involved in the demolition works
should also have received other relevant safety trainings such as proper
procedure for the use of PPE, working at height safety etc.

2-5

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

VIDEO RECORDING SYSTEM FOR DEMOLITION

Video Recording
System

2.11

When specified, provide and maintain two color video cameras for each
building with resolution not less than 704 x 480 and with appropriate view
angle coverage, light sensitivity and automatic focus & aperture, TV
monitors and video recording systems, and with all necessary accessories
including the recording media for transmitting and recording, to capture the
entire demolition process. The video recording systems and video records
shall be kept in a secured place to be agreed with the SO. The video signals
from the cameras shall also be real-time connected or transmitted to the site
office of the SO and be viewed and inspected by the SO with a TV monitor,
equipped with switching system to each camera. The video cameras shall
be installed at strategic locations as directed by the SO and be securely
protected so that the entire demolition process including the movement of
debris and the overall sequence of demolition can be captured. The video
records shall be kept for inspection for at least 14 days. Post sufficient
notices at conspicuous positions to notify the affected persons including the
workers, the staff and the general public about the purpose of video
recording system in accordance with Data Protection Principles set out in
the Personal Data (Privacy) Ordinance.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL DURING DEMOLITION

Noise Level
Control

2.12

The noise level generated from the work site and measured at the nearby
noise sensitive receivers shall not exceed the limits as specified.
Provide all necessary equipment and labours to monitor and to record the
noise levels measured at the nearby premises and any other locations to be
agreed by the SO at least twice daily and any other time when required by
the SO. The monitoring records of the noise measurements shall be kept on
site for SO inspection.

Water Pollution
Control

2.13

Provide, operate and maintain all necessary water pollution control system
on site and plan the works such that discharge and deposit of effluents
generated from the demolition operations shall be controlled as specified.

Air Pollution
Control

2.14

Provide, operate and maintain all necessary air pollution control system on
site and plan the works to minimize generation of dust and to minimize the
spread of dust to beyond the site.

Coordination with
neighbour

2.15

Adopt demolition operation that produces the least loud noise or dust
nuisance to occupants of the surrounding buildings. Co-ordinate with the
management of the neighbouring premises and all other concerned parties
with report to the SO, and schedule the works to suit those hours that will
cause the least disturbance.
PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES DURING DEMOLITION

Protection to
adjacent buildings
and structures

2.16

Provide adequate support and protection to adjacent buildings and

structures, pedestrian subways, building services installations including all
underground cables and pipe works within or in the vicinity of the site.
Any area, if unduly damaged, shall be restored and made good to its original
conditions at the expense of the Contractor.

2-6

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

METHODS OF DEMOLITION
Top Down
Method

2.17

Top down method shall be adopted unless specified otherwise.

Hydraulic
Concrete Crusher

2.18

Hydraulic Concrete Crusher shall be used for demolition of reinforced

concrete structures unless otherwise approved by SO.

Concrete Breaker

2.19

Unless specified otherwise, the use of percussive type of concrete breaker is

allowed during part of the demolition process. Submit proposal on limiting
the noise generation for SOs approval. Subject to EPD approval on noise
permit, the time allowed for using any percussive type of concrete breaker
shall be agreed by the SO.

Saw Cut Method

2.20

To isolate the vibration and noise generated during demolition being

transmitted to the adjacent premises adjacent to the site, the Contractor can
use Saw-Cut method or other approved methods to separate the structures to
be demolished from the structures to be retained before demolition. Submit
method statement for forming such separation joints, including temporary
support and shoring, for SO approval.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLITION WASTE DURING DEMOLITION

Removal of
Demolition Waste

2.21

Except otherwise directed, all salvage materials become the property of the
Contractor and shall be removed from the Site expeditiously as the works
proceed. The storage, segregation and disposal of demolition waste shall be
in accordance with the guidelines stipulated in the Guidelines for Selective
Demolition and On-Site Sorting and the contract requirements. The
handling of demolition waste shall follow in the Environmental
Management Plan prepared by the Contractor.
A complete record is required to be kept on site and regularly updated on the
disposal, reuse and recycling of all demolition waste with respect to their
dates of disposal and the quantities involved.
All hazardous waste discovered shall be handled by licensed contractor
registered in EPD listing and approved by the SO.

Environmental
Management Plan

Disposal of C&D
Materials

2.22

2.23

Environmental Management Plan shall, in conjunction with the Demolition

Plan, provide all necessary details including but not limited to the
following:
(i)

Method of handling demolished building debris.

(ii)

Routing and movement of debris from each floor to on grade

holding area prior to leaving the site.

(iii)

Means of transportation of debris off the site.

(iv)

Time and frequency of debris disposal off site.

(v)

Record scheme on the tonnage of each truck load, truck licence

plate, drivers name, trip tickets and location of dump site.

Disposal of C&D materials shall comply with the Particular Specification

on Environmental Management and the Waste Disposal (Charges for
Disposal of Construction Waste) Regulation currently enforced.

2-7

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

CERTIFICATION AND SUBMISSION UPON COMPLETION OF

DEMOLITION
Certification

2.24

Upon completion of the demolition works, the Contractor shall certify the
completion of the demolition works in accordance with the Buildings
Ordinance, Regulations and the Demolition Plan. The certification shall be
endorsed by the RSE.

As-built Records

2.25

Provide a complete list of as-built drawings with drawing number/reference

and brief description for computer diskettes. The drawings shall show the
final boundary of the site with fencing, ground features, levels and as-built
external storm water drains, where the surface water is connected to the
storm water drainage system outside the site.
PRELIMINARY WORKS AND PRECAUTIONARY MEASURES FOR
DEMOLITION, SITE CLEARANCE AND ALTERATIONS

Survey

2.26

Carry out detailed survey including existing services, drainage systems and
building services installations.

Building Services
and Drainage
System

2.27

The Contractor shall ensure that existing water supplies, drainage and
building services provisions of adjacent buildings and areas will not be
affected.
Report to the SO for directions upon discovery of any previously hidden or
unidentified services/cables. Any unknown cables/pipes so discovered
shall be carefully exposed by hand tools or as directed by the SO.
Provide all temporary water supplies and drainage connections to any
adjacent buildings affected prior to disconnecting the existing supplies in
the buildings.
Coordinate all utility companies and organizations such as power supply
companies, telecommunications network services operators, town gas
supply company, liquefied petroleum gas supply company and Water
Supplies Department and other parties appointed by the SO to carry out
disconnection, diversion, relocation or removal of their equipment and
installations.

Preliminary
Works

2.28

Seal all abandoned sewer and drainage connections of the existing

manholes and associated underground drain pipes as directed by the SO.
Remove all glazed sashes and doors from the relevant parts of the structures.
Remove all hazardous materials including asbestos.
Displace the trapped gas within all town gas systems and liquefied
petroleum gas systems and certify that they are free of combustible gas in
accordance with the Regulation and requirements specified by the
authorities.

Precautionary
Measures

2.29

The necessary precautionary measures shall comply with the requirements

in Clause 2.01 including but not limited to the following:
(i)

Erection of hoarding, covered walkway and catch platform

including temporary lighting according to drawings.

(ii)

Design and erection of scaffoldings, screen covers and catch-fans.

2-8

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

(iii)

Design and erection of temporary supports to the elements of

structure to be demolished, in particular, the cantilevered canopies
and covered walkway and the external parapet wall and features
and other elements as specified by SO.

(iv)

Protection of adjacent properties, structures and services.

(v)

Use of tarpaulin material as specified by SO.

(vi)

Provide precautionary measures for disused manholes and

underground voids.

Certification of
Precautionary
Measures

2.30

Upon completion of the precautionary works, including hoarding, covered

walkway, scaffolding, catch fans, protective wire nettings, dust screens,
catch platform, safety barrier, and the like, the Contractor shall certify the
completion of the precautionary works in accordance with the provisions of
the Buildings Ordinance, Regulations and Demolition Plan.
The
certification shall be endorsed by the RSE.

Post-Demolition
Precautions

2.31

After completion of demolition, reinstate the site to the conditions as shown

in drawings. Unless specified otherwise, the following precautionary
measures shall be adopted:
(i)

The site shall be leveled and cleared of any debris. Adequate

drainage shall be provided.

(ii)

If the new development is not immediately commenced, the site

shall be completely enclosed as shown in drawings.

(iii)

Provide supports to adjacent building structures, weather-proofing

and stabilization of exposed party walls shall be completed. A final
inspection by RSE on the supports of adjacent structures shall be
conducted to ensure satisfactory and safe conditions. If temporary
shoring remains on site, inspection and maintenance shall be
continued until the temporary shoring is removed or replaced by
permanent supports.

(iv)

Any excavation shall be braced and stabilized.

(v)

For sloping sites, and/or sites with retaining wall supporting

ground, the following additional precautionary measures shall be
included:
(a)

The ground surface shall be sealed up to prevent water

infiltration.

(b)

Any unstable structures and ground shall be stabilized.

SAFETY MEASURES FOR DEMOLITION, SITE CLEARANCE AND

ALTERATIONS
Hoarding and
Covered Walkway

2.32

Provide and maintain the hoardings and covered walkways as shown on the
drawings.

Safety Protection

2.33

Provide and erect necessary and sufficient safety protection such as

scaffolding, catch fans, protective wire netting, dust screens, catch
platforms, safety barriers, additional hoardings and covered walkways etc.
for the safety and convenience of traffic, passers-by, users of adjacent
premises, or workmen employed on the Works. All safety protection shall
be erected prior to the commencement of the demolition operation and shall

2-9

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

be maintained in good conditions until the completion of the demolition

work.
Fire or Explosion

2.34

Take precautions to prevent fire or explosion caused by gas, vapour,

electricity or any other source. Take appropriate precautions when
removing tanks or pipes which may have contained flammable liquids or
gases.

Disused drain

2.35

Take care to allow disused drains to vent built-up gas before allowing
workmen to carry out works below ground level.

Underground
voids

2.36

Provide vent pipes to underground tanks to vent built-up gases and vapours.
TREE PRESERVATION AND PROTECTION FOR DEMOLITION,
SITE CLEARANCE AND ALTERATIONS

Precautions
generally

2.37

The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Clauses 25.69 to

25.69.14 on tree preservation and protection to ensure that the demolition,
site clearance and alteration works will not damage the preserved trees.
Regular cleansing to keep off dust accumulation on foliage; and works to
the satisfaction of the SO.

Precautions prior
to demolition, site
clearance and
alteration

2.38

The Contractor shall commence demolition, site clearance and alteration

works only after the Contractors compliance with the requirements
stipulated to be completed prior to commencing site clearance, demolition,
construction of permanent or temporary works, and any other site
operations which may affect the trees. These requirements include but are
not limited to:
(i)

Installation of tree identification labeling or marking system

pursuant to Clause 25.69.2.3(c),

(ii)

Agreement of the SO to the limits of site clearance pursuant to

Clause 25.69.2.4,
Erection of temporary protective fencing pursuant to Clause
25.69.3(c), and

(iii)

(iv)

Precautions
during demolition,
site clearance and
alteration

2.39

Erection of temporary protective armouring and application of

temporary protective mulching pursuant to Clause 25.69.3(h).

During demolition, site clearance and alteration works, the Contractor shall
comply with the requirements on the restrictive use of the preserved trees
and their Tree Protection Zones (TPZs) and the control measures for works
within the TPZs. These requirements include but are not limited to:
(i)

Restrictive use of the preserved trees and their TPZs pursuant to

Clauses 25.69.2.5(a), (c), (d) and (f), and

(ii)

Control measures for changes in ground levels, excavation

including trenching, and drilling within the TPZs pursuant to
Clauses 25.69.4 to 25.69.8.

CLEARING WEEDS FOR DEMOLITION, SITE CLEARANCE AND

ALTERATIONS
Clearing weeds
generally

2.40

When instructed by the SO, the Contractor shall identify any Mikania
micrantha as well as any other unwanted plants specified as noxious weeds
by the SO and remove these plants from the Site as part of the site clearance
work. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements in Clause
25.95(b) when clearing these unwanted plants.

2-10

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

Clearing Mikania
micrantha

2.41

When clearing Mikania micrantha, the Contractor shall follow the technical
guidance in the latest version of Nature Conservation Practice Note No. 01
Clearing Mikania promulgated by the Agriculture, Fisheries and
Conservation Department.
ASBESTOS INVESTIGATION, REMOVAL FOR DEMOLITION, SITE
CLEARANCE AND ALTERATIONS

Asbestos
containing
materials

2.42

Before any demolition or alteration work commences, a registered asbestos

consultant shall be appointed to conduct a thorough investigation of the
building for the presence of asbestos containing material at the premises and
submit an Asbestos Investigation Report and, if asbestos containing
material is found, an Asbestos Abatement Plan to the Environmental
Protection Department at least 28 days before the asbestos abatement work
commences.
When appropriate, a registered asbestos laboratory shall be appointed to
carry out sampling, measurement or analysis of any suspected asbestos
containing material.
Asbestos removal work shall be carried out by a registered asbestos
contractor under the supervision of a registered asbestos consultant in
compliance with relevant legislation and codes of practice.
If during the course of the general demolition work, hidden suspected
asbestos containing material is found, stop work immediately and report to
the SO.

Asbestos
removal

2.43

The removal of asbestos-containing materials shall be carried out by an

approved registered asbestos contractor prior to commencement of general
demolition works to avoid contamination of debris arising from the
demolition.
Specified notification forms about the commencement of the asbestos
abatement work shall be submitted to the Environmental Protection
Department and the Labour Department 28 days in advance.

Sampling and
analysis

2.44

Bulk samples of suspected asbestos-containing materials shall be taken on

the advice and under the supervision of a registered asbestos consultant and
analyzed by an approved laboratory to verify the presence of asbestos, and
to determine the content and the type of asbestos.
Full depth of the insulation material from its outer surface to the base
structure shall be taken for sampling.
When specified, two additional side by side quality control samples shall be
taken and analyzed by another approved laboratory.

Asbestos
abatement plan
and method
statement

2.45

Where an asbestos abatement plan has been prepared as per Clause 2.42, the
registered asbestos consultant appointed shall supervise the implementation
of the plan. Where the submission of an asbestos abatement plan is not
required, the Contractor shall submit, before commencement of the removal
work, a detailed method statement to the SO for approval, which shall
include a detailed work programme, sketches showing the containments, air
locks, air movers and scaffolding as required. Contingency measures of
safety and escape access shall be maintained in case of an emergency (fire,
accident, etc.).

Glove bag
method

2.46

The use of glove bag method for the removal of asbestos-containing

materials shall be included in the asbestos abatement plan with prior
approval by the Environmental Protection Department and the SO.

2-11

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

Supervisor

2.47

A full time Registered Asbestos Supervisor shall be stationed at the work

site.

Warning signs

2.48

Proper and publicly visible warning signs in compliance with relevant

legislation and code of practice shall be provided.

Floor tile adhesive

remover

2.49

The floor tile adhesive remover used in the asbestos vinyl floor removal
works shall be the type of low volatile organic compound (VOC) content
and shall comply with the following requirements:
- biobased
- VOC content of less than 5%
Mastic removers made from petroleum-based chemistry are prohibited. The
tile adhesive remover shall be acceptable by the Environmental Protection
Department of proven safe formula in accordance with Code of Practice on
Asbestos Control. The application of the tile adhesive remover shall strictly
follow the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
After removal of tile adhesive, the surface shall be cleaned with an approved
degreaser. Only those degreasers recommended by the manufacturer of the
tile adhesive remover shall be used for removing the residue remaining on
the floor substrate, before laying the new floor tiles.

Minimisation of
fibre release

2.50

Full containment method shall be applied to the removal works of friable

asbestos materials. Smoke test shall be conducted by a registered asbestos
consultant before the commencement of asbestos removal works to ensure
the integrity of the full containment. Sufficient negative pressure shall be
maintained during the removal works.
No power tools shall be used directly on asbestos containing materials.
Asbestos material shall be wetted prior to stripping/removal and shall be
mist-sprayed with amended water during stripping.
Breakage of asbestos material should be minimized during removal works.
Asbestos waste shall be collected in approved waste containers as soon as it
is produced.
Debris/dust generated shall be removed with high efficiency particulate
absolute vacuum cleaner which shall be positioned next to the source of
fibre generation.
When entering or leaving the contaminated work area, a strict changing and
decontamination routine must be followed by all personnel.

Waste disposal

2.51

Asbestos-containing waste generated from the removal work shall be

properly disposed of in accordance with the requirements of the "Code of
Practice on Handling, Transportation and Disposal of Asbestos Wastes"
published by the Environmental Protection Department.
Notification shall be given to the Environmental Protection Department at
least ten days before the scheduled disposal of asbestos waste and a duly
stamped trip ticket shall be submitted to the SO for confirmation of disposal.
Water contaminated with asbestos shall be filtered first before being
discharged into soil drains.

2-12

Section 2 Demolition, Site Clearance and Alterations

Air monitoring

2.52

Asbestos removal shall be closely monitored by air sampling and an

analysis of the air-borne fibres in conjunction with the removal work
undertaken by an approved laboratory.
Personal air samples shall be taken for the worker carrying out asbestos
removal work. A reading of less than 0.2 fibre/ml shall be required for the
removal works of amosite / crocidolite. For removal works of other types of
asbestos materials, the reading shall not exceed 0.5 fibre/ml.
A reading of less than 0.01fibre/ml will be required in the penultimate / final
clearance / reassurance air sample analysis to ensure the site cleanliness
after asbestos removal works.

Storage of waste

2.53

Double-bagged asbestos waste shall be clearly marked with indelible ink

and labeled, and stored either in a designated weatherproof holding area
within the Site or in a secured lockable area outside the contaminated works
area, with either location to be agreed on site. Conspicuous warning sign in
compliance with relevant legislation and code of practice shall be provided
at the storage area.

Regulations,
Ordinances and
Codes of
Practice
(Asbestos)

2.54

Comply with all relevant legislation and Codes of Practice in connection

with asbestos removal works. Particular attention shall be drawn to the
following:
(i)

Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Asbestos) Regulations.

(ii)

Air Pollution Control Ordinance.

(iii)

Air Pollution Control (Asbestos) (Administration) Regulations.

(iv)

Code of Practice on Handling, Transportation and Disposal of

Asbestos Waste, Environmental Protection Department, Hong
Kong.

(v)

Code of Practice on Asbestos Work using Full Containment or

Mini containment methods, Environmental Protection
Department, Hong Kong.

(vi)

Code of Practice on Safe

Asbestos-Containing Material,
Department, Hong Kong.

(vii)

Code of Practice on Asbestos Work using Glove Bag Method,

Environmental Protection Department, Hong Kong.

(viii)

Code of Practice - Safety and Health at Work with Asbestos,

Labour Department, Hong Kong.

(ix)

The prevailing Codes of Practice on asbestos control issued by

Environmental Bureau.

2-13

Handling of Low Risk

Environmental Protection

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

SECTION 3
EXCAVATION AND EARTHWORK
GENERALLY
Definitions

3.01

(i)

(ii)

(a)

"Top soil" is soil capable of supporting vegetative growth.

(b)

"Inert construction and demolition material" shall mean rock,

rubble, earth, soil, concrete, asphalt, brick, tile and masonry
generated from construction and demolition works.

"Suitable material" shall consist of naturally occurring or processed

material, or inert construction and demolition material, which at the
time of deposition is capable of being compacted in accordance with
the specified requirements to form stable areas of fill. The soluble
sulphate content of the suitable material placed within 500 mm of
concrete, cement bound material or cementitious material shall not
exceed l.9 grams of sulphate, expressed as SO3, per litre. The total
sulphate content, expressed as SO3, of the suitable material placed
within 500 mm of metal work shall not exceed 0.5% by mass.
The method of testing of the total sulphate content shall be in
accordance with Geospec 3 - Model Specification for Soil Testing
issued by the Geotechnical Engineering Office.

(iii)

"Unsuitable material" is material other than suitable material or

containing any of the following:
(a)

Material susceptible to volume change, including marine

mud, soil with a liquid limit exceeding 65% or a plasticity
index exceeding 35%, swelling clays and collapsible soils.

(b)

Peat, vegetation, timber, organic, soluble or perishable

material.

(c)

Dangerous or toxic material or material susceptible to

combustion.

(d)

Metal, rubber, plastic or synthetic material.

(iv)

"Rock" is hard material which in the opinion of the SO can only be

removed by the use of blasting, wedges or pneumatic drills and shall
include individual boulders or other masses exceeding 0.20 m3 in
size.

(v)

(a)

"Rock fill" shall consist of pieces of concrete or hard and

durable rock of which the maximum size shall not be greater
than three times the minimum dimension of individual pieces
and in the opinion of the SO not more than 30% by mass is
discoloured or shows other evidence of decomposition.
Masonry, brick and similar materials shall not be used instead
of rock unless permitted by the SO. No individual pieces
shall exceed 400 mm in size. The rock fill shall be suitably
graded for deposition and compaction in accordance with
Clause 3.20.

3-1

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

(b)

(vi)

(vii)

"Recycled rock filling material" (Grade 200) shall be

recycled rock or inert construction and demolition material
which is hard and durable, and free from cracks, veins, and
other evidence of decomposition.

"Hardcore" shall comprise the following with no material exceeding

150 mm in size:
(a)

Rock fill.

(b)

Broken stone, hard brick, concrete or other comparable hard,

inert, approved material. The material shall be free from dust,
rubbish or deleterious foreign matter.

"General filling material" shall be "suitable material". It may contain

up to 25% rock distributed evenly throughout the whole mass of the
material. General filling material shall contain no material exceeding
200 mm in size.

(viii) "Fine filling material" shall be "suitable material" capable of passing

through a 75 mm BS sieve.
(ix)

"Special filling material" shall be "suitable material" capable of

passing through a 75 mm BS sieve. The special filling material shall
be sampled and tested according to Geospec 3. The special filling
material shall have the following characteristics:
(a)

Liquid limit shall not exceed 45%.

(b)

Plasticity index shall not exceed 20%.

(c)

Coefficient of uniformity shall be greater than 50.

(d)

The percentage passing a 63 m BS sieve shall be less than

45% by mass.

(x)

"Embankment", "filling area" or "area of fill" means an area on the

Site other than a foreshore or sea-bed where the ground level shall be
raised by filling in layers as part of the Works.

(xi)

"Trench excavation" means excavating from ground level not

exceeding 5000 mm in width at surface.

(xii)

"Bulk excavation" means excavation in the open other than trench

excavation.

(xiii) Well-graded material shall consist of material that has a coefficient of

uniformity exceeding 10.
(xiv) Uniform-graded material shall consist of material that has a
coefficient of uniformity of 10 or less.
Note: The definitions of trench excavation and bulk excavation stated in
sub-clauses (xi) and (xii) are for the purposes of the GS only and do
not apply to the measurement of excavation in Bills of Quantities
which are measured in accordance with the current edition of the
Standard Method of Measurement of Building Works for use in Hong
Kong.

3-2

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

Ground
investigation

3.02

Ground investigation reports, where these have been prepared, will be made
available for inspection at the office of the SO. This information is given in
good faith and no warranty whatsoever is given as to its accuracy.

Record survey

3.03

Spot levels and contours shown on drawings are, unless otherwise stated,
reduced to principal datum.
Check the accuracy of site levels shown on drawings. Where levels are
found to be inaccurate, notify the SO in writing before commencing
excavation or earthwork. No claim in respect of inaccuracy of levels will be
entertained after the relevant site levels have been altered by the Works.
Where specified, make an oversite topographical survey by an independent
surveyor included in DEVB approved list before any work is carried out
under the Contract and again, after all excavation and filling work has been
completed. If an independent surveyor is not employed, agree with the SO
that plans or sections prepared from the above truly represent the original
ground levels and the final levels required by the Contract and ensure that
both parties sign the drawings. These endorsed drawings shall become the
record surveys for the measurement of earthwork quantities.

Temporary
works for
earthworks

3.04

Design the Temporary Works associated with earthworks, including

temporary slopes, stockpiles and drainage, such that the risk of failure is not
more than that which would be adopted if the Temporary Works were to be
permanent. Allowance may be made in the design of the Temporary Works
for the shorter design life and for the risk to persons and property and the
surface water and groundwater conditions which may occur during
construction.
The Contractor shall provide details to SO to demonstrate that the design of
Temporary Works has been considered and incorporated measures, which
minimise excavation of materials.

Earthwork

3.05

(i)

Carry out excavation and earthwork in such a manner as to prevent

erosion or slips. Limit working faces to safe slopes and height. Do
not stockpile material where it might cause a landslide or failure of
excavation face.

(ii)

Provide and maintain necessary temporary access roads and

temporary drainage, and divert and subsequently reinstate permanent
drainage systems. Submit proposed alignments and levels of
temporary access roads for approval prior to their construction.
Provide temporary roads with sufficient drainage ditches over their
full length.

(iii)

Monitor weather forecasts to ensure awareness of impending heavy

rain and inspect the site frequently during periods of sustained
rainfall.

(iv)

Seal, cover with impermeable sheeting or protect by other methods

approved by the SO, all excavation and earthwork at the cessation of
the days work and when heavy rain is expected.

(v)

Material handling and storage areas shall be levelled and well

drained. Stockpiles of material shall be sprayed with water or a dust
suppression chemical to minimize dust generation.

3-3

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

(vi)

Carry out excavation and earthwork in the dry unless otherwise

authorised by the SO. Carry out the formation of cuttings and filling
in such a manner that the surfaces have at all times a sufficient
minimum crossfall and, where practicable, a sufficient longitudinal
gradient to enable them to shed water and prevent ponding. Adopt a
method of working which exposes the minimum area of bare soil
across the site. Follow up earthwork immediately with either
approved temporary protection or the permanent surface protection
and drainage work.

(vii)

Rapidly disperse water, whether shed on to the excavation and

earthwork, or arising from any other source including flowing into
the Site from elsewhere. Provide temporary water courses, ditches,
catchpits, drains, pumping or other means of maintaining excavation
and earthwork free from water. Approval shall be sought from
Drainage Services Department and Environmental Protection
Department for the discharge of site effluent into permanent drainage
system. Ensure temporary and permanent drainage systems are
adequately maintained and clear of rubbish and debris.

(viii) Excavations for structures, pits and trenches shall not be carried out
on or near slopes unless measures are taken to prevent water
collecting in the excavation and running down the slope.
(ix)

Install permanent drainage systems when practicable and proceed

upwards from the low point.

Rock crushing
plants

3.06

Do not use rock crushing plant on the Site unless specifically permitted to do
so under the Contract.

Topsoil

3.07

Remove topsoil when required before starting excavation or filling and,

unless otherwise specified, deposit on site in temporary heaps for reuse.
Ensure the soil is kept free from contamination and undue compaction.
EXCAVATION

Generally

3.08

(i)

Adequate support shall be used to maintain excavations in a stable

condition and to prevent settlement of structures or utilities due to
excavation or dewatering. Construction plant or other vehicles shall
not be operated or parked adjacent to excavations and earthworks
materials or other materials shall not be placed adjacent to
excavations unless this has been allowed for in the design of the
Temporary Works for the support of the excavation.

(ii)

Keep excavation free of water in accordance with Clause 3.05.

(iii)

Neatly trim the face of excavation.

(iv)

Carry out excavation to the lines, levels, dimensions and slopes

specified.

(v)

Carefully level the bottom of excavation and step or bench

horizontally as specified. Remove any pockets of soft material or
loose rock in the bottoms of pits and trenches and fill the resulting
cavities and any large fissures with Grade l0 or higher grade concrete.
Do not trim the side faces of excavations for at least 24 hours after
placing any blinding concrete required by the Contract.

3-4

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

(vi)

Backfill in accordance with the GS and at no extra cost

"over-excavated" areas where the Contractor's proposed method of
excavation, if approved, involves excavation in excess of that
specified in certain areas.

(vii)

Maintain excavated surfaces to be used for construction traffic at a

level of 300 mm minimum above formation level unless in rock.
Make good any damage to the surface arising from such use with
material having the same characteristics as the material which has
been damaged.

(viii) Ensure that no construction traffic uses an area once trimming to final
formation level has commenced, with the exception of plant
necessary for such trimming, and ensure that no damage is caused to
the surface by this plant.
(ix)

Make good, at no extra cost, surfaces which, after excavation, have

deteriorated to a condition that makes compaction of backfilling
impracticable, either by carrying out additional excavation and filling
in accordance with this GS or, by waiting until the condition of the
exposed material is, in the opinion of the SO, fit to receive the
approved backfill.

(x)

Excavate in such a manner that suitable material is kept separate and

store in temporary spoil heaps to the satisfaction of the SO, where
required for use in the Works without contamination by unsuitable
material or deterioration. Where, in the opinion of the SO, suitable
material has become contaminated by unsuitable material or has
deteriorated, this material shall be removed from Site and replaced
with suitable imported material at the Contractor's expense.

(xi)

Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to existing drains and

services encountered in and around the excavation. Should any
damage occur, notify the SO and the relevant authorities concerned
immediately and make good at no extra cost. Temporarily divert
ditches, land drains or other waterways encountered in the excavation
and subsequently reinstate at the Contractor's expense.

(xii)

Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to tops of piles during

excavation.

(xiii) Bottoms of excavation shall be approved before any new work is laid.
Inform the SO when excavation is ready for inspection. Do not trim
and blind the bottom of excavation without approval.
Obstructions

3.09

Notify the SO of the location and nature of any buried obstruction

encountered during excavation. Take up disused drains encountered in the
excavation and clear away. Remove any contaminated earth. Disinfect as
necessary and seal off ends with concrete. Break up and remove disused
manholes and backfill where required with approved material properly
compacted.
Break out and remove old walls, foundations, piles and other underground
structures encountered in the excavation and backfill where required with
approved material in accordance with the GS.

3-5

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

Removal of
excavated
material

3.10

Remove unsuitable material from Site. Do not remove suitable material

from Site without the permission of the SO, unless surplus to requirements
of the Contract. Unsuitable material and surplus materials shall become the
property of the Contractor unless otherwise provided for in the Contract.
Inform the SO of the proposed dumping areas and take responsibility for
making arrangements for disposal of these materials. Notwithstanding the
foregoing the SO retains the right to direct the manner in which dumping is
to be carried out.

Tolerance for
excavation

3.11

Excavation shall be within the tolerances stated in Table 3.1 of the specified
design profile.
TABLE 3.1
Tolerances for excavation final surfaces.

Type of surface

Tolerance for
excavation except in rock
(mm)

Tolerance for
excavation in rock
(mm)

Formations for
foundation and utilities

25

150

Formations for
pavements

50

150

Note: A positive tolerance refers to under excavation and a negative tolerance

refers to over excavation.

In case of cut slopes, the tolerance shall not exceed 75 mm measured at right
angles to the batter.
Surfaces of
cutting

3.12

Remove from the side of rock cuttings any inferior stone or soft material
intervening between layers of compact rock, or rock which, in the opinion of
the SO, will not withstand the weather satisfactorily after exposure. Remove
from sides of cuttings rock fragments which move when prized with a
crow-bar. The depth from the face of cuttings to which material is to be
removed will be determined by the SO. Build up the resulting space to the
required profile with Grade l0 or higher grade concrete or masonry in
cement mortar to the required profile using rock similar to the adjoining
natural rock as instructed by the SO.

Foundation pits
and trenches

3.13

Do not excavate trenches and pits wider than is necessary for the
construction of the foundation or execution of other works specified therein.
Do not open any greater length of trench at any one time than that has been
approved. Remove all surplus spoil as soon as possible after excavation.
Keep stacked spoil for filling tidy and free from contamination at all times.

3-6

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

Nullahs

3.14

Blasting

3.15

Stack excavated materials away from nullahs, stream courses and covered
culverts at a point convenient for direct loading on to transport in such a
manner as to cause the minimum nuisance to the public.
Do not use explosives except when specifically permitted by the Contract, or
with prior approval of the SO.
Blasting operations and the supply, transportation, storage, use and disposal
of explosives shall be in accordance with conditions and restrictions
imposed by the Commissioner of Mines. The Contractor shall make all
arrangements with and obtain all licences and permits from the
Commissioner of Mines in connection with blasting operations.
Give the SO a minimum of 24 hours notice of a proposal to use blasting and
give any details he may request concerning the charges, their positions,
methods of monitoring the effects of blasting and protective measures. The
SO may regulate, restrict or prohibit blasting if, in his opinion, it is necessary
to do so for the safety of persons or property, to limit noise or to safeguard
the Works. The approval of the SO shall be obtained for each location, or
series of locations, where the Contractor wishes to use more than l0 kg of
explosive in one blast.
Carry out pre-splitting trials well in advance of excavation to the final face
where explosives shall be used to form a cut rock face required as part of the
permanent works. Submit to the SO the following information before
commencing the pre-splitting trials:
(i)

Proposed blast-hole depth, diameter, spacing and orientation.

(ii)

Proposed type of explosive, charge weight and delay for each blast
hole.

Adopt an approved pre-splitting technique for forming the final cut rock
face.
Take responsibility for any delays arising from blasting operations.
FILLING AND COMPACTION
Surface
preparation for
filling material

3.16

Clear all soft spots, loose boulders, grass, top soil, bushes, trees, roots and
other vegetation or rubbish in natural ground or surface over which filling is
to be placed. Do not place filling material until water-courses have been
diverted or underdrained. Do not place filling material on sloping ground
until benches or trenches as described in Clause 3.17 have been completed.

Filling

3.17

(i)

Unless otherwise specified, filling material shall consist of general

filling material obtained from excavation on Site, borrow areas or
other approved sources.

(ii)

Provide for the SOs approval a method statement showing the

sources of fill for each fill area, the construction plant to be used for
placing filling material and the method of compaction.

(iii)

Commence filling works only when sufficient compaction plant is in

operation at the place of deposition to ensure compliance with the
requirements of Clauses 3.19 or 3.20.

(iv)

Filling material shall be deposited in layers of a thickness appropriate

to the compaction method to be used. In deposition of filling

3-7

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

material, ensure that a good bond is achieved between layers of fill,

and unless otherwise directed by the SO, no material shall be placed
on previously compacted layers unless the surface has been scarified
or otherwise broken up and, if necessary, watered.
(v)

Blind the top surface of hardcore with fine filling material.

(vi)

Cut benches or trenches as shown on the drawings and as directed by

the SO where filling shall be formed on sloping ground and provide
any necessary under-draining of the affected part of the Site.

(vii)

Keep the fill area free of water in accordance with Clause 3.05.

(viii) Obtain approval from the SO before commencing filling and before
any fill layer is covered.
(ix)

Do not use "end tipping" in filling.

(x)

Leave surfaces with no area that can retain water at the end of each
day's work and, if necessary, cut ditches to achieve this.

(xi)

Stop work when the state of the weather is such that, in the opinion of
the SO, it will adversely affect the placing of compacted fill.

(xii)

Adopt one of the following procedures when material placed and

compacted, or awaiting compaction, reaches a condition which, in the
opinion of the SO, does not comply with the GS or has been damaged
either by weather or in any other way:
(a) Remove the material from Site, replacing it with equivalent
suitable material.
(b) Remove the material to stockpile until it is in a suitable condition
for reuse.
(c) Make good the material by mechanical or chemical means.
(d) Cease work on the material until it is in a suitable physical
condition for reuse.
Obtain approval from the SO before any of these options are adopted.
Remove, and adopt option (a) or (b) above for any material not
complying with the GS that has been overlaid by more recently
placed material.

(xiii) Make good to the satisfaction of the SO settlement in filling and

backfilling and any consequential damage that may occur up to the
end of the Maintenance Period.

3-8

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

Tolerance for
filling

3.18

Filling shall be within the tolerances stated in Table 3.2 of the specified
design profile.
TABLE 3.2
Tolerances for filling
Tolerance
(mm)
+

Formations for foundation and utilities

25

Formations for pavements

50

Fill platforms

50

Fill slopes

50

50

Note: A positive tolerance refers to excess filling material and a negative

tolerance refers to insufficient filling material.
Compaction by
performance
specification

3.19

(i)

Agree with the SO the thickness of each layer which shall be

compatible with the particular filling material and the specific
compaction plant to be used. Carry out carefully control tests to
determine the optimum placing thickness for the particular filling
material and the number of passes to achieve the required density
with the specific compaction plant to be provided. No permanent fill
shall be placed until such compaction procedure and control tests
results have been agreed with the SO. Earth moving plant will not be
accepted as compaction equipment under this clause. Spread material
in layers of uniform thickness and compact as soon as practicable
after deposition.

(ii)

Test the material to be compacted in accordance with Clause 3.21 to

determine its maximum dry density and moisture content.

(iii)

Not used.

(iv)

Carry out in-situ field density tests to determine the relative

compaction in accordance with Clause 3.21 after compaction with the
following arrangement:
(a)

Test each layer and obtain approval from the SO prior to

placing of the next layer, or

(b)

Subject to the approval from the SO, tests for each layer may
be performed after filling material in not more than 2 layers
above have been deposited and compacted. If the results of
any tests at lower layers do not comply with the specified
requirements for relative compaction, the soil layer and all
the layers above shall be re-compacted and tested with
additional tests for relative compaction. The number of
additional tests shall refer to Table 3.5. Further deposition of
filling shall not be allowed unless all the underlying soil
layer(s) have satisfied all the test requirements. No claim in
respect of re-compaction and additional tests of the soil layer
due to non-compliance of the soil underneath will be
entertained.

3-9

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

(v)

The relative compaction (RC) of filling material shall be determined

in accordance with the following equation:
RC = IDD/MDD x l00%
where:
- IDD is the in-situ dry density determined in accordance with
Clause 3.21
- MDD is the maximum dry density determined in accordance
with Clause 3.21

(vi)

Compaction by
method
specification

3.20

Unless otherwise specified filling material shall be compacted to

obtain the following relative compaction (RC):
(a)

Fill within the 1.5 metres thick top surface zone of the
platforms and fill within the 2.5 metres thick top surface zone
of the peripheral slopes measured at right angles to the batter RC of at least 95%.

(b)

Interior of large fill platforms which do not or will not support

structures - RC of at least 90%.

(c)

Interior of large fill platforms supporting structures - RC of at

least 95%.

(d)

Fill immediately below road formation level - RC of at least

98% for a depth of 200 mm.

(e)

Backfill to foundation pits or underneath suspended ground

slab - RC of at least 90% or as agreed by the SO.

Adoption of the method specification for controlling compaction to be

carried out only with prior approval of the SO. Submit to the SO for approval
a method statement covering particulars of the filling material, compaction
layer thickness, specific compaction plant to be used, compaction procedure
and the site control measures. Allow for control tests on the proposed
method statement as required by the SO.
(i)

Spread and level each layer of rock fill or hardcore and systematically
compact by at least l2 passes of a towed vibratory roller with a
minimum static load per l00 mm width of roller of 1.75 kN or a grid
roller with a minimum load per l00 mm width of roller of 7.8 kN or
other plant approved by the SO.

(ii)

General filling material of which less than 90% passes a 20 mm BS

test sieve shall be compacted to the following requirements:
(a)

Spread and level each layer of general filling material with a

thickness not less 1.5 times of the maximum size of the general
filling material and not exceeding the maximum depth of
compacted layer in accordance with Table 3.3. If there is a
presence of over-sized coarse material in the filling material,
the over-sized coarse material shall be removed or broken
down to sizes acceptable to the SO. Each layer shall be
systematically compacted by an approved vibratory roller with
the stipulated minimum number of passes corresponding to the
minimum static load per 100 mm width of the roller.

3-10

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

Blind the surface of rock fill or hardcore when specified with approved fine
filling material.
TABLE 3.3
Compaction requirement for general filling material with a large portion of coarse material
Force per 100
mm width
(kN)

Well-graded material
Maximum depth
of compacted
layer (mm)

0.25 0.45
0.46 0.70
0.71 1.25
1.26 1.75
1.76 2.30
2.31 2.80
2.81 3.50
3.51 4.20
4.21 4.90
Test for
determining the
degree of
compaction of
compacted fill

3.21

Minimum no.
of passes

125
150
150
175
200
225
250

12
8
4
4
4
4
4

Uniform-grade material
Maximum depth
of compacted
layer (mm)
150
150
150
200
225
250
275
300
300

Minimum no.
of passes
16
12
10
10
10
10
8
8
8

Arrange for tests specified below to be carried out by the Public Works
Laboratories (PWL).

(i)

Compaction tests shall be carried out on Site unless approved

otherwise.

(ii)

Determine the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content

in accordance with Geospec 3.
Test each soil type when first used and thereafter at the same time as
every set of field density tests is carried out or whenever the SO may
direct. Unless otherwise specified, the number of tests required shall
be as stated in Table 3.4. Keep the records identifying the soil type
and the location within the works.

(iii)

Determine the in-situ field density and moisture content in

accordance with Geospec 3 as directed by the SO to determine the
relative compaction achieved.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the number of tests required
shall be as stated in Table 3.5. Keep records identifying the soil type
and location in the Works and showing the following information for
each series of tests:

(iv)

(a)

Dry density of soil tested.

(b)

Moisture content.

(c)

Relative compaction achieved (%).

Determine moisture content in accordance with moisture content

tests under Geospec 3 by means of a drying oven.

3-11

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

TABLE 3.4
Number of samples for testing of optimum
moisture content and maximum dry density

Description

Size of batch

No. of samples per batch

0 - 3000 m3

more than
3000 m3

1 for each 1000 m3

or part thereof

0 - 15000 m3

more than
15000 m3

1 for each 5000 m3

or part thereof

Special
filling material

Filling material
other than
special filling
material

Note: A batch is any quantity of filling material which is of the same type and
which has similar properties, as determined by the SO.

3-12

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

TABLE 3.5
Number of samples for testing of moisture content
and relative compaction

Description

Areas of fill in excavations for structures,

pits and trenches and on formations

Other areas of fill

Note:

Size of area
of fill in batch

No. of samples
No. of tests per batch

0 - 100 m2

more than 100 m2

2 for each 100 m2

or part thereof

0 - 1 ha

4 for each 1000 m2

or part thereof

l - 10 ha

3 for each 1000 m2

or part thereof

more than l0 ha

2 for each 1000 m2

or part thereof

For the purpose of testing moisture content and relative compaction, a batch is any quantity of
filling material which is of the same type and which is deposited in a single layer in any one
location of fill presented by the Contractor for testing on one occasion.

Filling of
foundation pits
and trenches

3.22

Deposit and compact suitable filling material to achieve the compaction

specified in Clause 3.19 (vi) unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or
directed by the SO. Carefully remove planking and strutting and other
excavation supports as the filling proceeds except where they are specified
or required by the SO to be left in position.

Embankments

3.23

(i)

Form embankments of special filling material unless otherwise

specified.

(ii)

Deposit and compact all earthwork material for filling as soon as

practicable after excavation. Build up embankments evenly over the
full width. Control and direct construction traffic during the
construction of embankments uniformly over their full width. Form
sloping faces of embankments and other fill areas by l m overfilling
unless otherwise directed by the SO and cutting back to the desired
profile. Make good damage to compacted layers caused by
construction traffic.

(iii)

Compact embankments in accordance with Clauses 3.19 or 3.20.

3-13

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

(iv)

Adopt one of the following procedures at no extra cost when material

deposited as fill subsequently reaches a condition such that it cannot
be compacted in accordance with the GS.
(a)

Make good by removing the material from the embankment to

tip or elsewhere until it is in a suitable physical condition for
reuse and replace it with suitable material.

(b)

Make good the material by approved mechanical or chemical

means to improve its stability.

(c)

Cease work on the material until its physical condition is

suitable such that it can be compacted in accordance with the
GS.

(v)

Rock used in rock fill embankments shall, except for any specified
external cover to slopes or near formation level, be of a size such that
it can be deposited in horizontal layers each not exceeding 450 mm
thick before compaction, extending over the full width of the
embankment. Spread and level the material by a crawler tractor
weighing not less than 15 tonnes and compact in accordance with
Clause 3.20. Each layer shall consist of reasonably graded rock and
all surface voids shall be filled with broken fragments before the next
layer is placed. Blind the top surface and side slopes of embankments
so formed with approved fine filling material to seal the surface. On
side slopes and verges, such material may be topsoil as defined in
Clause 3.01.

(vi)

Isolated boulders each within the range 0.015 m3 to 0.10 m3 in size

may be incorporated in embankments not of rock fill at the discretion
of the SO provided that the specified compaction requirements are
met. Boulders exceeding 0.015 m3 shall be placed a minimum of
2 metres below formation level of carriageways or hard-shoulders.

(vii)

Form embankments equally on both sides of culverts or drain pipes

and the like.

(viii) Where surfaces of embankment are required for use by construction

traffic, build up and maintain at minimum 300 mm above formation
level the area between the extremities of carriageways, including any
central reserve and hard shoulders before subsequently trimming to
formation level. Make good surface damage at no extra cost. Ensure
that no construction traffic uses an area once trimming to final
formation level has commenced, with the exception of plant
necessary for such trimming and ensure that no damage is caused to
the surface by such plant.
Filling existing
watercourses

3.24

Divert existing watercourses and channels as required and clear the same of
all vegetable growth and soft deposits and carefully fill in with suitable
material deposited and compacted as specified.

Backfilling
3.25
behind retaining
walls

Backfill behind retaining walls with the graded filter drain specified. The
grading of filter material shall be such so as to prevent the filling material
from being washed through the filter.
Place graded filter with care to avoid contamination and in layers
simultaneously with the filling material and compact in the same manner as
the filling material.

3-14

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

Place general filling material or special filling material as specified on the

drawings as backfilling to the sections shown on the drawings and
thoroughly compact to achieve RC of at least 90% unless otherwise stated on
the drawings or directed by the SO. Avoid excessive compaction to filling
material behind retaining walls.
PREPARATION
FORMATION
Generally

3.26

AND

SURFACE

TREATMENT

OF

ROAD

Carry out preparation and surface treatment of the road formation after
completion of any specified subgrade drainage and, unless otherwise agreed
by the SO, immediately prior to laying the sub-base or the road-base where
no sub-base is required. Follow the following sequence of operations :
(i)

(ii)

(iii)

Formations other than rock fill

(a)

Remove all mud and slurry from surfaces below

carriageways, lay-bys, cycle tracks, footpaths and
hard-shoulders after general reinstatement of any soft areas.

(b)

Compact surface by 4 passes of a smooth-wheeled roller

having a load per 100 mm width of roller of 4.35 kN - 6.l0 kN.

(c)

Trim the formation.

(d)

Roll the trimmed formation by 1 pass of a smooth-wheeled

roller having a minimum load per 100 mm width of roller of
2.1 kN, or a vibratory roller having a minimum static load per
l00 mm width of vibratory roller of 0.7 kN or a vibratory plate
compactor having a minimum static pressure under the base
plate of 13.8 kPa. Where the completed formation is not
immediately covered with sub-base material, protect it with a
membrane of 65 to 80 m impermeable plastic sheeting with
300 mm laps or other approved means to prevent ingress of
moisture. If the moisture content of the accepted compacted
material is allowed to reach a value above the maximum
permitted for the material, allow the material to revert to an
acceptable moisture content and, if directed by the SO, make
good the surface at no extra cost by recompaction before
laying the sub-base or road-base.

Formations of rock fill:

(a)

Trim and blind the formation in accordance with the

requirements of Clause 3.23.

(b)

Roll the trimmed formation as specified in Clause 3.26 (i)(d)

above.

Formations of rock cuttings :

Make good with lean concrete any surface irregularities under the
formation which remain after trimming of rock excavation.

3-15

Section 3 Excavation and Earthwork

SOIL-CEMENT FILL
Soil-cement

3.27

(i)

Soil-cement shall consist of Portland Cement (PC), sand and

inorganic soil in the proportions 1:3:12 by mass.

(ii)

PC shall comply with Clause 6.27.

(iii)

Sand shall comply with BS 1199 and BS 1200.

(iv)

Inorganic soil shall be free from organic matter and shall contain not
more than 30% of soil particles passing a 63 m BS test sieve.

Mixing
soil-cement

3.28

Mix thoroughly soil-cement in a concrete mixer; hand-mixing of small

quantities of soil-cement may be permitted by the SO.

Deposition of
soil-cement fill

3.29

(i)

Place soil-cement fill in its final position and compact within 30

minutes of the cement being added to the mix.

(ii)

Submit to the SO for prior approval a method statement covering the

soil-cement filling material, method of mixing, specific compaction
plant to be used, compaction procedure and site control measures.

Regulations,
Ordinances, etc.
(same as 2.01)

3.30

Comply with all relevant legislation, Codes of Practice and Practice Notes in
connection with demolition works as Clause 2.01.

3-16

Section 4 Steel Sheet Piling Work

SECTION 4
STEEL SHEET PILING WORK
MATERIALS
Steel sheet pile
sections

4.01

Steel sheet piles shall be weldable structural steel to BS EN 10248 Grade

S270.
Steelwork and accessories for use in the system of lateral support shall be as
Section 15 - Structural Steel Work.
Testing of steel sections and accessories shall be as Section 15 - Structural
Steel Work.
Fabricate special and non-standard sheet piles including corner piles and
junction piles from sheet pile sections approved for use in the Works.
Provide sheet piles in single continuous lengths unless otherwise specified.
INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED

Tender
submission

4.02

Submit the following information when specified in the tender documents:

(i)

Type of sheet pile proposed including proprietary name, grade of

steel, sectional modulus and qualities.

(ii)

Proposed sequence for installation of sheet piles.

(iii)

Details of special or non-standard piles.

(iv)

Details of initial trenching and guide frames.

(v)

Details of pile driving equipment selected including proprietary

names.

(vi)

Proposed method of pitching and driving piles to the tolerances given

in Clause 4.10.

(vii)

Contingency proposals for the remedy of piles installed outside the

tolerances.

(viii) Detailed calculations of the proposed sheet piles and the system of
lateral support of sheet piles prepared by a Registered Structural
Engineer when specified.
(ix)

Proposed sequence of excavation and installation of system of lateral

support if applicable.

(x)

Proposed system to monitor the effect of excavation and dewatering

on adjacent buildings, pavements, public or private services and any
other structures or permanent features as Clause 4.06.

(xi)

Undertaking that the noise caused by the sheet piling works shall
satisfy the legislation currently in force.

4-1

Section 4 Steel Sheet Piling Work

Provision of
details
before
commencement
of works

4.03

When specified, submit detailed drawings with the method statements

showing:
(i)

The setting out arrangement for construction of the pile wall in

relation to the Site and to adjoining structures. Each pile shall be
annotated with a reference number and length.

(ii)

The sub-division of the pile wall into panels for the purposes of
driving.

(iii)

The location of corner and closure piles.

(iv)

Proposed work on standard piles, e.g. holes for lifting.

(v)

Design for the fabrication of corner, closure, taper and other

non-standard piles.

(vi)

The proposed sequence of driving by panel and by individual pile.

(vii)

Design of the guide frames required at all locations in the Works to

support piles for pitching and driving within required tolerances.

(viii) Design of lateral support if applicable, including details of

connections of walings, strutting, bracing, posts and splicing of
members and sequence of construction and sequence of subsequent
removal if applicable.
Do not change the method of installing sheet piles without approval.
WORKMANSHIP
Preliminary
ground
investigation

4.04

The Contractor shall carry out any additional preliminary ground

investigation he deems necessary to ascertain the nature of the ground and
sub-soil, including the oversite water table level and the nature of the
materials, (whether naturally occurring or otherwise), into which the sheet
piles shall be installed. Allow for liaising with the SO regarding access to
the Site and the execution of ground investigation works. Keep all nuisance
to a minimum and make good drill holes, trial pits etc., after completion in
accordance with the SO's requirements.

Existing
services

4.05

Comply with the following when it is necessary to carry out any work in the
vicinity of utility services:

Monitoring
system and
ground
settlement

4.06

(i)

Advise the relevant utility undertaking at least 7 days before

commencement of the Works.

(ii)

Excavate by hand to a depth sufficient to ascertain the position of

service pipes etc. to ensure that these services are not damaged .

Provide a system to monitor the effects of sheet piling work, subsequent

excavation and dewatering on adjacent buildings, pavements, public or
private services and any other structures or permanent features. The
monitoring system must be adequate to effectively monitor ground
movement.
Do not lower the ground water table level beyond the boundary of the Site
unless otherwise specified, and adopt the approved measures to control and
monitor ground water table levels.

4-2

Section 4 Steel Sheet Piling Work

Pre-load struts or braces and carry out grout injection if required by site
conditions to minimise ground settlement.
Lateral support

4.07

Design by a Registered Structural Engineer when specified, the system of

lateral support to the sheet piles to resist horizontal soil and water pressure
arising from sub-soil conditions.
Construct the system of lateral support as Section 15 - Structural Steel Work
when detailed design is provided.
Install members of the system of lateral support as excavation proceeds in
stages in accordance with the approved construction sequence in the method
statement as Clause 4.03 (viii) or the designed sequence provided,
whichever is applicable.

Marking

4.08

Identify sheet piles on Site by marking with the relevant number in

accordance with the approved drawings of the sheet pile arrangement.
Mark the length on each pile and calibrate the pile at 1 m intervals along the
length to permit checking by the SO.

Welding and
splicing

4.09

Welding shall be in accordance with Section 15 - Structural Steel Work.

Sheet piles not exceeding l2 m long shall be in single lengths. Piles in
excess of l2 m may be spliced with approval. Splice sheet piles by full
strength butt welding and maintain the true vertical alignment.
Form special and non-standard sheet piles by full strength butt welding.

Tolerance

4.10

Install sheet piles within the following tolerances:

(i)

Deviation from the correct line at ground level: Not exceeding 15

mm.

(ii)

Deviation from verticality of individual piles in any direction:

(a)

Generally: Less than 1 : 400.

(b)

For end piles in panels and for guide piles: Less than 1 : 500.

Notwithstanding these specified tolerances, piles shall always be driven to

ensure that the stated dimensions of any permanent structural elements are
not reduced.
Pitching

4.11

Provide rigid guide frames at upper and lower levels on both sides of the
sheet piles. Accurately set out and interlock piles within the guide frames.
Guide frames shall be designed to maintain piles in their true positions
within tolerance during driving.

Driving

4.12

Keep noise and vibration to a minimum when driving sheet piles. Comply
with the legislation currently in force in connection with noise control.
Drive piles to the specified penetration with high frequency vibration pile
drivers. For hard driving only, other methods could be adopted if approved.
Extract and re-drive sheet piles installed outside tolerance. Replace any
extracted piles that the SO considers as unfit for re-driving. Alternatively,
the SO may approve the insertion of taper or other non-standard piles or
other methods of correcting the plumb of piles.

4-3

Section 4 Steel Sheet Piling Work

Drive sheet piles in any length or panel progressively, with the top of no
individual pile exceeding 600 mm below the top of the adjacent piles.
Obstructions

4.13

Advise the SO immediately when obstructions are encountered that prevent

the installation of any sheet piles to the specified penetration.
Adopt an approved method for overcoming the obstruction which,
depending on actual circumstances, may include:
(i)

Withdrawing the sheet piles, excavating for and removing the

obstruction, backfilling and subsequently re-driving the sheet piles.

(ii)

Leaving the sheet piles at the depth of penetration achieved,

excavating for and removing the obstruction, backfilling and
subsequently completing the installation of the sheet piles.

(iii)

Driving the sheet piles on either side of the piles obstructed to the full
penetration specified, removing the obstruction during general
excavation work and subsequently completing the driving of the
piles obstructed. This method of removing obstructions may only be
adopted with the express permission of the SO.

(iv)

Driving through the obstruction under controlled conditions.

Replace any sheet piles damaged through the adoption of this
method.

(v)

Withdrawing and temporarily removing sheet piles, boring through

the obstruction from ground level with approved drilling equipment
and subsequently replacing and re-driving the piles.

Provide temporary propping/bracing to obstructed sheet piles when a

significant length of pile remains above the general top level of adjacent
piles.
Extraction

4.14

Do not extract sheet piles unless otherwise specified.

Burning off

4.15

Burn off the tops of sheet piles driven to full penetration to the level required
when specified.
Burn off the tops of sheet piles damaged by hard driving when so directed.

Sheet pile
record

4.16

Provide the SO with a record, in duplicate, for sheet piles driven the previous
day giving for each pile its identity number and the reference of the rig used.
The following data shall also be included:
(i)

Date sheet pile pitched.

(ii)

Length of completed sheet pile and whether spliced.

(iii)

Type of pile drivers used at all stages to achieve specified

penetration.

(iv)

Depth of penetration below an agreed datum level.

(v)

Details of any driving damage.

(vi)

Alignment of completed sheet pile.

4-4

Section 4 Steel Sheet Piling Work

(vii)

Re-use steel
sheet pile from
other site

4.17

Details of any obstructions encountered and measures adopted for

overcoming the same if applicable.

Re-use of steel sheet piles from other site is permissible if they are used as
temporary works and their physical conditions are considered satisfactory by
the SO.

4-5

Section 5 Piling Work

SECTION 5
PILING WORK
GENERAL
General

5.01

(i)

Piles shall be Contractor designed unless otherwise specified.

(ii)

The approved types of piles that may be adopted by the Contractor

unless otherwise specified are:
(a)

Precast concrete piles.

(b)

Precast prestressed tubular piles.

(c)

Percussion cast in-situ concrete piles.

(d)

Steel 'H' piles.

(e)

Non-percussion cast in-situ concrete piles.

(f)

Large diameter bored piles.

(g)

Hand-dug caissons.

(h)

Mini piles.

(i)

Rock-socketed Steel H-piles.

(j)

Barrette piles.

(k)

Any other piling systems approved by the Development

Bureau.

(iii)

Support all loadings as specified with piles. Unless otherwise stated,

all loads are acting at the geometric centres of columns and walls.

(iv)

In addition to the loads given in the loading schedule, the weight of

pile caps or backfill over the pile caps and the imposed load over the
plan area of the pile caps, which shall be taken as 7.5 kN/m2 unless
specified otherwise, shall be included in the pile loading.

(v)

Design piles for the most critical loading generally produced from
the following combinations:
(a)

Dead load + imposed load + soil and water load.

(b)

Dead load + imposed load + soil and water load + wind load.

NOTE:

(c)
(vi)

The theoretical safe loading capacity of piles in this case

may be increased to 1.25 times the appropriate values as
given in Clause 5.04.
Minimum dead load + wind load + adverse soil + water load
(uplift) due to the highest anticipated groundwater table.

Piles shall not be positioned directly under any wall opening as

indicated on the drawing.

5-1

Section 5 Piling Work

(vii)

No piles or portions of pile caps outside the Site boundary shall be

permitted.

(viii) The use of tension piles shall not be permitted unless otherwise
stated.
(ix)

Carry out piling work in accordance with Code of Practice for

Foundations published by Buildings Department.

(x)

The piling work shall be executed by a Contractor on the List of

Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contractors for
Public Works - Land Piling.

(xi)

The following works specified in the Contract shall be carried out by

an independent Ground Investigation Contractor from Group I or
Group II of the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and
Specialist Contractors for Public Works Ground Investigation
Field Work Category:
(a)

site borings to pre-determine the piles founding levels in

accordance with Clause 5.19;

(b)

pre-drilling for determination of pile length or to establish

bedrock level;

(c)

core drilling;

(d)

proof drilling;

(e)

other works as instructed by the SO.

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED
Design
submission

5.02

(i)

(ii)

Submit two copies of the following information:

(a)

A full specification of the piles proposed. Piles of the same

size and material shall be designed and constructed to the
same safe loading capacities irrespective of the actual design
load sustained by each pile. Should the Contractor design the
pile by adopting a theoretical safe loading capacity of pile
less than the maximum value allowed in this specification,
this lower theoretical safe loading capacity shall be used for
the purpose of static loading test.

(b)

A complete set of design calculations for the piles.

(c)

The Gross Load of each pile is the total loading taken by the
pile during the life of the superstructure and shall not exceed
the theoretical safe loading capacity of the pile.

(d)

The Nett Load of each pile which is the Gross Load less any
other loads deemed appropriate in consideration of the
sub-soil conditions (e.g. the Negative Skin Friction).

(e)

A drawing showing the number, position and size of the piles,

the estimated maximum and minimum gross lengths of the
piles (i.e. distance from ground level to tip of piles) and the
proposed pile cap layout.

Where hand-dug caissons are proposed and unless otherwise

specified submit the following additional details prepared and
certified by a Registered Structural Engineer:

5-2

Section 5 Piling Work

(a)

The design calculations of the caissons including the strength

and workability of the concrete and details of admixtures and
reinforcement.

(b)

The design of caisson linings including design calculations

and drawings showing the details of the linings including
sizes, thickness, and the moulds, method of construction,
jointing, reinforcement, strength of concrete, admixtures,
method of insertion and withdrawal of the moulds. Concrete
for caisson linings shall not be inferior to Grade 20 and the
thickness of linings shall be a minimum of 75 mm. Lining
concrete will not be considered in conjunction with the
hearting concrete as load bearing.

(c)

The method of executing the work, in particular, the mode of

excavating the caisson shafts, dewatering (if any) and the
placing of concrete. Prevent piping, loss of material and the
like when selecting the method of construction.

(d)

The system proposed to effectively monitor the effects of

caisson work on adjacent structures, pavements, public or
private services.
No lowering of ground water table level beyond the Site
boundary shall be permitted and approved measures must be
adopted to control and monitor ground water table levels
unless otherwise expressly authorised by the SO.

(iii)

Obtain the agreement of the SO in writing to the matters referred to

in items (i) and (ii) above before work commences. No piling works
shall commence on site unless the design submissions are approved
by the SO in writing.

(iv)

Submit as specified two copies of the following information certified

by a Registered Structural Engineer when the Contractor is required
to carry out design of pile caps and/or strap beams:
(a)

Complete set of calculation on the design of pile caps and

strap beams, in compliance with Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Concrete issued by the Buildings
Department.

(b)

Drawing showing the proposed pile cap layout and strap

beams with levels, sizes and typical details.

(v)

Each load element (column or wall) shall be supported on individual

pile cap. Combination of loads from individual elements supported
by one large cap shall not be allowed unless otherwise noted.

(vi)

If hydraulic hammer is used in the project, the following shall apply:

(a)

In addition to those stated in Clause 5.02 (i) above, submit

two copies each of the following:
Details of piling equipment to be used which shall include the
model number, hammer weight, drop height, and theoretical
energy output etc.

(b)

Unless approved otherwise by the SO, Hiley Formula shall be

used in assessing the theoretical safe loading capacity of the
piles proposed.

5-3

Section 5 Piling Work

(c)

Provision of
drawings and
calculations

5.03

Record survey
and drawings

(i)

(ii)

The efficiency of drop of the hydraulic hammer used in the

Hiley Formula shall be taken as 90% unless a higher value
can be verified in accordance with Clause 5.14 (iv).

Submit the following to the SO:

(a)

One complete set of the agreed calculations referred to in

Clause 5.02, and

(b)

Three copies of the agreed drawings provided in accordance

with Clause 5.02.

(c)

One complete set of revised calculations and three copies of

revised drawings pursuant to a variation order.

Arrange for a survey to enable preparation of the piling record plans

to show the positions, cut-off levels, gross and nett lengths of the
piles, and the record survey drawings to show the as-built works
included in the Contract.
The survey shall be carried out jointly by the Contractor and an
Independent Surveyor employed by the Contractor at his own cost.
The Independent Surveyor shall be registered with the Hong Kong
Institute of Surveyors. These as-built piling record drawings shall be
certified by both the Contractor and the Independent Surveyor.
Submit to the SO within 14 days after the completion of the piling
works, two copies each of the following:

Loading
capacity of
piles

5.04

piling record plan showing the position, cut-off level, gross

and nett lengths of the piles.

record survey drawings showing the as-built works included

in the Contract.

(iii)

For cases where construction of pile caps and strap beams are
included in the contract, the Independent Surveyor shall also set out
and mark on the surface of the pile caps or ground/strap beams the
outline of all columns and walls for checking by the SO.

(i)

The theoretical safe loading capacity of piles for loads along the
vertical axis must be such that the average compressive stress
imposed by this loading does not exceed 25% (20% only for precast
concrete piles) of the design grade strength of the concrete or 7.5
MPa whichever is smaller, of the nominal cross-sectional area of
precast concrete piles or the cross-sectional area of the tube or auger
for cast in-situ concrete piles or the cross-sectional area of the
caisson not including the lining. The effect of reinforcement shall
not be included in the calculation of the theoretical safe loading
capacity.

(ii)

The theoretical safe loading capacity of precast prestressed tubular

piles for loads along the vertical axis must be such that the average
compressive stress imposed by this loading does not exceed 25% of
the design grade strength of the concrete less the prestress after
losses.

(iii)

The theoretical safe loading capacity of steel 'H' piles (for a driving
resistance of 2) for loads along the vertical axis must be such that the
average compressive stress imposed by this loading does not exceed
30% of the yield stress appropriate to the type of steel and thickness
given in Table 5.1 below:

5-4

Section 5 Piling Work

TABLE 5.1
Minimum yield stress with thickness
Up to and
including 16 mm

Over 16 mm
Up to and
including 40 mm

BS 4360
-Grade 43A

275 MPa

265 MPa

BS EN 10025
-Grade S355JR

BS 4360
-Grade 50B

355 MPa

345 MPa

BS EN 10025
-Grade S450J0

BS 4360
-Grade 55C

450 MPa

430 MPa

Steel Specification

Formerly known as

BS EN 10025
-Grade S275

Unless specified otherwise by the SO, no corrosion protection to the

steel H pile is required. However, when the steel H pile is
subjected to combined axial and bending under working load, the
combined extreme fibre stress shall not exceed 0.33 fy, where fy is
the minimum yield stress of the steel H pile. When the calculation
of stress is based on loadings including wind load, the permissible
combined stress can be up to 0.42 fy.
Settlement
5.05
characteristics
of piles

Design piles such that the relative settlement between piles or pile groups
under working load does not affect the performance of the superstructure.
Except where otherwise specified, the settlement criterion is deemed to be
satisfied if the pile under test load does not exhibit a total settlement in
excess of that calculated in accordance with the formula in Clause 5.28 (iv).

Negative skin
friction

(i)

5.06

The design calculations shall include for the effect of the negative
skin friction (NSF), when appropriate, in accordance with the
following formula:
L
Pv x dL
NSF
=
0.25 x Perimeter x
0
Where:

(ii)

Depth from ground level to top of dense alluvial

sand or top of in-situ CDV or CDG. The depth
stated on the Drawings has been taken from the
existing ground investigation results and is given
without warranty. The Contractor must satisfy
himself of the validity of this information.

Perimeter

Pv

Effective vertical pressure (total pressure minus

the hydrostatic pressure) taking the water table at
the level stated on the Drawings.

dL

Elemental length.

Perimeter of the pile, e.g. x diameter for circular

sections or 2 x (breadth + depth) for rectangular
and H sections.

The above formula is provided as a minimum assessment. If this

formula is not considered adequate, submit an alternative method of
calculating the negative skin friction for approval.

5-5

Section 5 Piling Work

Pile group
reduction
factor

Minimum
spacing / nos.
of piles

Preliminary
ground
investigation

5.07

5.08

5.09

(iii)

For piles claimed to be non-negative friction (NF) pipe piles, the

Contractor may adopt such methods of calculation in assessing the
magnitude of the NSF approved when the system was registered by
the Development Bureau.

(iv)

A pile group reduction factor of 0.85 may be applied to the

evaluation of NSF under a pile group condition as defined in
Clause 5.07.

Where five or more piles are placed under a structural element and in such
proximity that the capacity of the piles to sustain the loading may be affected
by other piles, a pile group shall be deemed to exist. A pile group reduction
factor of 0.85 shall be applied to the calculated safe working loads of piles
unless:
(i)

The centre-to-centre spacings are of more than 3 times the perimeter

of the piles or the circumscribed rectangles in the case of H-piles; or

(ii)

The loading capacity of the piles is derived from end-bearing; or

(iii)

The piles are rock-socketed piles; or

(iv)

The piles are driven to refusal to rest on rock with final penetration
not more than 1.0mm per blow.

(i)

The centre to centre spacing of piles shall normally be not less than
the perimeter of the larger pile or 1 m, whichever is the greater.

(ii)

For piles bearing on bedrock as defined in Clause 5.19 (iv), the

centre to centre spacing may be reduced to not less than 750 mm or
2 times the least width, whichever is the greater.

(iii)

For piles with enlarged bases bearing on bedrock, the perimeter and
the least width referred to in Clauses 5.08 (i) and (ii) above shall be
that of the enlarged base.

(iv)

When piles of different sizes are used, the minimum spacing shall
be governed by the perimeter of the larger pile, 2 times the least
width of the larger pile or 2 times the least width of the greater
enlarged base as appropriate to situations referred to in Clauses 5.08
(i), (ii) and (iii) respectively.

(v)

Minimum spacing requirement specified shall apply to spacing

between newly installed and existing piles.

(vi)

The centres of all driven piles and of all piles deriving their
resistance mainly from friction shall be placed not less than half the
length of the perimeter of the pile or 500 mm, whichever is the
greater, from the site boundary.

(vii)

Except for large diameter bored piles, provide at least one pile
under each column and at least two piles under each wall except
noted otherwise.

Carry out preliminary ground investigations deemed necessary prior to the

submission of the Tender.
Note:

The SO may request evidence, in the form of necessary preliminary

ground investigations that the proposed piling design is feasible.

5-6

Section 5 Piling Work

Investigation
for positions
of piles

5.10

(i)

Carry out necessary probing to ensure that piles may be installed to

such depths as will sustain the required loading.

(ii)

Advise the SO immediately in writing when test probing indicates an

area which will not permit piles to be installed to the required depth.
Submit for approval proposals to support the relevant loadings.
Provide all information regarding subsoil conditions considered
necessary by the SO and calculations and drawings to demonstrate that
any revision to the pile cap layout submitted in accordance with
Clause 5.02 (i)(e) is the practical minimum. Backfill holes formed due
to abortive installation of piles with granite fines or sand before
adjacent piles are driven.

Minimum
length of piles

5.11

Piles of nett length (cut off level to tip of piles) less than 5 m or other
minimum length specified shall not be accepted unless approved.

Use of diesel
hammers

5.12

The use of diesel hammers for percussive piling shall be prohibited.

Energy
reduction
factor for
followers

5.13

(i)

Whenever followers are used, assess the energy reduction factor of

each follower for each pile size.
The energy reduction factor of the follower shall be taken as
Energy imparted to the pile immediately
after the introduction of follower
=

(ii)

Energy imparted to the pile immediately

before the introduction of follower

The energy reduction factor for every combination of follower and

pile size shall be determined from averaging the results of 5 sets of
dynamic pile tests performed, at or near to, the set of 5 different piles
of the same size.

(iii) Dynamic pile test is a test applied to a pile by impact, using falling
weight, hammer or other percussive device. The response of the pile
to the impact force is measured in terms of pile strain and pile
acceleration or pile displacement. Take measurements at one level on
the pile surface near the pile top.
Percussion
piles

5.14

(i)

Assess the safe loading capacity of the pile according to an approved

dynamic formula, e.g. Hiley Formula. For the purpose of design
calculation, the design factor of safety shall not be less than two.

(ii)

The design final penetration shall generally not be taken as less than
2.5 mm per blow. The set penetration of at least 10 blows shall be
recorded on the Site during set. Where it can be demonstrated by PDA
analysis that the driving stress at final set is greater than 0.6 fy for steel
H-piles, the design final penetration may be taken as not less than 1.0
mm per blow. The pile shall not be considered to have attained the
theoretical safe loading capacity should the penetration of any blow
recorded be in excess of the design final penetration.

(iii) If the Hiley Formula is used to calculate the loading capacity of a pile,
the temporary compression of the pile and hammer cushions (Cc) shall
be taken as not less than 7.5 mm when the thickness of the hard wood
packings at the pile head is 50 mm or less and the plastic hammer
cushion is 200 mm thick or less (refer to Clause 5.18 for steel H pile).
(iv) The efficiency of the hammer (Eh) and the coefficient of restitution of
the hammer cushion (e) shall be determined from/verified by carrying
out Dynamic Pile Test (PDA) and CAPWAP analysis on trial piles (at

5-7

Section 5 Piling Work

least 5 piles for each hammer pile size drop height combination).
For steel H-piles, the measured driving stress of all trial piles in PDA
tests shall be greater than 0.6fy (where fy is the minimum yield stress of
the steel H-piles) as demonstrated with PDA tests, and the 90%
CAPWAP capacity of each trial pile shall not be less than twice the
theoretical safe loading capacity of the pile. The combination of Eh
and e shall be so chosen such that when these values are substituted
into the Hiley Formula, the average of the predicted bearing capacity
of the trial piles is not higher than 90% of the average CAPWAP
capacity. If the measured driving stress at final set or 90% CAPWAP
capacity requirements of each pile are not satisfied, the theoretical safe
load capacity of the piles shall be reduced and submitted for SOs
approval.
(v)

If reasonable values of design final set (not less than 2.5 mm or 1.0
mm per blow as the case may be) cannot be obtained from the Hiley
Formula with Eh and e so chosen and subject to the approval of the SO,
all the piles falling into this category shall be subject to Dynamic Pile
Test (PDA) and the theoretical safe loading capacity of the piles shall
be assessed by CAPWAP analysis. For steel H-piles, the measured
driving stress of the piles in PDA tests shall be greater than 0.6fy as
demonstrated with PDA tests. The pile shall not be considered to have
attained the theoretical safe loading capacity should the 90%
CAPWAP capacity is less than twice the theoretical safe loading
capacity. In addition to the loading test requirements in GS Clause
5.28, the SO shall select 1% of nos. of piles (minimum one number)
for each batch of piles proposed by the Contractor for phased
completion to be load tested for acceptance. All the time and cost
incurred from the PDA Tests, CAPWAP analyses and the additional
loading tests shall be borne by the Contractor. Employ an Accredited
Laboratory to carry out and interpret the PDA Tests, CAPWAP
analyses and the additional loading tests. The Accredited Laboratory
shall submit HOKLAS endorsed test reports directly to the SO in
sealed envelopes within 14 days of the completion of the testing.

(vi) Drop hammer shall not be used for final set measurement. All final
sets shall be taken with the hydraulic hammer.
(vii) Driving of the last segment of pile shall normally be in one operation
and final set taken accordingly. If, for some reasons, this cannot be
done, the rate of penetration of the pile shall be recorded before
stopping. When pile driving is resumed, it shall be driven to attain at
least the previous rate of penetration before final set is taken.
(viii) If the protruding length of the pile above ground is more than 3m
during the final set measurement, the temporary compression of pile
above ground level (Cp+Cq) in the approved final set table shall be
increased by 1mm per each metre increase beyond 3m. However, in all
cases, the length of the protruding part of the pile above ground level
shall not exceed 6m during the measurement of final set.
(ix) The piles selected for PDA tests shall be tested under the same driving
conditions as in the final set measurement, i.e. same hammer, same
hammer drop height and total length of pile not less than that at final
set measurement. The set penetration of at least 10 blows shall be
recorded during the PDA tests. If the measured final set values of the
piles during the PDA tests are more than that during the final set
measurement, the theoretical safe loading capacity of these piles shall
be assessed by CAPWAP analysis. All the time and cost incurred from
CAPWAP analysis shall be borne by the Contractor.
Precast
concrete piles

5.15

(i)

Design, cast and cure piles to develop the strength necessary to

withstand transporting, handling and driving stresses without damage.

5-8

Section 5 Piling Work

The concrete shall be of quality not inferior to Grade 30 with a

minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3. Before commencing pile
driving, submit calculations showing that the driving stresses will not
exceed twice the permissible stress in direct compression.
(ii)

Do not splice piles without approval.

(iii) The weight of a hammer used during the final set shall not be less than
70% of the weight of the pile.
Precast
prestressed
tubular piles

5.16

(i)

The piles must be of proprietary type manufactured and handled in

accordance with the approved manufacturer's compliance standards.
Stack piles neatly and securely off the ground.

(ii)

Submit to the SO manufacturer's certificates for each batch of piles

delivered to the Site stating, (a) that the piles have been manufactured
in accordance with the manufacturer's compliance standards approved
by the Development Bureau, (b) that the piles are satisfactory for the
purpose intended and, (c) the mix proportion and admixtures used in
the concrete, and (d) the results of all cube and core tests.

(iii) Carry out splicing to increase the pile length by welding the jointing
plates of the lower and upper segments in accordance with the
manufacturer's details. The welded joints shall be constructed,
inspected and tested as described in Clause 5.18 (v).
(iv) Do not use a hammer of weight less than 50% of the weight of the pile
during the final set. For set calculation in accordance with Clause 5.14
(iii), the temporary compression of the pile and hammer cushions (Cc)
shall be taken as not less than 7.5 mm. If specified, carry out Dynamic
Pile Testing or use other approved means to demonstrate at
construction stage that the maximum tensile stress solely arising from
pile driving does not exceed 12 MPa.
(v)

(a)

When precast prestressed tubular piles are proposed, the SO

will order at least one pile of each serial size from each batch,
to be subjected to the following destructive tests:
(i) Taking Test Cores
3 sets of 3 cores (total 9 numbers) of 76 mm nominal
diameter shall be taken, normal to the length of the pile,
from 3 transverse sections of a sample pile selected by the
SO.
(ii) Assessment of Core Strength
The compressive strength of the cores shall be adjusted for
length/diameter ratio and direction of drilling (D = 2.3, to
be considered as equivalent to cores drilled vertically) and
converted to estimated in-situ cube strength in accordance
with CS1.
The cores shall not be deemed to comply with the
Specification if either:
(a)

The average strength of each set of 3 cores is less

than 85% of the strength specified by the
manufacturer, or

(b) The strength of any individual core is less than 75%

of the strength specified by the manufacturer.

5-9

Section 5 Piling Work

Percussion
cast in-situ
concrete piles

Steel 'H' piles

5.17

5.18

(b)

Unless otherwise specified, a batch of piles shall be 100

lengths or less of piles manufactured by the same
manufacturer, covered by the same manufacturer's certificate
delivered to the Site. Stock each batch of piles neatly as a
group on the Site and each pile of a batch shall be identified
with unique marking for approval.

(c)

In the event that the coring test results fail to comply with
Clause 5.16 (v)(a)(ii) above, all piles of the same concreting
date will be deemed to be unacceptable and shall be removed
from the Site. Consequent to the failure of a coring test, two
additional destructive tests shall be carried out to piles of
different casting dates selected by the SO.

(d)

Supply sample piles for testing, arrange for all coring to be

carried out by an approved specialist core drill contractor, and
provide all necessary facilities and attendance. Grind the two
ends of each core for compressive test smooth and truly
perpendicular to the axis and deliver cores to the Public
Works Laboratories (PWL) for testing. Prepare and submit
test records to the SO and remove the cored piles off the Site
on completion of the tests.

(e)

Do not use a pile from any batch until sample piles from such
batch have passed the destructive test.

(vi)

Finish off the pile heads, cast concrete plugs and provide dowel bars
in accordance with details shown at Annex "A".

(i)

Concrete shall be of quality not inferior to Grade 20 with a minimum

cement content of 300 kg/m3.

(ii)

Piles shall be cast to the full cross-section. Prevent necking and the
formation of voids in the concrete caused by faulty consolidation,
insufficient head of concrete during placing, concrete of inadequate
workability, or inappropriate speed of extracting the casing. Check
the volume of concrete at frequent intervals and take steps to
maintain a sufficient head of concrete above the bottom of the casing
to prevent inflow of soil or water. During extraction of the casing,
ensure there is no lifting of the concrete in order to avoid separation.

(iii)

Do not drive piles within a 3 m radius of any in-situ concrete pile

until a minimum period of 48 hours has elapsed, following the
completion of casting of any such pile.

(i)

Steel sections must comply with the requirement of BS EN 10025

Grade S275, S355JR or S450J0.

(ii)

Use steel sections with flange and web thicknesses not less than 20
mm.

(iii)

For every one hundred segments or part thereof of each section of

same thickness from the same cast, one segment shall be selected at
random on site by the SO for testing. Provide two test specimens
taken at both ends of each of the chosen segment. For the purpose of
this clause, same thickness means similar sections with a variation
in thickness not exceeding + 5 mm, and segment means every
length of pile as rolled.
Prepare the test specimens to BS EN 10002-1 as directed and
appropriately mark and deliver them to the Public Works
Laboratories (PWL), as directed by the SO.

5-10

Section 5 Piling Work

(iv)

The energy of the hammer should be so chosen such that the pile will
not be damaged during driving. As a minimum requirement, the
Contractor shall demonstrate with PDA analysis that driving stresses
would not exceed 0.9 fy.

(v)

Carry out splicing to increase the length of steel H piles in

accordance with the details shown at Annex B. Unless agreed by
the SO, the minimum length of each steel H-pile section shall be 10
m except the uppermost section. Construct joints to maintain the true
alignment of the pile section. Welds shall be subject to the following
examination:
a)

All welds shall be visually inspected to BS EN 970.

b)

10% of the welded joints shall be subject to ultrasonic

examination to BS EN 1714 Level B and magnetic particle
inspection to BS EN 1290.

There is no limit on hold time for the examination, except that the
initial 2 butt welded joints shall be examined by non-destructive
tests after 40 hours. Joints to be tested shall be selected by the SO.
The standard of acceptance for welds shall be in accordance with
Table 14.3b in the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel
issued by the Buildings Department.
Employ an Accredited Laboratory to carry out and interpret the
inspection and testing of welds, and provide any necessary labour
and attendance. The Accredited Laboratory shall submit test reports
directly to the SO in sealed envelopes within 3 days of the
completion of the testing. Tests revealing discontinuity shall be
reported separately from the subsequent repair and re-test.

Large
diameter
bored piles

5.19

(vi)

Provide capping plates and dowel bars in accordance with the details
shown at Annex "C".

(vii)

Pile of same size but of different grades shall not be used in the same
site.

(viii)

If Hiley Formula is used to calculate the loading capacity of

steel H pile, the temporary compression of the hammer cushion
( Cc) shall be taken as not less than 5 mm when plastic cushion of
200 mm thickness or less is used.

(i)

Large diameter bored piles are those of a diameter exceeding

750 mm formed by boring, chiselling or grabbing, plus filling with
concrete.
Provide reinforcement and adequate ties in accordance with details
shown at Annex "D".

(ii)

Site borings to pre-determine the level of oversite bedrock shall be

carried out by an independent Ground Investigation Contractor from
Group I and Group II of the List of Approved Suppliers of Materials
and Specialist Contractors for Public Works Ground Investigation
Field Work Category. One drill hole shall be sunk at each bored pile
position, whereas 2 drill holes are required for pile diameter
exceeding 2500mm. For this purpose, at least 5 m of continuous rock
core samples of N size (61 mm diameter) shall be taken for
inspection. Two copies of the drill hole logs shall be submitted
directly to the SO by the Ground Investigation Contractor.

(iii)

Found pile on bedrock with a minimum embedment depth of 600

mm.

5-11

Section 5 Piling Work

(iv)

Bedrock is defined as rock mass of at least 5 m thick and being

Grade III/IV or better rock (as defined in GEOGUIDE 3, Guide to
Rock and Soil Descriptions prepared by Geotechnical Engineering
Office and published by GIS, Hong Kong).
For design purposes, the maximum bearing pressure of piles on
bedrock shall not exceed the following:
(a)

3 MPa for Grade III/ IV or better rock with total core

recovery greater than 75%

(b)

5 MPa for Grade III or better rock with total core recovery
greater than 85%

(c)

7.5 MPa for Grade II or better rock with total core recovery
greater than 95%

(v)

Do not use piles with enlarged bases unless specified otherwise.

Where so permitted, the size of the enlarged base shall not exceed
1.5 times the shaft diameter with a gradient not exceeding 30 degree
from vertical, and the enlarged base shall only be formed by
under-reaming with reverse circulation drill. The relevant technique
shall have been approved by the Development Bureau.

(vi)

The requirements of Clause 5.17 (ii) apply equally to large diameter

bored piles.

(vii)

Where the water level is higher than the bedrock level, carry out
concreting with a tremie pipe. Clean the pile base by air lift before
commencing concreting. Ensure the tremie pipe always penetrates
well below the top level of the concrete being poured.

(viii)

Supply concrete in sufficient quantities to ensure that concreting of

each pile proceeds without interruption. The concrete shall have a
minimum cement content of 400 kg/m3 and a minimum slump of 150
mm.

(ix)

Where the water level is higher than the bedrock level, the concrete
used shall have grade strength 25% higher than the design grade
strength.

(x)

Where a pile is founded on a stratum which deviates from the

predicted depth by more than 4 m, carry out additional borings to
satisfy the SO that the pile is acceptable.
When defects such as voids, unbound sediment or segregation of
concrete are observed at the base of the pile, the Contractor shall
carry out remedial works to rectify such defects.

(xi)

The Contractor shall first submit a method statement for approval.

Remedial works shall, inter alia, consist of further drilling to
determine the extent of the defects, cleaning by high pressure jetting
and subsequent pressure grouting. After completion, the Contractor
shall carry out verification coring to prove all defects are properly
filled with grout.
(xii)

Where steep bedrock profile is identified, the founding levels of

adjacent piles shall not differ by more than the clear distance
between the pile bases unless the stability of rock under the piles are
checked by recognized engineering principles, taking into account
the existence of any adverse joints.

(xiii)

For large diameter bored piles with diameters greater than 2000 mm,
reversed circulation drill (RCD) must be used to set the pile shaft in
rock and smooth out the rock surface. Should a similar machine and

5-12

Section 5 Piling Work

equipment that achieves equivalent results and of equal performance

to that of the RCD be proposed, the contractor shall demonstrate to
the satisfaction of the SO before submitting for approval.
Nonpercussion
cast in-situ
concrete piles

Hand-dug
caissons

5.20

5.21

(i)

Non-percussion cast in-situ concrete piles are those not exceeding

600 mm diameter formed by boring. The requirements of Clause
5.17 (i) and (ii) shall apply. Provide reinforcement as specified.

(ii)

Before the commencement of piling works, install drill holes as

required in the Contract to obtain sufficient information for the
calculations of pile lengths. The position and number of the drill
holes should be agreed with the SO on site. Two copies of the drill
hole logs have to be submitted to the SO.

(i)

Agree with the SO the order in which the caissons are to be

constructed before work commences.

(ii)

Adopt a method of construction that will not cause settlement or

disturbance of any kind to adjacent structures, pavements, public or
private services. Establish an approved monitoring system and take
regular readings and prepare and submit reports to the SO in the
format and quantity requested. Modify the method of construction if
the effects of ground movement are detected in any such structures,
pavements and services.

(iii)

Provide reinforcements and adequate ties in accordance with details

shown at Annex "E".

(iv)

The requirements of Clause 5.19 (iii) and (iv) apply equally to

hand-dug caissons.

(v)

The minimum clear working space inside the caisson (i.e. excluding
the lining) shall not be less than 1.8 m diameter. Do not use caissons
with enlarged base unless otherwise specified.

(vi)

No person shall enter a caisson which is within 10 m (centre to

centre) of a caisson being filled with concrete or a caisson containing
deep standing water. Take all other necessary precautions to ensure
the safety of workmen and all other persons on the Site and in
particular provide the following:
(a)

Caisson shafts: Provide around each shaft suitable toe boards

of 200 mm minimum height and fencing or other barriers to a
height of between 900 mm and 1150 mm to prevent persons
or solid matter from falling into the shaft. Keep working
platforms around the tops of caissons clear of all debris.
Keep all caisson shafts not being worked completely covered
at all times with a stout cover adequately secured and capable
of supporting a man's weight.

(b)

Ventilation of shafts: Provide sufficient electric fan-blowers

with light plastic tube ducting for an air supply direct to the
bottom of each caisson shaft under construction. The
equipment shall be capable of supplying air at a rate of not
less than 25 litres per second per person. Provide, in addition,
a suitable local exhaust system with exhaust inlets close to
pneumatic hammers/drills working below the level of the air
supply ducting, which should generally be at about the level
of the worker's head. A reasonable quantity of standby spares
should be available on the Site at all times. When drilling into
concrete, rock or similar, pneumatic drills should be fitted
with suitable dust extraction appliances. The diameter of the
exhaust inlet and the air volume flow-rates in the air supply

5-13

Section 5 Piling Work

and exhaust ducts shall be such as to reduce the average

airborne dust concentrations in the bottom of the caisson to
less than 0.1 mg/m3 respirable silica. The excavator shall also
be provided with suitable protective respirator. Care shall be
taken to ensure that air taken into the fan-blower is not
contaminated by exhaust gas from any nearby mechanical
plant and the direction of the prevailing wind must be given
due consideration.
Special attention shall also be paid when using explosives
which might result in noxious gases gathering within a
caisson shaft. Smoking shall not be allowed in caisson shafts.
(c)

Lighting in shafts: Provide lighting of sufficient brightness to

allow regular visual inspection of the lining at all levels. Any
evidence of cracking shall be fully investigated and remedial
work carried out immediately. Naked lights must never be
used in caisson shafts. All electrical equipment is to be of the
appropriate type, properly sealed and insulated and
effectively earthed.

(d)

Water in shafts: Provide pumps, including an adequate

number of standby pumps, or other means of dewatering to
ensure the safety of all workmen from danger of flooding
from any cause including flooding from abnormal weather
conditions such as cloudbursts, flash floods and the like.
Submersible electric-pumps used for dewatering within
caisson shafts shall be regularly checked to ensure that there
is proper isolation and insulation of the outer casing and that
the power terminals are fully protected.

(e)

Access to and communication in shafts: Provide access to all

levels of caisson shafts at all times whilst work is in progress
and a means of communication with workmen in the shafts of
such a type as will give immediate notice to the surface of the
occurrence of hazards which directly affect safety. Workmen
in caisson shafts shall never be left unattended.

(f)

Removal of persons in shafts: Provide means whereby

persons, including those in a semiconscious or unconscious
state, can be removed rapidly and safely from caisson shafts.

(g)

Lifting appliances: Provide suitable lifting appliances in all

caisson shafts where work is in progress or when access for
inspection is required. Lifting appliances used for lowering
or raising persons in the shaft shall terminate with a suitable
bucket, chair, safety harness or "Boatswain's" chair fitted
with an anti-tipping device and swivel connection at the
suspension point to prevent spinning.

(h)

Oxygen: Provide at all times equipment and spares to enable

oxygen to be administered immediately to persons in an
asphyxiated condition. Ensure the permanent presence on
Site during working hours of an operator fully trained in the
use of this equipment.

(i)

Regulations and Code of Practice: Ensure that proper

attention is paid to the appropriate sections of the Hong
Kong Construction Sites (Safety) Regulations, the Hong
Kong Factories and Industrial Undertakings (Confined
Spaces) Regulations, the Code of Safe Working Practices
for Hand-Dug Caissons published by the Occupation Safety
Health Council, the Code of Practice - Safety and Health at

5-14

Section 5 Piling Work

Work in Confined Spaces issued by Labour Department and
also to the Safety Precautions and Procedures for the
Construction and Descent of Machine-Bored Shafts for
Piling and Other Purposes, BS 8008.
(j)

(vii)

Contractor's responsibilities: Neither compliance with Clause

5.21 (vi) (a) to (i) above nor the omission of any other
specific item relating to the safety of workmen or other
persons on the Site in the said paragraphs shall relieve the
Contractor from his responsibilities in relation to safety.

Excavate each caisson shaft in stages not exceeding 1m deep, unless

otherwise specified. Cast the required concrete lining as each stage
of excavation is completed and allow the concrete therein to achieve
adequate strength before the next stage commences.

(viii) Stabilise any unstable layers of subsoil encountered by grouting or

similar. No further excavation will be permitted until the stabilisation
work is completed.
(ix)

Except where pile locations coincide with site borings already

carried out to ascertain the bedrock, carry out a pneumatic drill test at
the bottom of each caisson to locate any soft layer occurring within a
depth of 5 m below the caisson bottom and obtain approval before
concreting is carried out. The weight of the drilling machine and the
size of the drilling rod must be approved. Record the rate of
penetration and prepare and submit to the SO penetration drill test
reports in the quantity and format requested. The bottom of the
caisson will not normally be approved when the time required to drill
through any 300 mm thickness is less than two minutes using a drill
weighing 35 kg with a rod or bit of 25 mm diameter. Pressure grout
the drill holes after completion of test with cement and sand (1:3).

(x)

Clear the bottom of each caisson of any loose material prior to

concreting. Remove water from the bottom of caissons which are to
be cast 'dry'.

(xi)

Supply concrete in sufficient quantities to ensure that concreting of

each caisson proceeds without interruption. Cast concrete to a
height such that surface laitance may be removed at completion of
concreting leaving sound concrete at cut off level.

(xii)

'Dry' caisson is defined as a caisson having no standing water at the

bottom.

(xiii) Place concrete in 'dry' caissons through a hopper at the top end of a
vertical pipe of minimum 200 mm (internal) diameter. The bottom
end of the pipe shall be kept in constant contact with the concrete.
The rate of concreting shall be such that the concrete is able to flow
and fill the caisson by self-compaction. The concrete shall have a
minimum cement content of 300 kg/m3 and a minimum slump of 100
mm. Compaction methods may be used with a less workable mix for
shallow caissons.
(xiv)

Place concrete in 'wet' caissons with tremie pipe. Ensure the tremie
pipe always penetrates well below the top level of the concrete being
poured. The concrete shall have a minimum cement content of
400 kg/m3, and minimum slump of 150 mm.

(xv)

Provide and maintain during the construction period one set of colour
video camera, TV monitor and video cassette recorder, all of VHS
system, with all necessary accessories including tape cassettes for

5-15

Section 5 Piling Work

transmitting and recording as directed by the SO. Record the sides

and bottom of the shaft of each caisson with the video system and
transmit the image onto the TV monitor at ground level for the
viewing and inspection of the SO. On completion of the Works
provide one record copy of the recorded video cassette tapes to the
SO.

Tolerances in
setting out of
piles

5.22

(xvi)

The requirement of Clause 5.19 (xi) applies equally to hand-dug

caissons.

(i)

Carefully set out the position of piles as specified.

(ii)

Construct piles to the following maximum permitted tolerances on

plan measured at cut off level in any direction from the actual
geometric centre of the pile to the specified designated position:
(a)

(b)
(iii)

)
)
)
)
)
)
)

75 mm

Mini piles

15 mm

Construct piles to the following maximum permitted tolerances

from the vertical or any specified batter:
(a)

(b)
(c)

Effect of
5.23
vibration on
adjacent
structures and
services

Precast concrete piles

Precast prestressed tubular piles
Percussion cast in-situ concrete piles
Steel H piles
Non-percussion cast in-situ concrete piles
Large diameter bored piles
Hand-dug caissons

Precast concrete piles

Precast prestressed tubular piles
Percussion cast in-situ concrete piles
Steel 'H' piles
Non-percussion cast in-situ concrete piles

)
)
)
)
)

Large diameter bored piles

Hand-dug caissons

)
)

1 in 75

Mini piles

1 in 100

1 in 75

(iv)

Finish tops of piles to within a tolerance of zero to - 25 mm from the

cut-off levels specified in Clause 5.24 (i).

(v)

Carry out a survey and record the location of the centres of piles
prior to completion of the Works. Submit proposals for remedial
works, if necessary, to the SO for agreement within 10 days after the
completion of the said survey. Provide the SO with three complete
sets of prints and one set of negatives of the agreed remedial works
drawings within three days after receiving the SO's approval.

(i)

Vibration caused by piling work shall not exceed the maximum peak
particle velocity of ground movement of 7.5 mm/second and 15
mm/second for water retaining structures and water mains
respectively, as measured with a vibroscope. Comply with
restrictions on particle velocity caused to adjoining structures as
specified.

(ii)

When specified, install "Test piles" before general piling work

commences in order to establish the vibration caused by the
proposed piling system. "Test piles" will be piles, selected by the
SO, which are adjacent to any water mains or water retaining
structures and the like. The maximum peak particle velocity shall be
recorded at every meter length of penetration of pile, at final set and

5-16

Section 5 Piling Work

at levels where obstructions are encountered. Should vibrograph

measurements reveal that the specified vibration levels are being
exceeded, cease piling and revise the method of driving or the
proposed pile system to ensure that the levels of vibration created are
reduced to within the specified limits.

Cutting off
pile heads

5.24

(iii)

Should any unrecorded water main or similar be located during the

construction period, vibrograph measurements shall be taken to
establish the vibration caused by the piling system adopted. Should
the vibrograph measurements reveal that the specified vibration
levels are being exceeded the general principles contained in Clause
5.23 (ii) above will apply.

(iv)

Provide and retain on the Site, until completion of installation of

piling, all necessary equipment for the taking of vibrograph readings
to ascertain vibration levels. The vibrograph must be of a type that
produces a permanent printed record of the vibration created.
Provide experienced personnel for the carrying out of vibrograph
readings and give the SO at least 48 hours notice before taking
measurements. Provide the SO with a copy of each vibration record.

(i)

The cut off levels of piles shown on the tender drawings are tentative
and may be altered if so required by the SO.

(ii)

Excavate to expose, trim and cut off pile heads to the specified
levels.

(iii)

For steel piles, execute cutting by approved means. In the event of

damage being made to the head of the pile, cut off the defective parts
and make good the pile to the satisfaction of the SO.

(iv)

Score or chase around concrete piles at cut off level to an approved

depth prior to removing pile heads to ensure that concrete below cut
off level is not damaged. Cut away and make good cracked or
defective concrete with new concrete properly bonded to the old.
Rectify displaced dowel bars.
For precast prestressed tubular piles, the cutting off shall be by
means of an abrasive disc.

Pile caps tie

beams and
dowel bars

5.25

(v)

Allow a minimum of seven days between the completion of casting

an in-situ concrete pile and the cutting off of the pile head.
Note: (a) For large diameter bored piles and caissons, cast
concrete at least 0.75 m above the cut off level such that
surface laitance may be removed at completion of
concreting leaving sound concrete at cut off level.
(b) For other cast in-situ piles, the height of concrete cast
above the cut off level should be sufficient for
maintaining the pressure head as required by the system.

(i)

Unless otherwise specified, pile caps are part of the Works.

(ii)

(a)

All pile caps and strap beams shall be designed by the

Contractor to Code of Practice for Structural Use of
Concrete, for the worst combination of load cases. The
design shall be certified by a Registered Structural Engineer.
Where specified, design tie beams to tie all columns in both
directions to take care of moments due to eccentricities
between load centre and centroid of pile or pile group
underneath. The eccentricities shall not be taken as less than
75 mm in any case.

5-17

Section 5 Piling Work

(b)

(c)

All concrete works for pile caps and strap beams shall be to
Section 6 of General Specification. Structural concrete shall
come from a supplier registered under the Quality Scheme for
the production and supply of concrete.
PFA or GGBS concrete shall be used in all pile caps and
substructure construction where the concrete structural
elements bear a least dimension over 750 mm. The proportion
of PFA or GGBS of the total cementitious content in such
concrete shall be in accordance with Clause 6.30.

(d)

A 50 mm blinding layer of grade 10/20 concrete shall be laid

prior to casting of pile caps and strap beams.

(e)

Steel bars shall be plain steel reinforcing bars (denoted by R),

Grade 500B or 500C ribbed steel reinforcing bars (denoted
by T) to Hong Kong SAR Construction Standard CS 2. All
reinforcement shall be cut or bent to comply with BS 8666
unless otherwise specified.

(f)

Cover to all bars including links and stirrups shall be 50 mm.

(g)

If large concrete rafts are to be constructed:

(i)

Allow sufficient chairs to support top reinforcement in

rafts.

(ii) The positions and method of forming construction joints

including sample treatment are to be submitted for
approval prior to work on site.
(iii) For concrete in large pile caps and piled rafts, measures
should be taken in temperature curing to minimize
temperature differential occurring in the concrete
sections. The side formwork shall not be removed
during the curing and as soon as the concrete is cast and
bleeding water disappears, the surface shall be cured for
a minimum of 4 days by either:
Covering the concrete with a layer of fine aggregate,
minimum 25 mm thick, and keep it constantly wet, or
Covering the surface with one layer of 50 mm thick
polystyrene boards secured with canvas on top.
(h)

Where specified in the Contract, the

Specification
for
Reinforced
Massive
Structures shall apply.

Particular
Concrete

(iii) Provide dowel bars as specified.

(iv) Thoroughly wire brush the dowel bars to remove all rust, scale,
adhered mud and the like, and prepare and apply a thick protective
coat of approved cement grout on all exposed areas of the dowel bars.
Backfilling

5.26

(i)

Backfill pits after cutting off pile heads if the construction of pile caps
does not follow immediately.

(ii)

Compact all fill around pile caps and tie beams to not less than 90% of
the maximum dry density determined in accordance with test method
10.2 or 10.4 of Geospec 3 Model Specification for Soil Testing
issued by the Geotechnical Engineering Office as directed by the SO.
Determine the in-situ field density in accordance with Geospec 3, test
method 11.1 or 11.2, as directed by the SO.

5-18

Section 5 Piling Work

(iii) Remove all surplus excavated materials from the Site.

Report sheets

5.27

Forward daily to the SO in duplicate, report sheets for piles formed the
previous day, giving for each pile its identity number, size, gross and nett
length together with the serial number of rigs or machines used, and
information on any obstructions or special phenomena met during the
formation of the piles. Provide the following data for the appropriate type of
pile:
Type of piles

(i)

(ii)

(iii)

Particulars

Precast concrete (a)

pile, and precast
prestressed
(b)
tubular pile
(c)

Percussion
cast in-situ
concrete pile

Steel 'H' pile

Date pile or segment (with serial number) cast;

Length of pile before cutting off;
Hammer weight and type;

(d)

Drop of hammer;

(e)

Type and length of "follower" adopted if applicable;

(f)

Penetration record (number of blows per 300 mm

penetration) for the full length of piles, for the number of
piles selected by the SO;

(g)

Final sets for the last 10 blows;

(h)

Field record of temporary compression at the final set

stage (by recording on a card or graph paper attached to
the face of the pile while drawing a pencil along a straight
edge placed against it).

(a)

Length of the steel tube;

(b)

Hammer weight and type;

(c)

Drop of hammer;

(d)

Penetration record for the full length of pile, for the

number of piles selected by the SO;

(e)

Final sets of the last 10 blows;

(f)

Field record of temporary compression at final stage;

(g)

Volume of concrete cast;

(h)

method of compacting concrete;

(i)

Casting time on completing each pile.

(a)

Length of steel 'H' pile before cutting off;

(b)

Number of splicings carried out;

(c)

Hammer weight and type;

(d)

Drop of hammer;

(e)

Penetration record for the full length of pile, for the

number of piles selected by the SO;

(f)

Final sets of the last 10 blows;

5-19

Section 5 Piling Work

(iv)

(v)

(vi)

Large
diameter
bored pile

Hand-dug
caissons

Mini pile

(g)

Field record of temporary compression at final set stage;

(h)

Actual length of pile from cut off level.

(a)

Excavation record for the full length of pile (including

classification of each type of soil encountered and the
depth at which encountered);

(b)

Length of pile;

(c)

Slump of concrete;

(d)

Graphical plot for theoretical and actual volume of

concrete cast against concrete top level, particularly at
withdrawal of casing segments;

(e)

Method of compacting concrete;

(f)

Casting time on completion of each pile.

(a)

Excavation record for the full length of caisson;

(b)

Length of caisson;

(c)

Rate of drilling into bedrock by pneumatic drill;

(d)

Slump of concrete;

(e)

Method of compacting concrete.

(f)

Casting time on completing each pile.

(a)

Pile reference number

(b)

Date and time of boring

(c)

Soil samples taken and in-situ test carried out if any

(d)

Date pile installed

(e)
(f)

Pile type and size, including diameter and number of

reinforcement bars and internal size of casing
Date and time of drilling

(g)

Date of grouting

(h)

Position of pile in the works and ground level at pile

position

(i)

Working level

(j)

Drilling rates and material encountered

(k)

Samples of rock cutting flushing in the rock socket

(l)
(m)

Depth from working level to pile toe

Toe level

(n)

Depth from working level to pile head level

(o)

Depth and level of top of rock socket

(p)

Length and toe level of casing

5-20

Section 5 Piling Work

Loading tests

5.28

(i)

(q)

Length of reinforcement

(r)

Grout mix

(s)

Volume of grout in pile (actual and theoretical)

(t)

Details of obstructions, delays and other interruptions to

sequence of work

(u)

Flow rate and total time required for the grouting

operation

(v)

Grouting pressure used

(w)

Contours of rockhead inferred from drill hole logs

The SO may order 1% of nos. of piles installed (minimum one

number or more piles), other than large diameter bored piles and
caissons, to be load tested to twice the theoretical safe loading
capacity (for both vertical piles and raking piles). Loading tests of
piles shall be carried out by a Testing Firm employed direct by the
Employer. The Contractor shall co-ordinate the works with the
Testing Firm and comply with the following requirements:
(a)

Preparation of Test Piles

The Contractor shall:
(i)

Expose and prepare pile heads such that the pile heads
are level, clean and free from soil and debris and able to
accommodate the testing equipment on the pile heads.

(ii) If required by the SO, extend the test piles to a suitable

level.
(iii) Design and construct a suitable pile cap to the test pile.
(b)

Attendance to be provided by the Contractor

The Contractor shall, in addition to those items listed in
Clause 1.42, provide the following attendance to facilitate the
testing of piles by the Testing Firm:
(i)

Provide access to the test piles.

(ii) Provide and erect kentledge with adequate stability and

safety and approved by the SO for the loading tests. The
weight of the kentledge shall be at least 1.15 times the
maximum test load and shall be placed such that the load
centroid matches the centre of the test pile.
(iii) Install any fixtures as required by the Testing Firm,
necessary for the carrying out of the loading tests and
protect the same against weather.
(iv) Provide electricity and lighting 24 hours a day for the
pile loading tests.
(v) Witness the testing process throughout the testing
period.
(vi) Provide a weather protected room for accommodating
the equipment and instruments used by the Testing Firm.

5-21

Section 5 Piling Work

The Testing Firm will be responsible for providing the

reference frames, all measuring equipment and for
surveying the movement of the reference frames. It will also
provide 24-hour security throughout the duration of the
loading test.
(c)

Loading Test Failures

Should any pile tested fail to comply with the Contract
requirements, the Contractor shall bear all the costs arising
from the testing of additional piles.

(ii)

The test load shall be applied in 2 equal increments up to the

theoretical safe loading capacity of pile, then released and reapplied
in 4 equal increments up to the maximum test load and maintained
for at least 72 hours before removal. The load at each incremental
stage shall be held for a period of 10 minutes or longer until the rate
of settlement is less than 0.05 mm in 10 minutes.

(iii)

Recovery after the removal of the maximum test load is deemed to

have ceased when the rate of recovery is less than 0.1 mm/hour
observed in a period of not less than 15 minutes.

(iv)

A total settlement or residual settlement in excess of that calculated

from the formulae below shall be deemed to be failure to satisfy the
settlement criterion in the loading test.
Total
Settlement

d + D/120 + 4 mm

Residual
settlement

D/120 + 4 mm; and 25% of the maximum

pile head settlement during the test,
whichever is the greater.

where:
d

PL/AE

Diameter of circular pile in mm, or

The least lateral dimension of steel 'H' pile

section in mm (for driven steel 'H' pile )

Test load

Nett length of pile (For piles with rock

sockets, L shall be measured to the centre
of the rock socket.)

Cross sectional area of pile

Young's modulus of pile given below:

Young's modulus
(MPa)

Concrete piles
Grade
20

18,700

25

20,500

30

22,200

78.58

33,900

Steel piles

205,000

5-22

Section 5 Piling Work

(v)

Complete preparatory works for the loading test not later than 28 days
from the date the instruction to test is received.

(vi) Make good the test pile after completion of the test including breaking
up and clearing away any temporary pile cap and backfilling the pit in
accordance with Clause 5.26.
Coring tests

Failure of
loading test or
coring test

Inspection of
piles

5.29

5.30

5.31

(i)

The SO may order one or more coring tests to be carried out to any
number of large diameter bored piles or caissons.

(ii)

Coring tests comprise the recovery of continuous cores through the

concrete shaft and carried down to a distance of at least half a diameter
of the pile base, or 600 mm, whichever is larger, into bedrock with a
diamond bit and double barrels and subsequently pressure grouting the
drill holes with cement and sand (1:3) grout. The diameter of the cores
to be as follows:
(a)

100 mm (minimum) where the maximum size of aggregate in

the concrete shaft does not exceed 25 mm.

(b)

150 mm (minimum) where the maximum size of aggregate in

the concrete shaft exceeds 25 mm and does not exceed
40 mm.

(iii)

Arrange cores recovered in core boxes in proper sequence. Deliver

sample sections of cores to the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) for
testing. When honeycombing or incomplete recovery of cores at any
location along the full length of cores occurs, the pile shall be
deemed to have failed the coring test. Honeycombing shall mean
interconnected voids arising from, for example, inadequate
compaction or lack of mortar.

(iv)

Should the estimated in-situ cube strength of any sample section of

core be less than 85% of the design grade strength, the pile shall be
deemed to have failed the coring test. The estimated in-situ cube
strength shall be assessed in accordance with CS1.

When a pile fails a loading or coring test, install additional pile(s) such that
the revised piling layout is sufficient to sustain the loadings as given in the
loading schedule. For driven steel H-piles, the Contractor may choose to
retain the pile as a working pile and redrive it to a deeper level to attain a
bearing capacity complying with the contract requirements. However, PDA
test and CAPWAP analysis shall be carried out to test the pile for integrity
and determine pile capacity. The cost of PDA test and CAPWAP analysis
shall be borne by the Contractor. The SO may carry out other test(s) as he
deems appropriate.
Carry out test probes if required to position additional piles. Design
extended or extra pile caps and strap beams and any other work necessitated
by the pile failure and obtain the agreement of the SO in writing.
The SO may direct that piles be exposed for inspection.
NON-DESTRUCTIVE INTEGRITY TESTS OF PILES

Nondestructive
integrity
testing

5.32

Non-destructive integrity tests shall be carried out by a Testing Firm

appointed by the Employer. The Contractor shall, in addition to those items
listed in Clause 1.42, provide attendance and other preparatory works as
required.
The Contractor shall notify the SO 5 working days in advance for carrying
out the non-destructive integrity tests of piles on site.

5-23

Section 5 Piling Work

Number of
tests required
for nondestructive
testing

5.33

Unless otherwise specified, the number of piles to be tested is as indicated in

Annex 'F'.

Preparation of
piles for nondestructive
integrity
testing
generally

5.34

Preparation of piles for non-destructive integrity testing generally:

Preparation
for piles for
Sonic
Logging

5.35

(i)

The type and extent of preparation work and attendance required for
non-destructive integrity testing depends on the type of pile used in
the contract.

(ii)

Co-ordinate with the Testing Firm to facilitate the testing of piles.

(iii)

Provide the Testing Firm access to the test pile and witness the testing
process throughout the testing period.

(iv)

Provide the Testing Firm with a copy of the ground investigation

report, a Site plan showing bore hole locations and pile layout and a
list of the piles to be tested with the date of concreting, total length,
length of casing (if any), diameter and volume of concrete used plus
any other relevant information required for the testing of the pile.

Prepare piles for Sonic Logging

(i)

Place in all large diameter bored piles, barrettes and diaphragm wall
panels, tubes of mild steel not less than 42 mm internal diameter
which shall be regular and free from defects, so as to permit the free
and unobstructed passage of the testing probes. Tubes shall be
watertight, free from corrosion with clean internal and external faces.

(ii)

The tubes shall be fitted with a screw-on steel watertight shoe and
shall be securely fixed to the interior of the reinforcement cage or
fixed by other methods approved by the SO. The tubes shall be
parallel to each other and to the axis of the pile. Where sections of
tubing are required to be spliced, joints shall be made watertight.

(iii)

The tubes shall be plugged or capped before concreting. The tubes

shall extend the full depth of the pile, barrette or diaphragm wall
panel, and stop at about 300 mm above the top of the concrete cast.

(iv)

Install tubes in the number tabulated below and at spaces as directed

by the SO:
(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)

(v)

Large diameter
bored piles, 700 900 mm diameter
Large diameter
bored piles,
exceeding 900 mm
diameter
Barrettes up to
3.0 m long

- 3 No./pile

Barrettes over 3.0 m

long and diaphragm
wall panels

- Sets of 2 No. at 3.0 m

centres/barrette or
diaphragm wall panel

- 4 No./pile

- 4 No./barrette

Before testing, fill up the tube with water to provide the necessary
acoustic coupling and refill with water prior to testing as necessary.
A plan shall be provided to the Testing Firm showing the layout and
the constructed length of the structural elements to be tested.

5-24

Section 5 Piling Work

(vi)

All tubes shall be cut off flush with the concrete and filled up by
pressure grouting with cement and sand (l:3) grout at completion of
all testing.

(vii)

Notwithstanding Clause 5.35 (i), for barrettes and large diameter

bored piles with diameter up to 2500 mm, one of the mild steel tubes
shall be replaced with a larger tube of 100 to 150 mm internal
diameter. For large diameter bored piles exceeding 2500 mm
diameter, two numbers of the mild steel tubes shall be replaced with
a larger tube of 100 to 150 mm internal diameter. Size of tube shall
be big enough to obtain a core of N size. The bottom of the larger
steel tube should be fitted with a mild steel cap, at about 700 mm
above the founding level of the pile.

Toe Coring

5.35.1

Toe coring to obtain a core of N size to examine the interface between pile
and bedrock without coring through the entire length of pile shall be carried
out. One number of toe coring shall be carried out for each barrette and large
diameter bored pile with diameter up to 2500 mm and two numbers of toe
coring shall be carried out for each large diameter bored pile with diameter
exceeding 2500 mm. The toe coring length shall be more than 1400 mm of
which at least 700 mm shall be into bedrock.

Preparation of
piles for

5.36

Prepare piles for Integrity Testing

Integrity
Testing

(i)

Pile head surface

Cut off the piles to the required level and trim off reinforcement bars
if necessary and make good as directed by the SO. Provide a level
and smooth surface for the motion sensor attachment at impact
locations as advised by the Testing Firm

(ii)

(iii)

For cast in-situ piles

(a)

No cast in-situ concrete pile shall be tested until at least

7 days after construction.

(b)

The pile head shall be free of debris and the like, and shall not
be more than l metre above or below adjacent ground level.
All weak mortar, broken concrete and the like, shall be
removed from the pile head to expose sound concrete, and the
head made horizontal over its complete cross-section.

For precast prestressed tubular piles

Testing may be performed on the steel plate of the original pile head.
In such case, prepare the pile such that the pile head and the screw
holes are clearly exposed, dry and free from soil and debris.

(iv)

Inspection
Before testing, the heads of the piles shall be inspected by the Testing
Firm for regularity and soundness.

Preparation of
piles for
Dynamic
Testing

5.37

Prepare piles for Dynamic Testing:

(i)

Testing may be performed during piling construction (installation

testing) or at some time after construction (restrike testing). Provide
the following equipment and work for carrying out the tests.
(a)

Access to the test pile.

5-25

Section 5 Piling Work

(b)
(c)

Driving equipment for piles selected for pile driving analysis

and driving the piles.
Extension to the test piles to a level as and when required for
the dynamic testing.

(d)

Welders and welding facilities when required.

(e)

Electric power supply at the test pile location.

(f)

Final set record measurement during the test.

5-26

Section 5 Piling Work

5-27

Section 5 Piling Work

5-28

Section 5 Piling Work

PLUG WELD

PLUG

2 NO. T20-U BAR

PLUG

2 NO. T20-U BAR

5-29

Section 5 Piling Work

FOR GRADE 500B RIBBED STEEL REINFORCING BARS,

L = 44D IN GRADE 25 CONCRETE
= 40D IN GRADE 30 CONCRETE
= 38D IN GRADE 35 CONCRETE
= 35D IN GRADE 40 CONCRETE
= 33D IN GRADE 45 CONCRETE

5-30

Section 5 Piling Work

FOR GRADE 500B RIBBED STEEL REINFORCING BARS,

L = 44D IN GRADE 25 CONCRETE
= 40D IN GRADE 30 CONCRETE
= 38D IN GRADE 35 CONCRETE
= 35D IN GRADE 40 CONCRETE
= 33D IN GRADE 45 CONCRETE

5-31

Section 5 Piling Work

Number of Piles requiring Non-Destructive Integrity Test

Type of
pile
Tests

Hand-dug
Caissons

Large
Diameter
Bored Piles &
Barrettes

Steel H-piles,
Precast Concrete Piles,
Precast Prestressed
Tubular Piles

Non-Percussion
Cast in-situ Concrete Piles

Pile
Integrity
Test

15%

Dynamic
Pile Test

Not less than 30 nos. or 15%

whichever is the greater

CAPWAP
Analysis

5%

Sonic
Logging

All piles

ANNEX F

5-32

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

SECTION 6
STRUCTURAL CONCRETE WORK
GENERAL
Generally

6.01

(i)

Falsework is defined as any temporary structure used to support a

permanent structure during erection until the permanent structure is
self-supporting. No tropical hardwood propping shall be used to
support formwork for concrete work unless otherwise agreed by the
SO.

(ii)

Traditional formwork is assembled from individual elements

comprising of sheathing material referred in BS 5975 and the
backing structure which supports the sheathing.

(iii)

Formwork or forms is that section of the temporary works used to

give the required shape, surface finish and support to poured
concrete. It consists primarily of sheathing material in direct contact
with the concrete and joists or stringers supporting the sheathing.

(iv)

Permanent formwork or formwork left-in is formwork designed to

remain in position as part of the permanent work.

(v)

Notwithstanding any other clause in the GS, the Contractor shall take
sole responsibility for the safe transportation, assembly, erection,
maintenance and removal of formwork and falsework.

(vi)

The design of formwork or falsework shall be such that no part of the

formwork or falsework shall project into the finished surface of the
concrete.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Design
submission

Loadings for
design and
construction

6.02

6.03

(i)

Prior to construction, submit for approval the design, supporting

calculations, working drawings and working procedures of
formwork and falsework in accordance with BS 5975.

(ii)

When specified, submit the design of falsework (including supports

and foundations) and provide certification by an independent
professional engineer, at various stages, for the adequacy of the
design as well as its proper execution. The independent professional
engineer shall be a member of the Hong Kong Institution of
Engineers (Structural or Civil Engineering Discipline) or equivalent.

Design and construct formwork and falsework to withstand the worst

combination of the following without causing bulging or deflection:
(i)

Total weight of formwork, reinforcement and wet concrete.

(ii)

Construction loads, including dynamic effects of placing,

compacting and construction traffic.

(iii)

Wind loads.

6-1

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

MATERIALS
(i)

Props shall be to BS 4074. No timber props and bracings shall be

permitted.

(ii)

Formwork shall be timber or moulds of other materials against which

the concrete is cast.

(iii)

Formwork shall not be splitted, or have other defects such as cracks.

(iv)

Formwork ties shall be of a removable type.

(v)

In waterproof concrete, any tie through the concrete shall be of a type

with a baffle and shall leave no holes in the concrete.

Surface
retarders

(vi)

Surface retarders shall be of a type which shall not stain or colour the
concrete.

Release agents

(vii)

Release agents used on formwork for structures containing potable

water shall be non-toxic and shall not impart a taste to the water.

Props &
bracings

6.04

Formwork

Formwork ties

(viii) Release agents containing mineral oil shall not be used. These
include barrier paint, polyurethane varnish, or wax.
(ix)

Release agent used on steel formwork shall contain a rust-inhibiting

agent.

Void formers

(x)

Polystyrene shall not be used as void formers and box-out material

unless permitted by the SO.

Wood
preservatives

(xi)

Wood preservatives in permanent timber formwork shall be to

Clause 21.30.

STORAGE
Storage of
formwork

6.05

Storage of
release agents
and surface
retarders

(i)

Store formwork off the ground on level supports and in a manner

which shall not result in damage or in deformation or in
contamination of the formwork.

(ii)

Release agents and surface retarders in sealed containers shall be

properly marked to identify the contents. They shall be protected
from exposure to conditions which may affect the material. Store
materials in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations
and do not use the materials after the recommended shelf life has
expired.

APPROVAL PROCEDURES
(i)

Prior approval from the SO shall be obtained before work proceeds

for casting concrete below ground against sides of excavation.

Holes, inserts or
fixings

(ii)

Prior approval from the SO shall be obtained before work proceeds,

for size, type and position of any holes, inserts or fixings by the
Contractor or his sub-contractor. No part of the concrete shall be
drilled or cut without prior approval of the SO.

Surface
retarders and
release agents

(iii)

Prior approval from the SO shall be obtained before application for

the use, type and location of surface retarders and release agents.

Work below
ground

6.06

6-2

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(iv)

Inspection of
formwork prior
to fixing of
reinforcement

No reinforcement shall be fixed until the formwork has been

inspected and approved by the SO.

CONSTRUCTION
(i)

Scaffolding shall not be used to support formwork or falsework even

under the erection or dismantling process.

(ii)

Cambers shown on drawings relate to the concrete immediately

before the formwork is struck.

(i)

Falsework shall be carried down to construction which is sufficiently

strong to afford the necessary support without damage to any portion
of the structure. Falsework supported directly on soil shall not be
permitted. Where necessary, falsework shall be carried down to
foundations or other suitable bases.

(ii)

Falsework shall be arranged so that it can be readily dismantled and

removed from the cast concrete without difficulty or damage to the
permanent structure. Where necessary, falsework shall be arranged
so that the soffit can be retained in position for such period as
required by Clause 6.12/Table 6.1 of the GS.

(i)

Props shall be of sufficient strength and number and placed in such a

manner that they adequately, and without excessive deflection,
support the loads likely to be imposed on them.

(ii)

Props shall be spaced at no more than 2 m centres in both directions

and shall be adequately cross-braced.

(i)

Formwork shall be firmly supported and individual panels shall be of

a rigid nature.

(ii)

Wall formwork shall at all times be secured so that it will not be

toppled over by wind. Do not leave unsecured wall formwork in a
vertical position.

(iii)

The faces and edges of formwork shall be clean and free of

projecting nails.

(iv)

Formers for formwork profile, chamfers, splays, rebates and other

features shall be rigidly and firmly fixed to the formwork.

Left-in
formwork

(v)

Wood preservatives shall be applied to all surfaces of left in timber

formwork.

Sloping
formwork

(vi)

Where the inclination exceeds 15 degrees from the horizontal,

formwork to the top surface shall be provided.

Joints in
formwork

(vii)

All joints in formwork including joints between formwork and

completed work shall be closely fitted to prevent leakage of grout.
Gaps, if any, shall be sealed with gasket, filler, sealant or tape before
fixing reinforcement.

Generally

6.07

Cambers

Falsework

Props

Formwork

6.08

6.09

6.10

(viii) All joints in formwork shall be tightly secured against completed

work to prevent the formation of stepping or ridges in the concrete.

6-3

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Forming holes
and chases
Fixing devices

(ix)

Formwork ties
and components

(xi)

Formwork ties and components shall be fixed in such a manner that

they do not touch reinforcement or build-in component. Any part left
in the concrete shall be at least 40 mm or equivalent to the specified
nominal cover to the reinforcement, whichever is greater.

(xii)

Formwork ties and components shall be fitted tightly against

formwork faces such that no loss of grout occurs.

(x)

Inserts or box-out to form holes and chases to specified sizes and

shapes shall be fixed in correct positions before placing concrete.
Any device for securing formwork or falsework shall not be allowed
to remain within the specified concrete cover.

(xiii) Unless otherwise permitted by the SO, formwork ties and

components used with profiled formwork shall be a type such that
holes left by the ties and their components are small enough to be
completely located within the recesses of the concrete surface.
Use of release
agents

Cleanliness

(xiv)

Where surface treatment requires bonded adhesion, release agents

shall not be used.

(xv)

Formwork faces shall be cleaned before release agents are applied.

Concrete, reinforcement and built-in components shall not be
contaminated by the release agents.

(xvi)

Temporary openings in the formwork for cleaning or inspection shall

be provided if required. Immediately before concrete is placed in any
section of the formwork, the interior of that section shall be
completely cleared of all extraneous materials including water.

REMOVAL/ DISMANTLING OF FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK

Striking

6.11

Formwork and falsework shall be struck without disturbing, damaging, or

overloading the finished concrete work or the structure.

Minimum
periods before
striking

6.12

Minimum periods for retaining formwork and falsework in position before

striking shall be in accordance with Table 6.1, unless otherwise consented
by the SO.

6-4

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.1
Striking time
Type of formwork

Concrete
without PFA, GGBS
or PFAC
24 hrs

Concrete
with PFA, GGBS or
PFAC
30 hrs

Soffit formwork to slabs

(props left under)

4 days

4 days

Props to slabs (unloaded)

10 days

10 days

Soffit formwork to beams

(props left under)

7 days

7 days

Props to beams (unloaded)

16 days

16 days

Props to cantilevers

28 days

28 days

12 hrs

12 hrs

Vertical formwork to columns,

beams and walls (unloaded)

Inclined formwork to top surface

6.13

(i)

These periods are for Portland cement, at 15C temperature. Increase

these periods for lower temperatures as instructed by the SO.

(ii)

Where the props shall be left in place whilst the soffit formwork to
slabs and beams shall be removed, such props shall either be
designed to remain in position throughout the striking process
without having to be temporarily removed or alternatively, if agreed
by the SO, be so designed that a few can be removed at a time and
replaced immediately.

(iii)

Do not place construction loads on any unshored portion of the

structure under construction. The number of floors requiring
propping shall be as instructed by the SO according to the design
loads of such floors.

Not used.
REINFORCEMENT

Steel
reinforcement

6.14

Steel reinforcement shall be plain steel reinforcing bars or ribbed steel

reinforcing bars to CS2 or steel fabric to BS 4483. Cold reduced steel wire
used for the manufacture of steel fabric shall be to BS 4482.

Test certificate

6.15

Obtain steel reinforcement from suppliers who shall be able to produce

certificates for each batch of steel reinforcement supplied to site. The
certificates to be submitted to the SO for steel bars shall be in accordance
with the class of reinforcement delivered to the Site, all as detailed in CS2.
The certificates to be submitted for each batch of fabric reinforcement
delivered to the Site shall come from a manufacturer with a third party
certification by a certification body, accredited by the Hong Kong
Accreditation Service or its Mutual Recognition Arrangement/Arrangement
partners, to ISO 9001. The certificate shall show the manufacturers name,
the date and place of manufacture and that the reinforcement complies with
the requirements of BS 4483 and including details of:

6-5

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(i)

The bond classification;

(ii)

The cast analysis;

(iii)

The carbon equivalent value;

(iv)

The results of the tensile and rebend tests, including the effective
cross-sectional area for tensile tests;

(v)

The results of the bond performance tests; and

(vi)

The results of the weld tests.

A batch of fabric reinforcement is any quantity of fabric reinforcement of the

same type, size and grade, produced by the same manufacturer, covered by
the same mill and test certificates and delivered to the Site at any one time.
Cleanliness

6.16

Supply steel reinforcement free from loose mill scale, loose rust, oil grease
or other matter likely to adversely affect the bond with concrete.

Test specimens

6.17

(i)

Provide and cut test specimens from each batch of steel reinforcement
as directed by the SO. All test specimens shall be appropriately
marked and delivered to the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) for
testing. No claim in respect of steel suffering from damage or rod
lengths being reduced due to the taking of testing specimens will be
entertained.

(ii)

Alternatively the Contractor may deliver test specimens to the

independent laboratories approved by the SO.

(iii)

Test certificates shall be sent to the SO directly from these

independent laboratories.

(iv)

Allow sufficient time for the testing of specimens. Do not use steel
reinforcement until the relevant test specimens have successfully
passed all tests. Remove unsatisfactory material off the Site when
instructed by the SO.

(v)

For steel reinforcing bars, determination of mass per metre, tensile

test, rebend test, chemical analysis and test on bond property based
on surface geometry shall be carried out on test specimens for each
batch of steel reinforcing bars delivered to site in accordance with
CS2.

(vi)

For fabric reinforcement, provide samples from each batch as

follows:
Sampling rate of fabric reinforcement
Size of batch
No. of samples per batch
0 50 tonnes
1
Each additional 50 tonnes or part of
1
50 tonnes

(vii)

Each sample shall comprise three 1.2 m long x 1.2 m wide test
specimens taken from different sheets in the batch. Each test
specimen shall contain at least three wires in each direction.

(viii) Each sample of fabric reinforcement shall be tested to determine the

yield stress, tensile strength, elongation, weld shear strength, rebend
performance, unit mass and pitch dimension.

6-6

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(ix)

The method of testing shall be in accordance with the following:

Cold reduced steel wire
Steel fabric

(x)

: BS 4482
: BS 4483

The number of tests on each sample of fabric reinforcement shall be

as follows:

Description
Steel fabric
- fabric sheet
- longitudinal
wire
- transverse
wire

Tensile

Type and number of tests

Rebend
Unit
Weld
Pitch
Mass Shear Dimension
Stress

3
-

1
-

(xi)

A batch of fabric reinforcement is considered as not complying with

the specified requirements for characteristic strength if the yield
stress in any tensile test carried out on any sample taken from the
batch is less than 93% of the specified characteristic strength. The
non-complying batch of fabric reinforcement shall be removed from
the Site.

(xii)

If the yield stress of fabric reinforcement in any tensile test is less

than the specified characteristic strength but equal to or greater than
93% of the specified characteristic strength, additional samples shall
be provided from the same batch and additional tests for yield stress
shall be carried out. The number of additional samples shall be as
stated in Clause 6.17(vi).

(xiii) If the result of any test for yield stress, tensile strength, elongation,
weld shear strength, rebend, unit mass or pitch dimension does not
comply with the specified requirements for the property, additional
samples shall be provided from the same batch and additional tests
for the property shall be carried out. The number of additional
samples shall be as stated in Clause 6.17(vi).
(xiv)

Each additional sample shall comprise six 1.2 m long x 1.2 m wide
test specimens taken from different sheets in the batch. Each test
specimen shall contain at least three wires in each direction. The
number of tests shall be as follows:

Description
Steel fabric
- fabric sheet
- longitudinal
wire
- transverse
wire
(xv)

Tensile

Type and number of tests

Rebend
Unit
Weld
Pitch
Mass Shear Dimension
Stress

6
-

2
-

The batch of fabric reinforcement is considered as not complying

with the specified requirements for any particular property if the
result of any additional test does not comply with the specified
requirements for that property.

6-7

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Security
sampling

6.17.1

Cut test specimens under the direction and supervision of the SO.

Security
before delivery

6.17.2

Keep selected samples under the charge of the SO securely under lock
before delivery to the laboratory.

Security
delivery

6.17.3

Deliver samples to the testing laboratory under the escort of the SO, or
through collection service operated by the Public Works Laboratories
(PWL).

Security
stock
management

6.17.4

Submit for approval by the SO during commencement of contract a stock

management system to preclude unauthorized use of steel reinforcement
prior to receipt of test results as well as swapping of reinforcement of
different testing status. The followings shall be included:
(i)

Provide identification marks to different reinforcement batches

arriving on the Site which are uniquely traceable to the record of each
batch.

(ii)

The record of a batch of reinforcement shall include date of arrival to

the Site, quantities delivered, bar size, bar mark, delivery note,
weighting certificate, mill certificate, QA Stockist Certificate or
suppliers certificate, and steel reinforcement classification number
stated in the QA Stockist certificate.

(iii)

Establish and maintain a record system, such as colour coding or

other approved systems, for identifying and showing clearly steel
reinforcement stockpiles that are under different testing status
(awaiting test results, approved for use, non-compliant, re-test,
omitted for testing etc.).

(iv)

Keep separately reinforcement stockpiles of different testing status at

different locations.

Security
removal of
non-compliant
re-bars

6.17.5

Remove non-compliant reinforcement bars from the Site as soon as possible

under the supervision of the SO.

Storage

6.18

Store bar reinforcement so that each size is kept separate, and in such a
manner as to avoid contamination by dirt and mud. Steel shall be clean when
fixed in position and subsequently concreted.

Cutting and
bending

6.19

Cut and bend bars to BS 8666 unless otherwise specified. Bend bars cold
and do not rebend without prior approval. Do not cut or bend bars for use in
foundations until the size and depth of the foundation have been approved
and the bottom of the foundation has been blinded.

Fixing of
reinforcement

6.20

Chairs

6.21

Fix reinforcement in the position specified. Support reinforcement with

chairs and cover spacers. Secure reinforcement at all intersecting bars with
1.6 mm annealed iron tying wire. Bend wire back well clear of formwork.
Unless otherwise specified, the permitted tolerances for fixing
reinforcement shall be in accordance with Code of Practice for Structural
Use of Concrete issued by the Buildings Department.
Provide sufficient steel chairs to support top reinforcement in slabs and rafts,
vertical wall reinforcement and the like in position. Where high tensile steel
wire chairs supporting top reinforcements in slabs are to rest on formwork,
they shall have plastic covered feet. The plastic cover shall have a minimum
thickness of 1.5 mm and a length not less than 25 mm.

6-8

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Cover spacers

6.22

Provide sufficient cover spacers of the following types to support

reinforcement in position:
(i)

Concrete blocks of similar quality to that of the surrounding concrete.

(ii)

Plastic or other approved proprietary type.

Cover spacers shall be capable of supporting the weight of reinforcement

and construction load without breaking, deforming or overturning.
Welding of
reinforcement

6.23

Do not weld steel reinforcements without prior approval.

Reinforcement
connectors

6.24

Reinforcement connectors shall be of a proprietary type approved by the SO

and shall be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
and Code of Practice for Structural Use of Concrete issued by the
Buildings Department unless otherwise specified.

Concrete cover

6.25

Nominal concrete cover for any reinforcement unless otherwise specified

shall be as Table 6.2.
TABLE 6.2
Nominal concrete cover

Conditions of exposure

Concrete elements

C 30

C 35

C 40

Internal concrete surfaces

External concrete surfaces
with mosaic tile cover or
rendering

Slabs

30

25

25

C 45 and
above
25

All other elements

30

30

30

25

Bathroom and kitchens

Public toilet and shower room
External fair faced concrete
surfaces
External concrete surfaces
covered by non-weather proof
cladding

All elements

40

35

35

30

Fresh water tank

All elements

40

40

35

Concrete exposed to sea water

spray through airborne contact
Sea water tank

All elements

50

45

Work below ground in contact

with non-aggressive soil

Soffit of slabs on
grade

30

25

25

25

All other elements

50

50

50

50

All elements

Concrete grade not inferior to C50. Refer to

Recommended Specification for Reinforced
Concrete in the Marine Environment issued by the
Standing Committee on Concrete Technology.

Concrete in sea water tidal

zone

6-9

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

REINFORCEMENT (EPOXY COATED)

Epoxy coatings
6.25.1
to reinforcement

Epoxy coatings to reinforcement and patching materials for epoxy coatings

shall comply with BS 7295-1 and BS 7295-2 except as stated in Clauses
6.25.8, 6.25.10, 6.25.11 and 6.25.12 hereinafter. The coatings shall be
applied by the electrostatic spray method in accordance with BS 7295-1.

Chairs, supports 6.25.2

and spacers

Chairs, supports and spacers other than cover spacers for reinforcement
shall be steel. The steel shall be coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other
dielectric material for epoxy coated reinforcement.

Tying wire

6.25.3

Tying wire for epoxy coated reinforcement shall be 1.6 mm diameter soft
annealed steel wire coated with nylon, epoxy, plastic or other dielectric
material.

Document and
test results to
be supplied by
the
manufacturer

6.25.4

(i)

The following documents and particulars shall be submitted to the

SO:
(a)

Name and location of the coating factory.

(b)

Mill sheets of steel reinforcement bars complying with

CS2.

(c)

Date and place of the coating application.

(d)

Certificate of the coating materials in compliance with BS

7295-2, including:- corrosion resistance
- chemical resistance
- cathodic disbonding of coating
- adhesion
- abrasion resistance
- impact strength
- hardness
The above tests shall be carried out once every 5 years or
whenever there are changes in the composition of the
coating materials.

Handling of
reinforcement

6.25.5

(ii)

The particulars, including certificates and test results in (i) above,

shall be submitted to the SO for approval at least 14 days before the
first delivery of epoxy coated reinforcement to the Site. Certificates
shall be submitted for each batch of epoxy coated reinforcement.

(i)

Reinforcement shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock

loading or dropping from a height.

(ii)

Nylon, rope or padded slings shall be used for lifting epoxy coated
reinforcement; bundles shall be lifted with a strongback or with
multiple supports to prevent abrasion.

Storage of
reinforcement

6.25.6

Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be stored on wooden or padded cribbing

and protected from direct sunlight.

Cutting and
bending
reinforcement

6.25.7

Epoxy coated reinforcement shall be bent cold. Bar cutting and bar bending
equipment for epoxy coated reinforcement shall have padded supports and
contact areas shall be fitted with nylon or plastic mandrels.

Repairs to epoxy 6.25.8

coatings on site

(i)

If the coating to epoxy coated reinforcement is delaminated or split at

any point or if the coating to epoxy coated reinforcement is damaged:

6-10

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(a)

At any point by an amount exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50

mm in length, or

(b)

At more than three points in a 1m length by amounts each

even not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length,

that part of the reinforcement shall not be used in the permanent

work. If the coating to epoxy coated reinforcement is damaged at
more than six points in the cut and bent length of a bar by amounts
each even not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length, that
length of bar shall not be used in the permanent work.
(ii)

All damaged areas not exceeding 25 mm2 in area or 50 mm in length

and cut ends of epoxy coated reinforcement shall be repaired using
patching material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

(iii)

Repairs to epoxy coatings shall be carried out within 8 hours of

cutting or damage. Traces of rust shall be removed from the surface
of the reinforcement before the repair is carried out.

Additional test
specimens for
epoxy coating
tests for each
batch

6.25.9

Provide and cut 2 test specimens from each batch of reinforcement, as

directed by the SO for epoxy coating tests in addition to the requirements of
tensile tests, bend tests and rebend tests. Each specimen shall be a two metre
length piece cut at least l m from the ends of a 12 m length bar. Specimens
shall be selected from different bundles of the reinforcement batch.

Testing of epoxy
coating

6.25.10

(i)

Thickness, adhesion, and continuity tests shall be performed on each

additional test specimens as selected in accordance with Clause
6.25.9.
Tests shall be carried out on specimens within a temperature range of
between 5 degree Celsius and 30 degree Celsius.

(ii)

The thickness test shall be in accordance with Method No.6 of BS

3900: Part C5. For bars of 12 mm diameter or below, only
instruments which operate on magnetic flux principle - Method 6
A(a), can be used. For bars of 16 mm. diameter or above, instruments
which operate on either magnetic flux principle or magnetic pull-off
principle, Method 6 A(b), can be used. All measuring instruments
shall be calibrated to an accuracy of 5%.
For thickness test, five recorded measurements shall be obtained
approximately evenly spaced along each side of the test specimen (a
total of ten recorded measurements per bar). A single recorded
thickness measurement is the average of three individual readings
obtained in between the ribs of three consecutive deformations.

(iii)

The adhesion and continuity tests shall be in accordance with BS

7295-1 with the following exceptions:
(a)

If the bars used in the permanent works are straight or bent to

no more than 90, then 90 bending test shall be adopted in
the coating adhesion test. Otherwise, 180 bending shall be
adopted.

(b)

The bending of bars for adhesion tests shall be at a uniform

rate and be completed within 15 seconds.

6-11

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Compliance
criteria: epoxy
coatings to
reinforcement

6.25.11

The results of tests for thickness, adhesion and continuity of epoxy coatings
to reinforcement shall comply with the following requirements:
(i)

Coating thickness
At least 90% of all the recorded thickness measurements of coating
shall be within the range of 0.18 mm to 0.30 mm. Thickness
measurements below 0.13 mm shall be considered cause for
rejection.

(ii)

Coating adhesion
The surface of the bent test piece shall not exhibit cracking or ductile
tearing when viewed under well-lit conditions using normal or
corrected vision. There shall be no disbonding of the coating from
the surface of the bar and the coating shall not contain more than 5
holidays per metre of bar.

(iii)

Coating continuity
The continuity of the coating shall contain not more than 5 holidays
per linear metre of bar length, when tested in accordance with A.3 of
BS 7295-1 and shall be free of holes, voids, cracks and damaged
areas discernible to a person with normal or corrected vision.
Holiday is defined as a discontinuity in a coating which is not
discernible to a person with normal or corrected vision and detected
by a discharge from a Holiday detector.

Non-compliance
thickness,
adhesion &
continuity

6.25.12

If one test specimen fails to meet the coating thickness, coating adhesion or
coating continuity requirements, retests of specimens of the same batch are
permitted, and two further specimens from the same batch shall be subjected
to the test or tests in which the original specimen failed. If both additional
specimens pass the retest, the batch from which they were taken shall be
deemed to comply with the specification. If either or both of them fails in the
retests, the batch shall be deemed not to comply with the specification, and
this batch shall be rejected and removed from the Site.

Time required
for testing of
epoxy coated
reinforcement

6.25.13

Allow minimum 12 working days for the availability of test results after
delivery of the test specimen to the Laboratory.

Testing
Laboratory

6.25.14

All specimens shall be delivered to the Public Works Laboratories (PWL)

for testing.
CONCRETE

Generally

6.26

The use of concrete for reinforced concrete structures shall be to the Code of
Practice for Structural Use of Concrete issued by the Buildings
Department unless otherwise specified.
Structural concrete shall come from a supplier registered under the Quality
Scheme for Production and Supply of Concrete (QSPSC).
MATERIALS

Cement

PFA

6.27

Portland cement shall be to BS EN 197-1 (Type CEM I). Strength Class of

cement used in structural concrete shall be 52.5 N, unless otherwise
approved by the SO. Sulphate-resisting Portland cement shall be to
BS 4027. High alumina cement shall not be used in structural concrete.

6.28

Pulverized-fuel ash (PFA) shall conform to BS 3892: Part 1 with the

following modifications:

6-12

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(i)

Use Portland cement CEM I (strength class 52.5 N) to BS EN 197-1

to determine water requirement, strength factor at 28 days, soundness
and initial setting time.

(ii)

The criteria for water requirement and strength factor at 28 days shall
not apply, but the values as determined shall be stated in the
certificates for submission.

(iii)

PFA shall contain up to 10% total lime content or high lime PFA
shall contain up to 20% total lime content and with soundness value
not more than 10 mm.

PFAC

6.29

Portland-fly ash cement (PFAC) shall be to BS EN 197-1 (Type CEM

II/A-V and CEM II/B-V). Strength Class of cement used in structural
concrete shall be 42.5 N or higher, unless otherwise approved by the SO.

CSF

6.29.1

Condensed Silica Fume (CSF) shall be to CSA-A23.5-M86 (Canadian

Standard) or BS EN 13263-1.

GGBS

6.29.2

Ground Granulated Blastfurnace Slag (GGBS) shall be to BS EN 15167-1

except that the scheme for the evaluation of conformity of GGBS specified
in BS EN 15167-2 is not required. The glass content as determined by X-ray
diffraction or optical-microscopy method shall be not less than 67%. The
X-ray diffraction method detailed in Appendix D of BS 6699 is acceptable.

Use of PFA,
PFAC, CSF and
GGBS

6.30

The use of PFA, PFAC, CSF and GGBS shall be subject to the approval of
the SO. PFA shall not be used in addition to PFAC and GGBS shall not be
used in combination with PFA or PFAC. PFA, CSF and GGBS can only be
used in designed mixes only.
If CSF, PFA or GGBS is incorporated in the concrete as separate
cementitious materials, the following requirements shall be complied with
unless specified/approved otherwise by the SO:
(a)

The proportion of PFA replacement shall not exceed 35% of the total
cementitious content.

(b)

The proportion of CSF replacement shall not exceed 10% of the total
cementitious content.

(c)

The proportion of GGBS replacement shall not exceed 40% of the

total cementitious content and the use shall be subject to the approval
by the SO of the Contactors proposal on concrete curing method and
formwork striking times.

Either PFA or GGBS shall be used in concrete of all pile caps and
substructure construction where the concrete structural elements have a least
dimension greater than 750 mm. The PFA content shall constitute 25% or
above of the total cementitious content in such concrete.
Cementitious
content

6.31

Cementitious content is the combined mass of cement, CSF and either PFA
or GGBS per cubic metre of compacted concrete. For CSF, the dry mass
shall be used.

Free water/
cement ratio

6.32

The free water/cement ratio is the ratio between the mass of the free water in
the concrete mix and the cementitious content.

Aggregates

6.33

Aggregates shall be obtained from a source approved by the SO. Aggregates

from marine source and all-in aggregates shall not be used.

6-13

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard and durable crushed rock
complying with CS3.
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard and durable crushed rock
complying with CS3. Natural sand shall not be used in production of
concrete unless otherwise agreed by the SO.
The flakiness index when determined to CS3 shall not exceed 40 for
aggregate of 40 mm size or larger, or 35 for sizes of 10 to 28 mm.
The potential alkali-reactivity category of coarse aggregate and fine
aggregate shall be determined from the results of tests on potential
alkali-reactivity of aggregates using the test method given in CS1.
Aggregates in the Reactive category shall not be used unless with the prior
approval of the SO.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, Sub-section 4.2.1 of CS3 on Los
Angeles value shall not be required for aggregates.
Grading of
aggregate

6.34

The grading of the combined fine and coarse aggregates shall be such as to
produce a dense concrete of suitable workability, using the specified
proportions of cement and water.
Aggregates shall be subjected to sieve analysis to CS3. The SO may require
further analysis to be made if there is any alteration in the type of aggregate.

TABLE 6.3 (Not used)

TABLE 6.4 (Not used)

TABLE 6.5 (Not used)

Water

6.35

Water for concreting shall be clean and uncontaminated potable water from
Government main supply or any other approved source. If taken from a
source other than Government main supply, it shall be tested in accordance
with BS EN1008 when required by the SO.
Wash water from concrete mixer washing operations (recycled water) may
be used for mixing concrete of grade strength not exceeding 35 MPa
provided that :

6-14

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Admixtures and
additives

6.36

(i)

The density of the combined water comprising tap water and

recycled water does not exceed 1030 kg/m3.

(ii)

The 28 days strength of test cubes with combined water shall not fall
below 90% of control test cubes made with tap water.

(iii)

The chemical limits of the combined water shall not exceed those in
Table 6.15.

(iv)

Tests shall be conducted in accordance with Table 6.15.

Submit the following details of any admixtures or cement containing

additives for approval before using:
(i)

Brand name and manufacturer's literature.

(ii)

Proposed dosage and detrimental effects, if any, of underdosage and

overdosage.

(iii)

The chloride content which shall not exceed 2% by mass of the

admixture or 0.03% by mass of the cementitious content as required
in Clause 6.40.

(iv)

Method of adding to the concrete mix.

Pigments for colouring cement and concrete shall comply with BS 1014.
Accelerators, retarders, normal water-reducing admixtures and
combinations of these shall comply with BS 5075-1. Superplasticising
admixtures shall comply with BS 5075-3.
When the use of admixtures or cement containing additives is approved or
specified, use strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and
at approved dosage levels.
Store admixtures in watertight weatherproof containers clearly marked to
show the contents.
Concrete curing
compound

6.37

The curing compound shall, when applied by a mechanical sprayer, become

stable and impervious to evaporation of water from the concrete surface
within 60 minutes of application. It shall not react chemically with the
concrete to be cured and shall not crack, peel or disintegrate within one week
after application.
Concrete curing compound for structures shall be a liquid resin or wax-resin
base membrane curing compound of an approved proprietary brand. It shall
have a minimum curing efficiency of 85% and shall contain a fugitive dye.
The curing compound shall degrade completely within 3 weeks after
application and the concrete surface so treated shall not impair the bonding
of applied finishes.
Concrete curing compound for carriageways shall be a non-pigmented liquid
resin or wax-resin base membrane curing compound of a proprietary brand.
It shall achieve a 96% efficiency index and shall be available both with or
without a fugitive dye.
Supply test certificates, prepared by an approved testing laboratory, to show
that the compound will provide the required curing efficiency.

6-15

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Delivery and
storage of
materials

6.38

Deliver cement in quantities sufficient to ensure that there is no suspension

or interruption of concreting work at any time.

Store cement in bags in a dry, weatherproof store with a raised floor. Keep
each consignment separate, and identify and use it in the order of delivery.
Store bulk cement in dry, weatherproof silos and store cement from different
sources in separate silos. Do not use cement from different sources in the
same pour and only use in the same structure with the SOs prior approval.
Store pulverized-fuel ash in dry, weatherproof silos clearly marked so as to
be easily distinguishable from cement silos. Charge and discharge silos in
such a manner as to prevent nuisance by dust.
Do not use the cement until the source is approved. Samples of cement may
be required from time to time by the SO for routine testing by the Public
Works Laboratories (PWL).
If the less popular brands of cement shall be used, submit samples for testing
and do not use the cement until the test results are passed.
Remove from the Site immediately any cement which does not comply with
the specification or which has become adversely affected by dampness or
other agency.
Deliver coarse aggregate to the Site in separate sizes unless otherwise agreed
by the SO. Coarse aggregate shall be in 2 sizes when the maximum size is
20 mm and 3 sizes when the maximum size is 40 mm or more for designed
mixes.
Keep all aggregates brought to the Site free from contact with deleterious
matter. Store aggregate of different sizes in separate hoppers or stockpiles.
Store aggregates on specially prepared well-drained concrete floors, divided
into compartments as necessary. Alternatively make such other
arrangements for the storage of aggregates as may be approved.
Remove from the Site immediately any aggregates failing to meet the
requirements of the specification.
Testing of
materials

6.39

Submit samples, carry out tests and obtain approval before making concrete
for use in the Works, or before preparing trial mixes. Deliver samples of
materials to be used in concrete to the Public Works Laboratories (PWL), as
directed by the SO in sufficient time and in sufficient quantities to allow for
all tests to be carried out.
MIXES

Generally

6.40

Designed mix concrete shall be designated by the grade strength in MPa

followed by the nominal maximum size of aggregate in mm with suffix "D".
Standard mix concrete shall be designated by the grade strength in MPa
followed by the nominal maximum size of aggregate in mm with suffix "S".
Grade strength is the compressive strength of the concrete stated in the
contract. Compliance with the grade strength shall be ascertained in
accordance with Clause 6.55.
The cementitious content of any mix shall meet the requirements in
Table 6.8 but shall not exceed 550 kg/m3 of compacted concrete.

6-16

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

The nominal designed slump value for designed mix for reinforced concrete
shall not be less than 75 mm unless the contractor can demonstrate that
proper compaction can be achieved with a lower slump which shall in no
case be less than 50 mm. The free water cement ratio shall comply with
Table 6.8 unless otherwise stated in the contract.
The quality and strength of concrete shall be determined by tests on samples
taken on the Site and tested at the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) as
directed by the SO.
Standard mixes

If it is not proposed to use designed mixes, the standard mix proportions

shown in Tables 6.6 and 6.7 shall be used.

6.41

Compliance testing shall be in accordance with Clauses 6.55, 6.56 and 6.57.
Notwithstanding the provisions of these clauses the SO may reduce the
frequency of sampling and testing if he is satisfied with the Contractor's
quality control.
Admixtures may be used subject to the provisions of Clause 6.36.
TABLE 6.6
Standard mix concrete
Mass of total aggregate to be used with 100 kg of PC
or 110 kg of PFAC

Nominal maximum
aggregate size
(mm)

40

20

10

85 - 170

75 - 150

65 - 130

800

690

550

500

400

25

490

440

360

30

440

380

300

Grade
strength
(MPa)

Range of measured
slump value (mm)

10

20
Mass of total
aggregate (kg)

6-17

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.7
Percentage by mass of fine aggregate to total aggregate
for standard mix concrete

Grading
of the
aggregate

Grade
strength
(MPa)
10

Nominal
maximum
aggregate size
(mm)

C, M or F

C
20 , 25
or 30

Percentage by mass
of fine
aggregate to total
aggregate (%)

Note :
Designed mixes

6.42

40

20

10

30 - 45

35 - 50

30 - 40

35 - 45

45 - 55

25 - 35

30 - 40

40 - 50

25 - 30

25 - 35

35 - 45

Grading C, M and F refer to those given in CS3

Design the concrete mix to fulfill the minimum cementitious content and
maximum free water cement ratio requirements shown in Table 6.8 unless
otherwise specified in the contract.
The designed concrete mix shall have a mean strength greater than the
required grade strength by a margin sufficient to ensure compliance with
Clause 6.55.

Submission

6.42.1

Submit details of mix design for provisional approval. Details submitted

shall include:
(i)

Type and source of cement.

(ii)

Source of aggregates.

(iii)

Source of PFA, CSF and GGBS.

(iv)

Admixtures.

(v)

Nominal grading details of the fine and coarse aggregates in tabular

and graphical form.

(vi)

Nominal grading details, in tabular and graphical form, of the

combined aggregates together with details of the proportions in
which the fine and coarse aggregates are combined.

3
Cement content of concrete in kg/m .
3
(viii) PFA content of concrete in kg/m .
(vii)

(ix)

3
Aggregate content of concrete in kg/m for each size of aggregate.
The maximum permitted variation in the quantity of fine aggregate
shall be 20 kg of fine aggregate per 100 kg of cement.

6-18

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(x)

Free water/cement ratio.

(xi)

Designed workability in terms of slump or flow value, having due

regard to the final location and dimensions of the concrete element.

(xii)

Type of plant to be used, location and plant standard deviation if

ready-mixed off site.

(xiii) Test or trial mix data for the designed mix concrete of the same grade
and with similar constituents and properties, if available.
(xiv)

Test data for designed mix concrete of the same or other grade
produced in the plant or plants proposed to be used, if available.

(xv)

A certificate not older than 6 months for each type of cement, PFA,
CSF and GGBS showing the source and name of the manufacturers
of the materials and showing that they comply with the requirements
stated in the Contract. The certificate for GGBS shall include results
of tests for:
-

7-day and 28-day activity indexes of a 50% combination of the

GGBS with 50% of test cement, determined in accordance with
BS EN 15167-1. The test cement shall conform to BS EN 197-1
and shall be subject to the following restrictions:
It shall be a type CEM I, of strength 42.5N or higher;
The Blaine fineness shall be at least 300 m2/kg;
The tricalcium aluminate shall be between 6% and 12%;
and
The alkali content (expressed as equivalent Na2O) shall be
between 0.5% and 1.2%.

Initial setting time of a 50% combination of the GGBS with 50%

of test cement;

Initial setting time of the test cement and its 7-day and 28-day
strength;

Chemical oxide composition of the GGBS, comprising the

contents of calcium oxide (CaO), silicon dioxide (SiO2),
aluminium oxide (Al2O3), magnesium oxide (MgO), titanium
dioxide (TiO2) and manganese oxide (Mn2O3);

Total content of alkalis determined in accordance with BS EN

196-2, or other method agreed by the SO, and expressed as
equivalent Na2O;

Fineness value determined in accordance with the air

permeability method in BS EN 196-6;

Relative density determined in accordance with BS EN 196-6;

Glass content and the method used for its determination; and

The method(s) of rapid cooling used to produce the granulated

blastfurnace slag(s) during the manufacture of the GGBS (Rapid
cooling includes quenching in water (granulation) and projecting
through water and air (pelletisation).

6-19

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Liquid retaining 6.42.2

structures

20% recycled
coarse
aggregates

6.42.3

For liquid retaining structures, PFA or GGBS shall be used and the PFA
content if used shall constitute 25% or above of the total cementitious
content in the designed mix concrete. The mix shall also satisfy the
following requirements:
(i)

Maximum Water/Cement ratio to be 0.45.

(ii)

Minimum cementitious content to be 325 kg/m3.

(iii)

Maximum cementitious content to be 450 kg/m3.

(iv)

Slump shall be greater than 75 mm.

When specified, concrete with 20% recycled coarse aggregates shall be used
in designed mix concrete of 25 to 35 MPa grade strength except in water
retaining structures, subject to the following :
(i)

Either Type CEM I of Portland cement to BS EN 197-1 or Type

CEM I Portland cement in combination with PFA can be used in
accordance with Clause 6.30.

(ii)

Coarse aggregates shall consist of 80% natural rock aggregates as

defined in the GS and 20% recycled coarse aggregates.

(iii)

Recycled coarse aggregates shall be produced by crushing old

concrete and shall meet the requirements in Table 6.16.

(iv)

Tests on recycled aggregates from a particular source, with the

exception of Government sources, shall be carried out by the
aggregates producer at weekly intervals in compliance with Table
6.16.

(v)

Fine aggregates shall be as defined in the GS.

(vi)

Fine aggregates recycled from old concrete shall not be used.

(vii)

The grading of the coarse aggregates shall comply with the limits as
defined in the GS for single-sized 20 mm and 10 mm aggregates.

(viii) Recycled coarse aggregates shall be thoroughly wetted before being

used.
(ix)

The concrete shall have a minimum slump of 75 mm when it is ready

to be compacted to its final position.

(x)

Before any concrete is produced for use in the works, trial mixes
shall be performed in accordance with the GS.

(xi)

Compliance criteria in cube strength shall be as defined in the GS.

(xii)

Recycled aggregates shall be stored in separate stockpiles or silos to

prevent inadvertent mixing with natural aggregates.

(xiii) A separate compartment shall be provided for recycled aggregates in

the batching plant.
(xiv) Natural aggregates shall be used in lieu of the recycled aggregates in
case of supply shortage of recycled aggregates.

6-20

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.8
Minimum cementitious content (kg/m3) and
maximum free water cement (W/C) ratio

Plain concrete
Exposure
conditions

Moderate

Severe

Maximum
aggregate
size
(mm)

Minimum
cementitious
content

Maximum
free W/C
ratio

Reinforced concrete and

prestressed concrete

Minimum
cementitious
content

40

245

20

275

10

315

340

40

270

300

20

300

325

10

340

Maximum
free W/C
ratio

300
0.65

0.60

300

365

0.60

0.55

Where the exposure condition of a structure is not specified, all concrete shall be
deemed to be exposed to moderate condition.
Trial mixes

6.43

Trial mixes are not required for designed mix of concrete of grade below
Grade 20 or for standard mix concrete.
Concrete shall come from a supplier registered under the QSPSC. Where a
designed mix is used, trial mixes may be required to be carried out to
determine the suitability of the proposed mix proportions for production of
concrete of the required quality, at the intended workability for compaction
of the concrete in the position, shape and location specified. Prepare trial
mixes on receipt of provisional approval of the mix design and complete at
least 35 days before commencement of concreting. Carry out trial mixes in
accordance with the following table:

Test
required

No previous cube strength

records submitted or the
records submitted in
accordance with Clause
6.42.1 found unsatisfactory
< Grade 40

Grade 40

Previous cube strength records found satisfactory

Same mix
Same plant

Different mix
Same plant

Same mix
Different plant

Laboratory
Mix Trials

Yes

No

No

Yes

< Grade 40
No

Plant Trials

No

Yes

No

No

No

6-21

Grade 40
No

Yes

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

The size of test cubes shall be 100 mm for concrete with maximum aggregate
size not exceeding 20 mm and shall be 150 mm for maximum aggregate size
exceeding 20 mm.
Plant Trials

6.43.1

Plant Trials shall be made using the plant proposed and the mix designs and
constituents provisionally approved by the SO. The volume of each batch
shall be at least 60% of the nominal volume of the mixer's discharge.
Make one trial mix on each of three different days for each grade of concrete
using materials typical of the proposed supply. Three samples of concrete
shall be taken from each batch at approximately 1/6, 1/2 and 5/6 of the
discharge from the mixer. Each sample shall be of sufficient size to perform a
slump test or a flow table test, and make two test cubes. The method of
sampling shall be as stated in CS1. Each sample shall be tested to determine
its slump value or its flow value in accordance with CS1, and two test cubes
shall be made, stored, cured and tested to determine the compressive strength
at 28 days in accordance with CS1.

Compliance
6.43.2
criteria of Plant
Trials

Laboratory Mix 6.43.3

Trials

The results of tests on concrete taken from Plant Trials shall comply with the
following requirements:
(i)

The average of the nine measured slump values shall be within

20mm or 25%, whichever is the greater, of the designed slump
value. The average of the nine measured flow values shall be within
50mm of the designed flow value.

(ii)

The range of the three measured slump values for each batch of
concrete shall not exceed 20% of the average of the three measured
slump values for that batch. For flow table tests, the range of the
three measured flow values for each batch of concrete shall be within
70mm.

(iii)

The average compressive strength at 28 days of the 18 test cubes

shall exceed the Grade strength by at least 12 MPa for 100 mm test
cubes or 10 MPa for 150 mm test cubes. The compressive strength
of each individual test cube shall exceed the Grade strength by at
least 5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 4 MPa for 150 mm test cubes.

(iv)

The range of the compressive strength of the six test cubes from each
batch of concrete shall not exceed 20% of the average compressive
strength of the six test cubes from that batch.

Laboratory Mix Trials shall be made in the suppliers laboratory using the
mix designs and constituents provisionally approved by the SO.
Laboratory Mix Trials shall be carried out in accordance with Section 11 of
CS1. Three separate batches shall be made, each of sufficient size to provide
samples for carrying out two slump tests or two flow table tests, and to make
six test cubes, stored, cured and tested for compressive strength at 28 days in
accordance with CS1.

Compliance
criteria of
Laboratory Mix
Trials

6.43.4

(i)

The average of the six measured slump values shall be within

20mm or 25%, whichever is the greater, of the designed slump
value. The average of the six measured flow values shall be within
50mm of the designed flow value.

(ii)

The results of compressive strength tests at 28 days of the test cubes

on Laboratory Mix Trial concrete shall comply with the following
table:

6-22

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Standard deviation of
test data of the
proposed plant

Approved
concrete mix

6.43.5

The average of the 18

test cubes shall exceed
the Grade strength by
at least (MPa)

Individual test cube

shall exceed the Grade
strength by at least
(MPa)

Does not exceed

5.5 MPa for
100 mm test cubes

10

Does not exceed

5.0 MPa for
150 mm test cubes

Exceeds
5.5 MPa for
100 mm test cubes

14

Exceeds
5.0 MPa for
150 mm test cubes

12

When the mix has been approved, do not make variations in the proportions
and sources of materials or in the type, size and grading of aggregates
without the consent of the SO, who may require further trial mixes to be
made.
The SO may also require practical tests to be made on the Site by filling trial
moulds or by pumping to confirm the suitability of the mix for the Works. In
such tests, the type of plant used for mixing, transporting and placing, the
method of compaction used, the formwork face to the mould and the size and
disposition of reinforcement shall be similar in all respects to those intended
for use in the Works.

Ready-mixes

6.44

Ready-mixed concrete shall be as defined in BS 5328, and shall comply with

the GS, or as otherwise specified. Any concrete batched off Site may be used
only with the approval of the SO.
Carry the concrete in purpose made agitators operating continuously, or in
truck mixers. Compact the concrete in its final position within 2 hours of
the introduction of cement to the aggregates, and within 30 minutes of
discharge from the agitator or truck mixer. Concrete, which in the opinion of
the SO is no longer sufficiently workable, shall be rejected. Record the time
of the introduction of cement to the aggregates on the delivery note, together
with the weight of the constituents of each mix.
When truck-mixed concrete is used, add water under supervision either on
the Site or at the batching plant as agreed by the SO. Do not add water in
transit.
Maintain and operate truck-mixer units strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation.
Truck-mixer units and their mixing and discharging performance shall
comply with the manufacturer's requirements unless otherwise agreed by the
SO. Continue mixing for the number, and at the rate of revolutions
recommended by the manufacturer or, in the absence of the manufacturer's
instructions, for not less than 100 revolutions at a rate of between 7 and 14
revolutions per minute (inclusive).

6-23

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Do not deliver ready-mixed concrete to the Site without prior approval for
the supplier's production plant. Arrange for the SO to inspect the supplier's
plant if required before and/or during the period of supply.
Keep a record book on site available for inspection at all times. This shall
contain the following information relating to each delivery of concrete to the
Site :
(i)

Registration number of truck, name of supplier and location of

batching plant.

(ii)

Time of introduction of cement to the mix.

(iii)

Time of arrival of lorry at the concreting location.

(iv)

Mix proportions, including admixtures if any and grade of concrete.

(v)

Position where concrete was placed.

(vi)

Whether test cubes were taken from the delivery, and details of cube
markings.

(vii)

Slump test or flow table test results.

The acceptance criteria for workability and strength shall be as specified in

Clauses 6.55, 6.56 and 6.57, provided that for standard mixes, if the SO is
satisfied with the supplier's quality control, he may reduce the frequency of
sampling and testing specified therein.
Chloride content 6.45

The total chloride content of the concrete shall not exceed the limits shown
in Table 6.9 expressed as a percentage relationship between chloride ion and
mass of cementitious material in the mix.
TABLE 6.9
Chloride content

Workability

Type of concrete

Maximum total chloride

content %

Prestressed concrete
Steam cured structural concrete

0.1

Reinforced concrete made with sulphate

resisting Portland cement

0.2

Reinforced concrete
Concrete with embedded metal

0.35

6.46

Adopt a free water/cement ratio complying with Table 6.8 to produce

concrete of adequate workability with the aid of admixtures as necessary.
Check the workability by using slump or flow table tests to CS1. A guide to
the degree of workability required for various types of work is shown in
Table 6.10.

6-24

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Concrete mix with a nominal slump less than 75 mm shall not be used unless
the Contractor can demonstrate that proper compaction can be achieved with
a lower slump which shall in no case be less than 50 mm.

TABLE 6.10
Workability

Degree of
workability

20 mm maximum size
aggregate

40 mm maximum size
aggregate

Slump
(mm)

Slump
(mm)

Flow
(mm)

Uses of which
concrete is
suitable

Flow
(mm)

Low

50

50 75

Simply reinforced large sections,

concreting with vibration

Medium

75 - 100

100 150

Moderately reinforced sections

such as ordinary beams and slabs,
concreting with vibration

High

100 - 150

125 175

Sections with congested

reinforcement where vibration is
difficult.

Very
high

150-200

No-fines
concrete

6.47

340-600

Sections with very congested

reinforcement where vibration is
very difficult.

No-fines concrete shall be composed of Portland cement and 20 mm - 10

mm aggregate of which not more than 15% shall be retained on a 20 mm BS
sieve, and not more than 10% shall pass a 10 mm BS sieve. The
aggregate/cement ratio shall lie within the range 10 to 15 by weight and the
cement content shall be such that each particle of aggregate is coated with
cement paste but there is no continuous matrix. The free water/cement ratio
shall be 0.45 by weight unless agreed otherwise by the SO.
CONTROL OF ALKALI-SILICA REACTION IN CONCRETE

Measures to
control ASR in
concrete

6.47.1

(i)

Measures to prevent the occurrence of alkali-silica reaction (ASR) in

concrete structures shall be the control of reactive alkali content of
the concrete.

(ii)

The reactive alkali content of concrete expressed as the equivalent

oxide (Na2O) content per cubic metre of concrete shall be obtained
in accordance with Clause 6.47.2.

(iii)

Unless with the prior approval of the SO, the reactive alkali content
of the concrete, expressed as the equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O)
content per cubic metre of concrete defined in Clause 6.47.2, shall
not exceed 3.0 kg.

6-25

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Equivalent
sodium oxide
(Na2O) content

6.47.2

(i)

The equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O) content of the concrete shall be

calculated from the following expression:
Equivalent Na2O = A + B + C
Where
A is the sum of the acid-soluble alkali content (expressed as
equivalent Na2O) of cement, admixtures and water;
B is equal to 1/6 the total alkali content of PFA (expressed as
equivalent Na2O) or 1/2 of the total alkali content of GGBS
(expressed as equivalent Na2O). If the proportion of PFA is less than
20% or that of GGBS is less than 25% of the total cementitious
content, the value of B shall be equal to the total alkali content of
PFA or GGBS expressed as equivalent Na2O; and
C is equal to 0.76 times the chloride ion (Cl) of the aggregate.

Submission

6.47.3

(ii)

The acid-soluble alkali content of the cement shall be determined in

accordance with BS EN 196-2 and shall be taken as the average of
the latest 25 daily determinations of equivalent sodium oxide plus
twice the standard deviation of the results.

(iii)

The acid-soluble alkali content of admixtures shall be determined in

accordance with BS 1881-124.

(iv)

The acid-soluble alkali content of water shall be determined in

accordance with BS EN 1008.

(v)

The total alkali content of the PFA or GGBS shall be determined in

accordance with BS EN 196-2 and shall be taken as the average of 25
weekly determinations plus twice the standard deviation of the
results.

(vi)

The chloride ion content of the coarse and fine aggregates shall be
measured in accordance with CS3.

(i)

The following particulars of the proposed concrete mix shall be

submitted to the SO:

(ii)

(a)

HOKLAS endorsed test certificates not older than 6 months

giving the results of tests required in Clauses 6.47.2 (ii) to
(vi).

(b)

Calculation of the reactive alkali content of the proposed mix.

(c)

Documentation of a quality system to control the active alkali

content in the concrete.

Within five working days of any instance of the active alkali content
in the concrete supplied having been found to have exceeded, the
Contractor shall submit the relevant HOKLAS endorsed test
certificates and calculations to the SO together with his remedial
proposals.

6-26

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(iii)

The HOKLAS endorsed test certificates giving the results of tests

required in Clauses 6.47.2 (ii) to (vi) shall be submitted at quarterly
intervals unless agreed otherwise by the SO. The certificates shall be
accompanied by any necessary calculations to demonstrate that the
mix continues to comply with the limit on reactive alkali content
during the period of delivery of the approved concrete mix to the
Site.

MIXING AND PLACING

Mixing

6.48

Concrete shall come from a supplier registered under the QSPSC. Mixing
and transporting concrete shall be in accordance with their quality control
manual.
Do not remix partially hardened concrete with or without additional cement,
aggregate or water. Mix and place light-weight concrete including
light-weight "air-entrained" concrete in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions and as required by the SO.
Place no-fines concrete with the minimum of punning.

Transporting
and placing

6.49

Transport and place concrete by an approved method which ensures that

there is no contamination, segregation or loss of the constituent materials.
When it is specified that the temperature of fresh concrete in particular
o
elements shall not exceed 32 C when it is placed in position, submit for
approval details of the measures proposed to ensure that this temperature
will not be exceeded.
Clean all areas where concrete shall be placed and, except for concrete
placed under water, render free from standing water immediately before the
placing of the concrete.
Do not place concrete in any part of the structure until approval has been
given. If concreting is not started within 24 hours of that approval being
given, approval shall be obtained again. Inform the SO at least 24 hours in
advance to inspect the Works for which approval for concreting is being
sought.
Proceed with concreting continuously between construction joints. Unless
the SO agrees otherwise, do not place fresh concrete against in-situ concrete
which has been in position for more than 30 minutes unless the in-situ
concrete has been kept damp with a layer of wet hessian and protected from
the weather. When in-situ concrete has been in place for 4 hours or in the
opinion of the SO the concrete has stiffened to such an extent that it no
longer responds to the action of an internal vibrator, do not place further
concrete against it for a further 20 hours and form a construction joint in
accordance with 6.51.
Compact concrete in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of
cement to the mix, and within 30 minutes of discharge from the agitator.
Concrete, which in the opinion of the SO, is no longer sufficiently workable
shall be rejected.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding
450 mm where internal vibrators are used, or 150 mm in all other cases,
unless otherwise agreed by the SO.
Do not allow concrete to free fall in excess of 2.7 m unless otherwise agreed
by the SO. When trunking or chutes are used, keep them clean and use them

6-27

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

in such a way as to avoid segregation.

Place and compact concrete in such a way as to avoid disturbance to the
formwork and reinforcement. Where sections of the Works are carried out
in lifts, support the reinforcement projecting above the lift being cast to
prevent movement of the bars during the casting and setting of the concrete.
Do not place concrete in flowing water.
Do not use concrete pumps without prior approval.
Place underwater concrete in accordance with the recommendations given in
BS 8004.
Compaction

6.50

Compact concrete so as to produce a dense homogeneous mass. Unless

otherwise agreed by the SO, compact concrete with vibrators. Provide
adequate number and types of vibrating equipment to compact the concrete
fully at the rate at which it is placed. Provide a sufficient number of vibrators
in serviceable condition on the Site to ensure that reserves are always
immediately available in the event of breakdowns.
Internal vibrators shall operate at not less than 10 000 cycles per minutes and
external vibrators not less than 3 000 cycles per minute. Vibrating tables
operating at a minimum of 5 000 oscillations per minute may be used for
precast elements subject to approval.
Do not use external clamp-on type vibrators without prior approval.
Do not apply vibration by way of the reinforcement. Where vibrators of the
immersion type are used, avoid all contact with reinforcement, formwork
and inserts so far as is practicable.
Do not use vibration as a means of distributing concrete into position.

Construction
joints

6.51

The position and details of any construction joints not specified in the
contract shall be subject to approval. Arrange the joints in such a way as to
minimize the possibility of the occurrence of shrinkage and thermal cracks.
Submit sample treatment of construction joints prior to work on site.
Finish the upper surface of lifts of concrete walls and columns and clean the
formwork of adhering concrete before the next lift is placed.
Remove laitance and all loose material and expose the aggregate by an
approved method as soon as is practical after casting, but where this shall be
done by means of an air-and-water jet, or by mechanical means, minimum
periods after casting of 4 hours and 12 hours respectively shall have elapsed.
Ensure the surface of the construction joint is damp, but free from ponding
of water when fresh concrete is placed against it.
Formwork to construction joints shall be rigid and to accommodate
projecting reinforcement without bending or displacement.
Where kickers are cast at the base of walls and columns, these shall be cast
monolithically with the base slab.
If placing of concrete has to be unexpectedly stopped, form construction
joints as directed by the SO.

6-28

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Curing of
concrete

6.52

Immediately after compaction, protect finished concrete against harmful

effects of weather, running water and drying out. Apply the protection by
using one of the following methods:
(i)

Cure the concrete by the application of an approved liquid curing

membrane. Application shall be by means of a low-pressure spray at
the rate recommended by the manufacturer. On horizontal surfaces,
apply the membrane immediately after finishing the concrete, and on
vertical surfaces immediately after removing the formwork.

(ii)

After thoroughly wetting, cover the concrete with a layer of approved

waterproof paper or plastic membrane for a minimum of 4 days.

(iii)

Cover the concrete with a layer of fine aggregate minimum 25 mm

thick, hessian, sacking, canvas or similar absorbent material. Keep
this covering layer constantly wet for a minimum of 4 days.

Increase the times given above by 25% for concrete containing PFA, GGBS
or PFAC.
Provide adequate amount of waterproof paper or plastic membrane to protect
freshly placed concrete against heavy rain as required or directed by the SO.
Early loading

6.53

Unless otherwise specified do not subject concrete at any time to loading

which will induce a compressive stress in it exceeding 33% of its
compressive strength at the time, or of the specified grade strength
whichever is the least. When determining the loading, make due allowance
for the self-weight of the concrete.
For the purpose of this clause, the assessment of the strength of concrete and
the stresses produced by the loads shall be subject to the approval of the SO.
SAMPLE AND TESTING

Sampling of
fresh concrete

6.54

Carry out sampling of concrete in accordance with the requirements given in

CS1. Take each sample from a single batch. The location of batches to be
sampled shall be decided by the SO, and the frequency of sampling for
compressive strength testing and workability testing shall be as set out in
Table 6.11, provided that a minimum of one sample shall be taken from each
grade of concrete produced on any one day. The SO may agree to a reduced
frequency of sampling for exceptionally large pours. The samples shall be
taken at random times.

6-29

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.11
Sampling rates
Type of structure

Approximate quantity of
concrete
to be represented by each
sample
(from non QSPSC supplier)

Approximate quantity of
concrete
to be represented by each
sample
(from QSPSC supplier)

Critical structures

10 m3 or 10 batches
whichever is the smaller
volume.

20m3

Intermediate structures

25 m3 or 25 batches
whichever is the smaller
volume.

50m3

Massive concrete
construction

100 m3 or 100 batches

whichever is the smaller
volume.

150m3

Where the type of structure is not specified, all concrete shall be deemed to
be for intermediate structures.
Concrete cubes

6.55

For compressive strength testing, make, cure and test concrete cubes in
accordance with CS1. The size of test cubes shall be 100 mm for concrete
with maximum aggregate size not exceeding 20 mm and shall be 150 mm for
maximum aggregate size exceeding 20 mm.
(i)

(ii)

Standard mixes
(a)

Where a batch shall be sampled for the purpose of

determining the strength of the concrete, make two cubes
from a sample for test at 28 days.

(b)

The strength requirement for each pair of cubes shall be

satisfied if neither of the strengths of the cubes is below the
strength indicated by the grade of concrete. If the strength
requirement is not satisfied, the SO may order such further
testing, including chemical analysis of samples of hardened
concrete in the structure, as he considers necessary.

Designed mixes
(a)

Make two cubes from a single sample taken from a batch of

concrete selected at random. Take the sample at the point of
discharge from the mixer, or, in the case of ready-mixed
concrete, at the point of discharge from the delivery vehicle,
or elsewhere as directed by the SO. On completion of curing
for 28 days, test the two cubes. The average of the two results
shall be taken as the test result.

(b)

The strength requirement shall be satisfied if the average

strength determined from any group of four consecutive test
results, and the individual test results comply with the
strength determined from limits given in Columns A and B of
Table 6.12 respectively. Where there are less than four test
results available the average of the first two or first three

6-30

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

consecutive test results shall be treated in the same manner as

groups of four consecutive test results.
(c)

If the difference between the compressive strengths of two

test cubes made from one sample of designed mix concrete
exceeds 15% of the test result:
(1)

the higher of the compressive strengths of the two test

cubes shall be used to assess compliance in Column B
of Table 6.12, and

(2)

the test result for that sample shall not be used to

assess compliance in Column A of Table 6.12 and
shall not be used to calculate the standard deviation.
TABLE 6.12

Strength compliance requirements for designed mixes

Specified
grade

Compliance
requirement

20 D and
above

Below 20 D

(iii)

(iv)

Column A
Average of any 4
consecutive test
results shall
exceed the
specified grade
strength by

Column B
Any individual test
result shall not be
less than the
specified grade
strength by more
than

100 mm
Cube

150 mm
Cube

100 mm
Cube

150 mm
Cube

C1

7 MPa

5 MPa

2 MPa

3 MPa

C2

5 MPa

3 MPa

2 MPa

3 MPa

C3

3 MPa

2 MPa

2 MPa

2 MPa

For concrete of grade 20D and above, calculate the standard

deviation for each grade of concrete after every 40 test results.
Compliance requirement C2 of Table 6.12 may be adopted under the
following conditions :
(a)

Where there is sufficient previous production data using

similar materials from the same plant under similar
supervision to establish that the standard deviation of at least
40 test results is less than 5.5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes or 5
MPa for 150 mm test cubes; or

(b)

Where the calculated standard deviation of a set of 40

consecutive test results does not exceed 5.5 MPa for 100 mm
test cubes or 5 MPa for 150 mm test cubes.

If the calculated standard deviation exceeds 5.5 MPa and does not
exceed 8.5 MPa for 100 mm test cubes, or exceeds 5 MPa and does
not exceed 8 MPa for 150 mm test cubes, compliance requirement
C1 shall apply to subsequent test results.

6-31

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

(v)

If the calculated standard deviation exceeds 8.5 MPa for 100 mm test
cubes or 8 MPa for 150 mm test cubes, no further concrete shall be
placed in the permanent works until an investigation of the materials,
mix design, methods of production, sampling and testing has been
carried out and measures have been taken which in the opinion of the
SO will result in restoring a satisfactory standard of quality control.

(vi)

If the compliance requirements are changed from C1 to C2 or from

C2 to C1, the new compliance requirements shall apply from the 35th
day after making the last pair of test cubes in the set of 40 on which
the decision to change was based. For the purpose of calculating the
average of any 4 consecutive test results, test results immediately
before and immediately after the change shall be treated separately.

(vii)

For concrete of grade below 20D, adopt compliance requirement C3

of Table 6.12.

(viii) If the average strength determined from any group of four

consecutive test results, or the first two or first three consecutive test
results if applicable, fails to meet the requirement of Column A in
Table 6.12, then all the concrete in all the batches represented by the
samples shall be deemed not to comply with the strength
requirements. For the purposes of this clause the batches of concrete
represented by a group of two, three of four consecutive test results
shall include the batches from which the first and last samples in the
group were taken together with all the intervening batches. Provided
that when there is a period exceeding two weeks between any two
consecutive test results in a group, the SO may direct that the test
results immediately before and immediately after the intervening
period shall be treated separately.

Workability

6.56

(ix)

If any individual test result fails to meet the requirement of Column

B in Table 6.12, then that result may be considered to represent only
the particular batch of concrete from which the sample was taken,
provided that the averages of any 4 consecutive results, in which the
failed individual test result lies, satisfy the requirements of Column
A in Table 6.12.

(x)

If designed mix concrete is considered as not complying with the

specified requirements for compressive strength, the SO may instruct
that tests as stated in Clauses 6.57 and 6.59 be carried out on concrete
cores or on samples taken from the hardened concrete.

Where a batch shall be sampled to determine the workability of the concrete,

take samples in accordance with CS1. In all cases the sample shall be
re-mixed, divided into two specimens and each specimen tested for slump or
flow value in accordance with CS1. Unless otherwise specified, adopt the
testing method for workability as below:

(i)

Normal Workability
(designed slump value
from 20 mm to 175 mm)

High Workability
(designed flow value
from 340 mm to 600 mm)

Slump Test

Flow Table Test

Standard mixes:
The average of the two measured slump values shall be within the
appropriate range of measured slump value specified in Table 6.6.

6-32

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

The SO may reject any concrete for which the average measured
slump falls outside the specified range.
(ii)

Designed mixes:
The average of the two measured slump values shall correspond to
that of the accepted trial mix and fall within the limit of 25 mm or
33% of the designed slump value, whichever is the greater. The
average of the two measured flow values shall correspond to that of
the accepted trial mix and fall within the limit of 50 mm of the
designed flow value. The SO may reject any concrete for which the
average measured slump or flow value falls outside this limit.

Concrete that fails to comply with the specified requirements for workability
as specified in Clause 6.56(i) or 6.56(ii) shall not be placed in the permanent
works.
Test cores

6.57

Where specified or when ordered by the SO, take core samples from the
finished concrete work for visual examination and compressive strength
tests. The number and locations of the cores shall be as stated in the contract
or as instructed by the SO. The diameter of cores shall be 100 mm and 150
mm for concretes with 20 mm and 40 mm aggregates respectively.
If concrete represented by test cubes in any concreting day fails to meet the
standard of acceptance specified in Clause 6.55, the SO may order the taking
of twelve or any other number of core samples from the finished concrete
work of the same concreting day for test at the Contractor's expense. The
location of these cores shall be decided by the SO.
Complete all coring within 7 working days of the date the instruction is
given by the SO.
All cores shall be drilled and tested in accordance with CS1.
Make good core holes to the approval of the SO with cement mortar or
concrete of similar strength to that of the parent concrete.
The concrete represented by a set of twelve cores shall be deemed not
complying with the specification if:
(i)

The concrete core exhibits honeycombing which means

interconnected voids arising from, for example, inadequate
compaction or lack of mortar; or

(ii)

The average estimated in-situ cube strength converted in accordance

with CS1 from the compressive strength of the concrete cores, less
than 85% of the specified grade strength of the concrete from which
the cores are taken; or

(iii)

Any individual core has an estimated in-situ cube strength less than
75% of the specified grade strength.

Subject to the approval of the SO, the number of cores taken may be less
than 12. If the number of cores taken is less than 12, the acceptance criteria
stated in Clauses 6.57(ii) and 6.57(iii) above are not applicable. Instead the
Contractor shall propose a set of statistically equivalent acceptance criteria
to the SO for agreement before the core testing.
Cores shall not be tested for strength at ages less than 28 days and no
adjustment shall be made to the measured strength in respect of the age of

6-33

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

the core when tested.

Testing and test
record

6.58

Appropriately mark and deliver all concrete cubes and cores to the Public
Works Laboratories (PWL), as directed by the SO.
Indicate on the works test records the parts of the structure represented by
the samples tested. Keep records on Site.

Security
sampling

6.58.1

Carry out sampling for preparing concrete cubes, and/or taking core samples
from the finished concrete work under the direction and supervision of the
SO.

Security
before delivery

6.58.2

Keep concrete cubes and/or cores in locked curing tanks or by other

approved means under the charge of the SO before delivery to the
laboratory.

Security
delivery

6.58.3

Deliver concrete cubes and/or cores to the testing laboratory under the escort
of the SO or through collection service operated by the Public Works
Laboratories (PWL). Other security arrangements are not permitted without
prior approval by the SO.

Other tests

6.59

During the progress of the Works, the SO shall have the power to order tests
other than cube tests and core tests. The details of the tests and the standard
of acceptance shall be in accordance with the relevant BS and CP.
When concrete is tested either in a plastic or hardened condition by chemical
analysis or other means for cement content it shall be deemed not to comply
with the specification if the cement content is found to be below the
specified figure after making due allowance for the accuracy of the test
method employed.

Failures

6.60

If any part of the finished concrete fails to comply with the standards of
acceptance specified in Clauses 6.55(i) to (ix), 6.57 or 6.59, the SO may
instruct the Contractor to take any one of the following steps or a
combination thereof as the SO considers appropriate:
(i)

Adjust the mix proportion and carry out further trial mixes until a
new mix proportion satisfying the requirements of Clause 6.55 is
obtained and approved. Standard mix proportions shown in Table
6.6 may be used during this period.

(ii)

Improve the standard of quality control.

(iii)

Carry out, at the Contractor's expense, other tests as directed by the

SO.

(iv)

Replace any Site concrete condemned as a result of failing to comply

with the standards of acceptance specified and meet all costs arising
from such replacement. Submit for approval the method statement
for replacing the condemned concrete before the replacement is
carried out. In certain cases, the SO may require the method
statement to be prepared and the remedial work to be supervised by a
Registered Structural Engineer.

MOVEMENT JOINTS
Materials

6.61

Water stops shall be an approved proprietary make with prefabricated angle

and intersection pieces.

6-34

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Impregnated fibreboard joint filler for roads, pavings etc. shall be an

approved proprietary make.
Inorganic joint fillers, bond breakers and back-up material shall be an
approved proprietary make in either sheet form, strip or cord sections.
Sealants shall be approved proprietary make.
Hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements shall be to BS 2499, Grade
A1.
Cold poured joint sealants for concrete pavements shall be to BS 5212.
Two-part polysulphide-based sealants shall be to BS 4254.
One-part gun-grade polysulphide-based sealants shall be to BS 5215.
Mechanical expansion joints shall be obtained from one of the specialists
included in the Development Bureau List for Supply and Installation of
Expansion Joints for Highway Structures.
Workmanship

6.62

Construct joints strictly as specified and in accordance with the relevant

manufacturer's recommendations. Keep edges true, free from cracks,
spalling or other imperfections. Ensure that edges of joints are clean, dry
and free from dust or grease.
Do not place concrete on both sides of a movement joint simultaneously.
All water stops shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers
recommendation and be securely held in position. Make all joints properly,
using hot or cold vulcanizing. Prevent edge-bulbs from moving during
concreting. Special care shall be taken to compact concrete around water
stops such that no voids or porous areas result.
Fix joint filler to the concrete with a bituminous adhesive before casting the
adjoining bay. Form a sealing slot by casting in a removable former.
Apply sealants in accordance with BS 6213. Ensure that they are properly
pressed home and finished with a smooth regular surface. Type and uses of
sealant are shown in Table 6.13.

6-35

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.13
Types of Sealant

Type of sealant

Application

General use

Specific use

Oil based mastic

Applied cold
by gun

Weathersealing, low
movement joints

Pointing frames

Butyl mastic

Applied cold by gun

or trowel

Bedding

Bedding frames
and glazing

Hot applied joint

sealants (BS 2499
Grade A1)

Hot poured

Horizontal and
inclined joints where
the degree of
inclination does not
exceed 1 in 20

Joints in concrete
roads, car parks
etc.

Cold poured joint

sealants (BS 5212
Type F)

Two part compound

mixed and applied
cold by gun or
poured

High movement
joints, resistance to
fuel, oil & hydraulic
fluid

Ditto but where

resistance to fuel
& oil is required

Two part
polysulphide
(BS 4254)

Ditto

High movement
joints, resistance to
aging & damage,
acids & alkalis

Joints in walls &

floors. Sealing to
precast units

One part
polysulphide
(BS 5215)

Applied cold by gun

Ditto

Joints in cladding
panels pointing
aluminium
windows glazing

One part
polyurethane

Applied cold by gun

Ditto

Ditto

Treat surfaces with recommended primer to suit type of sealant where

necessary.
Apply bond breakers and back up material where necessary.
Mix two - part sealants until the colour is uniform throughout.
SUNDRY ITEMS
Water tanks

6.63

Concrete for water tanks shall comply with the requirements in Clause 6.42.
Where no predetermined construction joints are specified, cast the walls and
bottom slab of each tank in one operation. Allow for fittings to be cast in and
use only formwork-ties which do not leave holes through the concrete. Test
the tank for watertightness by filling it up with water and leave for 3 days for
absorption. Allow the water to stand for another 7 days and record the drop
in water level. The watertightness test is passed if the drop is less than 1/500
the average water depth or 10 mm whichever is the least.

Watertight
construction

6.64

Where watertight construction is specified, such as basements, lift and

escalator pits etc., ensure that the work is free from leaks. Use only
formwork ties which do not leave holes through the concrete.

6-36

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

The blinding layer shall form a clean and dry base for the main structural
slab. There shall be no loss of cement paste to, or gain of water from, the
base.
If waterproof membrane sheets shall be applied, exercise special care to
prepare the surface for the application in strict accordance with the
manufacturers' instructions and to avoid damage to the membrane after
application. The installation shall be under the supervision of a competent
representative from the membrane manufacturer. The strength properties of
the sheeting material shall not be less than 110 kN/m2 in lap shear and 3.3
kN/m in lap peel under site conditions, unless otherwise approved by the SO.
Construction details such as corners and joints shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer's drawings or catalogues.
Provide water stops as described in Clauses 6.61 and 6.62 for all
construction joints. Carefully plan the positions of the construction joints
according to daily concreting progress and keep to a minimum. If
ready-mixed concrete is used, it shall be supplied to the Site at regular
intervals. The joint between the base slab and the walls shall be minimum
250 mm above the top of the base slab.
Ensure that ground water levels are maintained below the blinding level so
that the cast concrete will not be subjected to water pressure until it has
attained sufficient strength.
Carry out remedial work required to eliminate any leaks and damp patches
that occur, and obtain approval of method to be used.
Mass concrete
retaining walls

6.65

Concrete for mass concrete retaining walls shall be Grade 20/40 unless
otherwise specified.
Build in 75 mm diameter plastic weep pipes through the full thickness of
walls, falling to the outside and spaced at 1.5 m centres both ways and
staggered.

In-situ concrete
slabs to roads,
car parks and
paved areas

6.66

Mix, transport, place, compact and cure concrete in accordance with the
relevant preceding clauses
Cast concrete slabs in chequerboard pattern in bays of 36 m2 (maximum)
with length not exceeding 1 times width.
Finish surfaces true to the levels, gradients, falls and cambers required.

Concrete
hollow blocks
for slabs

6.67

Construct concrete hollow blocks as follows:

(i)

Concrete mix shall be Grade 20/10. Cure blocks for at least 28 days
before use.

(ii)

Outer casing and web shall be 25 mm thick. Form 25 mm x 5 mm

groove along both sides for key.

(iii)

Compression strength of blocks shall be minimum 20 MPa measured

on the nett section.

Lay in straight rows with butt joints on formwork. Seal exposed open ends
with similar concrete to a depth of 25 mm.
Lintels

6.68

Cast lintels in concrete Grade 20/20 either precast or cast in-situ, and
construct as shown in Table 6.14.

6-37

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Provide 25 mm minimum concrete cover between steel bar reinforcement

and soffit.
Allow bearing of 150 mm (minimum) at each end.

TABLE 6.14
Lintels

Underlays

6.69

Clear span
(m)

Depth of lintel
(mm)

No. and diameter of steel

reinforcing bars per 105 mm
(or part) in width

0 - 1

150

One 12 mm

1 - 2

225

One 16 mm

2 - 3

300

One 20 mm

Underlays to concrete pavings and slabs on hardcore shall be:

(i)

Subsoil grade reinforced waterproof building paper to BS 1521,

grade BIF; or

(ii)

65 m to 80 m polythene sheet.

Lap underlays 150 mm at joints.

Concrete
blinding

6.70

Provide 50 mm blinding layer of Grade 10/20 concrete to underside of all

reinforced concrete works in contact with earth.
FINISHES FOR CONCRETE

Samples

6.71

Fair-faced finish 6.72

2
Provide samples of at least 1 m of any exposed formed or worked finishes
required, and obtain approval.
Fair-faced finish shall be produced as follows :(i)

Obtain an even finish with a sheet material (e.g. plywood).

(ii)

Arrange panels in pattern as specified.

(iii)

The finished surface shall be left as struck. Do not make good until
inspected by the SO.

(iv)

Blowholes not exceeding 10 mm diameter will be permitted, but

otherwise surface shall be free from voids, honey-combing or other
large defects.

(v)

Variations in colour will be permitted when the finished concrete is

to receive an applied decoration.

(v)

Make good small defects, and fill blowholes and formwork-tie

holes with mortar.

6-38

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

Rough board
finish

6.73

Rough board finish shall be produced as follows:

(i)

Formwork or formwork linings to consist of approved rough textured

seasoned wood boards with moisture content of between 10% and
20%.

(ii)

Arrange boards of varying textures to give uniform overall effect.

(iii)

Assemble boards to prevent penetration of grout between them.

(iv)

Soak formwork with water before erecting, and keep damp until
concrete is placed.

(v)

Position cover spacers and bolts to the satisfaction of the SO.

(vi)

The number of uses of formwork lining shall be limited to its ability

to provide the required finish.

(vii)

The finished surface shall be left as struck. Do not make good until
inspected by the SO. Fill minor voids and irregularities on surfaces
with a matching mortar to approval, using a sponge rubber faced
float.

(viii) Discolouration will not be permitted.

Worked surface
finishes

6.74

Surface of concrete after casting shall be finished with one of the following
surface finishes, level or to falls and currents as specified:
(i)

Wood float to give an even textured surface.

(ii)

Steel trowel or power float to give a smooth untextured surface.

(iii)

Scratch with a stiff brush to give a slightly roughened even texture.

(iv)

Tamp with the edge of a board to give an even texture of parallel ribs.

(v)

Other finishes as specified and executed in an approved manner.

Do not wet the surface to assist working and do not add cement to produce
the specified finish without approval.
Applied surface
treatments

6.75

Where specified the wearing characteristics of concrete shall be enhanced

by one of the following:
(i)

Mixing the concrete with an approved hardening admixture in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

(ii)

Applying an approved liquid surface hardener in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

(iii)

Applying an approved metallic or mineral surface treatment in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

6-39

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.15
Chemical Limits for Combined Water (Recycled water and tap water) for each batching plant
Description

Limits

Test method

Test frequency

Physical test
(a) Density test for recycled water
(b) Initial setting time of cement with
recycled water (time of set,
deviation from control, h:min)

1030 kg/m3

Note 1

From 1:00 earlier to BS EN 196-3

1:30 later

At least once per day

Once every 3 months for the first
year and thereafter at half-yearly
intervals

Chemical test for recycled water

For all tests:

(a) Chloride content (as C1):

- prestressed concrete
steam-cured structural concrete

(i)

Once per week for the first 2

months

(ii)

Once per month for the next

12 months thereafter

(iii)

In case of a weekly or
monthly test indicates that the
limits are exceeded, the water
shall immediately be
suspended for use in concrete
mixing until two sets of
consecutive test results taken
from the same source are
satisfactory. In such case, the
testing frequency shall be
maintained at or reverted
back to once per week until
two sets of consecutive test
results are satisfactory.

(iv)

The testing frequency shall

be subject to review after the
12-month period for the
monthly test.

concrete with reinforcement or

other embedded metal

500 ppm

APHA 4500-C1-B

1,000 ppm

APHA 4500-Cl-B

(b) Sulphate content (as SO4)

3,000 ppm

APHA 4500-SO42-C

(c) Acid-soluble alkali content

600 ppm

Notes: 1.
2.
3.

BS EN 1008

Test method to be proposed by the Contractor for the acceptance of the SO.
Accredited Laboratory for the relevant tests shall be used, if available, in which case results shall
be issued on HOKLAS endorsed test reports.
Where ppm means part per million by mass

6-40

Section 6 Structural Concrete Work

TABLE 6.16
Recycled coarse aggregate
Mandatory Requirements

Limits

Testing Method

Minimum dry particle density (kg/m3)

2000

Section 17 of CS3

Maximum water absorption

10%

Section 17 of CS3

Maximum content of wood and other

materials less dense than water

0.5%

Manual sorting in
accordance with: BRE
Digest 433

Maximum content of other foreign materials

(e.g. metals, plastics, clay lumps, asphalt and
tar, glass etc.)

1%

Maximum content of fines

4%

Section 10 of CS3

Maximum content of sulphate (% m/m)

1%

Section 21 of CS3

Flakiness index

40%

Section 11 of CS3

10% fines test

100 kN

Section 16 of CS3

Grading

Table 3.1 of CS3

Maximum chloride content

Table 5.1 of CS3 0.05% by mass of

acid soluble chloride ion of combined
aggregates

Regulations,
Ordinances, etc.
(same as 2.01)

6.76

Comply with all relevant legislation, Codes of Practice and Practice Notes in
connection with demolition works as Clause 2.01.

6-41

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

SECTION 7
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE WORK
GENERALLY
General

7.01

The use of prestressed concrete shall be to Code of Practice for Structural

Use of Concrete issued by the Buildings Department.

Supervision

7.02

Carry out prestressed work under the direction and supervision of fully
competent personnel with previous experience in the particular type of work
involved. Submit particulars of the personnel for approval.

Safety
Precautions

7.03

Take all necessary precautions and adopt working procedures that ensure the
safety of workmen and other persons in the vicinity during tensioning.
Secure jacks in such a manner that they will be effectively restrained should
they lose their grip on the tendons.
CONCRETE

Concrete

7.04

All concrete work shall be in accordance with Section 6 of the GS.

GROUT

Material

7.05

Cement shall be Portland Cement.

Admixture shall be approved by the SO and shall contain no chloride,
nitrate, sulphate, or aluminium powder.

Properties

7.06

Grouts shall be non-shrink, low bleeding in the plastic state and be fluid.
Tests for bleeding or grout settlement shall be made at ambient temperature
on 100 mm deep samples contained in 100 mm diameter airtight vessels.
The upper surface of the cement particulars shall not settle more than 2 mm
after 3 hours or 4 mm maximum. Any water separated at the surface shall be
re-absorbed within 24 hours.
Tests for fluidity shall be by the measurement of the time for l litre of grout
to flow from a funnel or flow cone. A flow cone with a l0 mm outlet pipe
with a water outflow time of 5 sec. may be used. With this cone, grouts shall
have the outflow times between 12 sec. to 25 sec.

Mix proportions
of grout

7.07

Water/Cement ratio shall not exceed 0.44.

Quantity of sand/filler used shall not exceed 30% of the mass of cement.
Admixtures shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be
free of any chemical liable to promote corrosion of the tendon or cause
damage to the grout.
If gas-producing expanding agents are used, the total unrestrained expansion
shall not exceed 10% at ambient temperature.
Chlorides from all sources, i.e. cement, water, sand, filler and admixture
shall not exceed 0.1% by mass of the cement.

Trial mixes of
grout

7.08

Trial mixes shall be completed 35 days before the grout mix is used in
permanent work.
Carry out trial mixes to determine the mix proportions to provide the

7-1

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

required viscosity, strength and other required properties, taking into

account the ambient temperature and any other relevant factors.
Make three separate batches of grout under conditions similar to those used
for production of grout in the Works and use materials typical of the
proposed supply.
Make six 100 mm cubes from each batch for testing, three at 7 days and three
at 28 days. Cubes shall be cured and tested in accordance with
G.S. Clause 6.55.
Trial mix proportions will be approved if the average strength of the nine
cubes tested at 28 days exceeds 35 MPa and the properties of the trial mix
comply with Clause 7.06.
Notwithstanding approval of the trial mix, the SO may require further trial
mixes where circumstances change or inconsistent workmanship is
observed.
PRESTRESSING TENDONS
7.09

Low relaxation prestressing tendon shall be as follows, unless otherwise

specified:
(a)

Round cold drawn high tensile single steel wire to

BS 5896 with plain finish.

(b)

Seven wire steel strand to comply with BS 5896.

(c)

High tensile steel bars to BS 4486 comprising open hearth steel with
sulphur and phosphorous contents each below 0.05%.

All wire and strand shall be in the stress-released or stabilised condition.

Manufacturer's
test certificates

7.10

Provide in respect of each consignment of tendon supplied to the site, a

manufacturer's certificate showing that the material supplied complies with
the relevant B.S. The certificate shall contain all the data specified to be
included in manufacturer's certificate by the relevant B.S.
Provide in addition a manufacturer's certified stress-strain curve for every 20
coils of wire and strand.

Test specimens

7.11

Type of tendon

Provide test specimens of sufficient length for the specified test, for each
type and size of tendon required by the SO. The rate of sampling and the
tests to be carried out are as follows:

Sampling rate

Test

Wire

One sample from every 5 coils

or part thereof

Tolerance on diameter,
tensile test & reverse bend
test

Strand

One sample from every 5 coils

or part thereof

Tensile test and elongation

test

One sample from every 5

tonnes or part thereof

Tensile test

Bar

7-2

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Surface
condition

7.12

Tendon shall be free from grease or other material likely to impair bond and
shall not be rusted to a degree that has produced pitting visible to the naked
eye. Longitudinal surface defects not exceeding 4% of nominal wire, strand
or bar diameter are acceptable.

Straightness

7.13

Transport wire and strand in coils of sufficiently large diameter to ensure

that the steel runs off straight.

Cutting

7.14

Cut to length and trim ends of tendon using a high speed abrasive cutting
wheel, friction-saw or other approved mechanical methods.
Do not cut post-tensioned tendons less than one diameter from the
anchorage.

Welding

7.15

Do not weld close to the tendons or anchorage.

Defects

7.16

Do not allow tendon to be kinked or twisted. Ensure that individual wires or

strands can be readily identified at each end of the member.
Do not use tendon where any strand has become unravelled from the
composite unit.
Reject and remove from the Site any materials which reveal defects during
or prior to their installation in the Works.

Joints

7.17

Joints shall be made using couplers fixed in accordance with manufacturer's

recommendations.
DUCTS

Ducts

Sheathing

7.18

7.19

Ducts for prestressing tendons shall be an approved proprietary type with

permanent sheathing or extractable core. All ducts shall be:
(a)

Strong enough to withstand all forces acting on them during

construction.

(b)

Impervious, to prevent penetration of laitence which might

subsequently hinder the movement of the tendons.

(c)

Rigidly supported at 450 mm centres maximum.

Provide sheathing with a profile that gives a strong bond with the outside
concrete and inside grout but does not cause undue friction or resistance to
the tendons during stressing.
Keep joints to the minimum practicable. Joints shall be formed using sleeve
connectors, adequately sealed against ingress of any material. Stagger joints
in adjacent sheathings by 300 mm minimum.

Extractable
cores

7.20

Do not coat extractable cores with any release agent unless approved.
Retain extractable cores for a minimum period of 24 hours or until the
concrete has hardened sufficiently.

Grout vents

7.21

Grout vents for entry and outlet points shall have:

(a)

An internal diameter of 20 mm minimum.

(b)

Approved connections suitable for the attachment of the feed from

the grout pump.

(c)

High pressure taps or similar approved taps which permit their

closure without reducing the pumping pressure.

7-3

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Obtain approval of the number and position of grout vents for entry and
outlet points before ducts are fixed in position.
No grout vents shall be provided at an interval greater than 15 m.
ANCHORAGES
Anchorages

7.22

Anchorages shall be of an approved proprietary type to BS 4447, capable of

distributing the stress evenly in the end blocks. Anchorages shall maintain
the prestressing force under both sustained and fluctuating loads and be able
to withstand the effect of external shock with minimum movement of the
tendon.
Clean all bearing surfaces of the anchorage prior to concreting and
tensioning.
Provision shall be made for the protection of anchorages against corrosion.

Manufacturer's
test certificates

7.23

Provide a manufacturer's test certificate for all anchorages supplied to the

site in accordance with Section 8 of BS 4447.
JACKS

Jacks

7.24

Jacks and other equipment used for prestressing shall be a type and of
capacity suitable to the system adopted.

Maintenance

7.25

Provide documentary proof that jacks have been properly maintained and
checked by an agent approved by the manufacturer of the equipment within
a period of two years prior to the commencement of stressing.

Measurement
equipment and
test certificate

7.26

Use direct-reading load cells or an indirect reading system e.g. gauges fitted
in the hydraulic system to determine the pressure in the jacks for measuring
the stressing load. Test measuring equipment, calibrate to an accuracy within
+ or - 2% and provide a calibration certificate issued by an approved testing
laboratory once every 6 months.

Pressure gauges

7.27

Calibrate pressure gauges against the load cell before stressing where these
are used as load indicators. The working pressure required to stress tendons
to the specified load shall lie within the central half of the range of the gauge.
TOLERANCES

Generally

7.28

Do not exceed any tolerance specified e.g. relaxation of steel, line of

sheathing, anchorage set, frictional losses during stressing, etc.

Justification of
proposed
tolerances

7.29

Submit for approval information or literature to substantiate tolerances

proposed.
Carry out tests to justify the tolerance, if so required by the SO.

Deviation from
specified
tolerances

7.30

Modify the design to comply with the specified tolerance when a proposed
tolerance deviates from that specified. The revised design shall be approved
by the SO.
FIXING DUCTS AND TENDONS

Profile of ducts

7.31

Submit details showing the profile of the ducts for approval prior to the
fixing of the ducts.
Determine the profile of the ducts such that the final position of the tendon
after stressing complies with the drawings.

7-4

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Sealing ducts

7.32

Temporarily seal the ends of all ducts until the tendons are threaded through
and stressing is commenced.

Placing of
tendons

7.33

Carefully assemble and place or insert prestressing tendons in the positions

indicated on the drawings with no crossings, sharp bends, kinks and the like.
The centre of the duct shall be maintained at all times such that it does not
deviate from the designed position by more than 5 mm in any direction.

Ducts free from

laitance

7.34

Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the SO that tendons are free to move in the
ducts or that the ducts are free from obstruction.
STRESSING

Concrete
strength and
transfer

7.35

Ensure concrete in post-tensioned work has attained at least 80% of its

characteristic strength before tensioning commences.
Prepare concrete test cubes to ascertain the time at which transfer may be
made.
The time for transfer will be determined by the successful testing of a batch
of minimum three test cubes. If the initial batch of cubes tested indicate that
the concrete has not attained the required strength a further batch of cubes
shall be tested at a later date. This process will be repeated until a batch of
cubes successfully passes the strength test.
Submit the results of strength testing for approval.

Stressing

7.36

Stress prestressed elements at the designated ends.

The sequence of stressing shall be as specified or as directed by the SO.
Stress tendons at a gradual and steady rate without interruption until they
attain the specified load.
Stress simultaneously at both ends when two end stressing, in stages as
directed and carry out de-wedging consecutively.
Give the SO a minimum of 3 days notice before stressing.
MEASUREMENT OF FORCE

Duct friction

7.37

Before the actual stressing, the SO may order a reasonable number of tests to
be carried out to ascertain the amount of duct friction. The details of such
tests shall be agreed by the SO and will generally consist of stressing a
tendon from one end and attaching a jack to the other end capable of
measuring the load transmitted to it by the tendons.

Extension of
tendons

7.38

Provide approved facilities for the measurement of the extension of the

tendons and of any movement of the tendons in the gripping devices.
Provide a comparison between the measured tendon force and that
calculated from the extension. Carry out approved remedial work where the
difference exceeds 6%.
If the extension of a tendon deviates substantially from the anticipated value
during the initial stage of stressing, the SO may require the tendons to be
stressed incrementally and the extension shall be measured and recorded for
each increment of load.

Record

7.39

Submit for approval, records in the format and quantity as required by the
SO, of the extension of, and jacking forces for, all tendons.

7-5

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Format of record shall contain the following details:

Location of tensioning operations.
Coil, heat and bundle numbers of strand used.
Date and time of starting and completing tensioning operations.
Technical personnel supervising or carrying out tensioning.
Prestressing tendon reference no.
Tensioning apparatus identification.
Measured extensions.
Pressure gauge or load cell readings.
Amount of draw-in.
GROUTING
Generally

7.40

Grout ducts for bonded tendons as soon as practicable and in no case more
than 5 days after tensioning in such a manner as to fill the void surrounding
the tendons completely with neat cement grout.

Grouting
equipment

7.41

Mixing equipment shall be of a type capable of producing a grout of

colloidal consistency, whilst imparting only a slow motion to the body of the
grout.
Injection equipment shall be capable of continuous operation with minimal
variation of pressure and shall include a system for recirculating grout when
grouting operations are interrupted. Injection delivery pressure shall
generally not exceed 1 MPa. Baffles to the pump shall be fitted with
1.18 mm sieve strainers
All equipment shall be thoroughly washed through with clean water at either
the completion of each series of operations or after 3 hours have elapsed
since the previous cleaning, whichever is the shorter period.

Cleaning ducts

7.42

Thoroughly clean ducts formed with sheathings using compressed air before
grouting.
Fill ducts formed without sheathings with water for at least one hour and
subsequently blow water out with compressed air before grouting.

Mixing

7.43

Mix grout for a minimum of 2 minutes and not more than 4 minutes until
uniform consistency is obtained.

Grouting

7.44

Grouts shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing unless a retarder is

incorporated in the grout.
Do not commence grouting without prior approval.
Seal anchorages before grouting.
Inject grout in one continuous operation and allow it to flow from the vents
until its consistency is equivalent to that of the grout injected. Seal the vents
consecutively in the direction of flow.
Seal and pressurize the system to 0.5 MPa for 5 minutes upon completion of
grouting.

7-6

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Grouted ducts shall not be subjected to shock or vibration within 24 hours of

grouting.
Records

7.45

Prepare records of grouting operations in the format and quantity as required

by the SO. Records shall include the following:
(a)

Date when each duct was grouted.

(b)

Mix proportions of the grout.

(c)

Details of admixture introduced.

(d)

Pressure applied.

(e)

Details of any interruptions.

(f)

Location of grouting.

(g)

Supervising staff.

(h)

Grout injection pressure.

(i)

Volume of grout used.

Submit these records to the SO within 3 days of completing the relevant

grouting.
PROTECTION OF TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES
Recesses

7.46

Form recesses where shown at the prestressing anchorages in all end blocks
in accordance with the prestressing manufacturer's recommendation.
The size of the recesses shall be sufficient to provide a minimum of 25 mm
cover, measured from the finished face of the end block to the anchorage
head and protruding cropped prestressing tendons.

Protection

7.47

Fill recesses with dense concrete secured to the structural concrete by wire
or binders projecting from the recesses after completion of stressing,
grouting and cropping of prestressing tendons.

Handling and
storage of
tendons

7.48

Prestressing tendons shall not be subjected to rough handling, shock loading

or dropping from a height. All prestressing components shall be handled in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Prestressing tendons
and sheaths shall be stored off the ground on level supports and in a manner
which will not result in damage or deformation to the material or air
contamination of materials.
PRECAST PRESTRESSED MEMBERS

Storage

7.49

Firmly support precast prestressed members during storage at such bearing

positions as will ensure that the stresses induced in them never exceed the
permissible design stresses.
Lift or support such members only at the points specified. Handle and place
without impact.
PRETENSIONED MEMBERS

Debonded
tendon

7.50

Cover tendons with sleeves of PVC or other approved material where these
are specified as debonded from the concrete. Tape ends of the sleeves to the
tendon to prevent the ingress of grout.

7-7

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Tensioning

7.51

Stress tendons in accordance with the requirements for post-tensioning

unless otherwise agreed by the SO.

Pretensioning
proposal

7.52

Submit proposals for pretensioning for approval prior to undertaking

pretensioning work. Provide full details of the proposed tensioning-bed,
jacks and fixing equipment.
Ensure that the tendons are maintained in their correct positions during
concreting by providing tensioning-beds with sufficient locator plates.
Where a number of moulds are positioned in line, they shall be free to move
in the direction of their length, and thus permit the transfer to the
prestressing force to the concrete along the whole line.

Temperature

7.53

When the temperature of the pretensioning steel is below 10 degrees

centigrade at the time of tensioning, steel elongation computations shall
allow for the increase in temperature of the steel between the time of
tensioning and the time when the concrete takes its initial set.

Concrete
strength
and transfer

7.54

Transfer the load gradually when the concrete has attained the required
strength as specified in Clause 7.35. Agree the order of release with the SO.
Trim tendons flush with the face of the concrete and apply the specified
protection to their ends.

Marking

7.55

Indelibly mark members to show the following:

(a)

Member reference.

(b)

Production line on which they were manufactured.

(c)

Date on which the concrete was cast.

(d)

Load applied.

(e)

The face which will be uppermost when the member is in its correct
position in the Works where members are of symmetrical section.

Locate markings so that they shall not be exposed to view when the Works
are completed and the members are in their final positions.
LOADING TEST
Generally

Precast
prestressed
elements

7.56

7.57

Loading tests shall be required as a check on structures or parts of structures

when:
(a)

There is doubt regarding the strength or deformation of members

under load.

(b)

Specified in the contract.

(c)

Ordered by the SO.

(d)

Required to check the concrete quality control in precast prestressed

members as Clause 7.57 hereunder.

Carry out a load test on one element, selected at random by the SO, when the
28 days cube strength for concrete used in the same batch as the selected
element fails to comply with the specification. Arrange for the loading test
on precast prestressed elements to be carried out by an approved
independent testing firm, using their own equipment. Provide the necessary
labour and attendance.

7-8

Section 7 Prestressed Concrete Work

Remove the element tested if the load test fails, and prove to the satisfaction
of the SO that other elements from the same batch are acceptable by carrying
out further load tests.
Age of concrete

7.58

Carry out all tests as soon as possible after 28 days from the time of placing
the concrete.

Test Loads

7.59

The test load shall be equal to the sum of the total dead load plus 1.25 times
the total live load specified for the element in the contract. The load shall be
maintained for a period of 24 hours.

Testing
arrangement

7.60

Submit details of the proposed arrangement for the loading test for approval
prior to commencing the test.
Support the element under test on rigid supports at its designed points of
bearing.
Apply test load gradually to the element in the approved stages.

Measurement

7.61

Measure deflection at the midspan of the elements:

(a)

Before application of the test load.

(b)

Immediately after application of the test load.

(c)

At the end of the 24 hour period for loading.

(d)

After removal of the test load.

(e)

After a 24 hour recovery period.

Deflection shall be measured at the midspan relative to a line joining the

supporting points. Take sufficient measurements to enable side effects to be
taken into account.
Test records

Assessment of
results

7.62

7.63

Provide test records in the format and quantity as required by the SO.
Records shall include the following:
(a)

Age of the element at the time of the test.

(b)

Total load applied and increments of load adopted.

(c)

Deflection.

(d)

Load/deflection curves with time.

(e)

Calculated value of Young's modulus of elasticity.

(f)

Temperature and weather conditions prevalent throughout the test.

The prestressed element shall be deemed to have failed to comply with the
strength requirement if any of the following conditions occur:
(a)

Visible cracks occur under the test load.

(b)

Maximum deflection due to applied load exceeds l/500 of the

effective span.

(c)

After the 24 hour recovery period, the recovery of deflection is less

than 85% of the maximum deflection.

7-9

Section 8 Concrete for Minor and Non-Structural Work

SECTION 8
CONCRETE FOR MINOR AND
NON-STRUCTURAL WORK
Formwork

8.01

Construct and remove formwork and falsework as Clauses 6.01 to 6.13.

Reinforcement

8.02

Reinforcement shall be as Clauses 6.14 to 6.16 and Clauses 6.18 to 6.25.

Provide, if so instructed by the SO, test specimens of reinforcement as
Clause 6.17.

Cement

8.03

Portland Cement shall be to BS EN 197-1 (Type CEM I). Strength Class of

cement used in structural concrete shall be 52.5 N, unless otherwise
approved by the SO.

Aggregate

8.04

Provide coarse aggregate of 20 mm nominal maximum size with grading

within limits as defined in CS3 and fine aggregate with grading lying within
the limits of Grading C or M. Natural sand shall not be used in production of
concrete unless otherwise agreed by the SO.
Aggregates, if so instructed by the SO, shall be subjected to sieve analyses to
CS3.

Water

8.05

Water shall be as Clause 6.35.

Admixtures

8.06

Admixtures shall comply with BS 5075-1 & BS 5075-2. Use strictly in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Delivery and
storage

8.07

Store bagged cement in a dry weather-proof store with a raised floor.

Store aggregates of different sizes in separate stock piles and keep free from
contact with deleterious matter.
Remove from Site immediately any materials failing to meet the
requirements of the GS.

Testing of
materials

8.08

Testing of materials shall be as Clause 6.39.

Mixes

8.09

The grade of prescribed mix concrete shall be denoted by the minimum

28 - days cube strength in MPa and the nominal maximum size of aggregate
in mm with suffix "P".
The mix proportions used shall be as Table 8.1 and 8.2 for batching by
weight and batching by volume respectively.
The maximum free water/cement ratio shall be 0.7.

8-1

Section 8 Concrete for Minor and Non-Structural Work

TABLE 8.1
Batching by weight

Batch weights (kg)

Grade

10 P

20 P

Material

for approx one

cubic metre yield

for one-bag
cement mix

Cement
Fine aggregate
20 mm coarse
aggregate

255
835
1065

45
145
185

Cement
Fine aggregate
20 mm coarse
aggregate

345
725
1105

45
95
145

TABLE 8.2
Batching by volume

Batch volume (litres)

Grade

10 P

20 P

Material

for approx one

cubic metre yield

for one-bag
cement mix

Cement
Fine aggregate
20 mm coarse
aggregate

6 bags
575
725

1 bag
100
125

Cement
Fine aggregate
20 mm coarse
aggregate

8 bags
540
770

1 bag
70
100

Each bag of cement shall be 45 kg.

8-2

Section 8 Concrete for Minor and Non-Structural Work

Batch mixing

8.10

Mix concrete by machine where practicable. Hand mixing, on prepared

platforms to prevent picking up rubbish and defacement of surfaces, may be
permitted by the SO for small quantities. The SO may require tests to
demonstrate that the methods of hand mixing will achieve adequate and
consistent mixing of the constituents.
Do not remix partially hardened concrete.

Ready-mixed
concrete

8.11

Ready-mixed concrete may be used. The batched quantities shall comply

with Table 8.1.

Transport and
placing

8.12

Transport and place concrete using a method which ensures that there is no
contamination, segregation or loss of the constituent materials.
Clean all areas where concrete shall be placed and render free from standing
water.
Do not place concrete in any part of the structure until approval has been
given.
Compact concrete in its final position within 2 hours of the introduction of
cement to the mix, and within 30 minutes of discharge from the mixer.
Concrete, which in the opinion of the SO, is no longer sufficiently workable
shall be rejected.
Deposit concrete in horizontal layers to a compacted depth not exceeding
450 mm where internal vibrators are used or 150 mm in all other cases.
Do not allow concrete to free fall in excess of 2.7 m, unless otherwise agreed
by the SO.

Construction
Joints

8.13

Compact concrete to produce a dense homogeneous mass. Do not apply

vibration by way of the reinforcement.

8.14

The position and details of any construction joints not specified in the
Contract shall be subject to approval. Allow such joints to minimise the
possibility of the occurrence of shrinkage cracks.
Remove laitance and all loose material from the construction joints and
expose the aggregate as soon as is practicable after casting to provide
adequate bond to subsequent concrete.
Ensure the surface of the construction joint is dry and free from debris when
fresh concrete is placed against it.

Protection of
immediately
finished
concrete

8.15

Immediately after compaction, protect finished concrete against harmful

effects of weather, running water and drying out. Apply the protection by
either:
(i)

Application of a liquid curing membrane.

(ii)

Covering with plastic sheets/wet sacks.

(iii)

Flooding with water.

Protection shall be maintained for a minimum period of 4 days.

Acceptance

8.16

Regular strength and slump testing shall not be used to judge compliance,
although the SO may require these and other tests as specified in Clauses
6.57 and 6.59 to be undertaken from time to time.
Where tests are required, compressive strength testing shall be in accordance
with CS1 and the acceptance criteria shall be as for standard mixes in Clause

8-3

Section 8 Concrete for Minor and Non-Structural Work

6.55 (i). Slump testing shall be as Clause 6.56 and the average of the two
measured slump values shall be within the range 75 - 135 mm.
Appropriately mark and deliver all concrete cubes to the Public Works
Laboratories (PWL) as directed by the SO.
Failure

8.17

If any concrete fails to comply with Clause 8.16, the SO may instruct the
Contractor to take any of the following steps or a combination thereof as are
considered appropriate:
(i)
Improve the standard of quality control.
(ii)

Carry out other tests as directed by the SO.

(iii)

Replace any concrete condemned as a result of failing to comply

with the standards of acceptance specified and meet all costs arising
from such replacement.

In-situ concrete
slabs to roads,
car parks and
paved areas

8.18

Provide in-situ concrete slabs as Clause 6.66.

Underlays

8.19

Provide underlays as Clause 6.69.

Concrete
blinding

8.20

Provide concrete blinding as Clause 6.70.

Finishes for
concrete

8.21

Provide exposed formed or worked finishes as Clauses 6.71 to 6.75.

Prescribed mix
concrete with
100% recycled
coarse
aggregates

8.22

When specified, concrete with 100% recycled coarse aggregates shall be

applicable to prescribed mix concrete of 20 MPa grade strength and shall be
used only in benches, stools, planter walls, concrete mass walls and other
minor concrete structures, in compliance with Section 8 and subject to the
followings which shall take precedence in case of discrepancies:
(a)

Recycled coarse aggregates shall be produced by crushing old concrete

and shall meet the requirements in Table 6.16.

(b)

Fine aggregates shall be as defined in the GS.

(c)

Fine aggregates recycled from old concrete shall not be used.

(d)

The grading of the coarse aggregates shall comply with the limits as
defined in the GS for single-sized 20 mm and 10 mm aggregates.

(e)

Concrete shall be mixed in the following proportions:

Portland Cement
Fine Aggregate
20 mm Coarse Aggregate
10 mm Coarse Aggregate

:
:
:
:

100 kg
180 kg
180 kg
90 kg

(f)

Recycled coarse aggregates shall be thoroughly wetted before being

used.

(g)

The concrete shall have a minimum slump of 75 mm when it is ready

to be compacted to its final position.

(h)

4 concrete cubes shall be made on each concreting day, 2 for crushing

tests at 7 days and the other 2 for crushing tests at 28 days. The
minimum concrete cube strength shall be 14 MPa and 20 MPa at 7 and
28 days respectively.

8-4

Section 8 Concrete for Minor and Non-Structural Work

Regulations,
Ordinances, etc.
(same as 2.01)

8.23

(i)

Before any concrete is produced for use in the works, trial mixes shall
be performed in accordance with the GS. The 28 day strength of each
of the 3 cubes in the trial shall not be less than 26 MPa.

(j)

Natural aggregates shall be used in lieu of the recycled aggregates in

case of supply shortage of recycled aggregates.

Comply with all relevant legislation, Codes of Practice and Practice Notes in
connection with demolition works as Clause 2.01.

8-5

Section 9 Brickwork and Blockwork

SECTION 9
BRICKWORK AND BLOCKWORK
GENERALLY
Generally

9.01

Brickwork and blockwork to be in accordance with PD6697:2010, BS EN

1996-1-2, BS EN 1996-2, BS EN 1996-36.
MATERIALS

Bricks

9.02

Clay bricks shall be well burnt, hard, sound, square, clean and approved.
Bricks with high sulphate content should be rejected. Bricks for fair faced
works to be "selected", being picked for evenness, texture, sharpness of
arrises and uniformity of colour. Any cracked bricks should be rejected.
Brick size to comply with National Annex of BS EN 771-1, Table NA.1
with Work size to be 215 x 102.5 x 65 mm and Coordinating size to be 225 x
112.5 x 75 mm, or other dimensions subject to approval by the SO.

Facing bricks

9.03

Facing bricks to have the following properties in accordance with ASTM

C216-11:
1.

Compressive strength, the average compressive strength of 5 bricks

must exceed 20.7 MPa; while the individual should not be less than
17.2 MPa;

2.

Saturation coefficient cannot exceed 0 .78;

3.

Chippage, 85% to 100% of the brick can have chips that are
measured from an edge that range between 0 to 7.9 mm and
measured from a corner that range between 0 to 12.7 mm. No more
than 15% of the brick can have chips that are measured from an
edge that range between 7.9 to 11.1 mm and measured from a
corner that range between 12.7 to 19.1 mm. The cumulative length
of the chips around the perimeter edges of face cannot exceed 10%
of the perimeter length;

4.

The faces shall be free of cracks or imperfections when viewed

from a distance of 6 meters.

Engineering
bricks &
loadbearing
bricks

9.04

Engineering bricks and loadbearing bricks to be HD Type bricks to BS EN

771-1 and comply with National Annex to BS EN 771-1, Table NA.6 (Class
A: 125 N/mm2 and Class B 75 N/mm2, having absorption limits 4.5% and
7% respectively).

Fire bricks

9.05

Fire bricks to be fire clay refractionary bricks of specified class of the best
quality, light in colour, uniform in texture and of standard sizes to BS
3056-1. Testing, if specified, shall be to BS 1902-3.13 or ISO 12678-2.

Concrete bricks
and blocks

9.06

Concrete bricks and blocks to be to BS EN 771-3 & BS EN 772-2. The mean

compressive strength to be not less than 7.0 MPa. Concrete bricks to be of
the same size as clay bricks.
Concrete blocks to be of the thickness specified and other dimensions as
approved.
Concrete bricks or blocks for fair face work to be "selected", being picked
for evenness, texture and sharpness of arrises.

9-1

Section 9 Brickwork and Blockwork

Concrete hollow 9.07

block

Same as in Clause 9.06, except that the mean compressive strength to be not
less than 5.0 MPa of the gross area.

Glass blocks

9.08

Hollow glass blocks to be hermetically sealed hollow units made of clear,

colourless glass with a polyvinyl butyral edge coating, manufactured strictly
in accordance with BS EN 1051-1, to a single compressive strength value of
not less than 6 N/mm and an average value of not less than 7 N/mm.

Samples

9.09

Submit samples of each type of brick or block, and obtain approval before
placing orders with suppliers.

Damp proof
courses

9.10

Damp proof courses to be 2 layers of 2-ply bituminous paper, or of other

types, to BS 6398, BS 6515 and BS 8215. Do not use hessian based types of
bitumen damp proof courses.

Wall ties

9.11

Ties for cavity walls to be formed 20x3.2 mm galvanized steel flats and to be
vertical twist type to BS EN 845-1 + A1, except that the overall length of the
ties shall be minimum 100 mm longer than the width of the specified cavity.
Ties between ends of walls and concrete to be one of the following:
(a)

6 mm diameter steel rods 350 mm long, painted with 2 coats of

bituminous paint.

(b)

20 x 3 mm galvanized steel flats 350 mm long, fanged at both ends.

Strips of approved brickwork reinforcement 350 mm long of the
following widths:
(i)
(ii)

For 100-105 mm walls, 60 mm

For 200-225 mm walls, 110 mm

Where strips are to be fixed by shot firing, the length may be reduced subject
to approval.
Ties for walls built against face of concrete to be formed from 20 x 3 mm
galvanized steel flats 150 mm long, fanged at both ends.
Cement

9.12

Cement to be as Clause 6.27.

Water

9.13

Water to be as Clause 6.35.

Sand

9.14

Sand to be clean, hard, durable crushed rock or clean sand to conform to the
grading limits set out in Table 9.1
TABLE 9.1
Grading
BS Sieve

% by weight passing BS sieves

5.00 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
600 m
300 m
150 m

100
90-100
70-100
40-100
5-70
0-15

9-2

Section 9 Brickwork and Blockwork

Sand, other than the 5.00 mm size, whose grading falls outside the limits set
out in Table 9.1 by a total amount not exceeding 5% may be accepted. The
quality of clay, fine silt and fine dust present when determined by the
methods given in BS EN 932-1, BS EN 932-6 and BS EN 933-7 shall not
exceed 10% by weight. Sand for fair faced works to be free from salt
causing efflorescence.
Lime

9.15

Lime to be hydrated lime to BS EN 459-1, delivered in sealed bags bearing

the manufacturers name or brand.

Lime putty

9.16

Prepare lime putty as PD CEN/TR 15123:2005, BS EN 13914-2 and BS

8481 by adding hydrated lime to water, and mix to a thick, creamy
consistency. Leave undisturbed for 16 hours (minimum) before use.

Plasticiser

9.17

Plasticiser to be an approved proprietary brand to BS EN 934-3.

WORKMANSHIP

Handling

9.18

Unload and handle bricks and blocks without soiling, chipping or subjecting
to other damage.

Storing

9.19

Stack bricks and blocks on level hard-standings, protect from damage and
contamination.
Where blockwork to be used for acoustic wall, the concrete block to be cured
for 28 days minimum after manufacturing before use.

Brickwork &
blockwork
reinforcement

9.20

Where specified, provide expanded metal lathing or mild steel rods of

specific size, galvanized or painted with 2 coats of bituminous paint as
brickwork reinforcement.
Provide galvanized expanded metal strip or other materials to the SOs
approval, to blockwork at every 4 courses of the following widths:
i.

For 100 105 mm walls, 60 mm

ii.

For 299 225 mm walls, 110 mm

Gauge boxes

9.21

Measure mortar constituents by volume, using clean gauge boxes made to

sizes to suit volumes required.

Proportion

9.22

Mix constituents to the following proportions:

(a)

Cement mortar cement and sand 1:3.

(b)

Cement/lime mortar cement, lime putty and sand 1:1:6 for external
walls and 1:2:9 for internal walls.

(c)

Firebrick mortar to be:

(i)

An approved proprietary brand of fire cement, used neat, or

(ii)

High alumina cement to BS EN 14647 and fine crushed

firebrick 1:2, tested to BS 4551+A1 if required by the SO.

Proportions given are for dry sand. Allow for bulking.

Where plasticisers are used, they shall be used strictly in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations and the proportions of the mortar mix
adjusted accordingly.
Mixing

9.23

Mix mortar by mechanical mixer, or, where approved, by hand on a clean,

closeboarded platform. Mix thoroughly, but do not overmix mortar

9-3

Section 9 Brickwork and Blockwork

containing plasticizers.
Testing

9.24

The proportions of the materials used in clause 9.22 with proper mixing shall
have a mean compressive strength as Table 9.2
TABLE 9.2
Strength of mortar
Type of mortar

Mean compressive strength at 28 days

(cement: lime: sand)

1: 0 to 0.25: 3
1: 1: 5 to 6
1: 2: 8 to 9

(site tests)
11 MPa
2.5 MPa
1.0 MPa

Testing on strength of mortar is normally not required. However, when

specified, the testing to be in accordance with PD 6697:2010, BS EN
1996-1-2, BS EN 1996-2 and BS EN 1996-3.
Use of mortars

9.25

Mortars to be used as follows:

(a)

Cement mortar for the following:

(i)

Work below damp proof course, including basement walls.

(ii)

Chimney stacks above roof level.

(ii)

70 and 105 mm brickwork.

(iv)

Concrete blockwork not exceeding 150 mm.

(v)

Load-bearing brick or block walls.

(vi)

Brickwork in engineering brick.

(vii)

Pointing where directed and where bedding is of cement

mortar.

(b)

Firebrick mortar for firebrick work.

(c)

Cement/lime mortar as Clause 9.22 (b) for brickwork and blockwork

generally, except as specified.

Samples of face
brickwork and
blockwork

9.26

Prepare sample panels of approximately 1 m2 of faced brickwork and fair

faced brickwork or blockwork, including pointing, and obtain approval
before proceeding.

Dry weather

9.27

During dry weather, wet bricks and blocks as necessary to prevent premature
drying out of the mortar.

Wet weather

9.28

During wet weather, protect freshly laid brickwork and blockwork at the
completion of each days work or in heavy rain.

Faced work

9.29

Protect faced and fair faced work until practical completion.

Colour mixing of 9.30

facing bricks

Distribute facing bricks, selected bricks and selected bricks for fair faced
work of varying colour, evenly throughout the work, so that no patches
appear.

9-4

Section 9 Brickwork and Blockwork

Uniformity

9.31

Carry out work with no portion more than 900 mm above another at any
time, racking back between levels.

Dimension

9.32

Gauge brick courses with four courses to 320 mm including joints.

Joints

9.33

Lay bricks or blocks on a full bed of mortar with the joints filled solid to a
consistent thickness of 10 mm.
In loadbearing walls, lay single frog bricks with the frog uppermost, and fill
with mortar.

Accuracy

9.34

Keep courses level, and perpends vertically in line. Plumb quoins and other
angles as the work proceeds.

Tolerances

9.35

Build brickwork and blockwork to the tolerances in Table 9.3

TABLE 9.3
Tolerance (mm)
Position on plan
Length
Height
Level of bed joints (in any 5 m)
Straightness (in any 5 m)
Verticality (in any 3 m)

15
15
10
10
15
15

Cavity walling

9.36

Build cavity walls with cavities of the widths, and walling of the thicknesses
required. Bond the two thickness of walling together with ties spaced 900
mm apart horizontally and 320 mm vertically, staggered, and with additional
ties at reveals and openings. Carefully position ties so that they fall toward
the outer thickness of the wall. Keep cavity clean by means of lifting
battens. Leave openings at the base of the cavity to facilitate clearing out on
completion and subsequently close up to match the surrounding work.

Bonding

9.37

Lay 70 mm and 105 mm brick walls in stretcher bond. Lay brick walls 225
mm and over in English bond, unless otherwise specified. Lay blockwork in
stretcher bond. Lay bricks throughout the work with the perpends in any
course not less than a quarter of a brick from those in the course below.
Notwithstanding the above, lay faced brick walls and fair faced brickwork or
blockwork with joints to an even and regular pattern.

Ties to concrete

9.38

At junctions of walls with concrete structure cast in, cut and pin or shot fire
ties to concrete at 320 mm centres vertically to project 250 mm into brick or
block walls.
For brickwork or blockwork built against the face of concrete structure, cast
in or out and pin ties to concrete at 900 mm centres horizontally, 320 mm
centres vertically and staggered, to project 75 mm into brick or block walls.

Finishing of
joints

9.39

Strike off joints not visible in the finished work as the work proceeds. Fill
joints in fair faced work as the work proceeds to provide a smooth surface
flush with the brick or block face.
Finish joints in faced brickwork with either a trowelled weathered joint as
the work proceeds, or rake out to a depth of 10 mm as the work proceeds and
point with a weathered joint on completion. Rake out joints to a depth of 10
mm in brickwork to provide key for plaster or other wet applied finishes.

9-5

Section 9 Brickwork and Blockwork

Damp proof
course

9.40

Flush up brickwork to form a level and even bed with mortar used in the
general brickwork to receive the horizontal damp proof course.
Lay damp proof course in continuous strip with 150 mm laps at end of length
and at returns, and complete mortar joint to normal thickness.

Wedging and
pinning

9.41

Pin up and wedge brickwork and blockwork to structural soffits, and fill
solid with mortar.

Building in

9.42

Build in lintels and bed solid door and window frames and the like with
mortar similar to that of adjacent walls.

Holes and chases 9.43

Leave, form or cut chases, holes, recesses and reveals in walls to receive
frames, rainwater or other pipes, conduits, electric cables, sleeve and the like
as required and subsequently make good with mortar similar to that of
adjacent walls.

Raking out and

pointing
flashings

9.44

Rake out joints to a depth of minimum 25 mm for turn-in of flashings or

skirtings. Point flashings and skirtings in mortar similar to that in adjacent
walls.

Glass block
panels

9.45

Paint all sides of structural opening to receive glass block panels with two
coats of bituminous paint.
Lay blocks in cement/lime mortar and point both sides. Provide 12 mm
clearance at jambs and head of panels. Fill gap with movement joint filler
and seal both sides, as Section 6.
Build in strips of blockwork reinforcement 64 mm wide at every fourth
course. Carry ends of strips across the clearance gap and build into or secure
to jambs of opening in an approved manner. Use proprietary fixing
components supplied by glass block manufacturer, and follow all fixing
details recommended by the manufacturer unless required to do otherwise by
the SO.

Lintels

9.46

Construct concrete lintel for openings at brickwork and blockwork as per

Clause 6.68. Alternative proprietary product may be accepted subject to
approval by the SO.

9-6

Section 10 Masonry

SECTION 10
MASONRY
GENERALLY
Stone

10.01

Stone, generally, shall be granite of consistent colour, free from defects and
ferrous materials that will adversely affect strength or appearance, to BS EN
771-6 and shall comply with BS EN 1996-1-1 + NA to BS EN 1996-1-1,
BS EN 1996-2 + NA to BS EN 1996-2, BS EN1996-3 + NA to BS EN
1996-3 and PD6697:2010 when applied to masonry structures. Test
methods according to clause 2 of BS EN 771-6.

Micro
conditions of
exposure

10.02

Micro conditions of exposure of completed masonry, as in clause 2.1.2.1 and

Annex A of BS EN 1996-2 shall be categorized into classes, as follows:
MX1 - In a dry environment;
MX2 - Exposed to moisture or wetting;
MX3 - Exposed to moisture or wetting plus freeze/thaw cycling;
MX4 - Exposed to saturated salt air or seawater;
MX5 - In an aggressive chemical environment.
Masonry units, mortar, concrete infill, ancillary components and
reinforcement shall be selected according to Annex B and C of BS EN
1996-2 based on the appropriate class of micro conditions of exposure of
completed masonry.
MATERIALS

Approval of
stone

10.03

Submit samples of stone for the SOs approval before ordering.

Mortar

10.04

Mortar shall be as Clauses 9.12 to 9.17 and 9.21 to 9.25.

Damp proof
course

10.05

Damp proof course shall be as Clause 9.10.

Wall ties

10.06

Ties between walls and concrete shall be copper, bronze or stainless steel
and shall be to BS EN 845-1 + A1.
WORKMANSHIP

Tolerances

10.07

Build masonry to the tolerances as follows:

TABLE 10.1
Tolerance (+ or - mm)

Thickness of bed joints

Position on plan
Length
Height
Level of bed joints (in any 5000 mm)
Straightness (in any 5000 mm)
Verticality (in any 3000 mm)

10-1

Rubble
Walling

Ashlar
Walling

5 - 15
25
25
25
25
25
20

5 - 10
15
15
10
10
15
15

Section 10 Masonry

Mock up
Sample

10.08

Provide stone works "mock up" samples, approximately 1 square meter of

stone works, including pointing on Site for the SOs approval if the
stonework is extensive and/or as directed by the SO. All details including
colour, finish, mortar type, pointing, wall ties, damp proof course and like
matters for the source and type of each material shall be agreed before work
commences.
Sample panels shall be used as means of comparison against which the SO
shall determine the compliance or otherwise of the masonry in the permanent
work. The sample panels shall be protected from damage and shall be left in a
position until the SO instructs their removal.
If in the opinion of the SO the stone work in the sample panel does not
comply with the specified requirements for the masonry, the proposed
changes to materials and methods of construction shall be submitted to the
SO; further sample panels shall be constructed until the sample panel
complies with the specified requirements.

Types of walling 10.09

Types of rubble and ashlar walling should be in strict accordance with the
Manufacturers instructions and standards, unless otherwise approved or
instructed by the SO.

Preparation of
10.10
stone for rubble
stone walling

Prepare stones to the following sizes, unless otherwise specified in the

Drawings:
(a)

Random rubble - Stones shall be irregularly shaped roughly cut 75 mm

to 300 mm high, and 75 mm (minimum) deep and 75 mm to 600 mm
long on bed. The length or depth on bed of each stone shall be greater
than the height.

(b)

Squared uncoursed rubble - Trim stones roughly square 75 mm to 300

mm high, varying in 75 mm stages. Each stone shall be 100 mm to
150 mm deep and 100 mm to 600 mm long on bed. Length or depth on
bed of each stone shall be greater than the height.

(c)

Squared coursed rubble - Trim stones roughly square as (b), but to suit
courses of regular height varying from 150 mm to 250 mm.

Laying and
jointing

10.11

Rubble shall be laid dry on a full even bed of cement mortar. All joints shall
be filled and shall be between 5 mm and 15 mm wide.

Random rubble

10.12

Rubble of random shapes and sizes in random rubble walling shall be bonded
together over each face of the wall. Rubble shall be selected and rough
dressed to keep joint widths to a minimum. At least one bonding rubble of
minimum size 450 mm x 150 mm (minimum) shall be provided and carried
through the full thickness of the wall per square meter (see Diagram A). No
more than 3 nos. rubble shall be adjacent to a vertical joint.

Squared
uncoursed
rubble

10.13

Roughly squared rubble of random sizes in square rubble walling shall be

bonded together with continuous straight horizontal joints. The numbers of
vertical joints shall be kept to a minimum (see Diagram B).
Beds and joints to be rough punched so as to produce a joint not less than
10mm and greater than 20 mm in thickness.

Squared rubble
brought up to
courses

10.14

Roughly squared rubble in square coursed walling shall be laid as stated in

Clause 10.12 but brought up to courses at centers not exceeding 750 mm to
line up with quoin and jamb stones (see Diagram C).

Squared
coursed rubble

10.15

Roughly squared rubble of random size in squared rubble walling shall be

bonded together in regular courses with continuous straight horizontal joints
(see Diagram D).

10-2

Section 10 Masonry

Squared rubble
walling
exceeding 300
mm thick

10.16

(a)

(b)

Squared rubble walling exceeding 300 mm thick and faced one side
shall be constructed (see Diagram E) in accordance with the following
requirements:
(i)

Roughly squared rubble at least 300 mm thick shall be

provided with a backing of random rubble.

(ii)

At least 2 bonding rubble per square meter shall be regularly

spaced and carried through the full thickness of the wall or at
least 450 mm into the backing, whichever is less.

Squared rubble walling exceeding 300 mm thick and faced both sides
shall be constructed in accordance with the following requirements:
(i)

Roughly squared rubble at least 150 mm thick shall be

provided with a core of random rubble.

(ii)

Bonding stones shall be provided as stated in Clause 10.16 (a)

but shall be carried through the full thickness of the wall or at
least 450 mm into the core.

Pointing rubble
walling

10.17

Joints in rubble walling shall be raked out to a depth of 15 mm as the works

proceeds. The joints shall be pointed in cement mortar on completion with a
flush, weathered or recessed joint as specified.

Preparation of
stone for ashlar
walling

10.18

The exposed faces and joint faces of each stone for ashlar stone walling shall
be dressed squared and true free from hollows or rough areas. Finish exposed
faces to a finely squared dressed surface. Stones shall be not less than 300 mm
high. Each stone shall be clearly marked to indicate its position in finished
work.

Laying and
jointing ashlar
walling

10.19

Stones in ashlar walling shall be laid on a full, even bed of mortar consisting
of cement and fine crushed stone in proportions 1:3 by volume. All joints
shall be filled and shall be 5 mm wide. Stones shall be laid to bond together
throughout the wall, and to the backing, using projection bonding stones.

Pointing ashlar
walling

10.20

Joints in ashlar walling shall be raked to a depth of 15 mm as the works

proceeds and shall be pointed with a flush joint on completion using bedding
mortar.

Transportation,
storage and
handling

10.21

The transport of stone to the site should be so arranged with the minimized
amount of handling. Precautions should be taken, by careful stacking and by
packing in clean wheat straw or other suitable material, to guard against
accidental damage to the stones. Particular care is needed in the transport of
stone by sea, to ensure that it remains uncontaminated by salts throughout the
journey. Store stone in stacks on battens, and protect from rain.
It should be stored clear of the ground to prevent the leaching of soil salt into
it, or staining from moisture.
Provide adequate lifting plant to unload and handle stones into position.

Protection of
newly erected
stone work

10.22

Newly erected stone works shall be well protected from exposure to

conditions which may adversely affect the masonry.
All stone arrises and projecting members should be protected immediately
after fixing by wooden slats, strips or shields firmly fixed. Stone liable to
stain should be coated over the whole face with a slurry of lime putty, plaster
and stone dust as soon as possible after fixing.
When the scaffold is dropped, at the completion of the work, the coating and
all mortar splashes should be removed; the face should be well scrubbed, and
washed down with clean water.

10-3

Section 10 Masonry

Clean off, rub down and leave stonework perfect immediately before
handover.
Walling built
against
concrete, etc.

10.23

Wall ties in masonry which is to face an existing or newly constructed wall

shall be fixed at a rate of 5 per square meter. Ties shall be fixed 100 mm into
the wall and 75 mm into masonry.
Wall ties shall be fixed between the ends of walls and concrete to brickwork
at centers of at least 450 mm vertically and shall project 250 mm into the
masonry.
Upon the SOs instruction, the performance requirement testing on structural
fixings in concrete and masonry should be to BS 5080 Part 1 and Part 2.

Maintenance
repair and
cleaning

10.24

Two copies of the Methods of Repair and Cleaning Instruction/Guideline

shall be submitted to the SO, within 3 months after completion of the masonry
works, for comment and approval.
Maintenance cleaning of stones shall be done by means of:
(a) Washing;
(b) Abrasive blasting;
(c) Mechanical; or
(d) Chemical.
Limestone should be cleaned by water and occasionally by steam, with or
without mechanical aids.
Before starting any maintenance repair and cleaning works, reference should
be made to BS 8221-2 and BS 8221-1 respectively.

10-4

Section 10 Masonry

10-5

Section 11 Tanking

SECTION 11
TANKING
GENERALLY
Design

11.01

The design of tanking shall comply with BS 8102 - protection of structures

against water from the ground.

Specialist
Contractor

11.02

For sheet membrane tanking, the work shall be executed by the

manufacturers approved specialist contractor.
MATERIALS

Mastic asphalt

11.03

Mastic asphalt for tanking shall comply with type T1097 to BS 6925 (lime
stone aggregate). All mastic asphalt blocks delivered to site must bear
legible markings of:
(a) the name or trade mark of the manufacturer;
(b) the number and date of British Standard; and
(c) the type of number, e.g. T1097 to BS 6925.

Proprietary
flexible sheet
membrane

11.04.01

Proprietary flexible sheet membrane shall be capable of accommodating

unanticipated cracks of up to 0.6 mm wide without losing its waterproofing
properties, and the properties of the membrane in lap shear and lap peel shall
not be less than 110 kN/m2 and 3.3 kN/m respectively at site condition,
unless otherwise approved by the SO. Certificates together with complete
test reports to substantiate that the materials supplied meet the requirements
specified shall be submitted when the material is delivered to Site.

Liquid applied
membrane

11.04.02

Liquid applied, elastomeric waterproofing shall be made of a pitch modified

polyurethane, and shall be submitted for approval by the SO. The membrane
shall be capable of an elongation of not less than 400% to accommodate
cracks up to 2mm without losing its waterproofing properties, and its tensile
strength shall exceed 1.6 N/mm, and the tear resistance and adhesion
strength shall not be less than 12 N/mm and 2.6 N/mm respectively at site
condition, unless otherwise approved by the SO. It shall be applied in strict
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
TESTING

Testing of
mastic asphalt

11.05

Sampling and testing of mastic asphalt for composition and hardness

number shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5284.
Prepare a bulk sample of not less than 6 kg by selecting at random from not
less than 8 blocks, breaking them and taking portions from the inner part of
each block. Deliver samples to the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) for
testing as directed by the SO. If the test results of the samples do not comply
with Tables 11.1 and 11.2, the SO shall reject the whole consignment from
which the unacceptable samples have been selected, in which case the
rejected consignment shall be removed from the Site.

11-1

Section 11 Tanking

TABLE 11.1
Composition by analysis of mastic asphalt: type T1097

% by mass of mastic asphalt

Property
T1097

Grading of mineral aggregate using BS

410:-1,
ISO3310-1
&
BS410-2,
ISO3310-2 test sieves

min.

max.

Retained on 3.35 mm mesh

Passing 3.35 mm mesh, retained on 600

m mesh

17

Passing 600 m mesh, retained on 212 m

mesh

26

Passing 212 m mesh, retained on 75 m

mesh

26

Passing 75 m mesh

38

50

Soluble bitumen

12

15

TABLE 11.2
Hardness number at 25C

Property

T1097

Remelted on site/laboratory

not less than 40

At the time of laying

not less than 40

11-2

Section 11 Tanking

Testing of
membrane

11.06

Sampling and testing of sheet membrane shall be agreed with the SO and the
results shall comply with the properties given in Clause 11.04. If the samples
do not comply with the required properties, the SO may reject the whole
consignment from which the unacceptable samples have been taken, in
which case the rejected consignment shall be removed from the Site.
WORKMANSHIP

Workmanship

11.07

The work shall be carried out in accordance with BS 8102 and BS 8000:Pt.
4. Particular attention is drawn to the following before installation:
(a) The Works shall be supervised by a competent representative from the
Contractor/manufacturer. Inspection shall be carried out and written
approval given by this representative for each and every stage of work,
from the surface preparation to the completion of the protection
coating. Formal approval for each and every stage of work as
mentioned shall be carried out by the SO.
(b) The Works shall only be carried out after the concrete has been
properly cured for at least 7 days.
(c)

Shop drawings shall be produced by the Contractor/manufacturer

showing construction details including those at angles, corners,
construction joints, pipe intrusions, etc. for approval and all Works
shall be carried out as per the approved shop drawings.

Surface
preparation for
sheet
membrane

11.08.01

Surfaces to which tanking is to be applied shall be level and free from

irregularities such as ridges, dips, fins and concrete or mortar droppings. The
horizontal surfaces of the concrete shall be given a wood-floated finish and
be laid flat and true to allow the specified thickness of the sheet membrane to
be applied uniformly. Where vertical concrete is very smooth and in order to
provide a satisfactory key for the sheet membrane, the Contractor shall
remove the surface laitance by wire brushing and apply an approved
proprietary high bond primer. Do not use excessive mould oil in the vertical
form.

Surface
preparation for
liquid
membrane

11.08.02

The concrete blinding layer and basement wall should be properly cured. All
surfaces to be waterproofed should be clean, sound, smooth, dry and free of
cracks, void and roughness, which may interfere the adhesion between the
substrate and the waterproofing membrane. Porous concrete or other
absorbent surfaces should be sealed and all surface defects revealed after the
inspection should be repaired by appropriate method as recommended by the
manufacturer prior to installation of base coat.
All critical right angle bends must have a cant strip or fillet installed prior to
application. At vertical termination, 20 x 20 mm recess groove should be
formed for the waterproofing membrane to be tucked into.

Remelting
mastic asphalt
on Site

11.09

Break the blocks into pieces of suitable size, carefully stack in an approved
cauldron or mechanical mixer and gradually heat to a temperature at no time
exceeding 230C. Whilst heating, agitate the asphalt continuously to prevent
local over-heating. Remove the asphalt from the cauldron or mixer by
means of buckets which have been coated with a fine inert dust or cement.
Do not use ashes or oil for this purpose.
The Contractor shall check with suitable thermometers to ensure that the
asphalt is heated to the correct temperature.
To ensure proper heating and mixing, take samples during the remelting
process for the composition and the hardness number tests.

11-3

Section 11 Tanking

11.10

On horizontal surfaces, mastic asphalt shall be laid in three coats to a total

thickness of 30 mm. On vertical surfaces, mastic asphalt shall be applied in
three coats to a total thickness of not less than 20 mm, taken to a height of at
least 150 mm above ground level. An angle fillet not less than 50 mm wide
shall be applied in two coats at the junction of two planes forming an internal
angle. Joints in successive coats of mastic asphalt shall be staggered at least
150 mm for horizontal work and 75 mm for vertical work. The top of vertical
mastic asphalt shall be tucked into a chase not less than 25 mm x 25 mm
unless the mastic asphalt is being continued horizontally.

Sampling
11.11
during laying of
mastic asphalt

During laying, at least one sample shall be taken from the cauldron or mixer
per day for control test.

Laying of
mastic asphalt

Sample prepared for test shall not be less than 6 kg by taking three
increments, from the discharge of the mixer or from the middle of the
cauldrons when approximately half of the charge remains. In the case of
hand stirred cauldrons the molten material shall be thoroughly stirred
immediately prior to the samples being taken. Thoroughly mix the three
increments together in a clean, wide-mouthed galvanized-iron bucket of
approximate size 250 mm dia. x 150 mm.
Prepare two specimens for hardness number tests from the thoroughly mixed
bulk sample as follows:
(a) Pour the mastic into two hardness moulds to a level slightly higher than
the edge of the moulds;
(b) Tap with a spatula on the edge of the moulds for about 3 minutes so as to
level the mastic and drive out entrapped air from the specimen; and
(c) Level off the surface with the spatula.
The moulds and spatula shall be warmed before use.
Pour bulk sample for testing composition into a wooden mould size 300 mm
x 300 mm x 25 mm deep.
The composition and hardness number of the samples shall comply with
Tables 11.1 and 11.2. If the sample failed to comply, the work on site
represented by the sample may have to be completely removed and redone.
Laying of
proprietary
sheet
membrane

11.12.01

Application of
liquid
membrane

11.12.02

Proprietary flexible sheet membrane shall be primed, laid, lapped and

finished in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Before commencing the Works, the Contractor shall demonstrate on Site
that all adhesive and materials are fully compatible. No work shall be
undertaken when the surface moisture exceeds the permissible, as tested by
the moisture testing equipment on Site. The spreading of adhesive over
large areas resulting in setting before placing of membrane shall be
forbidden. Keep records of the adhesive used and check against the agreed
spreading rate of membrane. Bubbles formed in the membrane shall be
made good in accordance with the manufacturer's technical literature.
Liquid applied waterproofing membrane shall be applied in strict
accordance with the manufacturers instructions. It can be applied by roller,
trowel or airless spray (only in well ventilated areas) in strict accordance
with the manufacturers specification and literature. Allow at least 24 hours
of curing for the first coat before overcoating with the second coat. Allow
another 24 hours minimum for curing before protection.

11-4

Section 11 Tanking

Protection of
proprietary
sheet
membrane

11.13.01

Apply protection within 2 working days on completion of each section of the

Works. For horizontal work, the protection shall be a screed of cement and
sand mortar 50 mm in thickness. For ease of placing, this horizontal
protection coating shall be very workable, slump of less than 100 mm is not
recommended. Temporary protection for the lapping area at the end of a
working day shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendation. For vertical work, it shall be protected against damage by
the erection of a masonry wall or protective boarding.

Protection of
liquid applied
membrane

11.13.02

The membrane must be protected from damage by future operations and

other trades. Approved protection boards as recommended by the
manufacturer shall be installed immediately after the membrane has cured.

11-5

Section 12 Roofing

SECTION 12
ROOFING
COVERINGS AND FLASHING
Lead

12.01

Sheet lead shall be to BS EN 12588, 1.8 mm thick, Colour Code Blue.

Copper

12.02

Sheet copper shall be to BS EN 1172, CW024A.

Aluminium

12.03

Sheet aluminium shall be to BS EN 485-1 + A1, BS EN 515, BS EN 573-3,

AW-1199.
Workmanship

Lead

12.04

Fix sheet lead shall be in accordance with BS 6915

Flashings shall be let into walls a minimum of 25 mm, secured with lead
wedges and pointed in cement mortar. Flashing shall be lapped a minimum
of 100 mm and the lower edge secured with lead tacks at 750 mm centres.

Copper

12.05

Fix sheet copper shall be in accordance with CP 143: Pt. 12:1970.

Aluminium

12.06

Fix sheet aluminium shall be in accordance with CP 143: Pt. 15:1973.

Flashings shall be let into walls a minimum of 25 mm, provided with a turn
back, secured with folded aluminium wedges and pointed in cement mortar.
Flashings shall be lapped and single lock welted and the lower edge folded
under for additional stiffness.
Aluminium in contact with mortar shall be coated with bituminous paint
after bending.

Contact of
dissimilar
metals

12.07

Avoid contact in the completed work between the following metals:(a) Aluminium alloys and copper alloys, nickel, lead or stainless steel.
(b) Iron or steel and copper alloys.
(c) Zinc (including galvanizing) and copper alloys or nickel.
Where unavoidable, coat contact surfaces with bituminous paint, protective
tape or other approved means.
BITUMEN FELT BUILT-UP ROOFING
Materials

Bitumen felt

12.08

Bitumen felt shall be in accordance with BS EN 13707 + A2, and shall be as

follows:Underlayer to consist of one or more layers, as specified, of approved fine
granule surface felt (nominal weight 1.8 or 2.5 kg/m2).
Top layer shall be one of the following:
(a) Approved mineral surfaced felt, (nominal weight 2.8 kg/m2).

12-1

Section 12 Roofing

(b) Approved fine granual surfaced felt (nominal weight 2.5 kg/m2) with
surface dressing.
Rolls shall be delivered to Site bearing the trade mark and certification as to
BS type.
Bitumen primer

12.09

Bitumen primer shall be selected to suit the type of bonding compound.

Bonding
compound

12.10

Bonding compound shall be bitumen based.

Dressing
compound

12.11

Bitumen dressing compound shall be cut-back bitumen to BS EN 12591, BS

EN13924 and BS EN 15322 class 1.

Stone chippings

12.12

Stone chippings shall be light coloured, hard and free from brown or
partially decomposed stone. Chippings shall be graded from 5 mm to 3 mm.

Nails

12.13

Nails for fixing felt to timber decks shall be galvanized steel or non-ferrous
metal with 3 mm diameter shank and 11 mm diameter clout head and 20 mm
long.
Workmanship

Generally

12.14

Lay bitumen felt roofing generally in accordance with BS 8217.

Laps

12.15

Lap felt 75 mm at joints and 100 mm at ends of length. Lay successive layers
to break joint.

Bonding
compound

12.16

Provide thermometers to check the work and do not heat any layers or
o
material to more than 220 C. Lay evenly at a sufficiently high temperature to
o
o
obtain a satisfactory bond (normally 180 to 200 C).
Bonding compound shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. The Contractor shall ensure that workers are protected
against the risk of exposure to substances considered to be hazardous to
health. Toxicological information, exposure control, personal protection
and first aid measures extracted from the manufacturers material safety data
sheets shall be kept in a register on the Site.

Preparation of
base

12.17

Ensure that the base is clean and dry, before starting work.

Setting out

12.18

Rolls of felt shall be laid in the following directions.

(a) On flat roofs, lay the first layer of felt starting at, and parallel to, the
lower edge or eaves. Lay subsequent layers in a similar manner to
ensure that the laps in the built up roofing do not obstruct the flow of
water.
(b) On sloping roofs, lay the felt in the direction of the slope. Lap sheets
with the exposed laps away from the prevailing wind.

Laying

12.19

Lay bitumen felt roofing as follows:

(a) On concrete roofs, brush on a coat of bitumen primer, and allow to dry.
Partially bond the first layer to the base at the perimeter and in spots or strips,
with hot bonding compound at the rate of 0.5 kg/m2. Roll with a 70 kg
(minimum) roller while the bonding compound is still hot. Remove any
surplus compound squeezed out at the edge.

12-2

Section 12 Roofing

Fully bond subsequent layers with a continuous even coating of hot bonding
compound applied to the previous layer at the rate of 1.5 kg/m2. Roll and
remove any surplus compound as specified above.
(b) On timber roofs, nail the first layer at 50 mm centres along the laps, 20
mm from the edges with additional nails in rows at 150 mm centres
staggered at 300 mm centres.
Secure subsequent layers by full bonding as specified in Clause 12.19(a).
Surface dressing 12.20

Dress surface with bitumen compound applied at the rate of 3 kg/m2 dressed
immediately with stone chippings, lightly rolled in at the rate of 15 kg/m2.
Remove any loose chippings.

Skirtings

Provide skirtings as follows:

12.21

(a) To concrete roofs, provide a triangular cementitious internal angle fillet

at bottom 75 mm wide on splay. Carry up underlayers of felt to form
skirting 150 mm (minimum) high above roof level. Cover with an
approved mineral felt flashing with one edge tucked into 25 mm groove
in wall, wedged at 600 mm centres and pointed with mastic and seal to
face of skirting with bonding compound.
(b) To timber roofs, provide a 200 mm timber upstand with angle fillet at
bottom fixed securely to roof deck and carry up roofing felt over it.
Provide a lead apron flashing over. The lead flashing code and weight
shall be confirmed by the SO.
Verges

12.22

At verges, gutters and the like:

(a) Provide and fix a non-ferrous trim fixed with compatible screws or
nails, bonded between layers of built up roofing to form drip or dressed
into gutter.
(b) Form a welted drip.

Outlets

12.23

All roof falls shall be aligned to direct water towards outlets:

(a) Dress all layers into proprietary roof outlets and seal with bonding
compound.
(b) Provide and fix 1.8 mm lead slate size 450 mm x 450 mm perforated for
and with a 150 mm long outlet soldered on to suit the bore of the pipe
and dress between layers of built up roofing.

Pipe through
roof

12.24

Cut and fit roofing around pipes passing through roof, dress flange or collar
between second and third layers, and seal in hot bonding compound, using:
(a) Lead slate size 450 mm x 450 mm perforated for and with 150 mm high
collar soldered on to suit bore of pipe.
(b) Proprietary moulded plastic or rubber collar.
BITUMINOUS EMULSION ROOFING
Materials

Bituminous
emulsion

12.25

Bituminous emulsion for roofing shall be an approved compound. Use in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

12-3

Section 12 Roofing

Glass fibre
membrane

12.26

Glass fibre membrane shall be a woven material with a thread count of 8 x 8

mm per 10 mm square (minimum).
Workmanship

Preparation of
base

12.27

Ensure that the base is clean and dry before starting work. Use a wire brush
to remove rust patches on steel sheet roofing.

Application of
bituminous
emulsion

12.28

Apply bituminous emulsion evenly by brush. Ensure that previous coat is

dry before applying the next coat.

Wash coat

12.29

Wash coat to consist of approved bitumen emulsion and water 1:1 by

volume.

Prime coat

12.30

Priming coat to consist of approved bitumen emulsion and water 5:1 by

volume.

Laying glass
fibre membrane

12.31

Lap glass fibre membrane 75 mm at joints. Press into last coat of emulsion
while still wet.

Concrete flat
roof

12.32

Treat concrete flat roofs as follows:

(a) Apply wash coat and priming coat.
(b) Apply one coat of approved bitumen emulsion at the rate of 0.7 litre/m2.
(c) Apply one layer of glass fibre membrane.
(d) a. Apply three coats of approved bitumen emulsion at the rate of 0.5
litre/m2 per coat.
b. Apply two coats of approved bitumen emulsion at the rate of 0.5
litre/m2 per coat.

Existing felt
roofs

12.33

Treat cracks in existing felt covered roofs as follows:

(a) Cut out cracks exceeding 5 mm wide, where ordered.
(b) Apply wash coat and primer to grooves.
(c) Fill grooves with compound consisting of approved bitumen emulsion
and sand 1:3 by volume.
After making good cracks, treat the entire roof area as follows:
(a) Apply approved cover coating at the rate of 0.2 litre/m2.
(b) Apply two coats of approved bitumen emulsion at the rate of 0.7 litre/m2
per coat.

Waterproofing
joints of steel
sheet roofing

12.34

Treat joints of steel corrugated sheet roofing in a strip 150 mm wide to cover
the joint, as follows:
(a) Point joint with approved bitumen emulsion.
(b) Apply approved cover coating at the rate of 0.14 litre/m2.
(c) Apply approved bitumen emulsion at the rate of 0.7 litre/m2.

12-4

Section 12 Roofing

(d) Apply one layer of glass fibre membrane.

(e) Apply two coats of approved bitumen emulsion at the rate of 0.7 litre/m2
per coat.
Surface finish

12.35

Finish surface with:

(a) A dressing of clean and sharp sand.
(b) Two coats of approved protective coating at the rate of 0.11 litre/m2 per
coat.
(c) Two coats of approved coloured finish at the rate of 0.16 litre/m2 per
coat.
(d) One coat of compound consisting of cement, approved bitumen
emulsion and sand 1:8:32 by volume, trowelled on 3 mm or 5 mm thick,
as specified.
CHINESE TILE ROOFING
Materials

Tiles

12.36

Tiles shall be sound, well-burnt unglazed clay, whole, and free from cracks
and blemishes. Approximate sizes shall be:
Plain tiles 225 mm x 225 mm
Roll tiles 165 mm long, and tapered
Valley tiles 300 mm x 225 mm

Approval of tiles 12.37

A sample of the tiles shall be approved before ordering.

Mortar

12.38

Mortar shall be cement/lime mortar, as Clauses 9.15 to 9.25.

Nails

12.39

Nails shall be aluminium or galvanized steel nails at least 2 mm diameter 30

mm long and with plain heads.

Special tiles

12.40

Roll tiles to be left exposed shall be specially selected and semi-circular in

section. Glazed tiles shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer.
Workmanship

Type of Tiling

12.41

Lay Chinese tiles to roofs as follows:

(a) A single layer of plain tiles to the gauge specified with roll tiles to 120
mm gauge.
(b) A double layer, each layer as (a) above.

Gauge

12.42

Lay plain tiles to a gauge exceeding 75 mm and not exceeding 115 mm.

Bedding

12.43

Bed corners of tiles in mortar dabs. Lay roll tiles to lap 50 mm, bed both
edges in mortar, and cover with similar mortar 15 mm (minimum) thick,
trowelled smooth.
On wood battened roofs, drive nails into battens and leave projecting 15 mm
as key for mortar dabs and neatly point underside if exposed.

Verges

12.44

Finish with a mortar fillet, trowelled smooth.

12-5

Section 12 Roofing

Ridges and hips

12.45

Form ridge or hips with rows of inverted tiles, with rows of roll tiles over.

Valleys

12.46

Lay valley tiles up the valley to the gauge specified. Cut roof tiles to rake and
finish both sides with mortar, trowelled smooth.

Eaves

12.47

Single layer tiling - finish eaves with double course of tiles where specified.
Double layer tiling - finish eaves with roll tiles or tile slips placed centrally
between rolls to form weep hole, and fill edge with mortar, trowelled
smooth.

Abutments, etc.

12.48

Cut and fit tiling at abutments and around pipes, etc., and finish with a
mortar fillet, trowelled smooth.

Special tiles

12.49

Roll tiles to be left exposed shall be bedded and pointed in cement mortar.
Glazed tiles shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
MASTIC ASPHALT ROOFING
Generally

Restriction

12.50

Mastic asphalt roofing shall not be used for new works.

Mastic asphalt
roofing

12.51

All asphalt roofing for repair works to existing asphalt roofs shall be laid and
executed complete by an approved contractor for asphalt roofing or tanking.
Material

Mastic asphalt

12.52

Mastic asphalt shall be as follows:

(a) Mastic asphalt (limestone aggregate) to BS 6925, type R988
manufactured with asphaltic cement specified under Table 1 column B
(100% Bitumen).
(b) Mastic asphalt (limestone aggregate) to BS 6925, type R988
manufactured with asphaltic cement specified under Table 1 column
T25 75% Bitumen and 25% Lake Asphalt.

Testing

12.53

Sampling and testing shall be carried out in accordance with BS 5284.

Deliver samples to the Public Works Laboratories (PWL) as directed by the
SO. Results shall be in accordance with BS 6925.

Isolating
membrane

12.54

Black sheathing felt shall be to BS EN13707 + A2.

Dressing
compound

12.55

Bitumen dressing compound shall be cut back bitumen to BS EN12591, BS

EN13924 & BS EN 15322 Class 1.

Sand finishing

12.56

Sand finishing shall be fine, clean and the particles of which must pass a 600
m mesh BS sieve and be retained on a 300 m mesh BS sieve.

Chipping finish

12.57

Granite chippings shall be best quality grey granite free from brown and
partially decomposed stone graded to pass a 5.00 mm mesh BS sieve and be
retained on a 2.36 mm mesh BS sieve.

Reflective paint

12.58

Reflective paint shall be an approved bituminous based aluminium paint or

an approved paint compatible with bituminous surfaces.

12-6

Section 12 Roofing

Reinforcement

12.59

Reinforcement shall be bitumen coated "plain expanded" metal lathing to BS

EN 13658-1 & -2.
Workmanship

Code of practice

12.60

Lay mastic asphalt roofing in accordance with BS 8217.

Heating

12.61

Break the blocks into pieces of suitable size, carefully stack in an approved
cauldron or mixer and gradually heat to a temperature at no time exceeding
230C. Whilst heating agitate the asphalt continuously to prevent local
over-heating. Remove the asphalt from the cauldron or mixer by means of
buckets which have been coated with a fine inert dust or cement. Do not use
ashes or oil for this purpose.
The Contractor shall provide suitable thermometers to ensure that the asphalt
is heated to correct temperature.
Cauldrons shall be sited so as to cause minimum inconvenience and
nuisance to occupied premises considered to be air sensitive receivers as
determined under EPDs guidelines for air quality assessment.

Isolating
membrane

12.62

Lay black sheathing felt lapped 75 mm at joints, laid dry and not sealed to
the structure on all surfaces not exceeding 30 from the horizontal.

Reinforcement

12.63

Skirtings, covering to curbs and the like on concrete exceeding 300 mm high
sloping surface sand all finishes on timber shall be reinforced with metal
lathing securely plugged and stapled.

Laying

12.64

Lay asphalt with coats breaking joint at least 150 mm, on a perfectly clean
and dry base. Lay horizontal asphalt to wood or metal gauges to ensure the
correct thickness of each coat. Thickness shall be as follows:
(a) Horizontal roof surfaces and on slopes not exceeding 30 - two coats of
equal thickness to a total thickness of not less than 20 mm.
(b) Skirtings, upstands and drips and on slopes exceeding 30 - two coats of
equal thickness to a total thickness of not less than 13 mm.
(c) Skirting, upstands and drips higher than 300 mm, three coats of equal
thickness to a total thickness to a total thickness of not less than 20 mm.
Should "blows" be formed whilst laying, due to the entrapment of moisture
or air, pierce the affected part and make good whilst the surrounding asphalt
is warm.

Angles

12.65

Form internal angles between horizontal and vertical surfaces with stout
asphalt fillets, in two coat work, not less than 50 mm on face and continuous
with those surfaces.
Maintain the full thickness of asphalt specified at external angles between
horizontal and vertical surfaces or between sloping surfaces.

Skirting

12.66

Unless otherwise required, form skirtings not less than 150 mm high above
roof finish with top edge splayed and tucked into a groove not less than 25
mm deep.

Rainwater
outlets

12.67

Neatly dress asphalt roofing into rainwater outlets including sealing as

necessary. Prior to applying asphalt prime flanges of roof outlets with
bitumen solution.

12-7

Section 12 Roofing

Flashings to rainwater outlets shall be carefully embedded in the first coat of

the asphalt and the second coat dressed over it.
Pipes through
roofs

12.68

Expansion joints 12.69

Neatly dress asphalt reinforced as Clause 12.63 150 mm (minimum) high

around sleeves to pipes passing through roofs with a stout asphalt angle fillet
at bottom. Prior to apply asphalt thoroughly clean metal surfaces and prime
with bitumen solution.
Expansion joints shall be constructed strictly as indicated on the drawings.
Pointing shall be in accordance with the specification for "Movement Joints"
in Clauses 6.61 and 6.62.
Flashings and coverings shall be in accordance with the specification for
leadwork in Clauses 12.01 and 12.04.

Finishings

12.70

Immediately after the completion of laying, rub roof surfaces well with a
clean wood float using fine clean sand.

Solar protection

12.71

Solar protection shall be provided as indicated.

(a) Dress surface with bitumen compound applied at the rate of 3 kg/m2
dressed immediately with stone chippings lightly rolled in at the rate of
15 kg/m2, remove any loose chippings.
(b) Apply two coats of reflective paint at rates recommended by the
manufacturer.
(c) Lay precast concrete or insulating tiles in accordance with the
specification for Rigid Tile or Slab Finishes in Clauses 18.87 to 18.112.
STEEL SHEET ROOFING AND CLADDING
Materials

Corrugated
sheets

12.72

Steel corrugated sheets shall be hot-dipped galvanized corrugated sheets to

BS 3083 and to be at least 0.6 mm thick, with corrugations 76 mm wide and
19 mm deep.

Profiled sheets

12.73

Profiled steel sheets to BS 5427-1 shall be obtained from approved

manufacturer of profile, thickness, finish and colour as specified.

Accessories

12.74

Accessories for steel sheets shall be made from 0.6 mm (minimum) thick
galvanized steel sheet or to be approved proprietary fittings. Accessories for
colour coated sheets shall be obtained from the approved manufacturer of
the sheets.

Fixings

12.75

Hook bolts and nuts, drive screws, washers, self-tapping screws, roofing
bolts, nuts and clips, roofing screws and sheeting clips shall be galvanized
steel to BS 1494: Pt. 1 or electro-plated to BS 7371-3 and of the sizes and
finishes specified.
Alternatively, recommended specialist
manufacturer of the roofing sheets.

fixings

from

an

approved

Bolts and screws shall be fitted with large washers compatible with sheets
and shall be capable of withstanding up-lift under typhoon conditions.
Where coloured roofing sheets are used, fixing heads shall be covered with
plastic caps to match the colour of the sheets.

12-8

Section 12 Roofing

Rivet fixings may only be used with the permission of the SO, and then only
for vertical flashings.
Workmanship
Generally

12.76

Preparing sheets 12.77

Fix steel sheeting generally in accordance with CP 143: Pt. 12:1970.

Drill fixing holes in the crown of corrugations for roofing, and in the trough
of corrugations for cladding. Drill holes 2 mm larger than bolts or screw,
and not less than 40 mm from edges of sheets.
Remove all drilled cast material from around holes, leaving holes flat and
smooth prior to any bolt or other fixing.
Make good damage to zinc coatings and galvanizing, treat cut ends of
galvanized sections with two coats of metallic zinc-rich priming paint as
Clause 21.03.

Laps

12.78

Lay sloping sheets with minimum end laps of 150 mm. Vertical sheets shall
be fixed with minimum laps of 75 mm. All laps shall be located over a
supporting member.
Lay sheets with side laps of one and a half corrugations.
Where specified, seal laps with approved lap sealant.

Fixing sheeting

12.79

Fix to steelworks with stainless steel self tapping screws designed for fixing
to steel. Fix to timber with self tapping screws designed for fixing to timber.
Fixings for two rows around the perimeter of the roof, to any projecting
areas, verges or open areas and at all end laps shall be at 300 mm (maximum)
centres.

12.80

Cut, fit and dress steel sheet accessories to fit corrugations or profiles and fix
with approved fixings in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.

Movement joints 12.81

Provide movement joints in all lengths of roofing or cladding over 45 m,

with one joint for lengths up to 75 m and one for every additional 30 m.
Cover with a movement joint cover fixed to sheets at one side only.

Colour coated
steel sheets

12.82

Fix sheets in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Sheets

shall be sheared and not cut with circular saws or abrasive wheels. Make
good damages as Clause 12.22.

Sheets to curved
roofs

12.83

Sheets required to be bent to a radius for use on curved roofs shall be bent by
means of a proper profiling or crimping machine.

Waterproof
joints of steel
sheet roofing

12.83.1

Treat joints of steel corrugated sheet roof according to Clause 12.34.

Fixing
accessories

ALUMINIUM SHEET ROOFING AND CLADDING

Materials
Profiled
aluminium
sheets

12.84

Aluminium corrugated and profiled sheets shall be to BS 4868. Corrugated

sheets shall be at least 0.6 mm thick with corrugations 76 mm wide and 19
mm deep. Profile sheets shall be of the profile, thickness, finish and colour
as specified.

12-9

Section 12 Roofing

Accessories for
profiled
aluminium
sheets

12.85

Accessories for profiled aluminium sheets shall be made from aluminium

flat sheet at least 0.6 mm thick and of similar finish and colour to the profiled
sheets or to approved proprietary fittings. Accessories for colour coated
sheets shall be obtained from the approved manufacturer of the sheets.

Fixings

12.86

Fixings for aluminium profiled sheets as Clause 12.75.

Workmanship

Generally

12.87

Fixing of aluminium sheet shall be similar to that for steel sheeting. See
Clauses 12.76 to 12.83.

Compatibility

12.88

To prevent electro-chemical corrosion, direct contact with other metals

(particularly copper) shall be avoided. Fixings must be of, or compatible
with, aluminium. Where unavoidable, coat contact surfaces with bituminous
paint, protective tape or other approved means.
PROFILED GLASS-FIBRE REINFORCED PLASTIC (GRP) SHEETS
Materials

Profiled
glass-fibre
reinforced
plastic sheets

12.89

Profiled glass-fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) sheets shall be to BS 4154-1 &

-2. The resin system, as regards physical properties, shall be to BS 3532.
The profile, thickness, translucency and colour shall be as specified.
Where fire protection requirements apply, the GRP sheets shall be tested in
accordance with BS 476:Pt. 3 and Pt. 7: and the fire performances achieved
by the samples shall be stated.
The sheets shall be marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer,
the BS number 4154 and the designation of the test samples of the
translucent sheet in accordance with BS 476:Pt. 3, where so claimed by the
manufacturer.

Fixings

12.90

Fixings for glass-fibre reinforced plastic sheets as Clause 12.75.

Workmanship

Generally

12.91

Fixing of glass-fibre reinforced plastic sheets shall be similar to that for steel
sheeting. See Clauses 12.76 to 12.83.
PROFILED UNREINFORCED RIGID PVC SHEETS
Materials

Profiled
12.92
unreinforced
rigid PVC sheets

Profiled unreinforced rigid PVC sheets shall be BS 4203-1 &-2. The profile,
thickness, colour and transparency shall be as specified. The sheets shall be
marked with the name or trademark of the manufacturer, the date of
manufacture and the number of the BS and the type.

Fixings

Fixings for PVC sheets as Clause 12.75.

12.93

Workmanship
Generally

12.94

Fixing of PVC sheets shall be similar to that for steel sheeting. See Clauses
12.76 to 12.83

Laps

12.95

Lay sloping sheets with minimum end laps of 225 mm. Vertical sheets shall
be fixed with minimum laps of 75 mm. All laps shall be located over a
supporting member.

12-10

Section 12 Roofing

Lay sheets with side laps of one and a half corrugations.

Where specified, seal laps with approved lap sealant.
PROFILED COMPRESSED PARTICLE SHEETS
Materials
Profiled
compressed
particle sheets
and accessories

12.96

Profiled compressed particle sheets and accessories shall be as specified and

not to contain asbestos materials of any kind.

Fixings

12.97

Fixings for compressed particle sheets as Clause 12.75.

Workmanship

Generally

12.98

Fixing of compressed particle sheets shall be similar to that for steel

sheeting. See Clauses 12.76 to 12.83.
PROPRIETARY ROOFING SYSTEMS

Generally

12.99

Proprietary roofing systems shall be laid by specialist contractors.

Materials

Roofing system

12.100

All waterproof Roofing Covering Materials shall be materials of the

proprietary roofing system and which are subdivided into four groups as
follows:
(a) Type 'AI' Roofing Sheet Materials requiring Protection.
(b) Type 'AII' Roofing Sheet Materials with self finishes not requiring any
protection finishing on top.
(c) Type 'BI' Liquid Applied Roofing Materials requiring Protection.
(d) Type 'BII' Liquid Applied Roofing Materials with self finishes not
requiring any protection finishing on top.

Samples

12.101

Submit samples of the roofing materials which shall be installed and copies
of the manufacturer's technical data and instructions to the SO for approval.

Compatibility

12.102

Before commencing work, the contractor shall demonstrate on Site that all
adhesives and materials are fully compatible and shall be certified by the
suppliers/manufacturers in writing.
Workmanship

Generally

12.103

Lay the roofing system comprising the approved roofing material, insulation
and roof finishes onto the roof, including priming, sealing, crack filling and
other preparation where necessary all in accordance with the manufacturer's
specification and recommendations, and in accordance with the details and
sequence as approved by the SO.
Particular care shall be taken to ensure that all junctions, joints around pipes,
rainwater outlets and the like are properly executed.
Take necessary measures when carrying out the works so that disturbances,
including noise and vibration, to the occupants and users of the premises are
kept to the minimum. Noisy works which, in the opinion of the SO, will

12-11

Section 12 Roofing

affect the occupants and users will not be permitted.

Chutes for removal of Construction and Demolition waste shall be erected at
approved locations, designed to withstand high winds, with hopper heads to
ensure that no materials fall outside the chutes, and discharge at low level,
preferably into skips or bunkers, to prevent the spread of debris and to
minimize dust generation. Chutes shall be demolished and removed off the
Site after use and all disturbed areas and surfaces shall be made good to
match existing.
Prevent dust arising from debris generated by removal of existing roofing
systems by approved dust control methods. Debris shall be regularly
removed from the Site.
Surfaces
preparation

12.104

Prior to laying of the roofing system inspect and repair as required to provide
proper surfaces to receive waterproofing.
Remove all contaminants such as grease, oil, etc., from the surfaces. Clean
surfaces to remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris.
High pressure water cleaning of substrates shall not be permitted.

Existing
membrane

12.105

When specified for repair or maintenance work, take up and remove existing
tiles, existing layers of felt or other protective covering, to expose existing
asphalt or roof membrane; lay a cement and sand screed, minimum 25 mm
thick or self-leveling screed as approved by the SO, to produce an even
surface to approved falls to receive the new roofing system. The Contractor
shall take the responsibility for repairing and making good the existing roof
slab.

Free of moisture

12.106

No work shall be carried out when there is surface moisture.

Protection of
existing roof

12.107

The whole roof shall be left watertight when no work is in hand.

Where coverings have been removed and not yet replaced, the Contractor
shall provide covering (ropes and hold-fasts to hold down the coverings) by
means of tarpaulin or other sheeting to cover all areas of roofs. Overlaps
must be sealed with tape and sheets effectively dressed into outlets.
Other methods of protection may be employed as approved by the SO.
During working hours, all roofing outlets shall be protected to prevent debris
falling into rainwater pipes. The outlets shall be opened and cleared at the
end of the working day and the roof swept clean to ensure effective drainage.
Protect all pipework, ducting and other services running on top of the
existing roof, including provision of new pipe supports as necessary.
Any accidental damage to water supply pipes shall be reported to the SO
immediately.

Adhesive

12.108

Adhesive, if required, shall be applied strictly in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. All manufacturer's data about the
shelf-life of adhesives shall be noted, and no attempt shall be made to use
materials which are no longer fit for use. The spreading of adhesive over
large areas and subsequent setting before placing of sheets shall be
prohibited.
Ensure that workers are protected against the risk of exposure to substances
considered to be hazardous to health. Toxicological information, exposure

12-12

Section 12 Roofing

control, personal protection and first aid measures extracted from the
manufacturers material safety data sheets shall be kept in a register on the
Site.
Bubbles

12.109

If bubbles form in the membrane, the affected area shall be cut open and
made good as far as the manufacturer's technical literature specifically
allows. Otherwise, the whole area shall be stripped, cleared and the surface
shall be prepared again and the work shall be re-executed.

Finishes to nonaccessible roofs

(maintenance
traffic)

12.110

When specified, apply a light-reflective paint or similar finish applicable to

the particular roofing system.

Finishes to
accessible roofs
(frequent foot
traffic)

12.111

When specified, the roofing system shall be designed to allow for increased
wear due to frequent foot traffic or shall be protected by precast concrete
tiles, (laid on cement and sand mortar) or other materials approved by the
SO.
Do not allow traffic on roof until 4 days after completion of tiling and
subsequently permit only light traffic for a further 10 days.

Roof vent

12.112

When specified, position and fix approved proprietary roof vents in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and ensure that the
roofing contractor or specialist makes good the roof covering up to and
around them.

Insulation

12.113

Insulation shall either have integrally bonded hard surfaces on both sides or
be protected by inert hard sheeting or reinforced screed.

Moisture test

12.114

Moisture testing equipment shall be available on Site to monitor the

moisture content of the roof structure and the various elements of the roof
system; all necessary precaution shall be taken to ensure the full integrity of
the roofing system.

Records

12.115

Records of tins of adhesive, liquid membrane or amount of sheeted

membrane material shall be kept upon their arrival on site. The number
consumed per day and the number cleared away shall be evaluated to check
the actual spreading rate of the proprietary material against the
manufacturer's technical data. Tins and packages may be marked on arrival
and again when consumed.
Keep a register of all dangerous substances including those hazardous to
health, which are delivered to and stored for use on the Works. The register
shall include information on physical and chemical properties, hazards, safe
handling and storage, precautionary measures to be taken, first aid measures,
disposal of containers and surplus or waste materials, and measures to be
taken in case of accidents.

Inspection

12.116

Inform the SO upon the completion of each layer of the roofing system for
an inspection before the execution of next layer.
NON-DESTRUCTIVE TEST

Flooding test

12.117

The test shall include sealing all outlets and if necessary constructing dams
to compartmentalize large roofs. Flood the roof for 24 hours. After flooding,
all outlet blockages and dams shall be removed to drain the roof. Do not
permit any debris to enter into the drainage pipework. At a period between
24 and 48 hours from release of the water, an infra-red scan shall be carried
out by an independent specialist contractor to establish if there has been

12-13

Section 12 Roofing

penetration through the membrane. The report shall be sent directly by the
infra-red scanning contractor to the SO.
WARRANTY
Maintenance
manual

12.118

Upon completion of the work, submit one maintenance manual, identified

with project name, location and date; type of coating system applied and
surface to which system was applied, and sketches where necessary.
Recommendations for periodic inspections, care and maintenance shall also
be included. Identify common cause of damage with instructions for
temporary patching until permanent repair can be made.

Warranty

12.119

Duly executed warranty shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance

with the Contract. The completed installation shall be guaranteed against
defects of materials and workmanship by the Contractor for a period of 10
years from the date of completion stated in the certificate of completion with
respect to the Works for use as an exposed roof membrane in Hong Kong.
The system shall be designed to withstand the conditions of the Hong Kong
climate, which includes typhoons, monsoons and rainstorms. The warranty
shall cover the roofing system in its entirety. The warranties shall be
extended to cover all aspects of the roofing project executed by the
Contractor including adhesion and structural integrity of materials used.

12-14

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

SECTION 13
CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
GENERALLY
Generally

13.01

Timber generally shall be to BS EN 942 and to be of mature growth,

properly seasoned and sawn square. Timber shall be free from wood wasp
holes, large loose or dead knots, splits or other defects that will reduce its
strength. Pin holes and worm holes may be permitted to a slight extent in a
small number of pieces, subject to the acceptance of the SO, provided that
there is no active infestation of the materials, that the strength of the member
is not impaired and that they do not appear on the finished faces of joinery
work.

Timber for
external use

13.01.1

(i)

Species

: Timber shall be either hardwood or softwood

suitable for external use.
Approved softwood may be Radiata Pine, and
Red or White Pine or those cited in Table NA.1
of BS EN 942.
Approved temperate
hardwoods may be Beech or Oak or those cited
in Table NA.2 of BS EN 942. Submit the
species to be used to the SO for approval.

(ii)

Source of Supply

: Obtain timber either softwood or hardwood

from a responsibly managed forest or
plantation that is preferably Forest Stewardship
Council (FSC) certified; where this is not
available, ensure that the timber is at a
minimum from a Known Licensed Source.
Submit FSC certificates and invoice copies that
clearly show the FSC chain of custody number
against the purchase product. Where FSC is not
available, submit certificates, invoice copies
and other paperwork from other systems that
shows the product is either Known Licensed
Source or Source in Progress to Creditable
Certification.

(iii) Seasoning

: Moisture content to be in accordance with

Clause 13.03.
Maintain the specified moisture content of the
timber until preservative treatment described
below is applied.

(iv) Preservative

13-1

: Preservatives shall be environmentally friendly,

healthy and safe, acceptable preservatives
include Alkaline copper quaternery (ACQ)
preservatives to American Wood Protection
Association (AWPA) Standards or other
suitably approved preservatives. Chromate
copper arsenic (CCA) is not allowed to be used
subject to approval by the SO.

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

(v)

Source in
Progress to
Creditable
Certification

Tropical hardwoods : Tropical hardwoods, which include species

such as Meranti, Iroko, Sapele, Angre,
Mahogony, Teak and Ramin, should not be
used unless they originate preferably from a
forest that is Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
certified or where this is not available, from a
forest participating in a system designed to
progress that forest towards FSC certification
or equivalent authorized certification.

13.01.2

Source in Progress to Creditable Certification are forest certification systems

that assist managers to achieve FSC certification. Systems including WWF
Global Forest and Trade Network (GFTN) Producer Groups, the Tropical
Forest Trust, Smart Step, and SGS Malaysia (Certification Support
Programme) are considered as sources in progress to creditable certification.

Known Licensed 13.01.3

Source

The minimum acceptable status of a timber source is Known Licensed

Source. It refers to forest certification systems (except FSC) that include a
chain of custody system covering the timber being purchased (be aware that
not all forest systems have this element). A list of acceptable forest
certification system with a chain of custody system include the followings:
(a)

Programme for the Endorsement of Forest Certification Schemes

(PEFC) General

(b)

PEFC United Kingdom

(c)

PEFC Germany

(d)

PEFC Sweden

(e)

Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

(f)

Cerflor (Brazil)

(g)

Malaysian Timber Certification Council (MTCC)

Storage

13.02

Store timber in a dry, well ventilated place, and protect from the weather.
Stack timber in such a manner as to prevent distortion.

Moisture
content

13.03

Calculate moisture content at the time of fabrication by the following

formula:
Wet (or supplied) Mass Dry Mass
Dry Mass

x 100 = Moisture Content

(percentage)

The dry mass shall be determined by drying in an oven at a temperature of

103C 2C until the weight is constant.
The maximum permissible moisture content in timber to be incorporated
into the work shall be as follows:
(a)

Internal timber for use in Air Conditioned space 12%

(b)

Internal timber generally 16%

(c)

Timber with one face to the exterior of the building and one face to
the interior (e.g. window frames) 18%

(d)

External timber (e.g. fencing etc.) 20%

13-2

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

If these percentages cannot be attained due to local circumstances of supply

and availability, the SO's attention must be drawn to the fact.
MATERIALS
Samples

13.04

Submit samples of timber for joinery for approval where the grain shall be
left exposed or where the surfaces shall be varnished or similarly treated.

Softwood

13.05

Softwood for carpentry to be Pine, Cedar, Spruce or China fir or other

species approved by the SO. All timber shall be appropriately stamped or
marked to identify origin and grade. All timber shall be kiln dried and
treated according to Clause 13.01.1 (iv), or as directed otherwise by the SO.
All softwood and softwood products shall be from a verifiable sustainable
forest and shall be accredited with a certificate from the Forest Stewardship
Council (FSC) or other Approved Authority. While a certificate from FSC is
preferable, certificates, invoice copies and other paperwork from other
systems that shows the product is either Known Licensed Source or Source
in Progress to Creditable Certification are considered as acceptable
certificates from Approved Authority.

Hardwood

13.06

Hardwood and hardwood products shall only be used in special

circumstances under the direction of the SO, and shall be certified as
originating from a sustained resource or managed plantation as certified by
the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) or other Approved Authority.
While a certificate from FSC is preferable, certificates, invoice copies and
other paperwork from other systems that shows the product is either Known
Licensed Source or Source in Progress to Creditable Certification are
considered as acceptable certificates from Approved Authority.
Density of hardwood shall be 720 kg/m3 (minimum) at 15% moisture
content.
Submit to the SO the following information:
(i)

The species and country of origin.

(ii)

The name of the concessions or plantations from which these timbers

originate.

(iii) Copies of the forestry policies implemented by these concessions or

plantations which confirm that the management of the timber resource
is sustainable.
(iv) Shipping documents which confirm that the supplier in Hong Kong
has obtained the timber from the stated concessions or plantations.
(v)

Certificate from the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) or other

Approved Authority

Hardwoods of unknown species or from unidentified sources are expressly

prohibited.
Teak

13.07

Teak, which is only permitted to be specified in special circumstances, shall

have a density of 650 kg/m3 (minimum) at 15% moisture content. They shall
be accredited with a certificate from the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
or other Approved Authority.

Flooring

13.08

Softwood or hardwood species used for timber flooring shall be obtained

from a sustainable source as previously specified.
Boarded or strip flooring shall be selected and approved hardwood, as

13-3

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

specified, or as submitted to the SO for selection. Finished thickness shall be

20 mm (minimum).
Wood block
flooring

13.09

Wood block flooring shall be approved high density resin bonded fibreboard
flooring or other approved hardwood as specified. Resin shall conform to
Class E1 under BS EN 13986. Finished thickness shall be 20 mm
(minimum). Blocks shall be 300 mm x 50 mm in size and colour matched.

Parquet flooring 13.10

Wood parquet flooring shall be obtained from a sustainable source as

previously specified. Each block shall be 120 mm x 25mm in size and 8 mm
thick, and shall be tongued & grooved.

Weather
boarding

Hardwood weather boarding shall be 150 mm wide and tapering from 25

mm to 10mm thick and shall be:

Plywood

13.11

13.12

(a)

Sawn boarding or boarding wrot on one face and two edges with
horizontal joints lapped 30 mm.

(b)

Boarding as (a) but with wider edge rebated with joints lapped 20
mm.

Plywood shall be of the following grades, as specified:

(i)

"Grade 1 veneer" - hardwood faced, as specified, for natural finish.

(ii)

"Grade 2 veneer" - lauan faced for painting.

Generally the bonding adhesive between veneers shall be resin adhesive

classified as moisture and weather resistant (M.R.) in BS 1203. Adhesive
shall conform to the requirement in Clause 13.29.
Nominal standard thicknesses of plywood shall be 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 12, 15, 18 and
25 mm.
Plywood containing hardwoods of unknown species or from unidentified
sources are expressly prohibited from use. Use only plywood and plywood
products made from softwoods or temperate hardwoods that originate from
the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) certified forests or other Approved
Authority.
While a certificate from FSC is preferable, certificates, invoice copies and
other paperwork from other systems that shows the product is either Known
Licensed Source or Source in Progress to Creditable Certification are
considered as acceptable certificates from Approved Authority.
Marine plywood

13.13

Marine plywood shall be to BS1088-1 and BS 1008-2 bonded with TypeI

adhesive between plys as in clause 13.29.

Blockboard

13.14

Blockboard shall be Grade 2 veneer for painting, and bonded with Type
M.R. adhesive as in Clause 13.29.

Hardboard

13.15

Hardboard shall be to BS EN 316, BS EN 622-1 and BS EN 622-2.

Insulating board 13.16

Insulating board (Softboard) shall be to BS EN 316, BS EN 622-1 and BS

EN 622-4.

Wood chipboard 13.17

Wood chipboard shall be unsanded or sanded board to BS EN 309 and BS

EN 312. Veneered chipboard shall be an approved proprietary brand to BS
EN 309 and BS EN 312. All wood chipboards shall be low formaldehyde
emission chipboard (Class E1) unless permitted otherwise by the SO, or
polyurethane - based chipboard with zero formaldehyde emission. Any
boarding shall be used in wet areas such as kitchens or bathrooms shall be
High Moisture Resistant board to BS EN 316 and BS EN 321.

13-4

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

Medium Density 13.17.1

Fibreboard
(MDF)

Board type shall be moisture resistant grade (MDFMR) with density in

excess of 600 kg/m3 to BS EN 316 and BS EN 622-5.

Glass fibre

13.18

Glass fibre insulating quilt shall be light-weight bonded mat weighing 12

kg/m3 uncompressed.

Semi-rigid resin
bonded glass
fibre slab

13.19

Glass fibre insulating board shall be semi-rigid resin-bonded glass fibre

weighing 45-48 kg/m3.

P.V.C. or acrylic 13.20

sheet

PVC or acrylic sheet shall be clear, translucent or coloured, as specified, and

to be approved by the SO.

Laminated
plastic sheet

13.21

Laminated plastic sheet shall be to BS EN 438. Class HG

(Horizontal-General Purpose) or VG (Vertical-General Purpose) as
specified.

Acoustic tiles

13.22

Acoustic tiles shall be of an approved proprietary brand meeting the

requirements of BS EN 13964 manufactured from the following materials:
(i)
Wood or other organic fibre insulating board to BS EN 622, 12 mm
(Minimum) thick for 300 mm x 300 mm tiles and 15 mm (minimum)
thick for 400 mm x 400 mm tiles.
(ii)

Mineral fibre or wool insulating board 12 mm (minimum) thick for

300 mm x 300 mm tiles and 15 mm (minimum) thick for 400 mm x
400 mm tiles.

(iii)

Approved multi-purpose, dimensionally stable building board 6 mm

(minimum) thick.

Tiles shall have a plain, perforated or fissured surface with a factory applied
decorative finish. The edges shall be square, bevelled, or bevelled and
grooved to suit the suspension system.
Provide a certificate from the manufacturer confirming that the tiles are
asbestos free.
Tiles shall be manufactured with low emission materials conforming to
European E1 emission standard.
Proprietary
suspended
ceiling systems

13.23

Class

The suspended ceiling system shall be an approved proprietary system

meeting the requirements of BS EN 13964 and of one of the classes of
exposure to be determined by conditions set out in Table 13.1.
TABLE 13.1
Classes of exposure
Conditions

Building components generally exposed to varying relative humidity up to

70 % and varying temperature up to 25 C but without corrosive pollutants.

Building components frequently exposed to varying relative humidity up to

90 % and varying temperature up to 30 C but without corrosive pollutants.

Building components exposed to an atmosphere with a level of humidity

higher than 90 % and accompanied by a risk of condensation.

More severe than the above.

The suspension system shall be manufactured from one of the following
materials:

13-5

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

(i)

Galvanized mild steel.

(ii)

Aluminium.

(iii)

A combination of galvanized mild steel and aluminium.

Metal framing components, suspensions and connecting elements shall be

protected against corrosion according to Table 13.2.
TABLE 13.2
Classes of corrosion protection of metal substructure components
and membrane components
Class
Profiles, suspensionsa, connecting elementsa and membranes
according to
Components made of steel
Components made from aluminium
Table 13.1
A
Products with a continuously hot-dip metal coating Z100, ZA095
No additional corrosion protection
or AZ100 according to prEN 10327b c.
required
Products with electroplated zinc coating flat ZE25/25 according to
BS EN 10152c.
Continuously organic coated (coil-coated) products of corrosion
protection (interior) category CPI2 for the exposed side according to
BS EN 10169-3f (e.g. coating system ZE15/15-HDP25-2T-CPI2).
B

Products with a continuously hot-dip metal coating Z100, ZA095

or AZ100 according to prEN 10327b c.

No additional corrosion protection

required

Products with electroplated zinc coating flat according to BS EN

10152 with or without an additional organic coatingd as followsc:
ZE25/25 + 40 m per facee, ZE50/50 + 20 m per facee or
ZE100/100 without OC.

or
coil coating according to BS EN 1396:
corrosion index 2a

Continuously organic coated (coil-coated) products of corrosion

protection (interior) category CPI2 for the exposed side according to
BS EN 10169-3f (e.g. coating system ZE15/15-HDP25-2T-CPI2).
C

Products with a continuously hot-dip metal coating Z100, ZA095

or AZ100 according to prEN 10327b c with an additional organic
coatingd of 20 m per face.
Products with electroplated zinc coating flat according to BS EN
10152 with an additional organic coatingd as followsc: ZE25/25 +
60 m per faceE , ZE100/100 + 40 m per face.

Special measures depending on use and corrosion action.

Minimum corrosion protection according to Class C. Additional
measures as required.

Anodisingc
(15 m < s < 25 m)
or
coil coating according to BS EN 1396:
corrosion index 2a
Anodisingc
(s > 25 m)
or

a
b
c
d
e
f

coil coating according to BS EN

1396:corrosion index 2b
Round steel wires used as suspensions or part of a suspension shall meet the requirements of BS EN 10244-2 (Zinc or Zinc
alloy coating on steel wire).
prEN 10327 replaces BS EN 10142 (Zinc), BS EN 10214 (Zinc Aluminium) and BS EN 10215 (Aluminium Zinc).
Any equivalent corrosion protection leading to a similar level of protection is permitted.
Coating of exposed parts with zinc compatible organic coating according to BS EN ISO 12944-3 applied by a post-painting
process or equivalent coil coating according to BS EN 10169-3.
Applies only to membrane components.
Applies only to capping material for substructure components.

13-6

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

The substructure (suspension system) shall be classified in accordance with

its deflection limits as given in Table 13.3. See para. 4.32 of BS EN 13964
for testing criteria and methodology.
TABLE 13.3
Class of deflection
Class

Maximum deflection in mmA

LB / 500 and not greater than 4.0

LB / 300

No limit

A The maximum deflection is the accumulative value of the deflection of the substructure component and the
deflection of the membrane component
B L is the span in mm between the suspension components or the suspension points
Aluminium sections shall be anodised where exposed. The panel grid shall
be constructed of exposed tee or concealed 'T', 'Z' or other approved
sections. Hangers shall be steel wires not less than 2 mm diameter, or straps,
rods or combination of sections designed to facilitate the adjustment of grid
levels, support the weight of the ceiling and all fittings and attachments.
Fixing to soffits shall be by means of approved sockets, anchors or other
fixing devices cast into the slab or approved proprietary plugs or
drill-anchors.
The system shall be so designed to facilitate the removal of at least 10% of
the tiles without disturbing the remainder.
Provide matching edge trim to the perimeter of suspended ceilings.
Submit samples of the panel grid complete with acoustic ceiling tiles for
approval.
Nails

13.24

Nails shall be steel nails to BS 1202:Pt. 1, with "bright" finish, unless

otherwise specified. The nail and its coating shall not contain Arsenic,
Cadmium, Copper, Lead or Mercury.
Nail lengths shall be not more than the total thickness of sections to be joined
less 5 mm, or not less than twice the thickness of section through which nails
are driven.
Where the thickness of the outer section through which nails are being
driven is less than half that of the section to which nailing is being done, the
depth of penetration of the nails into the latter shall be not less than 10
diameters of the nails being used.

Screws

13.25

Wood screws shall be brass, stainless steel, alloy or other non-corroding

metal to BS 1476 with countersunk heads, unless otherwise specified. Steel
screws shall only be used for temporary work. The proper dedicated screws
shall be used for all Particle-board fixing.
Screw lengths shall be not more than the total thickness of sections to be
joined, less 5 mm, or not less than one and a half times the thickness of
section through which screws are driven.
Where the thickness of the outer section being screwed is less than half that
of the section to which screwing is being done, the depth of penetration of
the screwing into the latter shall be not less than the thickness of the outer
section.

13-7

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

Screw cups shall be brass cups or stainless steel and to BS 1494.

Masonry nails

13.26

Do not use masonry nails or drive pins without approval.

Explosive
cartridge fixings

13.27

Obtain approval before using explosive cartridge operated fixings. All

fixings shall be in accordance with the Factories and Industrial Undertakings
(Cartridge-Operated fixing tools) Regulations. Use tools, normally of the
indirect acting type, plus pins and cartridges which correspond with the
manufacturer's specifications for that tool. A tool shall only be used by a
person holding a certificate of competency specifying the maker and model
of the tool on which he has been successfully trained.

Plugs

13.28

Plugs for fixing to hard materials shall be proprietary plugs of plastic, soft
metal, fibre or similar.
Fixing to friable materials, plasterboard and the like shall be proprietary
fixings specially designed for that situation.
The use of wood plugs shall not be permitted.

Adhesive

13.29

Adhesive for wood shall be as follows:

(a)

For internal use; synthetic resin adhesive classified as moisture

resistant and moderately weather-resistant (M.R.) in BS EN 204 and
BS EN 301.

(b)

For external use or internal use under very damp conditions:synthetic

resin adhesive classified as Type I in BS EN 301 and tested
according to BS EN 302.

(c)

Formaldehyde Emission shall be of Class E1 under BS EN13986.

Adhesive for fixing laminated plastic sheet shall be synthetic resin adhesive
classified as type I in BS EN 301.
Where the temperature exceeds 25 degree C, a "warm-setting" grade of
adhesive shall be used.
The use of animal glues shall not be permitted.
Resin for MDF
panels

13.29.1

All urea formaldehyde bonded MDF panels and MUF mouldings shall be
manufactured with low emission resins conforming to European E1 of BS
EN 13986 emission standard.

Wood
preservative

13.30

Wood preservative shall be an approved proprietary brand exterior grade

where completely concealed, or not decorated and colourless, coloured or
suitable for overpainting where likely to be exposed or in contact with a
painted finish.

Wood
preservative to
external timber

13.30.1

Wood preservative to external timber shall be applied as follow:

(i)

Preparation

: Timber shall be free from dirt and

surface moisture.

(ii)

Application of Preservative : Apply by pressure impregnation in

accordance with BS 8417.
Apply preservative in a manner that is
not hazardous to health. Adhere strictly
to the manufacturers instructions.

13-8

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

(iii) Cutting and Machining

: Whenever possible, all cutting,

planning, boring, drilling, notching or
any other machining or manual
operation shall be completed prior to
preservative treatment.

(iv) Incising

: For certain timbers such as Douglas Fir

which are difficult to impregnate, make
20 mm deep incisions coverage of 650
per m2 in the direction of the grain all in
accordance with BS 144. This method
shall only be used on timber sections
exceeding 80 mm thickness.

(v)

: For timber where impregnation is not

suitable and a paint finish is not
required, when approved apply 2 coats
of creosote in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions.

Creosote Application

(vi) Guarantee

: Obtain a guarantee of 30 years for

timber components against rot, insect
attack and fungal decay.

(vii) The product shall not contain any heavy metals or their compounds as
listed below:
Arsenic
Cadmium
Copper
Lead
Mercury
Mosquito gauze

13.31

Mosquito gauze shall be one of the following:

(i)

Plastic covered glass fibre 7 x 7 mesh per 10 mm square.

(ii)

Copper wire 11 x 11 mesh per 10 mm square.

WORKMANSHIP
Generally

13.32

Workmanship generally shall be to BS 1186:Pt. 2.

Timber

13.33

Cut timber to required sizes and lengths as soon as practicable after the
Works are begun, and store dry under cover so that the air can circulate
freely around it.
Stack cut timber off a leveled, well-drained and maintained hard-standing
ground and in such a manner as to prevent distortion.

Dimensions

13.34

Dimensions of sections shown on the drawings are finished sizes. Allow for
planing and sanding faces to finished sizes.
Check site dimensions before prefabricating joinery fittings.

Framed joinery 13.35

generally

Plane timber for joinery on all faces. Finish exposed faces to a fine
glasspapered surfaces and round arrises to 1 mm radius.

Framed joints

Faces of framed joints shall be square and shall be driven together to give a
close, accurate fit.

13.36

Prepare and frame up joinery work with dry joints and store until required
for fixing. Before fixing open up all joints, put together with approved glue
and wedge up. Replace any sections that have warped or developed shakes

13-9

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

or other defects.
Running bonded 13.37
joints

Running bonded joints shall be cross-tongued, using approved tongues. For

work over 40 mm thick, use double tongues.

Joinery with
clear finish

13.38

Protect from damage or discolouration joinery shall be left with clear finish.
Submit proposals for protection for approval.

Prototypes

13.39

Prepare prototypes and obtain approval for repetitive fittings before starting
fabrication.

Fixing

13.40

Plug and screw or secure timber sections to the backing by approved means.
Check location of buried services before fixing to walls and other surfaces.

Nailing

13.41

Nail timber sections securely to the backing and ensure that the nails do not
split the timber. Split timbers shall be removed and replaced.
Punch nail heads below timber surfaces visible in completed work.
Nail weather boarding to wood framing with not less than two corrosion
proofed nails in the width of each board at each framing member.

Screwing

13.42

When specified, screw timber sections to the backing including drilling pilot
holes and countersinking heads flush with timber surfaces.
Screws shall be inserted full depth with a screwdriver and not hammered.
Countersink screw heads 5 mm (minimum) below timber surfaces shall be
left with natural finish. Glue in colour and grain matched pellets cut from
matching timber. Finish off flush with face.

Wood
preservative

13.43

Apply wood preservative to all unexposed surfaces of timber including

framing fillets etc. and backs of frames, skirtings etc.

Fixing plastic
sheet

13.44

Do not fix laminated plastic sheet to timber with moisture content of more
than 16%.

Acoustic tiles

13.45

Fix acoustic tiles and the like to timber battens or direct to sub-base by
means of an approved adhesive used in accordance with the requirements of
Clause 13.29 and manufacturer's recommendations.

Suspended
ceilings

13.46

Construct suspended ceilings in accordance with BS EN 13964. Fix

proprietary systems in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Ensure that ceiling tiles and grids are properly set out and
that all cutting is done at the perimeter unless required to be otherwise in
Particular Specification. Fix all cover strips, edge trims and the like.

Boarded or strip 13.47

flooring

Heading joints shall be cross-tongued, and staggered not less than two board
widths apart.
Cramp flooring, to ensure a tight and accurate fit along the whole length of
the joint.
Fix flooring with galvanized, sheradised or cadmium-plated wire nails.
Face nail square edged flooring not more than 100 mm wide, use two nails.
Stop nail heads and finish flush.
Secret-nail tongued and grooved flooring at each support with one nail
placed just above the tongue and driven on skew. Punch nail heads flush.

13-10

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

Fixing battens

13.48

On concrete, cast in or lay at 350 mm centres 50 mm x 40 mm twice splayed

fixing battens pre-treated with wood preservative. Where laid on concrete
bed, level in cement mortar (1:3), continuous support being provided for all
batten lengths.

Infilling between 13.49

Fill space between battens with lightweight concrete. Allow to dry out
thoroughly.
Apply one coat of approved bitumen/rubber latex emulsion at the rate of 1
litre/m2. Check and refix battens after drying-out as may be required.

Wood block
flooring

13.50

Ensure that the base is clean and dry. Fix blocks to screed with an approved
cold bitumen/rubber emulsion adhesive as in Clause 13.29. Lay to
herringbone or basket pattern, as specified, with straight border two blocks
(minimum) wide.
Provide 5 mm expansion gap at perimeter of areas of wood block flooring,
and fill with one of the following:
(a)

Cork strip

(b)

Foam rubber strip

Sand surface of wood block flooring with an electric surfacing machine

using sequentially graded abrasive paper to obtain a smooth surface ready to
receive sealer or polish.
Machine shall be fitted with dust bag to control the release of dust.
Parquet flooring 13.51

Ensure the base is clean and dry. Lay blocks on one coat of an approved cold
bitumen rubber emulsion adhesive applied to the screed with a serrated
trowel. Leave flooring ready to receive sealer or polish. Sand surface of
parquet flooring as Clause 13.49.

Door & frames

general

13.52

Door frames shall not be used as formers for door opening construction
unless with the permission of the SO, and never when proprietary door sets
are required in the Contract. In all such circumstances, templates or formers
must be used. The adoption of timber doorsets may be accepted subject to
the approval of SO.

Door with board 13.53

finish

Construct hardwood ledged doors with 20 mm (minimum) vertical tongued

and grooved boarding in about 150 mm widths. V-jointed on face side with
ledges 5 mm thicker than boarding thickness and 100 mm wide for top ledge
and 175 mm wide for middle and bottom ledges. Nail boarding to ledges and
screw ends of ledges to boarding.

Ledged and
braced

13.54

Construct hardwood ledged and braced doors as Clause 13.52 but with 100
mm wide diagonal braces of similar thickness to ledges. House braces to
ledges and screw ends to boarding.

Framed, ledged
and braced
doors

13.55

Construct framed, ledged and braced doors of 45 mm (minimum) thickness

with 115 mm wide stile and top rail, 225 mm wide middle and bottom rail,
and 100 mm wide braces. Fill in with vertical boarding as Clause 13.52.

Panelled doors

13.56

Construct hardwood panelled doors 40 mm (minimum) thick, with 100 mm

wide stiles, top rail and muntins and 200 mm wide middle and bottom rails.
Flat panels shall be 20 mm thick. Groove rebate or leave open framing, as
specified, for panels or glass.

Flush doors

13.57

Stiles and rails generally shall be 75 mm wide. For doors exceeding 900 mm
side or 2000 mm high stiles to be 100 mm wide.
Infill for hollow core doors shall be 20 mm horizontal battens at 150 mm

13-11

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

centres. Block out for lock fixing, door closers, or other ironmongery as
specified, or composition board core approved by the SO.
Infill for solid core doors shall be 25 mm vertical battens tightly cramped
together with the covering fully bonded both sides.
Cover both sides of the door with the following as specified:
(i)

3.2 mm standard hardboard

(ii)

5 mm Plywood for painting

(iii)

5 mm selected Hardwood faced plywood for clear finish

(iv)

Class HG laminated plastic bonded to 5 mm plywood

(v)

Other board finish accepted by the SO.

Provide 12 mm selected hardwood lipping pinned and glued to all edges.

Lipping to meeting edges of folding doors and meeting edges and heels of
swinging doors shall be 25 mm thick, rebated or rounded.
When specified, fit the bottom edge of doors with a 12 mm selected
hardwood removable carpet strip screwed to the lipping.
Cupboard doors

13.58

Construct cupboard doors as follows, as specified:

(i)

Plywood or blockboard lipped on all edges with selected hardwood

faced with laminated plastic sheet or prepared for painting, or

(ii)

Hollow core doors as Clause 13.56.

(iii)

Melamine Faced and lipped chipboard as Clause 13.17.

Openings in
flush doors

13.59

Frame openings with 12 mm (minimum) selected hardwood lipping. Rebate

lipping for glazing, if required.

Glazing beads

13.60

Provide glazing beads to match surrounding timber. Mitre at angles. Fix

with screws and cups, where specified. Glazing beads shall not be less than
12 mm thick.

Fire resisting
timber door

13.61

Fire resisting timber doors should be flush door as described above,

including frames, hinges door closers and any other hardware and shall
comply with BS 476: Part 20-23.
Proprietary fire doors should be tested in accordance with BS 476 and to the
approval of the SO. Test report shall be provided to indicate that the
material, product or construction is capable of resisting the action of fire for
the specified period. The test shall be carried out and the test report shall be
prepared by an Accredited Laboratory.

Smoke and
intumescent
seals

13.62

Folding or swing fire doors shall incorporate proprietary smoke seals and
intumescent strips where necessary to attain the requirements of BS 476:Pt.
20-23.

Acoustic doors

13.63

Acoustic doors shall be either solid core doors or composite core doors with
air-tight seals to all junctions with frames and recessed threshold. Seal types
shall be submitted to the SO for approval unless specified in the Contract.
Airborne sound insulation shall be tested to BS EN ISO 10140-1/2 & 5 or
ASTM-E413-10 and ASTM E90-09. Field ratings shall be tested to ASTM
E336-10 and ASTM E413-10. The Contractor shall guarantee both
laboratory and field performance.

13-12

Section 13 Carpentry and Joinery

Doors and
window frames

13.64

Construct doors and window frames with properly framed joints and fix
using cramps or bolts as Clauses 14.108, 14.109, 14.116 and 14.117 and
secure the bottom of door frames with dowels as Clauses 14.107 and 14.115.
Lippings, particularly lippings at the closing & meeting stiles shall be
profiled to ensure correct operation gaps to the satisfaction of BS 4787
Pt.1.

Bedding and
pointing

13.65

Bed frames in cement mortar, leaving no gaps. For external doors, rake out
external face 10 mm deep, and point with an approved sealant.

Architraves

13.66

Architraves shall be one length between angles. Mitre architraves at angle

joints.

Drawers

13.67

Construct drawers with 20 mm thick front, as specified, 15 mm thick back

and sides, as specified, dovetailed and framed together and 5 mm thick
bottom housed on three sides. Set drawers to slide on proprietary runners.
Submit ironmongery for approval.

13-13

Section 14 Ironmongery

SECTION 14
IRONMONGERY
ARCHITECTURAL IRONMONGERY
Source

14.01

Standard items of ironmongery may be supplied by the Employer except

when it is specified that ironmongery shall be supplied by the Contractor.

Contractor's
supply

14.02

Supply ironmongery in accordance with the Contract documents. All

ironmongery shall be approved before orders are placed and shall be
obtained from an approved manufacturer for that item and for the use
intended.

Specification by
name

14.03

Contractors attention is drawn to Clause 1.09.

Standard

14.04

Unless more stringent standards are specified, all architectural ironmongery

shall
comply
with
the
current
editions
of
following
British/European/International Standards:
Standard
BS EN 179*
BS EN
485-1+A1
BS EN 485-2
BS EN 485-3
BS EN 485-4
BS EN 515
BS EN 573-1
BS EN 573-2
BS EN 573-3
BS EN 912
BS EN 1125*
BS EN 1154*
BS EN 1155*
BS EN 1158*
BS EN 1172
BS EN 1303
BS EN 1403
BS EN 1461

Title
Emergency exit devices
Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Sheet, strip and
plate - Part 1: Technical conditions for inspection
and delivery
Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Sheet, strip and
plate - Part 2: Mechanical properties
Aluminium and Aluminium alloys - Sheet, strip and
plate - Part 3: Tolerances on dimensions and form for
hot rolled products.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Sheet, strip and
plate -Part 4: Tolerances on shape and dimensions
for cold-rolled products.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Wrought
products - Temper designations.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical
composition and form of wrought products. Part 1:
Numerical designation system.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical
composition and form of wrought products. Part 2:
Chemical symbol based designation system.
Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Chemical
composition and form of wrought products. Part 3:
Chemical composition and form of products.
Timber fasteners. Specifications for connectors for
timbers.
Panic exit devices.
Door closing devices.
Electrically powered door holders.
Door co-ordinators.
Copper and copper alloys. Sheet and strip for
building purposes.
Cylinders for locks.
Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited
coatings. Method of specifying general
requirements.
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles, specifications and test methods.

14-1

Section 14 Ironmongery

BS EN 1527
BS EN 1634-1
to 3
BS EN 1652
BS EN 1654
BS EN 1670
BS EN 1906
BS EN 1935*
BS EN 2284
BS EN 10029
BS EN 10048
BS EN 10051
BS EN 10095
BS EN 12051
BS EN 12163
BS EN 12164
BS EN 12166
BS EN 12167
BS EN 12168
BS EN 12209
BS EN 12320
BS EN 12365
BS EN 12476
BS EN 13724
BS EN 15338 +
AI
BS EN 15570
BS EN 15706
BS EN 15828
BS EN 16014
BS EN
61558-1+A1
BS EN ISO
1456
BS EN ISO
1461
BS EN ISO
2081

Sliding door gear.

Fire resistance and smoke control tests for door and
shutter assemblies, openable windows and elements
of building hardware.
Copper and copper alloys. Plate, sheet, strip and
circles for general purposes.
Copper and copper alloys. Strip for springs and
connectors.
Corrosion resistance.
Building hardware. Lever handles and knob
furniture. Requirements and test methods.
Single axis hinges.
Specification for sulfuric acid anodizing of
aluminium and wrought aluminium alloy.
Hot-rolled narrow steel strip. Tolerances on
dimensions and shape.
Hot rolled narrow steel strip. Tolerances on
dimensions and shape.
Continuously hot-rolled strip and plate/sheet cut
from wide strip of non-alloy and alloy steels.
Tolerances on dimensions and shape.
Heat resisting steels and nickel alloys.
Door and window bolts.
Copper and copper alloys - Rod for general
purposes.
Copper and copper alloys - Rod for free machining
purposes.
Copper and copper alloys - Wire for general
purposes.
Copper & copper alloys - Profile and bars for general
use.
Copper and copper alloys - Hollow rod for free
machining purposes.
Building hardware. Locks and latches. Mechanically
operated locks, latches and locking plates.
Requirements and test methods.
Padlocks and padlock fittings.
Gaskets and weather stripping.
Phosphate conversion coatings of metals. Method of
specifying requirements.
Letter plates.
Hardware for furniture strength and durability of
extension elements and their components.
Hardware for furniture strength and durability of
hinges and their components.
Hardware for furniture strength and durability of
slide fittings for sliding doors and roll fronts.
Hardware for furniture: strength and durability of
hinges prorating on a horizontal axis.
Hardware for furniture: strength and durability of
locking mechanism.
Safety of power transformers, power supplies,
reactors and similar products. Part 1 - General
requirements and tests.
Metallic and other inorganic coatings Electrodeposited coatings of nickel, nickel plus
chromium, copper plus nickel and of copper plus
nickel plus chromium.
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles. Specifications and test methods.
Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and
steel articles specifications and test methods.

14-2

Section 14 Ironmongery

BS EN ISO
2082
BS EN ISO
2931
BS EN ISO
3864-1 & 4
BS EN ISO
7010
BS EN ISO
9445-1

Metallic coatings. Electroplated coatings of

cadmium with supplementary treatments on iron or
steel.
Anodizing of aluminium and its alloys. Assessment
of quality of sealed anodic oxidation coatings by
measurement of admittance.
Graphical symbols. Safety colours and safety signs.

Graphical symbols. Safety colours and safety signs.

Registered safety signs.
Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel - Tolerances
on dimensions and form - Part 1: Narrow strip and
cut lengths.
BS EN ISO
Continuously cold-rolled stainless steel - Tolerances
9445-2
on dimensions and form - Part 2: Wide strip and
plate/sheet.
PD/CEN/TR
Hardware for furniture strength and durability of
15349:2006
hinges and their components. Terms for extension
elements and their components.
PD/CEN/TR
Hardware for furniture strength and durability of
15588:2007
hinges and their components. Terms for hinges and
their components.
PD/CEN/TR
Hardware for furniture strength and durability of
15709:2008
hinges and their components. Terms for slide
fittings for sliding doors and roll fronts.
PD CEN/TR
Hardware for furniture: Terms for locking
16015:2010
mechanism.
*Products manufactured to these standards should meet the requirements
of CE marking and carry the mark where they are intended for use on
fire/smoke and locked doors on escape routes.
BS 476
Fire tests on building materials and structure.
BS 1449-1.1/1.8/ Steel plate, sheet and strip.
1.14
BS 3621
Thief resistant locks.
BS 5499 -2,4,6
Safety signs, including fire safety signs.
& 10
BS 5839 Pt. 3
Fire detectors and automatic release mechanisms.
BS 6100-1
Building and civil engineering - Vocabulary - Part 1:
General terms.
BS 6100-6
Building and civil engineering - Vocabulary - Part 6:
Construction parts.
BS 6496
Powder organic coatings for application and stoving
to aluminium alloy.
BS 8220
Guide for security of buildings against crime.
Other National Standards:
AAMA 611-98: American Architectural Manufacturer Association
Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum
ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006 American National Standard for Materials
and Finishes
AS 1476-1974 Australian Standard Specification for metric wood screws
Certification

14.05

Fully detailed catalogues, certificates of compliance or other documentary

evidence from recognised testing laboratories accredited by UKAS or
HKAS under the HOKLAS, or equivalent accreditation schemes, of the
specified proprietary products shall be supplied to the satisfaction of the SO
that the ironmongery complies with the GS.

Certification for
fire door

14.06

Individual independent fire test/assessment certificates to BS EN 1634

specific to each fire rated door assembly proposed for the Works, shall be
submitted to confirm compliance with required fire resistance ratings.

14-3

Section 14 Ironmongery

Fire and smoke

control
assemblies

14.07

Ironmongery to fire rated and/or smoke control assemblies must satisfy the
requirements of relevant statutory and regulatory bodies and the relevant
sections hereof.

Samples

14.08

Samples of all items of ironmongery shall be submitted for approval before

placing order.

Ironmongery
schedule

14.09

A door-by-door ironmongery schedule, including all other separate

ironmongery items shall be supplied when samples have been approved. All
components shall be identified by manufacturers' name and reference
number and country of origin and cover the requirements of smoke stop and
fire-rated doors, detail door thicknesses, handing, suiting and master keying.
Upon approval, this schedule shall form the basis for confirming the
requirements for ironmongery. No alteration to this schedule shall be
permitted without prior approval.

Compatibility

14.10

Ironmongery shall be properly matched, fully coordinated suite, of

consistent design and finish, and obtained from one source.

Manufacturer's
instructions

14.11

One complete set of manufacturer's fixing and maintenance instructions

shall be provided prior to delivery.

Packing

14.12

Ironmongery, complete with fixings and fixing instructions shall be

supplied, suitably boxed and delivered in sets where appropriate and marked
in a manner to suit site installation requirements. When ironmongery is
delivered in sets, each set shall be bagged and labelled with the door number
to which it shall be fixed. All items with appropriate fixing screws of a
length and pattern shall be supplied to suit the construction to which the
items shall be fixed.

Keys

14.13

A minimum of two keys for each lock shall be provided, each fitted with a
stainless steel split ring and a 25 mm diameter x 1.5 mm thick plastic disc
engraved with the number of the lock or room number in figures a minimum
of 5 mm high.
Arrange with the SO for the safe storage and handling of keys and ensure
their receipt by the SO on completion of the Contract. When master keying is
specified the master keys shall be forwarded direct to the SO.

Materials

14.14

Materials as specified shall comply with the following standards:

Aluminium: Refer to in Clause 17.07.
Stainless Steel: Grade 316 (18/10/3 molybdenum bearing grade) referred to
in Clause 17.09. Lower grades will not be accepted for accessories such as
lock strike plates, rebate components, etc.
Brass: Plate, sheets, strips and circles: BS EN 1652 No. CW 612N R420 or
H120.
Profile, rod, hollow rod, wire and bars: BS EN 12163, BS EN 12164, BS EN
12166, BS EN 12167 and BS EN 12168 No. CW 614N R430 or H110.
Real Bronze: Solid cast bronze of suitable copper-tin alloy according to BS
EN 1412, BS EN 12163 BS EN 12164, BS EN 12166, BS EN 12167 and BS
EN 12168, or ANSI/BHMA A156.18-2006.

Finishes

14.15

Finishes as specified shall comply with the following standards:

Stainless Steel shall be to BS EN 10095.
Electroplated coatings of nickel and chromium shall be to BS EN ISO 1456.

14-4

Section 14 Ironmongery

Anodic oxidation coating on aluminium shall be to AAMA 611-98.

Electroplated coatings of cadmium and zinc on iron or steel shall be to BS EN
ISO 2081 and BS EN ISO 2082.
Phosphate treatment of iron and steel shall be to BS EN 12476.
14.16

Finished surfaces of one material whether extruded, rolled, cast or stamped,

shall match exactly in colour and texture and all finishes visible on a door
face shall be visually identical, unless otherwise specified.

14.17

All concealed components including lock bodies shall be protected by the

manufacturer's standard finish which shall, where applicable, comply with
the above standards.

14.18

Iron or steel surfaces shall be protected by galvanizing to BS EN ISO 1461,

zinc or cadmium plating to BS EN ISO 2081 or BS EN ISO 2082 or other
approved methods, to BS EN 1670 Class 3 corrosion resistance.

Fixings

14.19

Suitable, matching, metric, positive drive fixings (e.g. Allen key, 'Supadriv'
or 'Pozidriv') of correct types and lengths shall be provided for background
constructions, with visible finishes to match the item fixed.

Hinges and
pivots

14.20

Hinges and pivots shall be to BS EN 1935 of the appropriate class for the
door size, weight and duty, with heavy-duty, maintenance free, concealed
bearings.

14.21

Where door closers incorporating hold-open devices or a backcheck facility,

hinges with a minimum Grade 12, 13 or 14 to BS EN 1935 shall be used.

14.22

Hinges shall be stainless steel, all finished to match other hardware on the
door face, including plating to match brass, bronze or other finishes, where
required.

14.23

Hinges with nylon bearings shall not be permitted in fire-resisting door

assemblies.

14.24

Hinges shall be countersunk drilled, fixed with matching screws and of the
following types:
For timber doors and frames:

Jig drilled, with staggered

drilling pattern and 12SG x
32mm wood screws

For pressed steel doors and frames:

ANSI template drilled with

M5 or M6 x 12.5mm machine
threaded screws

For timber doors with steel frames:

Different drilling patterns for

leaf and frame as appropriate
to timber and metal substrate

14.25

Outward opening external and/or security doors shall be provided with hinges
with integral security studs.

14.26

Unless otherwise specified, two hinges shall be provided per leaf up to

1800mm high and one extra hinge for each additional 450mm height (or part
thereof).

14.27

Conductor hinges or concealed fixing, flexible metal cable loops shall be

provided to transfer wiring for electromagnetic fire hold closers, solenoid
locks and the like between frame and door leaf.

14-5

Section 14 Ironmongery

Overhead door
closers

14.28

Door closing devices shall be hydraulic controlled closing types, from

matching suites, with a full range of optional functions, including adjustable
power, adjustable backcheck, mechanical and electromagnetic stand open
and delayed closing. Uncontrolled devices (e.g. spring hinges) are
unacceptable, due to noise of operation and potential for damage to doors,
frames, ironmongery, etc.

14.29

All door closing devices used on metal fire rated doors shall incorporate fire
retardant fluid.

14.30

Overhead door closers shall be capable of being fitted on either hand of the
door and shall close the door positively. Regulation of the closing and
latching speed shall be undertaken by independent control valves.

14.31

Closers for fire rated doors shall be tested to and comply with BS EN 1154
Category of Use 4, to close a door from up to 180 degrees. In accordance
with the ABHM Code of Practice Hardware for Timber Fire and Escape
Doors (Clause 3.3.1), Certified, Approved and CE Marked. No closer for
use on a fire rated door shall be less than power Size 3.

14.32

All products to have been incorporated in successful fire tests and assessed
to BS 476-22 (30, 60 and 120 minutes) and BS EN 1634 (30, 60 and 120
minutes).

14.33

In addition to the corrosion test requirements of BS EN 1154, which relate to

performance only, the visual requirements for significant surfaces shall be
identified according to BS EN 1670 Clause 4.7 Grade 3 to BS EN 1154 shall
apply.

14.34

Overhead surface closers shall suit doors of either hand and have 50mm
maximum projection, plain, rectangular, solid bodies of aluminium, brass or
stainless steel construction, with visible surfaces, including arms, finished
identically to other items on the door and with no permanent visible
markings (except as required by relevant standards).

14.35

Overhead surface closers, except to plant rooms and pipe ducts shall be
equivalent to BS EN 1154 Class 4-8-2/4-1-1-3, power adjustable for doors
from 400mm to 1100mm wide and 40kg to 80kg mass, or equivalent grade
to Table 14.1 for doors of greater width/mass. They shall incorporate
adjustable, hydraulic backcheck.

14.36

Overhead surface closers to plant rooms and pipe ducts shall be equivalent to
universal arm (push- or pull-to) type, to BS EN 1154 Class 4-8-2/4-1-1-3,
for doors up to 1100mm wide and 80kg mass or equivalent grades to Table
14.1 for doors of greater width/mass.

14.37

To avoid reductions in efficiency which may result when fixing surface

mounted closers on the pull side of a door, test data for all closers specified
with parallel (pull-to) or universal (push- or pull-to) arms shall be provided
to show that the closer achieves the specified power classification(s) when
mounted on the pull side of the door.

14.38

Where universal (push- or pull-to) arms are specified, the closers shall be
fitted on the least visible face of the door.

14.39

Door mounted overhead concealed closers shall be equivalent to the BS EN

1154 Class 4-8-2/4-1-1-2, adjustable for doors from 500mm to 1100mm
wide and 40kg to 80kg mass, or equivalent grades to Table 14.1 for doors of
greater width/mass. The minimum door thickness shall be 45mm.

14.40

Transom mounted overhead concealed closers shall be to BS EN 1154 Class

4-8-4-1-1-3, for doors from 850mm to 1100mm and 80kg mass, or
equivalent grades to Table 14.1 for doors of greater width/mass.

14-6

Section 14 Ironmongery

Floor springs

14.41

Floor mounted concealed closers shall be heavy duty, adjustable, hydraulic

check types, with thermo-constant stabilising fluid. All floor springs shall be
non-handed (i.e. they are reversible). Single action straps are to be Grade
316 stainless steel, double action straps shall be forged steel, both with full
intumescent protection.

14.42

All floor springs for double swing doors, including plate glass assemblies,
shall have micro-adjustable toe-in and positive centring, to ensure that
leaves can be fully aligned in closed position.

14.43

Single and double action floor springs shall be hydraulic check spring
mechanisms sealed into an oil or hydraulic fluid box complete with a loose
protected steel box for fixing within a concrete floor, a detachable cover
plate with waterproof seal. Adjustment within the box shall provide full
horizontal movement for door alignment, final positioning and height
adjustment. The position of the floor spring within the loose box shall be
adjustable after installation. The non-adjustable bottom strap shall be
designed to suit the type, size and weight of the door but shall not be less
than 160 mm long with holes for four screws. The top centre for double
action floor springs shall be adjustable. If specified, a hydraulic back check
shall be incorporated effective for the opening angle of the floor spring.

14.44

On single action floor springs, the bottom strap and top centre shall be
suitably offset to suit the frame details, projection of pull handles, adjoining
wall layout and other aesthetic aspects.

14.45

Where floor springs are fitted to a fire rated door, the floor springs shall have
been tested in conjunction with an appropriate fire rated door and passed the
integral fire test in accordance with BS 476-22 or BS EN 1634.
In the event that the springs are fitted to metal doors, the specification shall
be the same except that a non-ferrous strap shall be provided to suit the
profile of the bottom rail of the door and the top centre shall suit the top rail
of the door.

14.46

Exposed parts shall be finished to the same standard as the rest of the
ironmongery unless stated otherwise in contract requirements. The top plate
shall be satin finish stainless steel, 18/10/3 quality unless stated otherwise in
contract requirements.

14.47

Floor springs for main circulation routes, auditorium and other heavy use
locations shall be equivalent to BS EN 1154 Class 4-8-2/6-1-1-3, power
adjustable for doors from 300mm to 1400mm wide and 20kg to 120kg mass,
or equivalent grade to Table 14.1 for doors of greater width/mass. They shall
incorporate adjustable, hydraulic or mechanical backcheck, built-in
levelling device and complete with Grade 316 stainless steel covers.

14.48

Floor springs for other locations shall be equivalent to BS EN 1154 Class

4-8-1/4-1-1-3, adjustable power for doors up to 1100mm wide and 100kg
mass, or equivalent grades to Table 14.1 for doors of greater width/mass.
They shall incorporate hydraulic or mechanical backcheck, built-in levelling
device and complete with Grade 316 stainless steel covers.

14-7

Section 14 Ironmongery

TABLE 14.1
BS EN 1154
1

Door Recommended
closer door leaf width
power
size

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Test
door
mass

Closing moment

Opening Door
between 0 between any other moment closer
and 4
88
angle of between efficiency
and 92 opening 0 and between
60 0 and 4

Nm max.

kg

Nm Nm Nm max. Nm min. Nm max. % min.

min. max.

<750
850
950
1100
1250
1400
1600

20
40
60
80
100
120
160

9
13
18
26
37
54
87

<13
<18
<26
<37
<54
<87
<140

3
4
6
9
12
18
29

2
3
4
6
8
11
18

26
36
47
62
83
134
215

50
50
55
60
65
65
65

NOTE 1: The door widths given are for standard installations. In the case of
unusually high or heavy doors, windy or draughty conditions, or special
installations, a larger power size of door closer should be used.
NOTE 2: The test door masses shown are only related to door closer power
sizes for the purpose of the test procedure. These test door masses are not
intended to indicate maximum values for actual use.
Barrier Free
Access

14.49

Door closing devices shall be designed to allow exterior and interior doors to
be opened with forces of not more than 30N and 22N respectively. Closers
for interior doors shall have a closing period of at least 3 seconds measured
from an open position of 70 degrees to a point 75mm from the closed
position measured from the leading edge of the door. Door closing devices
include door closers and floor spring.

Electromagnetic
fire-hold closers

14.50

Electromagnetic fire-hold closers shall be to BS EN 1155 and of the same

design, finish and standards as other closers. Surface type fire-hold closers
and floor-mounted concealed type shall be equivalent to Class 3-5-4-1-1-3.
They shall allow the door to:
(a) Hold open electro-magnetically when set and, on receipt of a signal
from a central fire alarm or other device, automatically release and
properly close.
(b) Close immediately if physically pushed to, if an integral fire officer test
button is pressed, or if power fails.

Automatic door
operators

14.51

Power sources for fire hold closers shall be Class II Safety Isolated
Transformers to BS EN 61558-1+A1. If fire alarm systems do not
incorporate clean contacts, transformers shall incorporate relay control
interfaces.

14.52

Automatic door operators shall be approved, high quality devices to BS

7036, to suit the door construction, configuration, location and frequency of
use and operate at 230/240vAC 50Hz. Finishes shall match other hardware
on the door and units shall be frame mounted wherever possible, on the door

14-8

Section 14 Ironmongery

face least susceptible to weather and/or tampering.

14.53

Operators for fire rated doors shall be of suitable types which will not
compromise the fire resistance rating, linked to fire alarm systems to close
automatically in case of fire.

14.54

Operators shall allow adjustment of opening and closing speed, hold open
time, backcheck and power and allow manual override, in case of power
failure.

Door selectors

14.55

Where one leaf of a pair of self-closing doors must close before the other,
due to rebated styles, latch bolts, suitable matching selectors to BS EN 1158
Class 3-5-*-1-1-3 (where * denotes the appropriate door mass from Table
14.1), of types which do not obstruct ironmongery or affect fire resistance
ratings, shall be supplied. Use sprung-arm, under-frame fixing selectors for
outward opening doors and gravity face fixing types for inward opening
doors.

Locks

14.56

Mortice lock suites shall be to BS EN 12209 with:

(a)

Forends and strike plates and rebate components if for rebated

meeting edges, of materials to match door furniture, with no exposed
sharp edges or corners.

(b) Piercing for bolting through of single sided lever or knob furniture, if
required.
(c)

Facility for full reversal of handing, without opening the case.

(d) If to receive lever handles, special, heavy springing against

progressive lever droop (levers with sprung roses or back plates are
unacceptable due to potential for damage and corrosion).
(e)

If to receive knob handles, soft springing, with two-way action and

100mm minimum backset.

14.57

Cylinders shall be easily removable when the door is open, without

dismantling trim but non-removable when closed.

14.58

Heavy duty, modular, security locks shall be obtained from a single

reputable source with 60mm minimum backset and 72mm centres. Latch
bolts shall be 11mm (minimum) low friction type, and deadbolts shall have
20mm (minimum) throw (except for privacy function lock) with griptight
8mm followers for noise reduction, closing efficiency, security and
improved durability.

14.59

Heavy duty, high security locks and electrical solenoid locks shall have
equivalent of 19mm (minimum) throw stainless steel, three part, low
friction, guided latch bolts with anti-thrust devices and/or 25mm (minimum)
throw deadbolts with hardened steel rollers, as appropriate. They shall be
certified by an approved security body and shall have been tested in
conjunction with an appropriate fire rated door and passed the integral fire
test in accordance with BS 476-22 or BS EN 1634.

14.60

General duty locks shall have equivalent of 11mm (minimum) plated brass
latch bolts and 13mm (minimum) plated brass deadbolts, with hardened
steel rollers. WC cubicle locks shall be mortice type, with inside thumbturn
and coin operated, outside emergency release. Emergency releases shall
incorporate red/white outside indicators.

14-9

Section 14 Ironmongery

Security locks

Mechanical
locking
cylinders and
keying

Door furniture
and plates

14.61

Security locks shall be to BS 3621.

14.62

Security locks shall have minimum of five levers or, if pin or disc,
mechanisms shall have a minimum of six pin or disc tumblers or more than
one row of pins and rollers, such rows shall not be in the same plane.

14.63

Forends shall be of double thickness and each lock shall be capable of being
fitted to fully rebated doors with 12.5mm or 25mm deep rebate by the
addition of a rebating set.

14.64

Keys shall be registered in the name of the Government and duplicates only
obtainable through the manufacturer. Prior to ordering, agree with the SO
the method of ordering, supplying and fixing to ensure the maintenance of
security. Master keying shall not be permitted.

14.65

Exposed parts shall be satin finish stainless steel 18/10/3 quality. Rebating
set shall be nickel plated brass to match.

14.66

Cylinders shall be to BS EN 1303 to match door furniture (including

coloured finishes).

14.67

Standard cylinder lengths shall suit doors up to 55mm thick, when used with
the specified roses or back plates, with other lengths available as required.

14.68

Lock cylinders shall be capable of achieving required master keying

systems, with adequate provision for future expansion, without compromise
to security and without the need to cut keys to depths at which they become
susceptible to breakage.

14.69

General lock cylinders shall be of five-pin, integrated keyway types, with

double paracentric keyways, mushroom drivers, triple grooved, anti-pick
pins, hardened anti-drill pins, off-centre cams and three keys per cylinder as
standard to BS EN 1303 Grade 3.

14.70

High security lock cylinders shall be equivalent of six-pin, double-locking

types, offering practically infinite differs, with double paracentric keyways,
mushroom drivers, triple grooved, anti-pick pins and multiple side pins,
hardened anti-drill pins, off-centre cams and three keys per cylinder as
standard to BS EN 1303 Grade 5.

14.71

Padlocks shall be of appropriate grades to BS EN 12320, and capable of

master and construction keying together with other locks.

14.72

Unless otherwise stated, locks and panic exit devices shall be keyed to a
system of Grand Master, Master and Sub-Master suites without compromise
to security standards and shall be construction keyed, with ten keys provided
for site use. On completion, operation by a master key shall exclude all
construction keys.

14.73

Lever assemblies shall be non-sprung, to BS EN 1906 incorporating four

heavy duty captive, maintenance free, self lubricating and corrosion
resistant bearings. Roses shall be concealed bolt through fixings type.

14.74

Spindles for furniture shall be corrosion proofed, high tensile steel. Standard
spindles shall suit 35-55mm thick doors.

14.75

Where half sets of furniture are to operate locks, special spindles requiring
no piercing of the opposite door face shall be used.

14.76

For pairs of dummy levers or knobs Rigidisers shall be provided. For

single sided dummy levers or knobs Rigidisers and special spindles
requiring no piercing of the opposite door face shall be provided. Face fixed,
fix dead spindles are unacceptable, due to vulnerability to forcible damage.

14-10

Section 14 Ironmongery

Panic exit
devices

Bolts

14.77

Pull handles shall be supplied with bolt through fixings and seating cups,
concealed by push plates on the reverse face, or back-to-back fixings as
appropriate. Face fixed pulls are acceptable only if unavoidable.

14.78

Protection plates shall be minimum 3mm thick if aluminium and 1.6mm

thick if stainless steel or brass, with edges softened and radiused corners, to
prevent injury. Fix plates with suitable countersunk screws located 5mm
from edges, at each corner and equally spaced, at 225mm maximum centres.
Clearance from the edge of the door or door frame shall not be more than
4mm.

14.79

Furniture for privacy locks shall incorporate inside thumbturn and coin
operated, outside emergency release. In public areas, emergency releases
shall incorporate red/white outside indicators.

14.80

Panic exit devices shall be provided en-suite to match the door hardware.

14.81

All panic exit devices shall comply with BS EN 1125 with the activating bar
horizontally across the inside face of the door operating when pushed
anywhere along its effective length in the direction of the exit and/or moved
in a downwards arc. Where panic exit devices have vertical shoots, they
shall have an automatic catch holding the bolts in a withdrawn position when
the doors are opened and automatically releasing the bolts on the closing of
the door.

14.82

Horizontal bar operated panic exit devices to single leaf doors in front of
house and area accessible to the public shall be easily reversible, low
projection, touchbar type to BS EN 1125 Grade 3-7-6-1-1-3-2-2-B, with
secret "hold unlocked facility and photo-luminescent "in bar" signage to BS
5499-2, 4, 6 & 10 and/or BS EN ISO 3864-1 & 4. Standard units shall suit
doors 800-1380mm wide and up to 3000mm high, with options for other
sizes as required.

14.83

Horizontal bar operated panic exit devices to single leaf doors in service
areas accessible only to maintenance staff may be standard projection, push
bar type to BS EN 1125 Grade 3-7-5-1-1-3-2-2-A.

14.84

Panic exit devices to pairs of doors shall not allow escape to be prevented by
padlocking a chain around crossbars or other components.

14.85

In addition to the corrosion test requirements of BS EN 1125, which relate to

performance only, the equivalent visual requirements for significant
surfaces of BS EN 1670, Clause 5.7 Class 3 shall apply.

14.86

Panic exit devices shall accept an outside cylinder and/or lever or knob
handle operators, local alarms, remote monitoring and/or motor operation as
required.

14.87

Bolts shall be to BS EN 12051 and of the following minimum

classifications:
(a) Flush bolts: Class 3-4-0-1-1-3-3, comprising keep and easy clean floor
socket in wet areas or dust-excluding floor socket in other areas. Bolts
shall have a 9.5mm (minimum) diameter and shall be suitable to secure
the inactive leaf of locking pair of doors.
(b) Barrel, tower and mortice bolts: Class 3-4-0-1-1-3-3.
(c) Foot drop, square spring of garage door bolts and padlock bolts: Class
3-4-0-1-1-4-4.

14-11

Section 14 Ironmongery

14.88

Unless otherwise stated:

(a) Bottom bolts shall be 150mm minimum long.
(b) Top bolts to doors up to 2000mm high shall be 150mm long. For taller
doors, increase bolt length by 150mm for each 150mm of additional
height, or part thereof. For very tall doors, automatic flush bolts may be
substituted.

14.89

Bolts shall be of a high quality, lever action, flush type, with dovetail returns
to resist forcing and/or frame damage. Mount lever action flush bolts to door
edges, wherever practical, for concealed fixing.

14.90

Bolts to duct doors shall be of a good quality and anodised aluminium,

surface type. Where doors open outwards, top bolts shall be necked to allow
proper fixing.

Door stops

14.91

Door stops for the protection of doors, ironmongery or surfaces shall be of

concealed fixing types with robust holders matching other ironmongery on
the door and rubber inserts, which are easily replaceable.

Sliding gear

14.92

Sliding gear shall be high quality, proprietary units of suitable type and
capacity, to BS EN 1527.

Flush pulls

14.93

Flush pulls and sliding door locks shall be from the same suite as other
architectural ironmongery.

Sundries

14.94

Ironmongery to sundries hardware shall suit the location and function and
match architectural ironmongery in quality, design and finish.

Hat and coat

hooks

14.95

Where hat and coat hooks are vulnerable to abuse, heavy-duty hooks
independently certified to withstand 1000N applied load without
deformation with the fixings supplied, shall be used. In psychiatric or
detention facilities, units which collapse if improperly used and can be
subsequently reset, shall be used.

Door guard

14.96

Door guard shall be of brass, alloy or other metallic construction, complete

with No.10 x 30mm wood screws, properly anchored and capable to
withstand substantial impact load when engaged. Finish shall match other
ironmongery on the door.

Door viewer

14.97

Door viewers shall have viewing angle not less then 180 degrees.

Indicating sign
plates

14.98

Indicating sign plates shall be as for push plates, but satin anodised
aluminium plates shall not be less than 1.6mm thick. Self-luminous exit
signs to comply with BS 5499- 2.

14.99

Fire safety signs, notices and graphic symbols shall be as for push plates,
manufactured to the standards laid down in BS ISO 3864-1.

14.100

Fittings to drawers, cupboards and other joinery fittings shall be of a quality

to match the door hardware in a co-coordinated range.

Fittings to
drawers and
cupboards

(a) Hinges shall be stainless steel or chromium plated brass.

(b) Standard drawer locks shall be cast zinc with a brass, or chromium
plated brass cap approximately 22 mm diameter with a four tumbler
cylinder and a 4 mm thick brass bolt. Locks for cash drawers shall be
fitted with a brass spring loaded bolt.
(c) Flush or surface bolts shall have a minimum of a 6 mm diameter shoot.

14-12

Section 14 Ironmongery

(d) Ball catches shall have a 9.5 mm diameter ball mounted in a face plate
complete with matching striking plate.
(e) Magnetic door catches shall have a plastic casing with overall length not
less than 45 mm.
(f) Flush pulls shall be 100 x 50 x 18 mm deep fixed with four countersunk
screws.
(g) Drawer pulls shall be 7.5 mm diameter rod twice bent to form handle
100 x 25 mm overall length each leg fitted with 3 mm threaded rod one
end drilled and tapped at least 15 mm into the leg and the other end
fitted with two flat washers and a nut.
(h) Drawer slides shall be heavy-duty rust proofed enamelled steel, with
nylon cages and steel bearings able to bear the required load at full
extension and with positive closing action
Finishes

14.101

Fittings shall be finished as follows:

(a) Stainless steel.
(b) Satin anodised aluminium.
(c) Chromium plated brass.

Workmanship

14.102

Ironmongery shall be fitted and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations, where applicable, manufacturers fixing templates shall
be used.

14.103

All morticing of doors and frames shall be carefully done to ensure that
mortices are not oversize and that items are securely fitted, especially items
morticed into half hour doors and frames where their fire-rated performance
may be invalidated. Items morticed into one hour doors and frames must be
protected by intumescent materials. For locks and latches, this protection
shall comprise a layer of approved intumescent sheet on each side of the lock
or latch case; any other morticed items shall be painted with intumescent
paint before being fitted.

14.104

Screws shall be properly inserted to drilled pilot holes with a correctly sized
screwdriver. Screws must not be hammered even part of the way in.

14.105

Items when fixed where the screw head is burred shall have the screws
replaced. Where required, screw or bolt threads shall be plugged to suit the
construction to which the item is fixed.

14.106

Ironmongery shall be oiled and adjusted where required and left in perfect
working order.
IRONMONGERY SUNDRY
Materials

Dowels for fixing 14.107

door frames

Dowels shall be 16 mm diameter galvanized steel rod 75 mm long.

Fixing cramps

14.108

Fixing cramps for door frames, and the like fixed in brick or block walls
shall be 30 mm x 3 mm galvanized steel flat 250 mm girth, turned up at one
end and twice drilled to suit No. 12 gauge screws and flanged at the other
end.

Fixing bolts

14.109

Unless otherwise specified, fixing bolts for door frames, and the like fixed to
concrete shall be not less than 10 mm diameter proprietary expanding anchor

14-13

Section 14 Ironmongery

bolts 120 mm long overall, with nut and washer.

Water bar

14.110

Water bar shall be galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminium plate or brass
flat bars as specified.

Curtain track

14.111

Curtain track shall be an approved proprietary brand complete with

matching fittings of the same make, as follows:
(a) Rigid UPVC 'T' box section track with nylon slides.
(b) Regular of double duty enamelled steel 'C' section track with nylon
runner.
(c) Regular of double duty enamelled steel 'C' section track complete with
cord operation.

Curtain rail

14.112

Curtain rail shall be stainless steel heavy duty hollow tube with matching
purpose-made end flanges, all to the dimensions specified.

Towel rail

14.113

Towel rail shall be stainless steel heavy duty hollow tube with matching
purpose-made end flanges.

Timber
connectors

14.114

Steel connectors for timber shall be galvanized, round, tooth-plate type to

BS EN 912.
Workmanship

Metal dowels

14.115

Fix dowels 40 mm into bottom of door frame jambs, etc., with a tight push
fit, and bed the other end in floor in cement mortar.

Fixing cramps

14.116

Fix cramps to frames at 900 mm (maximum) centres with the upper and
lower cramps 300 mm (maximum) from the end of the jamb, using two 12
SG screws and build-in the other end.

Fixing bolts

14.117

Secure frames to concrete walls with bolts at 900 mm (maximum) centres

with the upper and lower bolts 300 mm (maximum) centres from the ends of
the jamb as fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Water bar

14.118

Bed water-bar in waterproofing cement mortar leaving no gaps.

Curtain track

14.119

Fix curtain track in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations

including runners at the rate of 13 Nos. per metre and all other accessories
including bracket, stopped ends and overlap set. When specified, install cord
sets and leave in proper working order.

Curtain rail

14.120

Plug and screw end flanges of curtain rail to brick or concrete wall with stain
less steel screws.

Towel rail

14.121

Plug and screw end flanges or brackets of towel rail to brick or concrete wall
with stainless steel screws.

14-14

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

SECTION 15
STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
GENERALLY
Generally

15.01

The use of structural steelwork shall be to the Code of Practice for the
Structural Use of Steel including its latest amendments and revisions issued by
the Buildings Department except otherwise stated.
MATERIALS

Mechanical
properties and
chemical
composition

15.02

Except specified otherwise, all structural steel shall be hot-rolled or hot-finished

structural steel complying with BS EN 10025 or BS EN 10210 respectively. All
structural steel shall be Grade S275 or S355JR, except that hot-finished hollow
sections shall be Grade S275J0H, S275J2H, S355J0H or S355J2H complying
with BS EN 10210-1.

Dimensions and
tolerances of
hot-rolled or
hot-finished
sections and plates

15.03

Dimensions and tolerances shall comply with the standards shown in Table 15.1:

TABLE 15.1
Section
Universal Beams and Columns
Joists
Channels
Angles
Split Tees
Rolled Tees
Plates (reversing mill)
Plates (cut from coil)
Wide flats
Hollow Sections

Dimensions
Tolerances
BS 4:Pt. 1
BS EN 10034
BS 4:Pt. 1
BS EN 10024
BS 4:Pt. 1
BS EN 10279
BS EN 10056-1
BS EN 10056-2
BS 4:Pt. 1
BS EN 10034
BS EN 10055
BS EN 10055
BS EN 10029
BS EN 10051
EU 91
BS EN 10210-2

Cold-formed open 15.04

sections and
profiled steel sheets

Cold-formed open sections and profiled steel sheets shall comply with BS 5950:
Pt. 7 or equivalent. Proprietary products may be used with prior approval of the
SO.

Cold-formed
hollow sections

15.05

The mechanical properties, chemical composition, dimensions and tolerances of

cold-formed structural hollow sections shall comply with BS EN 10219.

Ordinary bolts,
nuts and washers

15.06

Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers shall comply with the standards given in Table
15.2:
TABLE 15.2

(1)
(2)
(3)

Grade

Bolt

Nut

Washer

4.6

BS 4190

BS 4190 (Grade 4)

BS 4320(1)

8.8

BS 4190

BS 4190 (Grade 8) (2)

BS 4320(1)

10.9

BS 4190

BS 4190 (Grade 10) (3)

BS 4320(1)

Black steel washers to section 2 of BS 4320, normal diameter series.

Nuts for galvanized or sherardized 8.8 bolts should be grade 10 to BS 4190.
Nuts for galvanized or sherardized 10.9 bolts should be grade 12 to BS 4190.

15-1

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

High strength
friction grip bolts
nuts and washers

15.07

High strength friction grip bolts and associated nuts and washers shall be to BS
4395:Pt. 1 and Pt. 2 or BS EN 14399-1 unless specified otherwise.

Drill anchor bolts

15.08

Unless specified otherwise, all drill anchor bolts for external environment shall be
in Grade A4 stainless steel to BS EN ISO 3506, and electroplated anchors and
hot-dip galvanized anchors shall not be allowed.

Holding down bolts 15.09

Unless specified otherwise, holding down bolts and associated nuts and washers
shall comply with Table 15.3:
TABLE 15.3

(1)
(2)

Shear studs

15.10

Grade

Bolt

Nut

Washer

4.6

BS 7419

BS 4190 (Grade 4)

BS 4320(1)

8.8

BS 7419

BS 4190 (Grade 8) (2)

BS 4320(1)

Black steel washers to section 2 of BS 4320, normal diameter series.

Nuts for galvanized or sherardized 8.8 bolts should be grade 10 to BS 4190.

Proprietary shear studs for composite construction shall be the headed type and
shall be in accordance with BS EN ISO 13918 with the following minimum
properties after being formed:
(i) Yield strength 350 MPa;
(ii) Ultimate tensile strength 450 MPa; and
(iii) Elongation of 15% on a gauge length of 5.65Ao, where Ao is the original
cross section area of the test specimen.
The minimum diameter and the minimum depth of the head of a headed stud shall
be 1.5d and 0.4d respectively, where d is the nominal shank diameter of the stud.

Turnbuckles and
other elements

15.11

Obtain approval for specially made elements and components such as

turnbuckles.

Non-availability of
specified materials

15.12

Obtain approval for any variation required when the specified material is not
available and bear any additional cost arising therefrom.

Manufacturer's
certificates

15.13

Provide the manufacturer's certificates for all steel sections, plates, sheets, bolts,
nuts and washers delivered to Site.

Markings

15.14

Clearly mark all steelwork in an approved manner. Individual pieces shall be

capable of positive identification at all stages of fabrication.

Materials for
grouting of base
plates and end
plates

15.15

Unless specified otherwise, grout around foundation bolts, under column base
plates and behind connection end plates shall be one of the following types:

(a) Fluid cement mortar not leaner than 1:1 cement to fine aggregate by volume
and be mixed as thickly as possible consistent with fluidity. The minimum
amount of water is to be added to provide a viscosity suitable for the voids to
be filled without bleeding or segregation of the fresh grout mix; or
(b) An approved proprietary non-shrink polymer modified cementitious or resin
based grout.
Grout shall have at least the same grade strength as the surrounding concrete.

15-2

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

Testing of Materials
Generally

15.16

Allow sufficient time for the testing of specimens. Do not incorporate materials
until relevant tests have been carried out and approval obtained.

Testing of sections
and plates

15.17

Provide one test specimen for every 40 tonnes or part thereof of each section or
plate of same thickness from the same cast. For the purpose of this clause "same
thickness" means similar sections with a variation in thickness not exceeding + 5
mm. Test specimens shall be taken from sections selected at random on Site by
the SO.
Prepare the test specimens to BS EN 10002-1 as directed and appropriately mark
and deliver them to Public Works Laboratories, as directed by the SO. Unless
specified otherwise, the test specimens shall be subjected to tensile test in
accordance with BS EN 10002-1.
For proprietary structural steel products (e.g. playground equipment, lamp posts),
subject to the approval of the SO, manufacturer's certificates may be accepted as
proof of quality in lieu of sampling on site when all steel sections are
prefabricated by the manufacturer prior to shipment.

Through thickness
properties

15.18

Ensure that where appropriate the steel material has adequate through thickness
properties to satisfy the design, the method of fabrication, welding procedures and
non-destructive inspection regime such that the material at, or adjacent to, welds
is free of laminations, centreline segregation or other crack like indications on
completion of welding.
Any material, which is specified or proposed by the Contractor to have enhanced
through thickness properties, shall comply with the requirements of BS EN
10164. The Contractor shall, not less than three weeks prior to ordering the steel,
submit a report to the SO which documents the strategy that will be adopted (in
terms of material selection, weld procedure, procedure trials, weld sequence,
shrinkage control and inspection regime) to ensure that the above criteria are
satisfied.
If valid test reports issued by the manufacturer are not available, carry out the
following additional tests by Public Works Laboratories or an Accredited
Laboratory:
(a)

Ultrasonic grading to BS EN 10160 Class S1 and BS EN 10306 Table 2

Class 2.3 for flat products and sections respectively; and

(b)

Through-thickness tensile tests to BS EN 10164.

Security sampling 15.19.1

Cut test specimens under the direction and supervision of the SO who shall put his
signature on the specimen in indelible ink.

Security
before delivery for
grinding
preparation

15.19.2

Keep the specimen with SOs signature securely under lock. Keep the key in the
SOs office before delivery to workshop for grinding preparation to the required
shape where necessary.

Security
before delivery to
laboratory

15.19.3

Take test specimen returned from workshop to the SO for verification of

signature. Keep section securely under lock. Keep the key in the SOs office
before delivery to the laboratory for testing.

Security delivery

15.19.4

Deliver samples to the laboratory under the escort of the SO.

Security stock
management

15.19.5

Submit for approval by the SO at the commencement of the Contract a stock

management system to preclude unauthorized use of structural steel sections prior
to receipt of test results as well as swapping of sections of different testing status.

15-3

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

The followings shall be included:
(a) Provide identification marks to different specimens arriving on Site which
are uniquely traceable to the record of each batch.
(b) The record of a batch of steel sections shall include date of arrival to Site,
quantities delivered of different sections, delivery note, mill certificate and
the suppliers certificate.
(c) Establish and maintain a record system, such as colour coding or other
approved systems, for identifying and showing clearly specimens that are
under different testing status (awaiting test results, approved for use,
non-compliant, re-test, omitted for testing etc.).
(d) Keep separately specimens of different testing status at different locations.
Testing of bolts,
nuts and washers

15.20

Provide test specimens and carry out testing of bolts and associated nuts and
washers in accordance with the relevant BS in the Public Works Laboratories
when so directed by the SO. Rate of sampling shall be as Table 15.4 unless
specified otherwise. Submit test results as soon as they are available. Unless
specified otherwise, test specimens for bolts shall be subjected to tests to BS EN
ISO 898-1 to determine their tensile strength and for nuts shall be subjected to
tests in Annex A of BS 4190.
TABLE 15.4
Sampling of bolts

Failure of tests

15.21

Diameter of Bolts

Rate of Sample

not exceeding 16 mm

1 in 15000 or part thereof

exceeding 16 mm but not

exceeding 24 mm

1 in 5000 or part thereof

exceeding 24 mm

1 in 2500 or part thereof

Should the result of any test on steel sections or plates specified in Clauses 15.17
and 15.18 fail to comply with the relevant BS EN, two further test specimens may
be taken from the same batch of steel for re-test. Provided the results of these
further tests both comply with the relevant BS EN/BS, the batch of steel
represented by the specimens shall be deemed to comply with the GS. If the result
of either of these additional tests does not comply with the relevant BS EN/BS, the
batch of steel represented by the specimens shall be deemed not to comply with
the GS.
Should the result of any test on bolts or nuts specified in Clause 15.20 fail to
comply with relevant BS, two further test specimens may be taken respectively
from the same batch of bolts or nuts for re-test. Provided the results of these
further tests both comply with the relevant BS, the batch of bolts or nuts
represented by the specimens shall be deemed to comply with the GS. If the result
of either of these additional tests does not comply with relevant BS, the batch of
bolts or nuts represented by the specimens shall be deemed not to comply with the
GS.
Remove non-compliant structural steel, bolts, nuts and washers from Site as soon
as possible under the supervision of the SO.

15-4

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

FABRICATION SHOP DRAWINGS
Submission

15.22

Prior to construction and fabrication, submit to the SO for approval Fabrication

Shop Drawings to show all necessary details and dimensions. Fabrication Shop
Drawings shall not be reproductions of contract drawings without providing
information required.
Acceptance by the SO of the Fabrication Shop Drawings shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility for accuracy of his detail dimensions on the
drawings, nor the general fit-up of parts to be assembled on site.

Welding

15.23

Requirements on edge preparation for welds shall be indicated on the Fabrication

Shop Drawings.

Packings and
clearance

15.24

When preparing Fabrication Shop Drawings, make provision for:

(a) Packings which may be necessary to ensure proper fit-up of joints.
(b) The need for clearances between the fabricated components so that the
permitted deviations in fabrication shall not be exceeded.

Holes sizes

15.25

Holes in steel sections and plates shall be formed to the following sizes:
(a) For ordinary bolts and high strength friction grip bolts:
Not exceeding 24 mm diameter - 2 mm greater than the bolt diameter
Greater than 24 mm diameter - 3 mm greater than the bolt diameter
(b) For holding down bolts:
6 mm greater than the bolt diameter or with sufficient clearance to ensure that
a bolt, whose adjustment may cause it to be out of perpendicular, can be
accommodated through the base plate.
Details of holes and fittings in components necessary for safety or to provide
lifting and erection aids shall be included in the Fabrication Shop Drawings.

Holding down bolt

covers

15.26

Holding down bolt details shall include provision of loose cover plates or washers
with holes 3 mm greater than the holding down bolts.

Machining note

15.27

Any machining requirements shall be clearly noted on the Fabrication Shop

Drawings.
WORKMANSHIP GENERALLY

Handling,
transportation
and storage

15.28

Bundle, pack, handle and transport steelwork in a safe manner that shall prevent
damage to the steelwork and any protective coating, and to avoid permanent
distortion. Particular care shall be taken to stiffen free ends and all machined
surfaces.
Take precautions to minimize exposure of steelwork to atmospheric or chemical
pollution before and after fabrication. Prior to fabrication, steel shall not be more
heavily pitted or rusted than Grade C of Swedish Standard SIS 055900.
Store steelwork awaiting erection clear of the ground and keep different members
separate. Lay or stack to avoid accumulation of water or dirt on or against any of
the surfaces. Provide suitable packings between layers of stacked steelwork.
Ventilate covered steelwork sufficiently to preclude condensation.
Store and stack steel members in such a manner that markings are clearly visible.

15-5

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

Cutting, sawing,
drilling and
forming holes

15.29

(a)

Cutting, sawing and drilling

Cut members to size. Guide and control flame cutting, plasma cutting or
laser cutting by machine. Use hand-held cutting only where it is
impracticable to use machine cutting. Finish cut edges as follows :
(i)

Remove burrs, sharp arrisses and slag from edges of all cut
members.

(ii)

Dress machine sheared or cropped edges to a neat finish, free from

distortion.

Grind stiffeners, plates and the like to fit the profile of the parent member
with diagonal cuts to clear the root radius.
Machine stanchion splices and butt joints of compression members true and
square.
(b)

Forming holes
(i)

Drill round holes for fasteners or pins. Form slotted holes by drilling
two holes and complete by cutting. Dress holes as required to
remove burrs and protruding edges. Holes or slotted holes can be
plasma cut only after satisfactory demonstration and to the approval
of the SO that the tolerances and distortion control that stated in
Clause 15.32 can be met.

(ii)

Punching full size shall not be permitted for steel grade with design
yield strength greater than 460MPa. Punching full size shall only be
permitted when all the following conditions are satisfied:(I) The tolerance on distortion of the punched hole does not exceed
that stated in Clause 15.32.
(II) The holes are free from burrs that should prevent solid seating
of the parts when being tightened.
(III) The thickness is less than 25 mm for steel not higher than Grade
S355 and not greater than 10 mm for higher grade steel.
(IV) The thickness is also not greater than the diameter of the hole
being punched.
(V) In spliced connections, the holes in mating surfaces shall be
punched in one direction in all members.

(iii)

Punching and reaming

If the conditions stated in (b)(ii) above are not satisfied, punching
may be used provided that the holes are punched at least 2 mm less in
diameter than the required size and the hole is reamed to the full
diameter.

(iv)

Drifting
Drifting of holes to align the components shall only be permitted
with the approval by the SO, but must not cause any damage or
distortion to the final assembly.

15-6

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(v)

Holes in hollow sections

Seal bolt holes or other holes in hollow sections to prevent the
ingress of moisture unless approved otherwise by the SO. Show the
proposed method on the Fabrication Shop Drawings.

Curving,
straightening,
heating, shaping
and forming

15.30

Carry out curving, straightening, heating, shaping or forming only if it does not
result in material properties that do not conform to the specified requirements for
the as-supplied material.
Submit to the SO for approval curving, straightening, heating, shaping or forming
procedures before commencement of the work.

Installation and
testing of drill
anchor bolts

15.31

All drill anchor bolts shall be coordinated such that they do not clash with any
reinforcing steel bars of the concrete structure. Any deviation from the specified
positions shall be reported to the SO before installation.
Installation of drill anchor bolts shall strictly follow the manufacturers
specifications. Any installation procedures or details that deviate from the
manufacturers specifications shall be appended by a written statement from the
manufacturer to confirm strength of the anchors.
Where specified, carry out loading test of drill anchor bolts in accordance with BS
5080: Pt. 1 and 2 at a sampling rate of at least 1% of the anchors or 5 numbers,
whichever is more, of each type and size of the anchors installed. Each sample
anchor shall be tested for tensile load by pull-out test and/or shear load by shear
load test, as appropriate, to not less than 1.5 times the recommended working load
of the anchor as specified by the manufacturer and with a minimum holding time
of 60 minutes under maximum test load. The sample anchor shall not show any
signs of separation, plastic deformation or deleterious effect, and shall have at
least 80% recovery of the total deformation upon removal of the test load. If the
loading test of any sample anchor fails, the failure mode shall be recorded and the
cause shall be determined and reported to the SO. Propose remedial measures,
including justification calculations for any alternate design and method statement,
for agreement with the SO prior to carrying out any remedial works. The sample
anchor shall not be used for permanent work unless agreed by the SO.
Employ an Accredited Laboratory to carry out the testing of drill anchor bolts, and
provide any necessary labour and attendance. The Accredited Laboratory shall
submit test reports directly to SO in sealed envelopes within 3 days after the
testing.
WORKMANSHIP ACCURACY OF FABRICATION

Permitted
deviations

15.32

Fabricate all steelwork components to an accuracy that will enable erection within
the specified limits to take place without inducing excessive stresses, deflection or
distortion into the structure. Permitted deviations in cross section, length,
straightness, flatness, cutting, holing, position of fittings, and lattice components
shall be within the tolerance stated in Clauses 15.3 to 15.9 in the Code of Practice
for the Structural Use of Steel issued by the Buildings Department.
WORKMANSHIP ERECTION

Generally

15.33

Unless approved otherwise by the SO, erect fabricated steelwork only after all
welded joints and specified protective coatings have been inspected, tested where
required, and approved.
Do not load any part of the structure without prior approval.

Method statement

15.34

Prepare and submit details of the proposed method of erection for approval.
Details submitted shall include type of plant and equipment to be used and, if

15-7

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

necessary, drawings and calculations of any temporary work. Approval shall not
in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for safe erection of
permanent work, or the safe erection and subsequent dismantling of temporary
work. Design, construct and dismantle falsework to BS 5531 when specified.
Method statement for grouting under column base plates and connection end
plates shall be submitted for approval. Grouting trial shall be conducted on site to
verify the proposed method statement under site conditions before approval.

Temporary
bracings or
restraints

15.35

(a)

Design and provide sufficient temporary bracings or restraints to ensure that

the structure can withstand all loadings during construction without inducing
excessive stresses, deflection or distortion in the structure. Include the
design and details of the temporary bracings or restraints in the proposed
method of erection.

(b) Do not remove the temporary bracings or restraints until the fabricated
structure has been completed and permanent bracings have been erected to
ensure stability in all directions.
(c)

Lining and levelling 15.36

Any connections for the temporary bracings or restraints shall not weaken
the permanent structure or impair its serviceability.

Align each part of the structure as soon as practicable after it has been erected. Do
not make permanent connections between members until the structure has been
aligned, levelled, plumbed and temporarily connected to ensure that members will
not be displaced during the subsequent erection or alignment of the remainder of
the structure.
Take due account of the effects of temperature on the structure and measuring
equipment when measurements are made for setting-out, during erection, and for
dimensional checks carried out subsequently.

Packings and
grouting

15.37

Bed column bases and connection end plates or grout anchor bolts only after the
steelwork has been plumbed, levelled, aligned, adequately braced.
Steel packings and wedges of sufficient strength and stiffness shall be used to
plumb and level columns before grouting, and shall be of sufficient size to avoid
local crushing of the concrete. They shall be placed so that they do not prevent
subsequent grouting to completely fill all spaces directly under the column base
plates or behind connection end plates. Grout shall be applied under a suitable
head and tamped or vibrated to remove air pockets.
Where packings are to be left in position and subsequently grouted, they are to be
placed such that they will be totally embedded in the grout with adequate cover.
Immediately before grouting, the space under column base plates or behind
connection end plates shall be clean and free of all extraneous matter.
Material for sealing the perimeters around the column base plates or connection
end plates for grouting shall be removed after grout has been cured to expose the
grout surface for inspection.
If grouting were carried out without approved method statement or without
agreement by the SO, demonstrate to the satisfaction of the SO that approved
grouting materials have been used and the grouted space is free from void pocket.

15-8

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

WORKMANSHIP BOLTING
Preparation of
joints

15.38

Prepare and prime the contact surfaces at bolted joints. If the contact surfaces are
specified to be coated or otherwise treated, e.g. machined surface finish, the joint
shall be approved before assembly.

Bolts and nuts

15.39

(a) Length of bolts and threads

For Grade 4.6 and 8.8 bolts, the length of bolts shall be chosen such that, after
tightening, at least one clear thread shall show above the nut. For Grade 10.9
bolts, at least five clear threads shall remain.
At the same time, except for high strength friction grip bolts, bolt length shall
be chosen such that, after tightening, at least one complete thread in addition
to the thread run-out shall remain clear between the nut and the unthreaded
shank of the bolt, and for Grade 10.9 bolts used other than in shear, at least
5mm shall remain.
For general grade (Grade 8.8) high strength friction grip bolts, at least three
clear threads shall remain. For higher grade (Grade 10.9) high strength
friction grip bolts, at least five clear threads shall remain.

(b) Galvanized nuts

Nuts shall be checked after being galvanized for free running on the bolt and
re-tapped if necessary to ensure a satisfactory tightening performance.
(c) Locking of nuts
Secure nuts used in connections subject to vibration or reversal of stresses to
prevent loosening. Show the proposed method in the Fabrication Shop
Drawings.
Washers

15.40

(a) Generally
When the members being connected have a finished surface protective
treatment which may be damaged by the nut or bolt head being rotated, place
a washer under the rotating part
Provide taper washers to give the bolt heads and nuts a satisfactory bearing
when the bolt head or nuts is in contact with a surface which is inclined at
more than 3o from a plane at right angles to the bolt axis.
(b) Spring washers
Tighten bolt assemblies containing spring washers until the spring washer is
completely flattened.

Fit-up with
ordinary bolt
assemblies

15.41

Draw parts to be connected firmly together. Use shims to adjust the fit, if
necessary. For thicker gauge material (thicker than 4 mm for plates and 8 mm for
sections), leave residual gaps up to 2 mm, if necessary, between contact faces
unless full contact bearing is specified. Bring each bolt assembly into a snug-tight
condition without overloading the bolts. In large bolt groups, carry out this
process progressively from the middle of the group to the outside. Carry out
additional cycles of tightening, if necessary, to achieve a uniform snug-tight
condition. Take sufficient precautions so as not to overload short bolts and M12
or smaller bolts during tightening. The snug tight tension in the bolt should not
exceed the value at which bolt shear capacity reduces.

15-9

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

High strength
friction grip bolts

15.42

(a) Preparation of surfaces

Clean the interface of members to be jointed with high strength friction grip
bolts to the specified surface preparation and leave unpainted. Protect the
surface before and after bolt assembly from weather so that the slip factor is
not adversely affected. Prepare sample surface preparation for the prior
approval of the SO.
(b) Slip factor
The slip factor shall be in accordance with BS EN 1993-1-8. Remove all
mill-scale from the faying surfaces of friction grip bolted connections. The
faying surfaces of friction grip joints are to be free of distortion, deformities
or contaminants. Use masking to keep the surfaces free of protective
treatments. Where specified or when slip factor greater than 0.2 is proposed,
carry out tests in accordance with BS EN 1090-2 or BS 4604 to determine the
slip factor.
(c) Tightening
Use high strength friction grip bolts in accordance with BS EN 1090-2. Plate
washers shall be used for connections with long slotted and oversized holes.
Tightening may be by one of the following methods :

(i)

The torque-control method using a calibrated power-operated or a

hand-operated torque wrench to the minimum preloading force in Table
15.5:
TABLE 15.5
Minimum preloading force

Nominal size and

thread diameter

M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M

12
16
20
22
24
27
30
36

Minimum preloading force

(kN)
General Grade
Higher Grade
(Grade 8.8)
(Grade 10.9)
47
88
137
170
198
257
314
458

59
110
172
212
247
321
393
572

Calibrate the wrench regularly in accordance with BS 4604:Pt. 1 as

follows:
(a)

At the commencement of each new working day or shift,

(b) With each change of bolts diameter, and

(c)

With each change of bolts grip length in excess of 1/5th of the

length used in the calibration of the wrench.

Reapply the wrench to bolts previously tightened in a multi-bolt

connection to ensure all bolts have the correct torque.

15-10

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(ii) The direct tension indicator method using approved proprietary load
indicators, strictly in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
Adopt wrenches of adequate capacity. Maintain the wrenches in a
proper working condition in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(d) Fit-up
Draw parts to be connected firmly together with all bolts partially tightened.
Check if there is any remaining gap which may affect the integrity of the
joint. If so, take the joint apart and insert a pack before recommencing the
tightening procedure.
Where parts cannot be brought together by drifting without distorting the
steelwork, rectify by reaming, provided that the design of the connection will
allow the use of larger diameter bolts. Submit calculation to demonstrate that
the connection remains adequate for the forces in the connection.
(e) Discarded bolt assemblies
If, after complete tightening, a bolt or nut has to be slackened off, discard the
whole bolt assembly.
WORKMANSHIP WELDING
15.43

Welding shall be a metal arc process in accordance with BS EN 1011-1 together

with other clauses contained in this GS, unless specified otherwise.
Choose welding consumables to ensure that the mechanical properties of the weld
metal are not less than those required for the parent metal.
Execute welding in a flat or horizontal position wherever possible.

Welders and testing 15.44

of welders

Provide an experienced and competent operator to supervise welding. Welders

shall be tested to meet the requirements of BS EN 287-1 or approved equivalent
standards.

Welding

Test on welders shall be witnessed by a qualified welding inspector and

certificates are to be endorsed by an independent inspection authority. The
certification shall remain valid providing it complies with the conditions for
re-approval of certification specified in BS EN 287-1.
Welding record

15.45

Keep a record on Site when specified to identify welders responsible for major
welds.

Preparation of
welding procedure
specifications

15.46

Submit preliminary Welding Procedure Specification (pWPS) which shall be

prepared in accordance with BS EN ISO 15609-1 and certified by a qualified
welding inspector for the approval of the SO. The approved pWPS shall be
qualified in accordance Clause 15.47 prior to commencing production welding.
More than one qualified Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) may be needed
to cover the scope of the actual production, and each WPS shall at least address:
(i)

Welding process,

(ii)

Parent metal specification, thickness and other relevant dimensions,

(iii) Classification, type and size of electrodes and other consumables,

(iv) Welding current, arc voltage and travel speed/ wire feed speed,
(v)

Sketch showing edge preparation, fit-up and approximate number and

arrangement of runs in multi-run welds,

15-11

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(vi) Whether shop or site welding,
(vii) Welding positions,
(viii) Welding sequence,
(ix) Minimum preheating temperature and interpass temperature range,
(x)

Post-weld heat treatment if required.

Do not depart from the approved welding procedure without prior agreement of
the SO.
Qualification
testing of welding
procedure

15.47

Carry out qualification testing of approved pWPS by Welding Procedure test to

BS EN ISO 15607 and BS EN ISO 15614-1 strictly in accordance with the
approved pWPS and using representative samples of the materials. The
qualification testing including welding and testing shall be examined by an
Accredited Laboratory approved by the SO. Allow for the SOs inspection of the
qualification testing.
Subject to the approval of the SO, qualification testing of pWPS need not be
carried out if the same procedures have been tested and approved by the
Accredited Laboratory.
Strictly follow the qualified WPS for the works. Carry out further qualification
tests if either the material or procedure changes.
Based on the qualified WPS, prepare appropriate work instructions for all sizes of
butt welds and fillet weld where leg length equals to or exceeds 10mm. Submit the
work instructions for SOs approval prior to the commencement of welding. Work
instructions shall include cross-reference to the qualified WPS upon which they
are based, and shall indicate clearly all essential information including their
acceptable range for the specific weld size.

Welding
consumables

15.48

Consumables shall be to BS EN 499, BS EN 440, BS EN 756 or BS EN 758 as

appropriate and strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Submit delivery notes of welding consumables to the SO. Maintain a log book for
welding consumables on site which shall contain the date, types and quantities of
welding consumables delivered on site, and the updated balance. Submit daily
record to the SO on the names of welders engaged, welding joints under
preparation, types and quantity of welding consumables used.

Storage of welding
consumables

15.49

Consumables for use in welding (including electrodes) shall be kept and handled
in a controlled manner in accordance with BS EN 1011-1. Any drying or baking
of electrodes before issue shall be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturers recommendations.

Distortion control

15.50

The sequence of welding a joint or a sequence of joints shall be such that

distortion is minimized.

Preparation of
joints for welding

15.51

Prepare fusion surfaces to BS EN ISO 9692-1 and qualified WPS. Surfaces must
be dry, clean and free from paint or metal coating. Warm the surfaces if required
to remove condensation. Weld runs that were not performed on the same day shall
have the inter-pass surface treated and properly dressed to the approval of the SO.
The first three runs of a welded joint shall be completed within one day.

Slag

15.52

Remove welding slag by chipping before depositing subsequent runs.

Tack welds

15.53

Tack welding may only be used with express approval by the SO, and shall be
carried out as follows:

15-12

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(a)

Tack welds shall be made using the same procedures as for the root runs of
main welds. The length of the tack shall be the lesser of 4 times the thickness
of the thicker part being joined and at least 50 mm long, unless demonstrated
by a weld procedure qualification.

(b) Tack welds, which are not defective, may be incorporated into main welds
provided that the welder is qualified as in Clause 15.44. However, where
joints are welded using an automatic or mechanised process, the suitability
of the tack weld used for incorporation into automatic processes shall be
demonstrated in the weld procedure qualification.
(c)

Remove all tack welds made in circumstances other than those identified
above.

Butt welds

15.54

Butt welds shall be full penetration welds between prepared fusion faces, unless
specified otherwise. Partial penetration butt weld shall be subject to the approval
of the SO but the bevel depth shall at least be 70% thickness of the jointing plates.
Carry out back chipping, grinding or gouging of the deposited weld as required to
obviate imperfections in the root run. Grind butt welds flush without loss of
parent metal.

Fillet welds

15.55

Deposit fillet welds to the required length, throat thickness and with partial or full
penetration as specified.

Temporary
attachments

15.56

Do not weld temporary attachments to principal joints. Obtain approval of the

position of welds for temporary attachments and time slot for removal, and shall
be made in accordance with the requirements for a permanent weld.
Remove temporary attachments by flame cut or gouged at a point not closer than 3
mm from the surface of the parent material. If affected area deeper than 3mm,
remedial proposal shall be submitted to the SO for approval and the repaired
surface shall be subject to both magnetic particle inspection and ultrasonic
examination. Ground flush the residual material and visually inspect the affected
area. When the base material thickness exceeds 20mm (or carbon equivalent >
0.43%), it shall also in any case be checked by magnetic particle inspection. The
standard of acceptance for welds shall be in accordance Clause 15.58. Do not
remove attachments by hammering.

Shear stud welding

15.57

(a) Method
Weld shear studs by automatic stud welding gun strictly in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations for materials, procedures and
equipment unless approved otherwise. Provide adequate earth return
connections local to area being stud welded. The local area around where the
stud is to be welded shall be free of standing water before commencement of
welding.
(b) Trial Welding
Before commencement of the work, carry out trial welding of studs on
samples of material and studs representative of those to be used in the work to
demonstrate the suitability of the proposed welding system and equipment.
Test a minimum of ten studs in the trial. During the work, at the
commencement of each shift, a minimum of two trial welds is to be
undertaken by each welder. Visually inspect all trial welded studs and they
shall show a full 360o collar. Subject trial welded studs to a bend test. The
stud weld shall not show any signs of cracking or lack of fusion.
The bend test shall be made by striking the head of the stud with a 6 kg
hammer until it is displaced laterally a distance of about one quarter of the
height of the stud. Studs subjected to the bend test shall not be straightened.

15-13

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(c) Test and Inspection
Visually inspect all stud welds. Subject any stud weld that does not exhibit
full 360o collar to a bend test such that the area of no flash is put in tension.
Under this test the weld is to show no visible signs of cracking.
Subject a minimum of 5% of the studs, but not less than two studs per beam,
which have satisfied the visual inspection to a bend test. Under this test the
weld is to show no visible signs of cracking. Studs subjected to the bend test
shall not be straightened.
Where bend testing reveals an unsatisfactory stud weld, test an additional stud
on each side of the defective stud. Replace defective stud with new stud in an
adjacent location, and retest the replacement stud. The defective stud need
not be removed.
(d) Removal of Slag
Remove slag by light hammering, wire brushing or other methods that do not
deform the surface of the weld.
Acceptance of
welds

15.58

Employ an Accredited Laboratory to carry out and interpret the inspection and
testing of welds, and provide any necessary labour and attendance. Submit
evidence proving that operators carrying out the inspection and testing have been
trained and assessed for competence in the inspection and testing of welds. In
addition, submit certificates of competence from a recognised authority for
operators carrying out ultrasonic examination.
Arrange for the Accredited Laboratory to submit a testing programme for the
approval of the SO. Any welds that shall be rendered inaccessible by subsequent
work shall be examined prior to the loss of access.
Visually inspect all welds in accordance with BS EN 970, and after visual
inspection, carry out non-destructive testing in accordance with Table 15.6:

TABLE 15.6
Weld Type

Frequency of Non-destructive Testing

All types of butt

welds

100% ultrasonic examination and magnetic particle

inspection

Fillet welds with leg

length exceeding
and including 10
mm

20% ultrasonic examination and magnetic particle

inspection

Fillet welds with leg 20% magnetic particle inspection

length not exceeding
10 mm
Secondary
attachment welds,
e.g. for fixing
purlins, side rails

15-14

5% of attachments by magnetic particle inspection and

ultrasonic examination if leg length exceeds and includes
10 mm

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

The standard of acceptance for welds shall be in accordance with Table 14.3b in the
Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel issued by the Buildings
Department.
Carry out surface flaw detection by magnetic particle inspection (MPI) in
accordance with BS EN 1290. If MPI is impractical, dye penetration inspection
(DPI) may be used, subject to the approval of the SO, in accordance with BS EN
571.
Carry out ultrasonic examination in accordance with BS EN 1714 Level B. Make
printout results available during ultrasonic examination on site at 3 specified
locations per weld (such as at both ends and in the middle of the weld) and at
positions in question.
The Accredited Laboratory shall submit test reports directly to the SO in sealed
envelopes within 3 days of the completion of the testing. Tests revealing
discontinuity shall be reported separately from the subsequent repair and re-test.
Unless approved otherwise by the SO, carry out all non-destructive testing not less
than 16 hours from the time of completion of the weld to be inspected, or not less
than 40 hours in case of butt welds thicker than 40 mm or any welds to S450J0
steel. Should test results indicate that welds are below the standard of acceptance,
carry out at the Contractors own expense approved remedial measures and further
acceptance tests.
WORKMANSHIP ACCURACY OF ERECTED STEELWORK
Permitted
deviations

15.59

Erect steelwork within the permitted deviations stated in Clauses 15.10 to 15.12 in
the Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel issued by the Buildings
Department. Make all necessary allowances and adjustments to achieve this
accuracy.
Buttering shall not be used for closing up the construction deviation/tolerance
unless approved otherwise by the SO. WPS for buttering, if adopted, shall be
submitted and qualified in accordance with Clause 15.46. The buttering thickness
shall not exceed 20mm and the buttered surface shall be properly dressed for
subsequent welding, if needed.
WORKMANSHIP PAINTING AND CORROSION PROTECTION

Painting in general

15.60

Painting shall be as Section 21 in general. All painting shall be applied in strict

compliance with approved paint manufacturers recommendation, and shall be
compatible with each other.

Preparation and
painting of new
surfaces

15.61

Prepare new surface to receive protective coatings in accordance with one of the
following :
(i)

Manually clean metal surface thoroughly to remove all dirt, weld spatter,
grease and the like. Chip, scrape and wire-brush to remove mill scale and
rust. The surface so prepared shall not be inferior to Swedish Standard
SIS 055900 St2. Painting shall be as Table 15.7, Type A.

(ii)

Degrease metal surface, mechanically remove all millscale, rust and weld
spatter with power driven tools such as carborundum grinding discs, chipping
hammers and needle guns. Clean off all loosened particles by wire brushing
or vacuum cleaning. The surface so prepared shall not be inferior to Swedish
Standard SIS 055900 St3. Apply the protective coating within 4 hours to the
cleaned surface. Painting shall be as Table 15.7 Type B.

(iii) Blast-clean steel so that the prepared surface is not inferior to Swedish
Standard SIS 055900 Sa 2.5. Unless approved otherwise by the SO,

15-15

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

blast-cleaning to steelwork shall not be carried out until all welds for
steelwork have been completed. Clean the blasted surface by vacuum and do
not touch the surface by hand or contaminate it in any other way. Apply the
protective coating within 4 hours to the cleaned surface. Submit a sample of
blast cleaned steel not less than 150 x 150 x 6 mm adequately protected in
sealed clean polythene wrapping for approval before any work is carried out.
This approved sample shall be retained for comparison with the subsequent
prepared steelwork. Painting shall be as Table 15.7 Type C or Type D as
specified in the Contract and the zinc rich primer shall be applied directly on
the blast cleaned metal surface.
15.62

For redecoration of existing painted surfaces of structural steelwork, clean the

existing paint coat with an approved detergent, remove loose and flaking portions
with wire brush and grind rusted areas back to bare metal as instructed by the SO,
care being taken to avoid producing a smooth surface by excessive grinding. Where
the existing coating is intact after cleaning, apply the proposed paint coating over a
trial panel and examine for adherence after the curing period as recommended by
the paint manufacturer. Do not use the paint until the trial is passed. Where bare
metal is exposed, apply primer, undercoat and finishing coat as directed by the SO.

Hot dip galvanizing 15.63

Unless approved otherwise by the SO, galvanizing to steelwork shall not be carried
out until all welds for steelwork have been completed. Prior to galvanizing, the
following requirements have to be satisfied :

Redecoration of
existing painted
surfaces

(i) All welding slags and paints on the steel surface shall be removed.
(ii) All cut surfaces shall be ground smooth.
(iii) Adequate number of vent and drainage holes in accordance with BS EN ISO
14713 shall be provided for closed end hollow sections. The position of the
holes and any requirements for subsequent sealing shall be agreed by the SO.
Apply hot dip galvanized coatings to BS EN ISO 1461.
Small areas of galvanized coating damaged by welding, cutting or by rough
treatment during transit or erection shall be made good by:
(a) The use of at least one coat of zinc rich primer to BS 4652. Thoroughly clean
all areas affected by welding with abrasives or mechanical driven tools before
applying the zinc rich paint; or
(b) If specified, by blast cleaning to not inferior to Swedish Standard SIS 055900
Sa 2.5 and followed by one coat of 2-packed epoxy based zinc rich primer to
BS 4652.
Painting to galvanized structural steel shall be as Table 15.7 Type F or Type G as
specified in the Contract.
For galvanized or zinc rich primer coated surface, submit method statement on
checking and removal of zinc salt for the SOs approval prior to application of
painting.
Painting, stripe
coats to joints and
sharp edges and
damaged painting

15.64

Unless as required in 15.61(iii), there shall be no paint at the time of welding, other
than suitable prefabrication primer, within 50 mm of the weld. As soon as possible
after joints have been completed and approved, the parent and the joint material,
exposed parts of bolts, nuts and washers and weld affected areas shall be brought up
to the same standard of preparation and painting as the adjoining surfaces.
All damaged painting shall be brought up to the same standard of preparation and
painting as the adjoining surfaces.

15-16

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

Immediately after the primer of the painting system has dried, apply a stripe coat of
primer by brush to edges, corners, crevices, exposed parts of bolts, nuts and welds
to ensure that all these areas have a similar dry film thickness to that of any adjacent
surface. Subsequent undercoat and finishing coat of paint shall be applied similarly,
but with the stripe coat for the undercoat and finishing coat be applied beforehand.
Paint

15.65

Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers. Each container shall be marked on the
side to show the following:
(a)

The name of the manufacturer,

(b)

The paint manufacturers reference number,

(c)

Intended purposes, type of pigment and binder,

(d)

Batch number, date of manufacture, expiry date and pot life, and

(e)

Colour, gloss, drying times and flash point.

15-17

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

TABLE 15.7
Surface Protection to Structural Steel

Surface
Preparation

Painting
system

As Clause
15.61 (i)

Type A

As Clause
15. 61 (ii)

Type B

As Clause
15.61 (iii)

Type C

As Clause
15.61 (iii)

Type D

Details of Painting System

Primer :

Drying oil based zinc phosphate primer, applied in 1 coat

Dry film thickness = 40 m
Finishing coat :
Drying oil based finishing coat, applied in 2 coats
Dry film thickness = 80 m
Minimum overall dry film thickness = 120 m
Primer :
2-pack surface tolerant epoxy based aluminium paint
Dry film thickness = 80 m
Finishing coat :
2-pack recoatable polyurethane finishing paint, applied in 2 coats
Dry film thickness = 80 m
Minimum overall dry film thickness = 160 m
Primer :
2-pack epoxy based zinc rich primer, applied in 1 coat, to BS 4652
(except that the content of zinc metal in the dry film shall not be
less than 80% (by weight) of the cured paint film)
Dry film thickness = 60 m
Undercoat :
2-pack epoxy based micaceous iron oxide paint
Dry film thickness = 100 m
Finishing coat :
2-pack recoatable polyurethane coats finishing coat, applied in 2
coats
Dry film thickness = 100 m
Minimum overall dry film thickness = 260 m
Primer :
2-pack epoxy based zinc rich primer, applied in 1 coat, to BS 4652
(except that the content of zinc metal in the dry film shall not be
less than 80% (by weight) of the cured paint film)
Dry film thickness = 60 m
Undercoat :
2-pack epoxy based micaceous iron oxide paint
Dry film thickness = 100 m
Finishing coat :
2-pack epoxy based finishing coat
Dry film thickness =100 m
Minimum overall dry film thickness = 260 m

Type E

NOT USED
Primer :

Nil
Degrease and rinse.
Apply British Rail T-Wash or equivalent. Excess etchant to be
thoroughly rinsed.
Undercoat :
Nil
Finishing coat :
2-packed recoatable polyurethane finishing paint applied in 2
coats recommended as suitable by paint manufacturer for direct
application to etched surface. Etched surface shall be overcoated
within 24 hours or the time limit by the manufacturer
Dry film thickness = 80 m
Primer :
Nil
Degrease and rinse.
Hot dip
Type G Pretreatment :
galvanized to
Apply British Rail T-Wash or equivalent. Excess etchant to be
Clause 15.63
thoroughly rinsed.
Undercoat :
2-pack epoxy based micaceous iron oxide paint recommended as
suitable by paint manufacturer for direct application to etched
surface. Etched surface shall be overcoated within 24 hours or the
time limit by the manufacturer
Dry film thickness = 80 m
Finishing coat :
2-packed recoatable polyurethane finishing paint applied in 2
coats
Dry film thickness = 80 m
Minimum overall dry film thickness = 160 m
Note : Drying oils dry (or cure) in the presence of atmospheric oxygen; they include linseed oil, urethane oil,
alkyd, modified alkyd, phenolic varnish or epoxy ester.

Hot dip
galvanized to
Clause 15.63

Type F Pretreatment :

15-18

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

FIRE PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURAL STEEL
Generally

15.66

Fire protection system shall comply with the requirements of the Code of Practice
for Fire Safety in Buildings including its latest amendments and revisions issued
by the Buildings Department and shall provide the structural steelworks with the
required Fire Resistance Rating (FRR) ( as specified in the Contract or as required
by the Code of Practice for Fire Safety in Buildings. In case that specified
proprietary products are used, they shall still comply with the requirements in
Clauses 15.66 15.72.

Fire protection
system

15.67

When specified, provide fire protection to structural steel by one of the following
materials or system:
(i) Sprayed mineral coating to BS 8202: Pt. 1;
(ii) Intumescent coating system to BS 8202: Pt. 2; or
(iii) Proprietary fire protection board.
The fire protection system including its construction shall have been tested and
assessed to the requirements of BS 476: Pt. 20 and Pt. 21 as being capable of
resisting the action of fire for the specified periods. The tests and assessment shall
be carried out by an Accredited Laboratory, or one of the assessing organizations
listed in APP-118 issued by the Buildings Department. The assessment report shall
be within its validity period.
Details of application of the materials such as surface preparation, application of
primer, fixing details etc. shall be strictly in accordance with the approved tests and
assessment report; no deviation can be made except for specific situations where
some minor variations may be necessary. Such variations must be tested or
assessed by an Accredited Laboratory.

Submittals

15.68

The proposed fire protection system shall meet the design intent, the required
performance criteria and other requirements specified in the Contract. The fire
protection system must be approved by the SO before use. Submit to the SO for
approval all relevant information including but not be limited to the following:
i.

Product data: Data identifying performance characteristics and properties of

the fire protection material.

ii.

Tests and assessment report prepared by an Accredited Laboratory as specified

in Clause 15.67 above, together with job references and information of whether
the product has been accepted by the Buildings Department, Association for
Specialist Fire Protection (ASFP), Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or other
international recognized organizations.

iii. Details of the fire protection system including the thickness of coating/board to
be applied for each structural steel with calculation on section factor ( Hp/A or
A/V ) to substantiate that the required fire rating can be achieved.
iv. Details of the surface preparation requirements and application technique
including fixing details of the material.
v.

Certification from the fire protection coating manufacturer on the

compatibility of the coatings with the corrosion protection coating/paints.

vi. Name of installation contractor qualified for the works and acceptable to the
fire protection coating/board manufacturer.
vii. Samples of the materials.

15-19

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

viii. Quality control and field test procedures.
ix. Installation, safety and protection procedures including those for repair work.
Sprayed mineral
coating

15.69

(a) Sprayed mineral coating can only be used for interior structural steelwork and
shall not be used for exterior environment unless specified otherwise.
(b) For steel in an interior dry environment, all steel surfaces shall be blast cleaned
to Swedish Standard SIS 055900 Sa2 and shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil,
grease, dirt or other foreign substances which may impair the proper adhesion
of the fire protection to the substrate.
Should sprayed mineral coating not be applied within 4 hours to the cleaned
surface, the cleaned steel surfaces shall receive one coat of drying oil based
zinc phosphate primer with a dry film thickness of 35m. A bond coat shall be
applied, unless approved otherwise by the SO in writing, to the primed surface
prior to the application of the sprayed mineral coating and the bond coat must
be compatible with sprayed mineral coating.
(c) For interior area with high humidity, e.g. toilet, bathroom, changing rooms or
similar areas, or where specified, the steel shall receive the following corrosion
protection:
All steelwork and welded connections shall be blast cleaned to Swedish
Standard SIS 055900 Sa 2.5 and shall receive a corrosion protection system
using two-pack epoxy based zinc rich primer to BS 4652 with a dry film
thickness of 80m. Before application of subsequent coating, all zinc salts on
the surface shall be removed.
A bond coat shall be applied to the primed surface prior to the application of the
sprayed mineral coating and the bond coat must be compatible with sprayed
mineral coating.
(d) Dry density and cohesion/adhesion properties of sprayed material:
For general area:
Dry density of the sprayed material shall not be less than 240 kg/m3
The cohesion/adhesion of the sprayed material shall have a minimum 0.01 MPa
onto primed steelwork under site tests in accordance with ASTM E736.
For mechanical rooms, plant rooms, areas subject to vibration, or specified
areas:
Dry density of the sprayed material shall not be less than 640 kg/m3
The cohesion/adhesion of the sprayed material shall have a minimum 0.35 MPa
onto primed steelwork under site tests in accordance with ASTM E736.
Submit to the SO the test data on the density and cohesion/adhesion.
(e) Provide mechanical retention for the sprayed mineral coating by means of
mesh reinforcement in accordance with BS 8202: Pt. 1 unless:
a.

There is evidence from fire resistance tests to show that there is adequate
bond between the spray and the substrate (including primers or other
coatings); or

b.

The spray is locked in position by virtue of the shape of the element

Mechanical retention shall be provided for sprayed mineral coating in

mechanical rooms, specified areas or areas where the substrate is subjected to
vibration.

15-20

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(f) Application of the spray material:
a.

Prior to application of spray material to the underside of steel decking,

concrete works above shall be complete. No floor traffic shall be allowed
during application and during 7-day minimum curing period.

b.

Spray material shall be applied prior to the installation of ductwork, piping

and conduits which would interfere with uniform application of the spray
material.

c.

Prior to application of spray material, clips, hangers, support sleeves and

other attachments required to penetrate the spray material shall be in place.

d.

Any void space between the slab soffit and the top of the steel beams shall
be filled with the spray material.

e.

Cover the surfaces not to receive spray material to prevent contamination

by splatter, rebound and overspray

(g) The specified or design thickness of the sprayed mineral coating shall be the
minimum thickness when measurement is carried out on site. Conduct the
measurements in accordance with BS 8202: Pt. 1.
(h) Demonstrate, using a site trial prior to commencement of site spray work, that
the proposed materials, system and application method are adequate for the
design intent. Site tests such as the density and adhesion tests should also be
carried out at the trial panel to ensure that the sprayed coating meets the
required performance.
Intumescent coating
system

15.70

(a) The coating system shall be designed, taking into account the environmental
conditions during construction phase and throughout the life of the building.
(b) For exterior environment, the material shall have a weathering and ageing test.
(c) All interior structural steelwork including fasteners and welded connections
shall be blast cleaned to Swedish Standard SIS 055900 Sa 2.5 and shall
receive the protective coating as follows:
Primer:

Basecoat:
Finishing coat:

2-pack epoxy based zinc rich primer, applied in 1

coat, to BS 4652 (except that the content of zinc metal
in the dry film shall not be less than 80% (by weight)
of the cured paint film) with dry film thickness =
60 m
Protective fire coating with thickness depends on
Hp/A, and fire rating
Compatible finishing coat, dry film thickness = 50 m

(d) For specified area or external steelworks, all steelworks including fasteners
and welded connections shall be hot-dip galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.
Before application of the intumescent coating, the galvanized steelworks shall
be treated with etchant such as T-Wash followed by a compatible primer
recommended by the fire protection manufacturer as follows:
Pretreatment:
Primer:
Basecoat:
Finishing coat:

15-21

Degrease and rinse. Apply British Rail T-Wash or

equivalent. Excess etchant to be thoroughly rinsed.
Thickness and type to be recommended by the fire
protection coating manufacturer.
Fire protection coating with thickness depends on
Hp/A, and fire rating
Compatible finishing coat, dry film thickness = 50 m

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

(e) The primer for corrosion protection must be compatible with the steel substrate
and the basecoat, and must provide excellent adhesion at all times. All zinc salt
on the surface shall be removed prior to the application of the basecoat. If
adequate removal of the salt cannot be guaranteed, a suitable tie coat shall be
applied prior application of the base coat.
(f) The fire protection coatings shall not become softened, flow, or flake off in a
fire.
(g) All primer, tie coat if any, base coat and finishing coat shall be compatible with
each other.
(h) The dry film thickness of the basecoat must be recorded at locations of steel
sections as follows:
Web:
Outer Flanges:
Inner Flanges:
Hollow Sections:
Circular Hollow Sections:

One reading per metre length on each face

One reading per metre length on each face
One reading per metre length on each face
One reading per metre length on each face
Four readings per metre length around section

(i) Dry film thickness reading shall be taken when the intumescent basecoat is
sufficient hard to prevent the probe indenting the surface. Individual thickness
reading less than 90% of the specified thickness is not acceptable. The average
thickness shall be equal or greater than the specified thickness.
(j) The average measured dry film thickness shall not exceed by more than 10%
the manufacturers maximum test thickness for the particular steel shape and
orientation.
(k) The finishing coat shall not be applied until the basecoat thickness has been
checked and verified.
(l) The limits of temperature, humidity and curing time must be strictly adhered to
coating manufacturers recommendations such that bubbles and blisters within
coating shall not happen.
(m) Submit a method statement showing the proposed specification of the coating
system, application procedures for off-site and on-site activities, curing,
handling and protection during transportation and the repair method for the
approval of the SO.
Proprietary fire
protection board

15.71

(a) Proprietary fire protection board shall only be used for interior structural
steelwork and shall not be used for exterior environment unless specified
otherwise.
(b) The board shall be made of a suitable material and asbestos free.
(c) Submit test report to show that the material is resistant to moisture and will not
rot, disintegrate, warp, swell, sag or dimensional change under humidity.
(d) If approved by the SO, application technique, fixing, jointing and the use of the
fire protection board shall be in strict compliance with the manufacturers
technical specifications and recommendations.
(e) Before installation of the fire protection board, all structural steelwork
including fasteners and welded connections shall receive one of the following
corrosion protection as specified:

15-22

Section 15 Structural Steel Work

Hot-dipped galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461; or
Blast cleaned to Swedish Standard SIS 055900 Sa 2.5 and receive the
protective coating as follows:
Primer:

2-pack epoxy based zinc rich primer, applied in 1 coat, to

BS 4652 (except that the content of zinc metal in the dry
film shall not be less than 80% (by weight) of the cured
paint film) with dry film thickness = 60 m

Basecoat:

2-pack epoxy based micaceous iron oxide paint,

dry film thickness = 80 m

(f) Apply finishes/painting to the board when specified in the Contract.

Manufacturers
Inspection

15.72

The manufacturer of the fire protection system shall inspect the fire protection
works after it is completed, including testing and repair if necessary, and shall
certify that the work complies with the manufacturers criteria and
recommendations. Obtain and submit to the SO the manufacturers Inspection
Report and certifications of approval.

15-23

Section 16 Curtain Walls

SECTION 16
CURTAIN WALLS
Generally

16.00

For details regarding glass and glazing materials, such as gaskets and setting blocks,
refer to the relevant parts of Section 20 Glazing

Scope of the
Works

16.01

The Works comprise the design, fabrication, transportation, assembly and

installation of the curtain walls as specified. Provide full-scale testing to show
compliance. Testing must conform to Buildings Department Practice Note APP-37
as a minimum. Other testing as specified herein must conform to relevant
recognized International Standards. (e.g. ASTM, AAMA, BS, JIS or AS/NZS to
demonstrate the acceptability of the curtain wall system.)

Works
included

16.02

The Works include, but shall not be limited to:

(i)

Aluminium/stainless steel framing members.

(ii)

Galvanized mild steel sections as reinforcement.

(iii)

Fixings, connections and provision of anchorages. Concrete embedments

shall be provided under the Works but set by others.

(iv)

Glass and glazing materials including glass spacers, setting blocks,

gaskets, sealants etc.

(v)

Operable windows, spandrels, dressings to roofs/abutments, integral

louvres and screens to A/C intakes/exhausts.

(vi)

Stone panels and their support systems including anchorages to the main
structure.

(vii)

Ironmongery and fittings including all fasteners.

(viii)

Sills, copings, water bars, flashings, seals and other attachments.

(ix)

Insulation against fire between storeys and designated compartments

including all necessary support and retention materials.

(x)

Isolation of dissimilar metals and moving parts.

(xi)

All preparatory work to the adjoining structure for attachment of the

Works.

(xii)

Sealants within work of this section and at boundaries with work of other
sections.

(xiii)

Thermal insulation at non-vision areas including all necessary support and

retention materials.

(xiv)

Mock-up erection and tests (see also Clause 16.72 and 16.73)

(xv)

Field tests for resistance to water leakage.

(xvi)

Material tests.

(xvii)

Final cleaning.

16-1

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Related work

Abbreviations

16.03

16.04

(xviii)

Lightning protection.

(xix)

Field and/or Laboratory mock-ups.

Works related to, and requiring coordination with, but not necessarily forming part
of the Works include:
(i)

Reinforced concrete structure.

(ii)

Rendering and screed to concrete structure.

(iii)

External and internal finishes.

(iv)

External paving and asphalt work.

(v)

Forming grooves and chases in the structure for the proper execution of
the Works.

(vi)

Mechanical air-handling installation.

(vii)

Ceiling installation.

(viii)

Fixing of anchorages into structure.

(ix)

External curtain wall cleaning system.

(x)

Granite cladding.

(xi)

Lightning protection installation.

(xii)

Closure panel for Venetian Blind/shutter.

(xiii)

Waterproofing/water-tightness.

(xiv)

Equipotential bonding.

The following abbreviations are used in this Specification:

AAMA
AISC
AMCA
ANSI
APP

ASTM
BS
BS EN
CWCT
EN
GANA
OSHA
Codes and
standards

16.05

American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

American Institute of Steel Construction
Air Movement & Control Association
American National Standards Institute
Buildings Department Practice Note APP- for Authorized Persons,
Registered Structural Engineers and Registered Geotechnical
Engineers, issued by the Buildings Department
American Society for Testing and Materials
British Standards
European technical standards as adopted in the UK
Centre for Window and Cladding Technology
European Standard
Glass Association of North America
Occupational Safety and Health Administration

Comply with the documents contained in this Specification. All Standards and
Codes of Practice are to be the latest issue. If there is any conflict between the
standards and codes listed, the more onerous is to apply:
(i)

Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong

16-2

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Contractor's
design
responsibility

16.06

(ii)

Building (Construction) Regulations.

(iii)

Building (Planning) Regulations.

(iv)

Buildings Ordinance (Chapter 123).

(v)

APP-16, Current Edition.

(vi)

APP-37, Current Edition.

(vii)

All British Standards and other International Standards and codes

referenced herein, current editions.

(viii)

AAMA 501-05 Methods of Test for Exterior Walls

(a)

AAMA 501.1-05 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of

Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Using Dynamic Pressure.

(b)

AAMA 501.2-09 Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water

Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and
Sloped Glazing Systems.

(ix)

BS EN 12600 Glass in building. Pendulum test. Impact test method and

classification for flat glass.

(x)

All ASTM Standards referenced herein, current editions.

(xi)

OSHA Instruction STD 1-3.3 as amended November 12, 1985 regarding

scaffold tie-backs.

(xii)

Overall Thermal Transfer Value in Buildings 1995.

(xiii)

Code of Practice for Fire Safety in Buildings

(xiv)

Building (Energy Efficiency) Regulations.

(xv)

APP-67, Energy Efficiency of Buildings - Building (Energy Efficiency)

Regulation.

The design and performance of the system is the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Drawings and Specification define design intent and performance
requirements, they do not purport to show the details of the system as relating to the
performance requirements. The details show the overall sizes and the preferred
profiles. The connections and interfacing with other areas are the responsibility of
the Contractor.
Responsibilities include, but shall not be limited to, the following:
(i)

Unless otherwise specified, the appearance of exposed elements, including

width and depth, shall be consistent throughout the project.

(ii)

Unless otherwise specified, the overall thickness of each glass type, and
the component thicknesses of each multiple layer glass type, shall be
consistent throughout the project.

(iii)

Provide anchor adjustment capability for the full range of specified

tolerances. This must include provision for the angularity of the anchorage
mounting surface.

16-3

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(iv)

Provide movable joints to accommodate the full range of manufacturing

tolerances, field tolerances, thermal movements, floor sag, beam sag, and
column settlement. This includes provision for live load deflection of the
slab and inter-storey drift.

(v)

Provide corrosion protection between dissimilar materials. The material

used must be impervious to moisture whether or not it is installed in a
designated dry area.

(vi)

Provide water-tightness by the use of pressure equalization and rain

screen curtain wall design principles. This may be enhanced by the use of
drained gutter systems and/or the provision of weep holes to enable water
to be controlled and diverted to the exterior.

(vii)

Provide a complete external envelope which is accessible internally or

externally for maintenance.

INFORMATION TO BE PROVIDED
Tender
submission

16.07

Submit one copy of the following information when specified in the tender
documents:
(i)

Basic design of the curtain wall.

(ii)

Quality, finishes, thickness and standard of aluminium/stainless steel and

galvanized mild steel reinforcement.

(iii)

Quality, coating, thickness, standard and manufacturer of glass together

with the manufacturer's certification that the proposed glass meets the
testing requirement specified in Clause 20.01.

(iv)

Details required pursuant to Clause 16.05 if applicable.

(v)

Details of provision for wind load, thermal and building movements.

(vi)

Sections of major mullions and transoms with typical supporting structural

calculations.

(vii)

Typical design of spandrels, copings, louvres, and operable windows.

(viii)

Typical arrangement and jointing of components.

(ix)

Typical arrangement of fire barriers between perimeters of floors and

curtain wall.

(x)

Proposals for performing mock-up testing, proof load testing of spider

fixing and the testing of other materials.

(xi)

The Contractor shall submit their quality control plan which shall include
but not limited to the name, experience and qualification of the TCP and
any other person who shall be appointed by the Contractor to provide fulltime supervision of the construction of curtain wall, window wall, glass
shop front, large windows etc, including the installation of any cast-in
anchorage, e.g. anchor plates, cast-in embeds, through bolts and the like all
as the requirement set out in APP-37.
Provide an itemized list of deviations from the Specification and Drawings
for the Works. Identify the Specification item or the Drawing and state the
reason for the deviation. In the event that there are no deviations, provide
a written statement of full compliance with the Drawings and

(xii)

16-4

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Specification. Failure to provide an itemized list of deviations in the

required form, or a statement of full compliance shall, at the SO's
discretion, be cause for return of some or all submittals for approval
without review.
Programme for
the Works

16.08

Within 6 weeks of the date of acceptance of the tender or nomination by the SO,
submit a detailed programme for the Work as specified, to show the following:
(i)

Submission of structural calculations, shop drawings and samples of

materials.

(ii)

Ordering of components including aluminium extrusions, glass and

anchorage.

(iii)

Manufacture of components including aluminium extrusions, glass and

anchorage.

(iv)

Preparation of all mock-up samples required.

(v)

Testing in laboratory

(vi)

Delivery of components.

(vii)

Installation.

(viii)

Field Tests.

(ix)

Final cleaning.

'Installation' shall be further sub-divided into principal constituent operations.

Provision of
drawings and
calculations

16.09

Provide the following submittals for approval as specified. First submittals and
resubmittals shall be complete and in the required form. Resubmittals shall include
requested corrections and shall respond to previous comments.
Each sheet that is revised shall bear a revision date and number. Revisions shall be
flagged with a conspicuous revision symbol and number. Failure of a submittal to
be complete, in the proper form, responsive to comments, or identified with
revisions shall, at the SO's discretion, be a cause for non-approval and return of
documents without review.
Failure of reviewing comments to note a noncompliance with the Specification and
Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to comply. The
failure of the Contractor to note a noncompliance on a given submittal shall not
preclude a directive by the SO for the Contractor to comply on future submittals.
Allow sufficient time for preparation and processing of submittals and resubmittals.
(i)

Provide drawings certified by a qualified structural engineer, showing

materials in place. Drawings shall be fully co-ordinated to allow
identification from elevation to section and from section to elevation.
Drawings must include elevations, floor plans, sections and full size
details. Details shall be fully drawn (not outlined). Drawings shall
include the following information:
(a)

Assembly and water-tightness and/or pressure equalization and rain

screen system of curtain wall.

(b)

Glass and metal thicknesses.

16-5

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(c)

Metal alloy, temper and finish.

(d)

Glass strength, tint, coating, opacifier, frit and safety backing.

(e)

Fastener alloy, strength, plating, diameter, length and spacing.

(f)

Glazing materials identification.

(g)

Sealants identification by product name.

(h)

Relative layout of walls, beams, columns and slabs with dimensions

noted.

(i)

Dimensioned position of glass edge relative to metal surface.

(j)

Provisions for thermal movements and building movements.

(k)

Locations of, and details for, any embedded anchors.

(l)

Identification of, and details for, thermal insulation.

(m) Weld information and weld symbols conforming to BS 499-2C, BS

EN 22553

(ii)

(n)

Glazing details applicable to replacement glass, with outline of

procedure for glass replacement.

(o)

A drawing to show any changes to the typical anchorage system

required to accommodate the maximum and minimum concrete
condition is to be provided to confirm that provisions for adjustment
of anchors, relative to tolerances of building structure, has been
considered.

(p)

Details of spandrels, copings, louvres and operable window.

(q)

Details of ceiling and bottom/floor closure panels or strips if

applicable.

(r)

Details of fire barriers between perimeters of floors and curtain wall.

(s)

Details of lightning protection.

(t)

Location of equipotential bonding points.

Provide shop drawings and fully coordinated structural calculations,

certified by a qualified structural engineer, as specified. Calculations shall
be legible and shall incorporate sufficient cross references to the shop
drawings to make the calculations readily understandable and reviewable.
Test reports shall not be an acceptable substitute for calculations.
Calculations shall include the following information:
(a)

Analysis for all applicable loads on framing members.

(b)

Analysis for all applicable loads on anchors, including anchors

embedded in concrete.

(c)

Section property computations for framing members.

16-6

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(d)

Analysis of stress in structural silicone applications at vision or

spandrel glass lights, stiffeners to panels and all other areas where
silicone is used to retain items subject to structural loading.

(e)

Certification of a Registered Structural Engineer.

(iii)

Drawings and structural calculations shall be required for test mock-ups.

The requirements for test mock ups shall generally be the same as for the
actual Works, with particular reference to mock-up conditions.

(iv)

Additional submittal requirements:

(v)

(a)

Prior to, or at the same time as, the first submittal of structural
calculations for approval, provide dimensioned die drawings for all
aluminium extrusions.

(b)

In the event that extrusion profiles are not finalized, provide die
drawings for the profiles contemplated at that time. If profiles are
revised, provide revised die drawings with the first calculation or
shop drawing submittal which follows the revision.

(c)

Die drawings shall show all profile dimension, metal thickness, alloy
and temper.

(d)

Prior to construction, provide die drawings of gaskets and weatherstrips. Die drawings shall show all profile dimensions and shall
identify materials.

(e)

Prior to construction, provide glass manufacturer's wind pressure

analysis and thermal stress analysis, as well as glass manufacturer's
review of shop drawings stating that details shall be suitable for the
proposed glass products.

(f)

Prior to construction, provide sealant manufacturer's test reports

confirming sealant adhesion, compatibility and absence of staining
for all relevant substrates and sealant manufacturer's print review
report stating that the sealant manufacturer has reviewed all the shop
drawings and accepted the glazing details, conditions and glazing
materials for the satisfactory performance of the sealant. This
includes all materials that are designed to or may come into contact
with sealants.

(g)

Prior to construction, provide certification that, as a minimum,

insulating glass conforms to BS EN 1279.

(h)

Prior to submitting any documents for approval, submit laboratory

test reports for structural silicone assembly, as required under
TESTING.

Samples of materials:
(a)

Submit together with Clause 16.09 (i) above, samples of all

materials together with fully glazed samples of principal junctions
and assemblies.

(b)

Submission shall consist of three samples of each material and

principal junction or assembly, two to be retained by the SO, and the
other to be returned after approval. Approved samples shall be so

16-7

Section 16 Curtain Walls

marked by the SO. Samples of materials required shall be as follows:

Aluminium/Stainless steel
sections

300 mm length of each.

Galvanized mild steel

300 mm length of each section.

Sheet, plate, mesh

500 x 1000 mm piece of each type.

Glass

600 x 600 mm piece per type and/or edge

finish.

Fastening devices

Each type.

Sealants

150 mm cured sample each type.

Gaskets

300 mm length of each type.

Flashings

300 x 300 mm piece of each type.

Stone

300 x 300 mm piece of each type.

Access panel/sash window

500 x 500 mm part with all accessories.

Samples shall show the complete range of colour, texture and other
characteristic changes through the manufacture, fabrication, assembly,
installation and cleaning processes.
Submit finished samples of every extrusion or section to be used and of
every other material of the thickness and weight as required by the SO.
Aluminium samples shall include samples of high and low colour range of
anodic and organic coating finish and shall be labeled accordingly. Stone
samples should include the name of the quarry and country, and consist of
full range of color, texture and the grading of the stone.
Where the sample size is not sufficient to show all differences in
appearance, such as stone panels, the Contractor must specify any
additional discontinuities, changes to colour texture or other changes that
will affect the appearance and/or performance.
(vi)

Erection and protection method statement

Submit together with Clause 16.09 (i) above, a detailed method statement
for erection and protection of the Works. This should include details of
storage and protection when materials are stored on site prior to
installation.

(vii)

Mock-up samples
Refer to in Clause 16.72.

(viii)

Structural adequacy tests of anchorages

Refer to in Clause 16.74.

MATERIALS
Generally

16.10

(i)

Materials shall be structurally sound, able to withstand local pollutants

16-8

Section 16 Curtain Walls

and marine conditions, as well as relative humidity fluctuations as may be

experienced in the vicinity of the project. In addition, the materials shall
be free from defects and blemishes, and shall conform to the relevant
specified standards.

Steel

Aluminium

16.11

16.12

(ii)

Proprietary items that are site fixed shall be delivered to site in the
manufacturers original packaging.

(iii)

Materials of common type shall be obtained from the same manufacturer.

(iv)

All materials or components shall be fully compatible with each other.

Submit test certificates to prove compatibility of any materials or
components as requested by the SO.

(i)

Stainless steel shall be to BS EN 10048, BS EN 10095, BS EN ISO 94451, BS EN ISO 9445-2 grading not inferior to 304 S15 with minimum
thickness of 1mm and with all exposed edges rolled round.
Manufacturer's test certificates shall be provided with each consignment to
the Site to show that the material has been tested and found to comply
with the relevant requirements of BS EN ISO 9445-1, BS EN ISO 94452. Alternatively, stainless steel shall be to BS EN 10088 of corresponding
grading with properties not inferior to Grade 1.4301(304 S15).

(ii)

Structural steel shall be to Clause 15.02 and 15.03, galvanized in

accordance with Clause 15.63 and tested in accordance with Clause 15.17.

(i)

Aluminium and Aluminium alloy shall be to Clause 17.07.

(ii)

The following alloy and temper combinations are acceptable for

extrusions subject to fabrication, finish and structural requirements: 6063T5; 6063-T6; 6061-T6. Other alloys of the 6xxx series and other tempers
may be submitted for approval. Nominal wall thickness of 3.0 mm or
greater is acceptable for structural extrusions; wall thickness less than 3.0
mm may be acceptable and is subject to approval. Minimum nominal wall
thickness for non-structural trim shall be 1.5 mm.

(iii)

The following alloy and temper combinations are acceptable for sheet and
plate subject to fabrication, finish and structural requirements: 3003-Hl4;
5005-H14. Other alloys of the 3xxx, 5xxx and 6xxx series and other
tempers may be submitted for approval. Provide 3.0 mm minimum
nominal thickness.

Glass

16.13

Refer to Section 20 Clause 20.01 and 20.17.

Stone

16.14

(i)

The nominal thickness of the stone shall be determined by the specified

tests and design rules but shall not be less than as specified. These tests
must include for flexural strength test in accordance with ASTM
C880/C880M-09 and anchorage test in accordance with ASTM
C1354/C1354M-09. Determination method for thickness should follow
accepted methods (e.g. CWCT Recommendations).

(ii)

Actual stone thickness shall be nominal thickness plus/minus 2.0mm.

(iii)

Stone shall be free of damage to front face, back face and edges.

(iv)

Stone type shall be as specified.

(v)

Stone finish shall be as specified and within acceptable colour range.

16-9

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Anchors in
stone

16.15

(i)

Stone shall be supported by continuous kerf clips in sawn grooves at

two opposite edges of each piece of stone as a minimum. Kerf clips
shall be set in a continuous bed of neutral cure silicone sealant, which
has been shown by specified test requirements not to stain the stone.
Where the stone has exposed edges and kerf clips are therefore not
suitable for use, other methods of anchorage will be permitted.

(ii)

Kerf clips shall be formed stainless steel or aluminium extrusions. Mill

finish aluminium extrusions are not permitted. Extrusions should be
anodized (5 microns minimum) or have a chromate conversion/alodine
finish.

(iii)

Anchors in stone other than kerf clips for use in limited areas shall be
considered if submitted. Such anchors shall be stainless steel and may
be supplemented by an epoxy adhesive which must not restrict the
thermal movement or result in any stresses being imparted to the stone
other than those due to wind load. However, anchors which rely solely
on adhesive shall not be acceptable, positive engagement of the restraint
in the stone must be achieved. Alternate anchors shall be subject to
approval.

(iv)

The following types of anchors shall not be acceptable:

a)

Wires.

b)

Anchors whose only means of attachment to stone or building is

a bed of grout, mortar or adhesive.

c)

Anchors secured in a hole with lead wool packing.

d)

Anchors which transfer load from one piece of stone to another,

rather than to the building structure.

(v)

Anchors in stone shall allow for differential thermal movement of stone

and the support system.

(vi)

Adjustment slots in brackets with serrated grooves and matching

serrated locking washers will be permitted but tests are `required to
demonstrate the capacity of the anchorage method is acceptable.

(vii)

Open ended slots in any stone anchorage brackets are not permitted.

Glazing
materials

16.16

Refer to Section 20 Clause 20.01.

Anchors in
concrete and
masonry

16.17

(i)

Anchors, including cast-in-situ anchor channels or other embedded

fixings in concrete and masonry that are not manufactured from
stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanized rolled steel, or hot dip
galvanized cold formed steel to BS EN ISO 1461. Galvanize steel parts
of anchors. After field welding, remove weld slag and touch up affected
area as specified in Clause 15.63.

(ii)

Strength of embedded anchors shall be developed by integral

projections or by welded deformed bars or headed studs.

(iii)

At masonry, through bolts shall be acceptable provided that bearing

plates are used at both masonry surfaces. Anchor bolts shall be
acceptable only with prior approval from the SO.

16-10

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Fastener

Shims

16.18

16.19

(iv)

At concrete, all fixings including bolts should be cast-in-situ. Anchor

bolts shall be acceptable only when prior approval has been obtained
from the SO.

(v)

Self drilling, self threading screws shall not be acceptable.

(vi)

Screw-in plugs and powder actuated fasteners shall not be acceptable.

(vii)

Areas where curtain walls are installed in wet area/area exposed to

weather, anchors are upgraded to Stainless Steel Anchors embedded in
concrete.

(viii)

Anchor bolts, anchor channels or other proprietary fixings shall be

installed in accordance with manufacturers specifications including bolt
distance, edge distance and embedment depth.

(i)

Fastener requirements listed below shall be applicable to screws, bolts,

nuts, washers, rivets and pins.

(ii)

Stainless steel fasteners shall be to BS EN ISO 3506. Fasteners

outboard of or within a glazing pocket, gutter, flashed cavity or other
potentially wet location (after completion of construction) shall be of
grade preferably A4. Fasteners inboard of potentially wet locations shall
be of grade not inferior to A2.

(iii)

Stainless steel washers shall comply with BS 4320 and BS 4464 as far
as sizes and tolerances are concerned.

(iv)

Bolts, screws, nuts and washers shall be to Clause 15.06, 15.07 and
15.39, as a minimum, galvanized to Clause 15.63 and tested to Clause
15.20.

(v)

Provide lock washer or other locking device at all bolted connections.

(vi)

Powder actuated fasteners shall not be acceptable.

(vii)

Aluminium fasteners shall be to BS 1473.

(viii)

Actions subsequent to any failure of material or test specimens shall be

in accordance with the requirements of Clause 15.21.

(ix)

The mechanical properties, dimensions, load capacities and specific

proprietary model number/series of metal spider fixing and the fixing
components shall be shown in relevant drawings and submitted for
approval. The Contractor shall carry out proof load testing of spider
fixing.

(i)

At connections subject to thermal movement or other movement,

separate all pairs of moving surfaces with friction reducing pads. Pads
shall be minimum 3 mm thick, sufficiently capable of reducing friction
to permit movement and shall also reduce movement noise to a level
acceptable to the Architect, shall be resistant to wear and positively
retained in position (open ended slots shall not be acceptable). Pads shall
not be subjected to heat damage from welding or cutting or to excessive
pressure from over-tightening of bolts.

(ii)

Shims which transfer shear forces (tending to slide one shim against
another) shall be steel plates, set in a staggered pattern and fillet welded

16-11

Section 16 Curtain Walls

to each other and to the adjacent steel surfaces. The shims and welds
shall be structurally designed to support the applied loads.
(iii)

Plastic shims shall be acceptable at static connections for which the

shims transfer only compressive forces.

(iv)

Wood shims shall not be acceptable.

Weep hole
filters

16.20

Weep hole filters shall be 8 to 18 pores per centimeter reticulated PVC coated cell
urethane foam, compressed by 30 to 50 percent.

Sealants

16.21

(i)

Capping sealant shall be a one part gun grade neutral curing silicone
elastomeric sealant meeting the performance requirements stated below :

Capping Sealant
Properties

Testing
Method

Performance Requirement

Shore A
Hardness

ASTM-C661-06 (2011)

15-30

Tensile
Strength

ASTM-D-412

0.69 MPa min.

(100 psi)

Ultimate
Elongation

ASTM-D-412

350% min.

Movement
Capacity

ASTM C719-93 (2010)

50%

Elasticity
Modulus

ASTM-D-412

0.3 MPa min.

(45 psi)

Tear
Strength

ASTM-D-624

4 kN/m min.
(20 lb/in)

Peel
Strength

ASTM-C-794

3.5 kN/m min.

(20 lb/in)

Accelerated
Aging

ASTM-C793-05 (2010)

250 hrs min. UV exposure time

without cracks

Ozone/Ultraviolet
Resistance

Weatherometer

Excellent

Staining

ASTM C510-05a (2011)

None

The colour of the sealant shall be as selected / approved by the SO.

(ii)

Caulking sealant shall be either:

(a) One part gun grade neutral curing silicone elastomeric sealant or
(b) One part gun grade moisture curing modified polyurethane.

(iii)

The preferred caulking sealant shall be a one part gun grade neutral
curing silicone elastomeric sealant meeting the performance
requirements stated below:

16-12

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Caulking Sealant
Properties

Testing
Method

Performance Requirement

Shore A
Hardness

ASTM-C661-06 (2011)

15-30

Compression
Set

ASTM-D-395
Method A

Tensile
Strength

ASTM-D-412

Ultimate
Elongation

ASTM-D-412

Movement
Capacity

ASTM C719-93 (2010)

Elasticity
Modulus

ASTM-D-412

Tear
Strength

ASTM-D-624

Peel
Strength

ASTM-C-794

Accelerated
Aging

ASTM-C793-05 (2010)

250 hrs min. UV exposure time

without cracks

Ozone/
Ultraviolet
Resistance

Weatherometer

Pass

Staining

ASTM C510-05a (2011)

Pass

0.69 MPa min.

(100 psi)

50%

4 kN/m min.
(20 lb/in)

If modified polyurethane sealant is used, properties must be submitted for

approval prior to the placement of the order
(iv)

(v)

Structural sealant shall be either:

a)

One part gun grade neutral moisture curing silicone elastomeric

sealant or

b)

Two part structural silicone elastomeric sealant. Products requiring

mixing of components shall be acceptable only for shop application
with mixing and application equipment acceptable to the sealant
manufacturer.

The structural sealant shall meet the performance requirements stated

below:

16-13

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Structural Sealant
Properties

Testing
Method

Performance Requirement

Shore A
Hardness

ASTM-C661-06 (2011)

25-50 as in ASTM1184-05

Tensile
Strength

ASTM-D-412

0.83 MPa min.

(120 psi)

Ultimate
Elongation

ASTM-D-412

100% min.

ASTM C719-93 (2010)

50% for one component sealant

Movement
Capacity

25% for multiple component

sealant

Thermal
insulation and
fire-safing
insulation

16.22

Elasticity
Modulus

ASTM-D-412

0.3 MPa min.

(45 psi)

Tear
Strength

ASTM-D-624

5 kN/m min.
(26 lb/in)

Peel
Strength

ASTM-C-794

4 kN/m min.
(20 lb/in)

Accelerated
Aging

ASTM-C1184-05

pass 5000 hrs weathering test

Ozone/Ultraviolet
Resistance

Weatherometer

Excellent

Staining

ASTM C510-05a (2011)

None

(vi)

Comply with printed instructions and recommendations of the sealant

manufacturer regarding joint size limitations, mixing, priming, and
application. Unless printed instructions advise to the contrary, do not
apply sealants when substrates are wet or when the temperature is
below 4C.

(vii)

Sealant back-up materials shall be polyethylene foam, urethane foam or

extruded silicone as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

(viii)

All sealant shall be tooled as a separate operation after application.

(ix)

Coordinate with other sections to assure compatibility of intersecting

sealants.

The maximum Overall Thermal Transfer Values (OTTV) to be used in the design
of the building envelope shall be as designated in the Particular Specification but is
required to be more energy efficient than the requirements of APP-67. The ArchSD
requirement for the OTTV should be referred to the Department Operational
Instruction.

16-14

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Operable
windows

16.23

(i)

Insulate spandrel glass and other non-vision areas with thermal insulation
having a 50 mm minimum thickness and a 0.127 mm thick reinforced
aluminium foil vapour barrier. Insulation is to be installed on the interior
side of the backpan. Maintain a suitable air space between glass and the
back pan. U value is to conform to the overall OTTV requirements of the
building as specified in the Particular Specification. Care must be taken
to ensure that a double vapour barrier is not caused by the use of any foil
sealing tape.

(ii)

Insulation shall be mechanically retained by aluminium or galvanized

steel clips or straps, or integral pockets within the window frames.
Maximum spacing of clips and straps shall be 600mm. Welded or glued
impaling pins at 300mm centres shall also be acceptable. Maintain a
suitable air space between glass and the back pan.

(iii)

Support insulation where it contacts fire-safing, to prevent bow of

insulation from pressure exerted by fire-safing.

(iv)

Completely fill void at floor and roof edges with fireproof material,
thickness as required to provide a 2 hour fire rating. The fire barrier must
also prevent the passage of smoke. If fire safing material is used it must
be foil backed and smoke seal used at all junctions on the upper face.

(v)

Fire safing is to be compressed 20% to 30%. Support fire-safing

insulation on galvanized steel support clips spaced at a maximum of 450
mm centres if the installed fire safing width is in excess of 150mm.
Alternatively a full width galvanized mild steel tray can also be used to
support the fire safing.

Operable windows shall be required to conform to the requirements of this

Specification. Except as otherwise specified herein, operating windows shall also
conform (as a minimum) to BS 4873 and BS 6375:
(i)

Weather-strips, glazing gaskets and glazing blocks shall be extruded

silicone, EPDM or neoprene. Provide gaskets on both sides of the vent
glass unless it is structurally glazed.

(ii)

The required test specimen size is the maximum size operable window
for this project.

(iii)

Locks and strikes shall be white bronze or type 302, 304 or 316 stainless
steel, although suitably finished aluminium extruded keepers and strikes
will be acceptable if part of a proven multi-point lock set. Provide a
minimum of two locks and two strikes per vent.

(iv)

Fixed frames and vent frames shall be extruded aluminium with an

acceptable factory applied finish. Vent frames shall consist of a tubular
profile.

(v)

Weather-strips shall have a continuous spline engaged in a continuous

groove in the aluminium sash and/or fixed frame. Two continuous lines
of weather-strip shall be required at vent perimeters, except for the
designed apertures in the external gasket to allow pressure equalization
of the interstitial cavity.

(vi)

If an integral pivot is not used, balance arms shall be provided and these
shall be four-bar 300 series stainless steel type 302, 304 or 316 with
adjustable friction shoe. Provide two balance arms per vent.

16-15

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Composite and
honeycomb
panels

16.24

(vii)

Provide two limit stops per operable window. Material shall be 300
series stainless steel type 302, 304 or 316. Stops shall restrict clear
opening to 100 mm. Effective ventilating area shall be based on the
maximum clear opening, not on the gross window area.

(viii)

Operable windows are to have removable handles or special keys to

enable the windows to be opened.

(ix)

Hinges and fastening mechanisms shall withstand positive and negative

pressures due to specified wind conditions when the windows are in the
open or closed positions.

(i)

Honeycomb Panels

(ii)

(a)

Honeycomb panels shall have a construction method with a

minimum in-use history of 15 years and shall have a nominal
overall thickness of 25.0 mm

(b)

Face and back sheets shall generally be aluminium with nominal

thickness of 1.0 mm. Alloy shall be of the 3xxx, 5xxx or 6xxx
series and shall satisfy structural and finish requirements. Provide
formed edge returns and seal edges with silicone sealant. Bonding
surfaces shall be chemically pretreated to assure effective and
durable bond. Other facing materials may also be suitable and will
only be permitted if approved prior to use.

(c)

Core shall be hexagonal cell aluminium foil with minimum

nominal thickness of 0.0762 mm. Cell size shall not exceed 6.0
mm measured across flats. Foil shall have an organic corrosion
resistant coating. Alloy shall be 3003, 5052, or 2024.

(d)

Adhesive shall be a thermal setting modified epoxy with a

minimum set temperature of 121C. The adhesive shall form a fillet
at the perimeter of each cell, and shall continuously bond each cell
to the face and back sheets.

(e)

The face sheet, back sheet, and core of each panel shall be cut from
single pieces of material. No joinery shall be permitted unless the
size of the panel exceeds the sizes that are commercially available.

(f)

For panels in place, deviation from flatness of exterior face shall

not exceed 2 mm along any straight line which extends from a
panel edge to any other edge. Where the edge is concealed, the
nearest exposed point to the edge shall be used.

(g)

Panel exterior face shall be free of visual discontinuities such as

ripples, creases, dents, bubbles and blisters, regardless of the
measured deviation from flatness at such discontinuities.

Composite Panels
(a)

Composite panels shall have a construction method with a

minimum in-use history of 15 years and shall have a minimum
overall nominal thickness of 4.0 mm.

(b)

Face and back sheets shall generally be aluminium with equal

thickness of 0.5 mm. Alloy shall be of the 3xxx, 5xxx or 6xxx
series and shall satisfy structural and finish requirement

16-16

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Louvres

Copings

Concealed and
exposed
flashing

16.25

16.26

16.27

(c)

Core shall be polyethylene or similar.

(d)

Edges requiring Vee-cutting to enable folding to occur shall be cut

in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Failure to do
so may result in rejection of the material.

(e)

Provide formed edge returns with a residual core thickness of 0.2 to

0.4mm and seal edges with reinforcements and silicone sealant.

(f)

Structural support must be provided by means other than the return

edge.

(g)

Bonding surfaces shall be chemically pretreated to assure effective

and durable bond.

(h)

Other facing materials may also be suitable and will only be

permitted if approved prior to use.

(i)

Louvres shall consist of extruded or roll formed aluminium perimeter

frames and blades. Frame corners and blade ends shall be welded or
fastened with 300 series stainless steel screws. Provide concealed
extruded aluminium stiffeners for blades, such that vector sum of blade
deflections parallel to blade principal axes does not exceed 1/175 times
span at design pressure. Assume that pressure acts perpendicular to the
plane formed by the corners of the perimeter frame, and that the tributary
area for one blade equals its projected area on the same plane.

(ii)

Louvres in external walls are to comply with the water resistance

requirements of ANSI/AMCA Standard 500-L-07. Coordinate free area
of louvres with mechanical requirements.

(iii)

Inactive louvres shall be closed by aluminium sheet with minimum 3.0

mm nominal thickness, fastened and sealed to the indoor louvre surfaces.
External face of sheet is to be finished with an approved factory applied
architectural finish.

Copings shall comply with the following:

(i)

Copings shall comprise of aluminium, minimum 3.0 mm thick or stainless

steel, minimum 2.0 mm thick. Unless specified to the contrary in the
Particular Specification, the surface finish shall be the same type of finish
and colour as the visible external framing.

(ii)

Copings shall be rigid, reinforced with a metal frame if required and shall
be fixed rigidly to the structure. Copings shall be strong enough to resist
forces due to typhoon and casual impact.

(iii)

Ends of coping panels and joints to curtain wall frame shall be tightly
sealed up and an effective drainage system shall be provided to drain out
any water that may penetrate through the joints.

(i)

Acceptable elastomeric materials are silicone, neoprene or EPDM sheet. If

rigid sheets are used, stainless steel sheet and aluminium sheet with a
chromate conversion/alodine or a minimum 5 micron anodized finish are
acceptable. Minimum thicknesses are 1.6 mm for PVC and neoprene, 0.25
mm for stainless steel, and 1.0 mm for aluminium. Aluminium shall be
required to have a bituminous or other type of separation coating against
dissimilar metallic materials.

16-17

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Maintenance
replacement
standby materials

16.28

(ii)

Provide sealed lap joints, end dams and transitions to gutters, dressings to
roofs/abutments, louvres and screens to A/C intakes and exhausts.

(iii)

PVC, EPDM, Silicone or neoprene sheet shall not be acceptable as

primary gutters, which shall be metal with suitable corrosion protection.

(iv)

Exposed flashing shall be strong enough to resist forces due to typhoon

and casual impact.

(i)

Upon completion of construction, deliver to designated storage area

replacement standby materials for maintenance and repair. Materials shall
conform to the same requirements as materials used for construction.

(ii)

The replacement standby materials shall be stored in clearly labeled

protective boxing and/or crates and positioned on support frames and/or
storage racks which are placed in appropriate locations to ensure that the
material shall not be damaged or deteriorate.

(iii)

The requirements for the maintenance/replacement standby materials are

stated in the Particular Specification.

FINISHES
Generally

16.29

Exposed metal surfaces shall be finished to match the appearance, colour and
texture of the samples as approved by the SO.
Finishes to metals shall be as specified in Section 17 and the Particular
Specification, complying with the requirements stated below shall be the minimum:

Protective
treatments

16.30

(i)

Clear or coloured anodic finish to aluminium shall comply with the

relevant clauses of BS 3987, BS ISO 10074 and BS EN 12373.

(ii)

No. 8 bright polished finish to exposed faces of stainless steel.

(iii)

No. 7 polished finish to stainless steel or chromium plated ironmongery.

(iv)

Alternative finishes shall be approved by the SO.

(v)

Organic coatings shall meet the requirements of AAMA 2604 for internal
and AAMA 2605 for external finishes.

(vi)

All as specified and indicated on the drawings.

Protective treatment to concealed steel parts of the curtain wall system such as
fixings, connectors, etc., shall be hot dip galvanizing to BS EN ISO 1461.
All welding and provision of holes shall be completed before galvanizing.
No in-situ welding is allowed unless prior approval has been obtained from the
SO. Details of the protective treatment to damaged galvanizing caused by the
welding must be submitted to the SO prior to any welding being carried out.

Anodic coating to
aluminium and
testing of same

16.31

The thickness of anodic coating shall be a minimum of 25 microns for external use
and 15 microns for internal usage.
Concealed surfaces are to have a 10 micron minimum thickness. Coloured anodic
coatings and testing of same shall be as approved by the SO.
Anodic coatings are required to be sealed using a hydrothermal process, or cold

16-18

Section 16 Curtain Walls

impregnation/cold sealed based on nickel fluoride immersion process to achieve a

finish in accordance with AAMA 611.
Six sets of colour range samples for both sheets and extrusions (with at least 2
samples each) are to be provided which show the limits of both colour and patina of
the anodic coating. These are to be submitted for approval prior to the
commencement of production.
Samples of finished aluminium from production lots shall be tested in accordance
with AAMA 611 and BS EN 12373 and the requirements of the European
Qualanod Quality Organisation.
Complete sets of finish process records and certified inspection records for quality
of finish shall be maintained and made available to the SO on request. The client or
his representative will have the right to audit and inspect any manufacturer without
prior notice.
Repair of damage to finished surfaces by mechanical means (other than those
specified) or by painting is strictly forbidden unless authorized in writing by the
SO.
Surfaces prior to finish shall be free from mechanical imperfections such as
scratches, scrapes and dents. Finished surfaces shall be free from finished
imperfections such as spots, stains and streaks.
Anodized aluminium shall comply with AAMA 611 and remain free from visible
chalking, crazing and surface corrosion (when viewed from a distance of 3m) for
the duration of the warranty period.
Materials may be finished more than once provided that all specified requirements
are satisfied. However, any material which has been finished twice and is still not
acceptable shall be rejected.
Organic coating
finish to
aluminium

16.32

Organic coating finish shall comply with the following general requirements:
Also refer to Section 17 of this GS.
(i)

All coatings, when cured, shall be visibly free of flow lines, streaks, sags,
blisters or other surface imperfections. Extrusions shall be free from
visible die lines that will show through the organic paint system. In the
event that die lines occur, the coating supplier shall specify an appropriate
treatment that will fully comply with the specification and warranty
requirements.

(ii)

All finishes shall match in gloss, and fall within the colour range of the
approved samples. Six sets of colour range samples for both sheets and
extrusions (with at least 2 samples each) are to be provided which show
the limits of both colour and gloss retention of the organic coating. These
shall be submitted for approval prior to the commencement of production.

(iii)

Dry film thickness of coating on all the exposed surfaces, or on hidden

surfaces if required, shall not be less than the minimum requirements of
the paint manufacturer. Paint all visible and exposed surfaces of metal
cladding. Surfaces that are not exposed to view must have a protective
coating that, if not the same as the visible surfaces, must be approved by
the SO.

Prepare and submit colour samples to the SO. After selection by the SO, prepare 6
sets each of two samples which shall define the colour and gloss range and submit

16-19

Section 16 Curtain Walls

to the SO for endorsement. Samples shall be identified and attached with a full
laboratory report as required by BS 4842, BS 6496 and the requirements of the
relevant AAMA specification if applicable.
Painted aluminium PVDF finish shall be a factory applied oven cured minimum
two-coat finish of a fluoropolymer resin supplied by a licensed formulator with a
minimum of 70% Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 solids. The licensed formulator shall
confirm that the finish which is supplied meets the minimal requirements for
formulation as set forth in the licensing agreement. Painted aluminium powder coat
finish shall be a factory applied oven cured system of a single coat that complies
with the performance requirements of AAMA 2604 as a minimum.
Application of the finish shall be carried out in accordance with the specifications
issued by the licensed formulator and by an applicator specifically approved by one
(or more) of the formulators. Test panels must be painted during the production
process and tested to ensure adhesion, coating thickness and all other significant
properties are in accordance with the manufacturers requirements. Evidence of
these test samples may be required to be submitted prior to final acceptance of the
finish. The applicator shall provide written notification of approval by a formulator
prior to application of the finish. The formulation shall contain at least 70% Kynar
500/Hylar 5000 fluoropolymer resin in the residual solids.
Pretreat metal surfaces in accordance with the procedure recommended by the
manufacturer to provide proper surfaces for coating. In the absence of any
recommendations from the manufacturer. For all exterior powder coating and
painting, etching is required to a depth equivalent to 2 g/m 2 of substrate removal.
Interior coatings require etching to a depth of 1 g/m2. Where possible Chrome
Free chromate conversion should be carried out in accordance with a procedure
that is acceptable to the organic coating supplier.
Aluminium
finish at
structural
silicone

16.33

(i)

Mill finish shall not be acceptable at structural silicone bonding surfaces.

(ii)

Aluminium surface to which structural silicone will be adhered shall have

a finish which demonstrates by test the ability to satisfy specified
requirements. Subject to testing, acceptable finishes shall be as follows:
(a)

Factory applied single coat powder polyester or a minimum twocoat oven cured fluoropolymer paint conforming to AAMA 2605
for external usage.

(b)

25 micron anodizing conforming to AAMA 611.

(c)

Alodine conversion coating.

WORKMANSHIP
General

16.34

Material, components and systems shall be used in compliance with the standards
and procedures of the appropriate manufacturers. All work shall be of the highest
quality and be carried out by competent tradesmen holding relevant trade
certification; such that the finished work satisfies the requirements of the
specification. Practice shall conform to the relevant part and in the priority of:
(i)

BS EN 1999-1, part 1, 3 & 4

(ii)

Structural steel shall be to Section 15 of this GS.

(iii)

BS 6262- Code of practice for Glazing for Buildings and BS 6262-1 to 4,

6 & 7: Glazing for Buildings.

16-20

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(iv)

BS 8200 Design of non-loadbearing external vertical enclosures of

buildings.

(v)

The subclass P sealants refer to BS EN ISO 8339, BS EN ISO 9046 and

BS EN ISO 10591; The subclass E sealants conform to BS EN ISO 8340,
BS EN ISO 9047, BS EN ISO 10590 and BS EN ISO 11431; the subclass
F&G sealants to BS EN ISO 11600:2003+A1:2011

(vi)

Recommended glazing guidelines for monolithic, laminated and insulating

glass by GANA.

(vii)

Aluminium Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual by AAMA.

(viii)

Metal Curtain Wall Manual by AAMA.

No temporary stress or force shall be applied at any time to the assembly, units,
individual components or fixing devices which these have not been designed to
withstand. Provide temporary supplementary frame stiffeners for curtain wall units
for handling purposes when required.
Conform strictly to the material finishes, shapes, sizes, thickness, and joint
locations required by the agreed shop drawings and the Specification.
Match all materials to produce continuity of line, colour and texture.
Protect from damaging curtain wall units and components stored on the site.
Store glass on the site in a dry well-ventilated sheltered location.
Handling glass shall be kept to a minimum and all glass shall be carefully protected
from soiling, condensation and damage. To avoid damage of glass, glass must not
be slid directly onto a hard surface and the glazing rebates of the frames should be
checked to ensure they are free from sand or any other debris prior to glass
installation.
Carry out all final fitting and assembly work on the Site in a workshop established
and equipped for that purpose.
All components exposed in the finished work shall be free from warping, oilcanning effects and the telegraphing of welds, studs and other fasteners.
Provide specified finishes on all exposed surfaces. Provide specified galvanizing on
concealed steel.
Setting out

16.35

Before commencing any work, verify all measurements of the "as constructed"
building. If any discrepancies are found they shall be brought immediately to the
attention of the SO. Design curtain wall anchorage to accommodate a minimum 25
mm construction tolerance in any direction of the building structure.
Accurately set out the Works and take all necessary Site dimensions.

Joints in curtain
wall

16.36

Visible joints in the curtain wall shall be as shown on the drawings. Other joints
shall be hairline joints, tightly fitted and coordinated with mullion grids.
All fastening, jointing and splicing of members shall be concealed. Exposed
fasteners shall only occur where expressly permitted by the SO. Where exposed in
the finished work, screws shall be the countersunk head type, finished to match the
adjacent surface.

16-21

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Fasteners shall not penetrate gutters and drainage systems.

Corrosion
Protection

16.37

Aluminium in contact with dissimilar metal excluding non-magnetic stainless steel

shall be treated with an approved treatment for the prevention of electrolytic action
and corrosion.
Aluminium surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster, masonry and similar
materials and wet-applied materials in fire-proofing and absorptive materials shall
be coated with an approved anti-corrosive moisture-barrier material.
The Contractor shall clearly state what material is to be applied and provide a
certificate from the curtain walling manufacturer certifying that the material is
suited for its intended purpose.

Metal to metal
contact

Welding

16.38

Separate metal surfaces in such a manner that metal does not rub against metal.
Materials used for this purpose shall be lubricating devices, sealants, slip pads or
gaskets.

16.39

Welding of steel shall be in accordance with BS EN 1011-1.

Welding of aluminium shall be to BS EN 1011-4.
Welding of Aluminium shall be tested to BS EN ISO 4136- Destructive tests on
welds in metallic materials. Transverse tensile test, BS EN ISO 5173- Destructive
tests on welds in metallic materials. Bend tests, BS EN 1320-Destructive tests on
welds in metallic materials. Fracture tests, BS EN 1321- Destructive test on welds
in metallic materials. Macroscopic and microscopic examination of welds.
The type, size and spacing of welds shall be as shown on the agreed shop drawings.
Welding materials and methods shall be such as not to cause distortion,
discolouration, or result in any other adverse effect on the required profiles and
finishes of the exposed curtain wall.
Weld spatter and welding oxides on exposed surfaces shall be removed, and prime
painted with zinc rich coating.
Unless otherwise shown or specified, weld beads on exposed surfaces shall be
ground and finished to match and blend with finish on adjacent metal. Grinding
and polishing of nonferrous metal shall be done only with clean wheels and
compounds free from iron and iron compounds. No soldering and/or brazing shall
be allowed.

Application of
sealant and
gasket

16.40

The subclass P sealants refer to BS EN ISO 8339, BS EN ISO 9046 and BS EN

ISO 10591; The subclass E sealants conform to BS EN ISO 8340, BS EN ISO
9047, BS EN ISO 10590 and BS EN ISO 11431; the subclass F&G sealants to BS
EN ISO 11600:2003+A1:2011.
The design of all sealed joints shall be in accordance with the recommendation of
the sealant and/or gasket manufacturer.
Protect all adjoining surfaces to sealants and gaskets against staining.
Joints, joint surfaces and glazing rebates shall be clean, dry, and free of any
material that may have an adverse effect on the bonding or sealing of the sealant
and gasket materials or on the proper drainage of the glazing rebates.

16-22

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Apply sealants and gaskets under the conditions and in the manner recommended
by the manufacturer. No sealant that has started to set in its container or has
exceeded its shelf life shall be used. Do not apply sealants externally during raining
period.
The sealant manufacturer shall provide written notification if the relevant substrates
in contact with sealants shall or shall not require priming. The recommendations
shall be based on tests conducted by the sealant manufacturer using samples of the
relevant substrates for the project. Unless printed instructions state to the contrary,
sealant shall not be applied when substrates are wet or when the temperature is
below 4.5C.
Fill all joints continuously and completely with sealant, forming a neat, uniform,
concave or flat bead finish flush with adjoining surfaces unless otherwise shown on
the drawings. All sealant surfaces shall be tooled smooth.
Exposed sealants shall be installed so that top surfaces of the horizontal sealant
beads shall be sloped to drain water away.
Render stops

16.41

Incorrect placement, leveling or lining-through of angles to in-situ finishings and

the like fixed by others shall be immediately reported in writing to the SO.

Sequence of
installation

16.42

Coordinate and carry out the installation of the curtain wall in sequence with related
work operations to be executed by others as necessary to achieve a weather-tight
and satisfactory visual relationship between the various components and the
structure, finishes and weather seals.

Erection

16.43

(i)

Install materials in accordance with approved drawings. Provide labour,

materials, equipment and supervision necessary for a complete installation.
Align and anchor materials to building structure. Seal joints within work
of this section and at joints with adjacent construction.

(ii)

Coordinate erection with requirements of materials hoist and personnel

lift. Defer installation at areas obstructed during construction and install
materials when obstructions are removed.

(iii)

Tolerances:
(a) Provide anchor adjustment capability for the full range of specified
tolerances for the building structure and to accommodate construction
tolerances and short term building movements (i.e. concrete column
settlement).
(b) Work of this section shall be within the following tolerances:
(i)

Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle shall not

exceed 3.0 mm per 3600 mm of length of any member, 6.0 mm
in any total run in any line.

(ii)

Deviation from theoretical position in plan or elevation,

including deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle,
shall not exceed 10.0 mm total at any location. Change in
deviation shall not exceed 3.0 mm per 3600 mm run in any
direction.

(iii)

Maximum offset from alignment between two consecutive

members placed end to end shall not exceed 1.5 mm.

16-23

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(iv)

(iv)

Maximum offset between glass framing members at corners of

glazing pocket shall not exceed 0.8mm.

Anchorage
(a) Anchor component parts securely in place by bolting. Welding may
be used if prior approval is obtained from the SO. Install slip pads
between moving parts.
(b) Provide non-corrosive separators between dissimilar materials.
(c) Remove weld slag and apply prime paint over welds. Touch up hot
dip galvanizing that is damaged by welding or other causes as Clause
15.63.
(d) Where slots or oversize holes are provided for adjustment only,
secure the connection after final adjustment. Interlocking serrations
in extruded aluminium brackets and washers shall be acceptable.
Steel weld washers with 6.0 mm minimum thickness shall be
acceptable with steel brackets. Special washers or nuts which rely on
friction and/or surface indentation of the fastened part shall not be
acceptable.
(e) Bolts shall be double nutted, have an acceptable spring washer or be
painted/coated with a lock-tight liquid to prevent bolts from
loosening.
(f)

All fixings shall be concealed when the work is completed.

(v)

Clean surfaces shall be sealed. Install backers, bond breakers, primers and
sealants in accordance with drawings, test results and manufacturer
recommendations. Tool sealants as a separate operation after application.
Immediately remove any masking.

(vi)

Install thermal insulation, vapour barrier and fire-safing insulation with

specified supports.

(vii)

Adjustment:
(a) Adjust operating windows and doors for proper fit within fixed
frame.
(b) Adjust weather-strips for continuous contact and seal in closed
position.
(c) Adjust hardware for proper operation from closed and locked
position to fully open position.

Glazing

16.44

Stone
fabrication

16.45

Refer to Section 20.

(i)

Fabrication tolerances for exposed surface of individual pieces of stone

shall be as follows:
(a)

Length and height (or width): 1.0 mm.

(b)

Depth of a saw cut: 2.0 mm.

(c)

Depth of a drilled hole: 3.0 mm.

16-24

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(ii)

(d)

Deviation from flat plane in 1200 mm, any direction: 2.0 mm.

(e)

Deviation from square: 2.0 mm difference in diagonals.

(f)

Deviation from nominal thickness: 2.0 mm.

(g)

Position of kerf cut relative to outdoor face: 1.0 mm.

Fabrication tolerances for exposed surface of one stone system assembly

with stone anchored to a support system shall be as follows:
(a)

Sealant joint width between pieces of stone: 25% of nominal.

(Joints which absorb thermal and building movements shall
require stricter tolerance.)

(b)

Overall length and height (or width), stone edge to stone edge:
3.0mm.

(c)

Offset (in/out) between adjacent stone edges: 1.5 mm maximum.

(d)

Deviation from flat plane for overall length: 5.0 mm.

(e)

Deviation from flat plane for overall height (or width): 3.0 mm.

(f)

Difference in overall diagonals measured to outside corners of

stone: 5.0 mm maximum.

(g)

Deviation from straight line along entire length of vertical edge:

2.5mm maximum.

(h)

Deviation from straight line along entire length of horizontal

edge: 2.5 mm maximum.

(i)

Offset (in plane) between adjacent granite corners: 3.0 mm

maximum (distance between parallel horizontal or vertical lines
through corners).

(j)

Window opening dimension: 6.0 mm.

(k)

Where more than one tolerance applies, the stricter tolerance shall
govern.

DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

Structural
requirements

16.46

(i)

Pressures and loads used for design shall be as calculated in accordance

with the requirements of Code of Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong
or as indicated by the results of a boundary layer wind tunnel test. A
boundary layer wind tunnel test shall be carried out if it is specified.

(ii)

Wind pressures act perpendicular to flat surfaces, regardless of surface

orientation. Wind pressures act perpendicular to tangents of curved
surfaces. At corners and other changes in plane, both surfaces shall be
assumed to experience their inward design pressures simultaneously, and
their outward design pressures simultaneously. Design for simultaneous
occurrence of inward design pressure on one surface, and outward design
pressure on the adjoining surface, is not required.

16-25

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Criteria for
framing members
and anchors at
glass and stone

16.47

(iii)

Unless agreed to the contrary, minimum design pressure loads shall be:
outward (negative) wind pressure 2.82kPa.
inward (positive) wind pressure 2.01kPa.

(iv)

When protective barrier is not provided separately, the use of curtain wall
glazing as protective barrier shall comply with all the structural
requirements as specified in APP-110. Horizontal imposed loads specified
in Table 3 of Regulation 17(3) of the Building (Construction) Regulations
shall also be catered for in the design.

Performance criteria at design pressures and loads for glass, metal panels, stone and
their support system shall be as follows:
(i)

Deflection Limits and Performance Requirements at Pressures and Loads

are to be as stated below unless otherwise required by APP-37:
(a)

Framing member residual deflection after pressure or load is

removed shall not exceed 1/1000 times distance between supports
or 2/1000 times cantilever length.

(b)

At anchors, framing member deflection relative to building

structure shall not exceed 3.0mm during pressure application and
1.5mm after pressure load is removed.

(c)

Upon reversal of pressure or load direction, relative movement

between two components that are fastened or clamped together
shall not exceed 3.0 mm.

(d)

Upon reversal of pressure or load direction, relative movement

between the mullion and the anchor shall not exceed 3.0 mm.

(e)

There shall be no disengagement, failure or gross permanent

distortion of any component, including glass and gaskets.

(ii)

At 50 percent of design pressures, glass center deflection relative to glass

edges shall not exceed 25.0 mm. Glass deflection at 1.5 times design
pressures shall be limited to prevent glass disengagement from frame.

(iii)

At 100 percent of design pressures and loads:

(a)

Perpendicular to the plane of the wall, net deflection of framing

members shall not exceed 1/180 times distance between supports
or 20 mm, whichever is the lesser; or 1/90 times cantilever length
or 10 mm, whichever is the lesser.

(b)

Net deflection perpendicular to enclosure surface for framing

members supporting stone shall not exceed: 1/360 times distance
between supports, not to exceed 13.0 mm; 1/180 times cantilever
length, not to exceed 6.0 mm; lesser values which may be
required to limit stress in stone.

(c)

Net in-plane deflection of framing members shall not exceed

3.0mm due to dead load only or 3.0 mm change in opening size
at any point. In-plane deflection between supports is not to
exceed 1/360 times the distance between supports or 10.0mm
whichever is the lesser.

16-26

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(iv)

(d)

Net deflection parallel and perpendicular to enclosure surface for

framing members at perimeter sealant joints shall not exceed the
least value of the smallest of: values specified above or 50% of
joint width or a value corresponding to the movement capability
of the sealant.

(e)

Maximum deflection of metal panels and metal faced panels

shall not exceed 0.01 times the shorter dimension (width or
height) of the panel. This deflection limit also applies to any
stiffeners (but not the perimeter framing members) which are
attached to panels.

Design Rules for Framing Members at Design Pressures and Loads:

(a)

Stresses shall not exceed the allowable values established by the

specifications listed under Clause 16.05. An increase in
allowable stress is not permitted for: metal plates or legs up to
(12.0 mm) thick bent about the weak axis; fasteners in drilled
holes in concrete and concrete masonry units; fillet welds;
partial penetration groove welds; stresses resulting from dead
loads.

(b)

Glass, sealants and interior finishes shall not be assumed to

contribute to framing member strength, stiffness or lateral
stability.

(c)

Compression flanges of flexural members may be assumed to

receive effective lateral bracing only from
(i) anchors to the building structure and
(ii) horizontal glazing rails or interior trim which are in actual
contact with the compression flange.
Points of contra-flexure shall not be regarded as lateral braces or
as the end points of an unbraced length; unbraced length shall be
the actual distance between effective lateral braces as defined
above.

Criteria for
fasteners

16.48

(d)

Where a framing member reaction is resisted by a continuous

element, the maximum assumed effective length of the resisting
element shall be four times the bearing length, but not more than
300 mm.

(e)

Splice joints which permit thermal and/or other movements by

slippage within the joint shall be assumed to have zero moment
capacity.

(f)

Where a framing member runs continuously past a deflection

support, combined deflection of member and support shall not
exceed specified limits.

Performance criteria for fasteners at design pressures and loads shall be as follows:
(i)

General requirements
(a)

Actual tension shall be taken as the sum of direct tension plus

tension due to prying.

16-27

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(ii)

(iii)

(iv)

(b)

The penetrations of a shim stack with total thickness "t" by a

fastener with nominal diameter "d" shall require reductions in
allowable tension force and allowable shear force. The minimum
reduction shall be zero percent for t=d, varying linearly to 100
percent for t=2d. Such reduction shall be in addition to any other
reductions which may be applicable. An acceptable alternative
method is to assume that the shims provide no resistance to
fastener bending, compute fastener bending stress with cross
sectional properties based on root diameter, add bending stress to
tension stress, and evaluate tension/shear interaction.

(c)

Unless otherwise specified, combined tension and shear shall be

evaluated according to an interaction formula in which each term
equals the square of the actual force divided by the square of the
allowable force. The sum of the terms shall not exceed 1.0.

(d)

Unless otherwise specified herein or required by code, allowable

values for stresses produced by wind loading may be increased by
one fourth, except for anchorages, but not in combination with
any reduction of combined loads.

Requirements for carbon steel machine bolts and sheet metal screws:
(a)

For all fasteners less than 12 mm compute actual tensile stress

and actual shear stress based on the tensile stress area. Tensile
stress shall not exceed 0.44 times ultimate tensile stress. Shear
stress shall not exceed 0.22 times ultimate tensile stress.

(b)

For nominal diameter equal to or greater than 12 mm, evaluate

tension, shear and combined stress according to AISC Steel
Construction Manual.

Requirements for 300 series stainless machine bolts and sheet metal
screws:
(a)

For nominal diameter equal to or greater than 6mm, the computed

tensile stress based on the tensile stress area shall not exceed
0.541 times tensile yield stress. Shear stress based on gross area
shall not exceed 20 percent of the ultimate tensile stress where
threads are not included in the shear plane, and 14 percent of the
ultimate tensile stress where threads are included in the shear
plane.

(b)

For nominal diameter less than 6.0 mm tensile stress based on the
tensile stress area shall not exceed 0.541 times tensile yield stress.
Shear stress based on tensile stress area shall not exceed 20
percent of the ultimate tensile stress.

(c)

Unless manufacturer's written certification of greater strength is

submitted with design calculations, provide fasteners with
minimum yield stress of 207 MPa and minimum ultimate tensile
stress of 518 MPa.

Requirements for fasteners in drilled holes in concrete and concrete block:

(a)

Tension shall not exceed 25 percent of ultimate tensile strength.

Shear shall not exceed 25 percent of ultimate shear strength.
Combined load shall be evaluated by an interaction formula, the

16-28

Section 16 Curtain Walls

terms of which shall be actual load divided by allowable load; the

sum of the terms shall not exceed 1.0. Allowable loads shall not
be increased by one fourth or any other factor. Comply with
manufacturer design rules if more stringent than specified herein.
Apply reductions for spacing and edge distance.
(b)

(v)

Self drilling, self threading fasteners shall not be acceptable.

Screws in plugs and powder actuated fasteners shall not be
acceptable.

For self-drilling steel fasteners in aluminium and steel:

Screws that could suffer from hydrogen embrittlement are not permitted
unless effective measures have been taken to eliminate the possibility of
hydrogen embrittlement occurring. Tension and shear shall not exceed 50
percent of their respective ultimate strengths.

Criteria for cyclic

test

16.49

Performance criteria for cyclic test shall be as specified in APP-37.

Criteria for
structural silicone

16.50

Performance requirements for structural silicone and related structural components

shall be as follows:

Criteria for
glass

16.51

(i)

Wind pressure shall be supported in tension or shear, but not tension and
shear simultaneously.

(ii)

Allowable tension stress or shear stress (but not combined tension and
shear stress) shall not exceed 138 kPa at design pressures and loads. The
allowable stress is subject to specified material tests, which may result in a
value of less than 138 kPa.

(iii)

The allowable stress shall not be increased by 1/4 or any other factor for
wind load.

(iv)

Structural silicone shall not be used to support dead weight of glass,

panels or any cladding material.

(v)

Structural silicone shall demonstrate by test an ultimate stress of at least

three times the stress caused by design conditions. The force per unit
length corresponding to ultimate silicone stress (three times design) shall
be transmitted without failure by metal finish (including paint films), glass
coatings, insulating glass edge, laminated glass edge and all other
components in the line of stress.

(vi)

Where a test mock-up is subjected to 1.5 times design pressures and loads,
the structural silicone and related structural components shall be required
to withstand such loading without failure.

(vii)

On the building, structural silicone shall not experience adhesive or

cohesive failure.

(viii)

Structural silicone shall not be applied to edges of insulating glass units,

or to edges of laminated glass units.

Refer to Section 20 Clause 20.01.

16-29

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Criteria for
stone

16.52

(i)

It should be noted that thermal and age durability testing is required for all
stone other than granite. Flexural strength of stone shall be determined by
test, and the smallest average value shall be computed, as required in the
Clauses 16.73 to 16.78. In the absence of any other calculation
methodology, the smallest average value shall be reduced by the design
factor to obtain an allowable stress at design pressures. The allowable
stress shall not be increased by 1/4 or any other factor. In the absence of
specified test data, the assumed allowable stress for preliminary design
shall not exceed 1.7 MPa for granite, 1.1 MPa for marble and travertine,
0.92 MPa for limestone. Final design shall be based on specified test
results, not assumed values.

(ii)

Ultimate strength of stone at its anchors shall be determined by test, and

the average value for each group shall be computed, as required in the
Clauses 16.73 to 16.78. The average values shall be reduced by design
factors to obtain allowable loads or stresses at design pressures. The
allowable loads or stresses shall not be increased by 25% for stresses
attributable to windloading or any other factor.

(iii)

Unless an alternate acceptable calculation methodology, such as Method 1

for aged stone or Method 2 for non-aged stone as stated by the CWCT, is
to be adopted, the minimum ratio of flexural strength to actual bending
stress in stone is the design factor and is related to the spread of data
within each subgroup of specimens used to determine flexural strength.
Within each subgroup an average value is computed and the high and low
values are expressed as a percentage of the average. The design factor
shall be computed for the subgroups.

(iv)

(a)

If within all subgroups, the high and low values deviate 10 percent
or less from the average, the design factor is 3.0 for granite, 4.0 for
marble and travertine, and 5.0 for limestone.

(b)

If within one or more subgroups, the high and/or low value deviates
more than 10 percent but not more than 20 percent from the
average, the design factor is 4.0 for granite, 5.0 for marble and
travertine, and 6.0 for limestone.

(c)

If within one or more subgroups the high and/or low value deviates
more than 20 percent from the average, the design factor is 6.0 for
granite, 7.0 for marble and travertine, and 8.0 for limestone.

Unless an alternate acceptable calculation methodology, such as Method 1

for aged stone or Method 2 for non-aged stone as stated by the CWCT, is
used the following calculation method is to be adopted. The minimum
ratio of stone ultimate strength at its anchors to actual load or stress is the
design factor and is related to the spread of data within each group of
anchor test samples. Within each group, an average value is computed
and the high and low values are expressed as a percentage of the average.
(a)

If within a group, the high and low values deviate 10 percent or less
from the average, the design factor is 4.5 for granite, 6.0 for marble
and travertine, and 7.5 for limestone.

(b)

If within a group, the high and/or low value deviates more than 10
percent but not more than 20 percent from the average, the design
factor is 6.0 for granite, 7.5 for marble and travertine and 9.0 for
limestone.

16-30

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(c)

If within a group, the high and/or low value deviates more than 20
percent from the average, the design factor is 8.0 for granite, 10.0
for marble and travertine, and 12.0 for limestone.

(v)

Each piece of stone shall have its own dead weight anchors. Stacking of
multiple pieces over a shared dead weight anchor shall not be permitted.
Wind load anchors and dead load anchors which rely solely on adhesive
bond shall not be permitted.

(vi)

Calculation of actual stone stress shall be based upon minimum stone

thickness (nominal thickness minus thickness tolerance).

(vii)

Stone shall be supported by continuous stainless steel or anodized

aluminium kerf clips engaging continuous sawn grooves at two opposite
edges. The clip shall nominally overlap the stone on both sides of the
groove by at least 13.0 mm. The theoretical overlap based on the worst
combination of specified building and wall movements shall not be less
than 10.0 mm. Actual overlap as measured in the field shall not be less
than 10.0 mm or a greater dimension if required by design criteria. Clip
and stone design shall be based on transfer of force at the midpoint of the
overlap dimension.
(viii) Stone shall not be designed to act as part of a composite flexural
member.

Criteria for
track and tieback

16.53

Continuous scaffold track and discrete tiebacks for cable restraint shall be capable
of withstanding an ultimate concentrated force of 9.6 kN acting in any direction, at
any point on the track, without failure or gross permanent distortion of the track,
tieback or any other component of the exterior wall.
The Contractor can propose alternative designs for the scaffold restraint system for
the SO's approval. Allowable working stress for tracks, tiebacks and wall
components shall not be exceeded for a force of 2.4 kN acting in any direction.
Tiebacks shall conform to OSHA Instruction STD 1-3.3 as amended November12,
1985.

Criteria for
weather seals

16.54

Sealants used as weather seals shall not experience adhesive or cohesive failure.
Sealants shall withstand movements up to the limits prescribed by the
manufacturer. Exposed sealant surface shall not crack or bubble. Sealants and
primers shall not stain adjacent materials. Sealants shall be used only if the
manufacturers' adhesion, compatibility and stain tests yield favorable results.
Sealants shall not be adhered to, or placed against, the edge of a laminated glass
unit inter-layer.

Floor sag and

other
movements

16.55

Provide movable joints to accommodate the full range of manufacturing tolerance,

field tolerance, thermal movement, lateral movement, floor sag, and beam sag and
column settlement. Joints shall accommodate the worst possible combination of
effects so as to prevent internal stress, failure, deterioration or failure of weather
seals. In no case shall the computed and as-built glass bite relative to metal frame
be less than 10.0 mm. In no case shall the computed and as-built glass edge
clearance to nearest metal be less than 6.0 mm. The design differential movements
shall be as specified. Expansion joints in ribbon window heads and sills shall not
be located such that thermal movement exerts shear stress on structural silicone.
Unless other specified, the minimum design differential movements shall be:(i)

Lateral movement is 1/500 per increment of height.

16-31

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(ii)

Vertical shortening of column/wall under load is 2 mm per storey.

(iii)

Vertical deflection of supporting beam/slab is L/350 or 20 mm whichever is

the lesser. (Where L is the span, or length in the case of a cantilever.)

(iv)

Thermal movements are movements arising from temperature variations

stipulated in GS 16.56.

The Contractor shall satisfy himself that the above design differential movements
provide sufficient factor of safety in his design. Should he consider that these
design differential movements do not provide an adequate factor of safety in his
design, he shall submit alternative design differential movements with adequate
justification for the approval of the SO.
Criteria for
thermal
movement

16.56

Thermal component of joint movement shall be based upon a minimum material

temperature increase of 55C and decrease of 55C relative to nominal condition.
Design for these assumed temperature changes regardless of surface areas exposed
to exterior and interior. Assume the entire cross section has uniform temperature.
For thermal design other than joint movement, the design winter surface
temperature shall be 0C. The design summer surface temperature shall be at least
71C. The internal ambient temperature shall range from 15C to 25C. All
components including adhesives and sealants shall be capable of withstanding
without failure design winter temperature to design summer temperature with
simultaneous specified loads.

Water leakage
control

16.57

Provide internal gutters and weep system to collect and drain water leakage and
condensation to the exterior. Stick built curtain walls and punched windows shall
have an isolated gutter cavity at each glass perimeter, so that any leakage is
confined to and wept from the opening of leakage origin. Unitized curtain walls
shall have continuous spliced gutters at the horizontal stack joints, with sealed end
caps at termination conditions. Sloped walls shall convey leakage to the lowest
point and drain it to the exterior. Horizontal ribbon windows shall have a
continuous gutter and weep holes at the glass sill, and a continuous gutter at the
glass head which either drains directly to the exterior or directs any leakage from
the spandrel above it to the glass sill via internal cavities. Coordinate with other
sections to achieve interface and/or overlap of gutter and weep systems.

Condensation
gutters

16.58

Sloped and horizontal walls shall have continuous condensation gutters of the same
material (Aluminium/Stainless steel) at all framing members. Condensation shall
be wept to the exterior.

Glass
replacement

16.59

Glazing details shall permit glass replacement after initial construction, shall permit
reuse of original gaskets, shall permit replacement of glass with the same nominal
size as original glass, and shall not require cutting of framing members or removal
of interior finishes. Vision glass in conventional frames shall be replaceable from
the interior. Spandrel glass shall be replaceable from the exterior. Silicone
supported vision glass shall be replaceable from the exterior and/or interior.

Gasket
disengagement
not permitted

16.60

Gaskets and weather-strips shall not disengage for pressures up to 1.5 times design
pressures, for specified movements, or for specified thermal changes.

Criteria for
interior trim

16.61

Interior window sill trim shall not deflect more than 3.2 mm when subjected to a
concentrated force of 111 N at any point. Residual deflection after removal of force
shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

16-32

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Criteria for
snap-on
components

16.62

Snap engaged trim shall not disengage when subjected to a concentrated force of 50
N at any point or during uniform pressure structural tests at pressures less than or
equal to 1.5 times design pressures. Exterior snap engaged trim shall provide
secondary means of securement. Snap engaged trim shall be secured against
migration. Snap engaged components shall not serve any primary structural
function, such as retention of glass or panels. Snap engaged plastic components
shall not be permitted, except as non-structural thermal improvement for interior
trim. Joints in continuous snap covers and other continuous trim shall have splice
sleeves of the same material and finish as the cover or trim. Mechanically fasten
splice sleeves to trim.

Criteria for
painted finishes

16.63

Performance requirements for painted finishes on aluminium shall be as follows:

(i)

As a minimum, comply with the relevant parts of BS 4842, BS 6496 and the
AAMA 2604 or AAMA 2605 standard.

(ii)

Paint film shall not crack or peel during the specified special warranty
period.

Additional
requirements in
testing

16.64

Additional performance requirements are contained in Clauses 16.73 to 16.78.

Requirements
applicable to
mock-up,
samples and
building

16.65

In general, performance requirements specified for test mock-ups and specimens

also apply to the actual building, and vice versa. Variations in criteria over the
surface of the building, such as wind pressure, are taken into account in testing of
mock-ups and samples. Where certain performance is required for specific test
conditions of mock-ups and samples, that same performance is also required of the
actual building, for natural conditions equivalent to or less severe than the test
conditions.

Criteria for
operable
window

16.66

Criteria for operable windows shall be as follows:

Closure panels
and sills

16.67

(i)

Operable windows shall to the GS. In addition, and as a minimum, operable

windows shall also conform to BS 4873 and BS 6375.

(ii)

Prior to any other mock-up tests, operable windows shall be unlocked, fully
opened, closed and locked for a minimum of 50 cycles. If any repairs or
adjustments are performed after cycling, the minimum 50 cycles shall be
repeated. Mock-up specimens shall be tested for water leakage.

(iii)

As part of any mock-up tests, provide separate window vents in fixed frames
to the laboratory for tests per BS 6375-2.

(iv)

Operable windows shall be complete with ironmongery and accessories and

only operable by special keys.

(v)

Hinges and fastening mechanisms shall withstand positive and negative

pressures due to specified wind conditions when the windows are in both
open and closed positions.

Ceiling and bottom/floor closure panels, strips or sills shall comprise aluminium
minimum 3.0 mm thick or stainless steel minimum 1.2 mm thick. The surface of
the aluminium shall match the colour of the framing. Ceiling closure strips shall be
capable of supporting Venetian blinds of any type and weight and if indicated on
the Drawings shall be recessed for the same.

16-33

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Criteria for
honeycomb
panels and
composite panels

Criteria for
skylights

16.68

16.69

Performance requirements for aluminium honeycomb and composite panels shall be

as follows:
(i)

Panels are included in the overall performance requirements for the curtain
wall.

(ii)

At design pressures, center deflection of panels shall not exceed 0.01 times
the smaller panel dimension.

(iii)

Panel edges shall not compress or crush due to clamping pressures exerted
by the frame and gaskets.

(iv)

Face sheets and back sheets shall not totally or partially delaminate from
cores for specified temperature variation and building movement, in
combination with wind pressures up to 1.5 times design pressures.
Delamination is unacceptable regardless of the measured deviation from
flatness which results.

(v)

Panels in place shall not warp or bow such that deviation from flatness
exceeds 3.0 mm along any straight line which extends from a panel edge to
any other edge. Where the edge is concealed, the nearest exposed point to
the edge shall be used.

(vi)

Structural calculation submittal shall include computations for deflection,

face stress, core shear stress, face dimpling and face wrinkling. At design
pressures, the ratios of face yield stress, core shear strength, critical
dimpling stress and critical wrinkling stress to actual respective stresses
shall be at least 2.0. Allowable stress shall not be increased by 1/4 or any
other factor for wind loading.

(vii)

Structural calculation submittal shall include data for the honeycomb core
with a certification from the core manufacturer, or a test report from an
independent laboratory for tests conducted within 30 days of submittal
date. Data shall include stabilized compressive strength, stabilized
compressive elastic modulus, crush strength, shear strength and elastic
modulus in "L" and "W" directions.

(viii)

Structural calculation submittal shall include a test report from an

independent laboratory for tests conducted within 30 days of submittal for
the adhesive used to bond face and back sheets to core. Tests shall be
conducted on samples using the production facings, core and adhesive.
Data shall include tensile and shear strength of bond line at -18, 4, 27, 49,
71C. Each strength value shall correspond to a constant load (not constant
deformation) maintained for a minimum of 10 seconds. Actual stresses
shall be computed at the adhesive plane. The ratio of strength (based on
the lowest test value, not the average) to actual stress shall be a minimum
of 2.0. Combined stress shall be evaluated by a linear interaction formula.
The allowable stress shall not be increased by one fourth or any other
value. The applied load shall not be reduced by any factor.

Criteria for skylights shall be as follows:

(i)

Provide continuous condensation gutters, with drainage to the exterior, at

all glass perimeters. Condensation gutter intersections shall have sealed
overlaps.

(ii)

Provide continuous bearing of exterior glass retainers on the rafters and

cross bars.

16-34

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(iii)

Provide continuous recessed pockets for any wet seals at glass perimeters.

(iv)

Any structural silicone shall adhere to the indoor glass surface, not to the
glass edge.

(v)

Sloping skylights shall be designed to prevent water from collecting on top

of the exterior surfaces of the horizontal framing members.

Fire resistance

16.70

The top and bottom gaps between the structural floor slabs and related beams and
the panels of the curtain wall shall be completely sealed up with fire resistant
material to provide a 2 hour resistant period against fire and smoke. Anchorages
between the curtain wall and the structure shall be similarly protected with fire
proof material to give a total resistant period of 2 hours. The fire resistant material
in the gaps between the curtain wall and the structural floor and related beams shall
be rigidly fixed to the structure continuously such that it shall remain in position
when subjected to the prolonged action of heat and fire. Asbestos products shall not
be used. Test, if specified, to the relevant clauses of BS 476: to determine the
resistant period for stability and integrity.

Lightning
protection

16.71

The design shall provide an efficient continuous electrical conductivity both with
negligible resistance vertically and horizontally along the entire surface of the metal
framework of the curtain wall in compliance with the IEC 62305. Carry out
continuity tests by a qualified electrical engineer and submit test records to the SO
for approval. If deemed necessary by the SO incorporate additional conductors
wiring connections etc. in the curtain wall.
The electrical earthing and lightning protection system for the entire building will
be installed by others and will bond the highest point of the curtain wall framework
to air terminations and the lowest point of the curtain wall framework to earth.
Provide the necessary connection terminals to permit such bonding.

Mock-ups
erection and
tests

16.72

Fabricate and erect within 60 days of the agreement by the SO of shop drawings,
the following mock-up samples for the SO's approval prior to fabrication of the
bulk:
(i)

Furnish labour and materials to build and test mock-ups as shown on

drawings. Mock-ups shall accurately represent job conditions including
joints, sealants, glass, glazing, stone panels, anchors and finishes. Install
sufficient
fire-safing insulation to
demonstrate
details
of
installation. Install sufficient thermal insulation to demonstrate details of
installation. Delay installation of fire-safing and thermal insulation until
completion of air, water and structural tests.

(ii)

Each mock-up shall be glazed with one consistent set of gaskets for each
similar glazing condition. The use of multiple gasket profiles and/or
thicknesses at the Contractor's discretion shall not be permitted.

(iii)

Prior to tests, and in the presence of authorised parties, remove and

reglaze selected glass units, using the details and procedures intended for
glass replacement on the actual building. Reglazed units shall satisfy test
criteria.

(iv)

Provide at least one extra light of glass for each type and size on mockups. Glass which breaks during testing shall be replaced with new glass
and the tests continued. Repeated glass breakage (twice at the same
location) shall constitute failure.

16-35

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(v)

Construct mock-ups in strict accordance with approved mock-up shop

drawings. Deviations from or additions to details shown on Drawings
shall be subject to approval.

(vi)

Construct mock-up with the exterior side facing outward.

(vii)

The testing laboratory shall be responsible for conducting and reporting

the tests, and shall state in the report whether or not the test specimen is as
specified, and shall specifically note deviations therefrom.

(viii)

If failures occur, revise and retest mock-ups until satisfactory test results
are achieved. Modifications shall be realistic in terms of job conditions,
shall maintain standards of quality and durability, and shall be subject to
approval.

(ix)

Mock-up testing shall be done at an independent laboratory to be

approved by the SO. If dynamic water infiltration test is specified,
laboratory shall have capability to conduct dynamic testing as specified.
Submit detailed information on laboratory facilities and test equipment for
approval.

(x)

Mock-ups shall be subject to observation by the SO throughout their

construction and testing. Provide minimum two week notice before
beginning construction of mock-ups. Provide materials and personnel for
prompt continuous construction of mock-ups. The Contractor shall
coordinate chamber availability, shipping schedules and mock-up
construction schedules directly with the laboratory.

(xi)

The testing laboratory shall not do any of the following:

(a) Act as consultant to the Contractor for the Works.
(b) Modify performance requirements.
(c) Modify mock-up configuration.
(d) Dismantle mock-ups until notified that no further testing is required.

(xii)

Undocumented tests shall not be permitted. All test results and all
remedial work shall be documented in the laboratory report.

(xiii)

Mock-up configuration is shown on Drawings. The mock-up design

pressures and maximum test pressures shall be as specified.

TESTING
Laboratory tests
on full scale mockups

16.73

(i)

Testing sequence shall be:

(a) Unlock, fully open, close and lock all operating windows for a
minimum of 50 cycles. If any repairs are performed after cycling, the
minimum 50 cycles shall be repeated after repairs.
(b) Preload at 50 percent of inward design pressure for 10 seconds.
(c) Air infiltration and exfiltration.
(d) Water infiltration under static pressure.

16-36

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(e) Water infiltration under dynamic pressure if so specified.

(f) Structural test at 50 percent and 100 percent of inward and outward
design pressures. Pressure shall be held for 10 seconds for each
pressure load. Unless otherwise required, test 50% and 100% inward
loads before 50% and 100% outward loads.
(g) Repeat test for water infiltration under static pressure.
(h) Racking test for live load and interstorey drift.
(i) Water infiltration under static pressure.
(j) APP-37, structural mock-up cyclic test.
(k) Structural test at 75 and 150 percent of inward design pressure.
Pressure shall be held for 10 seconds.
(l) Structural test at 75 and 150 percent of outward design pressure.
Pressure shall be held for 10 seconds.
(m) Concentrated load test of track/tieback.
(n) Concentrated load tests of operating window as per BS 6375-2.
(ii)

Air leakage testing shall conform to ASTM E283 - 04, and mock-ups
modified to include measurement of exfiltration in addition to infiltration.
Differential static test pressure shall be 300 Pa. If overall figure is
significantly below the allowable leakage for the specimen, the chamber
leakage does not require to be determined. If the overall figure is within
10% of the allowable leakage for the specimen, the leakage of the
chamber must be accurately determined, not estimated. The overall air
infiltration and exfiltration of the specimen wall area shall not exceed 1.6
m3/hr/m2 of projected exterior surface, inclusive of any operating window
areas. Air infiltration and exfiltration of operating windows shall not
exceed 2.0 m3/hr/m of crack length but the figure is to be included in
projected wall area for the overall leakage figure and not treated as an
additional figure. Fixed panels of sliding windows shall be included in
fixed wall area, and shall not be included in operator crack perimeter.

(iii)

The occurrence of condensation during water infiltration tests is

acceptable. The accumulation of water in sliding window sill tracks is
acceptable; overflow, percolation or leakage of water from sill tracks is
not acceptable. Other water leakage is acceptable only if all of the
following conditions are satisfied:
(a) The water is contained and drained to the exterior;
(b) There is no wetting of a surface that would be visible to building
occupants;
(c) There would be no staining or other damage to any part of the
completed building or its furnishings.
This definition of water leakage shall govern over other definitions which
may appear in referenced documents.

16-37

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(iv)

Static water infiltration test shall conform to ASTM E331-00(2009).

Differential test pressure shall be 20% of the maximum inward design
wind load but not less than 0.77kPa. There shall be no unacceptable water
leakage as defined herein. The sources of all water leakage during testing
shall be identified. The test shall be performed with water flow rate of 3.4
litres/min/m2, for 15 minutes. No presoaking of the wall is required. The
differential pressure should be applied promptly after the water flow rate
is deemed as being acceptable

(v)

Dynamic water infiltration test shall conform to AAMA 501.1-05 except

as otherwise specified herein. Differential test pressure shall be
equivalent to 20% of the maximum inward design wind load but not less
than 0.77 kPa. If necessary supplement the dynamic pressure with static
pressure. There shall be no unacceptable water leakage as defined herein.
The sources of all water leakage during testing shall be identified. The
test shall be performed with a water flow rate of 3.4 litres/min/m2, for 15
minutes. If this test is performed immediately after a static water test, a
period of 15 minutes must be allowed to elapse for the specimen to drain
prior to commencement of the test. Drainage must occur due to gravity
only; no forced pressurization of the specimen is permitted.

(vi)

Structural tests shall conform to ASTM E330-02(2010). Deflection

gauges or transducers shall be set to zero prior to each application of
pressure at 50, 75, 100 and 150 percent of design pressures. Deflection
readings shall be recorded after each application of pressure.
Deflection measurements shall not be required for the initial pre-load but
are required for reversal of loadings during the structural load testing to
enable any movement at the anchors to be determined. Specified
deflection and set limitations are intended to apply to one application of
pressure. Limits do not apply to the cumulative effects of two or more
loadings. The results of these test loads shall comply with Clauses 16.47,
16.60, and 20.01.

(vii)

Glass provided for a test mock-up shall be identical (including strength) to

the glass provided for the corresponding zone on the actual building.
Mock-up glass which breaks shall be replaced with the same type glass,
and the tests continued. Repeated glass breakage, twice in the same
location, shall constitute failure.

(viii)

Perform concentrated load test on track/tieback as follows:

(a) Apply 3.6 kN, (2.4 kN x 1.5 SF), side load in both directions for at
least 10 seconds.
(b) Apply 3.6 kN, (2.4 kN x 1.5 SF), outward for at least 10 seconds.
(c) There shall be no failure or gross permanent distortion of the track or
any part of the exterior wall including tie back fasteners.

(ix)

Racking test:
(a) The mock-up test chamber shall be constructed so that the simulated
floor structure at approximate mid-height of the mock-up is moveable
in a horizontal sense parallel to the glass plane(s).
(b) The magnitude of movement, shall be 1/500 storey height or 10 mm
per storey whichever is the greater, in each direction, plus and minus
from nominal. The magnitude of racking for vertical movement shall

16-38

Section 16 Curtain Walls

be equal to the anticipated live floor movement plus the anticipated

long term creep and column shortening.
(c) Displace moveable structure first in one direction, then in the other
direction. Repeat for a total of at least 20 two-stroke cycles.
(d) There shall be no failure or gross permanent distortion of anchors,
frames, glass or panels; structural silicone shall not experience
adhesive and/or cohesive failure; glazing gaskets may not disengage;
weather seals may not fail. At the discretion of the test engineer, an
additional water test may be applied between the horizontal racking
and vertical racking to enable the cause of any potential failure to be
accurately determined.
Field tests on
actual buildings

16.74

(i)

Method for field check for water leakage, but not interpretation of results,
shall conform to AAMA 501.2-09, except as modified herein. Operable
windows shall be tested in the same manner as fixed wall areas. There
shall be no unacceptable water leakage as defined herein. Provide
powered scaffold, hose, water supply and manpower to perform at least
two successful tests, plus any unsuccessful tests on each wall system.
Water testing shall be conducted early in the construction schedule, prior
to 30% of completion of the relevant wall type. Construction sequence
shall include provisions for timely completion of test areas. Remedial
measures shall maintain standards of quality and durability and shall be
subject to approval.

(ii)

Periodically test sealants in place for adhesion, using methods

recommended by sealant manufacturer. Promptly replace any sealant
which does not adhere or fails to cure.

(iii)

For structural silicone perform a peel test, using methods recommended

by the sealant manufacturer, on at least 10 percent of the glass openings.
An acceptable alternative for shop applied structural silicone is to perform
a uniform pressure test at outward design pressure for at least 10 percent
of the glass openings. Maintain records describing type of test, date of
test, person conducting test, results and identification marking of unit
tested. Mark each unit so that structural silicone batch numbers and date
of application can be traced. Submit records upon request.

Laboratory tests
of structural
silicone
assembly

16.75

(iv)

Verify during construction that water leakage and condensation are

effectively collected and drained to the exterior. Test internal gutters by
temporarily plugging weep holes and filling with water. After a minimum
of fifteen minutes, inspect for water leakage. Correct deficiencies and retest until successful tests are achieved. Remove weep hole plugs
immediately after testing.

(v)

Structural adequacy of anchorages; test to twice the loading of Clause

16.46 without failure. Submit proposals for the carrying out of such tests
for the SO's approval. The number of tests shall be as specified.

(i)

Provide minimum two week advance notice to SO before assembly of

specimens and testing of specimens.

(ii)

Assemble specimens using: aluminium members with proposed

production finish; proposed structural silicone (with proposed mix ratio if
more than one component); proposed silicone joint size; proposed silicon

16-39

Section 16 Curtain Walls

backer; proposed glass (including insulating glass edge construction and

reflective coating) or proposed panel. Fully cure specimens and then
immerse in water for 7days. Samples are to conform to the requirements
of the silicone manufacturer.
(iii)

A minimum of 3 specimens each shall be tested by tensile loading. The

force per unit length shall correspond to three times the design pressure
which is transferred through all elements in the sandwich. Apply the load
in one minute or less (but without impact) and maintain the load for at
least one minute.
These and any other tests required to ensure the suitability of the sealant
are to be carried out by the sealant manufacturer and all test results
confirmed by the manufacturer and submitted to the SO in writing.

Manufacturer's
tests of sealants

Laboratory tests
of stone

16.76

16.77

(iv)

All specimens tested shall withstand the specified loading with no failure
of any element. Failure of any element(s) on one or more specimens
requires a new set of revised specimens to be tested.

(i)

Provide to sealant manufacturers samples of all substrates which are in

contact with sealant, regardless of whether adhesion must be achieved.

(ii)

For substrates which shall support adhesion, submit for record only
sealant manufacturers' reports of adhesion tests. An acceptable test
method is defined by ASTMC794-10. Other test methods may be
submitted for approval prior to the test being performed.

(iii)

For substrates to which sealant may not adhere, but which are in contact
with sealant, submit for record only sealant manufacturers, reports of
compatibility tests. An acceptable test method is to place the substrate on
uncoated glass, and apply sealant to the glass against the substrate. If, the
intended sealant colour is dark, the dark colour and a light colour of the
same product shall be used for the test. Subject specimen to continuous
exposure of 2000 microwatts per square centimeter minimum ultraviolet
radiation for a minimum of 21 days. Specimens showing discolouration
of the sealant but no adhesion loss after 21 days shall be subjected to an
additional 120 days minimum of the same exposure. Discoloured
specimens shall be rated as compatible only if there is no adhesion loss
after the initial and extended exposure. Extensive discolouration of the
intended sealant colour, even without adhesion loss, shall be rated as
incompatibility. Other test methods may be submitted for approval prior
to the tests being performed.

(i)

Submit for record only reports by an independent testing laboratory for

tests conducted within 30 days of submittal date. Submit written
certifications that test specimens are representative of production material
for this project. Provide a minimum 2 week advance notice to SO before
conducting stone tests. Provide access to testing laboratory during tests.
Unless an alternative acceptable method of determining the allowable
design strength of the stone is used, such as Method 1 for aged stone or
Method 2 for non-aged stone, as stated by the CWCT, the following
methodology must be applied.
It must also be noted that thermal and age testing of all stone other than
granite must be carried out. Stone used for this purpose must be cut from
the same block as the original tested stone. If the number of thermal cycles
used are less than that stated by the CWCT, then the worst case durability
and deviation factors given by CWCT must be used.

16-40

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(ii)

As used in this Specification, the term "rift" means the plane of easiest
splitting. In stratified stones, rift is assumed to coincide with the bedding
or stratification. Rift shall be identified by the quarryman on all test
samples, and the identification shall be marked on all test specimens by
the party preparing the specimens. As used in this specification, the term
"specimen" means a single piece of stone or an anchor-in-stone assembly
having specific shape, size and surface finishes.

(iii)

Perform tests for the following properties:

(iv)

(v)

(a)

Flexural strength per ASTM C880/C880M-09.

(b)

Stone strength at anchors as defined herein.

(c)

Water porosity as defined herein.

(d)

Density per ASTM C97/C97M-09.

Specimens tested per ASTM C880/C880M-09 shall have the following

surface finishes:
(a)

The outdoor surface shall have its production finish and shall be the
tension side.

(b)

The indoor surface shall have its production finish and shall be the
compression side.

(c)

Edges shall have a finely sawn finish.

(d)

Separate groups of specimens shall be required for each outdoor

finish to be provided.

Specimens tested per ASTM C880/C880M-09 shall have the following

nominal dimensions:
(a)

Depth shall be equal to proposed thickness.

(b)

Width equals 100 mm when thickness is less than 70mm, or shall

be equal to 1.5 times the thickness when thickness is greater than
70 mm.

(c)

The span as tested shall be equal to 10 times thickness.

(d)

Overall length shall be not less than 50 mm and not more than 100
mm greater than the span as tested.

(vi)

Results shall be reported for all specimens tested. No result shall be

disregarded in computing average values.

(vii)

At least 20 specimens each, representing at least 5 different quarry blocks

shall be tested per ASTM C880/C880M-09. Separate sets of 20 or more
specimens shall be required for each outdoor finish for ASTM
C880/C880M-09 tests. Each group of 20 or more specimens shall consist
of 4 subgroups of 5 or more specimens, representing all possible
combinations of quarry block, wet or dry conditioning, and loading
parallel or perpendicular to rift. Each specimen shall be identified by
quarry block, wet or dry conditioning and loading direction.

16-41

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(viii)

Bending strength used to compute allowable stress shall be the smallest of

the average values computed for each subgroup of 5 or more specimens
tested per ASTM C880/C880M-09.

(ix)

For each type of proposed stone anchor, carry out tests in accordance with
ASTM C1354 / C1354M-09. Test at least ten specimens, two from each
of five different quarry blocks. Test at least five specimens, each from a
different block, with inward load, and at least five specimens with
outward load. Crosshead movement shall not exceed 0.63 mm per minute.
Wet or dry condition of stone shall correspond to the weaker condition as
determined by flexural strength. Orientation of rift plane shall correspond
to orientation on the building. Stone thicknesses shall be minimum
(nominal thickness minus tolerance) for anchor test specimens.
Continuous kerf type anchors which exceed 300 mm in length may be
tested as 300 mm long specimens and the results interpreted as stress in
the stone at the bottom of the kerf cut. Results shall be reported for all
specimens tested. No result shall be disregarded. Strength of stone at an
anchor used to compute allowable values shall be the average value for
each group of 5 or more specimens.

(x)

For each proposed stone type and finish, perform a water porosity test. A
minimum of three specimens shall be required, each having the correct
outdoor finish, indoor finish and thickness. Each specimen shall be taken
from a different quarry block. Minimum specimen size is 300 mm by
300mm. Place specimens in a horizontal position, outdoor surface facing
upward, such that the indoor surface is clearly visible and is not in contact
with any other surface, other than small supports. Air temperature shall be
in the range 18 to 29C. Seal to the outdoor stone surface a circular or
square sleeve having an internal cross sectional area of at least 180 square
cm. The sleeve shall be at least 50 mm from stone edges. Fill sleeve with
cold tap water to a depth of 250 6 mm. Maintain test conditions for 7
days. Record the times at which dampness (if any) is first visible on the
indoor stone surface; water droplets (if any) are first visible on the indoor
stone surface; dripping of water (if any) from the indoor stone surface
begins. If dripping occurs, once during each 24 hour period collect the
water for one hour and record the volume collected. The formation of
water droplets on the indoor stone surface (with or without dripping)
constitutes failure. All specimens tested shall pass.

(xi)

Based on the above test requirements, minimum quantities of test

specimens shall be as follows. To assure adequate quantities for testing, at
least twice the minimum number of specimens shall be prepared.
(a) ASTM C880/C880M-09; total of (20) specimens, (4) specimens
taken from each of (5) quarry blocks.
(b) Separate sets of (20) or more specimens shall be required for each
outdoor finish for ASTM C880/C880M-09 tests.
(c) Each anchor type in stone; (10) specimens, (2) from each of (5)
quarry blocks.
(d) Water porosity test; (3) specimens for each outdoor finish; each
specimen from a different quarry block.
(e) ASTM C97/C97M-09 (density); total of (6) specimens, (3)
specimens taken from each of (2) quarry blocks.

16-42

Section 16 Curtain Walls

(i)

Test reports

16.78

In addition to the testing programme described above, quality control

testing shall be required. For each type of stone, flexural specimens shall
be wire sawn from a minimum of five percent of the total number of
quarry blocks. Size of specimens shall be as specified herein. For each of
the sampled blocks, flexural strength shall be determined per ASTM
C880/C880M-09 for two specimens. If at least one of the two specimens
for each sampled block has flexural strength equal to or greater than 80
percent of the design bending strength as specified herein, no further
testing or reduction in working stress is required. If for one or more
sampled blocks, both specimens have flexural strength less than 80 percent
of the design bending strength, additional testing or a reduction in working
stress shall be required. The additional testing option consists of applying
the two-specimen test and 80 percent rule to each quarry block. For any
block which fails, the two-specimen test and 80 percent rule may be used
for each slab cut from the block. Any slab which fails shall be rejected;
any block which fails shall be rejected unless its slabs are checked
individually. The reduction in working stress option consists of reducing
the allowable bending stress in stone, and the allowable load exerted on
stone by an anchor, both of which are derived from the results of other
tests specified herein. The reduction factor shall be the average of
specimens from blocks which failed the 80 percent rule (both specimens
included in average) divided by the original bending strength. Quality
control test results shall not be used to increase allowable bending stress or
allowable load exerted on stone by an anchor.

Submit a certified laboratory test report in accordance with BS 5368:Pt.4. Include

the following for the tests carried out under Clause 16.73:
(i)

Test results together with comparison with permitted parameters.

(ii)

Remarks and conclusions by the testing professionals.

Submit photographic records of the test arrangement, set-up and of the performance
of the mock-ups, and constituent components of the same, during fabrication,
assembly and under test.
Provide two copies of the agreed shop drawings for recording any modifications
found necessary during and after the laboratory tests. The testing laboratory shall
accurately and neatly record all changes, revisions, and modifications etc., made to
the shop drawings. At completion of the testing, the marked-up drawings shall be
passed to the SO.
Subsequently and before any installation work commences on the site provide the
SO with six copies of the shop drawings incorporating the modifications made.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protection

16.79

Provide protective sheeting or tape to aluminium or stainless steel members and

ancillaries. Package and store materials in a manner that shall prevent surface
damage or contamination, distortion breakage or structural weakening.
Remove sheeting or tape as soon as practical so as not to stain and/or leave an
adhesive residue on the relevant substrates.
Protect glass against damage, discolouration or staining.
broken glass, regardless of the cause.

16-43

Replace damaged or

Section 16 Curtain Walls

Labels

16.80

No labels shall be adhered to glass other than those of the glass manufacturer which
shall be adhered with a non-alkaline adhesive. Remove labels from glass after
glazing.

Cleaning

16.81

Thoroughly wash and clean the work immediately prior to hand-over. No alkali
washes or other patent cleaning solutions shall be used which may stain, mark or
otherwise harm the installation.
Periodically remove from the site debris, excess materials and unused tools and
equipment resulting from this work. At the conclusion of construction, leave the
premises in a clean condition.

Ironmongery

16.82

All hinges, locks, opening devices etc., shall be properly adjusted and in perfect
working order. Hand over two sets of keys for each lock to the SO on completion.

Maintenance
manual

16.83

The Contractor shall provide a maintenance manual for the completed works which
shall include, but not be limited to the following information:

Maintenance
access

16.84

(i)

The name, address and telephone number of each firm and/or sub-contractor
involved in the supply of components for the curtain wall.

(ii)

The manual shall include a clear, concise description of the construction

methods used to form the various areas of the curtain wall for the particular
project.

(iii)

The manual shall include copies of material and component certification, as

well as, test reports as required herein.

(iv)

The manual shall include a method statement covering the procedures for
the replacement of damaged or otherwise defective components such as
glass lights, stone panels, aluminum panels and/or components or anchors.

(v)

The manual shall include specific recommendations for routine

maintenance, cleaning procedures, suitable cleaning agents as well as the
frequency of inspections and adjustments that may be necessary.

(vi)

The manual shall include a full/complete set of Drawings, modified to

incorporate any omissions and/or additions to the Works.

(vii)

The manual shall indicate the terms and periods of any guarantees and/or
warranties.

The Contractor shall submit proposals whereby the curtain wall can be cleaned and
maintained.

16-44

Section 17 Metalwork

SECTION 17
METALWORK
MATERIALS
Steel

17.01

Steel shall be as generally described in Section 15 Structural steel work.

Galvanized steel
sheet and coil

17.02

Hot dipped galvanized plain steel sheet and coil shall be to BS EN 10143.

Steel mesh

17.03

Welded wire mesh shall be steel wire of the specified diameter welded to
form a square or oblong mesh as specified and shall be hot dip galvanized
after manufacture as specified.
Expanded steel mesh shall be to BS 405.
For expanded metal lathing in plastering and rendering, see Section 18.
For expanded metal mesh or lathing in brickwork or blockwork, see Section
9.

Steel tubing

17.04

Steel tubing shall be to BS EN 10255 "medium" grade and galvanized.

Slotted steel
angle

17.05

Slotted steel angle shall be self-finished angle to BS 4345. Fittings to be

cadmium plated steel.

Cast iron

17.06

Cast iron shall be grey cast iron to BS EN 1561 Grade 150.

Aluminium alloy 17.07

Aluminium alloy plate; sheet and strip shall be to BS EN 485-1+A1, BS EN

485-2, BS EN 485-3BS EN 485-4, BS EN 515, BS EN 573-1, BS EN
573-2, BS EN 573-3, BS EN 573-5 of required alloy designation.
Aluminium alloy bars, extruded tube sections and hollow sections shall be to
BS EN 515, BS EN 573-1, BS EN 573-2, BS EN 573-3, BS EN 573-5, BS
EN 755, BS EN 12020, alloy designation 6063.
Aluminium sections for structural purposes shall be to BS 1161.
Aluminium alloy drawn tubes shall be to BS EN 515, BS EN 573-2, BS EN
573-3, BS EN 573-5and BS EN 754 alloy designation 6063.

Brass rods and

sections

17.08

Brass rods and sections shall be to BS EN 12163, BS EN 12164, BS EN

12167 designation CZ 106 condition M.

Stainless steel

17.09

Stainless steel plate, sheet and strip shall be of grade 316 or 304 to BS EN
10088-2 for flat product, BS EN 10088-3 for long product; BS EN 10095;
BS EN 10048; BS EN ISO 9445-1; BS EN ISO 9445-2, of Finish No.DP1
for dull polish or satin finish, No. 2R for reflective finish, No. 2B for mill
finish, No. 1G or 2G for polish finish with fine grit and No. 1P or 2P for
bright reflective mirror polished finish with a high degree of image clarity,
or otherwise as required. Where the surface finish is specified as micron
(RA), a certificate shall be submitted for SOs verification.
Where welding is required, the steel shall be grade 316S13 or 304S11.
Stainless steel tubes for structural and general engineering purposes shall be
to BS EN 10296-2, composition and finish shall be as above.

17-1

Section 17 Metalwork

Stainless steel fasteners to follow steel grade of members shall be connected

and to BS EN 10263-1, BS EN 10263-5.
Stainless steel anchors and inserts shall be of grade 316S31, A4 to BS EN
ISO 3506.
Fixings
generally

17.10

Fixings generally shall be of the same material and finish as the material to
be fixed.

Metal insert
channels for
concrete

17.11

Concrete insert channel shall be an approved galvanised steel channel, with

expanded polystyrene temporary filler. Provide matching sliding fixing
devices.

Adhesive for
metal

17.12

The application of adhesive for bonding metal to metal shall be according to

the manufactures recommendations, and the specimen tests shall be
conducted to ASTM standards. Tensile test can refer to ASTM D897 08.
Peel strength to ASTM D903-98. Impact strength of adhesive bonds to
ASTM D950-03.
WORKMANSHIP

Samples

17.13

Submit samples for approval, as required.

Prototypes

17.14

Obtain approval of prototypes before starting fabrication of repetitive

components.

Fabricating
generally

17.15

During fabrication, protect all surfaces that shall be visible in the finished
work.
Mitre junctions of identical sections.
Assemble moving parts to move freely and without binding.
Remove all burrs and sharp arrises which shall be visible after fixing or a
hazard to the user.

Welding
generally

17.16

Remove grease, dirt, moisture, oxide and scale from the edges to be welded.
Ensure accuracy, using clamps or jigs where practicable. Use tack welds for
temporary attachment where jigs are not practicable.
Joints shall be fully fused throughout with no holes, pores or cracks.
Prevent weld splutter falling on self-finished surfaces visible in the
completed work.
Butt welds, visible in completed work, shall be ground smooth and flush and
fillet welds to be ground smooth, if required.
Ensure complete removal of flux residue and slag.

Welding of
aluminium alloy

17.17

Welding of aluminium alloy shall be by inert-gas arc welding to BS EN

1011-4 or other method subject to approval.

Welding of
stainless steel

17.18

Welding of stainless steel shall be by inert-gas arc welding to BS EN 1011-3

or other method subject to approval.

Brazing

17.19

Guidance on the application of brazed joints to BS EN 14324.

Non-destructive examination shall refer to BS EN 12799. Destructive tests
of joints to BS EN 12797. For brazer approval, to BS EN 13133, and the
Procedure approval to BS EN 13134.

17-2

Section 17 Metalwork

Design of
articles to be
coated

17.20

Finishing to steel 17.21

Metal articles which are to be coated shall be designed in accordance with

the recommendations of BS 4479, Parts 1-5, 7-9. Hot dip galvanizing and
sherardizing to BS EN ISO 14713.
Finishes to steel shall be as follows:
(a)

Bare to receive painted finish.

(b)

Electroplated coating of zinc shall be to BS EN ISO 2081, Class A,

0.025 mm thick.

(c)

Zinc sprayed coating shall be to BS EN ISO 2063 - nominal

thickness 0.2 mm unless otherwise specified.

(d)

Galvanising shall be hot-dip galvanising to BS EN ISO 1461 with a

minimum thickness of 85m. Components shall be galvanised after
fabrication, if required.

No zinc sprayed coated or hot-dip galvanised items shall be welded or

drilled and any subsequent cutting is defined as damage which shall be
subsequently made good after coating or galvanising.
Make good damage to zinc coatings and galvanising, treat cut ends of
galvanised sections with two coats of metallic zinc-rich priming paint to BS
4652.
Finishes to
aluminium

17.22

Finishes to aluminium alloy shall be as follows:

(a)

Mill.

(b)

Polished.

(c)

Polished and treated with a protective lacquer.

(d)

Clear anodised shall be to AAMA 611 and of the thickness grade and
surface texture as follows:
(i)

Interior work Class 15 (minimum average thickness of

15m).

(ii)

Exterior work Class 25 (minimum average thickness of

25m).

(iii)

Internal concealed surface Class 10 (minimum average

thickness of 10m).

(e)

Colour anodised shall be to AAMA611 average 25 m thick.

(f)

Approved proprietary hardcoat anodic finish with better wearing

qualities than standard anodising of the required thickness.

Chromium
plating

17.23

Chromium plating shall be to BS EN ISO 1456, for "service condition No.

3", with "bright", "dull" or "satin" finish.

Protection

17.24

Protect all decorative finishes to metalwork against damp, scratching and

other damage. Apply a strippable coating or masking tape to all stainless
steel, anodised aluminium or similar surfaces and only remove as and when
necessary for construction or just prior to inspection for handover. Remove
surplus adhesive with non-damaging solvent and wash down.

Contact of
aluminium and
concrete etc.

17.25

Avoid contact in the completed work between aluminium and concrete,

mortar, plaster, or similar materials. Where unavoidable, paint one coat of
bituminous paint on aluminium surfaces, or use approved tape.

17-3

Section 17 Metalwork

Contact of
dissimilar
metals

17.26

Avoid contact in the completed work between the following metals:

(a)

Aluminium alloys with copper alloys, nickel, lead or stainless steel.

(b)

Iron and steel with copper alloys.

(c)

Zinc (including galvanizing) with copper alloys or nickel.

Where unavoidable, coat contact surfaces with bituminous paint, protective

tape or other approved means.
Galvanized steel
tubing

17.27

Carefully notch, fit and weld galvanized steel tubing to produce accurate
joints which shall be ground smooth and treated with two coats of zinc rich
priming paint to BS 4652.

Castings

17.28

Castings shall be sound free from bubbles, cracks or other defects and to
include the construction of patterns and moulds as required.

Slotted steel
angle

17.29

Cut slotted steel angle square and securely bolt together using nuts bolts and
washers and angle braces as necessary.

Fixing steel
mesh

17.30

Fix steel mesh at 75 mm centres as follows:

(a)

(b)
On completion

17.31

To steel framing by,

(i)

Tack welding.

(ii)

Tying with 2 mm galvanised tying wire.

To wood framing with 1.8 x 25 mm galvanised staples.

Lubricate and adjust moving components, and leave in perfect working

order on completion.
METAL WINDOWS AND DOORS

Steel windows
and doors

17.32

Steel windows and doors shall be obtained from an approved manufacturer

and constructed to BS 6510 and in accordance with the following:
(a)

When fixed in position, windows and doors shall be designed to

withstand a wind load calculated in accordance with the Code of
Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong with a minimum pressure
of 3 kPa and a permissible maximum deflection of 1/180th of the
length of the member under consideration. Calculations shall be
required to be submitted for approval.

(b)

Frames shall be square and flat with mitred, welded corners and with
glazing bars machine tenoned and/or welded to frames.

(c)

Water bars shall be welded to the frames for the complete width of
the windows or doors.

(d)

When weather bars are specified, weld same to the frames for the
complete width of the windows or doors.

(e)

Provide all slotted adjustable lugs and screws necessary for building
in the windows and doors and ensure that lugs project 60 mm
(minimum) beyond the metal frames.

(f)

Provide loose mullions and transoms of total length to suit window or

door openings together with additional 75 mm at each end for
building in.

17-4

Section 17 Metalwork

(g)

Provide sufficient mastic and bolts for assembly of all composite

units and assemble same at Site, including bedding mullions and
transoms in mastic with all interstices completely filled.

(h)

Windows and doors shall be suitable for external glazing unless

otherwise specified. Provide rolled steel heavy channel section
glazing beads size as specified for windows and doors, mitred at
corners and fixed with galvanized mild steel flat headed countersunk
screws at 225 mm centres (maximum) and tap frames to receive
screws.

(i)

All members shall be hot-dip galvanized or zinc sprayed as specified

in Clause 17.21.

(j)

When specified, provide an approved chloroprene rubber or

polyvinyl chloride weatherstrip securely fixed into the dovetail
groove in the section to provide a continuous contact between the
opening casement and the fixed frame.

(k)

Window and door fittings and furniture shall be approved and as

follows:

(l)

(i)

Steel hinges with brass pins and welded or riveted to frames.

Projecting hinges to side-hung casements where windows
shall be cleaned from the inside.

(ii)

All fittings including friction grip pivots, casement fasteners,

spring catches, brackets, slide arms, shoes, slip bolts, cabin
hooks and eyes and handles, all of manganese brass with
bronze finish. All to retain the opening parts rigidly in both the
open and closed positions.

(iii)

Handle plates, round headed stay brackets welded to the fixed

frames with interchangeable handles and stays.

Windows and doors shall be hung to open as indicated and fitted with
the following fittings and furniture:
(i)

Side-hung casement and vertically centre-hung ventilator - a

two-point nose fastener or a two throw casement fastener with
mild steel adjustable connecting rod and a 250 mm peg stay or
bronze sliding stay, as specified.

(ii)

Projecting casement - bronze sliding shoes, pivots and friction

side arms and one spring catch with ring for hand or pole
operation and two square-shank barrel bolts.

(iii)

Top-hung ventilator - 200 mm peg stay with round-headed

stay bracket welded to the fixed frame and with a second peg
to secure the stay firmly and horizontally against the first peg
when the ventilator is closed.

(iv)

Bottom-hung ventilator - a spring catch and fanlight roller

stay to limit opening and to permit the ventilator to swing free
for cleaning.

(v)

Horizontally centre-hung ventilator with a spring catch, with

ring and eye for cord or pole operation.

(vi)

Doors - sliding bolts of suitable length, striking plates at top

and bottom, cabin hooks and eyes of suitable length,
three-lever mortice lock with two keys, lever handles and
escutcheon plates, as specified.

17-5

Section 17 Metalwork

(m)

When specified, provide extruded aluminium flyscreens having

plastic covered fibre-glass mosquito gauze with 7 x 7 mesh per 10
mm square.
Where flyscreens are provided, side hung casements shall have a
locking handle and an opening and closing mechanism consisting of
a bronze cam handle and bronze roto operator, and top hung
casements to have bronze "through-the-frame" type stays.

Aluminium
windows and
doors

17.33

(n)

When specified, high openable windows in inaccessible locations

shall be fitted with either electrical or manual remote control gear.

(o)

Provide temporary steel clamps at the top and bottom of all opening
lights of casements prior to transportation from factory till fixed in
position.

(p)

Paint surfaces: as specified in Section 21. Metal windows and doors

shall be delivered to site unprimed.

Aluminium windows and doors shall be obtained from an approved

manufacturer and constructed in accordance with the following: (a)

When fixed in position, windows and doors shall be designed to

withstand a wind load calculated in accordance with the Code of
Practice on Wind Effects in Hong Kong with a minimum pressure
of 3 kPa and a permissible maximum deflection of 1/180th of the
length of the member under consideration. Where necessary use
galvanized steel cores, anchors, brackets, etc. as stiffeners.
Calculations shall be required to be submitted for approval. Cores,
anchors and brackets etc. shall be finished to Clause 17.33(p).

(b)

Sections shall be extruded aluminium alloy to BS EN 485-1+A1, BS

EN 485-2, BS EN 485-3BS EN 485-4, BS EN 515, BS EN 573-1,
BS EN 573-2, BS EN 573-3, BS EN 573-5 and BS EN 755, BS EN
12020, British alloy designation 6063 with a minimum wall thickness
of 2.0 mm and dovetail grooved for weatherstrip.

(c)

Aluminium coating shall be as follows:

(i)

Refer to Clause 16.31 for anodic coating.

(ii)

Refer to Clause 16.32 for organic coating.

(d)

Frames shall be mechanically jointed of mortice and tenon

construction to provide rigid and secure connections. Mechanically
joint and mitre sash members to develop the full strength of members
using solid block angle pieces and provide a neat weather-tight joint.
Provide adequate drainage in bottom members.

(e)

Provide galvanized steel fixing lug spaces at 300 mm centres

(maximum) for outer frames of each unit. Where specified, fix lugs
with rag-bolts or approved proprietary stud anchors fixing bolts.

(f)

Provide water bars of galvanized steel or other approved material for

the complete width of the windows or doors where the design of the
window requires.

(g)

Assemble all composite units at Site, including provision of all

necessary bolts, screws etc. and sealing all joints with an approved
sealant.

(h)

Unless otherwise specified, provide an approved chloroprene rubber,

polyvinyl chloride or nylon pile weatherstrip securely fixed into the

17-6

Section 17 Metalwork

dovetailed groove in the window or door sections to provide a

continuous contact between each opening part and its fixed frame.
(i)

Windows and doors shall be suitable for internal glazing unless

otherwise specified. Provide an approved glazing system and
aluminium beads. Securely clip beads to the frame or use beads
which shall be an integral part of the frame.

(j)

Use aluminium alloy, stainless steel or nylon for all exposed fixings
including screws, nuts, bolts, washers and rivets and match up with
finish where possible. Use stainless steel, galvanized or
cadmium-plated steel for all concealed fastening devices.

(k)

Window and Door fittings and furniture shall be approved and as

follows:
(i)

Friction pivots and sliding stays - stainless steel. To provide a

maximum opening of 100 degree and a minimum clearance of
100 mm between frame and window for cleaning purposes.

(ii)

Casement fasteners, locking handles, spring catches,

casement stays, brackets, slip bolts and the like:
(a)

Diecast zinc alloy to BS EN 1774 suitably coloured to

match the anodised window or door metal.

(b)

Moulded stainless steel with satin finish.

(iii)

Locks cadmium plated steel with stainless steel or brass

shoots etc.

(iv)

Pull handles anodized aluminium.

(v)

Rollers, guides etc. cadmium plated steel with nylon or brass

rollers to suit weight of door or window. To be adjustable after
installation.

(l)

Remote control gear shall be hand operated shaft and lever or conduit
and cable remote control system with bronze or diecast zinc alloy
bevel gear boxes, adjustable arms and keyed shafts.

(m)

Windows and doors shall be hung to open as indicated and fitted with
the following fittings and furniture:
(i)

Side and top hung windows - Friction pivots and sliding stays
and casement fastener (dual if necessary) or pull handle and
locking handle (dual if necessary).
Top hung windows in inaccessible locations shall be fitted
with remote control gear.

(ii)

Sliding windows - Rollers, guides etc., pull handle and stops,

sliding bolts or locking mechanism. N.B. The window should
be designed so that it cannot be lifted off its rollers without the
removal of a safety device.

(iii)

Side hung doors - Floor springs and adjustable top pivots,

single or double action to stand open or not as specified,
mortice dead lock, top and bottom flush lever bolts and push
plates and pull handles as required.

(iv)

Sliding doors - Heavy duty rollers, guides etc., pull handle and
stops, hook bolt locking latch and four bolts.

17-7

Section 17 Metalwork

(n)

When flyscreens are specified, they shall be located on the inside.

The frames shall be extruded aluminium with plastic covered
mosquito gauze of 7 x 7 mesh per 10 mm square. Screens shall be
fixed to window frames by turn buckles. The windows shall be fitted
with locking handles and an opening and closing mechanism
comprising cam handles and roto operator.

(o)

Prime with zinc chromate primer and paint two coats of bituminous
paint on all steel framework, cores, anchors and brackets.

(p)

Paint one coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminium or

stainless steel surfaces which may come into contact with wet mortar,
cement, plaster or similar materials.

(q)

Apply a strippable coating or masking tape to all exposed aluminium

or stainless steel surfaces. (NOTE: The anodised surface may be
permanently damaged by contact with wet cement and plaster) Wrap
all window and door units and other associated materials in stout
waterproof paper or polythene to protect against damp and scratching
and do not make premature delivery to Site.

(r)

Return to site on completion of building work, carefully remove

protective coating and leave clean.

Drawings

17.34

Provide drawings showing details of members and position of fixing lugs

and obtain approval prior to commencement of manufacture.

Samples

17.35

Provide samples of windows, doors and all fittings and obtain approval
before starting manufacture.
If specified, one sample unit shall be test loaded to ensure compliance with
the stipulated wind load requirements. The testing shall be carried out under
the supervision and in the manner approved by the SO.

Fixing metal
windows and
doors

17.36

When fixing metal windows and doors:

(a)

Avoid distortion during handling and storage.

(b)

Ensure tightness and clearance between sash and frame of all opening
lights which shall be fixed until glazed.

(c)

Avoid having construction access through window openings and/or

placing scaffolding, boards etc. directly onto the window frames. If
window openings must be used, then window frames at that opening
location shall not be fixed until completion of the related internal
works and the through-route is no longer required.

(d)

Assemble composite units including the provision of all necessary

bolts screws etc. and seal joints with an approved one pack gun type
polysulphide sealant to BS EN ISO 11600+A1.

(e)

Position, plumb, level and square.

(f)

Form pockets in heads, jambs, cills etc. to receive fixing lugs, build in
lugs and made good and screw to frames or plug and screw frames
using packing pieces where necessary. Do not distort frames when
tightening fixings.

(g)

Bed steel frames with water-proof mortar, leaving no gaps. Mortar

shall be an approved ready-mix mortar or consist of 1 part of cement
to 3 parts of sand together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the
gap between the frame and the opening. The mixture shall contain an

17-8

Section 17 Metalwork

approved proprietary water-proofing and non-shrink admixture.

(h)

Bed aluminium frames with water-proof mortar, leaving no gaps.

Mortar shall be an approved ready-mix mortar or consist of 1 part of
cement to 3 parts of sand together with the minimum amount of water
necessary to achieve a consistency suitable for completely filling the
gap between the frame and the opening. The mixture shall contain an
approved proprietary water-proofing and non-shrink admixture.

(i)

Rake out the joints around external edge of steel window and door
frames to the approval of the SO and point with an approved oil based
mastic sealant to form a smooth, flat joint. Remove excess sealant
from adjoining surfaces and leave clean. Mask adjoining surfaces
which would be impossible to clean if smeared with sealant.

(j)

Rake out the joints around external edge of aluminium window and
door frames to the approval of the SO and point with an approved
one-pack gun type polysulphide sealant to BS EN ISO 11600+A1,
sealant to form smooth, flat joint. Remove excess sealant from
adjoining surfaces and leave clean. Mask adjoining surfaces which
would be impossible to clean if smeared with sealant.

(k)

Avoid contact with concrete, mortar, plaster, or similar materials.

ADJUSTABLE STEEL LOUVRE FRAMES

Adjustable and
fixed steel
louvres and
frames

17.37

Fixed louvres and frames shall be all hot-dip galvanized unless permitted
otherwise by the SO.
Adjustable metal louvre frames and weatherstrips shall be obtained from an
approved supplier and constructed in accordance with the following:
(a)

Frames and clips shall be of 1.2 and 0.9 mm (minimum) steel sheet
respectively. Clips shall be suitable for receiving 100, 150 or 230 mm
wide and 6 mm thick glass blades, as required. Aluminium frames
and aluminium or plastic clips may be supplied subject to approval.

(b)

Frames shall be designed for hand or pole operation, as required, with

single control and to automatically lock when closed.

(c)

Weatherstrips shall be shaped metal strips of an approved design and

thickness.

(d)

Steel frames, clips and weatherstrips shall be hot-dip galvanized or

electro-zinc plated on all surfaces prior to assembly.

(e)

Where specified, provide 45 x 10 mm galvanized steel sub-frames for

single side louvre frames, with necessary slotted adjustable lugs and
screws for building in.

(f)

Provide matching rustless screws, bolts and spacers etc. for coupling
adjacent frames to form mullions, where required.

Samples &
drawings

17.38

Provide samples & drawings and obtain approval.

Origin

17.39

State Manufacturers name and country of origin

Fixing
adjustable steel
louvre frames

17.40

Fix adjustable steel louvre frames as follows:

(a)

Avoid distortion during handling and storage.

(b)

Position plumb, level and square.

17-9

Section 17 Metalwork

(c)

Where required, form pockets to receive fixing lugs, build in lugs and
screw to sub-frames or plug and screw sub-frames using packing
pieces where necessary.

(d)

Bed sub-frames in mortar as used for adjacent work, leaving no gaps.

(e)

Where required, screw single side louvre frames to sub-frames at 225

mm centres. Do not distort frames when tightening fixings.

(f)

Where required, plug and screw louvre frames and weather strips.

ROLLER SHUTTERS AND DOORS

Roller shutters
and doors

17.41

Roller shutters and doors shall be supplied and fixed in accordance with the
following:
(a)

Steel roller shutters shall consist of horizontal hot dipped galvanised

slats, which interlock through their entire length to form a continuous
hinge. The shutters shall be designed to withstand a wind load
calculated in accordance with the Code of Practice on Wind Effects
in Hong Kong with a minimum pressure of 3 kPa on the entire
surface area of the shutter or otherwise specified.

(b)

Roller shutters shall be either:

(i)

Self - closing.

(ii)

Manually operated by an endless chain.

(iii)

Electrically operated.

Self - closing shutters shall be operated manually through an internal

self coiling mechanism by lifting handles or a pole and hook. The
mechanism shall be adjustable to control the effort required to raise
or lower the door.
(c)

Shutters operated by means of an endless chain shall be fitted with a

spur or worm reduction gear such that the shutter shall not fall or rise
without manual operation of the chain.

(d)

Electrically operated shutters shall comply with the Code of Practice

for Installation of Electrically Operated Sliding Gates, Sliding
Glass Doors and Rolling Shutters published by the Electrical and
Mechanical Services Department. The shutters shall be installed
complete with electric motors, the associated overload protection,
drive mechanism, limit switches, emergency stop, control buttons
and other control devices required by the shutter manufacturer. The
electrical installation of the shutter shall comply with the General
Specification for Electrical Installation in Government Buildings
of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region, Architectural
Services Department, and Code of Practice for the Electricity
(wiring) Regulations, Electrical and Mechanical Services
Department.

(e)

Shutters shall have a locking device, and in addition approved

malleable iron shoot bolts shall be provided and fitted to the bottom
bar at each end of all shutters to assist holding the shutter under high
wind conditions.

(f)

The horizontal steel barrel carrying the shutter curtain shall be of

suitable diameter and strength to resist deflection, be rust proofed and
have adequate counter balance springs to ensure the correct balance
of the shutter in all positions.

17-10

Section 17 Metalwork

Fire resisting
shutters

17.42

(g)

The shutter and its barrel shall be supported on brackets with

adequate bearings. The brackets shall be provided with suitable
fixings for attaching to the soffit, face or side of opening.

(h)

The vertical channel guides shall be of galvanised steel of adequate

size and depth to hold the shutter curtain under high wind conditions
and they shall be provided with adequate fixings for attaching to the
soffit, face, jamb or side of openings or at base and apex in the case of
movable mullions.

(i)

Hoods and casings shall be of galvanized steel of adequate gauge, or

folded 3mm thick aluminium panel fully supported and braced to
prevent any sagging or distortion. Access doors or plates shall be
provided at the appropriate places to enable routine inspection and
servicing to be carried out.

(j)

Screws, bolts and fixing lugs shall be supplied as necessary for the
assembling and fixing of the steel roller shutters.

(k)

All ungalvanized steel and cast iron shall be painted with one coat of
rust inhibiting primer before despatch to Site.

(l)

Full details of motors, gearing, drive mechanism and control

mechanism shall be provided and obtain approval. The motors, the
associated control and protective devices shall be suitable for
operating on local electricity supply. Totally enclosed three-phase
induction motors are preferred. The motors, driving gears, limit
switches, and control mechanism shall be accessible for inspection
and servicing. An isolating switch shall be provided to isolate the
electricity supply during inspection and servicing. Adequate
electrical power supply shall be provided to the isolating switch.

(m)

Auxiliary manually operated gear shall be provided. The changeover

should be easily effected without climbing up to the gearing drive
mechanism to engage the gears for manual operation or disengage the
manual operating gear for electrical operation.

(n)

An interlock switch shall be provided to prevent the locked roller

shutters from operating electrically and shall be fitted on a stationary
part (such as the guide rails) but not on the moving part of the roller
shutters.

The construction and installation of the fire resisting shutter shall comply
with the requirements of the Code of Practice for Fire Safety in
Buildings, Buildings Department. The activation devices shall be
constructed according to the requirements of Fire Services Department. The
operation of the fire shutter and the activation devices shall be tested
according to the requirements of the Codes of Practice for Minimum Fire
Services Installations and Equipment and Inspection, Testing and
Maintenance of Installations and Equipment, Fire Services Department and
the Building Services Branch Testing and Commissioning Procedure No. 3
for Fire Service Installation in Government Buildings, Architectural
Services Department.
The fire rated period of the fire resisting shutters shall satisfy the criterion of
integrity relating to the method of exposure on each side separately when
tested in accordance with BS 476:parts 20 to 24.
A test report prepared by an Accredited Laboratory or Building Authority
shall be provided to certify that the fire resisting shutter is capable of
resisting the action of fire for the specified period.

17-11

Section 17 Metalwork

The fire resisting shutters shall be provided with smoke detector(s) and
manual control devise(s) on both side of the wall openings for automatic and
manual operation respectively. The detectors installed shall comply with the
requirements of the General Specification for Fire Service Installation in
Government Buildings of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region,
Architectural Services Department.
Design and
manufacture of
roller shutters

17.43

The design of the roller shutters, including boxes, hoods, guides and all
other parts shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for making good any defect which may
appear after the rolling shutters shall have been taken over, and which arises
either from defective materials, workmanship or design.

Detail drawings

17.44

The Contractor shall provide detail drawings for approval on confirmation

of the order, and prior to commencement of manufacture.
Provide two instruction manuals giving detailed operating and maintenance
instructions which shall include the wiring and schematic drawings,
schedule of component parts and a priced list of recommended spares.

17-12

Section 18 Finishes

SECTION 18
FINISHES
RENDERING
Generally
Cement

18.01

Ordinary Portland Cement shall be to BS EN 197-1.

Water

18.02

Water shall be as Clause 6.35.

Sand

18.03

Sand for mixes not incorporating lime shall be clean hard durable crushed
rock or clean sand free from salt to conform to the grading limits set out in
Table 18.1.
TABLE 18.1
Grading

B.S. Sieve

Percentage by weight passing B.S. Sieve

5.00 mm
2.36 mm
1.18 mm
0.60 mm
0.30 mm
0.15 mm

100
90 - 100
70 - 100
40 - 80
5 - 40
0 - 10
Sand for mixes incorporating lime shall be clean natural sand free from salt
to conform to the grading limits set out in the Table 18.2
TABLE 18.2
Grading

B.S. Sieve

Percentage by weight passing B.S. Sieve

2.36 mm
1.18 mm
0.60 mm
0.30 mm
0.15 mm

100
90 - 100
55 - 100
5 - 50
0 - 10

Lime

18.04

Lime shall be as Clause 9.15.

Lime putty

18.05

Lime putty shall be as Clause 9.16.

Admixtures and
additives

18.06

Admixtures and additives shall be as Clause 6.36.

18-1

Section 18 Finishes

Bonding Agent

18.07

Bonding agent shall be compatible with background and finish, designated

to be suitable for internal or external use and shall be an approved
proprietary brand.
The approved proprietary bonding agent shall be used in strict accordance
with the manufacturers technical specifications and recommendations,
including and not limited to the valid shelf life of the product. The expiry
date shall be clearly indicated with label and stamp for necessary inspection
by the SO.
WORKMANSHIP
Generally

Mixing
rendering

18.08

Mix rendering shall be as Clauses 9.21 to 9.23.

Samples

18.09

Provide sample panels of approximately 2 m2 for textured or coloured

finishes and tile or slab finishes including pointing and obtain approval
before starting work. Apply these finishes to sample areas of the work as
directed.

Protection of
existing work

18.10

Protect existing work with boards, dust sheets, and the like. Droppings on
finished work shall be cleaned off immediately.

Cleanliness

18.11

Keep plant and tools clean and free of traces from previous mixes.

Mechanical
application

18.12

Do not use mechanical coating methods of application without approval.

Preparation of
background

18.13

Hack off extraneous concrete projections and fins.

Remove efflorescence, laitance, oil, grease, all traces of release agents, dirt,
and loose material by dry brushing or scraping.
Protect surfaces from weather and ensure that they are completely
compatible with the finish to be applied before starting work.

Dissimilar
backgrounds

18.14

At junctions between dissimilar solid backgrounds in the same plane which

are to receive the same applied finish, fix a strip of steel galvanized lathing
as Clause 18.24 extending 150 mm (minimum) in width each side of the
junction, nailed with 40 mm nails or stapled to plugs at 100 mm centres on
both edges.

Spatterdash

18.15

Clean all laitance, dust, oil or any other such foreign substances from the
concrete surface.
Spatterdash shall consist of (1:2) cement: coarse sand with an approved
bonding agent such as a styrene-butadiene rubber (SBR) latex, an ethyl vinyl
acetate (EVA) emulsion or an acrylic emulsion.
Apply spatterdash to concrete vertical surfaces and soffits within 48 hours
after striking formwork.
The mixture shall be applied by dashing it on the wall by a hand scoop or a
trowel to give a complete coverage with a rough texture not exceeding 5 mm
thickness. The surface shall be maintained moist for 24 hours.
Allow to cure and harden for at least two days before applying rendering /
bedding screed.

18-2

Section 18 Finishes

Preparation of
18.16
hardened or
existing concrete

Where finish or screed shall be bonded to the hardened or existing concrete

wall or base:
(i)

Shortly before applying finish or screed, thoroughly hack concrete to

remove laitance and expose coarse aggregate.

(ii)

Thoroughly clean and wet surface before applying finish or screed

and remove surplus water.

(iii)

Brush neat cement slurry into damp surface immediately before

applying finish or screed, or

Apply approved proprietary bonding agent in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.
Preparation of
18.17
base for
monolithic finish

Surface finishes

18.18

Where finish or screed shall be laid monolithically on concrete base:

(i)

Spray surface with water and brush with a stiff broom whilst
concrete is green to remove laitance and loose aggregate.

(ii)

Lay finish or screed within 3 hours of laying base.

Surface finishes shall be either:

(i)

Smooth finish: finish with a steel trowel or power float to a smooth

surface, free from blemishes.

(ii)

Wood float finish: finish with a dry wood float to give an even
overall surface.

(iii)

Textured finish: finish by stippling, scraping or other means to

produce an approved textured surface.

(iv)

Rough cast finish: throw onto the undercoat a wet mix of aggregate
and cementitious material.

(v)

Machine applied textured finish: apply in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

Accuracy for
wall and ceiling
finishes

18.19

Finish wall and ceiling finishes to a true plane and to correct line and level.
Maximum deviation permitted in surfaces shall be 3 mm from a 1800 mm
straight edge. Angles and corners shall be right angles unless otherwise
required, with walls and reveals plumb and square.

Drying out of
wall and ceiling
finishes

18.20

Prevent excessively rapid or localized drying out of wall and ceiling finishes
by an approved means.

Curing of floor
finishes, etc.

18.21

Immediately after laying, protect surface of floor screeds or in-situ finishes

from wind and sunlight.
Cover surface, as soon as it is sufficiently hardened, with canvas, waterproof
sheeting, mats, or a 50 mm layer of damp sand. Unless otherwise agreed by
the SO, keep covered for 4 days.

Movement joints 18.22

Movement joints shall be equally spaced at a maximum spacing of 4m

centres in each direction, in accordance with Clauses 6.61 and 6.62, or as
directed by the SO to accord with dimensioned requirements, or as shown on
the drawings.

Protection

Protect screeds from wear and other damage until the floor finish is laid.
Protect all finishes from discolouration or damage until completion.

18.23

18-3

Section 18 Finishes

PLASTERING AND RENDERING

Materials
Steel lathing

Metal beads
Plastic beads

18.24

18.25

Steel lathing shall be to BS EN 13658-1 & BS EN 13658-2 from an

approved manufacturer:
(i)

Plain expanded type of 6 mm short way mesh coated with tight coat
galvanizing and weighing not less than 1.6 kg/m2.

(ii)

Ribbed expanded type similarly coated and weighed not less than
2.25 kg/m2.

Galvanized steel corner beads, plaster stops and movement joint beads shall
have expanded metal wings and be from an approved manufacturer.
Plastic corner beads shall be used if approved by the SO.

Wire netting

18.26

Wire netting shall be to BS EN 10223-2, of 0.9 mm galvanized wire and 50

mm mesh.

Staples

18.27

Staples shall be galvanized steel wire staples.

Tying wire

18.28

Tying wire shall be 1.25 mm annealed steel wire, galvanized to BS EN

10244-2.

Gypsum plasters 18.29

Gypsum plaster shall be Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster to BS EN

13279-2 & BS EN 13279-1, Class B of the following types:
Undercoat Plaster
Type a - 1
2

Browning plaster
Metal lathing plaster

Final Coat Plaster

Type b - 1 Finish plaster
2 Board finish plaster
Delivery and
storage of
gypsum plaster

18.30

Gypsum plaster shall be delivered in sealed containers. Store in weather

tight structures with a raised floor. Store different types of consignments
separately, and use in the order of their delivery.

Plasterboard

18.31

Plasterboard shall be to BS EN 520: 2004 + A1, "gypsum lath" or "gypsum

baseboard" with square edges.

Nails for
plasterboard

18.32

Nails for "lath" or "baseboard" shall be 30 x 2.6 mm plasterboard galvanized

steel nails, jagged shank type to BS 1202-1.
(i)

30 x 2.65 mm for plasterboard not exceeding 12.7 mm thick.

(ii)

40 x 2.65 mm for plasterboard 19 mm thick.

Joint
reinforcement

18.33

Reinforcement for joints in plasterboard shall be jute scrim cloth not less
than 90 mm wide.

Handling and
storage of
plasterboard

18.34

Carry plasterboard on edge. Stack plasterboard flat on level surface, properly

supported to prevent sagging or bending of boards off the ground and inside
a building. Keep plasterboard dry, prevent mould growth, and programme
deliveries to ensure that storage periods on site are kept to a minimum during
periods of high humidity.

18-4

Section 18 Finishes

Acoustic plaster

18.35

Acoustic plaster shall be an approved proprietary brand free from asbestos,

mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

Stone chippings

18.36

Stone chippings for exposed aggregate rendering or Shanghai plaster shall

be granite, white stone or marble chippings, graded from 3 to 5 mm, and free
from dust or other foreign substances.

Fire cement

18.37

Fire cement shall be as specified for firebrick mortar in Clause 9.22(c).

High quality
finishes

18.38

Resin, epoxy, urethane and acrylic based decorative finishes shall be

approved proprietary products applied by approved specialist contractors.
Workmanship

Generally

18.39

Plastering and rendering generally shall be in accordance with PD CEN/TR

15123, BS EN 13914-2 & BS 8481 and BS EN 13914-1 respectively.

Dubbing out

18.40

Dub out if necessary to correct any inaccuracies, in layers 10 mm

(maximum) thick in same mix as the first coat. Allow to dry out before the
next coat is applied. Total thickness of dubbing out or levelling shall not
exceed 25 mm. Cross scratch each coat to provide key.

Fixing steel
lathing

18.41

Fix steel lathing as follows:

Fixing
plasterboard

18.42

(i)

Fix taut with the largest dimension of mesh running perpendicular to

direction of supports.

(ii)

Apply one coat of bituminous paint to cut ends.

(iii)

Fix at 100 mm centres to wood with staples, to brickwork or concrete

as Clause 18.14 and to steelwork with tying wire at 75 mm centres.

(iv)

Lap 25 mm (minimum) generally, and 50 mm where end laps occur

between supports. Secure laps with tying wire at 75 mm centres.

Plasterboard fixing generally shall be to BS 8212.

Fix plasterboard to wood bearers as follows:

Joints in
plasterboard

18.43

(i)

Nail boards at each support, at 150 mm centres working out from the
centres of the board, and 15 mm (minimum) from edges.

(ii)

Provide gap of 3 to 5 mm between edges.

Treat joints, etc. in plasterboard as follows:

(i)

Fill all joints, nail holes and other imperfections with board finish
plaster.

(ii)

Press strips of joint reinforcement into the plaster, trowel flat and
allow the plaster to set, but not dry out before general plastering
commences.

Undercoats
generally

18.44

Allow 3 days for undercoats to dry out thoroughly before applying next coat.
Cross scratch undercoats to provide key for next coat.

Cement render

18.45

Apply cement rendering consisting of cement and sand 1:3 with surface
finish required as follows:
(i)

Rendering not exceeding 10 mm thick in one coat.

(ii)

Rendering exceeding 10 mm thick in two coats, with finishing coat 5

mm thick.

18-5

Section 18 Finishes

External render

18.46

Apply external rendering to spatterdashed surfaces consisting of cement and

sand in two coats as follows:
(i)

Undercoat 10 mm (minimum) thick --- mix 1:3

(ii)

Finishing coat 10 mm (maximum) thick --- mix 1:3, with textured

finish. Total thickness of spatterdash & external rendering shall not
exceed 20 mm.

Undercoat shall be thoroughly dry before applying the finishing coat.

Pulverised Fly Ash (PFA) shall not be used for external rendering.
Internal lime
plaster on solid
backgrounds

18.47

Apply internal lime plaster in two coats on solid backgrounds as follows:

(i)

Undercoat shall be 1:3 cement: sand mix

(ii)

Finishing coats use lime plaster gauged (cement:lime:sand 1:2:6)

with not more than 25% by volume of lime putty. Addition of
paper-pulp is not allowed.

(iii)

Thickness of undercoat shall not exceed 10 mm to walls and 5 mm to

soffits.

(iv)

Thickness of finishing coat to walls and soffits shall be at least 3 mm.

(v)

The drying out time for undercoats before applying finishing coats
shall be as specified in the Clause 18.44.

(vi)

Metal plaster corner beads and stops shall be provided where

specified shall be followed as Clause 18.53.

(vii)

Total thickness of plaster shall not exceed 15 mm to walls and 10 mm

to soffits.

Pulverised Fly Ash (PFA) shall not be used for internal plastering.
Internal lime
plaster on
lathing

18.48

Apply internal lime plaster in three coats on steel lathing as follows:

(i)

First and second coats, consisting of cement, lime and sand 1:2:6.

(ii)

Finishing coat shall be as Clause 18.47 (i) and (ii).

Total thickness of plaster shall not exceed 13 mm measured from the outer
face of the lathing.
Gypsum plaster
generally

18.49

Apply gypsum plaster generally in two coats as follows:

(i)

First coat consisting of Browning plaster and sand 1:2 or cement and
sand 1:3.

(ii)

Finishing coat of neat finish plaster, or finish plaster with up to 25%

of lime putty added, with smooth finish 5 mm max.

Total thickness of plaster shall not exceed 15 mm.

If approved by the SO, proprietary gypsum plaster can be used in strict
accordance with the manufacturers technical specifications and
recommendations.
Where specified, bonding agents for use with gypsum plaster shall be as BS
5270 Pt. 1.

18-6

Section 18 Finishes

Gypsum plaster
on steel lathing

18.50

Apply gypsum plaster in three coats on steel lathing as follows:

(i)

First coat consisting of metal lathing plaster and sand 1:1.5.

(ii)

Second and finishing coats - as for first coat and finishing coat as
Clause 18.49 (i) and (ii).

Total thickness of plaster shall not exceed 13 mm measured from the outer
face of the lathing.
Gypsum plaster
on plasterboard

18.51

Apply gypsum plaster as one finishing coat 5 mm (maximum) thick on

plasterboard trowelled to a smooth surface using as little water as possible.

Arrises

18.52

Arrises shall be square or pencil rounded, as required.

Metal beads

18.53

Metal beads for internal plastering and dry lining, shall be to BS EN

13658-1. Metal beads for external rendering shall be to BS EN 13658-2.
Provide and fix metal corner beads, plaster stops and movement joints when
specified including nailing, stapling or fixing with plaster dabs and trowel
the finishing coat flush with the bead.

Cornices

Exposed
aggregate
rendering or
"Shanghai"
plaster

18.54

Coved or moulded cornices shall be either:

18.55

(i)

Formed with a backing of cement and sand 1:3 with finishing coat of
same plaster used for adjacent surfaces, finished with a steel template
to a smooth finish.

(ii)

Preformed cornices from an approved manufacturer fixed in

accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Apply exposed aggregate rendering or "Shanghai" plaster in two coats as

follows:
(i)

First coat 10 mm thick, consisting of cement and sand 1:3.

(ii)

Finishing coat 10 mm thick, consisting of cement and stone

chippings 1:1, with the chippings mixed in one of the proportions
shown in Table 18.3. Before the finishing coat has set, scrub off the
surface to expose the aggregate.
TABLE 18.3
Proportions of Chippings

Acoustic spray
plaster

Colour

Cement

Stone
Chippings
Dark Grey/Light Grey/White

Dark
Medium
White

Ordinary
White
White

70%
60%
-

18.56

20%
-

20%
20%
-

Marble
Chippings
Black/White
10%
-

20%
100%

Mix and apply acoustic plaster by special spray equipment in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations to the thickness and number of
coats specified.

18-7

Section 18 Finishes

PREMIXED PLASTER
Materials
Generally

18.57

Premixed plaster shall be factory-produced by weighted combination of

plaster raw materials and chemicals and supplied to sites in bags. Mixing
with clean water shall be required before application.

Type of
premixed
plaster

18.58

There are two types of premixed plaster, cement based and gypsum based.
Gypsum based is for internal use only.

Cement based
premixed
plaster

18.59

Cement based plaster contains mineral filler material as aggregate and

portland cement as main binder, with additives for improved compressive
strength and reduced shrinkage.

Gypsum based
premixed
plaster

18.60

Gypsum based plaster contains pre-mixed minerals, gypsum base rendering

materials and additives which could be applied in one single thick
application without cracking and separation from the substrate.

Standards and
ISO
Certification

18.61

The premixed plaster shall comply with BS 8481, BS EN 13279-1, BS EN

13279-2, BS EN 13914-1, BS EN 13914-2 and PD/CEN/TR 15123:2005.
The premixed plaster manufacturing company shall have acquired ISO
certification in their manufacturing process of the premixed plaster product.
Workmanship

Mixing

18.62

Premixed plaster and clean water shall be mixed on site with portable
electrical mixer or other equipment according to manufacturers
recommendations. Accurate amount of water shall be used to ensure
effective mixing and consistent quality.

Handling &
storage

18.63

Bagged premix mortar shall be separated by types and stored off the ground
in dry, well-ventilated and covered space. Use in order of delivery and
within manufacturer recommended time limit.

Tolerance of
substrate

18.64

Tolerance of evenness of substrate shall be 5 mm for internal concrete

wall, block wall and beams, and 3 mm for internal ceiling soffits.

Substrate
preparation

18.65

Substrate shall be clean; free from dust, contamination, paint, oil and loose
scale. Dampen dry substrate before plastering.

Spatterdash

18.66

Premixed plaster may require the substrate to be treated with spatterdash or

to be keyed before application depending on manufacturers
recommendations.

Re-tempering

18.67

Do not use mixes after initial set has taken place and do not re-temper or
reconstitute mixes unless permitted by the manufacturers instructions.

Supervision

18.68

Premixed plaster shall be carried out by experienced applicators. All the

workers and supervisory staff employed for the work shall be fully
instructed and trained on the method of preparation and application in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

Cement based
premixed
plaster
application

18.69

Cement based premixed plaster shall be applied with trowel or spraying

machine in several coats. Application method, thickness, number of coats
and drying time between coats shall be strictly in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.

Gypsum based
premixed
plaster
application

18.70

(i)

Gypsum based premixed plaster shall be applied with trowel or

spraying machine in single coat of thickness in accordance with
manufacturers recommendations.

18-8

Section 18 Finishes

(ii)

Half-set plaster shall be leveled with featheredge, scraped off surplus

material and worked from bottom to top of wall.

(iii)

Allow drying time of 30-60 minutes in accordance with

manufacturers recommendations; sprinkle surface with clean water
and smooth with a hard sponge float to remove trowel and
featheredge marks in circular motion.

SCREEDS
Materials
Aggregate for
light-weight
screeds

18.71

Aggregate for lightweight screeds shall be as follows:

(i)

5 mm exfoliated vermiculite to BS EN 13055-1.

(ii)

Approved proprietary lightweight beads or granules.

Air entraining
agent for
light-weight
screeds

18.72

Air entraining agent for lightweight screed shall be an approved admixture

which will produce screeds with a dry density not more than 1,200 kg/m2.

Vapour barrier

18.73

Vapour barrier shall be 0.08 mm polythene sheet.

Workmanship

Screeds
generally

18.74

Floor screeds generally shall be in accordance with to BS 82044:2004+A1

and BS 8000:-11.1 and wall screeds to BS 5385:Pt 1 & BS 8000:-11.1
respectively.

Mixes for
screeds

18.75

Screeds generally shall consist of cement and sand 1:3. Use the minimum
water consistent with workability.
For floor screeds over 40 mm thick, mix shall be 1 part cement, 1.5 parts
sand or granite fines and 3 parts coarse aggregate graded 10 mm down with
at least 75% being retained on a 5 mm B.S. sieve.
Use granite fines instead of sand, when required to avoid efflorescence on
the surface of the finish.

Thickness of
wall render

18.76

Thickness of wall render shall be 10 mm (minimum) with surface scratched

to form key.

Thickness of
floor screeds

18.77

Thickness of floor screeds shall be as follows:

Laying floor and 18.78

roof screeds

(i)

Laid monolithically with the base: 15 mm (minimum) thick. (For

preparation of base, see Clause 18.17).

(ii)

Bonded to a hardened concrete base: 20 mm (minimum) thick. (For

preparation of base, see Clause 18.16).

(iii)

Not bonded to the base: 50 mm (minimum) thick including tile

finish.

(iv)

Floating: 65 mm (minimum) thick including tile finish.

Lay monolithic and bonded screeds in one coat.

Lay and compact screeds level or to falls, as required.

18-9

Section 18 Finishes

Bay sizes for

floor and roof
screeds

18.79

Lay screeds in bays of 15 sq. m (maximum) with length not more than 1.5
times the width in chequerboard pattern. Allow 24 hours (minimum) interval
between laying adjoining bays.

Lightweight
screeds

18.80

Lightweight aggregate screeds shall consist of cement and lightweight

aggregate 1:8 for roofs and 1:6 for floors unless contrary to the
manufacturers' recommendations.
Air entrained screeds shall have a dry density of not more than 1,200 kg/m3.
Lightweight screeds shall be 50 mm (minimum) thick, excluding topping.
Finish lightweight screeds with cement and sand or granite fines 1:4 topping
15 mm (minimum) thick laid monolithically with the screed.
When specified lay vapour barrier under lightweight roof screeds. Lap 150
mm at joints.

Surface finishes
for screeds

18.81

The surface of screeds shall be finished with one of the following surface
finishes, level, to falls as specified:
(i)

Steel trowel or power float to give a smooth untextured surface.

(ii)

Wood float to give an even textured surface.

(iii)

Stiff brush to give a slightly roughened texture.

The finish shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for

the finish to be applied or laid.
Pipes through
roofs

18.82

Where pipes of less than 50 mm diameter pass through flat roofs:

(i)

Form cement and sand or granite fines 1:3 surround 150 x 150 mm
around pipe sleeve, to project 150 mm above finished roof level.

(ii)

Finish top to slope.

(iii)

For groups of pipes, form combined surrounds.

IN-SITU FLOOR AND WALL FINISHES

Materials
Stone aggregate

18.83

Stone aggregate shall be crushed grey granite or white stone to BS EN

12620+A1, graded from 10 to 3 mm and free from dust.

Marble
aggregate

18.84

Marble aggregate shall be angular crushed marble, free from dust, and of the
colour required.

Surface
hardener

18.85

Surface hardener shall be an approved proprietary liquid hardener and dust

proofer.

Hardening
admixture

18.86

Hardening admixture shall be an approved proprietary make.

Dividing strip

18.87

Dividing strip shall be aluminium, brass, stainless steel or plastic strip 3 mm

thick and to the full depth of the screed. Plastic strip shall be of the colour
required.
Form key as one of the following:
(i)

Generally sides of section shall be grooved.

18-10

Section 18 Finishes

Non-slip strip

18.88

(ii)

Metal strip: one edge shall be cut and bent at 150 mm centres, to form
lugs.

(iii)

Plastic strip: to have 5 to 10 mm holes at 150 mm centres with plastic

pins inserted to form dowels.

Non-slip strip insert shall be 25 x 15 mm slightly curved on top and

consisting of:
(i)

A compound of cement and carborundum dust 1:1, or

(ii)

A proprietary insert strip.

Workmanship
Generally

18.89

In-situ floor finishes generally shall be to BS 8204-1. BS 8204-2+A2, BS

8204-4+A1 and BS 8204-5+A1.

Thickness

18.90

Unless otherwise specified, minimum thickness of in-situ floor and wall

finishes shall be as Table 18.4.
TABLE 18.4
Thickness of Finish

Granolithic

Terrazzo
Coloured Finish

Location

Floors laid
Monolithically
Floors
Walls & Dadoes
Treads
Risers

Plain

First
Coat

Finishing
Coat

First
Coat

Finishing
Coat

15 mm

15 mm

20 mm
20 mm
20 mm
15 mm

10 mm
10 mm
-

10 mm
10 mm
20 mm
15 mm

10 mm
10 mm
-

15 mm
10 mm
25 mm
15 mm

Laying flooring

18.91

Lay floor finishes as Clauses 18.78 and 18.79.

Cement and
sand finish

18.92

Finish shall be composed of cement and sand 1:3.

18-11

Section 18 Finishes

Granolithic
finish

18.93

Granolithic finish shall be mixed in the following proportions as Table 18.5.

TABLE 18.5
Granolithic Finishes

Type

Cement

Sand

A
B

2
2

1
1

C
D

1
1

Granite
aggregate

White
stone

Surface
finish

Trowelled
or rubbed

4
2

Washed
2

Surface finishes
on flooring

18.94

Finish surface as Clause 18.81 as soon as compaction is completed. Do not

bring excessive laitance to the surface and remove any which appears. Do
not wet the surface. Repeat trowelling process or power floating at least
three times at intervals within 10 hours of laying.

Surface finishes
on granolithic

18.95

Form the following alternative finishes as on granolithic, as required:

Coloured finish

Terrazzo

18.96

18.97

(i)

Trowelled: smooth or wood float finish as Clause 18.18 (i) and (ii)
respectively.

(ii)

Rubbed: after trowelled finish has set, rub down with fine
carborundum stone to form a smooth finish and to expose the
aggregate.

(iii)

Washed: before trowelled finish has set, brush off the surface to
expose the aggregate.

Coloured cement and sand and coloured granolithic finish are to be laid in
two coats as follows:
(i)

First coat with ordinary cement and sand 1:3 and

(ii)

Finishing coat as Clauses 18.92 or 18.93 and 5 mm thick (minimum)

for cement and sand finish and 10 mm thick (minimum) for
granolithic finish using coloured cement. Apply the finishing coat
before the first coat has set.

Where terrazzo is to be laid in two coats, the coats shall be as follows:

(i)

First coat of cement and sand 1:3

(ii)

Finishing coat mixed in one of the proportions shown in Table 18.6.

Apply the finishing coat before the first coat has set.

18-12

Section 18 Finishes

TABLE 18.6
Terrazzo

Type

Coloured
cement

Marble
aggregate

Grade of
aggregate(mm)

A
B
C

1
1
1

2
2.5
3

5 to 3
10 to 5
10

Minimum thickness of first and finishing coat shall be as Table 18.4.

Divide terrazzo work into panels of 1 m2 (maximum).
Grind surface to expose the aggregate and produce a smooth finish.
Fill any voids with matching cement.
Apply one coat of wax polish to wall finishes. Floor finishes shall not be
highly polished, or wax polished.
Dividing strip

18.98

Bed dividing strip through the total thickness of the base and finishing coat.
Strips shall not be haunched prior to laying the base.

Non-slip strip

18.99

Fill non-slip compound or bed non-slip into groove, and finish to project 3
mm above finished surface.

Finishes to edge
of stairs

18.100

Form granolithic or terrazzo aprons, strings and skirtings to edge of stairs as

drawings.
RIGID TILE OR SLAB FINISHES
Materials

Samples

18.101

Submit samples of tiles, and obtain approval.

Concrete floor
tiles

18.102

Plain concrete or granolithic concrete floor tiles shall be of the required

colour and surface finish.

Ceramic floor
tiles and
floor quarries

18.103

Ceramic floor tiles including corresponding accessories, shall be to BS EN

14411.
Ceramic floor tiles shall be Group A I or B I: water absorption not exceeding
3%.
Floor quarries shall be to Group A IIb of BS EN 14411: water absorption of
6% < E =< 10%.
Where ceramic floor tiles or clay floor quarries are described as "including
specials" the full range of BS fittings shall be required. Elsewhere mitred
angles of coved skirtings and the like shall be permitted.
All tiles and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer and shall match in
colour and texture.
Where tiles are described as anti-slip, they shall be suitably embossed or
treated with carborundum or similar grit to comply with relevant standards,
e.g. Germany DIN standard or other recognized international standards to

18-13

Section 18 Finishes

provide an anti-slip surface.

Terrazzo floor
tiles

18.104

Terrazzo floor tiles shall be to BS EN 13748-1 & BS EN 13748-2 and of the

required colour and surface finish.

"Canton" tiles

18.105

"Canton" tiles shall be hard, sound, square, well burnt, free from twist,
cracks or other defects, 30 to 35 mm thick and from 300 to 400 mm square.

Concrete
roofing tiles

18.106

Concrete roofing tiles and fitting shall be to BS EN 490 + A1 and BS EN

491.
The tiles shall be flat tiles 30 mm thick and 300 mm square or 35 mm thick
and 400 mm square.

Insulating
roofing tiles

18.107

Insulating roofing tiles shall be 40 mm thick and 300 mm square or 400 mm

square with a density of 1,250 kg/m3. m 10%. The upper surface shall be
hard and suitable for pedestrian traffic. Five legged tiles shall not be
permitted.

Glazed ceramic
wall tiles

18.108

Glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be to BS EN 14411 and in Group A IIa or B

IIa with a water absorption not exceeding 6%.
Tiles shall be glazed, white or coloured as required and with cushion edge
and with inclusive spacer lugs as required by SO.

External facing
tiles

18.109

External facing tiles shall be of the specified type from an approved

manufacturer.

Mosaic tiles

18.110

Unless otherwise specified mosaic tiles shall be from an approved

manufacturer and as follows:

Stone slabs

18.111

(i)

Glass mosaic tiles shall be fully vitrified glass tile size 20 x 20 mm

and 4 mm thick, regular in shape, free from cracks or sharp edges
and uniform in colour and texture.

(ii)

Glazed ceramic mosaic tiles shall be similar to glazed wall tiles but
size 18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm and 5 mm thick and with square
edges.

(iii)

Unglazed vitreous mosaic tiles shall be size 18 x 18 mm or 18 x 38

mm or 38 x 38 mm and 4 or 5 mm thick with matching coved tiles
and from the colour range specified.

Stone slabs for paving or wall facings or fittings shall be of the quality and
colours specified on drawings or as selected by the SO and free from flaws
and defects throughout. Unless otherwise specified, slabs for wall facings
shall not be less than 20 mm thick and slabs for paving surfaces shall not be
less than 32 mm thick.
Stones shall be jointed so as to be dressed to match stone by stone.
No stone shall be offered by quarries where variety is expected to develop or
which deviates from the selected stone.
Marble shall be true metamorphic limestone.

Precast concrete
paving blocks

18.112

Precast concrete paving blocks shall be to BS 7533-3 + A1 & BS EN 1338

and of the size, colour and surface textured specified.

Adhesive

18.113

Adhesive for tiles or mosaics shall be compatible with background and

finish and shall be an approved proprietary brand. Adhesives for tiles shall
be to BS EN 12004. The approved proprietary adhesive shall be used in
strict accordance with the manufacturers technical specifications and

18-14

Section 18 Finishes

recommendations, including and not limited to the valid shelf life and the
setting time of the product.
The expiry date and the setting time shall be clearly indicated with label and
stamp for necessary inspection by the SO.
Slurry

18.114

Slurry shall be plain or coloured cement and water mixed to creamy

consistency.

Grout

18.115

Grouts mixed with plain or coloured cement shall be:

(i)

For floor tiling generally: cement and sand 1:3, mixed to a paste
with the minimum of water.

(ii)

For mosaic tiling or glazed wall tiling: cement and powdered

limestone 1:3.

(iii)

For external facing tiles: cement and sand 1:3.

If agreed by the SO, approved proprietary brands of grout may be used in

strict accordance with the manufacturers technical specifications and
recommendations.
Stone wall
cladding

18.116

Material for stone wall cladding as in Clause 16.14 and sealant as in Clause
16.21.
Workmanship

Floor and wall

tiling generally

18.117

Laying floor tiles 18.118

Floor and wall tiling generally shall be:

(i)

Floor tiling shall be to BS 5385:Pts. 3 and 5.

(ii)

Internal wall tiling shall be to BS 5385:Pt.1, external wall tiling

shall be to BS 5385:Pt. 2.

(iii)

Buttering to Clause 3.2.1.8 in BS 8000-11.1.

Fix floor tiles as follows:

(i)

(ii)

Semi dry method direct to concrete base (for preparation of base, see
Clause 18.16):
(a)

Soak tiles in clean water and allow to drain.

(b)

Lay semi-dry mix cement and sand 1:4 bed thoroughly

compacted to the required thickness (20 mm minimum)
finished to the required levels, falls and currents.

(c)

Pour cement and sand slurry over bedding and spread and
trowel to 3 mm (minimum) thick.

(d)

Lay tiles, mixed from six boxes, and tamp firmly into bed with
straight and even joints and 3 mm (minimum) wide.

(e)

Allow bedding to set.

(f)

Grout up joints and clean surplus grout face of tiles as work

proceeds.

Thick bed method to screed:

(a)

Soak tiles in clean water and allow to drain.

18-15

Section 18 Finishes

(iii)

(b)

Damp the screed with clean water to reduce suction if required.

(c)

Lay cement and sand 1:3 bed generally 15 mm thick but never
thicker than the tiles.

(d)

Coat back of tiles with slurry immediately before fixing.

(e)

Lay tiles mixed from six boxes and tamp firmly into bed with
straight and even joints and 3 mm (minimum) wide.

(f)

Allow bedding to set.

(g)

Grout up joints and clean surplus grout from face of tiles as

work proceeds.

Thin bed method:

If approved fix floor tiles using a bed of proprietary tile adhesive to
BS EN 12004 in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Laying roof tiles

18.119

Lay on roof "Canton", concrete or lightweight tiles as follows:

(i)

Bed and joint tiles in cement mortar (1:4).

(ii)

Lay tiles loose and fill with cold bitumen between joints and point.

Expansion joints 18.120

Allow for expansion with a 75 mm space around perimeter and 25 mm joints

per 9 m2 cut through joints and fill with cold bitumen or approved sealant.

Traffic on floor
tiling, etc

18.121

Do not allow traffic on floors or roofs until 4 days after completion of tiling
and subsequently permit only light traffic for a further 10 days.

Fixing wall tiles

18.122

Fix tiles to wall render as follows:

(i)

Thick bed method:

(a)

Sort and remove tiles with uneven colour or dimensions. Soak

tiles in clean water for 30 minutes (minimum). Stack to drain
and fix as soon as the surface water has drained off.

(b)

Damp the wall render with clean water sufficiently to prevent

it from absorbing water from the bedding mortar.

(c)

Butter the back of each tile with cement slurry and tap firmly
into position so that the bed is solid throughout. Thickness of
finished bed shall be 5 to 15 mm.

(d)

Joints shall be 2 mm (minimum) wide, and maximum 3.5 mm

wide unless specified otherwise.

(e)

Make any adjustment to tiles within 10 minutes of fixing.

(f)

Clean tiles and joints before bedding hardens.

(g)

Grout up joints 24 hours (minimum) after fixing tiles. Clean

off surplus grout as work proceeds.

(h)

Clean tiles at completion.

Thick bed method shall not be used for fixing wall tiles with water
absorption value lower than 0.5%.

18-16

Section 18 Finishes

(ii)

Fixing external
wall tiles

18.123

Thin bed method:

(a)

Apply wall render of cement: sand (1:3) to the concrete or

substrate surface. Build up the render to the required thickness
of 15 mm in layers. Thickness of each layer shall not exceed
10 mm. Allow the wall render to dry off thoroughly.

(b)

Fix wall tiles, mixed from six boxes, to the wall render using
an approved proprietary adhesive to BS EN 12004 in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

(c)

Grout up joints using an approved grout or a proprietary grout

to BS EN 13888.

Fixing of external wall tiles shall be thin bed method as follows:

(a)

Apply wall render of cement: sand (1:3) to the substrate surface. Build
up the render to the required thickness of 15 mm in layers. Thickness
of each layer shall not exceed 10 mm. Allow the wall render to dry off
thoroughly.

(b)

Fix wall tiles, mixed from six boxes, to the wall render using an
approved proprietary adhesive to BS EN 12004 in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations. Width of joints shall be as
specified.

(c)

Grout up joints using an approved grout or a proprietary grout to BS

EN 13888. Upon completion of the tiling works, appropriate test
methods, such as in-situ pull-out tests by specialist contractor and
hammer tapping, shall be carried out to ensure that the external facing
tiles have been applied properly to achieve the required adhesion to
the building structure or substrate surface according to the approved
proprietary tile adhesive.

Carry out infra-red thermographic scanning by an approved specialist and

submit report within 4 months upon completion of external tiling. Should
the report indicate that any part of the wall tiling has not been affixed
properly, the Contractor shall carry out approved remedial measures at his
own expense and carry out further infra-red thermographic scanning to the
satisfaction of the SO.
Fixing mosaic
tiles

18.124

Fix mosaic tiles as follows:

(i)

Thick bed method direct to concrete slab as follows:

(a)

Lay semi-dry mix cement and sand 1:4 bed thoroughly

compacted to the required thickness (20 mm minimum)
finished to the required levels and falls.

(b)

Pour cement and sand slurry over the bedding and spread and
trowel 3 mm thick.

(c)

Coat back of sheets of mosaic tiles with cement slurry

immediately before fixing. Slurry shall be of the same colour
as the final grout.

(d)

Fix sheets of mosaic tiles and tamp firmly into bed,

maintaining straight and regular joints, and ensuring that joints
between sheets are equal to tile joints.

(e)

Remove backing paper, complete final straightening and rub

surface with grout, coloured as required, to fill joints, cleaning
surplus grout from face of tiles as work proceeds.

18-17

Section 18 Finishes

(ii)

(iii)

Fixing stone
paving slabs

Thick bed method to wall render as follows:

(a)

Damp the wall render with clean water sufficiently to prevent

it from absorbing water from the bedding mortar.

(b)

Apply bedding coat of mortar 10 mm (maximum) thick

consisting of cement and sand (1:3).

(c)

Coat surface of wall render and back of sheets of mosaic tiles

with slurry immediately before fixing. Slurry shall be of the
same colour as the final grout.

(d)

Fix sheets of mosaic tiles and tamp firmly into position,

maintaining straight and regular joint, ensuring that joints
between sheets are equal to joints between tiles.

(e)

Remove backing paper, complete final straightening and rub

surface with grout from face of tiles as work proceeds.

Thin bed method:

(a)

If approved, fix mosaic tiles using a bed of proprietary

adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

(b)

Grout up joints using a proprietary grout as specified, which

may be coloured in accordance with SO requirements.

18.125

Bed stone paving slabs with one coat of approved sealer at back of stone slab
on screeds. Bedding shall be not less than 12 mm thick comprising cement,
and finely screened sand 1:3. Finish with a perfectly level and even surface
and with joints between slabs 2.5 mm thick, or laid to fall as directed by the
SO.

Fixing stone wall 18.126

slabs

Generally fix stone wall slabs in accordance with Clauses 10.22, 16.14 and
16.15 for heights greater than 1.2 metre above any structural floor level. Fix
stone wall slabs not less than 12 mm from the structural surfaces on Keenes
cement or Plaster of Paris dabs. Space slabs so that each slab is evenly
supported by not less than five dabs. Dowel for and fit each slab with copper
cramps and S hooks, formed from 3 mm diameter brass wire. Fix slabs at
approximately 350 mm centres or as directed and solidly bed cramps to the
structure and S hooks to backs of slabs. Provide semi dry cement and sand
(1:4) filling 1500 mm high above floor level at public area with one coat of
sealer at back of stone wall slab before fixing where specified.
Shop drawings shall be submitted for dry fixing system.

Precast concrete
paving

18.127

Lay slabs minimum 50 mm thick on 25 mm minimum bed of lime and sand

or cement and sand mortar 1:3. Lay slabs to an even surface, well pressed
into bed, with no level differences between adjacent slabs.
Joints shall be even and about 5 mm wide. Stagger joints to form bond as
specified. Grout up with cement lime and sand or granite fines 1:3:6. Work
well into joints. Clean off surplus grout from surface of slabs.

18-18

Section 18 Finishes

FLEXIBLE TILE OR SHEET FINISHES

Generally
Approved
brands and
specialist
contractors

18.128

Flexible tile and sheet finishes shall be of the best quality of approved type
and colour, and in accordance with the following specification. Sizes and
thicknesses shall be as specified hereafter unless specifically ordered
otherwise. The work shall be executed by an approved specialist contractor.
Materials

Samples

18.129

Submit samples and obtain approval.

Semi-flexible
PVC tiles

18.130

Semi-flexible PVC tiles shall be to BS EN 654, size 225 x 225 or 300 x 300
and 2.5 mm thick.

Vinyl tiles

18.131

Unbacked flexible PVC (vinyl) tiles shall be to BS EN 649, size 225 x 225
or 300 x 300 and 2 mm thick.

Unbacked
flexible PVC
vinyl sheet

18.132

Unbacked flexible PVC (vinyl) sheet shall be to BS EN 649, 2.0 mm thick to

floors and 1.2 mm thick to walls.

Foam backed
vinyl sheet

18.133

Foam backed PVC (vinyl) sheet shall be to BS EN 651 and 3 mm thick

overall. The wearing layer shall be PVC (vinyl) sheet to BS EN 649 and 1.5
mm thick.

Linoleum

18.134

Linoleum tiles and sheet shall be to BS EN 12104 and shall be 3.2 mm or 4.5
mm thick.

Rubber tiles and 18.135

sheet

Solid rubber tiles and sheet shall be to 4 mm thick.

Adhesive

18.136

Adhesive shall be that recommended by the tile or sheeting manufacturer.

Polish

18.137

Polish shall be emulsion polish of approved type recommended by the tile or

sheeting manufacturer.
Store rolls after delivery, but before laying, in accordance with the
manufacturers instructions. Rolls which have deformed because of
improper storage shall be rejected.
Workmanship

Damaged tiles

18.138

Do not use tiles or sheet which have deteriorated in stock or have a tendency
to curl at the edges and corners.

Laying

18.139

Thoroughly clean the screed or backing from grease, oil, wax, paint, dirt or
dust and fill all cracks, minor holes and services with a suitable filler
recommended by the tile or sheeting manufacturer.
Lay all tiles, floor and wall sheeting strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. If these instructions call for heating the tiles
prior to laying, then apply such preheating to a temperature just sufficient to
cause pliability. Preheat tiles in batches. Preheating single tiles shall not be
permitted.
Apply adhesive in a thin film and spread evenly with a notched or plain
trowel, then even out with a roller as recommended by the manufacturer. If a
notched trowel is used the notches shall be of the size recommended and
shall be renewed periodically to ensure the correct spread of adhesive. Tiles
or sheets shall be laid immediately after the adhesive is applied.

18-19

Section 18 Finishes

Closely butt joints and cut accurately at right angles to the tiles or sheet
surface to an agreed design and with only the minimum necessary jointing.
Weld joints of PVC sheet to form a continuous surface with approved PVC
welding rods coloured to match the sheeting.
Relay any areas insufficiently bonded or showing an uneven surface.
Polish

18.140

After laying, thoroughly clean the tiling or sheeting with water and a
detergent recommended by the manufacturer. Apply two coats of non-slip,
matt emulsion polish. Protect the floors with approved covering.
CARPET OR TEXTILE FLOOR COVERINGS
Generally

Approved
brands and
specialist
contractors

18.141

All carpet shall be of approved type and colour and in accordance with the
following specification, of an approved brand, laid on screed treated with an
approved sealant to reduce dust and pollution.

Quality

18.142

Carpet shall be either of the following qualities as specified:

Classification

18.143

(i)

"General contract quality carpet" for use in single occupant offices,

committee and conference rooms, small libraries, staff quarters, light
wear corridors and other areas as required.

(ii)

"Heavy contract quality carpet" for use in public rooms, general

offices, reception areas, busy corridors and other areas as required.

Carpet shall be manufactured by one of the following methods:

(i)

Single or face-to-face traditional loom.

(ii)

Needle insertion loom.

(iii)

Needle punch, fibre bonded, flocked or knitted.

(iv)

Other weaving machinery producing the quality of carpet to meet the

performance requirements detailed in this specification.

Materials
Samples

18.144

Submit samples of carpet and underlays together with relevant

manufacturer's literature and submit test certificates for carpet to
demonstrate that it complies with the requirements of Clauses 18.149 and
18.150 and obtain approval.

Pile yarn

18.145

The composition of the pile yarn shall be fibres of one of the followings:
(i)

Wool or wool blended with up to 20% nylon.

(ii)

Nylon with antistatic properties for general use.

(iii)

Polypropylene

(iv)

Blend of fibres with antistatic properties for general use.

(v)

Blend of fibres formulated shall provide full antistatic properties to

meet the requirements specified by International Business Machine
(I.B.M.) or International Computer Company (I.C.L.) for computer
floor coverings, or other equivalent approved by the SO.

18-20

Section 18 Finishes

Backing
materials

18.146

The warp and weft, where applicable, shall be cotton, jute or polypropylene.

Back coating

18.147

The back coating where required shall be evenly spread with no build-up at
the selvedges of the carpet and which gives fray-resistant finish to cut edges.
(i)

(ii)

(iii)

The quality and application of the back coating shall be such that:
(a)

Its penetration shall assist tuft anchorage without wicking into

the surface pile.

(b)

The finish carpet may be seamed without gumming the needle

and sewing thread, due to softening of the compound.

(c)

Folding the carpet shall not cause permanent creasing.

The backing coating shall:

(a)

Not deteriorate substantially with age or low temperature.

(b)

Not become sticky with temperatures and humidities

experienced when laid in Hong Kong, or in transit thereto.

(c)

Be capable of spot cleaning using dry cleaning solvents

without serious deterioration.

The backing compound may be loaded with 100 parts of filler to 100
parts of dry rubber.

Dyeing

18.148

Carpets shall be dyed by a process that produces full and even penetration of
the fibres with minimum degradation of the yarn and it shall be applied
strictly in accordance with the dyestuffs manufacturer's instructions.

Colour fastness

18.149

Colour fastness of carpet shall meet the requirements of Table 18.7:

TABLE 18.7
Colour Fastness
Related to

Minimum Acceptable
Grade

Method of Test

Light

BS EN ISO 105-B01,
E01, B02, D02, G02,
B03, B04, E05, C06,
E06, X08, X13.

Wet and dry

rubbing

Pile yarn assembled

and tested in
accordance with
BS EN ISO 105-X12

Shampooing

Test on finished carpet

in accordance with the
recommendations of
the Society of Dyers
and Colourists

Organic Solvents

BS EN ISO 105-X05

18-21

Section 18 Finishes

Physical
properties

18.150

Physical properties of the finished carpet shall be in accordance with Table

18.8:
TABLE 18.8

Properties

Requirements

Method of Test

Total mass

Requirement as to mass shall depend upon

construction of finished carpet and the amount
of back coating applied to achieve the required
tuft anchorage

BS 4223 (method 12)

Number of tufts per 100 sq. cm

Minimum 1,000

BS 4223 (method 8)

Thickness loss under dynamic

loading

Thickness loss after 1,000 impacts not more

than 25%

BS ISO 2094
Using dynamic loading
machine on original pile
thickness

Thickness; compression and

recovery

Percentage compression recovery not less than

60%

BS 4098
on original pile
thickness

Dimensional stability;
extension due to mechanical
action

Mean non-recoverable not exceed Warp 1%,

Weft 1%

to be decided by the SO

Dimensional change when

immersed in cold water; to
determine behaviour of the
carpet when subjected to total
saturation in cleaning or
shampooing when excessive
water is applied

Dimensional change not to exceed Warp 2%,

Weft 2%

BS 4682-4

Flammability

Shall not propagate flame after removal of nut

and the charred area shall not exceed 35 mm
radius

BS 4790

Moth proofing

The carpet shall be permanently moth proofed

to be decided by the SO

Resistance to
wear

18.151

Although there is no standard laboratory test for resistance to wear, tenderers

must satisfy the Employer that their products will sustain the wear
anticipated. For example, they may quote tests or reports illustrating the
suitability of their products, or list locations, preferably in Hong Kong where
their products have been laid for a period of at least 2 years, or produce
satisfactory evidence from overseas to endorse their suitability.

Foam backed
carpet

18.152

Foam backed carpets shall not be permitted unless the foam is expanded
PVC.

Carpet tiles

18.153

Carpet tiles shall be of the same size so that they could be easily
interchanged, relocated or replaced.
Special tiles, with proper edging around, cut out to receive floor socket or
outlet are required.
All carpet surfaces shall be "Scotch-guarded", or other approved protective
treatment to be provided. No unraveling of yarn at edge of module is
permitted.

18-22

Section 18 Finishes

All carpet tiles shall be dimensionally stable (resist shrinkage) in any

circumstance.
Environmentally
friendly carpets

Underlay

18.154

18.155

Environmentally friendly carpets shall satisfy the following criteria:

(a)

Carpet manufacturing company shall have acquired ISO 14001

Environmental Management Systems or Eco-Management and
Audit Scheme (EMAS) of Denmark or similarly approved by the
SO.

(b)

Carpets shall be completely free of Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).

(c)

Carpet backings shall be PVC free; materials to be cotton, jute, resin

or polyurethane.

(d)

Adhesives shall be free of synthetic latex, giving no volatile organic

compound emission. Water-based adhesives or adhesive-free
installation shall be used.

(e)

Metal complex dyes and acid dyes shall not be used for dyeing.

(f)

Carpets shall be long lasting, having a lifecycle not less than 10 years.

(g)

Carpets shall not contain harmful substances and odour. They shall
pass the testing and labeling program run by Carpet and Rug
Institutes Indoor Air Quality Carpet Testing Programme (U.S.A.) or
Danish Indoor Climate Labeling(Denmark) or GUT (European
association for environmentally friendly carpets) or similarly
approved by the SO.

(h)

Carpets shall be capable of being reused, recycled or acceptable by

landfill for disposal. When reused, the above requirements shall be
followed. In case of recycle or landfill, the carpets shall not cause
contamination to the surrounding environment.

Provide underlay, where required, one of the following types to BS 5808 and
BS EN 14499.
(i)

Felt

(ii)

Cellular

(iii)

Rubber crumb

(iv)

Composite underlay

Carpet grippers

18.156

Carpet grippers shall have two rows of small angled pins at not less than 50
mm centres projecting 4 mm from a preformed strip. Submit samples of
carpet grippers and obtain approval.

Adhesives

18.157

Adhesive for fixing carpet shall be as recommended by the carpet

manufacturers and be compatible with the sub-base. Storage and use should
be in accordance with the appropriate recommendations, e.g. the British
Adhesive Manufacturers Association booklet "Safe Handling of Adhesives
in Industry".

Release bond
agent

18.158

Release bond agent shall be a proprietary release coating or other approved

system and be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.

18-23

Section 18 Finishes

Workmanship
Installation
generally

18.159

Install carpets and underlays in accordance with BS 5325.

Install carpets so that they are flat and of even tension. Carpet shall not be
displaced by movement of people or objects on the surface to the point
where permanent slackness, rucking or rippling is caused.
Closely fit edges to skirting, cover fillets or other perimeters. Joint carpet at
doorway within the thickness of the closed door.
Secure doorway terminations of carpet by sealing, whipping or binding
before seaming or covering with cover strips where they abut dissimilar
materials.
No carpet jointing shall be permitted at right angles to a door location within
2 m of any door centre line unless accepted by the SO.
No fitting-out of areas with small pieces or offcuts shall be permitted.
Carpet tiles on raised floor panels shall either be stuck down with
double-sided tape or alternatively with some form of bonding agent integral
with the backing of the tile with the approval of the SO.

Laying
underlays

18.160

Provide underlays in all cases except as follows:

(i)

Where foam or felt backing is an integral part of the carpet proposed.

(ii)

Where the carpet shall be fully adhered in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations.

(iii)

Where the manufacturer recommends that no underlay is required.

Ensure the base is smooth, clean, and dry and compatible with the underlay
and carpeting. Similarly ensure any adhesive to be used is compatible with
the base, underlay and carpet.
Lightly smooth the underlay by hand to ensure that it lies flat with no
bubbles or wrinkles visible on the surface. Secure the underlay sufficiently
to prevent movement when the carpet is laid over it.
Seaming and
jointing carpet

18.161

Plan the layout of the carpet to keep seams to the minimum practicable.
Seams shall be unobstructive and positioned such that, where possible:
(i)

They run the length of the area.

(ii)

Traffic runs along the length rather than across the seams.

(iii)

Seams shall not be placed in areas subjected to heavier or twisting

wear or in doorways or narrow accesses.

Seam or joint carpet by one of the following methods:

(iv)

Machine or hand sewing; sew seams to the full length and properly
lock off. Stitch to an even tension and ensure the seam lies flat after
laying. Protect the raw edge of the pile where necessary, to prevent
loss of pile along the seam.

(v)

Reinforced tape and adhesive (cold applied) ; ensure that the

adhesive is dry before stretching.

(vi)

Heat bonded tapes; ensure that adequate penetration of adhesive is

achieved by applying sufficient heat and pressure simultaneously.

18-24

Section 18 Finishes

(vii)

Installations of
carpet

18.162

Seaming cement; Joint foam backed or unitary-backed carpets with a

continuous bead of seaming cement to the full length of the primary
backing and joint under compression.

Secure carpets by using one of the following methods:

(i)

Carpet gripper method (suitable for woven, tufted, and secondary

backed bonded carpet):
Plug and screw or nail carpet gripper strip around the perimeter 6-8
mm from the skirting. Use recommended adhesives between screws
and nail centres. Stretch carpet over the gripper using knee kickers,
trim the edge of the carpet and ensure that it is securely trapped in the
gap between the gripper and the skirting. Use power stretchers for
installations over 7 m long or wide and use a double row of carpet
grippers.

(ii)

Fully adhering method (suitable for all types of carpet):

Ensure that the floor is properly dry, free from dust, and contaminants
which will affect the adhesion. Ensure that the adhesive is spread
evenly and that only a sufficient area that can be properly bonded is
laid at one time. Ensure that maximum adhesive contact is obtained
by brushing or rolling in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
Cut edges shall be seamed straight and square before adhesion in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Trim the carpet to
the perimeter before the adhesive dries.
Do not permit traffic or installation of furniture on adhered areas for
at least 24 hours.

(iii)

Release bonded method (suitable for all types of carpet):

Apply the release agent before adhering generally in accordance with
the Clause 18.162 (ii) above.

Protection and
cleaning

18.163

Clear all carpet areas of tools and waste. Remove all pieces of partly loose
warp or face yarn with napping scissors. Rectify any lumps, surface
irregularities and areas of inadequate or uneven tension that are apparent.
Clean in an approved manner the installed carpet throughout the building
once after completion prior to acceptance by the SO.
RAISED ACCESSED FLOORING
Materials

Generally

18.164

The raised floor deck shall be fitted with fully removable load bearing
panels, interchangeable, and supported on adjustable pedestals.
The floor system shall not contain materials which by direct contact could be
detrimental to the safety and comfort of the users or which may emit
abnormally toxic combustion materials and gases when burned.
The floor system shall be sturdy, rigid and firm. The design of the system
shall prevent vibration, rattles, rocking squeaks and other noises. Floor
panels that are cut shall be supported by additional pedestals and shall have
framing modified accordingly.

18-25

Section 18 Finishes

Accessories

18.165

All necessary accessories such as ramps, stairs, railings, air grilles, skirting
trims, vertical edging panels, shall be of a similar standard or quality to the
main floor system.

Dimensional
requirements

18.166

All panels shall be of the following dimensional requirements:

(i)

They shall be removable and fully transferable in position and

direction.

(ii)

A close fit to all perimeters is required and the maximum gap shall be
15 mm and the edge panels shall be located to prevent movement.

(iii)

Before application of load, the platform floor surface shall be level to

1.5 mm over any 5 metre square or 6 mm over the entire floor.

(iv)

Height difference between adjacent panels without finish, shall not

exceed 0.75 mm, before load application. Height difference between
loaded and not loaded shall not exceed 3.25 mm.

(v)

Under no load condition, the concavity or convexity of the panel shall

not exceed 0.75 mm when measured horizontally parallel to any edge
or along the diagonal, and the deviation due to twist shall not exceed
1 mm.

(vi)

Panel deviation from square or work size shall not exceed 0.5 mm.

(vii)

Panel edge strips if utilised, shall be firmly fixed and shall not peel or
become detached or break. The edging shall resist a pull off strength
of 5 N for 5 minutes. Edge stripping shall be dimensionally stable
during the stated service life.
Edges of panels shall be chamferred at an angle of 5 degrees for easy
removal of panels. Site-cut edges of panels shall be treated to resist
fire, moisture, and attack by vermin etc.

(viii) The dead load of the raised access floor system shall not exceed 1
kN/m2.
Structural
requirements

18.167

The structural requirements of the floor system shall be in accordance with

the followings:
(i)

Uniformly distributed load - 12.0 kN/m2.

Concentrated load - 4 kN over 25 mm2.
Deflection shall not be more than 1/250 of the shortest span or 2.5
mm whichever is less, up or down from the unloaded plane when
subjected to the loadings quoted above, for a period of 24 hours.
Horizontal load- 1.2KN/m2.

(ii)

The system shall sustain for 5 minutes, 3 times the specified static
loadings without collapse, at any position in the panel.

(iii)

Base area of the pedestal shall not be less than 10,000 mm2 and shall
be fixed to the floors by mechanical means in addition to adhesives.

(iv)

Pedestals shall not be permanently deformed by more than 1 mm per

100 mm in height when subjected to a steady horizontal moment of
90 Nm up to a maximum applied load of 0.5KN, applied to the
uppermost part, for 5 minutes.
They shall sustain a vertical load of 4 x 18 kN over an area of 50 x 50
mm for a period of 5 minutes without collapse and 3 x 13.5 kN
applied through a panel over one quadrant of the head.

18-26

Section 18 Finishes

Free movement in an unloaded pedestal at the maximum and

minimum adjustment position shall not exceed 1 mm per 100 mm
height. The free movement shall be induced by the application of a
horizontal force of 5 N.
The adjustable device on the pedestal shall be positively locked and
shall be designed so as not to become loose due to vibration during
the life of the system. It shall be possible to release the locking by
means of a tool should re-adjustment become necessary.
The length of threading for the upper part of the pedestal shall not be
less than 60 mm.
(v)

Where a supplementary support structure is required to accommodate

variations greater than construction tolerances, i.e. to bridge service
ducts etc., such bridging shall comply with all the relevant
requirements of the specifications.

Alternatively, the raised floor system can be tested for concentrated load,
ultimate load, rolling loads, stringer load, pedestal axial load, pedestal
overturning moment, uniform load and drop impact load according to
Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA)
Recommended Testing Procedure, subject to approval by the SO.
Hydrothermal
requirements

18.168

The platform floor system, including the pedestals, panels, floor covering
and fixings shall withstand the following conditions, without any
delamination or other forms of deterioration:
(i)

Temperature 5 deg. C, relative humidity 90% on both sides of the

floor panels.

(ii)

Temperature 5 deg. C and 95% RH in the floor void side of the

panels. Temperature 25 deg. C and 25% RH on the room side of the
panels.

(iii)

Temperature 8 deg. C and 99% RH in the floor void side of the

panels. Temperature 23 deg. C and 55% RH on the room side of the
panels.

(iv)

Temperature 30 deg. C and 30% RH in the floor void side of the

panels, 19 deg. C and 60% RH on the room side of the panels.

(v)

Temperature variation from 0 deg. C to 60 deg. C with humidity level

of 95%.

The material shall, under the above-mentioned conditions and after the
above-mentioned conditions comply with the Clauses 18.166 and 18.1167.
The material content of the floor panels shall not be capable of absorbing
moisture.
Fire and safety
requirements

18.169

The system shall comply with the following fire and safety requirements:
(i)

It shall be non-inflammable and shall not sustain any combustion.

(ii)

It shall meet the fire requirements of BS 6266 Section 4.4, BS 9999

and APP-83.

(iii)

It shall achieve, within the cavity, Class 1 classifications when tested

in accordance with BS 476:Part 7 and an index of Performance (1)
not exceeding 12 and a sub index (i) not exceeding 6 when tested in
accordance with BS 476:Part 6.

18-27

Section 18 Finishes

Electrical
requirements

18.170

(iv)

Panels that are constructed of combustible material shall be

completely and securely clad on the underside in non-combustible
material with a melting point of not less than 600C. This cladding
shall be securely fixed to ensure that flame or radiant heat does not
come into contact with the combustible material.

(v)

All supporting structure shall be incombustible and shall have a

melting point of not less than 600 C.

(vi)

It shall have a thermal property such that mean temperature of the

upper panel surface shall not increase by more than 140C, when
subject to the 1 kg crib fire test.

The system shall have the electrostatic properties such that the resistance
between the surface of the floor covering and the main building earth
continuity conductor shall be between 5 x 100000 and 2 x 10 to the power of
10 ohms at RH 50%.
All substantial metallic components of the floor system shall be capable of
being electrically bonded.

Fungi, mould
and insects

18.171

All materials shall be resistant to the growth of fungi and micro-organisms,

and to the attack by insects.
The materials shall meet BS 1982 method of test for fungal resistance and
manufactured building materials made of or containing materials of organic
origin.

Toxicity

18.172

The system shall not contain any toxic materials which by physical contact
or by inhalation of gases from such materials, could prove harmful to the
occupants of the building.

Odour

18.173

The materials used in the system shall not give off any odours which could
be unpleasant to the occupants of the building.

Vermin

18.174

Materials used in the system shall not be vulnerable to attack by vermin. The
design of the system should resist infestation by vermin.

Creation of
contaminations

18.175

The system and the floor panels shall not create dust or contaminations
which are likely to be harmful to personnel or equipment.

Durability

18.176

The system supporting components and the floor panels shall have a
minimum life of 25 years.

Protective
finishes

18.177

All parts of the system shall be installed free of rust, corrosion, rot or any
form of deterioration.
All parts of the system shall be suitably finished to prevent deterioration
under normal use in the environments as defined by Clause 18.168. All
finishes shall be clearly stated at the time of tender.

Insulation of
under cavity
floor where
required

18.178

Materials shall be non-combustible and shall be approved by the Fire

Services Department. They shall be compatible with all other materials used
in the raised floor system.
For insulation, the conductivity shall not be more than 0.036 w/m deg. C at
24C.

18-28

Section 18 Finishes

Workmanship
Co-ordination
with building
services
installation

18.179

The Contractor shall co-ordinate with Specialist subcontractors for building

services installation of floor boxes, trunkings and cables to be installed
below the raised floor systems. Locations of the openings on the raised floor
panels for the installation of the floor boxes shall be submitted for the
SO's approval.

Preparation of
Work

18.180

All areas shall be examined before the beginning of the work to determine
that the structure is in a condition to receive the system. The area shall be
broom-cleaned, and uninterrupted for free movement of work flow.

Air and leakage

test

18.181

Subject to the SOs instruction, air and leakage test shall be performed
according to CISCA Recommended Testing Procedure.

Cleaning

18.182

The surface of the floor and the void below shall be left clean and dust free.

Protection of
completed
works

18.183

The raised floor system shall be adequately protected from damage and dirt
before handover to others for the installation of floor coverings and/or other
works.
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

Non-slip
homogenous
floor ties

18.184

The quality tests for non-slip homogenous floor tiles shall be as follows:
a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance Standards
200 x 200 300 x 300 400 x 400

BS EN 14411 Classification

BIb

BIb

BIb

Deviation from Work Size

(%)

0.75

0.6

0.6

Deviation from Average Size

(%)

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.5

0.5

0.5

Edge curvature (%)

0.5

0.5

0.5

Warpage (%)

0.5

0.5

0.5

6. Surface quality (%) free from visible defects

that would impair the appearance of a major
area of tiles

= > 95

> = 95

> = 95

1. Length and
Width

2. Thickness (%)
3. Straightness of sides (%)
4. Rectangularity (%)
5. Surface
flatness

Centre curvature (%)

18-29

BS EN
ISO
10545-2

Section 18 Finishes

b.

Physical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

BS EN 14411 Classification
1. *Water
absorption (%)

Average

BS EN ISO
10545-3

Individual

Acceptance Standards
200 x
200

300 x
300

400 x
400

BIb

BIb

BIb

<=3

<=3

<=3

< = 3.3 < = 3.3

< = 3.3

BS EN ISO
10545-4

> = 30

> = 30

> = 30

>=27

>=27

>=27

3. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs

Scale)

to be decided
by the SO

>=6

>=6

>=6

4. *Abrasion
resistance

BS EN ISO
10545-6

< = 175 < = 175

< = 175

BS EN ISO
10545-8

< = 9.0 < = 9.0

< = 9.0

2. *Modulus of
rupture (N/mm2)

Average
Individual

Deep abrasion
(mm3)

5. *Coefficient of linear thermal expansion

(x106 C)

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.
c.

Chemical properties:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

BS EN 14411 Classification
1. *Resistance to
acids and
alkali
2. *Resistance to
household
chemicals

3. *Resistance to
swimming
pool salts

Acceptance Standards
200 x
200

300 x
300

400 x
400

BIb

BIb

BIb

Sulphuric acid

Required Required Required

Lactic acid

Required Required Required

Potassium hydroxide

Required Required Required

Ammonium chloride

BS EN ISO
10545-13

Required Required Required

Standard cleaning
agent

Required Required Required

Sodium hypochlorite

Required Required Required

Copper sulphate

Required Required Required

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction;

18-30

Section 18 Finishes

d.

Slip resistance:

Test Items

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

Nominal Size (mm)

BS EN 14411 Classification
1. Static Coefficient of Friction for wet
surface
Glazed ceramic
wall tiles

18.185

ASTM - C1028 07

200 x
200

300 x
300

400 x
400

BIb

BIb

BIb

> = 0.5

> = 0.5

> = 0.5

The quality tests for glazed ceramic wall tiles shall be as follows:
a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

BS EN 14411Classification
1. Length & Deviation from
Width
Work Size (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

Acceptance Standards
108 x 108

152 x 152

200 x 200

BIII

BIII

BIII

0.75 /
(-0.3, +0.6)

0.5 /
(-0.3, +0.6)

0.5 /
(-0.3, +0.6)

0.5 / ( 0.25) 0.3 /( 0.25) 0.3 / ( 0.25)

Deviation from
Average Size
(%)

0.5

0.5

0.6

3. Minimum thickness (mm)

5.5

4. Straightness of sides (%)

0.3

0.3

0.3

2. Thickness (mm)

To be decided
by the SO

0.5 / ( 0.3) 0.5 / ( 0.3) 0.5 / ( 0.3)

5. Rectangularity (%)
6. Surface
flatness

Centre
curvature (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

- 0.3, + 0.5
(- 0.2 /
+ 0.8 mm)

- 0.3, + 0.5
(- 0.2 /
+ 0.8 mm)

- 0.3, + 0.5
(- 0.2 /
+ 0.8 mm)

Edge curvature
(%)

- 0.3, + 0.5
(- 0.2 /
+ 0.8 mm)

- 0.3, + 0.5
(- 0.2 /
+ 0.8 mm)

- 0.3, + 0.5
(- 0.2 /
+ 0.8 mm)

Warpage (%)

0.5 /
( 0.5 mm)

0.5 /
( 0.5 mm)

0.5 /
( 0.75 mm)

= > 95

> = 95

> = 95

G=
3 mm 20%

7. Surface quality (%) free

from visible defects that
would impair the
appearance of a major area
of tiles
8. Tile with
spacer
lugs

Width of tile
grout at tiled
surface (mm)
(G)

To be decided
by the SO

Note: Values in brackets are for tiles with spacer lugs only.

18-31

Section 18 Finishes

b.

Physical properties:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

BS EN 14411 Classification

Acceptance Standards
108 x 108

152 x 152

200 x 200

BIII

BIII

BIII

1. *Water
absorption (%)

Average

BS EN ISO
10545-3

= > 10 &
< = 20

= > 10 &
< = 20

= > 10 &
< = 20

2. *Modulus of
rupture
(N/mm2)

thickness
<7.5 mm

BS EN
10545-4

> = 15

> = 15

> = 15

>=12

>=12

>=12

Thickness
>=7.5mm

3. *Scratch hardness of surface

(Mohs Scale)

to be decided
by the SO

>=3

>=3

>=3

4. *Abrasion
resistance

(PEI Method)
BS EN ISO
10545-7

Minimum
Class 2

Minimum
Class 2

Minimum
Class 2

5. *Coefficient of linear thermal

expansion (x106 C)

BS EN ISO
10545-8

< = 9.0

< = 9.0

< = 9.0

6. *Crazing resistance

BS EN ISO
10545-11

Required

Required

Required

Surface
abrasion
(Class1-4)

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.

18-32

Section 18 Finishes

c.

Chemical properties:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

108 x 108

152 x 152

200 x 200

BIII

BIII

BIII

Hydrochloric acid

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Citric acid

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Potassium
hydroxide

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

BS EN 14411 Classification
1. *Resistance
to acids and
alkali

Acceptance Standards

2. *Resistance
to household
chemicals

Ammonium
chloride

BS EN
10545-13

Standard cleaning
agent (See Note 2)

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

3. *Resistance
to swimming
pool salts

Sodium
hypochlorite

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Copper sulphate

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

4. *Resistance
to staining

Methylene blue

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

Minimum
Class B

BS EN
10545-14

Potassium
permanganate

Note: 1. For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction;
2. The cleaning agent used is Bathroom Magiclean available in supermarkets.

18-33

Section 18 Finishes

Unglazed
vitreous mosaic
wall tiles

18.186

The quality tests for unglazed vitreous mosaic tiles shall be as follows:
a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

20 x 20, 50 x 50

BS EN 14411 classification
1. Length and
Width

Acceptance
Standards

BIb
1.2

Deviation from Work Size (%)

Deviation from Average Size (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

0.75

To be decided
by the SO

4 (20 x 20)

2. Thickness (%)
3. Minimum thickness (mm)

10

5 (50 x 50)

4. Straightness of sides (%)

0.75

5. Rectangularity (%)

1.0

6. Surface flatness

Centre curvature (%)

Edge curvature (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

1.0
1.0

Warpage (%)
7. Surface quality (%)free from visible defects that
would impair the appearance of a major area of tiles
b.

1.0

> = 95

Physical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

20 x 20, 50 x
50

BS EN 14411 classification

BIb

1. *Water absorption (%)

Average

BS EN ISO
10545-3

Individual
2

2. *Modules of rupture (N/mm ) Average

Individual
3. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs Scale)
4. *Abrasion resistance

Acceptance
Standards

Deep abrasion
(mm2)

5. *Coefficient of linear thermal expansion

(x10-6 / C)

0.5> & < = 3

< = 3.3

BS EN ISO
10545-4

> = 30

to be decided by
the SO

>=6

BS EN ISO
10545-6

< = 175

BS EN ISO
10545-8

< = 9.0

> = 27

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.

18-34

Section 18 Finishes

c.

Chemical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20, 50 x 50

BS EN 14411 classification
1. *Resistance to acids
and alkali

BIb

Sulphuric acid

Required

Lactic acid

Required

Potassium hydroxide

BS EN ISO
10545-13

Required

2. *Resistance to
household chemicals

Ammonium chloride

Required

Standard cleaning
agent

Required

3. *Resistance to
swimming pool salts

Sodium hypochlorite

Required

Copper sulphate

Required

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.
Glass mosaic
tiles

18.187

The quality tests for glass mosaic tiles shall be as follows:

a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

1. Length & Width

20 x 20
Deviation from Work
Size (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

1.2
10

2. Thickness (%)
3. Minimum thickness (mm)
4. Surface flatness

Acceptance
Standards

to be decided by
the SO

1.0

Centre curvature (%)

Edge curvature (%)

5. Surface quality (%) free from visible defects

that would impair the appearance of a major
area of tiles

18-35

BS EN ISO
10545-2

1.0
> = 95

Section 18 Finishes

b.

Physical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20

1. *Water absorption (%)

Average
Individual

2 *Modules of rupture
(N/mm2)

Average
individual

BS EN ISO 10545-3

BS EN ISO 10545-4

0.5< & < = 3

< = 3.3
> = 30
> = 27

3. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs

Scale)

to be decided by the
SO

>=6

4. *Coefficient of linear thermal expansion

(x10-6 / C)

BS EN ISO 10545-8

< = 9.0

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.
c.

Chemical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

1. *Resistance to
acids and alkali

Acceptance
Standards
20 x 20

Sulphuric acid

Required

Lactic acid

Required

Potassium hydroxide

Required
BS EN ISO
10545-13

2. *Resistance to
household
chemicals

Ammonium chloride

3. *Resistance to
swimming pool
salts

Sodium hypochlorite

Required

Copper sulphate

Required

Standard cleaning agent

Required
Required

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.

18-36

Section 18 Finishes

Homogenous
coved tile
skirting

18.188

The quality tests for homogenous coved tile skirting shall be as follows:
a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
200 x 75 x 7

BS EN 14411 classification

BIb

1. Length &
width

Deviation from Work Size (%)

1.0

Deviation from Average Size (%)

0.5

2. Thickness (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

3. Surface quality (%) free from visible defects

that would impair the appearance of a major
area of tiles
b.

10( or to be
decided by the SO)
> = 95

Physical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

200 x 75 x 7

BS EN 14411 classification
1. *Water absorption (%)

BIb
Average
Individual

2. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs Scale)

3. *Abrasion resistance

Acceptance
Standards

Deep abrasion
(mm3)

4. Coefficient of linear thermal expansion

(x10-6 / C)

0.5=< & < = 3

BS EN ISO
10545-3

< = 3.3

to be decided by
the SO

>=6

BS EN ISO
10545-6

< =175

BS EN ISO
10545-8

< = 9.0

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.

18-37

Section 18 Finishes

c.

Chemical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
200 x 75 x 7

BS EN 14411 classification
1.*Resistance to acids
and alkali

BIb

Sulphuric acid

Required

Lactic acid

Required

Potassium hydroxide

Required

2.*Resistance to
household chemicals

Ammonium chloride

Required

3.*Resistance to
swimming pool salts

Sodium hypochlorite

Required

Copper sulphate

Required

BS EN ISO
10545-13

Standard cleaning
agent

Required

Note:For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.
Homogenous
wall tiles

18.189

The quality tests for homogenous wall tile shall be as follows:

a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
100 x 100

BS EN 14411 classification

BIb

1. Length
& width

Deviation from Work Size (%)

1.0

Deviation from Average Size (%)

0.5

2. Thickness (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

3. Straightness of sides (%)

10
0.5

4. Rectangularity (%)

0.6

5.Surface
flatness

Centre curvature (%)

0.5

Edge curvature (%)

0.5

Warpage (%)

0.5

6.Surface quality (%) free from visible defects

that would impair the appearance of a major
area of tiles

18-38

= > 95

Section 18 Finishes

b.

Physical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
100 x 100

BS EN 14411 classification
1. *Water absorption (%)

BIb
Average

2. *Modules of rupture
(N/mm2)

0.5<= & < = 3

Individual

BS EN ISO
10545-3

< = 3.3

Average

BS EN ISO
10545-4

> = 30

to be decided by the
SO

>=6

BS EN ISO
10545-6

< = 175

BS EN ISO
10545-8

< = 9.0

Individual

3. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs

Scale)
4. *Abrasion resistance

Deep abrasion
(mm3)
5. *Coefficient of linear thermal expansion
(x10-6 / C)

> = 27

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.
c.

Chemical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

100 x 100

BS EN 14411 classification
1. Resistance to acids
and alkali

Acceptance
Standards

BI

Sulphuric acid

Required

Lactic acid

Required

Potassium hydroxide

Required

2. Resistance to
household chemicals

Ammonium chloride

3. Resistance to
swimming pool salts

Sodium hypochlorite

Required

Copper sulphate

Required

Standard cleanin agent

BS EN ISO
10545-13

Required
Required

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.

18-39

Section 18 Finishes

External facing
tiles

18.190

The quality tests for external facing tiles shall be as follows:

a.

Dimensions and surface quality:

Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
45 x 45 x 7 &
45 x 95 x 7

BS EN 14411 classification

BIb

1. Length and
width

Deviation from Work Size (%)

1.2

Deviation from Average Size (%)

0.75

2. Thickness (%)

BS EN ISO
10545-2

3. Straightness of sides (%)

10
0.75

4. Rectangularity (%)

1.0

5. Surface
flatness

Centre curvature (%)

1.0

Edge curvature (%)

1.0

Warpage (%)

1.0

6. Surface quality (%) free from visible defects

that would impair the appearance of a major
area of tiles

= > 95

b.

Physical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

Acceptance
Standards
45 x 45 x 7 & 45 x
95 x 7

BS EN 14411 classification

BIb

1. *Water absorption
(%)

Average
Individual

BS EN ISO
10545-3

< = 3.3

2. *Modules of rupture
(N/mm2)

Average

BS EN ISO
10545-4

> = 30

3. *Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs Scale)

to be decided by
the SO

>=5

4. *Abrasion
resistance

(PEI Method) BS
EN ISO 10545-7

Minimum
Class 3

5. *Coefficient of linear thermal expansion

(x106 / C)

BS EN ISO
10545-8

< = 9.0

6. *Crazing resistance

BS EN ISO
10545-11

Required

Individual

Surface abrasion
(Class1 4)

0.5<= & < = 3

> = 27

Note: For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction.

18-40

Section 18 Finishes

c.

Chemical properties:
Test Items

Test Method

Nominal Size (mm)

45 x 45 x 7 &
45 x 95 x 7

BS EN 14411 classification
1.*Resistance to
acids and alkali

Acceptance
Standards

BIb

Hydrochloric acid

Minimum
Class B

Citric acid

Minimum
Class B

Potassium hydroxide

Minimum
Class B

2.*Resistance to
household
chemicals

Ammonium chloride

BS EN ISO
10545-13

Minimum
Class B

Standard cleaning agent

(See Note 2)

Minimum
Class B

3.*Resistance to
swimming pool
salts

Sodium hypochlorite

Minimum
Class B

Copper sulphate

Minimum
Class B

4.*Resistance to
Staining

Methylene blue

Minimum
Class 2

Potassium permanganate
(See Note 2)

Minimum
Class 2

Note: 1. For the tests marked with *, valid test certificates (original or certified true copies
issued by the testing laboratories) for tests carried out within the past 12 months are
acceptable as evidence of compliance to SOs satisfaction;
2. The cleaning agent used is Bathroom Magiclean available in supermarkets.
Tile adhesives

18.191

The quality tests for the approved tile adhesive shall be in accordance with
BS EN 12004. Where cementitious tile adhesive is specified, the quality test
for tensile strength shall be in accordance with BS EN 1348.

18-41

Section 18 Finishes

Tile grouting

18.192

The quality tests for tile grouting shall be as follows:

Test Items

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

Remarks

1. Linear
Shrinkage

ANSI A108/A1
18/A136.1-2011

1 day shrinkage < 0.1%

Cast and store grout

specimens at 21 - 25C,
45 - 55% R.H.

2. Water
Absorption

ANSI A108/A13
601-2011

From 50% R.H. to

immersion < 5%
From immersion to dry
< 7%
=0.5N/mm2

3. Characteristics BS EN 1348
of
cementations
adhesive

4. Resistance to
Mould Growth

7 days shrinkage < 0.2%

Determine water
absorption from 50%
R.H. to immersion and
from immersion to dry.
cl. 8.2 initial adhesive
strength
cl. 8.3 Tensile adhesion
after water immersion

BS EN 1346

=0.5N/mm2

Open time: Tensile

adhesion strength

To be decided by
the SO

No sign or evidence of
mould growth on tile
grout.

3 mm thick tile grout is

applied over biscuit side
of test piece tile and the
assembly be placed in
Petri dishes for
incubation at 29 1C
for 24 hrs after addition
of potato dextrose agar.
Aspergillus niger is
inoculated into the
grout. The whole
assemble is incubated
for 14 days at 29 1C.

SURVEILLANCE TESTS FOR TILE ADHESIVES AND TILE

GROUTING
Laboratory tests 18.193
by approved
laboratory

a.

ArchSD will employ an approved laboratory to carry out the following

tests:
1.
2.

Non compliance

18.194

Quality tests for every 60 tonnes of tile adhesive delivered to Site or

as instructed by SO;
On site pull off test on samples selected from the tile finished wall
as instructed by SO.

b.

Provide attendance on the Site, deliver and collect samples etc. as

directed by SO or as specified;

c.

Sample for tests shall be selected by SO.

a.

Where any of the specimens for each sample fails to meet the testing
requirements of quality tests as specified, all materials manufactured on
the same day shall be removed off Site;

b.

Bear all costs of such further tests and rectification works and no
extension of time shall be allowed;

c.

Where any of the specimens for each sample selected from the tile
finished wall for the on site pull off test fails to meet the acceptance
standards, remove and rectify all the tiles and tile adhesive used on the
same floor.

18-42

Section 18 Finishes

ON SITE DELIVERY CHECK

Non-slip
homogenous
floor tiles

18.195

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for non-slip homogenous
floor tiles upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs
representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By measurement

2. Surface Quality Check

Visual

No discolouration, no
damage, no staining, no
blemish, acceptable
colour consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved

sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for non-slip homogenous floor
tiles upon delivery on Site shall be as follows:
Test Items

Glazed ceramic
wall tiles

18.196

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1. Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

2. Surface Quality Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

3. Check Identification
Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

c.

In the event of samples fail to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for glazed ceramic wall
tiles upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By measurement

2. Surface Quality Check

Visual

No discolouration, no
damage, no staining, no
blemish, acceptable colour
consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved

sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

18-43

Section 18 Finishes

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for glazed ceramic wall tiles upon
delivery on Site shall be as follows:
Test Items

Unglazed
vitreous mosaic
wall tiles

18.197

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1. Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

2. Surface Quality
Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

3. Check Identification
Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

c.

In the event of samples fail to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for unglazed vitreous
mosaic tiles upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs
representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By measurement

2. Surface Quality Check

Visual

No discolouration, no
damage, no staining, no
blemish, acceptable colour
consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved

sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for unglazed vitreous mosaic tiles
upon delivery on Site shall be as follows:

Test Items

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1. Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

2. Surface Quality
Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

3. Check Identification
Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

c.

In the event of samples failing to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

18-44

Section 18 Finishes

Glass mosaic
tiles

18.198

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for glass mosaic tiles upon
delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:

Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By measurement

2. Surface Quality Check

Visual

No discolouration, no damage,
no staining, no blemish,
acceptable colour consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for glass mosaic tiles upon
delivery on Site shall be as follows:

Test Items

Homogenous
coved tile
skirting

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1. Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

2. Surface Quality Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

3. Check Identification
Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

18.199

c.

In the event of samples fail to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for homogenous coved tile
skirting upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:

Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By measurement

2. Surface Quality Check

Visual

No discolouration, no damage,
no staining, no blemish,
acceptable colour consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

18-45

Section 18 Finishes

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for homogenous coved tile
skirting upon delivery on Site shall be as follows:

Test Items

Homogenous
wall tiles

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1. Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

2. Surface Quality Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

3. Check Identification
Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each type

18.200

c.

In the event of samples fail to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for homogenous wall tiles
upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By
measurement

2. Surface Quality Check

Visual

No discolouration, no
damage, no staining, no
blemish, acceptable colour
consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved

sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for homogenous wall tiles upon
delivery on Site shall be as follows:
Test Items

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1. Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

2. Surface Quality
Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

3. Check
Identification
Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

c.

In the event of samples fail to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

18-46

Section 18 Finishes

External facing
tiles

18.201

a.

When instructed by SO, provide all necessary and calibrated

equipment and carry out the following tests for external facing tiles
upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

1. Dimension Check

Acceptance Standards

By measurement

2. Surface Quality
Check

Visual

No discolouration, no
damage, no staining, no
blemish, acceptable colour
consistency

3. Check Identification
Mark

Visual

Same as SOs Approved

sample

In case of doubtful results, carry out laboratory tests for confirmation;

b.

Sampling frequency for the above tests for external facing tiles upon
delivery on Site shall be as follows:
Test Items

Tile adhesives

18.202

Sampling Frequency

Representative
Consignment

1.

Dimension Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

2.

Surface Quality
Check

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

3.

Check
Identification Mark

3 samples for each

delivery per each type

One delivery per each

type

c.

In the event of samples fail to meet the requirements for test upon
delivery on Site, remove the representative consignment off Site.

a.

When instructed by SO, carry out the following checks for tile adhesive
upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

1. Manufacturers
Certificate of Origin
& Delivery Note

Document Check

From an Approved origin

with information of
product identification
numbers

2. Product Identification
Number

Document Check

As Approved

3. Expiry Date

Check information
printed on the
packing

Not expired

b.

In the event of the checking results fail to meet the checking requirements
upon delivery on Site, remove the failed consignment off Site.

18-47

Section 18 Finishes

Tile grouting

18.203

a.

When instructed by SO, carry out the following checks for tile grouting
upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:
Test Items

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

1. Manufacturers
Certificate of Origin
& Delivery Note

Document Check

From an Approved origin

with information of
product identification
numbers

2. Product Identification
Number

Document Check

As Approved

3. Expiry Date

Check information
printed on the
packing

Not expired

b.

In the event of the checking results fail to meet the checking requirements
upon delivery on Site, remove the failed consignment off Site.

SEALING UP VOIDS WHERE PIPES PASS THROUGH FIRE RATED

WALLS AND FLOORS
Fire separation
seal

18.204

Sealing system shall be applied as specified in Clause 19.18 to properly seal

up the voids formed where pipes, ducts, cables and wires, etc. pass through
fire rated walls or floors.

18-48

Section 19 Sanitary Appliances

SECTION 19
SANITARY APPLIANCES
GENERALLY
Generally

19.01

All plumbing work shall be in compliance with the Water Authoritys

requirements and Waterworks Regulations.

Scope of Work

19.02

This Section covers all sanitary appliances supplied by the Contractor and the
installation of all sanitary appliances, including those supplied by the
Employer.
This part of the GS shall be read in conjunction with the General Specification
for Plumbing and Drainage Installation in Government Buildings of the Hong
Kong Special Administrative Region published by the ArchSD, HKSAR. The
General Requirements as stated in Section A2 and A3 in the General
Specification for Plumbing and Drainage Installation in Government
Buildings of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region shall be complied
with.
Materials

Generally

19.03

Inspect pipes and fittings inside and out before fixing. Reject any which are
defective.
Certain standard sanitary appliances may be supplied by the Employer, as
scheduled on the drawings. These may include brackets, waste fittings, traps,
taps, valves, chains and plugs & all fittings which relate to fixtures.
Provide all other sanitary appliances as specified. Submit samples of all
sanitary fittings for approval.
(a)

All sanitary fittings unless specified otherwise shall be white, from an

approved manufacturer, generally ensuite and complete with all
necessary fittings.

(b)

Wastes, outlets and overflows to BS EN 274, exposed surfaces shall be

either chromium plated or other non-chromium plated alternatives
subject to approval by the SO. Cr-Ni coating shall comply with BS EN
248.

(c)

Taps and combination tap assemblies to BS EN 200, exposed surfaces

shall be either chromium plated or other non-chromium plated
alternatives subject to approval by the SO. Cr-Ni coating shall comply
with BS EN 248.

Baths

19.04

Baths shall be vitreous enamelled sheet steel to BS 1390 with adjustable feet
for 75 mm seal trap holed at end for and including combined waste and
overflow to BS EN 274 complete with plug and chain if applicable and
chromium plated brass taps to BS EN 200.

Shower trays

19.05

Shower trays shall be prefabricated to BS EN 251 and BS EN 14527-2006+A1

made from glazed ceramic or resin-stone with solid surface. Any solid surface
shall comply with BS EN ISO 19712-1, BS EN ISO 19712-2 & 3.

19-1

Section 19 Sanitary Appliances

Shower fittings

Taps

Ceramic Wash
basins

19.06

19.07

19.08.01

Shower fittings shall be either chromium plated brass or other non-chromium

plated alternatives subject to approval by the SO, and approved easy clean
valve, thermostatic valve or as specified fitted with one of the following:
(a)

Concealed or exposed shower fittings for lever with flexible hose 1500
to 1800 mm long c/w chrome plated sliding bar and head.

(b)

Time-delayed control for adjust 15 sec. to 30 sec. cold or mixer.

(c)

Self cleansing swivel-jointed rose with an adjustable spray.

Taps shall be:

(a)

Sensor tap shall conform to BS EN 816. Operating pressure between

0.3 10 bar. Flow rate not more than 6 litres per min. Max. water temp.
80 degree. Aerator. Self cleaning. Turn-off control pre-set 0 3sec.

(b)

Sensor mixer or cold.

(c)

Self closing tap for time delay function.

(d)

Bib tap.

Ceramic wash basins shall be to BS 1188 and shall be made from vitreous
china to BS 3402 of the following types as specified:
(a)

Under counter basin with overflow.

(b)

Wall hung basin with or without pedestal as specified.

(c)

Semi-recessed basin with or without overflow as specified.

(d)

Counter top basin with or without overflow as specified.

Solid surfacing
wash basins

19.08.02

Solid surfacing wash basin shall comply with BS ISO 19712-1, BS ISO
19712-2 & 3 with drain, with or without overflow as specified and to size and
configuration shown on the drawings.

Kitchen sinks

19.09.01

Sinks shall be to BS EN 695 and BS EN 13310 and to the size and

configuration shown on the drawings with overflow and sound deadening pads
under the sink and drainers.
Sinks shall be provided with an effective means of attaching a bonding
conductor which shall be accessible to the electrician after the sink has been
installed.

Stainless steel
sinks

19.09.02

Stainless steel grade 304 or grade 316 as specified in Clause 17.09, minimum
thickness 0.8 to 0.9 mm for Grade 304 and 1.5 to 1.6 mm for grade 316, with
satin finish.

Solid surfacing
sinks

19.09.03

Solid surface shall comply with BS ISO 19712-1, BS ISO 19712-2 & 3.

Cleaners
sinks

19.10

Fireclay cleaners sink shall conform to BS 1206 in white colour. Fireclay with
a 38 mm hole for chrome plated waste. To be provided with or without
overflow as specified.

Close-coupled
suits, one
piece and
independent
W.C.s

19.11.01

Close-coupled suites, one-piece and independent W.C. pans with integral trap
shall be vitreous china to BS 3402 and with horizontal outlet to BS EN 997,
white plastic single ring seat and cover with plastic fixing bolts all to BS 1254.

19-2

Section 19 Sanitary Appliances

Squat type W.C

19.11.02

Vitreous china Squat type W.C. pans to SS 379.

Flushing cistern

19.11.03

7.5L flushing cistern to BS 7357, 9L and dual flushing type cisterns to BS

1125, complete with flushing apparatus, discharge pipe, ball valve and
overflow, of one of the following types as specified:
(a)

Low level plastic.

(b)

High level plastic.

(c)

Low level vitreous china.

(d)

Close coupled vitreous china.

Sensor valve where specified for automatic flushing shall conform to DZR
brass to BS EN 12164s CW602N. Operating pressure shall be 0.5 10 bar
rinse. Time-off control approx. 10 sec. and remote adjust from 1.5 30 sec.
Dry battery operation shall be 6V Lithium 2 CR5. A/C operation shall be 220 230/50Hz step down to 6V.
Sensor fittings shall be suitable for use in salt water application.
Urinals

19.12

Wall hung urinals to BS EN 13407. Vitreous china bowl type to BS 5520 with
50 mm diameter of waste outlet, complete with vitreous china automatic
flushing cistern to BS 1876, chromium plated flush pipes and spreaders to suit
the number of appliances. The discharge volume shall be not more than 4.5
litres for every basin or stall, or for every metre of a trough urinal.
Sensor valve shall conform to DZR brass to BS EN 12164s CW602N.
Operating pressure shall be 0.3 10 bar rinse. Time-off control approx. 9 sec.
and remote adjust from 7 -22 sec. Dry battery operation shall be 6V Lithium 2
CR5. A/C operate shall be 220-230/50Hz step down to 6V.
Sensor fittings shall be suitable for use in salt water application.

Glazed Ceramic
Slab Urinal

19.13

Glazed ceramic slab urinal shall be fireclay or vitreous china in white colour to
the size and configuration shown on the drawings and comply with Building
(Standards of Sanitary Fitments, Plumbing, Drainage Works and Latrines)
Regulations 16. The length of urinal slab shall be max. 4200 mm.
Fireclay and vitreous china are defined in Clauses A2.2 and A2.1 of Annex A,
BS EN 14516:2006+A1 respectively. Vitreous china shall be to BS 3402.

Stainless Steel
Slab Urinal

19.14

Stainless steel slab urinal shall be to BS 4880-1 grade 316 as specified in

Clause 17.09 1.5 to 1.6 mm thick, with satin finish to the size configuration
shown on the drawing with sound deadening pads behind the slab. Custom
made size slab urinal may be straight, L-shaped or U-shaped as shown on the
drawings with join and the length of slab not exceed 4200mm.

Storage

19.15

Store appliances under cover and keep dry. Separate with dust sheets or
polythene sheets when not in manufacturer's own packing.
Store all metal sinks etc. on a level surface to prevent twisting. Prevent contact
with cement or lime.

Traps

19.16

Traps shall have 75 mm seal, unless otherwise specified.

Cast iron traps shall be to BS EN 274.
Plastic waste traps shall be to BS EN 274-1; 274-2 and BS EN 274-3 or to be
of an approved proprietary brand.

19-3

Section 19 Sanitary Appliances

Silicone Sealant

19.17

Silicone sealants shall be to BS EN 1SO 11600 +A1.

Type F Class 25 in white colour or to match sanitary fixtures and to BS EN
ISO 846.
Workmanship

Fixing generally

19.18

Provide all necessary jointing compound, mortar, lead plugs and other
accessory materials. Cut and pin, or plug and screw brackets, and make all
necessary connections to water supply services, overflows, wastes and
ventilating pipes.
All sanitary appliances shall be adequately supported when being fixed.
Where build-in types of brackets are used, the tails of such supports shall be
built into the wall at least 75 mm and where wall fixing types are used, the wall
finish shall have been arranged to make provision for them.
All fittings shall be pointed as necessary with the following:
(a)

White or coloured cement.

(b)

White or coloured silicone sealant. All fittings shall be de-greased and

dried before the application of sealant.

Install discharge pipes and water supply pipes before fixing the appliances.
Retain protective coverings during and after fixing when practicable and clean
off when required.
Replace any appliances which are chipped or scratched either before or after
fixing.
Waste outlets

19.19

Bed waste outlets to wash basins, sinks, baths and showers in proprietary
jointing compound.

Fixing taps

19.20

Fix taps to make a water tight seal with the sanitary appliance. Place hot tap to
left of cold tap as viewed by the user. Ensure that Hot/Cold markings are
correctly applied and located.

Connections

19.21

Provide connectors for service and waste pipes.

Fixing wash
basins

19.22

Wash basins shall be supported on one of the following as specified:

(a)

Pair of concealed painted steel brackets.

(b)

Pair of porcelain enamelled towel rail brackets.

(c)

Set of porcelain enamelled or chromium plated legs and brackets.

(d)

Approved proprietary brackets to suit the basins.

(e)

Counter top as shown on drawings or manufacturers details.

Water tight seal between the walls and the basins shall be made by using
silicone sealant.
Fixing W.C.
pans

19.23

Fix W.C. pans as follows:

(a)

Pedestal type
(i)

Bed W.C. pans on concrete floors in white lead putty or other

non-hardening compound. If cement mortar is used for bedding,
it shall be not richer than 1:6, and a thin layer shall be applied

19-4

Section 19 Sanitary Appliances

only to that part of the pedestal which is in contact with the

floor. Fix with No. 14 SG round-headed brass screws 70 mm
long with domed plastic inserts in colour to match to fixture.
(ii)
(b)

Squatting type
(i)

(c)

19.24

(b)

(c)

Slab type
(i)

Bed channel outlet to waste connector in proprietary jointing

compound.

(ii)

Bed treads in cement and sand mortar 1:3 with fall towards
channel.

(iii)

Completely fill space behind slabs with cement and sand mortar
1:5.

(iv)

Joints shall be 3 mm (maximum) wide. Rake out joints to a

depth of 5 mm and point flush with an approved proprietary
white grout.

Stall type
(i)

Bed outlet to waste connector in proprietary jointing compound.

(ii)

Bed base and overlap facing in cement and sand mortar 1:3.

Wall type
(i)

19.25

Fix wall hung type WC pans to load bearing walls or support

frame by non-ferrous fixing bolts. Water tight seal between the
walls and the edge of the W.C. pans shall be made by
appropriate sealant.

Fix urinals as follows:

(a)

Fixing baths

Bed W.C. pans in concrete floors in cement and sand mortar 1:3
and joint to soil or drain pipes in similar mortar.

Wall hung type

(i)

Fixing urinals

Joint W.C. pans to soil or drain pipes with approved PVC W.C.
pan connectors to BS 5627 or other approved type.

Fix bowl and division to wall with brackets, concealed hangers

or screws, as required.

Supports for the bath shall be adjustable to permit the bath to be properly
levelled when installed. Bearing plates shall be provided under bath feet. A
permanent watertight seal between the wall and the edge of the bath shall be
made by using silicone sealant. Ensure that all bath surfaces are properly
protected up to completion stage.

19-5

Section 20 Glazing

SECTION 20
GLAZING
Generally

20.00

This section is predominantly intended for glazing in doors and windows and
should therefore be read in conjunction with Section 16 when curtain walls and
window walls are the subject of the glazing requirement.
All standards referred to herein are to be the latest revision or issue. If conflict
occurs between various standards then the more onerous is to apply.
MATERIALS

Glass
generally

20.01

Glass generally shall be in accordance to BS 952-1, BS952-2: or ASTM

C1036 - 11.

Tempered &
laminated
glass

20.01.01

Tempered and laminated glass shall conform to the relevant safety class
requirements of BS 6262-4: and shall be determined by testing to BS EN
12600 although tests in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 are acceptable.

Edge quality

20.01.02

Edge quality finish for all glass, irrespective of heat treatment, is important.
Heat treated glass may be rejected, and annealed glass will be rejected, if it
does not conform to the following criteria:

Insulating
glass

20.01.03

(i)

Shark teeth shall not penetrate more than half of glass thickness.

(ii)

Serration hackle may occur only within 150 mm of corners.

(iii)

Flare shall not exceed 1.0 mm as measured perpendicular to glass

surface across the edge. Flare shall not occur at setting blocks.

(iv)

Bevel shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

(v)

Flake chips may occur only within 200 mm of corners; depth shall
not exceed 0.8 mm and length or diameter shall not exceed 6.0 mm.

(vi)

Rough chips shall not be permitted. Rough chips shall be those

which exceed any of the dimensional limits for flake chips.

(vii)

Shells on the face of the glass are not permitted on annealed glass
and are only acceptable for heat treated glass if they were present
prior to heat treatment and are covered by a glazing bead or glass
stop. They are not permitted for glass that will be structurally glazed
with silicone.

(i)

Insulating glass shall have double edge seals. Primary seal shall be
extruded polyisobutylene continuously bonded to glass surfaces and
desiccant filled metal spacer, including corners. Minimum width of
primary seal shall be 3.0 mm. Secondary seal shall be a 2 part
neutral cure structural sealant. Secondary seal shall completely cover
spacer with no gaps or voids, and shall be continuously bonded to
both plates of glass.

(ii)

Where non-pyrolitic Low-E coatings are used, edge deletion of the

coating is required unless specifically stated as not being required by
the glass manufacturer.

20-1

Section 20 Glazing

Flatness

20.01.04

In addition to conforming to BS 952-1, BS 952-2 and ASTMC1048-04,

monolithic heat strengthened and tempered glass shall conform to the following
flatness tolerances:
(i)

Bow and warp have the same meaning. They are both defined as
deviation of a glass surface from a true plane, with the glass freestanding or installed in a frame and positioned in a vertical plane.

(ii)

Localized bow refers to any straight line segment with a length of

300 mm on a glass surface.

(iii)

Overall bow refers to any straight line segment on a glass surface

which extends between opposite edges across the smaller glass
dimension and is perpendicular to at least one edge. The length of
the line segment is the gauge length.

(iv)

Localized bow shall not exceed 1.6 mm.

(v)

Overall bow shall not exceed: 1.0 mm per 300 mm for gauge length
in the range zero to 1 m; 0.75 mm per 300 mm for gauge length in
the range 1 m to 2.40m; one half of the values listed in ASTM
C1048 - 04, Table 2 for gauge lengths exceeding 2.40m.

(vi)

Where heat treating results in essentially parallel ripples or waves,

the maximum peak-to-valley deviation shall not exceed 0.127 mm.
Requirements for localized bow and overall bow shall also be
satisfied. Direction of ripples shall be consistent throughout the
building and approved by the SO.

(vii)

The specified bow and ripple tolerances are intended as

manufacturing quality control limits.

Inclusions in
tempered glass

20.01.05

Tempered glass shall be subject to quality control measures (i.e. heat soaking)
to minimize inclusions that could result in spontaneous breakage. Such
inclusions are defined as a material defect by this specification. Installed
tempered glass which experiences spontaneous breakage shall be replaced
(material and labour) under the warranty provisions.

Plastic films

20.01.06

Plastic films used to opacify glass shall conform to the following requirements:
(i)

Minimum nominal thickness of polyester shall be 0.08mm. Film shall

be pigmented and have a black colour unless otherwise stated.

(ii)

The bonding surface shall be completely coated with a solvent based

adhesive.

(iii)

Monolithic opacified glass shall have a safety backing for fallout

resistance.

Vision glass

20.01.07

Vision glass shall be as specified in the Particular Specification.

Spandrel glass

20.01.08

Spandrel glass shall be as specified in the Particular Specification.

Criteria for
glass

20.01.09

Performance requirements for glass shall be as follows:

(i)

For the purpose of glass selection, design wind pressure shall be

assumed to have three second duration. Minimum roof live load shall
be assumed to have one week duration.

20-2

Section 20 Glazing

(ii)

Upon first application of design wind and live load pressures,

probability of breakage shall not exceed 8/1000 for vertical glass,
and 1/1000 for sloped and horizontal glass.

(iii)

Provide heat strengthened glass where annealed glass would be

vulnerable to thermal breakage.

(iv)

In addition, the allowable tensile stress of fully toughened glass

(tempered glass) for use with unfactored loads shall not exceed the
following:
(a) 50 N/mm2 for unfactored wind loads.
(b) 35 N/mm2 for medium and long-term unfactored loads.

Glass
replacement

20.01.10

Glazing details shall permit glass replacement after initial construction, shall
permit reuse of original gaskets, shall permit replacement glass of the same
nominal size as original glass, and shall not require cutting of framing members
or removal of interior finishes. Vision glass in conventional frames shall be
replaceable from the interior. Spandrel glass shall be replaceable from the
exterior. Silicone supported vision glass shall be replaceable from the exterior
and/or interior.

Glazing
materials

20.01.11

The minimum service life of all gaskets, weather stripping and other glazing
accessories shall be 15 years. Gaskets and weather-strips, except at structural
sealant glazing shall, as a minimum, conform to BS 6262 except:

Gaskets at
structural
sealant

20.01.12

(i)

Sponge gaskets shall be extruded black neoprene with a hardness of

40 +5/-4 durometer Shore A and conforming to ASTM C509 Design sponge gaskets to provide 20% to 35%
06(2011).
compression. Sponge gaskets are only to be used as gap fillers and
must not be used where the performance relies on compression
resistance.

(ii)

Dense gaskets shall normally be black extrusions with a Shore A

hardness of 70 +5/-4 for hollow profiles and 60 +5/-4 for solid
profiles, and conforming to ASTM C864 - 05(2011) or BS 4255-1.
Outdoor and indoor gaskets shall be silicone, EPDM, neoprene or a
Thermal Plastic Elastomer (TPE). However TPE gaskets are not
permitted to be used where their performance is dependent upon
compression resistance. Where the colour of the gasket is other than
black, only heat cured silicone rubber is to be used.

(iii)

Where compatible with the installation procedures, all corners are to

be vulcanized by transfer/injection moulding.

(iv)

Interior and exterior gasket profiles shall be designed to produce a

glass edge pressure of not less than 0.70 N/mm, nor more than 1.75
N/mm.

Gaskets at structural sealant glazing shall be as follows:

(i)

Glazing gaskets, sealant backers within glazing pockets and

continuous glass spacer pads at structural sealant shall be black heat
cured silicone rubber.

(ii)

Notwithstanding these requirements, in recognition of the reliance on

the resistance to compression for the performance of gaskets, the
maximum in service compression set is limited to 25% over a time
period equivalent to 1.15 times the design life of the building.
20-3

Section 20 Glazing

Thickness &
weights of
glass

20.01.13

(iii)

Gaskets which maintain glass face clearance while serving as a

backer for a silicone weather seal may have a friction fit. All other
gaskets and weather strips, including backers for structural sealant,
shall have a continuous spline or a continuous groove which engages
a matching groove or leg on the aluminium frame.

(iv)

Double side tape is acceptable as a glass spacer pad when used in

conjunction with structural sealant, subject to verification of
compatibility.

Thickness and weights shall be as in Table 20.1

TABLE 20.1
Thickness and Weights of Glass
Nominal
thickness
(mm)

3
4
5
6
10
12

Approximate weight
(kg/m2)

Minimum weight
(kg/m2)

Sheet

Float

Cast

Polished
Wired

Cast or Figure
Rolled

7.5
10.0
12.5
15.0
-

7.5
10.0
12.5
15.0
25.0
30.0

17
-

15.9
-

6.0
7.5
9.5
11.5
21.5
-

Glass to be of accurate size, with clean undamaged edges and surfaces which
are not disfigured.
Applied films

20.01.14

Post applied films can constitute a risk to the integrity of the glass, either from
a risk of increasing thermal stress or by damage caused to the glass during the
application of the film. Therefore no post applied application of adhesive film,
whether of solar control, security or decoration is permitted without the express
written permission of the glass manufacturer.

Float glass

20.02

Unless otherwise specified glass shall be considered as clear float annealed

glass of a minimum Q3 quality in accordance with ASTM C1036 - 11.

Sheet glass

20.03

Unless specifically requested and confirmed in writing drawn sheet glass is not
permitted to be used. Clear sheet glass shall be drawn of ordinary quality for
glazing where it is permitted to be used.

Translucent &
obscured glass

20.04

Translucent glass is considered as having:

a)

For monolithic glass

An acid etch or a sand blasted pattern or complete coverage on part or on
the entire face of the glass.

b) For laminated glass

A coloured sheet or gel as part of the interlayer makeup that provides a
reduction in transparency.
Obscured glass is considered as being cast or rolled such that a raised pattern is
formed that provides a reduction in the transparency of the glass. This pattern is
an integral part of the glass.

20-4

Section 20 Glazing

Fire rated glass

Mirror glass

20.05

20.06

Wired and other specialist glasses must have been successfully tested in
accordance with the relevant clauses of BS 476.
(i)

Wired cast glass and wired polished glass shall have a square mesh
wire 13 mm square electrically welded at each intersection that is
embedded into the glass to a depth equivalent to half the glass
thickness.

(ii)

Wired glass is not considered a safety glass and can only be used in a
non-fire rated installation with express permission.

(iii)

Non-insulating fire rated glass, other than wired soda lime glass
should be bora silicate glass.

(iv)

Insulating fire grated glass can be of any composition if the relevant

fire certificate can be provided.

Mirror glass shall be selected float suitable for silvering and a minimum Q2
quality in accordance with ASTM C1036 - 11.
Mirrors shall have square or bevelled edges. Exposed edges are to be ground or
polished smooth with an arissed edge.

Heat
strengthened
glass

20.07

(i)

Heat strengthened glass shall be glass that has been heat treated to
give increased strength, in accordance with the requirements of
ASTM C1048 - 04, to approximately twice the strength and impact
resistance of untreated float glass.

(ii)

To be defined as Heat Strengthened glass, the residual surface

compression must be between 24 and 52 MPa.

(iii)

Glass with a surface compression in excess of 45 MPa is to be

subjected to heat soak testing in accordance with the relevant
procedures set out in BS EN 14179-1. Submit the compliance
certificate for the glass delivered to site. The compliance certificate
should include the following information:

(iv)

a)

Identification of the batch;

b)

Quantity and configuration of thermocouples used to measure

the glass surface temperatures in the oven;

c)

Graphs of the heat soak process cycle associated with each of

the thermocouples indicating the glass surface temperatures at
representative glass locations and time duration of the heating
phase, holding phase and cooling phase of the process;

d)

Name of the glass manufacturer;

e)

Location of the oven;

f)

Calibration report of the oven;

g)

Date of carrying out the heat soaking process;

h)

Quantity and size of glass subject to the heat soaking process

and records of breakages of panels in the tests; and

i)

Minimum dimension of glass separation in the oven.

Heat strengthened glass is not to be considered a safety glass.

20-5

Section 20 Glazing

Fully tempered
glass

20.08

(i)

Fully tempered glass shall be glass that has been heat treated to give
increased strength, in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
C1048-04, to approximately four times the strength and impact
resistance of untreated float glass.

(ii)

To be defined as Fully Tempered glass, the residual surface

compression must be a minimum of 69 MPa, however it is
recommended that the glass supplied as fully tempered has a
minimum of 75 MPa.

(iii)

It must also be noted that heat soak testing in accordance with APP37, which is based upon the methodology of BS EN 14179, must be
undertaken for glass supplied as fully tempered. Therefore, it is to be
subjected to heat soak testing in accordance with the relevant
procedures set out in BS EN 14179-1. The Contractor shall submit
for approval the following items:

(iv)

a)

A quality supervision plan for the quality supervision of

manufacturer's heat soak process of the tempered glass to be
used.

b)

The name, experience and qualification of the TCP who shall

be appointed by the Contractor to provide full time continuous
supervision of the heat soak process of all tempered glass
panes in the factory.

c)

The compliance certificate for the glass delivered to site. The

compliance certificate should include the information as
mentioned in Clause 20.07(iii).

Fully tempered glass is considered a safety glass as upon fracture it

would break into small fragments.

Tinted glass

20.09

Tinted glass shall be body tinted of the colour and intensity specified. This type
of glass is to be considered as a heat absorbing glass when used externally and
is to have a heat treatment that conforms to the heat strengthened category of
ASTM C1048-04 as a minimum.

Coated glass

20.10

Coated Glass
(i)

Coated glass shall be an approved proprietary product with either

a)

A metallic mirror-like reflective coating on the designated

surface to the colour and of the type and performance specified
or

b) A pyrolitic or vacuum deposition low emissivity (Low-E)

coating of the colour and of the type and performance specified
in the Particular Specification.

Laminated
safety and
security glass

20.11

(ii)

All coated glass must conform to the requirements of ASTM C1376

- 10 as a minimum but shall also conform to the requirements of the
Particular Specification.

(iii)

The thermal performance and other properties of the glass shall

conform to the criteria in the Particular Specification.

Laminated Glass, dependant upon its composition can be regarded as a safety

glass or a security glass.

20-6

Section 20 Glazing

Plastic glazing

20.12

(i)

Laminated glass shall be an approved proprietary product

comprising of two or more sheets of glass bonded together and
incorporating a plastic interlayer, or other method of bonding, to
ensure the performance specified.

(ii)

Glass must conform to ASTM C1172-09 as a minimum and is

considered a safety glass if it has been tested to BS EN 12600 and is
in conformance with the category 1 as a minimum, or categories 2,3
when specified by design requirement.

(iii)

Other national standards that are equivalent to BS EN 12600 are also

acceptable but must be submitted and approved before the glass can
be considered as a safety glass.

(iv)

Where non-pyrolitic Low-E coatings are used, edge deletion of the

coating is necessary unless specifically stated as not being required
by the glass manufacturer.

(v)

When laminated glass is used in a sloped condition, that is at angle

from the vertical in excess of 10 degrees, and heat treated glass is
required for thermal or strength reasons, the inner lite is to heat
strengthened and not fully tempered.

(vi)

Where laminated glass is used as a security glass to protect persons,

it must have been tested to ensure compliance with the relevant
threat level.

(vii)

Certification is required for glass used in bullet resistance or blast

resistant installations.

(viii)

The addition of an applied adhesive film, either to the external face

or the internal face will not be considered as, and does not constitute,
an upgrading of the glass from that originally supplied.

All plastic glazing installations are subject to the same test and certification
requirements as for conventional glass.
(i)

Samples

20.13

Plastic sheet glazing material shall be an approved proprietary

product of one of the following types:
a)

Polycarbonate.

b)

Polycarbonate with surface hardened treatment.

c)

Other plastics as specified in the Particular Specification.

(ii)

All plastic materials are to be suitable for outdoor exposure and are
to be UV resistant.

(iii)

All materials used at ground level or other areas of high traffic or

exposure to damage are to be mar resistant.

(iv)

Plastics shall be cut in conformance with the manufacturers

requirements, including the removal of protective tapes and papers.
All surfaces shall be free from irregularities and defects.

Submit samples 150 mm (minimum) square of all types of glass for approval
before ordering. Due to size constraints it is recognised that samples of heat
treated glass may not be possible. The amount of roller wave distortion should
therefore be confirmed prior to the production of the glass

20-7

Section 20 Glazing

Storage

20.14

Keep glass and plastic sheets dry and clean during delivery and store vertically
in a well vented location, carefully protected from condensation and other
moisture. There shall be air between stored glass sheets to allow air circulation
unless the manufacturer has stated in writing that glass tightly packed with
lining paper can be stored as delivered. In this case a time limit must be given
until glass is unpacked.

Setting blocks

20.15

Setting blocks shall be heat cured silicone, EPDM or neoprene. Setting blocks
are to support the glass for a minimum of 80% of the glass thickness and are to
be 80 - 90 Shore A hardness. They shall have a length equivalent to 25mm for
every 1 sq metre of glass area, with a minimum length of 100 mm, and a
minimum width suitable to the glass thickness, a minimum of 80% of the glass
width shall be fully supported.
Locating blocks shall be heat cured silicone, EPDM or neoprene. Location
blocks are to cover a minimum of 80% of the glass thickness and are to be 60 70 Shore A hardness.
Thermoplastic elastomers, such as Santoprene and PVC or similar materials are
not permitted.

Glazing
compounds

20.16

Glazing compounds are to be selected to suit the frame and glazing substrates.
(i)

The following compounds are permitted to be used:

a)

Silicone gunnable neutral cure silicone one part weather type

sealant if glass is retained mechanically. One or two-part
structural sealant for glass not retained on all edges.

b) Polysulphide is permitted only if the glass is positively retained

on all edges.
c)

Putty is permitted for glazing into wooden frames only. Putty

for glazing to softwood and absorbent hardwoods shall be
linseed oil putty to BS 544. Putty for glazing to non-absorbent
hardwoods shall be an approved proprietary brand recommended
by the window manufacturer for the particular application and
with setting properties and unpainted life to suit the construction
programme.

(ii)

Compounds for glazing plastic sheets shall be compatible with the

proprietary sheets and are to be either silicone or polysulphide.

(iii)

All sealing compounds are to be tested for adhesion and the test
reports submitted prior to the commencement of glazing.

WORKMANSHIP
Generally

20.17

The workmanship on glazing shall be generally in accordance with BS 8000-7

and also conform to the glazing manual published by the Glass Association of
North America (GANA formerly FGMA).
Glazing shall be carried out from inside the building whenever possible. Glass
and glazing materials shall be compatible with each other and the glass shall be
protected from damage and staining of any kind.
Glass shall be new. Glass shall be of the specified type and quality with
cleanly cut edges and sharp corners. Inspect glass before installation. Do not
install defective glass.

20-8

Section 20 Glazing

Installation of
safety glazing

20.17.01

Provide tempered and/or laminated glass at the following locations:

a)

Doors.

b) Fixed and operable glazing with a vertical edge within 300 mm of a door
in the closed position and with the bottom edge less than 1500 mm above
the walking surface.
c)

Fixed glazing with area exceeding one square meter, and with the lowest
edge less than 450 mm above a walking surface, which is within 900 mm
of such glazing; tempered and/or laminated glass is not required if there is
a horizontal member with minimum 40 mm width located between 600
and 900 mm above the walking surface.

d) Any additional locations required by relevant Ordinances, Regulations and

Practice Notes.
Installation of
heat treated
glass

20.17.02

Provide heat strengthened glass where required by design wind pressures,

anticipated thermal stress, and use in a spandrel area.
Provide fully tempered and/or laminated glass only where required by Hong
Kong regulations or where design pressures are beyond the capacity of heat
strengthened glass.
Safety glass or safety plastic is also to be used at locations where safety is a
concern. Refer to BS 6262-4.

Edge cover
(or Glass bite)

20.17.03

Before setting glass, inspect frame for proper dimensions and squareness.
Adjust frame and/or glass size as required to meet specified requirements for
edge cover dimensions and glass edge clearance.
Except as otherwise specified, comply with BS 6262. Where joint movement
shall result in variable edge cover (or glass bite), increase nominal edge cover
to provide 10.0 mm minimum cover and 6.0 mm minimum edge clearance. In
no case shall the front and back clearances be less than 5.0 mm. Refer to the
GANA manual (glass bite) for further information.

Location of
setting blocks

20.17.04

Thoroughly clean glazing pocket before setting glass. Solvents shall be

compatible with finished aluminum, glass and glazing materials. Setting
blocks shall be equidistant from the glass centreline. Location of setting blocks
at glass quarter points is acceptable. The distance from the vertical glass edge
to the nearest edge of the setting block shall not be less than 150 mm, or 0.125
times glass width, whichever is greater. Side blocks shall be located between
the midheight and top corner of the glass. Side blocks, setting blocks and chairs
shall be positively retained in position.

Fasteners in
glazing pocket

20.17.05

Fasteners shall not penetrate glazing pockets.

Glass stops and

application of
sealants

20.17.06

Remove and replace stops and apply sealants as required for a complete glass
installation.

Replacement
of damaged
glass

20.17.07

Leave glass in crates until just prior to installation. Replace any glass which
breaks or sustains edge damage, surface damage or damage to reflective
coating as defined in the Particular Specification.

Structural
sealant

20.17.08

Clean, prime and mask at structural sealant joints a maximum of 8 hours before
applying the silicone.

20-9

Section 20 Glazing

Temporarily clamp glass during cure of structural sealant. After sufficient cure,
remove clamps and fill any gaps in silicone.
Mask glass and aluminium during application of structural sealant. Remove
masking immediately after tooling sealant.
Structural sealant shall not be applied to edges of insulating glass units, or to
edges of laminated glass units. Sealants used as weather seals shall not be
adhered to, or placed against, the edge of a laminated glass unit inter-layer.
Preparation of
surrounds

20.18

The preparation of the surrounds for acceptance of the glazing is important.

All surrounds are to be free of any foreign matter and be cleaned to accept the
sealing compound in accordance with the requirements of the sealant
manufacturer.
The application of sealant to unprepared substrates is not permitted.
Aluminium surrounds are to be anodized or painted with an Architectural
factory applied finish. Alternatively a chromate conversion coating is
acceptable.
For all other materials, including stainless steel, details of the finish and
cleaning procedures are to be submitted prior to commencement of glazing.

External glazing
generally

20.19

External glazing shall be wind tight and watertight on completion whether the
glazing has been carried out with glazing compounds or gaskets.

Glass
orientation

20.20

Where the glass has an integral cast or rolled pattern on one surface, that
surface should be glazed facing onward.
Where the glass has a sand blasted or acid etch pattern on one surface, that
surface should be glazed facing inward.
For glass with metallic coatings, reflective and Low-E, confirmation of the
correct orientation is to be made by the glazing supervisor.

Alignment of
wired glass

20.21

Fix directionally patterned or wired glass with the pattern or wires parallel to
surround and align wire in adjacent panes. Cut edges of wired glass shall be
painted with black bituminous paint to inhibit rusting.

Edge clearance

20.22

Edge clearance shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the

manufacturer or GANA, subject to a minimum clearance of 3 mm.

Setting and
location blocks

20.23

Setting blocks are to be used for all glass panes and are to be located at quarter
points of the bottom edge of the glass.
To minimize bending of the transom under dead load, the setting blocks may be
moved to eighth points but must not be closer than recommended by GANA.

Bedding &
tooling

20.24

The application and tooling of all sealants and glazing compounds is important.
Ensure that no voids or spaces are left in backing or bedding compounds and
that there is no metal or wood to glass contact
Tool sealing compound as follows:
(a) To top and side edges-flush with top of rebate or bead.
(b) To bottom edges-with a suitable angle to shed water.

20-10

Section 20 Glazing

Glazing with
putty

20.25

Within the limits of pane size and wind loading, putty can be used for glazing
certain types of glass into wood rebates and galvanized steel surrounds. Refer
to BS 6262 for recommendations.
Seal putty within the time recommended by manufactures, but not less than 7
days for the putty to cure.

Structural
sealant glazing

20.26

Structural sealant glazing shall be applied according to BS 6262-6, BS EN

13022-1:2006+A1:2010 and BS EN 13022-2:2006+A1:2010. Only structural
sealant recommended by manufacturer shall be used.

Glazing with
beads

20.27

Ensure there is no break in the air seal at the rear face of the glass and if
necessary, bed beads in glazing compound for external glazing.
Secure wood beads with rustproofed panel pins or with countersunk brass
screws and cups at 200 mm (maximum) centres and 75 mm (maximum) from
each corner.
Remove and refix metal beads supplied with metal windows.

Sealing

20.28

When specified seal the joint between the glass and bead with an approved
silicone sealant. Ensure all manufacturer-recommended cleaning processes are
followed.

Tapes and
gaskets

20.29

Refer to Section 16 Curtain Walls in regard to the use of preformed tapes,

shims and compression gaskets for glazing in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.

Glazing
aluminium
windows

20.30

Aluminium windows may be glazed by the specialist supplying and fixing the
windows.

Louvre blades

20.31

Louvre blades shall have edges parallel, and ground to remove sharp arises.

Plastic sheets

20.32

Cut plastic sheets with a fine tooth saw and smooth or chamber edges. Allow
edge clearance and edge cover as recommended by the manufacturer, normally
with the minimum edge cover of 15 mm, refer to BS 6262-3. Only remove
sufficient of the protective covering around edges to allow installing and
remove the remainder just prior to practical completion.
However, if this would result in leaving the tape in place for longer than the
recommended time, advise the SO in writing and follow his instructions.

Cleaning

20.33

Remove all smears and excess glazing compound.

Remove mortar, plaster or concrete spillage and paint drips whilst wet.
Leave clean inside and out, and free from scratches.

Making good

20.34

Replace glass or fixing materials broken or damaged before practical

completion, and redecorate area if necessary.

20-11

Section 21 Painting

SECTION 21
PAINTING
MATERIALS
Generally

21.01

All paints and decorative materials shall be of approved type, brand and
colour.
Obtain approval of the SO in respect of the painting system which shall
include the type, brand and colour of all materials before starting work.
Supply all proprietary brand materials in sealed containers each containing
the manufacturer's brand label and printed instructions. Destroy the tins
immediately after use of the contents.
Paint shall be supplied in sealed containers. Each container shall be marked
on the side to show the following:
(a)

The name of the manufacturer,

(b)

The paint manufacturers reference number,

(c)

Intended purposes, type of pigment and binder,

(d)

Batch number, date of manufacture, expiry date and pot life, and

(e)

Colour, gloss, drying times and flash point.

Where possible, all the materials in any coating system shall be obtained
from the same manufacturer. Furnish the SO with two copies of the
manufacturer's data sheets for the paints proposed to be used.
Store materials on Site or in the Contractors' workshops, etc in cool, well
ventilated, covered storage space. Label tins of paint for "External use" and
for "Internal Use", "Undercoating" and "Finishing" respectively.
Where flammable paints or solvents are used, no smoking shall be permitted.
Appropriate signs as required by SO should be displayed.
Priming paints
in general

21.02

Priming paints to be as follows:

(a)

For synthetic finishing paints on internal and external woodwork, use

aluminium primer to BS 4756, Type 1.

(b)

For synthetic finishing paints on internal and external metalwork, use

zinc phosphate primer to BS 5193, ISO 6745 or metallic zinc-rich
primer to BS 4652, as specified.

(c)

For synthetic or non-toxic paints on galvanized metal surfaces, use

an approved etching primer with a zinc-chromate base, or calcium
plumbate primer to BS 3698.

(d)

For polyurethane paint on internal and external metalwork use

polyurethane red lead primer.

21-1

Section 21 Painting

Priming paints
for Structural
Steel

21.03

For painting on structural steelwork, comply with Section 15.

Sealers

21.04

Sealers for plaster, masonry and the like shall be an approved stabilizing
solution or oil-based plaster sealer.

Anti-mould
liquid

21.05

Anti-mould liquid shall be an approved fungicidal solution.

Water repellant
liquid

21.06

Water repellent liquid shall be silicone or other approved water repellent.

Limewash

21.07

Lime wash shall be composed of 15 kg of tallow to 1 m3 of quicklime for

walls, ceilings, etc. and 55 kg of tallow to 1 m3 of quicklime for bituminous
felted or asphalt roof surfaces.

Emulsion paint

21.08

Emulsion paint shall be plastic, vinyl or latex emulsions of approved brands.

Do not use alkyd resin based emulsion paints without prior approval.

Textured
emulsion paint

21.09

Textured emulsion paint shall be acrylic based emulsion paint textured with
a finely dispersed aggregate.

Anti-mould
acrylic emulsion
paint

21.10

Anti-mould emulsion paint shall be acrylic based emulsion incorporating an

approved fungus resistant chemical.

Multi-colour
paint

21.11

Multi-colour paint shall be an approved brand comprising a base and

hardwearing top coat incorporating a pigmented splatter coat used as
recommended by the manufacturer.

Cement paint

21.12

Cement paint shall be waterproof cement base paint supplied in drums. Do

not mix lime or other adulterants with cement paints.

External
textured paint

21.13

External textured paint shall be an approved heavy duty masonry paint

incorporating a fine aggregate filler.

Fire retardant
paints

21.14

Fire retardant paints shall be paints which, when used alone or in

conjunction with other paints applied to combustible substrates in
accordance with a manufacturer's tested system, achieve Class 1 spread of
flame rating to BS 476-7.

Synthetic paint

21.15

Unless expressly specified otherwise, all paint for internal and external use
shall be synthetic paint of alkyd resin base combined with drying oils and
pigments. Undercoats and finishing coat shall be of properly matching type
and the finishing coat shall give a hard gloss finish or as otherwise specified.

Cold cure epoxy

paint

21.16

Cold cure epoxy paint shall be of an approved Two Pack Type.

Polyurethane
paint

21.17

Polyurethane paint shall be of the Two Pack Type and part of an approved
system.

Black bitumastic 21.18

paint

Black bitumastic paint shall be tar base paint complying with the
requirements of BS 1070, Type B (quick drying).

Black bitumen
coating solution

Black bitumen coating solution shall be to BS 3416, Type 1 for general

purposes.

21.19

21-2

Section 21 Painting

Marking paint
for ballcourts,
playgrounds etc.

21.20

Marking paint for basketball courts, playground, etc shall be an approved

purpose made synthetic non-skid marking paint, with a drying time not
exceeding 30 minutes.

Marking
materials for
roads,
carriageways
and car parks

21.21

Road marking materials shall be hot applied thermoplastic materials with

either plasticised synthetic hydrocarbon resin or alkyd resin as the binder as
specified.
(a)

Type 'A' - Standard hot applied thermoplastic material

(i)

The material shall comply with BS 3262-3, BS EN 1824 and

BS EN 1871 except for the following modifications to the
material properties:
Softening point measured in accordance with Annex F to BS
EN 1871 shall be not less than 85C, and

(ii)

(b)

The luminance factor when tested in accordance with Annex

E of BS EN 1871 shall be Class LF4 for white material and
Class LF2 for yellow material.

Type 'B' - Alkyd resin hot applied thermoplastic material

(i)

The material shall comply with BS EN 1824 and BS EN 1871

except for the following modifications to the material
properties:
Softening point measured in accordance with Annex F to BS
EN 1871 shall be not less than 85C, and

(ii)

The binder for alkyd resin thermoplastic road marking

materials to consist of maleic-modified glycerol ester of wood
resin. The binder shall not contain petroleum based
hydrocarbon resins, tall oil resins, blends of tall oil and wood
resin or similar derivatives.

(iii)

The luminance factor when tested in accordance with Annex

E of BS EN 1871 shall be Class LF4 for white material and
Class LF2 for yellow material.

Fluorescent
paint

21.22

Fluorescent paint to BS EN ISO 11507, BS 3900-F16 and BS EN 927-6

where appropriate shall be water based or oil based, as specified. Use
fluorescent paint in conjunction with white flat water or oil base undercoat,
and priming coat to suit the surface being painted.

Reflecting paint

21.23

Reflecting paint shall consist of white synthetic paint with a high gloss finish
and a surface coating of fine grain reflective aggregate, applied at the rate of
not less than 0.6 kg/m2 while finishing coat is still wet.

Metallic paint

21.24

Metallic paint shall be composed of acrylic resin solution base mixed with
finely divided aluminium to give a bright finish, or finely divided copper or
copper alloy to give a bronze finish.

Heat resisting
paint

21.25

Heat resisting paint shall be an approved heat resisting enamel paint.

Priming coat and undercoats used in conjunction with the enamel finishing
coat shall be similarly heat resisting.

Chemical
resisting paint

21.26

Chemical resisting paint and thinner shall be of an approved brand resistant

to attack by all commonly used commercial acids and alkalis.

21-3

Section 21 Painting

Black enamel

21.27

Black enamel shall be high grade , quick drying black japan and to dry to a
perfectly smooth, hard and elastic surface in not more than 12 hours at a
temperature of 16C

Non-toxic paint

21.28

Non toxic paint for use on water tanks, water collecting roofs etc. shall be
proprietary brands as approved by the UK National Water Council and one
of the following types:
(a)

Petroleum or asphaltic bitumen based coatings, or

(b)

Epoxy based coatings

Pesticidal
coating

21.29

Pesticidal coating shall contain an approved pesticide.

Wood
preservative

21.30

Wood preservative to offer complete protection against termites, wood

boring insects, fungi, woodrot and decay. It shall be of an approved
proprietary brand exterior grade, where completely concealed or not
decorated, and colourless, coloured or suitable for overpainting where likely
to be exposed or be in contact with a painted finish.

Knotting

21.31

Knotting for metal pipes coated with bitumen shall be an approved

proprietary brand of patent knotting intended for this purpose. Knotting for
woodwork shall be to BS 1336.

Stopping

21.32

Stopping for internal woodwork, plywood, hardwood and fibreboard shall

be poly putty or linseed oil putty, tinted if required. Stopping for external
woodwork shall be poly putty or white lead paste and gold size, well mixed.

White spirit

21.33

White spirit shall be to BS 245.

Linseed oil

21.34

Linseed oil shall be to BS EN ISO 150-2007.

Stain

21.35

Stain for woodwork shall be an approved water or spirit stain suitable for use
under varnish or wax polish.
Self finished stains shall be an approved proprietary make.

Varnish

21.36

Varnish shall be one of the following types:

(a)

Copal Varnish shall be No. 1 Extra Pale quality for internal use only.

(b)

Synthetic Varnish shall be the Long Linseed Oil Alkyd type for
internal or external use.

(c)

Polyurethane Varnish for internal or external use shall be either:

(i)

Moisture Cure Oil Modified One Pack Type, or

(ii)

Isocyanate Cure Two Pack Type.

Wax polish

21.37

Wax polish for floors, furniture and joinery shall be an approved proprietary
brand.

Chalkboard
paint

21.38

Chalkboard paint shall be an approved hard drying flat black or deep green
paint, containing a fine abrasive.

Cellulose
lacquer

21.39

Cellulose lacquer shall be of an approved brand.

21-4

Section 21 Painting

Stone cleaner

21.40

Chemical solutions for cleaning and sealing stonework shall be from an

approved manufacturer.

Floor seal

21.41

Floor seals shall be an approved resin based sealer.

WORKMANSHIP

Painting in
general

21.42

Painting generally shall be in accordance with BS 6150 and BS 8000-12 and

as described in the following clauses:
(a)

Do not carry out work in wet humid or foggy weather, direct

sunlight, or on surfaces which are not thoroughly dry, or if there is
excess dust in the air.

(b)

Ensure that all holes, cracks and other defects in surfaces have been
made good prior to painting.

(c)

Brush each coat well into the surface so that every part, including
joints, junctions, angles, etc., is adequately covered, but take care to
avoid excessive or uneven thickness of paint film, particularly at
edges, angles and junction.

(d)

Before applying coatings check that the moisture content of the

substrate shall not adversely affect the completed work.
Apply coatings only to clean, dry surfaces after any previous
coatings have hardened, and rub down smooth with fine glass paper
before the subsequent coat is applied.

(e)

Successive coats of paint shall be of slightly differing tints, and the

intercoating time shall not exceed the limits recommended by the
paint manufacturers.

(f)

Apply coatings with approved bristle brushes of suitable size. Flat

wall brushes shall be not less than 150 mm wide.

(g)

Do not use rollers, cloths or gloves unless recommended by the paint

manufacturers and/or approved by the SO.

(h)

Do not use mechanical spraying machines unless recommended by

the paint manufacturers and/or approved by the SO.

(i)

Where required, prime and paint the unexposed surfaces prior to

fixing the surfaces which would become inaccessible.

(j)

Remove all articles of ironmongery, hardware, etc. before painting

and replace with matching screws (and plugs, if required,) of suitable
size, after completion.
Leave everything clean and completely free from all paint stains,
splashes, etc.

(k)

Do not paint weatherstripping on metal windows or doors.

(l)

Touch up coated surfaces on completion, where ordered.

(m)

Carry out decoration in colours to BS 4800 as selected by the SO.

(n)

Provide paint finish sample panels in accordance with the paint

system in layers from the sealer coat, priming coat, under coat and

21-5

Section 21 Painting

finish coat as appropriate and obtain approval before carrying out

work.
General
protection and
cleaning

21.43

Protect surfaces, fittings, furniture, and the like by suitable and approved
means.
Protect freshly applied surface coatings from damage.
Exhibit "Wet Paint", in English and Chinese signs and provide protective
barriers where necessary.
Protect surfaces adjacent to those being coated.

Cleanliness

21.44

Keep surfaces clean and free from dust during coating and drying.
Remove and clean off all splashes whilst work is in progress, make good any
damage, and leave work, and all areas in which work is executed, clean and
perfect on completion.

Preparatory
work in general

21.45

Unless specifically stated to the contrary, the descriptions of "Painting"

work shall be understood to include all preparatory work required and
necessary to produce a first class finish, free from all blemishes, brush
marks, blisters and weeping and the following definitions are to apply where
preparation is to be carried out:
(a)

"Wash down" shall mean either:

(i)

The removal with clean water of all dirt, etc. not absorbed into
the surface of a material not previously decorated, or

(ii)

the removal with clean water of existing limewash,

non-washable distemper or similar material not absorbed into
the decorated surfaces, or

(iii)

the removal of dirt, etc. from and cleaning down of, existing
washable distempered, cement painted, synthetic painted and
similarly decorated surfaces with sugar soap powder mixed
with water, followed by further applications of clean water.

(b)

Broom down shall mean the thorough dry brushing of any surface
with a stiff broom or brush so as to remove all cobwebs, dust or loose
particles.

(c)

"Scrape" shall mean the removal of all existing coats of paint,

limewash, colourwash, distemper, etc. by scraping tools without the
use of chemical solvents or heat and without damage to the
underlying material. Any damage so caused shall be made good. The
surface shall be washed down on completion.

(d)

"Wire brush" shall mean the thorough brushing of the surface with a
stiff wire brush.

(e)

"Strip" shall mean the complete removal, without damage to the

underlying surface, of all existing coats of limewash, distemper,
paint or other decorative material by means of washing and scraping
together with the use of chemical solvents or heat, if necessary. After
the use of chemical solvents the surfaces shall be washed down and
neutralised in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.

21-6

Section 21 Painting

Preparation of
new surfaces

21.46

(f)

"Stop" to plaster shall mean carefully trimming the edges of all holes,
cracks or crevices of any description and filling with an approved
proprietary brand of filler or with Plaster of Paris to produce an even,
flat surface, and touching up all patches with a coat of sealer prior to
repainting.

(g)

"Stop" to woodwork shall mean the cleaning out and filling of all
holes, cracks and crevices, etc.

(h)

"Knot" to metal pipes shall mean the application of one coat of patent
knotting to surface of any bitumen coated pipe.

(i)

"Knot" to woodwork shall mean the application of a sufficient

number of coats of "knotting" over all knots in the timber to prevent
the bleeding of resin, etc. through the subsequent decoration.

(j)

"Rub down" shall mean the rubbing of newly prepared surfaces, or

surfaces of existing paint remaining after preparation for
redecoration, with approved waterproof glass paper, pumice stone or
similar, to give a true and keyed surface for new paint.

(k)

"Fill" shall mean filling of grain with approved surface filler.

Remove all dust, dirt, stains, efflorescence, grease and loose material and,
unless otherwise specified, prepare new surfaces for decoration as follows:
(a)

Plaster, cement render, and similar surfaces - Wash down, stop and
rub down.

(b)

Concrete, brick, block, stone roof tiling and similar surfaces - Broom
down.

(c)

Structural steelwork preparation shall be in accordance with the

requirements set out in Section 15.

(d)

Metalwork:

(e)

(i)

Chip off and remove all scale and rust, wire brush to leave
non-galvanised iron or steel bare and clean, and apply rust
inhibitor at least twelve hours prior to painting with zinc
chromate or other specified primer.

(ii)

Clean down and apply calcium plumbate primer or etching

primer as specified to zinc-sprayed or galvanised iron or steel.

(iii)

Clean down and knot coated pipes.

(iv)

Where exposed copper is specified to be painted, wash with

soap and warm water, rub down with coarse emery cloth and
apply one coat of a solution of 1 part acetone to 2 parts
benzole prior to priming.

Woodwork:
(i)

Knot, prime, stop and rub down surfaces shall be painted with
synthetic paint.

(ii)

Broom down surfaces shall be treated with wood preservative

or pesticidal coating.

21-7

Section 21 Painting

(iii)

Rub smooth and brush clean surfaces shall be treated with

linseed oil.

(iv)

Rub down and fill surfaces shall be stained, varnished, wax

polished or lacquered.

(v)

Wash down surfaces shall be painted with chalkboard paint.

(f)

Soft or hard fibreboard, insulating board, acoustic tile and similar

surfaces - Broom down, punch nail heads, stop all nail and screw
holes, rub down and leave with texture to match surrounding
surfaces.

(g)

Asbestos cement surfaces - Broom down taking care to prevent the

inhalation and spread of asbestos dust.
Keep dust down by spraying with water and encourage workers to
wear half mask (orinasal) dust respirators.

(h)

Concrete and
cementitious
surfaces

21.47

Fill surfaces shall be painted with polyurethane paint or cold cure

epoxy paint with an approved epoxy filler.

Where coatings are required to resist carbonation, chloride exposure, and/or

aggressive chemical attack, as specified and subject to the above, the
following conditions are required:
(a)

The manufacturer of the paint shall supply health and safety data
relating to the storage and application of all components of the paint
system.

(b)

Particular attention shall be paid to the effects of solvent and vapour

build-up upon the environment around the paint applicator.

(c)

Guidance shall be given by the manufacturer on the long term effects

of volatile or leachable components of the paint system upon the
environment, with particular reference to leachable heavy metal
contents such as mercury based algicides or lead driers.

(d)

The in-service performance of the paint under conditions of fire shall

be given by the manufacturer, making particular reference to surface
spread of flame, and toxicity and opacity of combustion products.

(e)

The manufacturer shall provide information on the methods of

preparation to be used in the event of recoating of painted surfaces
being required.

(f)

Surfaces to receive coatings shall be sound, free from laitance and

contamination such as oils and grease, and normally be at least 28
days old.

(g)

Areas of contamination shall be removed by use of appropriate

solvents, followed by thoroughly cleaning the concrete.

(h)

Shrinkage cracks, blow holes or other defects in the finished concrete

surface shall be filled with a levelling compound compatible with the
paint system to be applied; the compound shall be knifed into defects
and tight-trowelled to remove all surplus materials.

(i)

Wide shrinkage cracks in concrete or joints between concrete and

blockwork, are liable to move under thermal or moisture movement

21-8

Section 21 Painting

processes. Such cracks or joints shall be opened out by saw cutting

and detailed as a movement joint. Care shall be taken so as not to
over-paint the sealant used in the joints, which may be effected by
masking off with tape. Alternatively, the cracks may be sealed by
resin injection.

Complete
stripping of
existing
decoration

21.48

(j)

Where the prepared surface shall be left for extended periods (i.e.
over 1 week) before coating, it shall be protected against
contamination.

(k)

Compatibility tests shall be undertaken to establish whether new

2
paint shall bond to existing paint. A trial area of 5 m shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with the requirements of the SO.

Where ordered by the SO, strip existing decoration which is in poor

condition, or which shall be replaced by a different type of decoration.
After stripping the decoration, prepare surfaces as required for the type of
decoration to be applied.
(a)

All concrete surfaces to receive paint shall be dry at the time of

application. Sufficient drying time shall be allowed either after
construction or after wet preparation methods, to satisfy one of the
following requirements:
(i)

moisture meter readings shall be consistently less than 5%

(concrete scale).

(ii)

there shall be no retained moisture behind polythene taped to

the concrete for 24 hours.

(iii)

internal humidity measurements within concrete shall be <

75% (e.g. Seared probe),

(b)

Prior to applying the paint to new surfaces sample area not less than 5
m2 shall be prepared on the structure to be painted.

(c)

The actual consumption in litres/m2 of the various coats of the paint

system shall be recorded in the test area, in order that due allowance
may be made for rough, irregular or exceptionally absorbent
concrete, or render.

(d)

When the paint system has cured for 14 days, a test of surface
adhesion shall be made in accordance with the requirements of the
SO.

(e)

In the absence of satisfactory bond strength results, the concrete

surface shall be cleaned using high pressure water jetting followed by
re-application and re-testing of the coating.

(f)

The DFT (dry film thickness) shall be as specified to the requirement

of the SO, and should the minimum and mean DFT values be less
than those specified, the coverage rates for the paint shall be
proportionally increased for the duration of the Contract.

(g)

Coatings shall only be applied during favourable weather periods,

when rainfall is not expected for the following 12 hours.

(h)

The dew point shall be at least 5C lower than the temperature of the
concrete surface before painting can commence.

21-9

Section 21 Painting

Preparation of
existing
decorated
surfaces

21.49

(i)

Painting using water based paints, shall not commence whilst the
relative humidity is above 85% or where it may be expected to
exceed 90% during the 12 hour curing period.

(j)

Primers, undercoats and finish coats shall be applied in accordance

with the manufacturers instructions using brush, roller, spray or
other technique to achieve the desired surface finish. Brush
application of primers is the preferred method, working the paint into
the concrete pores.

(k)

Where brush or roller techniques are used, the brushes or roller beads
shall be used for the day only and then discarded. The equipment
shall not be cleaned for re-use, owing to the risk of solvent/water
dilution.

(l)

Where spray equipment is used, all cleaning fluid shall be purged

from the lines using undiluted paint. All such contaminated paint
used for purging lines shall be discarded and not used in the works.

(m)

Where two-component materials are used, each component shall be

thoroughly stirred before mechanically mixing the whole units
together; part batches shall not be used. The exception is where
airless spray equipment is used, incorporating a nozzle mixing
device.

(n)

For multiple coat applications, manufacturers stated minimum and

maximum overcoating times shall not be breached for the prevailing
weather conditions.

(o)

For multiple coat applications, successive coats shall have slightly

different colour shades to assist in achieving uniform coverage.

Remove all dust, dirt, stains, efflorescence, grease and loose material and,
unless otherwise specified, prepare existing decorated surfaces for
decoration as follows:
(a)

Limewashed or whitened surfaces - Scrape, broom down, stop, apply

and bring forward bare spots with new material.

(b)

Chinese distempered washable sealer or non-washable distempered

surfaces - Strip off completely, wash down, stop, seal and prepare to
receive emulsion paint or other paint as specified

(c)

Emulsion or textured emulsion painted surfaces - Scrape, wash

down, stop, and bring forward bare spots with new material.

(d)

Cement painted and external textured painted surfaces - Scrape,

wash down, stop, bring forward bare spots with new material and
dampen surface immediately prior to painting.

(e)

Synthetic painted surfaces other than metal or wood - Scrape, wash

down, stop, rub down and apply primer to and bring forward bare
spots with undercoat.

(f)

Black bituminous coated surfaces - Spot prime bare areas with black
bituminous coating.

21-10

Section 21 Painting

(g)

(h)

Metalwork:
(i)

Painted non-galvanised iron and steel - Wash down, scrape,

chip off, and wire brush to remove all scale and rust, rub
down, apply rust inhibitor and primer to bare areas or such
additional areas as directed and bring forward with undercoat.

(ii)

Painted zinc-sprayed or galvanised iron and steel Wash

down, scrape and remove all scale and rust, rub down and
apply calcium plumbate primer or etching primer as specified
and bring forward bare spots with undercoat.

Woodwork:
(i)

Synthetic painted surfaces - Wash down, scrape, rub down,

knot, prime and stop and bring forward bare spots with
undercoat.

(ii)

Polyurethane or cold cure epoxy painted surfaces - Wash

down, scrape, rub down, stop and apply epoxy filler to and
bring forward bare spots with undercoat.

(iii)

Varnished surfaces - Wash down, scrape and rub down and

bring forward bare spots with varnish.

(iv)

Waxed or lacquered surfaces other than waxed floors - Rub

down, fill, and again rub down to produce a smooth surface
ready for re-waxing or re-lacquering.

(v)

Waxed floors - Clean with wire wool or sand down as

specified.

Where ordered by the SO, strip existing decoration which is in poor

condition, or which shall be replaced by a different type of decoration.

Complete
stripping of
existing
decoration

21.50

Surfaces
containing
asbestos

21.51

Obtain instructions from SO before commencing any preparatory work on

surfaces containing asbestos. Do not disturb asbestos-containing substrates.

Unsound
surfaces and
substrates

21.52

If, during the course of the preparatory work, any surfaces or substrates are
found to be unsound, report and obtain instructions from SO.

Application in
general

21.53

Mix and apply

recommendations.

After stripping the decoration, prepare surfaces as required for the type of
decoration to be applied.

paints

in

accordance

with

the

manufacturer's

Paints shall only be thinned in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and with the approval of the SO.
Apply the coating carefully so that the finished surface is free from
imperfection or brush marks.
Cut in neatly and cleanly. Do not splash or mark adjacent surfaces.
The thickness of individual coats of paint and total thicknesses of paint
systems shall be within the standard thickness recommended by the
manufacturers unless otherwise specified.

21-11

Section 21 Painting

Ensure that there shall be adequate ventilation for all painting processes.
Priming in
general

21.54

Work primer into surface, joints, angles and end grain.

Ensure that priming coats are of adequate thickness and suit the surface
porosity.
Ensure that any primed surfaces that have deteriorated on site or in transit are
touched up or re-primed.
Apply priming coats on new work before the articles are fixed in position.
Apply primer to metal surfaces on the same day as they have been cleaned.
Allow 'wash' or 'etch' priming coats to harden before applying subsequent
priming coats.

Undercoating

21.55

Apply undercoats in an even film over all surfaces. Avoid uneven

thicknesses at edges and angles.
If the undercoating of a particular painting system is only available in white,
apply an additional finishing coat in lieu of a second undercoat.

Finishing coat

21.56

Apply finishing coats in an even film over all surfaces. Avoid brush marks,
sags, runs and other defects.
Where two hard gloss finishing coats are specified, apply second coat within
48 hours of first coat.
Rub down with medium/fine glass paper between coats to provide key.

Anti-mould
liquid

21.57

On surfaces subject to mould or similar growth, wash down with one coat of
anti-mould liquid before preparation of surface for decoration. Ensure that
surfaces are entirely clean of old mould growth and spores.

Water repellant
liquid

21.58

Brush, clean down and apply one coat of water repellant liquid in accordance
with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Cement paint

21.59

Before applying cement paint to absorbent surfaces, thoroughly damp the

surfaces so as to provide even suction.
Use cement paints within one hour of mixing.
Allow a minimum drying time of 12 hours between coats.

External
textured paint

21.60

Allow a minimum drying time of 12 hours between coats or in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations.

Pesticidal
coating

21.61

Apply over entire surface or in bands of 75 mm wide, as specified.

Wood
preservative

21.62

Apply wood preservative over entire surface of timber.

The timber shall have the correct moisture content before application of the
preservative. Treatment shall comply with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and be carried out after cutting to size. Stack the treated
timber to dry out before priming and fixing.

21-12

Section 21 Painting

Black bitumen
coating solution

21.63

Blind coating which is to receive plaster, rendering or screeds with clean,

sharp sand while still tacky.
The final covering shall be laid as soon as possible after the black bitumen
coating.

Black enamel

21.64

Work the material well under the brush and when the enamel is dry, it shall
be hard and elastic.

Linseed oil

21.65

Allow a minimum drying time of 2 hours between coats.

Wax polish

21.66

On joinery and furniture, apply with a soft cloth and allow a minimum
drying time of 4 hours between coats. Brush surface with a soft brush to
obtain an eggshell finish.
On floors, apply with weighted felt pad or electric polisher.

Cellulose
lacquer

21.67

Apply undercoats and rub down with "flour-grade" glass paper and apply
final coat and polish to produce a hard, high gloss finish free from marks and
imperfections.

Rebates, glazing
beads and putty

21.68

Apply suitable primer for glazing compounds specified in Clause 20.18 to

rebates and beads before glazing.
Seal putty ensuring that it has had sufficient curing time (5/7 days) but
before it hardens as specified in Clause 20.27 with suitable primer and paint.

Writing

21.69

Unless otherwise specified, paint letters, characters, figures, etc. to the

required sizes and styles in thick coat of synthetic paint so that they stand out
boldly and solidly, free from brush marks.

Type and
number of coats

21.70

Unless otherwise specified, prepare and apply the type and number of coats
and use primers, sealers, etc. as Tables 21.1, 21.2, 21.3 & 21.4. Unless
otherwise stated within Tables 21.1, 21.2, 21.3 & 21.4, the treatment of
internal and external surfaces is the same.

21-13

Section 21 Painting

TABLE 21.1
Number of Paint Coats
on Plaster, Render, Concrete, Brick, Block, Tarmacadam and Similar Surfaces
Type of Treatment

Lime wash

Number of Coats
On New Surfaces
Redecoration of Existing
Surfaces
Two coats
One or two coats, as specified

Emulsion paint

One coat thinned with water in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations etc
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned) coats,

as specified

Textured emulsion paint

One coat thinned with water in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations etc
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned) coats,

as specified.

Anti-mould acrylic emulsion

paint

One coat thinned with water in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations*
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned) coats,

as specified.

Multi-colour paint

One coat recommended primer by brush. One

binder coat and one finishing coat by spray.

One binder coat and one finishing

coat by spray.

Synthetic paint

One coat alkali resisting primer, one undercoat

and one finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
as specified.

Cement paint

Two coats.

One or two coats, as specified

External textured paint

Two coats.

One or two coats, as specified.

Cold cure epoxy paint

One undercoat and one finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
as specified.
(Note: If existing finish is not cold
cure epoxy paint,. completely
strip and prepare as for new
surfaces).

Pesticidal coating

One coat.

One coat.

Tar

One or two coats, as specified.

One or two coats, as specified.

Marking paint

Two thick coats.

One or two coats, as specified.

Fluorescent paint

One coat alkali resisting primer, one undercoat

of flat synthetic paint and one finishing coat.

One undercoat of white synthetic

paint, if specified, and one
finishing coat.

Reflecting paint

One coat alkali resisting primer, one undercoat

of white synthetic paint, and one finishing coat
of white synthetic paint finished gloss with fine
grain reflective aggregate.

One undercoat as described for

new surfaces, if specified, and one
finishing coat of white synthetic
paint finished gloss with fine
grain reflective aggregate.

When applied to new lime based plaster, substitute one coat of water based lime-resistant primer
instead of the thinned-down coat.

21-14

Section 21 Painting

TABLE 21.2
Number of Coats
on Metal Surfaces

Type of Treatment

On New Surfaces

Redecoration of Existing
Surfaces.

Synthetic paint

One coat recommended primer,

two undercoats and one finishing
coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat.

Metallic paint

One coat recommended primer,

two undercoats and one finishing
coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
or two undercoats and one
finishing coat, as specified.

Heat resisting paint

One coat recommended primer,

two undercoats and one finishing
coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
or two undercoats and one
finishing coat, as specified.

Chemical resisting paint

One coat recommended primer,

two undercoats and one finishing
coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
or two undercoats and one
finishing coat, as specified.

Black enamel

One coat recommended primer

and one coat.

One coat.

Non-toxic paint

One coat recommended primer

and two coats.

Two coats.

Polyurethane paint

One coat polyurethane red lead

primer, one undercoat and one
finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
as specified.
(Note: If existing finish is not
polyurethane, completely strip
and prepare as for new surfaces).

Cold cure epoxy paint

One coat epoxy red oxide

chromate primer, one undercoat
and one finishing coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
as specified.
(Note: If existing finish is not
cold cure epoxy paint,
completely strip and prepare as
for new surfaces).

Black bitumastic

One or two coats, as specified.

21-15

One or two coats, as specified.

Section 21 Painting

TABLE 21.3
Number of Coats
on Wood Surfaces

Type of Treatment

On New Surfaces

Redecoration of Existing
Surfaces

Synthetic paint

Internally: One coat

recommended primer, one
undercoat and one finishing coat.

Internally or externally: One

finishing coat, or one undercoat
and one finishing coat, as
specified.

Externally: One coat

recommended primer, two
undercoats and one finishing
coat.
Polyurethane paint

One undercoat and one finishing

coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
or two finishing coats externally
as specified.

Pesticidal coating

One coat.

(Note: If existing finish is not

polyurethane paint, completely
strip and prepare as for new
surfaces)
.
One coat.

Wood preservative

One or two coats, as specified.

One or two coats, as specified.

Linseed oil

Three coats.

Two coats.

Stain

Two or more coats, as specified,

to obtain approved colour.

Two or more coats, as specified,

to obtain approved colour.

Varnish

Two or three coats, as specified.

One or two coats, as specified.

Wax polish

On joinery and furniture: Three

coats (minimum).

On joinery and furniture: One or

two coats, as specified.

On floors: Two coats.

On floors: One or two coats, as

specified.

Chalk-board paint

Two coats.

One or two coats, as specified.

Cellulose lacquer

Three coats (minimum).

One or two coats, as specified.

21-16

Section 21 Painting

TABLE 21.4
Number of Coats
on Building Boards and Roof Covering etc.

Type of Treatment

On New Surfaces

Redecoration of Existing
Surfaces

Emulsion paint on soft or

hard fibreboard,
insulating board,
acoustic tiles and similar
surfaces

One coat thinned with water in

accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned)

coats, as specified.

Plastic emulsion paint

on asbestos surfaces

One coat alkali resisting primer

and one coat thinned with water
in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned)

coats, as specified.

Textured emulsion paint

on soft or hard
fibreboard, insulating
board, acoustic tiles
similar surfaces

One coat thinned with water in

accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned)

coats, as specified.

Anti-mould acrylic
emulsion paint on
asbestos surfaces

One coat alkali resisting primer

and one coat thinned with water
in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations
and two full (unthinned) coats.

One or two full (unthinned)

coats, as specified.

Synthetic paint on soft or

hard fibreboard,
insulating board, acoustic
tiles and similar surfaces

One coat recommended sealer,

one undercoat and one finishing
coat.

One finishing coat or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
as specified.

Synthetic paint on
asbestos surfaces

One coat alkali resisting primer,

one undercoat and one finishing
coat.

One finishing coat, or one

undercoat and one finishing coat,
as specified.

Preparation for
road marking
materials

21.71

(a)

The road surface shall be clean, dry and free from any loose detritus,
mud and old flaking road marking materials. When directed by the
SO, oil and grease shall be removed by high pressure water jetting,
shot blasting, grinding or other approved methods.

(b)

Where road markings shall be laid on a bituminous road surface

which has not yet been opened to traffic, no surface preparation shall
be required.

(c)

Where road markings shall be laid on a concrete road surface which

has not yet been opened to traffic, the curing compound and laitance
shall be removed from the road surface.

(d)

Where existing markings shall be relaid with a type of material other

than that of the existing, the existing material shall be removed by the
high pressure water jetting, shot blasting, grinding or other approved
methods.

21-17

Section 21 Painting

Supply, delivery, 21.72

storage and
laying of road
marking
materials

Reflectorization
of road marking
materials by
surface
application

Thickness of
road marking
materials

21.73

21.74

(e)

Where existing markings shall be replaced with the type of material

similar to the existing, the existing marking shall be roughened by
approved methods.

(f)

When road markings shall be applied on concrete road surfaces, a

tack coat shall be applied on the road surface prior to application of
road marking materials. The primer shall be compatible with the road
marking material and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

(g)

The removal or roughening of existing road markings adjacent to any

longitudinal or transverse joint shall be carried out by approved
method in order to avoid damaging the joint.

Hot Applied Thermoplastic Road Marking Materials, Type 'A' and 'B'
(a)

Thermoplastic road marking materials shall be supplied and

delivered in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.

(b)

Thermoplastic road marking materials shall be prepared on site, and

laid in accordance with Clauses 4 and 5 of BS 3262-3.

(c)

Thermoplastic road marking shall not be laid when the road surface
is wet or when the air temperature is below 10C.

For types 'A' and 'B' road marking materials, surface retro-reflectivity shall
be accomplished as follows:
(a)

Solid glass beads shall be incorporated in the road marking materials

prior to application on site. Solid glass beads to comply with Glass
Bead Medium Grading requirements of BS 1423.

(b)

The retro-reflectivity of all road markings shall be enhanced by the

application of solid glass beads at the rate of 400 to 500 g/m2. The
beads shall be applied concurrently with the line. The solid glass
beads shall comply with Class B requirements of BS 1423.

(c)

Solid glass beads shall be applied on site by mechanical means to the

SO's satisfaction. Where solid glass beads cannot be satisfactorily
applied by mechanical means they may, with prior approval, be
applied by manual methods.

The thermoplastic material to fall within the following tolerances:

Type

Thickness

(i)

Screed markings

4.0 + 1.0 mm

(ii)

Sprayed marking
other than yellow
edge lines

not less
than 1.5 mm

(iii)

Sprayed yellow
lines

not less
than 0.8 mm

(iv)

Width and length

+10% -5%

The thickness specified is exclusive of surface applied solid glass beads.

The method of thickness measurement shall be in accordance with
Appendices B & C of BS 3262-3.

21-18

Section 21 Painting

The apparatus for laying the thermoplastic material shall be capable of

producing a marking to a uniform thickness and width with clean edges and
free from streaks, lumps and blisters.
Test Certificate
and routine
testing of road
marking
materials

21.75

When required by the SO, a test certificate prepared and signed by an

independent laboratory shall be submitted prior to the commencement of the
Works certifying that samples taken from the materials shall be used in the
Works to comply with BS EN 1824 and BS EN 1871.

Concealed pipes
& ducts

21.76

Insulated pipes and ducts concealed in false ceilings or ducts not normally
accessible need not be painted but must be colour coded.
Insulated pipes and ducts run in accessible vertical ducts and in normally
visible positions shall be plastered or wrapped with specified insulating
materials and painted in the appropriate colour code or with appropriate
colour code bands.
Uninsulated pipes and ducts, whether concealed or normally visible, shall be
painted either in the appropriate colour code or as required by the SO and
with appropriate colour code bands.

Machinery and
pipework

21.77

All machinery, unless otherwise specified, shall be finished in green to BS

4800 (14 E 51).
All pipework in the machinery rooms shall be finished generally in
accordance with the Table 21.5.
All exposed service pipework outside the machinery rooms, shall be painted
either as in the machinery room or to match the surrounding surface with
distinguishing colour code bands and flow arrows in the specified colour
scheme as directed by the SO.
Visible copper pipes and fittings for refrigerant which are not insulated shall
be polished bright and lacquered.
All metalwork inside cold stores, mortuary body chambers and similar
refrigerator spaces shall be finished in mould resistant paint suitable for low
temperature application to the satisfaction of the SO.

Identification of
Pipelines

21.78

Pipes and pipelines shall be painted in colours either in accordance with

Table 21.5 or as directed by the SO, complete with the identification colour
code indication. The basic identification colour or the decorative colour shall
be applied over the whole length of the pipe. In the case of a decorative
colour being applied, colour code indications must be placed at all junctions,
at both sides of valves, service appliances, bulkheads, wall penetrations and
at any other places where identification is necessary and as directed by the
SO.
Valves may be painted with the identification colour except in the case
where the pipelines have been coded with safety colour for fire fighting, the
valves shall be painted red.
The direction of flow of fluid shall be indicated by an arrow over the basic
identification colour and painted white or black in order to contrast clearly
with the identification colour.

21-19

Section 21 Painting

TABLE 21.5
Colour Banding Identification of B.S. Pipelines

Description of
Service
Water
Drinking
Cooling
(Primary)
Boiler feed
Condensate

Basic
Colour 150 mm
approx.

Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)

Colour Code Indication

100 mm approx.

Blue
(18 E 53)
White
Crimson
(04 D 45)
Crimson
(04 D 45)

White

Chilled

Green
(12 D 45)

White

Mains supply,
cold
Mains supply,
hot
Central heating
lower than
o
100 C
Central heating
higher than
o
100 C
Sea, river,
untreated
Fire fighting

Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)

White

Blue
(18 E 53)

Emerald
Green
(14 E 53)
Emerald
Green
(14 E 53)
Blue
(18 E 53)
Crimson
(04 D 45)
Crimson
(04 D 45)

Green
(12 D 45)

Crimson
(04 D 45)

Blue
(18 E 53)

Compressed Air
(including, air
ducts)
Vacuum

White

Green
(12 D 45)
Safety Red
(04 E 53)

Green
(12 D 45)

Natural gas

Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)

White

Green
(12 D 45)

White

Blue
(18 E 53)

Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)
Green
(12 D 45)

Crimson
(04 D 45)

Green
(12 D 45)

White

Green
(12 D 45)

Light Blue
(20 E 51)
Light Blue
(20 E 51)

White

Steam
Drainage
Electrical
Conduits and
Ducts
Town
Gas
Manufactured
gas

Crimson
(04 D 45)
Crimson
(04 D 45)

Basic
Colour 150 mm
approx.

Light Blue
(20 E 51)

Silver Grey
(10 A 03)
Black
Orange
(06 E 51)

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Emerald
Green
(14 E 53)
Yellow
(10 E 53)

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

21-20

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)
Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Section 21 Painting

Refrigerant gas
or liquid
Oil
Diesel fuel

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Code Number of the

Refrigerant
(in black)

Brown
(06 C 39)

White

Furnace fuel
Lubricating

Brown
(06 C 39)

Acids &
Alkalines

Violet
(22 C 37)

Medical Gases
Oxygen

Nitrous
oxide

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Brown
(06 C 39)

Brown
(06 C 39)
Emerald
Green
(14 E 53)
Black &
Yellow
Stripes

Brown
(06 C 39)
Violet
(22 C 37)

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Terracotta
(02 C 37)

White

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Terracotta
(02 C 37)

French Blue
(20 D 45)

Yellow Ochre
(08 C 35)

Chemical
cleaning and
sealing of
stonework

21.79

Chemical solutions for cleaning and sealing stonework shall be used strictly
in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Cleaning
"Shanghai"
plaster

21.80

Scrub surface with a hard bristle brush while applying a solution of an

approved detergent in warm or cold water. Rinse off surface with clean fresh
water applied by high pressure hose.

Cleaning
21.81
terrazzo and
rubbed
granolithic work

Scrub surface with a hard bristle brush, using fresh water and a non-caustic
fine scouring powder. Rub down with pumice block, where specified. Rinse
with fresh water and apply an approved wax emulsion.

Cleaning
thermoplastic,
vinyl, cork and
similar flooring

21.82

Apply a solution of approved detergent and water and scrub with a soft
bristle brush. Mop with a damp mop and remove excess liquid. Apply one
coat of liquid wax emulsion, where specified.

Sealing flooring

21.83

Floor seal shall not be applied without the specific written instruction of the
SO. Where specified, sweep floor clean and apply two coats of sealer as
follows or in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations:
(i)

Apply first coat until absorption has ceased

(ii)

Remove any surplus sealant.

(iii)

Allow several hours drying time

(iv)

Apply second coat in sufficient quantity to form a thin film over the
surface

Seal shall not be applied under damp weather conditions.

21-21

Section 21 Painting

Cleaning glazed
and mosaic wall
tiling and
flooring

21.84

Clean surface with a 10% solution of hydrochloric or oxalic acid and rinse
with fresh water.

Cleaning
synthetic paint
and varnish
work

21.85

Clean surface with soft soap or a solution of approved detergent and water,
with admixture of disinfectant, where specified, and dry off with
washleathers.

Cleaning glazed
sanitary fittings

21.86

Clean with hot water and spirits of salts, and rinse with fresh water.

Cleaning water
tanks

21.87

Empty galvanized steel or concrete cisterns or tanks. Scrape and wire brush
all internal surfaces. Remove all growth, rust or scale, scrub out, and clean
3
with a solution of chloride of lime (not less than 1kg chloride of lime to 6 m
of water) and wash and flush with fresh water.
Paint the inside surface with two coats of approved non-toxic black paint,
where specified.

High quality
finishes

21.88

Approved textured high quality finishes comprising an epoxy, silica, acrylic

or similar base with an epoxy or polyurethane top coat or coats shall be
applied by approved applicators.(See also Clause 18.38).
Prepare surfaces to receive these materials and supply all necessary
scaffolding, protection, storage and the like.

Health and
safety

21.89

Do not apply lead based primers and calcium plumbate primers by spraying.
Wear respirators which supply clean air during blasting cleaning, paint
spraying or in a situation where toxic fumes are generated.
Take precautions to avoid skin and eye contact with paints and their
solvents. Follow all precautionary measures as recommended by the paint
manufacturers.

Volatile Organic 21.90

Compound
content

The Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content, in grams per litre, of all
regulated paint stated in the Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap 311) shall
not exceed the prescribed limit specified in the Air Pollution Control
Ordinance (Cap 311).
The testing of the VOC content of paint shall be determined in accordance to
the Air Pollution Control Ordinance (Cap 311).

21-22

Section 21 Painting

QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

Emulsion paint

21.91

The quality tests for emulsion paint shall be as follows:

Test Items
Preliminary
examination of
paint

Test Method

Surface skin

- No surface skin

Consistency

- No gelling

Colour separation
into layers

Drying times

21.92

BS EN ISO 1513

- No colour separation

Visible impurities

- No visible impurities

Sediment

- No hard settling

Hard drying (min)

BS EN ISO 9117-1

< = 1 hour

Fineness of grind (m)

BS EN ISO 1524;
BS3900:C6

< = 50 m

Hiding power (contrast ratio %)

BS EN ISO 2814;
BS3900:D4

> = 75%

BS EN ISO 2813

< = 20

Viscosity (procedure B)

ASTM:D562-:10

65 - 85 KU

Scrub resistance (cycle)

ASTM:D2486 - 06

> = 400 cycles

Specular gloss

Synthetic paint

Acceptance Standards

85

The quality tests for synthetic paint shall be as follows:

Test Items
Preliminary
examination of
paint

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

Surface skin

- No surface skin

Consistency

- No gelling

Colour separation
into layers

BS EN ISO 1513

- No colour separation

Settling

- No hard settling

Extraneous matter

- No extraneous matter

Viscosity (Flow Cup No.6) (sec)

BS EN ISO 2431;
BS 3900:A6

45 to 60 sec

Drying times

Surface drying
(hour)

BS EN ISO 9117-3

<=4

Hard drying (hour)

BS EN ISO 9117-1

< = 18

Fineness of grind (m)

BS EN ISO 1524;
BS3900:C6

< = 25 m

Hiding power (contrast ratio %)

BS EN ISO 2814;
BS3900:D4

> = 85%

BS EN ISO 2813

> 80

Specular gloss

60

Bend test

BS EN ISO 1519

Scratch test (g)

BS EN ISO 1518-1

21-23

No coating crack at 3
mm mandrel
> = 600

Section 21 Painting

Multi-layer
acrylic paint

21.93

The quality tests for multi-layer acrylic paint shall be as follows:

Test Items

1.

Test Method

Low Temperature
Stability

Table 2

2.

Change in Consistency

Clause 5.6
JIS A 6910-1988
Table 2

3.

Cracking Resistance due

to Initial Stage Drying

JIS A6909-2003

Acceptance
Standards

Remarks

No lumps and free

from separation
and aggregation of
the composing
materials

Respective coatings of
primer coating, main
coating and top coating are
regarded as the samples.

15%

Respective coatings of
primer coating, main
coating and top coating are
regarded as samples.

JIS A6909-2003
Clause 5.7
JIS A 6910-1988
Table 2

No cracking shall
occur.

JIS A6909-2003
4.

Adhesion Strength

Table 2
JIS A6909-2003

Standard condition
> = 68.6 N/cm2
Immersion in
water
> = 49.0 N/cm2

5.

Repeated Warrning and

Cooling

Table 2
JIS A6909-2003

No peering,
cracking and
blistering and
remarkable
discolouration and
degradation in
luster on the
surface.

6.

Permeability

Table 2
JIS A6909-2003

< = 0.5 ml

7.

Impact Resistance

Clause 5.11
JIS A 6910-1988

Cracking,
remarkable
deformation and
peeling shall not
occur.

Table 2
JIS A6909-2003
8.

Weather Resistance

ASTM G154-06

Cracking and
peeling shall not
occur and the
discolouration
shall be No.3 or
subject to approval
by the SO.

The test conditions:

Fluorescent UV Lamp:
UVA-340
Cycle: 24 hrs UV at 60C
Total exposure time: 250
hours

9.

Determination of
Resistance to humid
atmospheres containing
sulphur dioxide

BS EN ISO 3231;

No blistering, loss
of adhesion, rust
staining, change of
colour,
embrittlement and
other signs of
deterioration.

The amount of sulphur

dioxide to be used in
testing is one litre. The test
cycle to be 12 cycles

10. Resistance to Fungal

Growth

BS 3900:F8

BS 3900:G6

Rating 0, no fungal
growth.

Notes:
1. The colour of paint to be tested shall be selected by SO;
2. The base plate for testing to be 20 mm thick cement mortar board.

21-24

Section 21 Painting

SURVEILLANCE TESTS FOR MULTI-LAYER ACRYLIC PAINT

Laboratory tests 21.94
by approved
laboratory

Non compliance

21.95

a.

Provide attendance on the Site, deliver and collect samples etc. as

directed by SO or as specified;

b.

Sample for tests shall be selected by SO.

a.

Where any of the specimens for each sample fails to meet the testing
requirements as specified, all materials manufactured on the same day
shall be removed off Site;

b.

Bear all costs of such further tests and no extension of time shall be
allowed.

ON SITE DELIVERY CHECK

Emulsion paint

a.

21.96

When instructed by SO, carry out the following checks for emulsion
paint upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:
Test Items

Synthetic paint

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

1.

Manufacturers Certificate
of origin & Delivery Note

Document check

From Approved origin

with information of
product identification
number

2.

Colour Code/Label/Serial
Number

Check information
printed on the packing

As Approved

3.

Expiry Date

Check information
printed on the packing

Not expired

21.97

b.

In the event of the checking results failing to meet the checking

requirements upon delivery on Site, remove the failed consignment off
Site.

a.

When instructed by SO, carry out the following checks for synthetic
paint upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs representatives:

Test Items

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

1.

Manufacturers Certificate
of origin & Delivery Note

Document check

From Approved origin

with information of
product identification
number

2.

Colour Code/Label/Serial
Number

Check information
printed on the packing

As Approved

3.

Expiry Date

Check information
printed on the packing

Not expired

b.

In the event of the checking results failing to meet the checking

requirements upon delivery on Site, remove the failed consignment off
Site.

21-25

Section 21 Painting

Multi-layer
acrylic paint

a.

21.98

When instructed by SO, carry out the following checks for multi-layer
acrylic paint upon delivery on Site in the presence of SOs
representatives:

Test Items

Test Method

Acceptance Standards

Document Check

From an Approved
origin with information
of product identification
numbers

1.

Manufacturers Certificate
of Origin & Delivery Note

2.

Color Code/Label serial

number

Check information printed

on the packing

As Approved

3.

Expiry Date

Check information printed

on the packing

Not expired

b.

In the event of the checking results failing to meet the checking

requirements upon delivery on Site, remove the failed consignment off
Site.

21-26

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

SECTION 22
INTERNAL FITTINGS AND FIXTURES
DEMOUNTABLE PARTITIONS
Generally
Construction of
the system

22.01

The system shall be simple and strong in construction, readily adaptable to

suit different office layouts and be capable of being assembled and erected
with high speed and efficiency. It shall include a range of module types
incorporating varying proportions of solid panels and glazed areas ranging
from full height (floor to ceiling) solid panel to full height glass (including
low and half height screens).

Partitions

22.02

The partitions shall be fully demountable and provide maximum recovery of

components including panel finishes and involve minimum amount of effort,
time and disturbances of wall, floor and ceiling when alteration and resiting
either in part or in whole is required. Any module shall be capable of being
demounted and replaced with one of a different type or with a door.
Completed partitions shall be free from exposed bolts, nuts, nail heads and
rivets. The overall thickness of a completed partition shall not be more than
100 mm.

Module

22.03

The partitions shall be constructed of standard module units so assembled

that individual units can be easily dismantled without disturbance to
adjoining units and the partition cavity may be exposed from one face
without disturbing the opposite face.
Module design of varying door heights and low level screens shall also be
available in addition to the capability of the design to readily accommodate
special size doors, doors with vision panels or louvers, double action doors,
etc.

Accommodation
for building
services items

22.04

The system shall have suitable room and sufficient provision within the
thickness of the partition to accommodate normal electrical, telephone and
computer network wiring and conduits, and also the related fittings
including electrical switches, power points and network nodes, etc.

Approval

22.05

Any particular system proposed shall be subject to the approval of the SO,
samples and details of the system shall be submitted for approval if required
by the SO.
Materials

Framework

22.06

The framework shall be either galvanized and coated rolled steel sections to
BS EN 10162 or anodized extruded aluminium sections to BS EN 515, BS
EN 573-3 and BS EN 755-1 to 9, BS EN 12020-1 and BS EN 12020-2 or a
combination of both. All sections shall be of a size and shape which shall
give adequate strength to the framing. Galvanized steel sections shall be not
less than 0.56 mm thick. All framework (vertical and horizontal studs and
furring channels) shall have suitably placed holes formed of an appropriate
size to facilitate installation of electrical and computer network and wiring.

Lining panels

22.07

Panels shall be of 12.50 mm (minimum thickness) gypsum plasterboard or

plywood or chipboard and shall be securely fixed to both sides of the
partition.

22-1

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

Doors

22.08

(a)

Gypsum plasterboard shall comply A3 with BS EN 520:2004+A1

and consist of a core of set gypsum plaster in accordance with BS EN
13279-1 and 13279-2 sandwiched between two layers of heavy
paper.

(b)

Plywood shall be Grade 2 lauan plywood for internal use as specified

in Clause 13.12.

(c)

Chipboard shall comply with BS EN 309 and BS EN 312.

Doors shall be 45 mm thick hollow or 50 mm solid core flush doors covered

with selected hardwood veneer or laminated plastic sheet on both sides and
hung to rebated timber frames.
Appropriate number and types of door hinges shall be provided depending
on the size and weight of doors used.
When specified, hardwood louvre and frame shall be fitted to the door.

Glass for glazed

panel

22.09

Glass for glazed panel shall be 6 mm thick minimum, of the qualities

specified in BS 952, free from bubbles, smoke vanes, air holes, scratches and
other defects and cut to fit the openings, with due allowance made for
expansion, and securely fixed to the trim sections by approved fixing
materials and method as well as manufacturers instructions.

Washable
matt-finished
vinyl cloth

22.10

Washable matt-finished vinyl cloth for panel facing shall be either plain or
textured fabric-backed vinyl cloth of approved quality applied in one full
width (minimum 1200 mm) to each panel with approved adhesive prior to
installation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Samples with
at least 5 choices of colour showing the surface texture and pattern shall be
submitted for the SO's approval.

Hessian fabric

22.11

Hessian fabric shall be interior design, wall lining quality, close weave to a
colour chosen by the SO fixed in full widths with approved adhesive. A
sample panel shall be made up for the SO's approval before use.

Skirtings

22.12

Skirtings shall be 75-100 mm high of baked enamel steel or anodised

extruded aluminium sections of minimum 1 mm thick.

Pinboards

22.13

Pinboards shall be of 13 mm softboard to comply with BS EN 316, BS EN

622-1 and BS EN 622-4, finished with Hessian wall paper to be approved by
the SO.

Finishings and
Colours,
generally

Colours of finishings, anodic frame coatings, plastic stops of cover strips,

together with fabrics and all other finishings shall be to the requirements of
the SO.
Workmanship

Studdings

22.14

Vertical studdings shall be in one continuous length extending from floor to

ceiling and shall be positioned at maximum 600 mm centres for partitions
not exceeding 3.5m high and at maximum 400 mm for partitions exceeding
3.5 m high. Joints and fixing within the framing shall be performed in such a
manner that shall, when erected, produce a rigid and stable and yet fully
demountable framing. The vertical and horizontal stud channels shall be
able to support the various fittings to the system such as glazing panels,
doors and shelvings as required.

Fixing

22.15

Floor channels shall be securely fixed of maximum 600 mm centres by

means of:
(a)

12 mm concrete nails to concrete or screed floor.

22-2

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

(b)

No.6 self tapping screws to steel or chipboard floor.

(c)

No. 6 wood screws to timber floor.

Ceiling channels shall be securely fixed of maximum 600 mm centres by

means of:
(d)

No. 6 self tapping screws to the rigid suspension system along the
metal grid of suspended ceiling.

(e)

No. 6 self tapping screws and approved plastic plugs to concrete

ceiling soffit.

(f)

No. 6 wood screws to timber or plywood ceiling.

Wall channels shall be securely fixed of 750 mm centres by means of:

(g)

No. 6 self tapping screws and approved plastic plugs to concrete or

brick walls.

(h)

No. 6 wood screws to timber or plywood.

Ceiling and wall channels shall be fitted with an applied foam plastic gasket
to form a light and sound seal. Partitions other than full height shall be
provided with either floor to ceiling stabilizer posts or buttress panels to
ensure adequate rigidity and stability.
Full height panels (floor to structural ceiling) shall generally be applied in
one piece. Where ceiling height exceeds 2700 mm and/or where building
access restrict the size of panels, then a horizontal aluminium channel trim
joint shall be permitted. Such joint shall line up with door head level.
Top edge of panels shall be securely fitted into the ceiling channel and
bottom edges retained by the skirting fixing. Vertical edges of panels shall
be retained to the vertical studs by means of continuous clip or screw fixed
aluminium cover strips or by other approved method. Vertical panel edges at
wall junctions shall be fitted into the wall channel. Centre of panels shall be
fixed to the framing by means of suitable stud adhesive, spot applied at
maximum 600 mm centres or by other approved method.
The covering 'tee' bar shall be held continuously by friction and not by clips.
Door frames

22.16

Timber door frames shall be securely fixed to the partition framework with
diagonal braces on each side to stabilize mid-height point of the frame.
Door frames at corners and tee junctions shall be positioned so as to allow
sufficient clearance between back of door and the intersecting partition to
allow the mounting of a surface mounted door closer and enable the door to
open a full 90 without the closer body striking the intersecting partition
face.

Glazed panels

22.17

Glass panels shall be securely fixed into the system by means of extruded
aluminium vertical and horizontal trim section with vinyl strips, and so
designed that the glass panels may be removed and replaced without
dismantling the panel trim or framework. The system shall be capable of
providing double glazing. All exposed edges and corners of glass screens
shall be rounded and polished.

Skirtings

22.18

Skirtings shall be securely fixed to the partition framing by approved fixing

materials and method. External corners in skirtings shall be formed from a
continuous length. Mitred out or butted corners shall not be permitted.

22-3

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

Finishes

22.19

Gypsum plasterboard panels shall be faced with an approved fabric vinyl

cloth as described in Clause 22.10. When required to be painted, gypsum
plasterboard panels shall be prepared and two coats of paint applied.
Plywood and chipboard surfaces may either be painted or faced with
laminated plastic sheet or with 3.2 mm selected hardwood veneer. When
required to be painted, plywood, chipboard and hardwood surfaces shall be
knotted, primed, stopped and two coats of paint applied.

Sound insulation 22.20

Where additional sound insulation is required, a layer of 50 mm thick

fibreglass quilt or plastic foam slabs of an approved proprietary brand shall
be placed close butt jointed within the partition framing. Detailing may vary
depending on the proprietary system employed and the sound reduction
factor specified. Airborne sound insulation shall be tested to BS EN ISO
10140-1/2 & 5 or ASTM-E413 and ASTM E90.

Alteration and
resiting

During alterations to and re-installation of existing partitions, every care and

precaution shall be exercised to avoid unnecessary waste and damage of the
partition components and the erection and fixing to be executed in a
workmanlike manner as previously described.

22.21

When partition components shall be transported from one building to

another or to Government Store, they shall be adequately protected and
every care and precaution shall be taken during loading, unloading and
during the course of transportation to avoid damages to components.
Make good
disturbed areas

22.22

Immediately upon completion of the Works and before handing over, clean
up all partitions and doors and also floor, ceiling and walls upon which
partition work has been carried out.
All disturbance to the floor, ceiling and wall structure and/or finishes during
the course of partition work shall be made good to match existing.
LOWER LEVEL DEMOUNTABLE PARTITION (OPEN PLAN OFFICE
LAYOUTS)
Generally

Generally

22.23

The system shall be simple and strong in construction, readily adaptable to

suit different office layouts and be capable of being assembled and erected
with high speed and efficiency.
The system shall also be fully demountable and shall provide maximum
recovery of components including panel finishes and involve minimum
amount of effort, time, and disturbances on wall and floor finishes when
alterations and repositioning either in part or in whole are required. Any
module shall be capable of being dismantled and replaced by one of the
different types of panels in the series.
Completed partitions shall be free from exposed bolts, nuts, nail heads,
screws heads and rivets.

Module

22.24

The partitions shall be constructed of standard module units, so assembled

that individual panel can easily be dismantled or attached at a connection
point being spanned by a component without removing components from
adjacent panels and without upsetting the integrity of the system.

Accommodation
for building
services items

22.25

The system shall have suitable room and sufficient provision within the
thickness of the partitions to accommodate normal electrical,
communication and computer network wiring, and also the related fittings
including electrical switches, power points and network nodes, etc.

22-4

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

Panels frames
and posts

22.26

Panels, frames and posts shall be anodized extruded aluminium sections or

equivalent. All panel post sections shall be of a size and shape which shall
give adequate strength to the panel framing. The aluminium frames or
equivalent shall contain fastening devices to accept a variety of decorative
inserts including glass panels, veneer, fabric, and acoustic materials, etc. Cut
sections of panel posts shall be covered with plastic top caps and be flushed
with panel tops. Joints and fixings for the panels shall be performed to
produce a rigid, stable and fully demountable system.

Screen panels

22.27

The nominal thickness of the screen panels shall be within the range of 38
mm to 50 mm thick overall. Panel sizes shall vary from 1020 mm to 1650
mm high overall and shall be available in such widths that, when used in
conjunction with connectors, a centreline to centreline dimension shall be
600 mm, 900 mm, 1000 mm, 1200 mm or as specified.
Screen panels shall be covered with fabric and foam layer on both sides.
Centre cores shall be kiln-dried wood frames covered both sides with
pinboard or plywood boarding. Each screen panel shall be finished and
protected on all exposed edges with impact resistant anodized aluminium
moulding or equivalent. Round corners shall be used for all exposed edges.
The tops of panels shall be suitably protected with anodized aluminium
sections or equivalent against cleaning and maintenance equipment and
against damages during changes.

Hanging
components

22.28

Screen panels shall be designed and constructed for hanging components

such as work tops, shelf units and storage components, etc. All hang-on
components shall be fixed securely by a locking mechanism but can be
slot-fixed into patented panel posts by support brackets or metal clips.
The screen panel assembly shall be capable of carrying a total of load 454 kg
minimum.

Screen fabric

22.29

Total thickness of the fabric shall be at least 3 mm. The fabric and the foam
layer shall comply with the flammability standard BS 7176 2007+A1 or its
international equivalent if polyurethane foam material is adopted. For other
materials, fabric and form shall have the surface spread of flame of Class 1.
The fabric shall be available with a reasonable choice of colours, and shall
be specially designed for covering office screens.

Wall mounted
rails

22.30

Wall mounted rails shall be of metal construction with sufficient strength

and shall be suitable for mounting panels to walls with connectors to ensure
continuous connections and stability of the panel system.

Panel connector

22.31

The panel connector assembly shall be a single piece unit, able to connect
two, three or four panels together. It shall be in metal construction and
finished with paint coating. Self adjusting mechanism shall be provided with
the connector to take up any tolerance variations to ensure tight connections
and to adjust to various heights of panel at each joint.
Panel connector assembly shall be designed to carry vertical load of 454 kg
minimum.

Support legs

22.32

Support legs shall be bronze anodized aluminum or equivalent. Ends of

support legs shall be clipped and locked securely into the bases of screen
panels. They shall be adjustable for levelling without disengaging from the
internal components of the screen panels.

Skirting

22.33

Skirting shall be 1.0 mm thick (minimum) anodized extruded aluminium

section or equivalent. Mitred or butted corners shall not be permitted.

Samples

22.34

Samples of fabric, foam, hinges and anodized aluminium section with the
support of valid testing certificates for fabric and foam shall be submitted for

22-5

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

the approval of the SO. Mock up sample of the system shall be provided if
required.
VENETIAN BLINDS
Generally

22.35

The materials used to manufacture slim-line venetian blinds shall comply

with BS 3415 and shall be free from visible defects e.g. dents, scratches, etc.
Blinds shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Materials

Headrail

22.36

Headrail shall be enamel coated galvanized steel section to

BS EN 10162 of sufficient strength and thickness to support the completed
blind without visible sagging or twisting.

Brackets

22.37

Blinds shall be supplied with galvanized steel fixing brackets able to support
the blind and retain it securely.

Slats

22.38

The blinds shall be constructed with enamel coated flexible aluminium slats
of 25 mm wide and 0.18 mm thick (finished thickness) 5% tolerance in
thickness. The material and profile of any slat in the assembled blind shall be
such as to provide the strength and flexibility in accordance with BS 3415.
Slat widths within a blind shall be consistent to within + 0.2 mm or - 0.5 mm.
Slats shall have radiused ends or corners and shall be free from burrs and
sharp edges.

Bottom rail

22.39

The bottom rail shall be constructed from enamel coated galvanised steel
section to BS EN 10162 rigid throughout its length in the mounted blind.
The ends of the bottom rail shall be enclosed withplastic end-caps.

Ladder
tapes/cords

22.40

Ladder tapes or cords shall be constructed from polyester fibre.

Samples

22.41

Technical pamphlets and a sample of the venetian blind shall be submitted

for the approval of the SO.
Workmanship

Headrail

22.42

The headrail shall not deviate from the horizontal by more than + 5 mm
when the blind is mounted beneath a plane surface, and no part of the
operating mechanism, within the headrail, shall make contact with that
surface.
Unless specifically intended for installation within a recess or box, the ends
of the headrail shall be closed off by plastic end caps.

Fixing brackets

22.43

Brackets shall be pre-bored to allow for end or top or face fixing. A

minimum of 2 Nos. for blinds with widths not exceeding 1200 mm and 1
additional bracket for every increment of 600 mm in width. It shall be
possible to remove the headrail from the brackets when they are fixed.

Fixing slats

22.44

Holes and slots cut into each slat shall be positioned symmetrically across
the width of the slat and their width shall not exceed the width of the cord
passing through them by more than 3 mm to minimize light penetration of
the finished blind, consistent with satisfactory operation. The holes and slots
in slats of the same blind shall align to within 1 mm, to minimize abrasion of
cords and tapes passing through them.
In a finished, assembled blind, the slats shall be capable of tilting through an
angle of not less than 70 to the horizontal in each direction and each slat
shall overlap the adjoining slat by at least 10% of the slat width in each of the

22-6

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

fully closed positions at any point of drop of the blind. The top slat shall be
within 5 mm of the headrail in the fully closed position.
Unless specifically designed to clear an obstruction at the point of
installation, the length of any slat shall be within 2 mm of the overall width
of the blind, and the alignment of slat ends at any position of the blind, shall
not deviate from vertical by more than 2 mm.
Bottom rail

22.45

Unless specifically designed to clear an obstruction at the point of

installation, the length of the bottom rail including end-caps shall be within
3 mm of the overall width of the blind.
Tape or cord securing points shall be in alignment to within 3 mm with the
holes for these in the slats. Tape or cord anchorage shall withstand a force of
400 N applied directly to the tape or cord.

Control action

22.46

The rise and fall control mechanism shall ensure quick release and a smooth
raising and lowering action at any position, with no fluctuation greater than
10% in the graduation of the force required to raised or lower the blind
completely.
A cord locking control mechanism shall be released by drawing the control
cord across the face of the blind and shall be locked when the cord is in a
vertical position. The cord locking system shall be so designed that it shall
not be possible to drop a blind accidentally.
Lift cords of 2 mm diameter shall have a breaking force of not less than 400
N when tested in accordance with the method given in section 9 of BS EN
ISO 2307.
Cords shall be secured together so as to prevent horizontal misalignment of
the blind by pulling the individual rise and fall cords.

Tilt control

22.47

The tilt control shall be able to hold the suspended slats securely in any tilted
position.
Control rods ("wand") shall have a breaking force of not less than 400 N
when tested in accordance with the method given in section 9 of BS EN ISO
2307 and the "wand" shall be of solid core transparent plastic rods.

Ladder
tape/cord

22.48

When tested in accordance with the method given in section 9 of BS EN ISO

2307, vertical sections or supports of the tape or cord shall have a breaking
strength of not less than 250 N; and the horizontal sections or cross-web of
the tape or cord shall have a breaking strength of not less than 50 N. The
cross web shall be securely joined to the vertical supports and shall
withstand a force of not less than 50 N without separation. The interval
between tapes in a finished blind shall be such that the horizontal deflection
of the slats between ladders does not exceed 3 mm.
Tapes shall be distributed symmetrically across the blind width, and shall be
provided at 225 mm from edge of blind and at 650 mm (maximum) centres.

Vertical blinds

22.49

Vertical blind louvres shall be made of 100 mm wide glass fibre slats or
impregnated fabric of a colour and quality approved by the SO and shall be
installed complete with all necessary accessory materials in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
The vertical blinds shall enable operation and rotation of slats in 180 upon a
vertical axis to both sides by drawing of an endless cord or a chromium
plated ball chain.

22-7

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

STRONGROOM DOORS
Generally

22.50

Strongroom doors are classified as follows:

Treasury Grade A

shall be as specified and comply with Director

of Accounting Services requirements.

Treasury Grade B

shall be as specified and comply with Director

of Accounting Services requirements.

Treasury Grade C

tough steel door with 25 mm thick door plate.

Treasury Grade D

tough steel door with 10 mm thick door plate.

Treasury Grade E

tough steel door with 8 mm thick door plate.

Treasury Grade C door

Door

22.51

The door shall have an overall thickness of 157 mm, of which the outer door
plate to be 25 mm thick tough steel. The door plate of solid steel shall be
further reinforced over the locks and vital parts. The lock and essential parts
of the boltwork shall be protected by hardened steel plate to give overall
metal protection of 38 mm thick.

Door frame

22.52

Door frame shall be made from substantial angles at the sides and top with a
flat frame at the bottom. The frame shall be welded to form a complete
structure of uniform strength. For securing the frame into the wall, three
pairs of grip lugs shall be provided to suit a minimum wall thickness of 225
mm. The door shall be hung in the frame by hardened steel pivots working in
steel carriages. Vertical thrust from the door shall be taken on a hardened
steel ball bearing, vertical adjustment shall be provided.

Boltwork

22.53

There shall be six solid steel bolts at the front edge with six fixed dog bolts
on the back edge of the door. All these bolts shall be 38 mm in diameter. The
moving bolts and fixed dog bolts shall be engaged behind the solid rebates of
the frame.

Locking

22.54

The lever-operated bolts throwing mechanism shall be secured by a 7-lever

lock with monitor action to ensure that the door is always properly locked.
The door shall also be fitted with a three wheel keyless combination lock to
ensure maximum security. All locks shall be protected by a drill resistant
plate.

Explosive
protection

22.55

Anti-explosive protection devices shall be provided, which shall be designed

to automatically re-lock the door if an attempt is made to dislodge the lock
by explosive or other means.

Fire protection

22.56

A steel panel of 44 mm overall thickness incorporating proven fire resisting

materials shall be fitted over the whole area of the lock chamber.
Treasury Grade D door

Door

22.57

The door shall have an overall thickness of 135 mm, of which the outer door
plate to be 10 mm tough steel. The door plate of solid steel shall be further
reinforced over the locks and vital parts. The lock and essential parts of the
boltwork shall be protected by hardened steel plate.

Door frame

22.58

Door frame shall be made from 75 x 75 mm steel angles at the sides and top
with a 10 mm flat steel frame at the bottom. The frame is welded to form a
complete structure of uniform strength. For securing the frame into the wall,
three pairs of grip lugs shall be provided to suit a minimum wall thickness of
225 mm. The door shall be hung in the frame by hardened steel pivots
working in steel carriages. Vertical thrust from the door shall be taken on a

22-8

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

hardened steel ball bearing, vertical adjustment shall be provided.

Boltwork

22.59

There shall be six 25 mm diameter solid steel sliding bolts engaged behind
the 25 mm square rebate of the door frame. The edge of the door shall be
hinged with a 40 mm x 20 mm full door height bar engaged behind the solid
rebates of the frame.

Locking

22.60

The lever-operated bolts throwing mechanism shall be secured by a 6-lever

lock with monitor action to ensure that the door is always properly locked.
The door shall also be fitted with a three wheel keyless combination lock to
ensure maximum security. All locks shall be protected by a drill resistant
plate.

Explosive
protection

22.61

Anti-explosive protection devices shall be as Clause 22.55.

Fire protection

22.62

A steel panel of 44 mm overall thickness incorporating proven fire resisting

materials shall be fitted over the whole area of the lock chamber.
Treasury Grade E door

Door

22.63

The door shall have an overall thickness of 108 mm, of which the outer door
plate to be 8 mm tough steel. The door plate shall be further reinforced over
the locks and vital parts. The lock and essential parts of the boltwork shall be
protected by hardened steel plate.

Door frame

22.64

Door frame shall be as Clause 22.58.

Boltwork

22.65

Four 25 mm diameter solid steel moving bolts shall be fixed at the front edge
and four fixed bolts shall be engaged behind the 25 mm square rebate of the
door frame.

Locking

22.66

The bolt-throwing mechanism shall be operated by a lever handle which

shall be secured by a 6-lever lock or a three-wheel keyless combination lock
as specified.

Explosive
protection

22.67

Explosive protection shall be as Clause 22.55.

Fire protection

22.68

Fire protection of the strongroom door shall be as Clause 22.62.

Installation

Generally

22.69

Strongroom doors and frames shall not be installed unless the building is
roofed or other protection provided and the strongroom has been
constructed.
Doors must not be opened until the frame is securely strutted against falling
forward. Door frame must not be fixed without the door.

Installation

22.70

Doors shall be positioned perfectly level and perpendicular in the wall

opening and grip bolts to be attached.
Check and adjust the door by wedging until it swings freely, easily and shuts
without binding.
Door frame positioning wedges shall only be driven between side frames
and floor and not between sill and floor.
On no account shall any part of the door be chipped or filed.
Secure the door in position by grouting in the grip lugs. Before grouting,
place vertical and horizontal wooden struts across the inside of the frame

22-9

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

opening to prevent distortion of the frame during the grouting and setting
process and the door shall be open at right angles and wedged to take the
weight of the door off the frame.
LOCKERS
Compartments

22.71

Locker compartment shall have minimum internal dimensions of 260 mm

(height) x 250 mm (width) x 450 mm (depth).
Multi-tier lockers shall comprise a maximum of six-tier compartments and
shall not be more than 2000 mm in overall height including the supporting
frame or base.
Stacks of lockers may be connected together to form a block.

Material and
construction

22.72

Sides, back and shelves of locker shall be manufactured from 24 SWG cold
rolled galvanized steel sheet jointed together to form the locker housing.
Door frames shall be manufactured from 20 SWG cold rolled galvanized
steel sheets.
Doors and reinforced ribs shall be manufactured from 24 SWG cold rolled
galvanized steel sheet. Doors shall be reinforced top and bottom with
vertical rib for rigidity and security; and shall be mounted in a formed
framework to the front of the locker housing.
All components shall be finished with baked enamel of colour as specified
prior to final assembly.

Door fittings

22.73

Doors shall be fixed with door buffers for quietness. Door hinges shall be
concealed self-closing type. PVC number plate with engraved numbers shall
be fixed on each door.

Ventilation

22.74

Lockers shall be designed to allow free internal air circulation using

perforated door and/or back panel, without impairing the security of locker
compartments.

Safety

22.75

Lockers shall be free from any sharp points, edges and corners.

Door lock

22.76

Door lock may be one of the following:

(a)

Cylinder spring bolt lock with large cylinder and 2 keys.

(b)

Cylinder refund locks with detachable lockset, entirely made of

stainless steel, controlled by master key.

The lock mechanism shall be securely protected to interlock with the frame
upright.
CUBICLE SYSTEMS
Cubicle systems
generally

22.77

Cubicle systems to consist of panels with light weight core material and high
performance surface veneer which shall be impervious to water, easily
cleaned and with a durable finish.
Panels shall be designed to be bolted or screwed together and may be raised
on posts or wall brackets above floor level, floor mounted, or suspended
from above.

Construction

22.78

Panels, doors and pilasters of cubicle system shall be either:

(a)

Metal construction of baked enamel or vinyl finish constructed with

hot-dipped galvanized steel sheets formed and bonded with a cellular

22-10

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

honeycomb core, or polyurethane core, or other approved light

weight core materials. Edges shall be tack welded around the
perimeter and sealed with interlocking molding. Molding corners
shall be welded to each other and to face sheets and ground smooth to
form a rigid frame around the component.
(b)

Plastic construction fabricated of high pressure laminate on cores of

particle board or plywood. Composition core shall be multi-ply to
resist warping and assure surface smoothness. Face laminate shall
overlap edge laminate to assure water run-off and enhance adhesive
bonding.

(c)

Solid Laminate for all components min. 12mm thick.

Doors and panels supplied under sub paragraphs (a) and (b) above shall be
completely moisture resistant and 20mm thick (minimum) and pilasters shall
be 32mm thick (minimum).
Door fittings

22.79

Doors shall be fixed with stainless steel or chromium-plated self-closing

hinges which shall be adjustable to allow the door to open to different
degrees.
Door latch shall be slide latch indicator bolt or concealed latch knob with
indicator, or other proprietary product approved by the SO. Locking devices
shall have emergency release mechanism.
Buffer hook also serving as clothes hook shall be fixed to each door.
Door stop and door keeper with full height rubber strip shall be fixed to the
lock side of the pilaster.

Fixing of cubicle
systems

22.80

Cubicle system may be floor supported, wall mounted, overhead braced or

ceiling hung. Overhead braced compartments shall be braced with anti-grip
headrail.
Panels and headrails shall be screw-fixed to wall and pilaster with stainless
steel brackets or aluminium channels.
Edges of pilaster shall be screw-fixed to wall with stainless steel brackets or
aluminium channels.
Ceiling mounted pilaster shall be fixed to the overhead structural members
by means of stainless steel inverted stirrup brackets and adjustable threaded
stud and shall be covered with stainless steel plinth or other approved
coverings.
Base of pilaster shall be screw-fixed to the floor by means of stainless steel
inverted stirrup brackets with adjusting devices for levelling during
installation and permanent height adjustment of the partitions. Connection
between base of pilaster and floor shall be covered with stainless steel plinth
or other approved coverings.
FOLDING/SLIDING PARTITIONS

Folding
Partitions
generally

22.81

Partitions shall be continuously hinged and suspended with swivel hanger

either at the end of alternating panels or centrally hung for all panels of a
maximum height of 4500 mm. Tracks or guides, where used shall be flush
with the floor finish and all ironmongery fittings are to have matched
finishes.

22-11

Section 22 Internal Fittings and Fixtures

Panels

22.82

Panel construction shall be either:

(a)

45 mm thick (minimum) and not exceeding 900 mm in width for end

hung partitions or not exceeding 1200 mm for centrally hung
partitions, consisting of hardwood frame and selected hardwood
edging with plywood facing finished with either veneers, plastic
laminate, vinyl cloth or paint as specified. When specified, panels
shall be infilled with mineral wool.

(b)

Proprietary partition panels of aluminium or steel framing with

particle board or steel faces. Thickness, width and height of panels
shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Vertical seals

22.83

Vertical sound seals between panels shall be tongue and groove

configuration incorporated with vinyl acoustical seals.

Horizontal as
generally seals

22.84

Horizontal seals, both top and bottom shall be twin-finger contact type vinyl
strips sweep seals fixed to the top and bottom edges of the panels.

Pass doors

22.85

Pass door shall be either a swing access door of a maximum height of 3000
mm, provided by the end leaf of a hinged unit consisting of an odd number of
leaves or an independently hung leaf.
Alternatively, pass doors can be wicket doors required no thresholds and
finish to match the partition panels.
Pass doors shall be fixed with stainless steel hinges and furnished with
mortice latches with flush lever handles on both sides of the doors.

Suspension
system

22.86

Suspension system shall consist of heavy duty extruded aluminium or

hot-dipped galvanised steel track to BS EN 10143 connected to the
structural support by bolts or threaded rods.
Brackets shall be aluminium alloy pressure died castings or other approved
bracket types, spaced at centres not exceeding 900 mm and shall be reduced
to 600 mm centres for heavy doors.
Hangers shall be steel ball bearing type (lubricated for life) or proprietary
trolley assembly: both shall be with vertical adjustment.
Panels shall be continuously hinged with stainless steel butt hinges fitted 3 in
height on partition up to 3000 mm.

22-12

Section 23 Plumbing and Drainage

SECTION 23
PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE
GS and T&C
Procedure for
plumbing &
drainage

23.01

Comply with all the requirements for plumbing and drainage works,
including General Requirements, Installation Methodology, Material and
Equipment Specification, Inspection, Testing and Commissioning, and
Operation and Maintenance as stipulated in the General Specification for
Plumbing and Drainage Installation in Government Buildings of the
Hong Kong Special Administrative Region 2012 Edition.

23-1

Section 24 External Works

SECTION 24
EXTERNAL WORKS
ROAD, CAR PARKS AND PAVED AREAS
Generally
Roads,
car-parks and
paved areas
generally

24.01

The clauses under this sub-heading relate to pedestrian ways, cycle paths,
playgrounds and other pedestrian paved areas and also include work in small
areas, additional areas and the reinstatement and maintenance of existing
surfaces. Where Works of a more major nature are required and for the
construction of roadworks, footways, cycle tracks and paved areas, such
work will be specified in accordance with Section 11 on Miscellaneous
Roadworks in the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (2006
Edition), issued by Civil Engineering and Development Department, the
Construction Site Safety Handbook issued by the Works Bureau and any
relevant mandatory particular specification clauses in the Construction Site
Safety Manual issued by the Development Bureau.
Generally unless otherwise specified in Drawings or otherwise approved by
the SO, the construction of road, car-parks and paved areas shall comply
with the requirement in Highways Department Standard Drawings (Drawing
No. H1101 H1134 latest revision).
For all the clauses and sub-clauses in Section 24 of the General Specification
for Buildings (2012 Edition), the General Specification for Civil
Engineering Works (2006 Edition) shall include the current amendments of
the Specification published before the date of the first tender invitation for
the Contract.

Insitu concrete
paving

24.02

Insitu concrete paving, channels and kerbs shall be constructed in

accordance with Structural Concrete Work - Section 6 or if so specified in
accordance with Concrete for Minor and Non-structural Works - Section 8.
Where the works involved are of a major nature or involves the construction
of footways, cycle tracks and paved areas, such works need to comply with
Part 6 of Section 11 on Miscellaneous Roadworks in the General
Specification for Civil Engineering Works (2006 Edition), issued by Civil
Engineering and Development Department.
Construction of typical concrete pavement construction shall be in
accordance with Highways Department Standard Drawing No. 1102A,
unless otherwise specified in Drawings or approved by the SO.

Precast concrete
paving

24.03

Precast concrete paving shall be as Clauses 6.42.3, 18.112 and 18.126. The
materials used for precast concrete paving and the construction of precast
concrete paving shall comply with Part 7 of Section 11 on Miscellaneous
Roadworks in the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (2006
Edition), issued by Civil Engineering and Development Department.
Construction of typical construction details for precast concrete unit paving
shall be in accordance with Highways Department Standard Drawing No.
1103E, unless otherwise specified in Drawings or approved by the SO.
For concrete paving blocks in landscape hard work, they shall be in
accordance with Highways Department Standard Drawings No. H5101A
and H5102A for concrete paving blocks type A and B, unless otherwise
specified in Drawings or approved by the SO.

24-1

Section 24 External Works

The concrete paving units made of recycled aggregates should conform to all
the specifications and requirements as provided in the Contract and as stated
in the "Particular Specification (PS) for Precast Concrete Units for Paving"
as incorporated in the Appendix A of the ETWB Technical Circular (Works)
No. 24/2004 on "Specification Facilitating the Use of Concrete Paving Units
Made of Recycled Aggregates".
Materials
Bituminous
products
generally

24.04

Bituminous materials for roadworks shall be in accordance with 'Section 9 Carriageways : Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials' of the General
Specification for Civil Engineering Works (2006 Edition), issued by the
Civil Engineering and Development Department.

Tack coat

24.05

Tack coat of anionic and cationic emulsions shall be to BS 434-1& BS434-2

respectively and of the following types:

Bituminous base 24.06

and wearing
courses

(a)

Anionic bitumen emulsion, Class A1-40 of Table 1, BS 434-1

(b)

Cationic bitumen emulsion, Class K1-40 as in Clause 4.2 of BS 434-2

Bituminous base and wearing courses shall be as , Table 9.3 ,Section 9

Carriageways of the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works
(2006 Edition) referred to in Clause 24.04 and used in accordance with Table
24.1.

TABLE 24.1
Bituminous base and wearing courses

Nominal size
(mm)
37.5

Use
Coarse base
course
Fine base
course
Wearing
course
Wearing
course

28
20
10

Thickness per course

Min. (mm)
Max. (mm)
60
120
50

85

40

60

20

40

Subject to the SOs approval, the Contractor may use bituminous wearing
course and base course materials incorporating reclaimed asphalt pavement
(RAP) for carriageway works. The RAP shall comply with the requirements
specified in Clause 9.09(3) of the General Specification for Civil
Engineering Works (2006 Edition). Wearing course and base course
materials incorporating RAP shall be designed, manufactured, laid and
tested in accordance with the requirements for these materials using
non-recycled materials or otherwise specified by the SO.
Fine cold
asphalt

24.07

Surface dressing 24.08

Fine cold asphalt shall be to BS EN13108-1and BS EN13108-7.

Surface dressing aggregate shall be to BS EN13043 or RAP referred to in

Clause 24.06, subject to the SOs approval.

24-2

Section 24 External Works

Workmanship
Generally

24.09

Workmanship for asphaltic roadworks shall be in accordance with 'Section 9

- Carriageways: Sub-base Material and Bituminous Materials' of the General
Specification for Civil Engineering Works (2006 Edition), issued by the
Civil Engineering and Development Department.
Bituminous materials for footways, cycle tracks and paved areas shall be
laid and compacted with steel-wheeled and pneumatic-tyred rollers and to be
in strict accordance with Clause 11.58 of the General Specification of Civil
Engineering Works (2006 Edition), issued by Civil Engineering and
Development Department.
Construction of typical bituminous pavement construction shall be in
accordance with Highways Department Standard Drawings H1101 and
latest revision, unless otherwise specified in the Drawings or approved by
the SO.

Temperatures

24.10

Temperatures of bitumen in base and wearing course shall be kept above the
minimum stated in Table 24.2.
TABLE 24.2
Temperature requirements for bituminous materials
Type of
bituminous material
Aggregate temperature
at mixing (C)
Binder temperature
at mixing (C)
Bituminous mixture temperature
after mixing (C)
Bituminous mixture temperature at
laying (C)
Bituminous mixture temperature
at start of compaction (C)

Roadbase, base course

and wearing course
Min
130
Max
175
Min
135
Max
165
Min
130
Max
165
Min
Max
Min

Friction
course
115
135
115
165
115
135
110
135
85

Preparation of
surfaces

24.11

Repeatedly brush surfaces on which materials shall be laid free from

standing water, loose material and dust.

Tack coat

24.12

Spray sub-base with bitumen emulsion at the rate of 3m2 per litre. Brush out
excess emulsion from minor depressions.

Regulating
course

24.13

When specified lay and compact a regulating course to the required levels
and profiles.

Machine laying

24.14

Lay the base and wearing course by means of an approved self-propelled

paving machine. The paving machine shall produce a smooth uniform
surface texture free from segregation, shoving or drag marks. A fully trained
and experienced operator shall be in direct charge of the machine at all
times.

Compaction
Plant

24.15

The minimum compaction plant that shall be used to compact bituminous

roadbase, base course, regulating course, wearing course and sub-base
material, shall be:
(a)

A smooth three-wheeled steel-wheeled roller with a mass of between

6 tonne and 12 tonne, or a vibrating tandem steel-wheeled roller with

24-3

Section 24 External Works

an effective mass of between 6 tonne and 12 tonne, and a smooth

pneumatic-tyred roller with a mass of between 12 tonne and 25 tonne,
and with not less than seven overlapping wheels which have tyres that
are capable of having pressures varying between 300 MPa and 800
MPa, and suitable mechanical rammers and hand-tools.
(b)

Other types of rollers, vibrating plant and rammers approved by the

SO, or other similar plant approved by the SO, necessary to produce
the required degree of compaction.

Compaction

24.16

Commence compaction as soon as the material will bear the weight of the
roller. Roll in a longitudinal direction only, each successive pass
overlapping the last by at least a half-width of the rear roller. Rollers must
not stand on newly laid material. Compact the base and wearing course so
that air voids in the mixture are between 3 and 5% when measured in
accordance with Section 9 Carriageways of the General Specification for
Civil Engineering Works (2006 Edition).

Hand laying and

consolidation

24.17

Hand operated mechanical compaction plant laying and consolidation by

means of an approved mechanical tamper shall be permitted for work
executed in patching-in repairs, reinstating surfaces over excavated trenches,
surfacing areas inaccessible to the paving machine or roller, and surfacing
areas which in the opinion of the SO, are too small to warrant the use of a
paving machine and roller.

Wet weather

24.18

Avoid laying bituminous surfacings during wet weather. Do not lay during
heavy rains or when free-standing water is present on surfaces to be coated.

Jointing

24.19

(a)

The screed of the paving machine shall overlap previously laid strips
of bituminous material by at least 50 mm and shall be sufficiently
high that compaction shall produce a smooth dense flush joint.
Bituminous materials overlapping the previously laid strip shall be
pushed back to the edge of the previously laid strip and the excess
material shall be removed.

(b)

Longitudinal joints in friction course or wearing course shall be

formed coincident with the specified position of the lane-markings
unless otherwise permitted by the SO.

(c)

A prepared joint shall be formed between hot bituminous material

and cold material or existing bituminous material which is at a
temperature below the minimum specified laying temperature.

(d)

The distance between prepared longitudinal joints in different layers

shall be at least 150 mm, and the distance between prepared
transverse joints in different layers shall be at least 500 mm.

(e)

Prepared joints in base course and wearing course shall be formed by

cutting back the face of the cold material or existing bituminous
material for a minimum distance of twice the depth of the layer or 100
mm, whichever is greater; a vertical face shall be cut for the full depth
of the layer. All loosened materials shall be removed and the face
shall be coated with bituminous emulsion; the bituminous emulsion
shall not be applied beyond the edges of the joint. The hot
bituminous materials shall be laid and compacted against the coated
face with a joint formed as stated in this clause.

(f)

Unless otherwise permitted by the SO friction course joints shall not

be coated with bituminous emulsion.

24-4

Section 24 External Works

Accuracy

24.20

The level of each pavement course shall be determined from the surface of
the wearing course calculated from the levels, sections, falls and cross falls
shown on the drawings and the specified thickness of each course subject to
the tolerances stated in Table 24.3, but in no circumstances is the nominal
thickness of the wearing coat to be reduced by more than 5 mm.
The maximum deviation permitted in surfaces shall be 6 mm from a 3000
mm straight edge.
TABLE 24.3
Tolerances in level of formation and pavement courses (mm)
Type of surface
Sub-base
Roadbase course
Base course
Wearing course
Friction course

Permitted tolerance in level (mm)

+10
-20
+8
-15
+6

Use during
construction

24.21

Keep the various pavement courses free from deleterious material at all
times. Do not permit vehicular traffic on wearing courses or surfaces treated
with bituminous material until 6 hours after the initial laying.

Cold asphalt

24.22

Apply tack coat as Clause 24.12 and hand lay and consolidate as Clause
24.16 and 24.17.

Surface dressing 24.23

existing areas

Thoroughly dry and sweep existing areas completely clean of all loose
materials. Apply evenly by spray or brush as directed, bitumen or bitumen
emulsion at the rate of 3 m2 per litre. Immediately after the bitumen has been
applied, spread a layer of 3 mm or 6 mm dry granite chipping over the
surface and roll in until thoroughly embedded in the bitumen to obtain a
uniform compact surface. Approximately one week later, sweep the area
clear of all loose chipping and remove this and all debris from Site.

Cleaning off

After surfacing or dressing has been executed, clear and clean all channels,
kerbs, manhole covers, gratings, etc. free of all excess materials and
bitumen.

24.24

DEEP BORE WELLS

Materials
Well casing

24.25

Steel well casing shall be 200 mm internal diameter galvanised mild steel
tubing to BS 879-1 and BS EN 10216-1 & BS EN 10217-1 with threaded
ends for connection.
Thermoplastic tube casing and slotted casing shall be to BS 879-2 and as
shown on the drawings

Well screen

24.26

Well screen shall be 200 mm internal diameter hot dipped galvanised bridge
slotted well screen from an approved manufacturer with threaded ends for
connection.
Workmanship

Drilling

24.27

Drill the bore hole to a sufficient diameter to accommodate a continuous

length of well casing and well screen. Protect the wall of the drill hole with
temporary liners.

24-5

Section 24 External Works

Stop drilling when water is obtained at the specified rate of 100 litres per
minute with a minimum yield of 20000 litres per day on completion unless
otherwise specified and depth of drilling shall not be less than 20 m. The
drilling of the bore hole well shall be properly vertical.
Test alignment of the bore hole well with a 12m long dummy, having an
outside diameter of 15 mm less than the well casing which shall move freely
throughout the depth of the well to the satisfaction of the SO.
Blasting will not be permitted and the Contractor shall allow for drilling
through rock or other obstructions.
The method statements and sequences of construction shall be submitted to
the SO for approval at least 60 days prior to commencement of site work,
unless otherwise specified in the Drawings.
Testing

24.28

Provide all necessary equipment for carrying out tests for rate of water yield,
water salinity, presence of other dissolved solids and the pH factor.
Test the borehole well as directed by the SO at specified depths and on
completion. Carry out yield tests continuously for eight hours and record
yields at hourly intervals at specified depth. Submit results to the SO
immediately after each test.

24.29

Protect the bottom of the well with 0.05m3 of coarse river sand. Line the
bore hole with well casing for the top 15m and the remaining depth with well
screen all lengths being properly jointed together. Fill any voids around the
screen with coarse river sand.

Abandoned bore 24.30

holes

If the bore hole is abandoned, withdraw temporary liners and backfill the
bore hole with approved material.

Lining

EXTERNAL SERVICES
Cable ducts

24.31

Construct cable ducts generally in accordance with Section 5 on Drainage

Works in the General Specification for Civil Engineering Works (2006
Edition), as issued by the Civil Engineering and Development Department.
Space pipes which form multiple cable ducts shall be 100 mm (minimum)
apart. Leave in position one 6 mm diameter nylon draw cord in each length
of duct.
The location and depth (or minimum cover) of underground utilities
(including but not limited to cable or cable duct) at roads, carriageways,
footways or pavements etc. shall comply with the requirements as specified
by Highways Department

Draw in pits

24.32

Form temporary draw in pits and backfill with clean sand and provide
50x50x600 mm long timber location marker. Construct draw-in pits in
accordance with drawings.

Record
drawings

24.33

Provide all information required by the SO for preparation of record

drawings.
FENCING AND GATES
Materials

Fencing wire

24.34

Steel wire for fencing, including chain link and barbed wire shall be to BS
4102

24-6

Section 24 External Works

Steel fence posts

and gates

(a)

Galvanized steel wire.

(b)

Grade A - Plastic coated galvanised steel wire.

(c)

Grade B - Plastic coated steel wire.

24.35

Galvanized wire netting shall be to BS EN10223-2, or BS EN10223-4, or

BS EN10223-5, or BS EN10223-6 or of approved local manufacture
according to design requirements.

24.36

Steel fence posts and gates shall be constructed in accordance with Section
17.
Workmanship

Fencing
generally

24.37

Erect fencing to the lines and levels indicated on the drawings. Fencing shall
be erected to a smooth alignment with no abrupt irregularities. The ground
shall be trimmed or filled in such a manner that the bottom of the fence will
approximately follow the level of the ground. The distance between the
bottom of chain link mesh and hoarding and the ground shall not exceed 100
mm.

Fencing wire

24.38

Line wire, chain link mesh and barbed wire for fencing shall be strained
tightly between straining posts. Winding brackets shall be used for straining
between steel posts. The tension in the wire on each side of straining posts
shall be equal. Wire shall be strained until at least 14 days after concrete has
been placed in the foundation.

24-7

Section 25 Landscape Work

SECTION 25
LANDSCAPE WORK
EARTHWORKS AND SOILING
Materials
(a)

Produce adequate samples and obtain approval for all soils and similar
materials before importation and use.

Existing soil on
site

(b)

The Contractor shall be deemed to have inspected at tender stage both

the existing topsoil and subsoil and satisfied himself that both are
acceptable for the work as specified. If the existing materials are found
unsatisfactory by the SO, they shall be carted off site to a designated
disposal area, and subject to prior approval, imported soil materials shall
be used. In particular, concrete and building debris shall be removed
from all soil on site.

Existing subsoil
on site

(c)

The existing subsoil shall consist mainly of granular decomposed rock

types, such as decomposed granite (DG) or decomposed volcanics,
which are usually derived from original deposits on site. Unsuitable
material shall be removed from site as Clause 25.01(b).

Decomposed
granite (DG)

(d)

Imported DG shall be friable, fine grained decomposed granite free

from all impurities and other deleterious materials including chemicals,
oils, cement, concrete, sticky clay and stones exceeding 25 mm
diameter.

(a)

Topsoil: evenly textured, fertile, dark brown or black, free draining,

sandy loam with the following properties:

Imported soil
generally

Topsoil

25.01

25.02

(i)

The top 300 mm fertile layer immediately below undisturbed

vegetation, and not derived from recent paddy field cultivations;

(ii)

Containing not less than 7.5% organic matter;

(iii)

Having a pH value between 5.5 and 7.0;

(iv)

Free from all kinds of pests, pernicious and/or perennial weeds

and roots, grass, clay lumps, non-soil material, brick, cement,
concrete and other building materials, foreign matter and
contamination;

(v)

Maximum stone content % (m/m) as tested under BS 1377-2

Stone size in any direction: > 2 mm
30
> 20 mm
10
> 25 mm
0
If used in playing field or planting areas within and/or in close
proximity to recreational activities areas (such as children
playground and fitness station), the top 150mm shall be free from
stones exceeding 20 mm and not sharp-edged in any direction.

(vi)

Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP) %: <15.

The source proposal of the Topsoil shall be submitted for the approval
by the SO at least 14 days before the relevant work starts.

25-1

Section 25 Landscape Work

Fabricated Soil
Mix

(b)

Fabricated Soil Mix shall consist of friable, completely decomposed

granite (or volcanics) and manufactured soil conditioner in the
proportions of 3:1 by volume. The mix shall be mixed evenly and shall
be free from grass or weed growth, sticky clay, salt, chemical
contamination, and any other deleterious materials and stones as Clause
25.02(a)(v) , and possess the following characteristics as tested under
BS 3882 and BS 1377-2
(i)

pH value between 5.5 and 7.0;

(ii)

Organic matter more than 10% (m/m);

(iii)

Nitrogen content more than 0.2% (m/m);

(iv)

Extractable phosphorous (P) content more than 25mg/l of the

mix;

(v)

Extractable potassium (K) content more than 240 mg/l of the

mix;

(vi)

Extractable magnesium (Mg) content more than 50mg/l of the

mix;

(vii)

Soil texture content:

Sand (0.06 - 2.0 mm): at the range of
40% - 75%;
Silt (0.002 - 0.06 mm): at the range of
< 40%;
Clay (less than 0.002 mm): at the range of < 20%

(viii) Maximum stone content % (m/m) as Clause 25.02(a)(v);

(ix)
Manufactured
soil conditioner

(c)

Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP) %: <15.

Manufactured soil conditioner shall comprise properly composted

organic material with the following characteristics:
(i)

Fine, free flowing consistency;

(ii)

In stable condition;

(iii)

Not capable of raising the temperature of the treated soil more

than 5C above the temperature of the untreated soil;

(iv)

Free from impurities and not made with materials that are known
to contain pathogens or other toxic materials injurious to plants,
humans, or animals;

(v)

Giving off neither toxic nor obnoxious fumes/odour;

(vi)

With a pH value between 6.5 and 7.5;

(vii)

With a moisture content when saturated between 30-50%

(moisture weight as a proportion of overall weight);

(viii) With an organic matter content of not less than 85% (dry
weight);
(ix)

With a carbon nitrogen ratio between 20 and 30;

(x)

No weed growth, other foreign matter or contamination.

25-2

Section 25 Landscape Work

Test for
manufactured
soil conditioner

(d)

Certification: prior to first use and for every 300 m3 delivered to Site,
produce certificates of analysis of the soil conditioner from an approved
laboratory within 14 calendar days of taking the samples. An approved
laboratory shall mean one of the Employers laboratories or an
Accredited Laboratory. Tests shall be carried out according to BS 3882
and BS 1377. Test report shall be in the format as per the typical
declaration of analysis under BS 3882. Each certificate shall state the
results of test for the following properties stipulated for compliance in
Clause 25.02(c):
(i)

pH (H2O) value;

(ii)

Organic matter content (dry weight);

(iii)

Organic carbon content (using loss of ignition Ashing method

of testing);

(iv)

Nitrogen content: (Kjeldahl Method);

(v)

Carbon: nitrogen ratio;

(vi)

Moisture content (calculated as the loss in weight between the

dry weight and the overall weight as a percentage of the overall
weight).

Sand

(e)

Sand shall be clean, sharp graded agricultural or horticultural sand 4 mm

down to dust and not collected in brackish water marine environment.

Lightweight Soil
Mix

(f)

Lightweight Soil Mix shall consist of 2 parts of decomposed granite as

Clause 25.01(d), 1 part soil conditioner as Clause 25.02(c) and 1 part
vermiculite pellets or volcanic pellets with a particle size of 5 10 mm.
Maximum stone content % (m/m) shall comply with Clause 25.02(a)(v).

Alginate

(g)

Alginate shall be organic, derived from seaweed as soil improver, to be

incorporated into the top 300 mm of soil during cultivation, when
directed by the SO.

Soil stabilizer

(h)

Soil stabilizer shall be an approved proprietary type of binding medium

applied in an aqueous suspension by spraying onto the surface of the soil
to prevent short term erosion and to condition the soil. The binding
agent shall not be injurious to plant growth.

Stone chips

(i)

Stone chips shall be clean, sharp graded suitable for horticultural use 4
2 mm, with no weed growth, free of other foreign matter or
contamination, and not collected in brackish water marine environment.

Test for Topsoil

(j)

Certification: prior to first use of any Topsoil from each approved

source and for every 300 m3 delivered to Site, produce certificates of
analysis of Topsoil from an approved laboratory within 14 calendar days
of taking the samples. An approved laboratory shall mean one of the
Employers laboratories or an Accredited Laboratory. Tests shall be
carried out according to BS 3882 and BS 1377. Each certificate shall
state the results of test for the properties stipulated for compliance in
Clauses 25.02(a).

Test for
Fabricated Soil
Mix

(k)

Certification: after mixing operation but prior to first use in any planting
and/or grassing works and for every 300 m3 of the mix, produce
certificates of analysis of Fabricated Soil Mix from an approved
laboratory within 14 calendar days of taking the samples. An approved
laboratory shall mean one of the Employers laboratories or an

25-3

Section 25 Landscape Work

Accredited Laboratory. Tests shall be carried out according to BS 3882

and BS 1377. Each certificate shall state the results of test for the
following properties stipulated for compliance in Clause 25.02(b):
(i)

pH (H2O) value;

(ii)

Organic matter content (dry weight) expressed in %;

(iii)

Organic carbon content (using loss of ignition Ashing method

of testing)

(iv)

Nitrogen content: (Kjeldahl Method) expressed in %;

(v)

Extractable phosphorous (P) content per litre of the sample;

(vi)

Extractable potassium (K) content per litre of the sample;

(vii)

Extractable magnesium (Mg) content per litre of the sample;

(viii) Soil texture content expressed in percentage of the following

categorization of soil particles sizes:
sand (0.06 - 2.0 mm), silt (0.002 - 0.06 mm) and clay (less than
0.002 mm)
(ix)

Stone content % (m/m) as tested under BS 1377-2;

(x)

Soil salinity;

(xi)

Moisture content (calculated as the loss in weight between the

dry weight and the overall weight as a percentage of the overall
weight);

(xii)

Carbon: nitrogen ratio;

(xiii) Exchangeable sodium percentage (ESP) %.

(a)

Fertilizers shall be chemical compounds stored in waterproof sealed

bags off the ground under shelter, away from direct sunlight and
protected from exposure to conditions (such as temperature and
humidity) which may adversely affect the fertilizer.

(b)

Pre-planting fertilizer shall be an approved granular slow release

compound comprising Nitrogen (N) Phosphorus (P) and Potassium (K)
and trace elements in the ratio: 15:9:15:2.

(a)

Boulders shall be igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic rock obtained

from a local source, rounded, and with a natural, weathered appearance,
free from blasting and drill marks and permanent paint marks, and to the
colour and shape as specified. Sizes ranging from a minimum of 750 x
600 x 500 mm to a maximum of 3000 x 2500 x 1500 mm.

Serpentine
boulders

(b)

Serpentine boulders shall be hard metamorphic rock, normally obtained

from Taiwan. The rock shall be strongly veined blue and white, each
with a tolerance which shall not deviate from the specified size (in
width, depth and height) by more than 25mm in any dimension.

Great Lake Rock

(c)

Great Lake Rock from the Great Lake (Tai Hu) near Suzhou, or from
other approved regions of China and shall possess the following
characteristics:

Fertilizer
generally

25.03

Pre-planting
fertilizer

Boulders

25.04

25-4

Section 25 Landscape Work

(d)

Ying Rock

(i)

Each rock being of one piece naturally;

(ii)

Slender appearance with folds and a large number of holes on the

surface and containing such shapes as deep hollows, eye
holes, twists, and strange grooves, without visual defects;

(iii)

Size: The size of individual Great Lake Rock to be used shall be

determined by the overall composition of the rock formation, to
attain a structurally stable and suitable sculptural form, each with
a tolerance which shall not deviate from the specified size (in
width, depth and height) by more than 50mm in any
dimension. .

Ying Rock shall be selected from the Yingzhou part of Guangdong

Province and should possess the following characteristics:
(i)

Ying Rock shall have the shapes of pointed or rounded peaks

with concavities and eyeholes that twist around and
inter-connect. The texture shall be slightly glossy and a faint
sound echoes when it is struck. The traditional description of the
rock are slender beauty, transparent and penetrable.

(ii)

Colours of Ying Rock shall include the following:

(iii)

(e)

Yellow Soap
Stone

Light grey with white veins winding through it;

Slightly greyish black;

Pale green.

The size of individual Ying Rock to be used shall be determined

by the overall composition of the rock formation, to attain a
structurally stable and suitable sculptural form, each with a
tolerance which shall not deviate from the specified size (in
width, depth and height) by more than 50mm in any dimension.

Yellow Soap Stones shall be hard and metamorphic rock normally

obtained from China. The rock shall be yellow/ brownish in colour and
may have dark brown veins. The rock is normally smooth and without
sharp edges. The rock shall be of various size, each with a tolerance
which shall not deviate from the specified size (in width, depth and
height) by more than 25mm in any dimension.

Workmanship
Clearing ground

Grading

25.05

(a)

Clear away all weeds with physical means, rubbish, litter, stones
exceeding 25 mm diameter and all deleterious material from the surface
of the ground within the planting areas. Weeds shall be cleared without
using herbicide unless permitted by the SO. If permitted, the herbicide
shall be approved by the SO and shall be applied all in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and Clauses 25.25.1(c)(ii) and
25.31.

(b)

Grade existing subsoil to final formation levels in workmanship all in

accordance with BS 4428:
(i)

300 mm below finished levels in shrub planting areas;

(ii)

125 mm below finished levels in grass planting areas;

(iii)

Form to free flowing contours without water collecting hollows.

25-5

Section 25 Landscape Work

Cleaning existing
soil and subsoil

(c)

Clean existing soil to a depth of 400 mm in shrub areas and 250 mm in

grass areas and existing subsoil to a depth of 200 mm, free of rubbish,
pernicious and/or perennial weeds, metal, deleterious matter, and all
stones exceeding 25 mm in any direction.

Contaminated
ground

(d)

Excavate all areas contaminated by petrol, oil or other toxic substances

to 500 mm below and 500 mm beyond the perimeter of the
contaminated ground to be planted or sown and remove excavated
material from site to a designated disposal area. Backfill all holes with
decomposed granite in subsoil areas and fabricated soil in topsoil areas.

Forming to
re-grade

(e)

Re-grade the subsoil to the required levels and contours allowing for
settlement and an overall even compaction without adversely affecting
the soil structure.

Ripping

(f)

Rip the ground or subsoil prior to spreading topsoil or fabricated soil

mix. De-compact existing ground or subsoil to a depth of 300 mm at
500 mm centres by means of a tractor drawn tine or plough or hand
digging. Remove from site all obstructions to cultivation or deleterious
material brought to the surface, to a designated disposal area, and
backfill any voids with decomposed granite. Ground at a slope
exceeding 15 shall not be ripped.

Scarifying

(g)

Scarifying shall be carried out by loosening the soil to a depth of

between 10 mm and 20 mm using a pronged implement such as a rake
but without turning the soil.

Cultivation

25.06

Cultivate to a depth of 300 mm. Remove all stones and rubbish exposed during
cultivation and dispose off site. Apply soil conditioner at a rate of 0.15 m3 per
m2 and pre-planting fertilizer at 40 g per m2. Work added materials evenly into
the top 250 mm of cultivated soil. Stones exceeding 25 mm diameter in any
direction shall be removed from the surface after cultivation.

Protection of
prepared ground

25.07

Prepared ground shall be protected from compaction, erosion and siltation and
shall not be used by constructional plant, vehicles or pedestrian traffic. Restore
and replace by methods approved by the SO, any portion of the prepared ground
which was compacted, eroded, silted up or otherwise damaged.

Boulder placing,
small and
medium size

25.08

(a)

Place small and medium sized boulders less than 1800 mm high, of the
type specified, in the required positions during backfilling but prior to
planting. Fix the boulders to ensure complete stability, and wedge with
small rocks to prevent movement, with 25% by volume of the boulder
below finished ground level, all to be approved by the SO.

(b)

Place large sized boulders/ rocks over 1800 mm high of the type
specified, in the required positions during backfilling but prior to
planting. The boulder shall be set at least 450 mm below the
surrounding ground level before concreting in place. Ensure complete
stability, and wedge with small rocks to prevent movement. Pour a
concrete base 300 mm larger all round than the boulder and a minimum
of 500 mm deep, with concrete haunching 200 mm around the sides of
the boulder.

(a)

Obtain approval of stockpile areas prior to the commencement of any

stockpiling of materials.

(b)

Stabilize firmly all soiling materials stockpiled against wind blow and
erosion by water, at all times.

Boulder placing,
large size

Stockpile areas

Stockpile
stability

25.09

25-6

Section 25 Landscape Work

Stockpile
reclamation

(c)

Clean and make good the surface of any stockpile to its original
condition at the completion of soil preparation work.

Stockpile
maintenance

(d)

Maintain the stockpile free from over-compaction and any source of

contamination.

Forming and
handling soil
heaps

(e)

For stripping and storage of Topsoil and all other soiling materials, soil
heaps shall be formed and handled in workmanship in accordance with
BS 4428.

(a)

All kinds of soiling materials shall be handled carefully during

spreading and backfilling/infilling to avoid potential damage to soil
structure by machine induced compaction. No soiling works (include
mixing, spreading, handling and stockpiling) shall be carried out in wet
conditions. All kinds of soiling materials shall be spread and levelled to
the depth stated in the Contract. The depth of uncompacted soiling
materials shall be sufficient to allow the level of the area to comply with
finished levels after natural settlement has taken place. After soiling, the
Contractor shall take all necessary preventative measures to control
erosion and siltation and to prevent the area from compaction.

(b)

Remove from site immediately any soiling material which does not
comply with the specification in Clauses 25.01 to 25.03 (all inclusive) or
which has become contaminated. Surplus material from excavation or
backfilling/infilling shall be handled in accordance with Clause 3.10.

Spreading and
filling up soiling
materials

25.10

Unsuitable and
surplus soiling
material

DRAINAGE
Materials
Drainage
aggregate

25.11

(a)

Aggregate shall be:

(i)

Clean, rounded stone, 25 50 mm diameter, and

(ii)

Free from weeds, other building materials, foreign matter and

contamination.

Drainage aggregates, if so instructed by the SO, shall be subjected to

sieve analyses to BS EN 933-1.
Lightweight
aggregate

(b)

Lightweight aggregate shall be clean clinker, or equal and approved,

20-50 mm in diameter, weighing a maximum of 500 kg/m3 when
compacted.

Filter layer

(c)

Filter layer shall be a permeable non-woven, thermally bonded

geotextile filter fabric, which is not affected by acids, alkalis, bacteria,
humidity, or rotting, and shall meet performance requirements set out in
Table 25.1 in sound performance for minimum 12 years:

25-7

Section 25 Landscape Work

TABLE 25.1
Types of Filter Layers
Properties

Type

Test Method

Mechanical Properties
(i) Wide width strip tensile
- Mean peak strength
- Elongation at peak strength
- Strength at 5 % strain
(ii) CBR puncture resistance
- Mean peak strength
Hydraulic Properties
(i) Pore size
- Mean AOS O90
(ii) Permeability
- 5cm head
Mechanical Properties
(i) Wide width strip tensile
- Mean peak strength
- Elongation at peak strength
- Strength at 5 % strain
(ii) CBR puncture resistance
- Mean peak strength
Hydraulic Properties
(i) Pore size
- Mean AOS O90
(ii) Permeability
- 5cm head
Mechanical Properties
(i) Wide width strip tensile
- Mean peak strength
- Elongation at peak strength
- Strength at 5 % strain
(ii) CBR puncture resistance
- Mean peak strength
Hydraulic Properties
(i) Pore size
- Mean AOS O90
(ii) Permeability
- 5cm head

Acceptance Standards (10%)

BS EN ISO 10319
3.0 kN/m
35 %
1.3 kN/m
BS EN ISO 12236

525 N

BS EN ISO 12956
300 m
BS EN ISO 11058

150 l/m2/s

BS EN ISO 10319
6.0 kN/m
25 %
2.6 kN/m
BS EN ISO 12236

1050 N

BS EN ISO 12956
180 m
BS EN ISO 11058

130 l/m2/s

BS EN ISO 10319
8.0 kN/m
28 %
3.4 kN/m
BS EN ISO 12236

1500 N

BS EN ISO 12956
150 m
BS EN ISO 11058

100 l/m2/s

Pea gravel

(d)

Pea gravel shall be clean rounded river washed gravel 5 12 mm in size.

Gravel

(e)

Gravel shall be clean, broken granite stone, 10 30 mm in size.

Workmanship
Filter layer
application

Protection of
filter layer

25.12

(a)

Cover all drainage aggregate with a sheet of filter layer having 200 mm
minimum overlaps. Ensure entire filter layer as Clause 25.11(c) is smooth and
free of tension stress, folds, wrinkles and creases. Overlap each successive
strip of over previously laid strip by 200 mm minimum over previously laid
strip and all in accordance with manufacturers instructions and
recommendations.

(b)

Protect installed filter layer from displacement, damage or deterioration before,

during and after placement of drainage system. Do not permit passage of any
vehicle or machinery directly on drainage system at any time. No storage or
stockpiling of any kind shall be allowed on any part of filter layer. Replace

25-8

Section 25 Landscape Work

damaged or deteriorated filter layer and/or any part of the subsoil drainage to
the satisfaction of the SO.
PLANTING - GENERAL
Materials
(a)

All plants, seeds etc. shall be true to species; plants shall be healthy and with
the habit and size of the plant as specified. Plants and seeds shall be free from
pests, diseases, parasites, discolouration, and damage. All plants shall be
obtained from an approved cultivated source and not from the wild.

Plant habit

(b)

All plants shall have a vigorous fibrous root system, and have a well developed
shape for the species as specified.

Plant name

(c)

In the event of any discrepancy between the botanical name, English common
name, and the Chinese common names as specified, the botanical name (i.e.
scientific name) shall prevail.

Size of trees

(d)

The height of all trees to be measured from immediately above the root collar
and the diameter of all stems shall be measured at a height of 1300 mm above
the root collar.

(a)

Parasitic plants, as defined by Agriculture, Fisheries and Conservation

Department, shall not be present in any form on any plant or soil brought to the
Site. Plants and soil found to be affected by parasitic plants shall be removed
from the Site and destroyed. The following species are considered as the most
common parasitic plants:

Plants

Parasitic plants

25.13

25.14

(i)

Cuscuta australis (European Dodder);

(ii) Cuscuta chinensis (Chinese Dodder, Yellow Colour Thread);

(iii) Cuscuta reflexa (Yunnan Dodder);
(iv) Cassytha filiformis (Cassytha).
Noxious weeds

(b)

Species of noxious and invasive weeds, as defined by Agriculture, Fisheries

and Conservation Department, shall not be present in any form on any plant or
soil brought to the Site. Such noxious weeds shall be cleared manually from all
affected areas within the Site and disposed off site, at the Contractors
expense, all in accordance with the guidelines and practice notes promulgated
by Agriculture, Fisheries and Conservation Department (AFCD) (Information
can be viewed from AFCDs internet homepage (www.afcd.gov.hk) All the
cutting arising from physical removal shall not be left on ground but should be
packed in bags for proper disposal. The following species in particular shall
be dealt with immediately by physical control when discovered:
Scientific name

Guideline and Methods of Clearing

(i) Mikania micrantha Kunth.

Use of chemical or biological control agent is not

accepted. Clearing with physical means shall be
carried out in accordance with the technical
guideline and method promulgated, by AFCD,
under Nature Conservation Practice Note No. 1
Clearing Mikania which can be viewed from

AFCDs
internet
(www.afcd.gov.hk).

25-9

homepage

Section 25 Landscape Work

Containers shall be rigid or semi-rigid receptacles with drainage holes at base in

which plants are delivered and grown for not less than three months in the growing
season before planting. All containerized plants shall not have pot bound roots.
Rootballs comprise the firmly bound fibrous root and soil of a plant. At all times and
in particular during delivery, the rootballs shall be retained intact.

Containers

25.15

Rootballs

25.16

Substitution

25.17

Substitution of specified plant materials shall not be permitted except under special
circumstances and with prior approval from the SO.

Slow release
fertilizer

25.18

(a)

Slow release fertilizer shall be granular NPK chemical fertilizer with a

minimum four (4) month release period at 32C with the following formula:
14 - 18
7 - 14
12 - 16
max. 2

(b)

Quick release
fertilizer

parts N
parts P2O5
parts K2O
parts MgO

(Nitrogen)
(Available Phosphoric Acid)
(Soluble Potash)
(Magnesium Oxide) plus other trace
elements.

Quick release fertilizer shall be granular NPK chemical fertilizer with a

minimum two (2) week release period at 32C with the following formula:
14 - 16
14 - 16
14 - 16

parts N
parts P2O5
parts K2O

(Nitrogen)
(Available Phosphoric Acid)
(Soluble Potash)

Limestone

25.19

Limestone may be used to reduce the acidity of the soil. It shall be ground limestone,
containing a minimum of 90% calcium and magnesium carbonates and capable of
passing through a 10 mm mesh sieve. Prior to use, take samples and produce a
certificate of analysis of the limestone from an approved laboratory within 14
calendar days of taking the sample. An approved laboratory shall mean one of the
Employers laboratories or an Accredited Laboratory. Each certificate to state calcium
and magnesium carbonate content and the particle size.

Mulch

25.20

(a)

Pine bark mulch

(b)

Mulch shall be composed of an organic material such as leaf litter, tree bark,
wood shavings, wood bark, decomposed sawdust, chopped tree fern, with a
nominal size of 2 20 mm or other approved material. It shall have the
following characteristics:
(i)

In friable and non-gluey texture;

(ii)

In stable and dry condition;

(iii)

free from impurities and not made with materials that are known to
contain pathogens or other toxic materials injurious to plants, humans,
or animals;

(iv)

Giving off neither toxic nor obnoxious fumes/odour;

(v)

Not subject to wind erosion;

(vi)

No weed growth, other foreign matter or contamination.

Pine bark mulch shall be very coarse treated pine tree bark, 20 150 mm size,
free from all kinds of pest, impurities, contamination and other deleterious
materials.

25-10

Section 25 Landscape Work

Plant labels

Protective
fencing for
planting works

25.21

25.22

Plant labels shall be:

(i)

100 x 50 x 2 mm white acrylic with 2 no. 5 mm diameter holes, centred

25 mm apart 10 mm from one edge, complete with non-abrasive nylon
rope 3 mm diameter for securing to plants, and

(ii)

The botanical names and Chinese common names of the plant shall be
heat embossed onto the label in black lettering. The size of the letters
shall not be less than 10 mm and the Chinese characters not less than
13 mm high. Submit a sample for SOs approval prior to ordering.

Protective fencing for completed planting works shall be proprietary-make bamboo

fence comprising the following characteristics:
(i)

600 mm or 900 mm high.

(ii)

10 20 mm diameter bamboo palings fastened together at each joint

with galvanized metal staples and washers, which when erected forms a
framework with palings at 150 mm centres.

(iii)

The fence shall be fixed with rot proof wire to vertical metal stakes
comprising 1200 mm long for 600 mm high fence or 1500 mm long for
900 mm high fence, driven 600 mm into the ground at 2000 mm centres.

(iv)

The metal stakes as detailed above shall be painted black with one
primer coat and one finishing coat before installation. All edges of the
stakes above ground level shall be smooth.

Wound sealant

25.23

Sealant shall be a proprietary type tree wound dressing that is emulsion formulated
and non petroleum based. The dressing shall remain flexible after drying and
withstand all weather conditions for arboricultural use in subtropical climate. The
sealant shall be approved by the SO prior to application.

Metal stakes

25.24

(a)

Metal Stakes shall be 40 x 40 x 4 mm thick GMS angle-iron painted with one

coat of approved primer and one coat of approved finishing coat prior to
installation. Height of stake shall be 1800 mm or as specified to suit height of
plant being supported.
All sharp edges of the metal stakes shall be removed to avoid damage to the
plant.
The primer and finishing coat shall be approved by the SO prior to application.

Bamboo stakes

(b)

Bamboo stakes shall be minimum 50 mm diameter bamboo poles and 1500

mm high to suit the height of the plant being supported. All exposed ends shall
be properly dressed and finished.

Ties

(c)

Ties shall be either of the following which shall be capable of adjustment after
fixing, and shall be fitted with flexible rubber or plastic sleeves to prevent
chafing, rubbing or abrasion of the plant. Ties shall be of dark colour.
(i)

5 mm diameter rot-proof and non-abrasive rope with low moisture

absorbent rate;

(ii)

3 mm diameter plastic coated wire with 20 mm adjustable galvanized

steel screw clamp;

(iii)

3 mm diameter stainless steel braided wire with 20 mm adjustable

stainless steel screw clamp.

25-11

Section 25 Landscape Work

(d)

Guys

Guys shall be fitted with a flexible rubber or plastic sleeve to prevent chafing,
rubbing or abrasion of the plant, and a 100 mm long stainless steel turnbuckle
for adjustment. Guys shall be one of the following:
(i)

Multi-strand twisted stainless steel wire of between 4 mm and 6 mm

diameter with 20 mm adjustable stainless steel screw clamp.

(ii)

8 mm diameter rot-proof rope in dark green, dark brown or black

colour;

(iii)

4 mm overall diameter plastic coated wire in dark green, dark brown or

black colour.

Guying stakes

(e)

Guying stakes shall be 25 x 25 x 5 mm thick galvanized mild steel angle with

5 10 mm diameter hole drilled 30 mm from the top prior to galvanizing,
painted with one coat of approved primer and one coat of approved finishing
coat prior to installation.

Trunk
Protection

(f)

10 mm diameter clear unplasticised polyvinyl chloride (uPVC) hosing shall be

used as guy cover and trunk protection hosing; 2 mm thick and 150 mm wide
flexible rubber pad long enough to wrap twice round the trunk to be used as
trunk protection.

Root barriers

(g)

Root barriers shall be a proprietary type of high-strength, non-toxic,

non-woven fabric specifically designed to stop vigorous root penetration of
tropical and subtropical trees and shrubs. It shall not be embodied with any
chemical substance that is harmful to health of the trees and shrubs or will
cause any pollution to the environment.
(i)

For application around tree pits, it shall have the following mechanical
properties:

Mechanical Properties
Wide width strip tensile
- Mean peak strength
- Elongation at peak
strength
- Strength at 5 % strain
CBR puncture resistance
- Mean peak strength

(ii)

Test Method

Acceptance Standards
( 10%)

BS EN ISO 10319
3.0 kN/m
35 %
1.3 kN/m
BS EN ISO 12236
525 N

For application on roof top, it shall be of a proprietary type, in a

completed assembly, serving multiple functions of tree root barrier,
water retention and drainage layer systems, and with cushioning
properties to protect the substrate (such as roofing/water-proofing
membrane).

Workmanship
Planting season

Landscape
Softworks

25.25

(a)

Prior approval from the SO shall be obtained for planting in the dry season of
December, January and February to minimize potential plant losses.

(b)

Landscape Softworks are all works of a horticultural or arboricultural nature,

and shall include the placing, cultivation and preparation of topsoil and subsoil
layers, and the supply and planting of trees, shrubs and other plant material,
grassing and arboricultural/tree works (including but not limited to planting,
replanting, transplanting, tree surgery work), control of pest and disease, and
any work essentially associated with these. Except hydroseeding works
(under Clauses 25.44(a) to (b), 25.45(a) to h(ii) and 25.53(b) to (h)), all
Landscape Softworks including the establishment works shall be carried out

25-12

Section 25 Landscape Work

by a sub-contractor who is a Specialist Contractor listed on the latest List of

Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist Contract under the category
of Landscaping General Landscape Works (Class I) if the Contractor is not
included in the said list.
Control of pests,
fungal
infestation and
disease

25.25.1

(a)

At all times during the construction period and Establishment Works period,
the Contractor shall take all necessary measures to protect and/or treat the Site
(including existing vegetation, preserved trees and all other Landscape
Softworks) from pest, fungal and disease attack and all necessary control
measures to eradicate pests, fungi and disease from the infected/infested plants
and/or areas. The precautionary, preventive and control (inclusive of
treatment and eradication) measures shall be carried out, in accordance with
Clauses 25.25.1(b), 25.25.1(c)(i) to (v), 25.25.1(d)(i) to (iii), 25.25.1(e) and
25.31.

(b)

The Contractor shall regularly check for any insect attack or fungus infestation
particularly during known periods of activity.

(c)

Report immediately to the SO any such occurrence and carry out remedial
measures by the use of the appropriate pesticide, insecticide or fungicides and
any other necessary chemical treatment and associated arboriculture works to
the infected and / or infested areas, as approved by the SO. The Contractor
shall comply with the following requirements in applying the pest, fungal and
disease control measures:

(d)

(i)

Environmentally friendly measures shall be adopted, and use of

biological control agent shall not be allowed at any time,

(ii)

All pesticides, insecticides, miticide, herbicide, fungicides and any

other chemicals to be used shall be a registered type under Part III
(Agricultural Plant Protection) of the Pesticides Ordinance, Cap. 133,
non-injurious to plant growth,

(iii)

Safety precautions as the manufacturers instruction and statutory

requirements shall be strictly followed in storing, handling and
applying pesticides, insecticides, fungicides and chemicals so as to
prevent unnecessary dispersion to protect the safety of workers and to
avoid causing danger or harm to the public and the environment,

(iv)

Proposed type and Material Safety Data from the manufacturer shall be
submitted for approval before application, and

(v)

Plant parts pruned from diseased plants shall not be stockpiled

anywhere on the Site and shall be disposed of from the Site.

Upon announcement by Agriculture, Fisheries and Conservation Department

(AFCD) on any quarantine pests or when instruction by the SO, the Contractor
shall:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)

(e)

Immediate check for any pest infestation and report to the SO;
Complete the report within seven days of receiving the announcement
by AFCD and/or such instruction by the SO;
Submit method statements for the control measures to the SO for
approval before commencement any work in association with the
control measures.

When discovered within the Site, the following species in particular shall be
dealt with immediately in accordance with Clauses 25.25.1(c) and 25.31, and
in full compliance with the technical guidelines and pest control methods
promulgated by AFCD (Information can be viewed from AFCDs internet
homepage (www.afcd.gov.hk)).

25-13

Section 25 Landscape Work

Botanical Name

English Common Name

Solenopsis invicta Buren

Rhynchophorus ferrugineus Oliv.
Quadrastichus erythrinae Kim

Red Imported Fire Ant (RIFA)

Red Palm Weevil
Erythrina Gall Wasp

Root pruning
and
undercutting

25.26

Root prune and undercut the root system of rootballed stock to the specified size of
root-ball 12 months before lifting from the nursery. Well water plants grown in the
open ground prior to lifting and lift carefully to ensure the specified rootball is
obtained. At the time of lifting, securely wrap the rootball with hessian, straw or other
approved material to prevent loss of soil and moisture and wrap the trunk of standard
and heavy standard trees from soil level to the lower branches. Do not remove
wrapping material until the plant is required for planting.

Containerized
plants

25.27

Container grown and containerized stock shall be well watered before despatch from
the nursery and shall remain in the containers until required for planting.

Protection
during transit

25.28

(a)

Protect all plants from mechanical damage, excessive transpiration and wilting
during lifting, transportation and storage. Also protect all plants against
excessive sunlight, wind and drought and in case of heavily foliaged plants,
i.e. most shrubs and especially evergreens, prevent overheating with its
resultant loss of foliage. Replace any damaged plant material rejected by SO
or, with approval, carefully prune and dress wounds with an approved sealant.

(b)

Stand upright on level ground those trees and shrubs which are not
immediately planted in their permanent positions or in an agreed position on
site. Protect and maintain in good condition.

Storage of plant
material on site

If trees and shrubs shall be delivered to the site with shoots and branches
bundled, remove all tying materials immediately to prevent heating up and
subsequent defoliation.
(c)

Cut loose and remove all wrapping materials round roots and containers. Trim
any broken roots with clean secateurs or sharp knife. Dress wounds with
approved sealant.

(a)

Plants shall be thoroughly soaked with water for several hours before planting.
The soil in the container or rootball shall be moist and cohesive. Containers or
rootball wrapping shall not be removed until the time of planting and the
rootball shall not be disturbed by loosening or breaking. Each plant shall be
placed upright in the pit and set at the same level as planted in the nursery or
container.

Backfilling

(b)

Fabricated Soil Mix as Clause 25.02(b), or Topsoil as Clause 25.02(a), or

Lightweight Soil Mix as Clause 25.02(f), shall be deposited and compacted in
layers around the rootball until level with the surrounding ground in such a
manner that the rootball is not disturbed. Plants shall be watered to soak the
rootball and the Fabricated Soil Mix or Topsoil or Lightweight Soil Mix,
immediately after planting.

Fertilizer

(c)

Apply slow release fertilizer to plants with the Fabricated Soil Mix or Topsoil
or Lightweight Soil Mix at the rates as specified in Clause 25.33(c).

After planting

(d)

All plants shall be planted in their final position within two days of delivery to
site to avoid wilting. Immediately after planting and before mulching,
thoroughly water all plants to settle the soil around the roots. Continue
watering as necessary so as to maintain a moist soil at all times during the
construction period and Establishment Works period.

Mulching

(e)

After planting and watering, spread, level and firm mulch 50 mm thick on
areas where the gradient is less than 10 and within 72 hours after planting. It

Before planting

Planting

25.29

25-14

Section 25 Landscape Work

shall be placed in accordance with the proper mulching practices. For trees,
mulching shall be extended 150 mm beyond the perimeter of the tree pit
and/or covered at least the entire root ball zone, and shall always be kept out of
contact with tree trunk or root collar.
Notch planting

(f)

When specified, notch plant by forming notches with hand held pick or spade,
deep enough to accommodate the roots of the plants. Remove plants from the
containers and place upright in the notches taking care to keep the soil and root
intact. Firm the plants in the ground with the shoot upright.

Notch planting
on slopes

(g)

For notch planting on a slope, form a notch by making two cuts at

approximately 90 using a hand held pick or spade with the apex pointing up
the slope. The notch shall be sufficiently deep to accommodate the root
system of the seedling. The notch shall be opened on the second cut to receive
the plant, and shall then be pushed firmly back into place. No pits shall be
excavated and left open to avoid erosion of the slope, in particular during wet
weather.

Pit planting of
seedlings, small
shrubs, whips,
climbers and
herbaceous
plants

(h)

Pit plant seedlings, small shrubs and whips and herbaceous plants by
excavating pits 100 mm larger all round than the root ball and 50 mm deeper
than the rootball depth. When planting on a slope, measure the depth from the
lowest adjacent ground level on the downward side of the pit. Prepare soil
backfill material by adding and mixing in, pre-planting slow-release fertilizer
in the quantities as specified in Clause 25.33 (c) and backfill into the pit to a
level in order to maintain the original relationship between the root collar of
the plant and the soil surface. Remove the plant from its container and set
upright in the pit and backfill with fabricated soil mix, or topsoil, firming first
with the knuckles and then finally with the feet. Remove surplus and
unsuitable material from site.

Pit planting of
large shrubs,
bamboos, small
palms and cycas

(i)

Pit planting of large shrubs, bamboos and palms shall be as Clause 25.29(h)
except that the pits shall be excavated 150 mm larger all round than the
rootball and 50 mm deeper than the rootball depth.

Staking for
whips

(j)

Secure whips by using one 1500 mm long bamboo stake as Clause 25.24(b)
and one tie as Clause 25.24(c).

Pit planting of
light standard,
standard, heavy
standard,
semi-mature
trees, conifers,
palms

(k)

Dig tree pits to size as specified below:

Type of Tree/ Palm/ Conifer
(a)

Light standard, standard,

small conifers, small palms

Size of Pit
750 mm x 600 mm deep

(b) Heavy standard, large palms,

large conifers

900 mm x 750 mm deep

(c)

1500 mm x 900 mm deep

Semi-mature trees

Soak the rootball of the plant, and fork over the base of the tree pit to a depth of
150 mm. Prepare backfill material by adding and mixing in fertilizer in the
quantities as specified in Clause 25.33(c) with Fabricated Soil Mix or Topsoil
or Lightweight Soil Mix. Backfill the base in layers and firm in, adjusting the
planting depth so that the soil is level with the root collar of the plant. Remove
the rootball covering, place the tree, adjust orientation of the crown and check
planting depth, adjusting as necessary. Fix vertical stakes or guying stakes or
as specified. Tie tree to stakes or secure trees with guys. Backfill in layers,
firming in each layer with heel and water thoroughly. Adjust tree ties or guy
wires as necessary. Mulch to a depth of 75 mm, water again and continue to

25-15

Section 25 Landscape Work

water as required.
Pit safety

Staking

25.30

Guying

Use of chemicals

25.31

(l)

Pits excavated for planting on or adjacent to slopes shall not be left open
during wet weather.

(a)

Stakes as Clause 25.24(a) or (b) shall be securely driven into the ground after
the pit has been excavated and before planting in such a manner that the
rootball and aerial parts of the plant are not damaged. The stakes shall not be
higher than 30% of the overall height of the plant.

(b)

Guys and sleeves shall be fixed in such a manner that chafing, rubbing and
abrasion of the plant is prevented and shall be secured to a well driven steel
stake or other anchor. Each plant shall be fitted with three guys secured at a
point not higher than 60% of the overall height of the plant. Turnbuckles shall
be adjusted as necessary after planting.

Do not use chemicals without prior approval from the SO. Do not use chemicals
which are toxic to humans, birds, or animals. Proposed type and Material Safety Data
from the manufacturer shall be submitted for approval before application. Store, mix,
apply, and dispose of chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Dispose of all product containers in a proper manner after use at the Contractors
expense.
PLANTING - TREES, SEEDLINGS, WHIPS, LIGHT STANDARD, STANDARD,
HEAVY STANDARD, SEMI-MATURE, CONIFERS, PALMS, LARGE PALMS,
SMALL PALMS AND CYCAS
Materials

Seedling trees

Whips

25.32

(a)

(b)

Seedling trees shall be trees grown from seed and to have all the following
characteristics:
(i)

Aged between 1 - 2 years old;

(ii)

A single slender stem;

(iii)

A well developed vigorous root system;

(iv)

Total height above soil level of at least 150 mm but not exceeding
900 mm,

(v)

Grown and supplied in a container not less than 75 mm in diameter and

150 mm deep, or a tube at least 60 mm in diameter and 150 mm long,
and

(vi)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Whips shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

Aged between 2 - 3 years old;

(ii)

A single central stem and elementary branch system;

(iii)

A well developed vigorous root system;

(iv)

Total height above soil level exceeding 900 mm but not exceeding
2000 mm;

(v)

Grown and supplied in a container not less than 125 mm in diameter and
200 mm deep, and

25-16

Section 25 Landscape Work

(vi)
Light standard
trees

(c)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Light standard trees shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

A sturdy straight stem at least 1500 mm high from the root collar to the
lowest branch;

(ii)

Total height above the root collar exceeding 2000 mm but not
exceeding 3000 mm;

(iii)

According to species, either a well balanced branching head or a well

defined straight and upright leader with branches growing out from the
stem with reasonable symmetry;

(iv)

A well developed vigorous root system;

(v)

Stem diameter of at least 25 mm but not exceeding 45 mm measured at

a height of 1300 mm from the root collar;

(vi)

The diameter of the rootball shall be not less than 300 mm and with a
depth not less than 300 mm;

(vii)

When container grown trees are required, grown in a container at least

350 mm in diameter and 400 mm deep; and

(viii) Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants. .
Standard trees

Heavy standard
trees

(d)

(e)

Standard trees shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

A sturdy straight stem at least 1800 mm high from the root collar to the
lowest branch;

(ii)

Total height above the root collar exceeding 2750 mm but not
exceeding 3500 mm;

(iii)

Stem diameter exceeding 45 mm but not exceeding 75 mm measured at

a height of 1300 mm from the root collar;

(iv)

According to species, either a well balanced branching head, or a well

defined straight and upright leader with branches growing out from the
stem with good symmetry, and a minimum length of 600 mm;

(v)

A rootball not less than 450 mm in diameter and 300 mm in depth;

(vi)

When container grown trees are required, grown in a container not less
than 500 mm in diameter and 500 mm deep, and

(vii)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Heavy standard trees shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

A sturdy straight stem at least 2000 mm high from the root collar to the
lowest branch;

(ii)

Total height above the root collar exceeding 3500 mm but not
exceeding 6000 mm;

(iii)

Stem diameter exceeding 75 mm but not exceeding 150 mm measured

at a height of 1300 mm from the root collar;

25-17

Section 25 Landscape Work

Semi-mature
trees

Conifers

Large palms

(f)

(g)

(h)

(iv)

According to species, either a well balanced branching head, or a well

defined straight and upright leader with branches growing out from the
stem with good symmetry, and a minimum length of 800 mm;

(v)

A rootball not less than 750 mm in diameter and 400 mm in depth;

(vi)

When container grown trees are required, grown in a container not less
than 750 mm in diameter and 600 mm deep; and

(vii)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Semi-mature trees shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

A sturdy straight stem at least 2200 mm high from the root collar to the
lowest branch;

(ii)

Stem diameter exceeding 150 mm measured at a height of 1300 mm

from the root collar;

(iii)

According to species, either a well balanced branching head, or a well

defined straight and upright leader with branches growing out from the
stem with good symmetry, and a minimum length of 1500 mm;

(iv)

A total height above the root collar exceeding 6000 mm;

(v)

A rootball not less than 1500 mm in diameter and 600 mm in depth;

(vi)

A root system previously undercut a minimum of one year prior to

lifting, to encourage compact fibrous growth; and

(vii)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Conifers shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

A well developed upright stem well furnished with vigorous leaf or

needle bearing side shoots with good symmetry;

(ii)

A well developed vigorous root system;

(iii)

Minimum dimensions not less than that as specified;

(iv)

A rootball appropriate in proportion to the size of the plant; and

(v)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Large palms shall have the following characteristics:

(i)

A well developed upright habit and multiple fronds with good

symmetry, single or multi-stemmed according to species specified;

(ii)

A well developed, vigorous root system;

(iii)

A minimum stem height from soil level to the base of the lowest frond
as specified, or an overall height of the plant not less than that
specified;

(iv)

A well developed vigorous root system with a root-ball of at least 700

mm diameter and 600 mm depth;

(v)

At least 6 months container grown before delivery to site; and

25-18

Section 25 Landscape Work

(vi)
(i)

Small palms and

cycas

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Small palms and cycas shall have all the following characteristics:
(i)

A well developed upright habit and multiple fronds with good

symmetry, single or multi-stemmed according to species specified;

(ii)

A well developed vigorous root system;

(iii)

A rootball of at least 300 mm diameter and at least 350 mm deep;

(iv)

A minimum stem height from soil level to the base of the lowest frond
as specified, or an overall height of the plant not less than that
specified; and

(v)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Workmanship
Tree pit bases

Trees in paved
areas

25.33

(a)

Break up the base of each tree pit to a depth of 150 mm. Check all exposed
sides of the pit. Any glazed surface caused by digging or excavating shall be
rectified manually before backfilling or any soiling operation to avoid the
potential of impeded subsoil drainage.

(b)

Where trees are planted in paved areas, carefully lift the tree grills and lay
them aside. Excavate tree pit to the full area of the tree grill minimum size
1200 mm x 1200 mm x 1200 mm deep and loosen the soil on all sides and base
of the pit. Check the drainage of the subsoil in the pit by filling with water,
prior to planting. If water fails to drain away within 30 minutes, inform the SO
to ascertain the cause and take remedial action.
Lay clean aggregate 150 mm deep at the bottom of the pit using 20 40 mm
chip size. When specified place a filter layer over the aggregate layer at the
bottom of the pit and tuck down the edges into the soil at the sides. Backfill
with fabricated soil mix or topsoil to accommodate the size of rootball
specified and carefully firm up soil around the rootball. Allow soil backfill to
within 75 mm of the surrounding paving level. Place mulch and re-lay tree
grill on top, to match surrounding paving level. Fill the gaps in the grill and
between the trunk with mulch or gravel, as specified.

Rate of fertilizer

Securing

(c)

(d)

Apply slow release fertilizer at max. 20g/m2 for general planting areas where
trees, palm, shrub, groundcovers etc. are planted together. For the situation of
individual specimen planting, the following application rates shall be
followed:
(i)

Seedling trees:

25g for each notch

(ii)

Whips:

50g mix with backfilling

soil of each plant

(iii)

Small palms, small conifers:

100g mix with backfilling

soil of each plant

(iv)

Light standard trees, standard

trees, large palms, large
conifers and semi-mature
trees:

1kg for each m3 of

backfilling soil

Wrap all trees to be staked or guyed above ground with pads of hessian or
rubber to prevent ropes or wires chafing the trunk or branches. Position and

25-19

Section 25 Landscape Work

secure approved ties to prevent any chafing, rubbing or abrasion of trees. The
ties shall allow for adjustment but should not restrict growth of tree canopy or
root system. Adjustment shall be made as necessary during the construction
period and Establishment Works period.
(e)

Tripod staking

When specified, secure stable bamboo tripods to trees by using 3 nos. of

bamboo stakes as Clause 25.24(b). Prevent any chafing, rubbing or abrasion
of the tree or restriction of tree growth by using approved ties all in accordance
with Clauses 25.30(a) and 25.33(d). Any exposed top end of the bamboo
stakes shall be appropriately sealed off to prevent mosquito breeding.

PLANTING - GROUND COVER, SHRUBS, BAMBOOS, CLIMBERS &

HERBACEOUS PLANTS
Materials
Ground cover

Small shrubs

Large shrubs

25.34

(a)

(b)

(c)

Ground cover plants shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

Well developed, vigorous multiple shoots ;

(ii)

A well-developed vigorous root system;

(iii)

Minimum dimensions not less than those specified, with a tolerance

which shall not deviate from the specified dimension by more than 25
mm;

(iv)

Grown in a container not less than 125 mm in diameter and 150 mm

deep; and

(v)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Small shrubs are seedlings or rooted cuttings and shall have all the following
characteristics:
(i)

A minimum of three vigorous, one-year old shoots with a well

balanced shape, and bushy habit;

(ii)

A well-developed, vigorous root system;

(iii)

Minimum dimensions not less than those specified, with a tolerance

which shall not deviate from the specified dimension by more than
100 mm;

(iv)

Grown and supplied in a container not less than 125 mm in diameter

and 150 mm deep; and

(v)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Large shrubs are transplanted seedlings or rooted cuttings and shall have all
the following characteristics:
(i)

A minimum of five vigorous, one-year old shoots with a well balanced

shape and bushy habit, to produce a diameter 2/3 of the height;

(ii)

A well-developed, vigorous root system;

(iii)

Minimum dimensions above soil level exceeding 600 mm and not less
than those specified, with a tolerance which shall not deviate from the
specified dimension by more than 200 mm;

25-20

Section 25 Landscape Work

(d)

Climbers

(e)

Bamboos

Supports for
non-selfclinging
climbers

25.35

(iv)

Grown and supplied in a container not less than 200 mm in diameter

and 250 mm deep; and

(v)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Climbers shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

A minimum of four vigorous, one year old shoots not less than 600 mm
long except when specified otherwise;

(ii)

A well developed vigorous root system;

(iii)

Grown and supplied in a container not less than 125 mm in diameter

and 150 mm deep; and

(iv)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Bamboos shall have all the following characteristics:

(i)

For multi-stemmed species, a clump of at least four main shoots

sprouting from the base at the height specified;

(ii)

For single stem species, at least one single shoot with total height above
soil level not less than the height specified;

(iii)

A well developed, vigorous root system with a healthy rhizome capable

of shooting fresh culm;

(iv)

Grown and supplied in a container not less than 450 mm in diameter

and 450 mm deep; and

(v)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

Supports for non-self-clinging climbing plants to consist of either:

(a)

1 or 2 no. vertical bamboo poles, 15 20 mm diameter x 1000 mm minimum

height above ground and 250 mm below ground.

(b)

3 no. bamboo poles 15 20 mm diameter, 1000 mm minimum height above

ground, spaced and tied to 3 or 4 cross bamboo poles 10 15 mm diameter to
form a triangular shaped support frame. Rot proof ties shall be used to fix
bamboo securely together.

Workmanship
Planting
ground cover,
small shrubs,
climbers and
herbaceous
plants

25.36

Pit plant ground cover, small shrubs, climbers and herbaceous plants in pits shall be
100 mm greater than the diameter of the rootball or root spread and 50 mm deeper
than the rootball depth.

Planting large
shrubs, and
bamboos

25.37

Pit plant large shrubs and bamboos in the pits shall be 150 mm greater than the
diameter of the rootball and 50 mm deeper than the depth of the rootball.

Self-clinging
climbers against
structures

25.38

(a)

Plant self-clinging climbers close to the structures and fix main shoots to
support using suitable proprietary hooks.

25-21

Section 25 Landscape Work

Non-selfclinging
climbers against
structures

(b)

Plant non-self-clinging climbers 150 mm from the support. Drive the support
600 mm into the ground and fix at the top and middle point to the wall with
approved raffia. Carefully turn the climber round the supports with all leading
shoots trained upwards.

Non-selfclinging
climbers on
pergolas

(c)

Plant non-self-clinging climbers 150 mm from the pergola support columns.

Carefully turn the plant round the column with all leading shoots trained
upwards and tie to the column with approved raffia. Where climbers are
placed between columns similarly train up 25 mm diameter bamboo poles;
drive the poles 300 mm into the ground, support and tie against the top of the
pergola.

(a)

Apply a 25 mm deep layer of mulch to the surface of all ground cover areas,
immediately after watering in.

Mulching to
shrubs,
climbers
bamboos and
palms

(b)

Apply a 50 mm deep layer of mulch to the surface of all shrub, climber and
bamboo areas, immediately after watering in.

Fertilizing
ground cover,
large and small
shrubs, bamboos
and climbers

(c)

Thoroughly mix slow release fertilizer into the backfilling soil mix at the
following rates:

Mulching to
ground cover

25.39

(i)

75g per plant for ground cover plants;

(ii)

100g per plant for all shrubs, bamboos, and climbers.

PLANTING - GRASS
Materials
Seed

25.40

An approved laboratory shall mean one of the Employers laboratories or an

Accredited Laboratory.
(a)

All seed shall be true to species and laboratory tested. No seed shall be used
unless covered by an appropriately numbered seed analysis report or
certificate. The numbered reports or certificates shall always refer to the
number on the seed containers. The origin of all seed and the name of the
supplier shall be stated on the seed containers.
The quality of grass seed shall be gauged by purity, germination percentage
and freedom from weeds. The total weed seed content shall not exceed 0.5%
by mass and the total content of other crop seed shall not exceed 1% by mass.

Certificates of
seed

(b)

Provide a certificate of testing for each species of seed from an approved

laboratory or supplier, stating:
(i)

Grass species and variety using botanical names;

(ii)

Date of testing (should not be more than 6 months before the date of
use of the seeds);

(iii)

Test result on the percentage germination of pure seed in a fixed time

under standard laboratory conditions; and

(iv)

Test result on the percentage composition by weight, including details

of purity.

25-22

Section 25 Landscape Work

(c)

Samples of
materials

Samples of the following proposed materials shall be submitted to the SO at

the same time as particulars of the material are submitted:
(i)

Each seed mixture;

(ii)

Turf (according to Clause 25.46(d) and 25.46(g)); and

(iii)

Sprigs (according to Clause 25.46(g)).

Germination

(d)

The germination capacity of each constituent of a grass seed mix over a

seven-day test period shall be at least 80%.

Purity

(e)

The purity of each constituent of the grass seed mix shall be greater than 90%.
Total pernicious weed seed content shall be less than 0.5% and total content of
other crop seeds shall be less than 1.0%.

Storage of grass
seed

(f)

Store seed in sealed bags off the ground, in a clean, dry, well ventilated place
free from vermin. Prolonged storage shall be carried out under controlled
conditions of temperature and humidity.

Pre-seeding
fertilizer

(g)

Pre-seeding fertilizer shall be a quick release fertilizer.

25.41

Mulch for hydroseeding shall be fine grained organic material such as fine ground tree
fibre, paper waste and cellulose.

Dye, soil binding 25.42

agent

Dye, and soil binding agent shall be of an approved type, non-injurious to plant
growth.

Top-dressing

25.43

65% finely sifted Topsoil or finely sifted Fabricated Soil Mix thoroughly mixed with
35% fine Sand. Marine sand and sand from brackish water shall not be used.

Hydroseeding

25.44

(a)

Hydroseeding for Landscape Softworks and the associated Establishment

Works shall be carried out by a sub-contractor who is a Specialist Contractor
listed on the latest List of Approved Suppliers of Materials and Specialist
Contract under the category of Landscaping Hydroseeding (Class II) if
the Contractor is not included in the said List.

(b)

Hydroseeding is the application by high pressure spraying of the specified

mixture of grass seed and/or tree/shrub seeds, fertilizer, mulch and other
approved additives in aqueous suspension. Hydroseeding shall include the
supply of all materials and equipment necessary for the successful
establishment of vegetation by the method described.

(a)

The following particulars of the proposed materials and methods for

hydroseeding shall be submitted to the SO.

Mulch for
hydroseeding

Particulars of
hydroseeding

Submission
before
hydroseeding
starts

25.45

(b)

(i)

Species and rate of application of grass seed/tree and shrub seed;

(ii)

Type and rate of application of fertilizer, mulch and soil binder;

(iii)

Type and colour of dye;

(iv)

Type of protective fabric material; and

(v)

Details of the company employed to carry out the hydroseeding and the
equipment to be used.

The particulars in Clauses 25.45(a) and 25.45(c) shall be submitted to the SO

at least 14 days before hydroseeding starts.

25-23

Section 25 Landscape Work

Hydroseeding
seed mix

(c)

Hydroseeding seed mix shall be:

April to August

September to March

Cynodon dactylon
(Bermuda grass / Couch grass)

13-15 g/m2

15 g/m2

Paspalum notatum
(Bahia grass)

8-10 g/m2

10 g/m2

5 g/m2

1- 4 g/m2
less than 2g/m2

5 g/m2

5 g/m2

--------------30 g/m2

------------35 g/m2

Lolium perenne
(Perennial Ryegrass)
Chloris gayana
(Rhodes grass)
Eragrostis curvula
(Weeping Lovegrass)

Eremochloa ophiuroides
(Common Centipede-grass)

Cenchrus echinatus
(Buffel grass/ Bur grass)

Total

Note: Tree/shrub mix refer Clause 25.45(e)

Hydroseeding
solution

(d)

Hydroseeding solution to consist of:

Ingredient

Rate
35 g/m2
200 g/m2
100 g/m2
25 g/m2
0.5 0.05 g/m2

Seed mix Clauses 25.45(c)or 25.45(e)

Mulch in air-dried weight Clause 25.41
Fertilizer Clause 25.40(g)
Soil binding agent Clause 25.42
Non toxic dye Clause 25. 53(e)

_____________________________

Total
Tree/shrub
species for
hydroseeding

(e)

Tree/Shrub species for hydroseeding:

Botanical Name

English Common Name

Tree species:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vi)
(vii)
(ix)

Alangium chinense
Bridelia tomentosa
Casuarina equisetifolia
Celtis sinensis
Eucalyptus robusta
Gordonia axillaries
Ilex rotunda
Litsea rotundifoli
Lophostemon confertus

25-24

Chinese Alangium
Pop-gun Seed
Horsetail Tree
Chinese Hackberry
Swamp Mahogany
Hong Kong Gordonia
Chinese Holly
Oblong-leaved Litsea
Brisbane Box

Max. 360.5 g/m2

Section 25 Landscape Work

Shrub species:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)

Melastoma sanguineum
Melastoma candidum
Melastoma dodecandrum
Rhaphiolepis indica
Rhodomyrtus tomentosa
Rhus chinensis
Rhus hypoleuca
Rhus succedanea

Blood-red Melastoma
Common Melastoma
Twelve-stamened Melastoma
Hong Kong Hawthorn
Rose Myrtle
Sumac
Sumac
Wax Tree

Protective layer

(f)

Protective layer shall be non-toxic, biodegradable, porous, translucent, and be

1mm or less thick, cellulose netting. It shall be a proprietary type of
degradable fabric with effective certificate issued by the manufacturer and
approved by the OS. The fabric shall not degrade within 100 days after
application or until the specified grass cover has been established.

Hydroseeding
cover

(g)

Hydroseeding shall achieve a cover by grass species of at least 90% of the

surface area for each 10m2 of the area to be hydroseeded within 28 days after
the area has been hydroseeded. The grass cover shall be healthy, vigorous and
free from perennial and other weeds.

Samples of
hydroseeding
materials

(h)

Samples of the following proposed materials shall be submitted to the SO for

approval at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted and before
confirming orders, and delivery to and use on the Site:

Sprigs

25.46

(a)

(i)

0.1 kg sample of each type of seeds of grass, trees and/or shrubs used in
the mix; and

(ii)

a piece of protective layer in 300mm x 300mm.

Sprigs shall be stoloniforous grass with blades at least 150 mm long and a
vigorous root system at least 100 mm long and free from sticky clay.
Sprigs shall not be used on slopes exceeding 45 to the horizontal.

Sprig species

(b)

Unless otherwise specified, sprig species shall be one or a mixture of the

following species:
Botanical Name
Axonopus compressus
Cynodon dactylon
Cynodon dactylon Tifway T419
Paspalum conjugatum

Turf

(c)

English Common Name

Carpet grass
Bermuda grass / Couch GrassHilo grass

Turves shall possess the following characteristics:

(i)

Vigorous grass (in turf plank) of even density with closely-knit sward,
with a healthy green colour, true to the species specified and capable of
healthy growth;

(ii)

Each piece of turf should have no more than 10mm thatch (including
dead fibre) on average and be of uniform thickness, with soil thickness
below the thatch of not less than 7mm and not greater 18mm. The turf
shall have with a sufficiently fibrous root system to hold together
during handling;

(iii)

In consistent size, shape and thickness, approximately 500 x 300 x 50

mm thick with an even thickness of both grass sward and growing
medium;

25-25

Section 25 Landscape Work

(iv)

Grown in well-drained growing medium suitable for horticultural

purpose that shall contain not more than 40% clay sized particle
(<0.002mm in accordance with BS:3882) and free from stones over
15mm in any dimension;

(v)

With density of sods sufficient so that no soil is visible when mown to

height of 25mm; and

(vi)

Free from diseases, impurities, weeds or insect pests or contamination.

Turf sample

(d)

Sample pieces of turf, size 500 x 300 mm shall be submitted to the SO for
approval prior to laying. It shall be kept moist and in good condition on site
(under Clause 25.46(g)) for comparison with turves brought to site. Turves
shall be laid in their final positions within 36 hours of lifting. Axonopus
compressus shall not be used on slopes exceeding 15 to the horizontal.

Turf species

(e)

Turf species shall be one of the following:

Botanical Name
Axonopus compressus
Cynodon dactylon
Cynodon dactylon Tifway T419
Eremochloa ophiuroides
Zoysia japonica
Zoysia matrella

English Common Name

Carpet grass
Bermuda grass / Couch Grass
Common Centipede-grass
Korean lawngrass
Manila grass

Handling and
storage of sprigs
and turves

(f)

Turf and sprigs shall not be lifted when waterlogged or very dry and shall be
packed to avoid drying out. Turf and sprigs shall be stored by spreading out
and shall not be stacked. Turf and sprigs shall be kept moist and in good
condition and shall be delivered and laid within 36 hours after lifting.

Sample for
turfing and
sprigging

(g)

Provide samples of materials and state the origin of all materials submitted to
the SO for approval. An approved turf or sprig sample laid properly in area
not less than 900mm x 900mm, shall be kept alive and maintained on Site
during the turfing/grassing/sprigging operation for reference.

Workmanship - General
(a)

Prior to cultivation, remove all pernicious and/or perennial weeds, by hand,

including the complete root system. Cultivate areas with slopes no steeper
than 1:2 to a depth of 125 mm and bring to a 25 mm deep fine tilth by hand
raking. Areas with slopes of 1:3 or less may be cultivated using approved
mechanical means. If necessary, regrade the surface so that finished levels
after grassing shall be 25 mm above any adjacent hard surface area. All stones
over 25 mm diameter shall be removed. Apply fertilizer at the rate of 40g per
sq.m. evenly spread over the area and lightly work into the soil.

Cultivation for
hydroseeding

(b)

The surface to be hydroseeded shall be lightly scarified and finished to a

coarse open textured surface and shall not be smooth or glazed. Finishing
work on slopes by machine shall be carried out across the slope. Vehicle track
marks and bucket teeth marks shall not be left parallel to the line of maximum
gradient of the slope.

Cultivating on
slopes

(c)

Avoid cultivating the existing soil on embankments with slopes of 1:2 or

steeper, to ensure that the slope remains stable and to prevent erosion. Areas
with slopes of 1:3 or less may be cultivated by hand to a depth of 125 mm and
bring to a 25 mm deep fine tilth by hand raking or approved mechanical
means. Remove all stones larger than 25 mm in any dimension.

Cultivation for
turfing and
sprigging

25.47

25-26

Section 25 Landscape Work

(d)

Regrading

Watering

25.48

If necessary, carry out regrading of the surface to conform to the prescribed

finished levels and create free flowing contours free from humps and water
collecting hollows.

Water immediately after laying and continue to water by using a fine spray hose
attachment to avoid erosion and run off.
Workmanship Follow up operations on grassing
(a)

Immediately prior to the first grass cut, roll the area with a 250kg flat
horticultural roller.

First cut

(b)

Make the first cut when the grass sward is 75 mm high and reduce the sward to
25 mm high.

Subsequent cuts

(c)

Make subsequent cuts as soon as the grass sward is 50 mm high and reduce the
sward to 25 mm high or as directed by SO.

Rolling

25.49

Follow up
fertilizer

25.50

Apply a follow up application of fertilizer at a rate of 25g per m, 28 days after the
grassing operation.

Insect and
disease control

25.51

Take all precautions necessary to prevent any outbreak of disease or insect attack.
When such attacks occur, take necessary action within 3 days after obtaining prior
approval from the SO, to eradicate any such disease or insect attacks.

Other
requirements

25.52

Undertake any additional follow up maintenance that may be specified or required by

the SO within the construction period or Establishment Works period.
Workmanship Sowing and Hydroseeding
(a)

Broadcast grass seed as by hand, or by mechanical means in two equal

sowings at right angles to each other, evenly at rate of not less than 75g/m2.
The seed shall be covered by lightly working into the surface or by spreading
sufficient soil to just cover the seed.

Programming
hydroseeding

(b)

Carry out hydroseeding between March and September in damp overcast

conditions, but not during rain or periods of strong winds. Obtain approval
from the SO for hydroseeding at other times.

Preparation of
tree/shrub seed

(c)

Prior to mixing with other ingredients of the hydroseeding mix, all tree/shrub
seeds shall be soaked in water at room temperature for 4 to 8 hours before
mixing takes place.

Hydroseeding
mix

(d)

Thoroughly blend all ingredients defined in Clause 25.45(d) in water at the

rate of 5 l/m2 to form an aqueous gel solution. Mixing shall be carried out on
the Site in the hydroseeding equipment immediately before spraying. Take
care to ensure that seeds and other materials are not damaged. Spray the
solution by high pressure pump to evenly cover the area at the rates specified,
and to avoid loss of sprayed material through watering run-off and erosion of
the soil. The hydroseeding mixture shall be constantly agitated during
spraying to keep it homogeneous and avoid blockage to pipes. Application
works including mixing shall be carried out using a proprietary type of
hydroseeding equipment unless otherwise approved by the SO.

Application of
soil binders and
dye

(e)

Apply and mix in soil binders at the rate recommended by the manufacturer,
modified as necessary to suit conditions of Hong Kong and as approved by the
SO prior to application. The dye shall be of proprietary type manufactured
specifically for hydroseeding purposes and can be chemical or organic in
origin but must be non-toxic. The dye shall be in dark green colour and is used
to demonstrate that adequate cover has been achieved unless in the opinion of

Broadcast
sowing

25.53

25-27

Section 25 Landscape Work

the SO runoff or water courses will be coloured to an unacceptable level. In

general, the dye shall be applied at a rate of 0.05 g/m2. Care shall be taken to
avoid runoff from the slope to nearby water courses, carriageway or footpath.
Spraying shall take place on days without rainfall.
(f)

Patching up

When 28 days after hydroseeding, the hydroseeded areas do not show 90%
cover over any 10 m2 area, carry out the following:
(i)

Re-spray areas where in the opinion of the SO germination has been

unsuccessful; and

(ii)

Re-spray areas affected by repairs to washout and gullies and other

erosion on slopes.

For areas which in the opinion of the SO are not accessible or are too small for
the use of a hydroseeder, patch up by broadcast seeding as follows:
(i)

Lightly scarify the area with a rake or similar implement;

(ii)

Broadcast the seed and fertilizer over the area at a rate of not less than
75 g/m2 with a tolerance of + 5%;

(iii)

Cover the seed by lightly working into the surface or by spreading

sufficient soil to just cover the seed; and

(iv)

Carry out broadcast seeding using Cynodon dactylon (Bermuda grass),

Lolium perenne (Perennial ryegrass) or Axonopus compressus (Carpet
grass).

Protection of
hydroseeding

(g)

Immediately following spraying of hydroseeding slurry, protective fabric shall

be laid and spiked or stapled to the soil surface using 100 mm long spikes and
150 mm overlap of fabric to prevent soil erosion. On sloping ground the fabric
shall be laid along the greatest slope and fully adhere to the hydroseeded
surface by sprinkling with water using an approved spray. Care shall be taken
not to sprinkle excess water onto the slope causing erosion of the slope.
Protective fabric shall also be applied to all areas subsequently re-sprayed.
Walking on areas that have been hydroseeded shall be restricted to access for
fixing protective material and for patching up, and any other traffic by any
means shall be not allowed before full germination as defined in Clause
25.53(h).

Sowing /
hydroseeding
acceptance

(h)

Grass areas shall only be accepted as complete when germination has proved
satisfactory. Any areas not covered by approved germinated grass within 28
days after sowing shall be re-seeded as Clause 25.53(f) or Clause 25.54(b) or
as specified.

Workmanship - Sprigging
Laying sprigs

Sprigging
acceptance

25.54

(a)

Thoroughly moisten the cultivated area prior to sprigging. Use a fine spray
hose attachment to avoid soil erosion and run off. Lay sprigs at 50 mm
centres, lay top-dressing and firm the ground by trampling or use a flat
horticultural roller and water in immediately.

(b)

Sprigging shall only be accepted as complete when growth has started, and an
even growth is evident. Any areas covered with less than 90% of the approved
grass within 28 days after sprigging shall be re-laid.

25-28

Section 25 Landscape Work

Workmanship Turfing
(a)

Lay turves on the prepared soil bed and firm into position in consecutive rows
with 10 mm wide broken joints (as in stretcher bond brickwork) and to the
correct levels. Lay turves off planks working over turves previously laid.
Where necessary, lightly and evenly firm turves with wooden beaters, the
bottom of the beaters being frequently scraped clean of accumulated soil or
mud. Adjust any inequalities in finished levels owing to variation in turf
thickness or uneven consolidation of soil by topdressing, and raking and/or by
packing fine soil under the turves. Do not use rollers. Turf edges and margins
shall be laid with whole turves and trimmed to clean straight lines or regular
curves.

Top-dressing

(b)

Apply top-dressing as Clause 25.43 immediately after laying turves and as

when directed by the SO. Brush well into the turf joints. Top-dressing
applications shall be made as many times as necessary to achieve an even and
level surface over the whole area.

Turf
maintenance

(c)

Water turves as often as is necessary, or as required. Where bare patches still

occur 28 days after laying remove the turf which has failed, re-cultivate the
soil and re-turf the patches. If shrinkage occurs and the joints open,
top-dressing shall be worked into the area and well watered. Maintain turfed
areas for the duration of the Contract including all necessary cuts to maintain a
grass height of no more than 50 mm.

Laying turves

25.55

PLANTING - HERBACEOUS
Materials
(a)

A bulb is a modified shoot consisting of a small fleshy rounded stem, bearing a

spherical mass of fleshy leaves, above the developing adventitious root system
and free from rot.

Corms

(b)

A corm is a solid, swollen part of the stem at or near ground level and produces
a bud at its apex. Corms shall be firm with a strong healthy bud, vigorous root
system and free from rot.

Tubers

(c)

A tuber is a swollen underground branch, roundish with buds or 'eyes' from

which new plants are produced. Tubers shall be firm with a minimum of six
'eyes', have a strong root system and free from rot.

Bulbs

Herbaceous
plants

25.56

25.57

Herbaceous plants shall have the following characteristics:

(a)

Well developed, vigorous multiple shoots,

(b)

A well developed, vigorous root system,

(c)

Total height above soil level or diameter of plant for clumps not less than those
specified, with a tolerance which shall not deviate from the specified
dimension by more than 25 mm,

(d)

Healthy well developed bulbs, corms, rhizomes or tubers,

(e)

Grown and supplied in a container at least 125 mm in diameter and 150 mm

deep, and

(f)

Free from any kind of pest, fungi, disease and parasitic plants.

25-29

Section 25 Landscape Work

Workmanship
Planting bulbs
corms, and
tubers

25.58

Place the bulb, corm, or tuber, right way up, in the base of hand dug holes of size
appropriate for the species specified and backfill with topsoil or fabricated soil mix.

Planting
herbaceous
plants

25.59

Plant herbaceous plants as Clause 25.36.

PLANTING - AQUATIC PLANTS

Materials
Pots for aquatic
plants

25.60

Plastic mesh
containers

(a)

Pots shall be unglazed fireclay, sound and free from cracks, chips etc. of
matching colour and with adequate drainage holes in the base. The ratio of
depth to diameter shall be appropriate for the plant species as specified. As a
general guide the pot depth shall be greater than its diameter.

(b)

Plastic mesh containers shall be rectangular, circular or oval in shape, and dark
green, dark blue or dark brown, with open mesh bread and laundry basket
pattern. The minimum size shall be suitable for containing the species but not
less than the following:
(i)

450 mm diameter x 300 mm deep for circular containers; and

(ii)

500 x 400 x 300 mm deep for rectangular and oval containers.

(c)

Wire mesh cages shall be galvanized mild steel expanded metal, not more than
2 mm thick with 10 x 10 mm or 5 x 20 mm slot.

(a)

Aquatic plants shall have vigorous growth and be grown in pots but not pot
bound. They shall be capable of at least twelve months healthy and vigorous
growth before requiring re-potting or potting on.

Growing
medium

(b)

Plants shall be grown in the appropriate growing medium for the species
specified.

Supports

(c)

Supports shall be either upturned fireclay pots or precast concrete blocks of

the same diameter as the pot being supported.

Ballast

(d)

Ballast shall be clean rounded stone, evenly graded, 30 75 mm diameter.

Wire mesh cages

Aquatic plants

25.61

Workmanship
(a)

Place pots on supports so that the top lip is 50 mm below water level or as
specified.

Ballast in pots

(b)

After placing pots in their final location, and before filling the pool with water,
cover the surface of the pot with a 75 mm layer of ballast.

Planting in
plastics mesh
containers

(c)

Line container with a double layer of hessian, folding the top level with basket
lip and overlapping by 75 mm. Place grass sods or sphagnum moss tightly
around the base and sides of basket. Place a layer of planting medium over
base of container, and position plant centrally in container and backfill with
planting medium firmed down around plant. Fill in to a depth 50 mm below
basket lip after settlement. Secure with a stake and tie if directed by SO.

Planting in pots

25.62

25-30

Section 25 Landscape Work

PLANT - INDOOR PLANTS

Materials
(a)

Pots shall be unglazed fireclay, sound and free from cracks, chips etc. and of
matching colour with adequate drainage holes in the base. The depth to
diameter ratio shall be appropriate for the plant species as specified (as a
general guide, the pot depth shall be greater than the pot's diameter). A base
plate shall be provided with each pot.

Dragon pots

(b)

Dragon pots shall be used for individual feature plants and shall be true to type
and of matching design and colour as specified, sizes approximately 500 mm
high x 450 mm diameter, or as specified. Pots shall be sound and free from
cracks, chips etc. with adequate drainage holes in the base. A base plate shall
be provided with each pot.

Drainage layer

(c)

The base of each pot shall have a drainage layer comprising either clean pea
gravel, broken fireclay or equal and approved material.

Pots

25.63

Indoor plants

25.64

Indoor plants shall not be pot bound and shall be capable of at least twelve months
healthy and vigorous growth before requiring repotting or potting on. Plants shall be
grown in the same pot for at least 3 months in the nursery, be in good healthy growing
condition. Slow release fertilizer as Clause 25.67(d) shall be applied to each potted
plant prior to delivery to site.

Potting medium

25.65

Indoor plants shall be grown in the appropriate growing medium for the species and
shall hold sufficient reserves of nutrients to maintain the plant in satisfactory
condition for a reasonable period of time after planting. The potting medium shall
normally comprise a fabricated soil mix of the following proportions:
2 parts manufactured soil conditioner
1 part finely sifted sand or decomposed granite.
1 part vermiculite pellet or volcanic pellet with a particle size of 5 8 mm.
Alternative potting medium constituents may be approved by the SO to suit plant
species.

Artificial plants

25.66

(a)

Artificial plants shall be obtained from an approved supplier. Samples of each

plant for species and size shall be approved prior to purchase from the
supplier.

(b)

Artificial plants shall have the following properties:

(i)

Man-made, densely leaved with flowers and foliage of colour-fast silk

or polyester with realistic appearance in terms of general form, colour,
texture and habit resembling the life-like version of the plant species;

(ii)

All preserved or dried components of the artificial plants shall be free

form rotting, insect and/or fungus infestation; ;

(iii)

Multi-stemmed when appropriate to the species;

(iv)

With all leaves, flowers, stems, trunks, branches etc. securely fixed;

(v)

Set in appropriate size pots entirely filled with dark brown coloured
concrete or by an approved method without leaving a protruding lip.

(vi)

Leaf to be strongly bonded to plastic backing, single bond between

leaf and stem is not acceptable;

25-31

Section 25 Landscape Work

(vii)

All silk sprays and bushes shall be treated with fire retardant chemicals
and accompanied by a test certificate from an Accredited Laboratory;

(viii) No rough silk threads on the edge of leaves;

(c)

(ix)

All silk sprays and bushes should be firmly secured into styrofoam
support base, covered with decorative Sphagnum green moss,
decorative stones/pebbles or other approved materials; and

(x)

Wire strengtheners in stem must be sufficiently strong to support the

bush in its natural shape.

Submittals for SOs approval prior to ordering:

(i)

Detailed layout plans with sections, elevations to demonstrate design

proposal.

(ii)

Color photographs and job reference shall be submitted for each

proposed plant.

(iii)

Mock up of full size sample for each type of proposed silk tree or
preserved palms, and major group of silk bushes, for approval.

(iv)

Sample of all other materials such as container, decorative moss /

pebbles, etc. shall be submitted for approval.

(v)

Proof or guarantees from manufacturer on fire retardant or

preservatives treatment, as detailed above.

Workmanship
(a)

Lay a 100 mm drainage layer of aggregate at the base of the box and cover the
top of the aggregate with a filter layer.

Soiling for
indoor plants

(b)

Fill planting boxes with potting medium to 75 mm below the top of the planter
box after settlement.

Location

(c)

Place all plants in the planters in their pots except when specified otherwise.
Keep the top lip of each pot flush with the soil surface in the planter.

Fertilizing
indoor plants

(d)

Apply slow release fertilizer to indoor plants at fifty percent of the rate for the
same plant planted outdoors.

Polishing

(e)

Immediately prior to placing in position, thoroughly clean and polish all

leaves with an approved leaf polish, in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations.

Placing artificial 25.68

plants

Placing of artificial plants shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and

approved by the SO. Shop drawings shall be submitted with samples of each species
of artificial plants. Fill to a level 125 mm below the top of the planter with aggregate
or treated coarse pine bark mulch or decorative moss or pebbles, and completed with
all associated container with support base.

Plant boxes

25.67

EXISTING VEGETATION TREATMENT INCLUDING PROTECTION AND

SURGERY
General
Definitions on
trees

25.69

(a)

tree means a plant with diameter at breast height measuring 95 mm or

more. Plants growing on retaining structures shall also be measured and

25-32

Section 25 Landscape Work

considered.
Old and
Valuable Tree

(b)

Old and Valuable Tree (hereinafter referred to as OVT) means any tree
included in the Register of Old and Valuable Trees posted at website:
http://www.lcsd.gov.hk/LEISURE/LP/gc/tree and any other OVT designated
by the Government (Agriculture, Fisheries and Conservation Department
(AFCD) and Leisure and Cultural Services Department (LCSD)).

Diameter at
Breast Height

(c)

diameter at breast height (DBH) means the diameter of the trunk of the
plant measured at a height of 1300 mm above ground level. For trunk with
an obviously elliptical cross-section, the diameter at breast height shall be the
average of any two diameter measurements taken at right-angle.

Tree crown
spread

(d)

Tree crown spread means the diameter of the tree crown defined by the
outermost branches of the tree.

Tree height

(e)

Tree height means the height from ground level to the top of the tree.

Dripline

(f)

Dripline of a tree means the imaginary vertical plumb line that extends
downward from the tips of the outermost tree branches and intersects the
ground.

Tree Protection
Zone

(g)

(i)

Tree Protection Zone (hereinafter referred to as TPZ) means an area

the perimeter of which is defined by the dripline of the tree. For a
non-OVT growing on a retaining structure/wall/rock surface, the tree
protection zone should encompass the body of the tree itself, and the
vertical and horizontal surfaces of the retaining structure/wall covered
by the tree roots.

(ii)

For an OVT, the TPZ refers to the zone encompassing the concerned
tree along its dripline and extending vertically to 2000 mm upward
beyond the top of the tree and 2000 mm downward beyond the ground
level at the trunk base of the tree. For an OVT growing on a retaining
structure/wall/rock surface, the TPZ should encompass the body of
the concerned tree itself and 2000 mm above the tree crown, as well as
the vertical and horizontal surfaces of the retaining
structure/wall/rock surface covered by the tree roots together with the
space up to 2000 mm behind those surfaces.

Preserved tree

(h)

Preserved tree means an existing tree, including OVT, not earmarked to be

felled, which may be a tree to be retained at its existing location, a tree at its
existing location prior to transplanting, or a tree transplanted within the Site.

Arboricultural
work

(i)

Arboricultural work means any work related to the cultivation and care of
trees for any purpose other than timber production, including but not limiting
to planting, replanting, transplanting, pruning, tree surgery work and control
of pest and disease.

Workmanship
Programming

25.69.1

The Contractor shall fully allow the effects of preservation and protection of existing
trees in his programme, the method of operation and construction, and the vehicular
access for the Works.

Site supervisory
staff and
preservation and
protection of
existing trees

25.69.2

(a)

The Contractor shall assign a person to oversee the implementation of

preservation and protection to existing trees. The person assigned shall be
working full-time on the Site but not necessarily working solely for matters
related to preservation and protection to existing trees.

25-33

Section 25 Landscape Work

(b)

The Contractor shall assign a competent member of the site supervisory staff to
oversee and supervise tree works related to horticultural operations and
preservation of trees within the Site, including, but without limitation to,
planting, transplanting, tree surgery work and control of pest and disease
affecting trees on the Site. The person assigned shall be working full-time on
the Site but not necessarily working solely on trees. The assigned person shall
have attended relevant training on the subject organized by training institutes
(such as Construction Industry Training Authority), or similar courses as
considered appropriate by the SO. The Contractor shall submit to the SO for
approval within 45 days of the date of the Employers letter of acceptance of
the Tender particulars of the assigned person (including his name, experience
and position) together with a copy of the certificate issued by the training
institute confirming his satisfactory completion of the relevant course.

(c)

The Contractor shall also comply with the requirements as stipulated in the
following sub-clauses 25.69.2.1 to 25.69.2.5 (all inclusive), unless otherwise
directed or agreed by the SO.

Contractors
responsibility to
record existing
trees

25.69.2.1

The Contractor shall carry out a tree survey and submit the survey record to the SO
within 28 days of the date for commencement of the Works.

Tree survey
record

25.69.2.2

The tree survey record shall cover all existing trees present within the Site or within
2 m of the site boundary and any other trees likely to be affected by the Works. The
tree survey record shall be in the form of an A4-sized, bound report which shall bear
a report cover indicating the Contract number, Contract title, and date of the report
and shall include the following documents, the formats of which shall be agreed by
the SO prior to submission of the report:

Tree survey
plan

Tree schedule

Photographic
record

(a)

(b)

(c)

A tree survey plan showing the locations of all existing trees and identifying
the following:
(i)

Which trees are earmarked under the Contract for retention at their
existing locations,

(ii)

Which trees are earmarked under the Contract for transplanting,

(iii)

Which trees are earmarked under the Contract for felling, and

(iv)

Which trees are not recorded under the Contract and their treatment
is yet to be instructed by the SO;

A tree schedule comprising the following information:

(i)

Botanical name of the tree species and the identity code/number as

shown on the tree survey plan,

(ii)

Diameter at breast height of the tree,

(iii)

Tree crown spread,

(iv)

tree height,

(v)

Condition of tree including form and health (highlighting any

structural defects or unhealthy or decaying symptoms which may
pose danger to the public if the tree falls), amenity value, survival
rate after transplanting and special features, and

(vi)

existing ground level at the trunk base;

Photographic record for each individual tree and tree group complying with
the following:
(i)

All photographs shall be date-stamped to indicate the dates that the

photographs are taken and shall be well-annotated, and

25-34

Section 25 Landscape Work

(ii)

Identity label

Preparation
before site
clearance
commences
Requirements in
respect of tree
felling

25.69.2.3

25.69.2.4

The photograph of each tree shall show clearly the whole tree as far
as possible, the identification number of the tree, and the status of
the tree as identified by the labeling or marking system on the Site as
required in Clause 25.69.2.3

The Contractor shall mark on the Site with labeling or marking systems to identify
trees of different status in accordance with the classification in Clauses
25.69.2.2(a)(i) to (iv). The Contractor shall comply with the following in providing
the identification labeling or marking systems:
(a)

The identification labeling or marking systems for different tree status shall
be in different colours and be clearly distinguishable,

(b)

The identification labeling or marking system for the preserved trees shall
be made of durable materials that are non-injurious to the trees, be placed at
a position not easily accessible to the public, and be attached in such a
manner that allows for the growth of the trees and does not injure the trees,

(c)

The identification labeling or marking systems and the on-site status

identification of trees shall be agreed by the SO and installed prior to the
commencement of site clearance, demolition, construction of permanent or
temporary works, and any other site operations which may affect the trees,
and

(d)

The Contractor shall reinstate or replace where necessary the identification

labeling or marking systems for the preserved trees and shall remove these
identification labeling or marking systems from the Site upon completion of
the Works, or earlier if so directed by the SO.

The limits of site clearance shall be agreed by the SO on the Site before site clearance
commences. The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements in
respect of tree removal, either by felling or by transplanting:

(a)

in respect of tree felling, the Contractor shall:

(i)

Fell only those trees earmarked for such under the Contract and
labeled for such on the Site pursuant to Clause 25.69.2.3 or those as
directed or approved by the SO,

(ii)

Commence any work related to tree felling on the Site only after the
Contractors compliance with the requirements, such as those
related to method statement, stipulated to be completed prior to
commencing the tree felling work,

(iii)

Take all necessary safety precautions, including but not limited to

those stipulated in Clause 25.111, to protect the people engaged in
the tree felling work as well as the people and property in the vicinity
throughout the whole process of tree felling,

(iv)

Tree trunks and branches shall be removed in sections for reasons of

safety and in such a manner that any potential damage to the public
and adjacent utilities, services or pipes, structure, slopes or stream
course vegetation is avoided,

(v)

Fell the trees by cutting them near the ground, with their stumps
ground rather than pulled so that the roots of the nearby plants to be
retained are not injured,

(vi)

Remove the stumps and rootballs of the felled trees carefully to

avoid causing damage to the roots of the nearby plants to be retained,
where it is necessary to have such removal as directed by the SO,

25-35

Section 25 Landscape Work

(b)

Requirements in
respect of tree
transplanting

(c)

Prior approval

(vii)

Do not use a preserved tree as anchor when winching out a stump,

(viii)

Remove all debris, wood, and roots where necessary pursuant to

Clause 25.69.2.4(a)(iv-vii), from the trees felled from the Site as
soon as possible. Burning of vegetation or any other construction
debris is not permitted, and

(ix)

All voids formed as a result of the above works shall be backfilled

with clean material as appropriate.

In respect of tree transplanting, either within or off the Site, the Contractor
shall:
(i)

Transplant only those trees earmarked for such under the Contract
and labeled for such on the Site pursuant to Clause 25.69.2.3 or those
as directed or approved by the SO,

(ii)

Commence any work related to tree transplanting on the Site only

after the Contractors compliance with the requirements, such as
those related to method statement, stipulated to be completed prior
to commencing the tree transplanting work, and

(iii)

Take all necessary safety precautions, including but not limited to

those stipulated in Clause 25.111, to protect the people engaged in
the tree transplanting work as well as the people and property in the
vicinity throughout the whole process of tree transplanting.

Where it is found necessary for the completion of the Works to remove,

either by felling or by transplanting, any trees other than those earmarked for
such under the Contract or those directed or approved for such during the
progress of the Works by the SO, the Contractor shall:
(i)

Report to the SO the necessity of such tree removal,

(ii)

Provide all reasonable assistance as required by the SO in the tree

survey and the justification for the proposed tree removal with
substantiation and the necessary details such as site formation plan
and architectural or engineering drawings, for the SOs preparation
of the tree felling or transplanting application for the tree removal,
and

(iii)

Fell or transplant the trees only after the SOs approval to the tree
removal which shall normally be given only after the tree felling or
transplanting application has been approved by the government
approving authority (Lands Department (LandsD/LCSD/AFCD).

Restriction on site uses

Exercise care

Restrictive uses

25.69.2.5

For the preserved trees, the Contractor shall exercise the greatest care to avoid any
damage to them and shall comply with the following:
(a)

Take all necessary precautions to ensure that:

(i)

No nails or other fixings shall be driven into the trees, including the
exposed tree roots,

(ii)

No fencing, services, or signs other than the identification labels or

markings required under Clause 25.69.2.3 shall be attached to any
part of the trees,

(iii)

No trees shall be used as anchorages for ropes or chains used in

guying or pulling or for equipment used for removing stumps, roots
or other trees, or for any other purposes,

25-36

Section 25 Landscape Work

(iv)

No soil, materials, equipment or machinery shall be stockpiled or

stored within the TPZ(s),

(v)

No site offices, workshops, canteens, containers or similar structures

shall be installed within the TPZ(s),

(vi)

Petrol, oil, bitumen, creosote, cement and other materials likely to be

injurious to the trees shall be kept away from the TPZ(s), and any
accidental spills of these materials shall be cleaned up immediately,
Excessive water shall be drained away from the TPZ(s) to prevent
damage to tree roots by asphyxiation,

(vii)

(viii)

The surface on slopes shall be shaped so that water will not drain to
the tree trunks but bypass them,

(ix)

No passage or parking of vehicles and no operation of equipment or

machinery shall take place within the TPZ(s) unless otherwise
agreed by the SO,

(x)

No stripping of surface vegetation or top layer of soil shall be carried

out within the TPZ(s) unless otherwise agreed by the SO,

(xi)

No fires shall be lit within the TPZ(s) or in a position where the

flames will likely extend to within 5 m of foliage, branches or trunks
of the trees, bearing in mind the size of the fire and the wind
direction,

(xii)

No concrete mixing, gas tank filling, paintbrush and tool cleaning, or

equipment maintenance shall be carried out within the TPZ(s),

(xiii)

Any necessary scarification or cultivation within the TPZ(s) shall be

carried out carefully by hand so as not to cause damage to the trees,
in particular the bark and the roots,

(xiv)

Any equipment, in particular delivery vehicles, overhead cranes,

mechanical excavations, drilling rigs and piling rigs, shall be
carefully operated so as not to cause striking of the trunks, branches,
foliage or root collars of the trees,

(xv)

The trees to be felled that are adjacent to, or that lie within a
continuous canopy of, the preserved trees, shall be carefully
removed, and if necessary in sections but not using bulldozers in any
circumstances, so as not to cause damage to the preserved trees such
as scraping bark off trunks or breaking branches of trees,

(xvi)

Where it is necessary to use herbicides to kill any vegetation,

herbicides that can leach through the soil, such as the products
containing sodium chlorate, and any other herbicides that are
injurious to the trees shall not be used,

(xvii) Allowance shall be made for the slope of the ground so that
damaging materials such as concrete washings, mortar or diesel oil
cannot run towards the trees,
(xviii) Alkaline clays or limestone shall not be used for filling or paving,
concrete shall be mixed on a thick plastic tarpaulin or outside the
Site, and mixing trucks shall not be rinsed out on the Site, so as not
to cause changes, in particular increases, in soil pH, and

25-37

Section 25 Landscape Work

(xix)

All building debris and chemical wastes shall be hauled away for
proper disposal, and in any circumstances shall not be burned or
buried on the Site or be disposed of by pouring them on the soil
within the Site.

Repair for
damage

(b)

Repair any damage to the trees in accordance with the requirements

stipulated in Clauses 25.69.13.1 to 25.69.13.7,

Restricted
access within
Tree Protection
Zone

(c)

Where the passage or parking of vehicles or the operation of equipment or

machinery within the TPZ(s) as referred to in Clause 25.69.2.5(a)(ix) is
considered necessary and is agreed by the SO, carry out the following
measures to reduce soil compaction:

Undergrowth
within Tree
Protection Zone

(d)

(i)

Minimize the traffic of the vehicles, equipment or machinery, and

(ii)

Confine the passage or parking of vehicles or operation of

equipment or machinery to the areas laid with temporary protective
mulching as stipulated in Clause 25.69.3(g) and with double,
overlapping, thick metal sheet coverings, or other materials of
equivalent strength as agreed by the SO, placed on top,

Where it is necessary to clear the existing undergrowth within the TPZ(s) to

allow access and visibility for, and operation of any construction work,
(i)

Shrubs shall be pruned and grass or other herbaceous plants shall be

cut to a height of not less than 50 mm above the ground level but not
pulled out by equipment in any circumstances, and

(ii)

The agreement of the SO shall be obtained prior to commencing the

vegetation clearance,

Protection from
increased
exposure

(e)

Protect the preserved trees, where necessary, from increased exposure to

sun and wind due to removal of adjacent trees,

Routing

(f)

Align all routes of the overhead services within the Site and all access
routes to the Site or within the Site away from the preserved trees as far as
possible and seek the SOs approval to the alignment,

Report on tree
problems

(g)

Observe and report to the SO of any preserved tree having structural defects
or unhealthy or decaying symptoms which may pose danger to the public if
the tree falls,

Bimonthly report

(h)

Update the photographic record taken in accordance with Clause

25.69.2.2(c) and submit a report on the updated photographic record to the
SO at bimonthly intervals or at intervals agreed by the SO, complying with
the following:
(i)

Each of the reports shall comprise all preserved trees,

(ii)

Each of the reports shall be in the form of an A4-sized, bound

document which shall bear a report cover indicating the Contract
number, Contract title, and date of the report,

(iii)

The format of the reports shall be agreed by the SO prior to

submission of the first report,

(iv)

All photographs shall be date-stamped to indicate the dates that the

photographs are taken and shall be well-annotated,

(v)

The photograph of each tree shall show clearly the whole tree as far
as possible, the identification number of the tree, and the status of the
tree as identified by the labeling or marking system on the Site as
required in Clause 25.69.2.3, and

25-38

Section 25 Landscape Work

(vi)

Each of the reports shall include details of any damage caused to the
trees and any signs of health deterioration of the trees in the
reporting period, accompanied with photographic record of the
damage and the tree deterioration.

Protection from construction activities

Protection from 25.69.3
physical damage
and soil
compaction by
construction
activities

(a)

The Contractor shall erect, secure and maintain in good condition temporary
protective fencing to protect the preserved trees. Details of the temporary
protective fencing shall be in accordance with British Standards listed in
Clause 25.69.14. The Contractor shall submit method statements including
construction details to the SO for approval and obtain such approval before
commencing the erection of the protective fencing.

Temporary
protective fencing

(b)

The temporary protective fencing shall be erected along or beyond the

perimeter of the tree protection zone of each individual tree. Where the TPZ(s)
of two or more trees overlap with each other, the temporary protective fencing
shall be erected along or beyond the perimeter of the aggregate tree protection
zone of the trees or as directed by the SO.

Sequence of work

(c)

The Contractor shall complete erection of the temporary protective fencing

prior to the commencement of site clearance, demolition, construction of
permanent or other temporary works, and any other site operations which may
affect the preserved or protected trees.

Removal of
temporary
protective fencing

(d)

The Contractor shall remove the temporary protective fencing from the Site
upon completion of all related tree works (Clauses 25.69 to 25.92 all
inclusive), or earlier if so directed by the SO. The Contractor shall not remove
or relocate the temporary protective fencing or enter the area enclosed by the
temporary protective fencing without the prior agreement of the SO.

Alternative
protective
measures

(e)

Should erection of temporary protective fencing is not practicable or the

preserved tree grows on a retaining structure, Contractor shall adopt the
following requirements in Clauses 25.69.3(f) to 25.69.3(i) and with prior
approval from the SO.

Temporary
protective hessian
armouring

(f)

The Contractor shall provide temporary protective hessian armouring around

tree trunks to protect the preserved trees. When instructed by the SO, the
Contractor shall provide temporary protective hessian and plank armouring as
an alternative to the same trees for enhanced protection. Details of the
temporary protective hessian armouring and hessian and plank armouring shall
be in accordance with British Standards listed in Clause 25.69.14, or to the
approval of SO.

Temporary
protective
mulching

(g)

Unless otherwise agreed by the, the ground of the TPZ(s) of the trees referred
to in the Clause 25.69.3(f) shall be protected from damage by construction
activities through the use of temporary protective mulching. When instructed
by the SO, double, overlapping, thick metal sheet coverings, or other materials
of equivalent strength as agreed by the SO, shall be laid on top of the
temporary protective mulching to provide additional protection from soil
compaction due to passage or parking of vehicles or operation of equipment or
machinery. Details of the temporary protective mulching shall be in
accordance with British Standards listed in Clause 25.69.14, or to the approval
of SO.

25-39

Section 25 Landscape Work

Complete tree
protection before
any site activity
start

(h)

The Contractor shall complete erection of the temporary protective armouring

and application of the temporary protective mulching prior to the
commencement of site clearance, demolition, construction of permanent or
other temporary works, and any other site operations which may affect the
trees.

Removal of
protective
measures

(i)

The Contractor shall remove the temporary protective armouring and the
temporary protective mulching from the Site upon completion, or earlier if so
directed by the SO. The Contractor shall not remove or relocate the temporary
protective armouring or the temporary protective mulching without the prior
agreement of the SO.

(a)

Without the prior approval of the SO, the Contractor shall not change the
existing ground levels within the TPZ(s) of the preserved trees unless the
Contract explicitly requires such changes.

(b)

Where it is necessary for the completion of the Works to reduce the existing
ground level around a preserved tree which will result in a lowering of the
existing ground level within the tree protection zone, the Contractor shall
comply with the following requirements:

Protection from
changes in
ground levels

25.69.4

(c)

(i)

Construct a retaining wall to accommodate the reduction in the existing

ground level around the tree,

(ii)

Before commencing the construction of the measures to accommodate

reduction in the ground level pursuant to Clause 25.69.4(b)(i), submit
method statements, including construction details, for the measures for
the SOs approval,

(iii)

Commence the construction of the measures only after the SOs

approval to the method statements,

(iv)

Follow the requirements stipulated in Clause 25.69.5 regarding

excavation and cutting of tree roots, and

(v)

Maintain balanced moisture content in the tree and in the soil after
construction of the measures, by carrying out necessary precautionary
measures such as crown thinning, watering and mulching.

Where it is necessary for the completion of the Works to raise the existing
ground level around a preserved tree which will result in a rise in the existing
ground level within the tree protection zone, the Contractor shall comply with
the following requirements:
(i)

Construct a dry well and soil aeration system to accommodate minor

to moderate rise of up to 300 mm in the existing ground level around
the tree,

(ii)

Construct a dry well and soil aeration system to accommodate major

rise of more than 300 mm in the existing ground level around the tree,

(iii)

Before commencing the construction of the measures to accommodate

rise in the ground level pursuant to Clauses 25.69.4(c)(i) and/or
25.69.4(c)(ii), submit method statements, including construction
details, for the measures for the SOs approval, and

(iv)

Commence the construction of the measures only after the SOs

approval to the method statements.

25-40

Section 25 Landscape Work

Protection from
excavation
including
trenching

25.69.5

Without the prior approval of the SO, the Contractor shall not carry out excavation
within the TPZ(s) of the preserved trees unless the Contract explicitly requires such
excavation work. For the approved excavation work within the TPZ(s), the
Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)

Obtain agreement from the SO to the detailed locations and extent of the
excavations before commencing any excavation work,

(b)

Carry out the following before commencing any cutting work to the aerial
roots or underground roots of the preserved trees:
(i)

(ii)
(iii)

Precautions in
carrying out
excavation

25.69.6

Determine the locations of the major roots and the bulk of the their
absorbing roots so as to keep the cutting of tree roots to a minimum
and to preserve the tap roots, sinker roots and support roots of the
trees in any circumstances,
Obtain agreement from the SO to the extent of root cutting on the
Site, and
Where the stability of the trees is likely to be jeopardized, comply
with the requirements stipulated in Clauses 25.69.9(a) to (c),

(c)

Submit to the SO photographic records showing the condition of the affected

trees and the agreed extent of excavations and root cuttings as marked on the
Site prior to commencement of the excavation work and root cutting work
and thereafter submit photographic records showing the condition of the
affected trees and the progress of the excavation work and root cutting work
at weekly intervals until backfilling of the excavations is complete,

(d)

Excavate the trench on the paved side of the tree if one exists, or tunnel the
service in the manner and as shown in BS 5837 close to the tree trunk on one
side:
(i)

Excavate a trench as narrow as possible directly towards the tree

along a radius to not closer than 1.0 m from the trunk or where roots
larger than 25 mm in diameter are encountered, whichever distance
is farther away from the trunk,

(ii)

Tunnel straight beneath the tree at a depth of not less than 750 mm
and in a way to avoid damaging any tap root, sinker roots or support
roots,

(iii)

Exit on the opposite side along another radius, and

(iv)

Sleeve the service where it passes beneath the tree to reduce the risk
of damage to the service and facilitate future servicing and repair,

(e)

Pile the excavated materials outside the TPZ(s) to reduce soil compaction,

(f)

Carry out the excavations carefully so as not to damage the bark and root
collars of the preserved trees,

(g)

Maintain balanced moisture content in the trees and in the soil after
backfilling of the excavations, by carrying out necessary precautionary
measures such as crown thinning, watering and mulching, and

(h)

Move the temporary protection fencing stipulated in Clause 25.69.3 to the

edge of the intended excavation area, between the excavation area and the rest
of the tree protection zone, during the duration of excavation work, and move
back the same to its original location after backfilling.

The Contractor shall take the following precautions when carrying out excavation
that involves cutting of the roots of the preserved trees:

25-41

Section 25 Landscape Work

Protection from
drilling

25.69.7

(a)

Excavation shall be carried out using only hand-held tools such as hoe and
spade, but not mechanical diggers or bulldozers in any circumstances,

(b)

Whenever roots are encountered and before root cutting is carried out, soil
shall be carefully forked away from the roots using hand-held tools up to the
edge along which root cutting is required,

(c)

Root cutting shall be carried out carefully using sterilized hand-held pruning
tools, and roots greater than 25 mm in diameter shall be pruned carefully so as
not to result in shattered and frayed roots,

(d)

Any roots damaged during excavation shall be cut back cleanly with sharp
tools to undamaged tissue and treated with an approved fungicidal dressing
prior to backfilling,

(e)

All cut and exposed roots shall be prevented from drying out during
excavation by adopting the following measures until backfilling, unless
otherwise agreed by the SO:
(i)

Wrap the tap roots, sinker roots, support roots, and roots with
diameter exceeding 50 mm, which shall not be cut, with hessian,
straw or other porous, absorbent fabric once they are exposed,

(ii)

Hang thick hessian or other porous, absorbent fabric from top of the
cut surface over the exposed roots and soil immediately after root
cutting, and

(iii)

Mist the hessian or fabric in a frequency that keeps the roots and the
soil at the cut surface moist all the time,

(f)

The hessian, straw or other porous, absorbent fabric stipulated in Clause

25.69.6(e)(i) and the hessian or fabric stipulated in Clause 25.69.6(e)(ii) shall
be removed immediately before backfilling, and

(g)

Excavations shall be backfilled with soil mix incorporated with slow release
fertilizer at a rate of 500 g/m3 or at a rate as directed by the SO to a level not
higher than the original soil level at the root collar.

Without the prior approval of the SO, the Contractor shall not carry out drilling,
such as soil nailing and drilling for bore holes, rock bolts or dowels, within the
TPZ(s) of the preserved trees unless the Contract explicitly requires such drilling
work within the TPZ(s). For the approved drilling work within the TPZ(s), the
Contractor shall comply with the following requirements:
(a)

Obtain agreement from the SO to the detailed locations and extent of the drill
holes before commencing any drilling work, bearing in mind that the drill
holes shall be located in such a way that the structures to be placed into the
drill holes, including the surface elements of the structures such as soil nail
heads, are at a minimum distance of 500 mm from the trunks of the preserved
trees unless otherwise agreed by the *SO in exceptional circumstances, and

(b)

Carry out the following before commencing any cutting work to the aerial
roots or underground roots of the preserved trees:
(i)

Determine the locations of their major roots and the bulk of the
their absorbing roots so as to keep the cutting of tree roots to a
minimum and to preserve the tap roots, sinker roots and support
roots of the trees in any circumstances,

(ii)

Obtain agreement from the SO to the extent of root cutting on the

Site,

25-42

Section 25 Landscape Work

(iii)

Precautions to
avoid root
damage

Protection from
instability

25.69.8

25.69.9

Where the stability of the trees is likely to be jeopardized, comply

with the requirements stipulated in Clauses 25.69.9(a) to (c),

(c)

Carry out the drilling work carefully so as not to damage the branches,
foliage, trunk, bark and root collars of the preserved trees when gaining
access for, supporting, mobilizing, positioning and operating the drilling rig,
and

(d)

Maintain balanced moisture content in the trees and in the soil after the
drilling work, by carrying out necessary precautionary measures such as
crown thinning, watering and mulching.

The Contractor shall take the following precautions when carrying out drilling work
that involves cutting of the roots of the preserved trees:
(a)

Drilling work and root cutting work shall be carried out carefully,

(b)

Roots greater than 25 mm in diameter shall be pruned carefully in order to

prevent shattered and frayed roots, and

(c)

Any roots damaged during drilling shall be cut back cleanly with sharp tools
to undamaged tissue and treated with an approved fungicidal dressing.

(a)

Where the Works involve cutting of any major roots or other major parts of
the preserved trees or any other works that may jeopardize the stability of the
preserved trees, the Contractor shall install all necessary physical support for
the preserved trees to ensure their stability. The Contractor shall pay
particular attention to the preserved trees growing on retaining structures in
order to prevent the trees from being dislodged from its position as a result of
inadequate support.

(b)

The physical support for the preserved trees shall be installed securely prior to
commencement of the root cutting, tree pruning or any other works that may
affect the stability of the trees. Before commencing the installation of the
physical support measures, the Contractor shall submit method statements for
the support measures to the SO for approval. The Contractor shall commence
the installation of the support measures only after the SOs approval to the
method statements.

(c)

The physical support for the preserved trees shall be securely founded in
footings independent of existing walls or building structures or in other
supporting systems as appropriate, without interfering with other works, other
existing features, and the preserved trees. Where the affected tree is growing
on a retaining structure, the Contractor shall make a detailed assessment to
estimate the weight of the tree and identify the best position of supporting the
tree in relation to its overall spread and centre of gravity. The method
statements for the support measures in respect of the trees growing on
retaining structures shall include the following information:
(i)

Details of the form of construction and where requested by the SO

structural design calculation for the support measures, demonstrating
the bearing capacity of each element,

(ii)

Details of the foundation of the support measures, demonstrating that

the support measures shall not interfere with other works, other
existing features, and the preserved trees and shall not affect the
stability of the retaining structure,

(iii)

Means of securing the tree to the supporting measures, including how

cups and ties are adjusted to the form of the tree, and

25-43

Section 25 Landscape Work

(iv)
(d)

Method of fabrication and erection on the Site.

The Contractor shall remove the physical support for the preserved trees from
the Site upon completion, or earlier if so directed by the SO. The Contractor
shall not remove or relocate the physical support for the trees without the prior
agreement of the SO.

Restrictions on pruning preserved trees

Pruning of
preserved trees

25.69.10

(a) Without the prior approval from the SO, the Contractor shall not carry out
pruning to the preserved trees unless the pruning work is required under the
Contract or is directed by the SO. Where it is found necessary for the
completion of the Works or for safety or other justifiable reasons to carry out
any tree pruning work other than those approved ones, the Contractor shall
notify the SO of such requirement and seek the SOs approval before carrying
out the tree pruning work. The Contractor shall carry out the approved pruning
work according to the timing stipulated in Clause 25.84 or other programme
instructed or agreed by the SO.
(b) The Contractor shall follow the requirements in Clause 25.88 regarding the
submission of method statement on tree pruning.
(c) The Contractor shall follow the requirements in Clause 25.111 regarding the
safety precautions to be taken in tree pruning work.

Standards of
pruning

25.69.11

The Contractor shall follow the requirements in Clauses 25.82, 25.83, 25.85 and
25.86 regarding the standards of tree pruning work.
Tree care

Control of pest
and disease for
preserved trees

25.69.12

(a) The Contractor shall take all necessary precautionary measures to protect the
preserved trees from pest and disease attack and all necessary control measures
to eradicate pest and disease from the infected trees.
(b) Before commencing the application of the pest and disease control measures,
the Contractor shall submit method statements for the control measures to the
SO for approval. The Contractor shall commence the application of the control
measures only after obtaining the SOs approval to the method statements.
(c) The method statements for the pest and disease control measures shall cover,
amongst other aspects as required by the SO, the pesticide or fungicide to be
used and any other necessary associated arboricultural work to the infected
areas.
(d) The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements in applying the
pest and disease control measures:

Repair of
damage to and
replacement of
preserved trees
and other
affected plants

25.69.13.1

(i)

Environmentally friendly measures shall be adopted, and

(ii)

Safety precautions as the manufacturers instruction shall be strictly

followed in using pesticide or fungicide so as to avoid causing danger
or harm to the public and the environment.

The Contractor shall carry out all necessary work of repair of any damage to the
preserved trees and any other plants affected.

25-44

Section 25 Landscape Work

Repair works

25.69.13.2

The work of repair of damage as referred to in Clause 25.69.13.1 shall include the
following:
(a) All necessary arboricultural work to the preserved trees and any other plants
damaged, which may include:
(i)

Tree surgery work to remove dead, damaged, diseased or hazardous

parts, to repair wounds, or to provide cables or braces for additional
support,

(ii)

Watering and/or mulching in case of water deficiency, and

(iii)

Applying appropriate fertilizers in case of nutrient deficiency,

(b) The replacement planting pursuant to Clause 25.69.13.7 for the trees and any
other plants damaged to an extent as described in Clause 25.69.13.6 and the
subsequent Establishment Works for the new plants for 1 year, when instructed
by the SO, and
(c) Any other reinstatement work necessary to bring the damaged plants to their
original condition prior to the occurrence of the damage, as directed by the SO.
Report on
occurrence of
damage to
preserved trees

25.69.13.3

The Contractor shall notify the SO of any damage to the preserved trees and other
affected plants within the same day of the occurrence of damage and shall submit to
the SO within 7 days of the occurrence of damage, a report comprising the following
information in a format agreed by SO:
(a) The timing of the damage,
(b) The nature and extent of the damage,
(c) Photographic records of the damage,
(d) The proposed work of repair of the damage, and
(e) The proposed protection measures to avoid recurrence of similar incident.

Firming,
securing and
wound
treatment

25.69.13.4

When directed by the SO, the Contractor shall firm up and secure all dislodged trees
and any other dislodged plants and shall treat all wounds of the damaged trees/plants
within 3 days of the occurrence of the damage.

Sequence of
work

25.69.13.5

Save as stated in -Clause 25.69.13.4, the Contractor shall not carry out any work of
repair of the damage prior to the SOs acceptance of the report as required in Clause
25.69.13.3.

Replacement
planting of
damaged
trees/plants

25.69.13.6

The Contractor shall provide replacement planting of the damaged trees and any
other affected plants under the following circumstances:
(a) In the opinion of the SO the damaged trees/plants are dead,
(b) In the opinion of the SO, the trees/plants have been substantially damaged,
resulting in one or more of the following conditions:
(i)

That imminent death of the trees/plants within the coming growing

season is predicted,

(ii)

That the structural integrity of the damaged trees/plants is permanently

compromised and consequently the trees/plants become an irreparable
public hazard,

25-45

Section 25 Landscape Work

(iii)

Requirements
on removal of
the damaged
trees/plants

25.69.13.7

That any major parts of the damaged trees/plants have been lost and
consequently their form, habit and balance have been grossly altered so
that their function cannot be reasonably recovered or the trees/plants
are causing harm to other preserved trees.

When instructed by the SO, the Contractor shall carry out the following:
(a) Removal of the damaged trees/plants for which replacement planting as Clause
25.69.13.6 is required, in accordance with the following requirements:
(i)

For the removal of the damaged trees, the Contractor shall prepare a
tree felling application document to the SOs satisfaction and provide
any other assistance or information as required by the SO, for the SOs
application for approval to the felling of the damaged trees from the
government approving authority (LandsD/LCSD/AFCD),

(ii)

The Contractor shall fell the damaged trees only after the SOs
approval to the tree felling, which shall normally be given only after
the tree felling application has been approved by the government
approving authority (LandsD/LCSD/AFCD), and

(iii)

The Contractor shall remove the damaged plants from the Site, and

(b) Replacement planting of new plants in accordance with the following

requirements:

Replacement

Other references 25.69.14

on
arboricultural /
tree work

(i)

The Contractor shall complete the replacement planting within 28 days

from the SOs instruction or other time duration as agreed by the SO,
and

(ii)

For replacement planting, the Contractor shall plant new plants of the
same species and of similar size and form as the damaged plants prior
to the damage or provide other alternative replacement planting as
agreed by the SO.

The Contractors attention is also drawn to the latest editions of the following
British Standards and British Standard Code of Practice for general reference:
BS 3998

Tree work Recommendations

BS 4043

Recommendations for Transplanting Root-Balled Trees

BS 4428

Code of Practice for General Landscape Operations (Excluding Hard

Surfaces)

BS 5837

Trees in relation to Construction - Recommendations

EXISTING VEGETATION TREATMENT INCLUDING FELLING,

TRANSPLANT AND SURGERY
Tree felling
Identification

25.70

At the commencement of works, and concurrent with the tree protection works,
Contractor shall identify and clearly mark all trees that are indicated on Contract
drawing as trees to be felled in accordance with Clauses 25.69.2.2 and 25.69.2.3.
Any tree which for any reason is required to be felled during the progress of the
work shall be immediately drawn to the SOs attention and permission sought from
relevant authority prior to any felling being carried out.

25-46

Section 25 Landscape Work

Workmanship tree felling

Workmanship
on tree felling

25.70.1

During the tree felling operations, all works shall be in accordance with Clause
25.69.2.4(a).

Method
statement

25.70.2

Unless under emergency situation agreed by the SO, the Contractor shall submit
method statement on tree felling for the SOs approval and shall commence any
work related to tree felling only after the method statement has been approved in
writing by the SO.
Transplanting trees

Transplanting
trees, palms and
conifers
Programme and
method
statement for
transplanting
trees

25.71

(a)

For the purpose of this Clause, palms and conifers are also considered as trees.

(b)

The Contractor shall submit and obtain approval from the SO, prior to any
works to the trees on the Site, a detailed method statement and programme for
transplanting the existing trees, outlining the method, sequencing, timing of
operations, and the location and type of machinery to be used for the
following operations:
(i)

Protection before lifting and transplanting,

(ii)

Root pruning, including the root ball size, and the number of stages,
the operations involved in each stage, and the period between each
stage of root pruning,

(iii)

Crown thinning,

(iv)

Excavating trenches for root ball preparation,

(v)

Design and construction of supporting measures,

(vi)

Attaching lifting gear to the trees,

(vii)

Protection during transit,

(viii) Temporary holding nursery, if required,

(ix)

Lifting,

(x)

Transportation to new location, including routing,

(xi)

Preparation of receptor site,

(xii)

Placement, backfilling, mulching and securing at receptor site,

(xiii) Backfilling and making good the donor site, schedule of establishment
works during the establishment period.
Planning for
transplanting

(c)

Conifers and palms shall be transplanted while dormant, and deciduous trees
shall be transplanted in early spring or fall, unless otherwise permitted by the
SO.

Record on
transplanting

(d)

The Contractor shall keep a complete photographic record with

date-imprinted, for each existing tree to be transplanted, at the various stages
of the transplant process as detailed under Clause 25.71(b). Contractor shall
agree with the SO on the submission details prior to commencement of the
root pruning works.

Standards of
transplanting

(e)

All works and materials shall be with good arboricultural practice and in
accordance with British Standards listed in Clause 25.69.14.

25-47

Section 25 Landscape Work

(f)

Replacement

Any tree transplanted or to be transplanted that dies or is damaged to an extent

that, in the opinion of the SO, replacement planting is necessary, shall be
replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide replacement
planting of new trees of the same species and of similar size and form as the
dead or damaged ones prior to the death or damage or provide other
alternative replacement planting as agreed by the SO. The Contractor shall
complete the replacement planting within 28 days from the SOs instruction
or other time duration as agreed by the SO.

Workmanship - Transplanting trees

Pre-transplant
preparation

The pre-transplanted tree shall be preserved and protected in accordance with

Clause 25.69.2.5(a), prior to the commencement of the crown and root
pruning works.

25.72

Crown pruning
Restrictions on
crown pruning

Limited crown pruning to remove dead, diseased, broken or damaged

branches and facilitate transit operation shall only be carried out with prior
approval from the SO. The spacing, balance and attachment of the limbs
should be evaluated at time of crown pruning. Reduction of the original
crown spread shall limit to the maximum of to produce a well-shaped,
balanced head. The central leader shall not be removed.

25.72.1

Root pruning
Programme

25.72.2

Root pruning
period

25.72.3

Anchoring

Root ball
preparation

Root pruning in
stages

25.72.4

25.72.5

25.72.6

The Contractor shall allow the tree transplanting works in his programme of
Works in such a way that the root pruning to the approved size of root ball
shall commence as early as possible so as to ensure maximum fibrous root
growth prior to transplanting operations.
(a)

Root pruning should normally take place with a minimum of 1 month

allowed for root regeneration between cuts. The period shall be approved by
the SO.

(b)

Root pruning period may be adjusted to suit specific tree species and/or
imposed project constraints.

(a)

Where the stability of the tree is likely to be jeopardized, the Contractor shall
subject to approval on submitted method statement, install all necessary
physical support for the pre-transplanted tree to ensure its stability.

(b)

During the whole period of root pruning stages, make regular inspection of
the stability of the trees and adjust the physical support as necessary. Ensure
that chafing of the trunk or branches does not occur.

(a)

The dimensions for the root ball shall be determined by the Contractor,
approved by the SO, based on tree species/size and site specific conditions to
ensure the pre-transplanted trees maximum potential of survival during and
after transplant.

(b)

After determining the size of the root ball and after obtaining approval from
the SO, the proposed circumference of the root ball shall be marked on the
ground for inspection and approval by the SO.

(a)

The circle shall be divided into 6 equal segments and the work shall take
place in four stages.

(b)

Each root pruning stage shall be performed at least one month after the
previous stage unless otherwise directed by the SO. The four stages are:

25-48

Section 25 Landscape Work

Maintenance
during root
pruning period

25.72.7

(i)

1st stage - Dig a trench on the outside of the marked circumference,

in only two opposing segments,

(ii)

2nd stage - After a period of not less than 1 month since the 1st root
pruning (or a longer period as specified or as directed by
the SO), dig a trench on the outside of the marked
circumference, in the next two opposing segments,

(iii)

3rd stage -

After another period of not less than 1 month since the 2nd
root pruning (or a longer period as specified or as directed
by the SO), dig a trench on the outside of the marked
circumference, in the last remaining two opposing
segments,

(iv)

4th stage -

After a further period of not less than 1 month since the 3rd
root pruning (or a longer period as specified or as directed
by the SO), prepare the root ball as specified and cut the
underside of the root ball, followed by uplifting and
transplanting.

(c)

All cuts shall be made with sharp spade, or other implements in accordance
with all other relevant British Standards listed in Clause 25.69.14 (a). Cuts
must be clean to avoid tearing or breaking the roots.

(d)

The trench shall be 200-300 mm wide and 750 mm deep, or as directed by the
SO. The excavated trench shall be backfilled with fabricated soil mix or peat
moss to encourage new growth of root tips.

(a)

The Contractor shall inspect the tree every 28 days to check its health. Any
sign of deterioration shall be reported immediately to the SO and remedial
action taken to rectify the situation.

(b)

The root ball zone shall not be subjected to undue compaction. Contractor
shall erect temporary protective fencing in accordance to Clause 25.69.3
from the 1st stage of root pruning until tree lift.

(c)

The Contractor shall water regularly, remove weed growth, carry out
insecticide treatment and any other horticultural work as necessary and as
approved by the SO.

(d)

The application of root activator, where necessary, shall be carried out

according to the manufacturers instruction.

Tree lifting and protection

Timing

25.73

Tree lifting operations will be timed so as to enable transplanting of material

direct to areas of proposed planting. No transplanting operations shall
commence until either the receptor site or the holding nursery is fully
prepared as specified. Any plant uplifted must be transplanted and watered
the same day.

Watering

25.73.1

Lifting and transplanting operations shall be carried out only following a

period of consistent rainfall which has thoroughly watered the trees to the
satisfaction of the SO or following a thorough watering of the trees by the
Contractor at a rate agreed by the SO.

Wrapping of
root ball

25.73.2

(a)

Before uplifting, the outer edge of the previously dug trenches shall be
loosened from the surrounding soil, and ball can be shaped with taper on the
sides, slanting inward toward the base.

25-49

Section 25 Landscape Work

(b)

Uplifting

25.73.3

Protection

25.73.4

Containerized
root ball

Protection
during transit

25.73.5

25.73.6

Damp hessian is placed on the sides and across the top of the ball and pinned.
The Hessian should cover the full circumference of the root ball with bottom
skirt hanging out. This skirt is pinned to the ball later after the tree is taken
out of the hole. This Hessian shall be kept moist throughout the time of
uplifting until the uplifted tree is transplanted in its new location.
Plants shall be lifted carefully to avoid damage to root ball. Roots shall be
cut free from ground, not pulled, using a suitable implement to give a clean
cut. All roots greater than 50 mm diameter shall be treated with an approved
sealant.

(a)

All trees to be transplanted shall be wrapped and protected to prevent

mechanical damage during lifting and transport, and protected against
excessive sunlight, wind, and drought.

(b)

Extra care must be taken to avoid damage to the bark. If limbs are to be tied,
they must not be tied so tightly to create sharp bend that could compress the
tissues or cause breakage.

(c)

The Contractor shall provide all necessary plant, machineries of appropriate

capacity, and exercise all precautionary measures to protect the people
engaged in the transplant operations as well as the people and property in the
vicinity during the entire uplift and transplant operations.

(a)

Trees transplanted to the holding nursery are to be containerized, using

containers of appropriate material and size to suit the approved root ball size.
They shall be planted in an upright position, allowing adequate space for
growth, and tied and staked securely to avoid damage to the tree stems.
Immediately following planting the trees shall be watered thoroughly to
ensure a thorough soaking of the roots.

(b)

The tree root ball container shall vary in accordance with the tree root ball
dimensions. Allow for a minimum of 150 mm clearance between the root
ball edges to the sides and at least 300 mm to the bottom of the root ball
container. This space shall be filled with moist peat moss or other materials
as agreed by the SO.

(a)

Crown of the tree should be loosely wrapped to minimize drying and wind
damage. Anti-transpirants may be applied with the approval from the SO in
accordance with manufacturers instruction.

(b)

Trucks should be well padded to protect the trees from injury. The buds of
the palms shall be well supported throughout the transit period. Care shall
also be taken in packing of the trees to prevent over-heating, cooking the
foliage and crushing of the foliage and branches.

Planting and maintenance

Direct planting
in receptor site

25.74

Replanting from 25.74.1

holding nursery
to receptor site

(a)

Tree transplanted directly to the final receptor site is to be planted and

secured, if required, in accordance with the Clauses 25.29 and 25.30, unless
otherwise proposed by the Contractor and approved by the SO.

(b)

Synthetic or treated hessian around the root ball must be removed upon
planting in the receptor site. Natural hessian should also be removed, if
practicable, or to fold back, to ensure roots can grow out of the root ball. All
pins and twines shall also be removed to avoid girdling the tree.

(a)

Trees with root ball containerized shall be transported from holding nursery
to the permanent receptor site with container intact.

25-50

Section 25 Landscape Work

Immediate
maintenance

Watering upon
transplanting

25.74.2

25.74.3

Dry season
watering

(b)

The sides and bottom of the container shall be removed carefully by hand
held tools without damage to the root ball.

(c)

Planting procedure shall be in accordance with Clauses 25.29 and 25.30,

unless otherwise proposed by the Contractor and approved by the SO.

(a)

Plant materials shall be maintained immediately after transplanting works,

from existing location for period as specified under Contract.

(b)

Such maintenance shall include all measures necessary to establish and

maintain all plants in an acceptable vigorous and healthy growing condition.
The establishment works shall be carried out in accordance with requirements
under Clauses 25.93 to 25.105 and 25.109, unless otherwise proposed by the
Contractor and approved by the SO.

(a)

Immediately after transplanting, the base of all plants shall be well watered to
thoroughly soak the root ball. Trees shall be well watered in evenings and
early morning only.

(b)

Watering shall be carried out daily during the dry season, generally
September to April, and as required during the wet season.

Mulch

25.74.4

A consolidated layer of 50 mm thick of mulch shall be placed around the tree,

extending 150 mm beyond the perimeter of the tree pit and covering at least
the entire root ball zone. Mulch shall not be placed immediately around the
tree trunk or root collar.

Weeding to
rootball

25.74.5

Rootball shall be kept free of weeds at all times and in accordance with
Clauses 25.99(a) to (e).

Crown cleaning

25.74.6

At the instruction of the SO, trees shall be pruned selectively to remove dead,
damaged or dangerous branches. The pruning method of crown cleaning shall
follow the requirements in Clauses 25.82 to 25.88.
Transplanting shrubs, climbers, groundcovers and bamboos

Transplanting
shrubs,
climbers,
groundcovers
and bamboos
Programme for
transplanting
shrubs

Standards of
transplanting
shrubs

25.75

(a)

For the purpose of this Clause, climbers, groundcovers and bamboos are also
considered as shrubs.

(b)

The Contractor shall submit and obtain approval from the SO, prior to any
works to the shrubs on the Site, a detailed method statement and programme
for transplanting the existing shrubs, outlining the method, timing of
operations for the following operations:

(c)

(i)

Root pruning, including the root ball size, and the number of stages,
the operations involved in each stage, and the period between each
stage of root pruning,

(ii)

Crown pruning,

(iii)

Temporary holding nursery, if required,

(iv)

Placement, backfilling, mulching and securing at receptor site,

(v)

Schedule of establishment works during the period for establishment

works.

All works and materials shall be with good arboricultural practice and in
accordance with British Standards listed in Clause 25.69.14.

25-51

Section 25 Landscape Work

(d)

Replacement

Any shrub transplanted or to be transplanted that dies or is damaged to an

extent that, in the opinion of the SO, replacement planting is necessary, shall
be replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide replacement
planting of new shrubs of the same species and of similar size and form as the
dead or damaged ones prior to the death or damage or provide other
alternative replacement planting as agreed by the SO. The Contractor shall
complete the replacement planting within 28 days from the SOs instruction
or other time duration as agreed by the SO.

Workmanship - transplanting shrubs

Workmanship
on transplanting
shrubs

25.75.1

(a)

Size of root ball shall be determined by the Contractor and approved by the
SO, dependent on the species / size of the shrub.

(b)

Agreed size of root ball shall be marked on ground, and roots shall be cut free
from ground, not pulled, using a suitable implement to give a clean cut.

(c)

Transplanting operations shall be carried out only after thorough watering of

the shrubs to the satisfaction of the SO.

(d)

Uplifted root ball shall be wrapped with damp hessian, placed in a suitable
size basket and keep moist at all times until re-plant to receptor site, in
accordance with Clause 25.29

(e)

Wrap the foliage of the shrub to protect against excessive sunlight, wind and
drought if shrub is to be transported to a distant site. Care shall be taken in
packing to prevent over-heating with its resultant loss of foliage.

(f)

Immediately after transplanting, the base of all plants shall be well watered to
thoroughly soak the root ball.

(g)

Plant materials shall be maintained immediately after transplanting works,

from existing location for period as specified under Contract, in accordance
with Clause 25.93 to 25.105.

TRANSPLANTING TREES OF SEMI-MATURE SIZE AND ABOVE

Materials
Transplanting
semi-mature
trees and above

25.76

Semi-mature trees and trees of size above shall be all as described in Clause 25.32(f)
or as specified.

Programme for
transplanting
semi-mature
trees and above

25.76.1

Clauses 25.71(b) to (f) shall apply.

Workmanship transplanting trees of semi-mature size and above

Pre-transplant
25.77
preparation for
trees of
semi-mature size
and above

Clauses 25.72 to 25.72.5 and 25.72.7 shall apply with the exception of Clause 25.72.3
(a) shall be replaced by 2 months instead of 1 month.

Root pruning in
stages

(a)

25.77.1

After determining the size of the root ball and after obtaining approval from
the SO, the proposed circumference of the root ball shall be marked on the
ground around the tree. This circle shall be divided into 6 equal portions and
the work shall take place in three stages:

25-52

Section 25 Landscape Work

(i)

1st stage - Dig a trench on the inside edge of the marked circumference,
in only the first three alternate portions, leaving the
remaining portions uncut.

(ii)

2nd stage - After a period of not less than 2 months since the first root
pruning (or a longer period as specified or as directed by the
SO), proceed to dig a trench on the inside edge of the marked
circumference in the remaining three uncut portions.

(iii) 3rd stage - After a further period of not less than 2 months since the 2nd
root pruning (or a longer period as specified or as directed by
the SO), prepare the root ball as specified and cut the
underside of the root ball, followed by uplifting and
transplanting.

Tree lifting and

protection

Planting and
maintenance of
transplanted
semi-mature
trees

25.78

25.79

(b)

All cuts shall be made with sharp spade, or other implements in accordance
with all relevant British Standards listed in Clause 25.69.14. Cuts must be
clean to avoid tearing or breaking the roots.

(c)

The trench shall be 200-300 mm wide and 1000 mm deep, or as directed by

the SO. The excavated trench shall be backfilled with fabricated soil mix or
pear moss to encourage new growth of root tips.

(a)

Clauses 25.73 to 25.73.6 shall apply

(b)

Large trees must be removed from the hole with crane or other mechanical
device, of appropriate capacity. Trees should not be lifted by the trunk.

Clauses 25.74 to 25.74.6 shall apply.

TREE SURGERY WORK

General
Scope of work

Safety
precautions in
tree surgery
work

25.80

25.81

(a)

Tree surgery work shall cover tree pruning, treatment of wounds and injuries,
and treatment of cavities and water pockets to the trees;

(b)

Tree pruning means the removal of unwanted branches such as those shown
in Fig. (1) in Annex A, either for reducing risk and inconvenience to the
public, maintaining or improving tree health and structure, or improving
appearance of the tree;

(c)

Treatment of wounds and injuries means any work to the tree for reducing
the risk of colonization of wound pathogen to tree wounds and enhancing the
natural regeneration of tissues on the exposed surfaces;

(d)

Treatment of cavities and wet pockets means any work to the tree for
deterring further wood decay at the cavities and wet pockets and/or achieving
other management objectives such as strengthening the tree structure and
deterring human access.

The Contractor shall take all necessary safety precautions, including but not limited to
those stipulated in Clause 25.111, to protect the people engaged in the tree surgery
work as well as the people and property in the vicinity.

25-53

Section 25 Landscape Work

Workmanship Tree surgery work

Workmanship of 25.82
tree surgery
work

The workmanship of tree surgery work shall generally follow the requirements in BS
3998, Tree work Recommendations. Where there are inconsistencies between this
BS and other provisions in the contract, other provisions in the contract shall prevail
over this BS.

Types of
pruning

(a)

Formative pruning means selective pruning of the lateral branches of a tree

so as to develop a strong and straight trunk, a well-balanced crown with
properly spaced scaffolding branches and a clear central ladder;

(b)

Crown lifting mean selective pruning to remove lower branches to increase

vertical clearance from ground level;

(c)

Crown reduction mean selective pruning to reduce the overall height and
spread of the crown, leaving the tree in a well-balanced and natural form and
shape;

(d)

Crown thinning means selective pruning to remove weak, thin, crossing and
live branches to reduce the density of foliage, but without affecting the overall
height and spread of the tree; and

(e)

Crown cleaning means selective pruning to remove dead, dying, withered,

broken, damaged, hanging, detached, decayed, cankered, insect burrowed,
cracked or diseased branches, branch stubs, the relatively weaker or poorly
structured member of a crossed branch pair, or excessive water sprouts.

(a)

For maintaining the vitality of the tree, the following requirements shall be
observed where practicable when planning the timing of pruning work

Timing of
pruning

25.83

25.84

(i)

Avoid pruning at times when the disease- and decay- resistance of

the tree is likely to be impaired by physiological stress induced by
previous tree work, construction damage, or seasonal or
weather-related factors such as during or soon after a drought or
when starch reserves have been depleted by spring flushing and
flowering.

(ii)

Avoid pruning prior to flowering season of the tree.

(iii)

Avoid pruning at the timing that will result in exposure of tissues to

severe conditions, such as those due to season, weather or known
seasonal presence of pathogens, taking into account the tolerance of
the species concerned to such conditions.

(iv)

Depending on the species concerned, avoid pruning at certain times

of the year when pruning will result in bleeding of sap and hence
losing sugars.

(v)

Avoid pruning during spring and early summer active growing

period.

(vi)

Pruning of evergreen trees just before spring, for faster healing in

the coming growing season.

(vii)

Pruning of deciduous trees after shedding leaves in winter when

trees are dormant, for minimizing the risk of pest problem
associated with wounding and allowing the trees to take advantage
of the full growing season to close and compartmentalize wounds.

25-54

Section 25 Landscape Work

Extent of
pruning

25.85

(viii)

Suitable structural pruning of young trees for facilitating the

development of a straight trunk.

(ix)

Allow sufficient time for a tree to recover following any damage or

adverse management that might have increased its vulnerability to
physiological dysfunction, before carrying out any further pruning.

(x)

Pruning of tree species whose defences against various

wound-related diseases depend partly on the production of gum or
resin, when these processes are at their most active.

(b)

For improving health of trees or reducing risk and inconvenience to the public,
pruning shall be conducted as and when required.

(c)

For accommodating the following types of conflicts between construction and

trees, pruning shall be carried out prior to the erection of the temporary
protective fencing and the initiation of construction activities where
practicable
(i)

Conflicts incurring permanent occupation of the space by building

structure and, hence permanent loss of subaerial growth space of
the tree.

(ii)

Conflicts temporarily demanded by the need to provide sufficient

working space to conduct construction activities adjoining the tree.

(d)

For crown cleaning, pruning shall be carried out prior to the erection of the
temporary protective fencing and the initiation of construction activities
where practicable.

(e)

Extensive crown lifting shall be phased over a number of years where

practicable, with a view to providing some opportunity for physiological and
biomechanical adaptation to the resulting wounding and branch removal.

(a)

The amount of leaf-bearing twig structure removed and the size of pruning
cuts, both individually and collectively, shall be kept to the minimum
required to achieve the objectives, observing the following requirements
where practicable
(i)

Each final cut shall be kept as small as possible by cutting at an

optimum angle.

(ii)

The diameter of the final cut shall generally not exceed one-third of
that of the parent stem or branch but shall even be smaller for old
and declining tree to allow for the relatively small proportion of
sapwood and the slow rate of wound occlusion.

(iii)

The number and size of cuts shall generally be limited so that their
total cross-sectional area does not exceed one-third of that of the
stem, when measured at 1.5 m above ground level.

(b)

The pruning work shall be done in phases to allow refoliation if the minimum
pruning required to achieve the objectives in a one-off operation cannot retain
enough leaf area for satisfactory physiological function, taking into account
the species tolerances, the trees age and condition and any implications for
the safety of other trees.

(c)

To avoid over-pruning which will affect the healthy growth of the trees, the
removal of tree crown shall be limited to not more than one quarter of the
original coverage in each pruning operation and the tree crown shall be kept in

25-55

Section 25 Landscape Work

a well-balanced and natural form and shape after pruning.

(d)

For species that are relatively susceptible to wound-induced decay, pruning

shall be restricted to healthy, small-diameter parts of the tree, and shall be
carried out as sparingly as possible and without exposing heartwood or
ripewood.

(e)

For species that have relatively strong defences against decay but produce
non-durable heartwood or ripewood, at least two-thirds of the diameter of any
cut shall consist of wood that, according to characteristics of the species
concerned, is assessed as still containing living tissue.

(f)

For branches which are close together on a parent stem or branch, the
following requirements shall be observed where practicable

(g)

(h)

(i)

Removal of such branches shall be avoided, unless the tree is young

tree or the cuts are so small as to be capable of being fully occluded,
and therefore resistant to decay, within a few years.

(ii)

If removal of such branches cannot be avoided, the branches

selected for removal shall not be closely aligned within the trees
vascular system, that is in a vertical line.

(iii)

If the precaution in sub-clause (f)(ii) of this Clause is not

practicable, the pruning work shall be phased over several seasons
with a view to lessening its damaging effects.

For crown lifting, the clearance to be achieved shall be as that stipulated in the
contract and the following requirements shall be observed where practicable
(i)

Excessive removal of lower branches from a parent stem which

might lead to increased swaying shall be avoided.

(ii)

Pruning shall not result in the removal of more than 15% of the live
crown height where practicable.

(iii)

The remaining live crown shall make up at least two-thirds of the

height of the tree.

For crown reduction, the tree height and crown spread which are to remain or
the average equivalent in branch length shall be as those stipulated in the
contract and the following requirements shall be followed where practicable
(i)

The remaining live crown shall maintain a strong framework of

healthy small-diameter branches and twigs, that is a leaf-bearing
structure, capable of producing dense leaf cover during the
following growing season.

(ii)

The crown shall be reduced in proportion to its original shape, so

as to avoid altering the balance of the tree as a whole. The shape of
the crown shall not be altered unless there is a specific need to do
so, such as for biomechanical integrity.

(iii)

Crown reduction shall not be carried out in addition to other crown

pruning operations, which will add to the amount of wounding and
leaf loss.

25-56

Section 25 Landscape Work

(i)

(j)

Pruning
techniques

25.86

For crown thinning, the following requirements shall be followed

(i)

An even density of foliage shall be retained throughout a

well-spaced and balanced branch structure after pruning.

(ii)

Excessive removal of lower branches from a parent branch which

leads to lion-tailing and increased swaying shall be avoided.

For crown cleaning, the following requirements shall be followed

(i)

Remove only the plant parts referred to in Clause 25.83(e) and do

not remove live and healthy branches.

(ii)

Do not reduce crown size.

(iii)

Do not reshape the crown.

(iv)

Do not thin the crown.

(a)

Pruning shall be carried out with the cut just above and sloping away from an
outward facing healthy bud.

(b)

Dead branches shall be cut back to live tissue or growing point as shown on
Fig. (2) in Annex A, without causing injury to living bark or sapwood.

(c)

All cuts shall be made to avoid splintering or tearing of bark that would catch
water and encourage rot.

(d)

Loose, dead or damaged bark shall be cleanly cut back to firm healthy bark
without leaving any jagged edges.

(e)

Ragged, rough edges of bark or wood shall be trimmed cleanly from around
wounds with a sharp knife to the minimum extent that is necessary so as to
hasten wound closure, and twigs less than 15 mm diameter at the point of
attachment shall be cut with sharp secateurs.

(f)

Long and heavy branches shall be cut in sequence of section by section, with
each section in no more than 400 mm in length, to remove the main weight of
the branch from the perimeter of the crown in towards the trunk.

(g)

For a live branch with a diameter larger than 50 mm at the point of attachment,
or in general a thinner but long branch that cannot be held by one hand to
prevent bark tearing as it falls near the end of the cutting, the drop cut method
(also known as the three-cut or three-step method) as follows and as shown in
Fig. (4) of Annex A and in Annex B shall be adopted to prevent bark tearing of
the parent stem below the wound of the cut branch

(h)

(i)

Make the first cut from the underside at a distance of approximately

300 mm from the parent branch or trunk,

(ii)

Make the second cut from above at a point 25 mm further away

from the first cut,

(iii)

Make the final (third) cut just outside the branch collar to remove
remaining branch segment.

Care shall be taken to avoid tearing or compressing retained wood and bark
when a cut is made, and to prevent falling branches from harming other parts
of the tree including its roots.

25-57

Section 25 Landscape Work

(i)

(j)

(k)

For branch shortening, which should be the main cutting mode, the following
requirements shall also be observed where practicable
(i)

Pruning shall be conducted using the proper reduction cut down to

the next lower node, as illustrated in Fig. (1) and Fig. (2) of Annex
C.

(ii)

The final cut shall be made distal to a union or group of unions

where one or more healthy lateral branches bear enough foliage to
sustain the parent stem or branch, and be made just beyond and
parallel to the distal end of the bark ridge, if apparent, of the lateral
branch chosen for retention as shown in Figure 2 of BS 3998.

(iii)

If there is only one such union near the intended cut, the lateral
branch shall have a diameter of at least one-third and preferably
more than half that of the removed portion.

(iv)

The final cut shall not exceed 100 mm in diameter except on very
large trees.

For branch removal, which shall be minimized, the following requirements

shall also be observed where practicable
(i)

Pruning shall be conducted using the proper removal cut down to

the fork of the parent stem, as illustrated in Annex B and Annex D.

(ii)

The branch removal shall not result in leaving a stub or cutting flush
to the main trunk as shown on Fig. (5) and Fig. (6) of Annex A
respectively. The final cut shall be made close to the trunk or parent
limb without cutting into the branch bark ridge and branch collar
following the guidelines in Clause 25.86(j)(iii), so that no part of the
stem is damaged or torn, and no snags or stumps are left.

(iii)

The position and angle of the final cut shall follow the pruning
guidelines as follows

If a branch collar is visible, the final cut shall be made just

outside the branch collar, as shown in Figure 2 of BS 3998, in
Fig. (7) of Annex A, and in Annex D.

If there is a branch bark ridge but no visible branch collar, the

final cut shall be made with its top edge just outside the branch
bark ridge and at an angle as shown in Figure 2 of BS 3998, in
Fig. (8) of Annex A, and in Annex D or at more acute angles
where a co-dominant stem or branch is removed or where there
is an acute union with included bark as shown in Annex D.

If neither a branch collar nor a branch bark ridge is obvious,

such as on a tree with very fissured bark, the final cut shall be
made with its top edge just outside the basal flare of the branch
and at right angles to the branch being removed, as shown in
Figure 2 of BS 3998.

If the species has whorled branches, the final cut shall be made
just distal to a whorl.

For crown cleaning, use reduction cut as far as possible to minimize live wood
removal and use removal cut only as the last resort.

25-58

Section 25 Landscape Work

(l)

(m)

(n)

The following malpractices of pruning shall not be allowed

(i)

Topping of trees, meaning cutting of the trunk and branches

between nodes leaving stubs, as shown in Fig. (9) of Annex A,
which will damage the tree form and structure and initiate decay in
trunk and branches.

(ii)

Leaving stubs which can die back and inhibit wound occlusion or
give rise to undesirable proliferation of new shoots, as shown in
Fig. (5) of Annex A.

(iii)

Bark tearing of parent stem, as shown in Fig. (3) of Annex A.

(iv)

Flush cut, meaning branch cutting that gets too close to the parent
stem, as shown in Fig. (6) of Annex A.

Other types of damage to the tree shall be avoided during pruning, including
but not be limited to the following (i)

All foreign and undesirable objects found on the tree during

pruning, such as wires, cables, strings, ropes, clamps, and nails,
shall be removed very carefully so as not to inflict harm on the tree
in the process of removal. The Contractor shall not attempt to
extract foreign objects that have been embedded firmly in wood.

(ii)

No climbing spur or other means of climbing that may damage the

bark or the cambium of the tree shall be permitted.

(iii)

In using ropes to climb the tree, rope injury of the tree shall be
consciously avoided.

For the tools and equipment used in pruning work, the following requirements
shall be observed
(i)

Clean and sharp tools shall be used in pruning to produce smooth

and clean cuts of a single flat, sloping face to facilitate healing and
reduce the risks of attack by insects and fungi.

(ii)

For branches smaller than 12 mm in diameter at the point of

attachment, pruning shear could be used; and for branches greater
than 12 mm in diameter, pruning saw shall be used.

(iii)

After cutting one tree, the pruning tools shall be wiped clean of all
wood particles and disinfected before using them on another tree.

(o)

Pruning wounds shall be treated according to Clause 25.89.

(p)

All pruning debris shall be removed from the Site as soon as possible and at
the end of every working day.

(q)

Any adjacent areas affected by the pruning work shall be reinstated.

Personnel
involved in
pruning

25.87

The personnel who directly participate in pruning work shall have received formal
training in pruning and have demonstrable practical experience in carrying out
pruning work.

Method
statement on
pruning

25.88

(a)

Unless under emergency situation agreed by the SO, the Contractor shall
submit method statement on tree pruning for the SOs approval and shall
commence any work related to tree pruning only after the method statement
has been approved in writing by the SO and the actual amount and locations of

25-59

Section 25 Landscape Work

pruning have been agreed by the SO on the site.

(b)

Treatment of
wounds and
other injuries

25.89

The information to be included in the method statement shall include but not
be limited to the following
(i)

The proposed plant parts to be pruned and the approximate diameter

and length of these plant parts.

(ii)

The proposed types of pruning cut to be adopted.

(iii)

The proposed pruning locations.

(iv)

The proposed sequence of pruning.

(v)

The tools and equipment to be used.

(vi)

The name(s), qualifications and experience of the personnel who

will participate directly in the tree pruning work.

(vii)

Highlight of the branch to be pruned being

Larger than 50 mm in diameter at the point of attachment to

the stem,

First order live branch

Second order live branch

Third order live branch.

(viii)

The vertical clearance where crown lifting is to be achieved.

(ix)

The tree height and crown spread which are to remain where crown
reduction is to be achieved.

(a)

Any dead, damaged and decayed tissue at or surrounding a wound or an injury

shall be removed using a clean, sharp implement without damaging the living
tissue.

(b)

Unless otherwise instructed by the SO, any wounds or injuries shall be left
uncovered instead of being painted with wound dressing or coating to avoid
water retention and disease development.

(c)

If there is a high risk of a wound or an injury being colonized by a pathogen

such as a canker fungus, an approved wound protectant, where available and
proven to be effective for the tree species and type of pathogen, shall be
applied to the fresh wound as soon as practicable, when instructed or agreed
by the SO, to provide short-term protection.

(d)

If a large area of bark has become detached very recently, it shall be held in
place or replaced by a moisture-retentive wrapping, when instructed or agreed
by the SO, in order enhance the possibility of tissues regenerating naturally on
the exposed surface(s). The Contractor shall keep monitoring the condition of
the wound or injury and shall remove the wrapping when the bark has
reunited, callus has developed on the exposed wood, or the treatment has been
successful.

(e)

The Contractor shall submit method statement on treatment of wounds and

other injuries for the SOs approval and shall commence any work related to
treatment of wounds and other injuries only after the method statement has
been approved in writing by the SO.

25-60

Section 25 Landscape Work

Treatment of
cavities and wet
pockets

25.90

(a)

Where it is necessary to clear the dry cavities of loose rubbish and rotton wood
in order to assess its extent and the need for any further work, no attempt shall
be made to cut into or exposed sound wood as the resulting wounds are likely
to breach the trees natural defences against wood-rotting fungi.

(b)

Where it is necessary to clear the wet cavities of water, no attempt shall be

made to apply any drainage measures that will breach the trees defensive
barriers. If the walls of a wet cavity are to be strengthened by the insertion of
bolts, it shall be done above the level at which water accumulates.

(c)

If a water pocket is free from decay, no action shall be taken.

(d)

If installation of some form of barrier is necessary to deter human access, such

barrier shall be inserted so that it cannot easily be removed and will not have
any adverse effects on the tree or on wildlife that might be using the cavity. If
a filling is the only effective deterrent, it shall be composed of non-toxic
material.

(e)

The Contractor shall submit method statement on treatment of cavities and

wet pockets for the SOs approval and shall commence any work related to
treatment of cavities and wet pockets only after the method statement has been
approved in writing by the SO.

Additional
damage

25.91

Repair any damage to existing plants caused by tree surgery operations or any other
cause during the construction period as instructed by the SO.

Tools and
equipment

25.92

Use the type of tools and equipment recommended by and in accordance with BS
3998.
ESTABLISHMENT WORKS
General Establishment Works

Establishment
works

25.93

Maintain the works after the completion date for a period of twelve months or as
specified. Carry out all measures necessary to ensure that all plants shall thrive and
become established within this period. Keep works neat and tidy and free from litter
at all times.

Replacement
planting

25.94

(a)

Replace all plants during the Establishment Works period which are dead,
dying or not conforming to the original specification within two weeks of
identification. Agree a schedule of replacement planting with the SO.
Planting of the replacement plants shall be to the satisfaction of the SO, and
take the same form as the original planting details contained in the Contract.
Notch planting of replacement plants in any form shall not be accepted.
Ensure soil conditions are satisfactory before replacement planting.

(b)

The Contractor shall not be responsible for replacing dead or damaged stock
caused by vandalism or typhoon. The responsibility shall be with the
Contractor to prove that death or damage was caused by circumstances beyond
his control. A written report with clear photographic record (in colour and
date imprinted) shall be submitted to the SO within 14 days of such an
occurrence.

Damaged plants
due to vandalism
or typhoon

Water

25.95

The Contractor shall import fresh water to water plants. Attempts shall be made by
the SO to arrange for the supply of mains water, the supply, however, is not
guaranteed. If the supply is made available, the Contractor shall pay all necessary
water charges.

Maintenance
operations

25.96

The number of operations as specified is based on an assessment of the work required.

The Contractor shall submit a schedule of maintenance operations for the SOs

25-61

Section 25 Landscape Work

approval at least 3 months prior to the completion of the landscape work.

During Establishment Works period, the Contractor shall submit record of
maintenance operations with dates and type of work carried out on site and
photographic records, every 3 months during the Establishment Works period starting
from the date of completion in accordance with the Contract. All operations shall be
verified by the SO. Additional operations may only be implemented after
authorization by the SO. Seek authorization from the SO at least three weeks prior to
any additional operations being required.
Replacement
planting due to
parasitic plants

25.97

Replace those plants affected by parasitic plants during the Establishment Works
period.

Workmanship- Establishment Works

Watering

25.98

Watering Time

Weeding

Firming up

25.99

25.100

(a)

Water all trees, shrubs, grass and other plants so as to maintain a moist soil
adequate to ensure satisfactory establishment. In dry weather when rainfall is
less than 5 mm per day, watering shall be carried out every day during the
Establishment Works period. Thoroughly water areas as instructed by the SO.
Complete watering within 24 hours of receiving such instruction.

(b)

Carry out watering either early morning or late afternoon or both as the case
may be.

(a)

All grassed and planted areas shall be kept free from weeds throughout the period
for establishment works. Any unwanted plants including Mikania micrantha
Kunth found within the Site is considered as noxious weeds and shall be removed
by the Contractor once it is identified upon discovery within the Site, or when
instructed by the SO throughout the period for establishment works.

(b)

Weeding shall be carried out by hand or by mechanical methods agreed by the

SO in such a manner that damage to the grass and planted areas will not be
caused. Any chemicals for weeding operation shall not be used unless
otherwise instructed or approved by the SO. Weed removal by fire shall not be
allowed at any time. All weeds, litter and other rubbish resulting from the
weeding operation shall be disposed of from the Site. Any ground cover
plants, herbaceous plants, climbers, mulch or soil disturbed or removed during
the weeding operation shall be replaced and replenished.

(c)

Planted areas in bare ground shall be weeded to remove all unwanted

vegetative growth including aerial parts and roots, over the complete area.
Planted areas other than in bare ground shall be weeded to remove all
competing and overhanging vegetative growth by cutting the growth down to
not more than 50 mm above soil level.

(d)

Remove weeds by approved mechanical or manual means so as not to cause

any damage. Remove from all planted areas all weeds and rubbish resulting
from this operation. Replace any mulch disturbed or removed during weeding.
Inspect weeding requirements monthly. Maintain a circle of bare soil, 200 mm
diameter greater than that of the tree trunk or palm stem, around all plant bases
in grassed/turved areas. Weed areas as necessary or instructed by the SO.
Complete weeding within seven days of receiving such instructions.

(e)

Parasitic plants and noxious weeds shall be removed in accordance with

Clauses 25.14(a) and 25.14(b) accordingly. Replace those plants affected by
parasites during the construction period.

Plants which become loose as a result of wind rock or other causes shall be firmed up.
The Contractor shall carry out an inspection of the plants each month and after heavy

25-62

Section 25 Landscape Work

rain or wind for this purpose.

Securing stakes
and ties

25.101

Re-secure stakes and ties throughout the Establishment Works period. Inspect at least
once per month and replace all broken, damaged or otherwise unsatisfactory stakes
and ties. Adjust any ties which are causing chafing or abrasion. Remove all trees
staking, ties or guys when the trees or palms are full established at the end of the
Establishment Works period, or as instructed by the SO.

Pruning during
Establishment
Works period

25.102

(a)

Prune all trees, shrubs and climbers to encourage bushy growth, improve
flowering and remove dead damaged or crossing branches and dead flower
heads or as instructed by the SO. An inspection of pruning requirements shall
be made monthly.

Pruning method

(b)

Prune and remove branches at the appropriate time of the year depending on
species using sharp, clean tools. Prune with the cut just above, and sloping
away from, an outward facing healthy bud. Remove branches by cutting flush
with the adjoining stem and in such a way that no part of the stem is damaged
or torn. Trim ragged edges of bark with a clean sharp knife. Retain the
individual habit and shape of the plant, unless otherwise directed or if it is the
intention of the design to form a clipped hedge. Comply with the requirements
in Clause 25.89 in the application of wound dressing or coating.

Grass cutting

(c)

Grassed areas shall be cut by manual or mechanical methods agreed by the SO

and in a manner that does not cause pulling of roots or damage to planting in
or near the grassed area. All cuttings shall be raked off and disposed of within
24 hours after cutting. Cutting to height according to the following
categories:
(i)

Category 1 grass shall be reduced by cutting to a height of 50 mm when

it reaches 100 mm high.

(ii)

Category 2 grass shall be reduced by cutting to a height of 100 mm

when it reaches 300 mm high.

(iii)

Category 3 grass cutting shall be cutting of areas of hydroseeding

which are stated in the Contract to be subsequently maintained as
mown grass.

Thinning

(d)

Where instructed by the SO, reduce the number of plants due to overcrowding.
Dig up shrubs, and replant in agreed positions, fertilize and water, all in
accordance with the specification or as instructed by the SO.

Fertilizing

(e)

Carry out two applications of slow release fertilizer, one during early spring
and one during late summer or as directed by the SO, at the following rates:

Aeration

25.103

(i)

250 gm per semi-mature tree;

(ii)

200 gm per heavy standard tree, large palm and large conifer;

(iii)

125 gm per standard tree, medium size palm, and medium size conifer;

(iv)

75 gm per seedling tree, whip, small palm, small conifer, shrub,

climbing plant and bamboo; and

(v)

40 gm/m2 for grass areas, ground cover planted areas, and herbaceous
plants.

During the Establishment Period, immediately after fertilizing and prior to the
application of mulch, cultivate all shrub areas by hand, using a horticultural fork to a
depth of 100 mm to aerate the soil.

25-63

Section 25 Landscape Work

Mulching

25.104

During the last 14 days of the Establishment Period immediately after weeding, top up
all shrub areas with a minimum depth of 50 mm of mulch.

Regular control
of pests, fungal
infestation and
disease

25.105

During the Establishment Period, the Contractor shall regularly, at an interval not
check for any pest, fungal and disease attack insect take all necessary measures to
protect and/or treat the Site (including existing vegetation, preserved trees and all
planting works) from and all necessary control measures to eradicate pests, fungi and
disease from the infected and / or infested plants. The precautionary, preventive and
control (inclusive of treatment and eradication) measures shall be carried out in
accordance with Clauses 25.25.1(b), 25.25.1(c)(i) to (v) and 25.25.1(d)(i) to (iii) and
25.25.1(e).

Indoor plants
cleaning

25.106

Clean the leaves of all indoor plants at least once a month, and apply fertilizer.

Artificial plants
upkeep

25.107

Maintain artificial plants as follows:

(a)

Clean, dust and keep all leaves and other components of the artificial plants in
a tidy condition;

(b)

Replace plant components when they are found to be loose or missing;

(c)

If plants are damaged or broken replace the plants with plants which are as
originally specified;

(d)

Cleaning routine shall be at least once a month for silk trees and bushes, and
once every four months for preserved palms, or whenever as necessary to keep
all plants in clean, tidy condition; and

(e)

Protective
fencing

25.108

Completion of
Establishment
Works except
grass cover

25.109

Compliance
criteria of
grass cover
before the end of
Establishment
Works period

Maintenance schedule as well as method statement on the cleaning of silk

trees, bushes and preserved palms shall be submitted for approval prior to
commencement of Establishment Works period.
Regularly check protective fencing and immediately carry out all necessary repairs to
ensure that the fence is maintained in good condition at all times. Remove, when
instructed by the SO, protective fencing at the end of the Establishment Period.
(a)

(b)

Immediately before the end of the Establishment Works period, check that the
following actions are complete and advise the SO where all these operations
have been carried out:
(i)

All tree and shrub planting shall be free from weeds;

(ii)

All planted and grassed areas shall be free from litter;

(iii)

Top up all mulched areas to give a minimum depth of 50 mm;

(iv)

All replacement planting and patching up of grass shall be completed;

(v)

All stakes and ties shall be adjusted and secured; and

(vi)

All grassed areas shall be cut and the edges trimmed.

Tests shall be carried out to determine the grass cover for turfing, or sprigging,
or hydroseeding. The tests shall be carried out 100 days after grassing, and
within 30 days before the end of Establishment Works period. The grass shall
be cut to a height of 300 mm if necessary over the parts of the area to be tested.
At least one test shall be carried out for every 1,000 m2 of the grassed areas.
Tests shall be carried out at locations which in the opinion of the SO are
representative of the grassed area as a whole. At each test location an
2
approximately square area of 10 m shall be marked. The percentage of bare
2
ground other than rock and other hard material in each 10 m test area shall be
measured. At least 90% of each test area shall be covered with grass. If the
result of any test for grass cover does not comply with the specified

25-64

Section 25 Landscape Work

requirements for grass cover, the defective area shall be re-hydroseeded,

re-sprigged, or re-turfed, or re-seeded, all in accordance with Clauses 25.40 to
25.55, and to the satisfaction of the SO.
SAFETY IN TREE WORK
Hazards in tree
work

25.110

In undertaking tree work, the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect
the people engaged in the work as well as the people and property in the vicinity,
against the associated hazards including but not limited to the following
(a)

(b)

safety of access to the tree site, in particular that on slope or uneven terrain, in
relation to
(i)

Lack of roadside footpath serving as a buffer zone and work station,

(ii)

Adjacent to vehicular access,

(iii)

Obstruction due to railing or fence,

(iv)

Obstruction due to retaining wall,

(v)

Obstruction due to pipe or open drain,

(vi)

Obstruction due to catch pit,

(vii)

Obstruction due to soil nail or beam,

(viii)

Obstruction due to boulders,

(ix)

Obstruction due to large buttress or surface roots,

(x)

Obstruction due to tree stumps,

(xi)

Obstruction due to overhead wire,

(xii)

Obstruction concealed or obscured by groundcover vegetation,

(xiii)

Steep gradient,

(xiv)

Loose or slippery slope surface,

(xv)

Uneven slope surface,

(xvi)

Wet slope surface,

(xvii)

Dense undergrowth, and

(xviii)

Exposure to strong wind;

Hazards in the course of tree work operation

(i)

Unstable or uneven ground surface to stabilize ladder or hydraulic

platform,

(ii)

Cramped space interfering with safe operation of chain saw and other
tools,

(iii)

Poor visibility due to dense branches and foliage,

(iv)

Tool or body in touch with overhead wire,

(v)

Low light level due to shielding by dense tree crown,

(vi)

Treating trees with leaning or curved trunks and limbs,

(vii)

Treating branches that hang above the carriageway,

(viii)

Treating branches that are interlocked with those of neighbor trees,

(ix)

Impact injury due to falling branch or trunk, including deadwood

hanger,

(x)

Workers head or limbs hitting branches,

(xi)

Worker falling from height,

25-65

Section 25 Landscape Work

(c)

Safety
precautions in
tree work

25.111

(xii)

Lightning strike and inclement weather,

(xiii)

Risk of flash flood and overflowing open drain,

(xiv)

Skin contact with inhalation of harmful or allergenic substances,

(xv)

Skin contact with harmful or allergenic plants or organisms or their

products,

(xvi)

Disturbing the nests of biting or stinging insects (especially bees,

hornets, wasps), and

(xvii)

Insect bite or sting (especially bees, hornets, wasps, mosquitoes and

fire ants); and

Personal health condition

(i)

Heat cramp,

(ii)

Heat exhaustion,

(iii)

Heat stroke,

(iv)

Personal health situation that may impair physical fitness and

judgment, and

(v)

Allergic reactions.

The safety precautions referred to in Clause 25.110 shall include but not be limited to
the following
(a)

Development of a structured and comprehensive programme of accident

prevention;

(b)

Inclusion of site-specific risk assessments, method statements, safety rules and

safety procedures on tree work in the Safety Plan and continuous updating of
them to include tailor-made stipulations to suit the site-specific potential
hazards;

(c)

Inclusion of the following in risk assessment and method statements

(d)

(i)

Site and tree conditions,

(ii)

Safe access on slope or uneven terrain,

(iii)

Relevant means of safe access and safe working platform for working
on slope, uneven terrain or at height,

(iv)

Safety precautions in the planning and adjustments to the mode of

operations to abate the potential hazards to the workers and site
personnel as well as people who may get near the work site and the
property in the vicinity,

(v)

Safety precautions in the use of tools and equipment, such as chain

saw and cutting tools with sharp cutters,

(vi)

Hazards of falling objects, in particular falling tree trunks or

branches,

(vii)

Biological hazards, such as insect bites or stings (e.g. bees, hornets,

wasps and fire ants), and exposure to harmful or allergenic fungi,
etc.,

(viii)

Use of lifting appliances for intended lifting activities,

(ix)

Hazards associated with weather, such as hot weather, thunderstorm,

persisting heavy rain, strong wind, etc.,

Before commencement of any tree work every day,

(i)

Check that all safety provisions are in place and in line with the
recommendations included in the updated risk assessments and the

25-66

Section 25 Landscape Work

approved method statements,

(ii)

Check that the tools and equipment needed for all aspects of the tree
work are safe for use as well as serviceable and fit for purpose,

(iii)

Conduct safety briefing by the Safety Supervisor to all workers and

site personnel, which shall include but not be limited to the following
aspects related to the tree work

Work plan,

The whole range of relevant safety rules and procedures and

potential hazards,

The roles of all workers in the safe system of work,

Hazards on different strands of works for different groups of

responsible works for contracts with Site Safety Cycle
requirements,

Main characteristics of the trees that will be worked on with a

bearing on safety,

Requirement of the tree workers to report to the Safety

Supervisor of their health conditions that may have a bearing
on their physical fitness to impair their judgement and
compromise safety standards;

(e)

An ongoing commitment to safety at all levels;

(f)

Teamwork and clear communication amongst all members of the crew;

(g)

Keen awareness of ones own capabilities and limitations as well as the

capabilities and limitations of tools and equipment;

(h)

Engagement of tree workers who have received suitable training and have
adequate experience for carrying out the tree work;

(i)

Engagement of tree workers who have received suitable training and have
adequate experience in aerial rescue, for carrying out work aloft in the trees;

(j)

Engagement of tree workers who have received adequate training for

(i)

Safe use of tools and equipment,

(ii)

Inspecting or testing the tools and equipment carefully before every

task to ensure that they are in good working order and to ascertain
that they are in a state that is safe to use;

(k)

Documentation and verification of the training and experience of the tree

workers by the Safety Supervisor;

(l)

Adequate training and continual updating in relevant knowledge and skills;

(m)

Understanding of the relevant and up-to-date safety regulations and standards;

(n)

Inclusion of tree work as mandatory item in the safety checklist and thus safety
inspections conducted by the Safety Supervisor;

(o)

Inclusion of tree works as mandatory agenda items in the Site Safety and
Environmental Committee meetings for discussion and reporting;

(p)

Clear assignment of duties to every member of the crew;

(q)

Mandatory use of personal protection equipment such as goggles, chainsaw

trousers, safety boot, gloves and helmets;

(r)

Proper choice, use and maintenance of tools and equipment;

(s)

Provision of suitable lifting appliances for intended lifting activities;

(t)

Provision of an effective means of communication to promptly alert outdoor

workers to take shelter in case of inclement weather;
25-67

Section 25 Landscape Work

(u)

Unequivocal demarcation and enforcement of safety zones, into which access

shall be restricted;

(v)

Vigilant of what every team member is doing at all times;

(w)

Vigilant and conscious recognition of potential risks at all times;

(x)

Avoiding tree pruning on humid, windy and rainy days;

(y)

Removing objects attached to the trees which may hinder the tree work;

(z)

Incorporation of safety precautions in every aspect of tree works;

(aa)

Seamless coordination between workers on ground and aloft;

(bb) Deploying adequate manpower to maintain traffic flow;

(cc)

Placing directional/warning signs to divert traffic/pedestrian, with approval

from the authority, if necessary;

(dd) Adoption of the command and response (acknowledgement) system of

communication;
(ee)

Clear and direct transmission of warning signals;

(ff)

Effective plan for safe positioning of partners on the ground and a safe and fast
escape route;

(gg) Stopping the tree work in the event of a tree defect that will comprise the safety
of the worker(s) or the tree being found during the tree work, and reporting the
discovery to the SO immediately;
(hh) Carrying out the tree work at appropriate time where there are specific seasonal
problems of certain speciesso that people and property are adequately
protected;
(ii)

Using hand tools where practicable when working on trees infected with
pathogens that are likely to be transmitted through physical contact, to allow
disinfection to be carried out effectively;

(jj)

Following strictly the manufacturers guidance when disinfecting personal

protective equipment and climbing or rigging equipment of pathogens ;

(kk) Conducting tree work in a manner that avoids or minimizes the creation of new
hazards, including but not be limited to the following
(i)

Avoid creating top-heavy crown in crown lifting,

(ii)

Adopt a system that controls the safe transfer of branches and large
pieces of wood to the ground when pruning or felling trees and
minimize damage from falling branches or large pieces of wood by
removing or shortening the branches in a controlled manner and not
allowing the cut sections to fall freely unless an assessment has
shown that there is no significant risk of damage or injury occurring,

(iii)

Avoid using any part of a preserved tree to redirect a load or as an

anchor.

25-68

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

SECTION 26
GEOTECHNICAL WORKS ON SOIL
AND ROCK SLOPES
PREPARATION WORKS
Inspection
scaffolding

26.01

(a)

Install means of access consisting of scaffolding constructed of sound

bamboo or other materials agreed by the SO to enable the SO and the
staff of the SO to examine slope treatment works. The Contractor shall
not use the scaffolding for carrying his own site operations without the
permission of the SO. The scaffolding shall allow access to within
0.8m of the slope face. Scaffolding members shall provide hand and
foot holds for climbing at centres not exceeding 0.5m vertically and
0.8m horizontally.

(b)

Install a system of safety ropes on the scaffolding. Safety ropes shall

be 12mm diameter and shall have a breaking force of at least 18 kN.
The system of safety ropes shall consist of :
(i)

Vertical ropes at not more than 3m centres horizontally

securely anchored to the crest of the slope, and

(ii)

Horizontal ropes at not more than 3m centres vertically.

Construct the system of safety ropes in such a manner that the ropes
are tied at not more than 3m spacings in both directions to form a net.
(c)

The scaffolding shall conform to the relevant safety requirements in

the Code of Practice for Bamboo Scaffolding Safety and the Code
of Practice for Metal Scaffolding Safety issued by the Labour
Department. The scaffolding structure at every grid shall be
sufficiently strong for safely supporting at least a person and
equipment weighing 120 kg. Construct the scaffolding in such a way
that makes it possible for a person to climb on the outside face of the
grid without having to climb across any over-hanging portion or
member.

(d)

Provide a suitable fall-arresting system approved by the SO at every

area where the slope inspection process may be involved. The fallarresting system shall normally be vertical independent lifelines
securely tied to stout steel pegs, tree trunks or other suitable
anchorages (except the scaffolding members) at a horizontal interval of
maximum 4m. Each lifeline shall be a fibre rope with a minimum
diameter of 15.9 mm complying with the American National Standard,
ANSI A10.14, or other relevant international safety standards.

(e)

Make available to the SO two set of full body safety harnesses with
suitable fall arresters for attaching to the lifelines. All the provided
fall-arresting systems and equipment shall meet the relevant
requirements in the Guidance Notes on Classification and Use of
Safety Belts and their Anchorage System issued by the Labour
Department. In addition, appoint a Competent Person according to the
Guidance Notes to check the provided safety equipment and
anchorage system prior to their being used each time. Appoint a
Competent Person to provide necessary training to every concerned
person to ensure the proper use of the safety equipment.

26-1

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(f)

Allow in the programme sufficient time for the SO to inspect the rock
slope in details, to check the stability, to design rock slope stabilisation
work, and to determine the extent of the works required. The
Contractor shall not be entitled for any claim in respect of the time
required by the SO to inspect design and instruct the rock slope
stabilisation works.

(g)

Where the slope stabilisation works include the removal of rock or

other material, the SO may wish to carry out a reinspection of the area
of the slope from which rock or other material has been removed. If
required, re-erect or repair the inspection scaffolding to allow the
reinspection to take place. As a result of this inspection, the SO may
order to carry out further stabilisation works. Make due allowance in
the programme for the time required to re-erect or repair the inspection
scaffolding and to carry out further works directed by SO. The
Contractor shall not be entitled for any claim in respect of the time
required by the SO to carry out such re-inspection, design and ordering
of such further rock slope stabilisation works.

(h)

Obtain the permission of the SO before inspection scaffolding is

dismantled.

Particular of
access

26.02

Submit particulars of the proposed means of access for slope treatment works,
including access structures and reinstatement, to the SO for approval at least
14 days before the slope treatment works start.

Protection fences
and barriers

26.03

(a)

Construct protection fences and barriers for slope treatment works as

stated in the Contract before slope treatment work starts.

(b)

Repair damage to protection fences and barriers immediately. Obtain

the permission of the SO before protection fences and barriers are
dismantled.

(a)

Clear vegetation and remove existing impermeable surfaces and

topsoil from existing soil slopes before slope treatment works start.

(b)

Trim and scarify surface of slopes before slope treatment works start.
On completion of trimming and scarifying, remove all loose materials
from the surface of slopes by means of water jet coupled to
compressed air for rock slopes and air jet for soil slopes.

(c)

Clean rock faces and joints, and the surface and joints of retaining
walls of moss, vegetation and loose material, immediately before slope
treatment works start, and remove surplus water by an air jet. Divert
water flowing from or across the rock face by relief drains or by other
methods agreed by the SO before the application of impermeable
surfaces.

(d)

Where rock slope works are included in the Contract, allow sufficient
time in the programme for the SO to inspect the rock slope, to check
the stability, to design slope treatment works and to determine the
extent of the works required, taking into account of any specified time
stated in the Contract that the SO may require for the inspection and
design of slope treatment works.

Preparation for
slope treatment
works

Preliminary
stripping of slope

26.04

26.05

Where ordered by the SO, carry out preliminary stripping of topsoil and
existing chunam, sprayed concrete and other impermeable surfaces as a
separate operation for inspection by the SO prior to any further slope
treatment works which may be required. Provide effective temporary
measures to guard against rainfall and surface water damaging exposed
surfaces until the permanent surface protective works are completed.

26-2

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

ROCK SLOPE TREATMENT WORKS

Scaling and
trimming of rock
slopes

26.06

(a)

Carry out scaling and trimming of rock slopes in such a manner that
soil and rock is removed from the slope face without affecting the
stability and integrity of the slope. Take measures to prevent
uncontrolled falls of debris arising from scaling and trimming works.
Remove all material removed or excavated by scaling and trimming
and loose fragments of soil and rock from the slope. Clean rock faces
using a water jet coupled to compressed air after scaling and trimming
is complete.

(b)

Carry out rock scaling only on areas as directed by the SO. Rock
scaling shall include the removal of all loose blocks of any size using
hand tools, or boulders not exceeding 0.2 m3 in volume using powered
mechanical equipment.

Rock splitting

26.07

Carry out rock splitting using percussive hammers, drills, hydraulic splitters,
chemical expanding agents, hand-tools or other methods agreed by the SO.

Removal of
boulders

26.08

Take down boulders which are to be removed from slopes by means of line
drilling, expansive grouts, rock breakers or other methods agreed by the SO.

Sealing and
infilling of rock
joints

26.09

(a)

Seal joints in rock faces with Grade 20/20 concrete, cement mortar or
masonry as stated in the Contract. Bed rock for masonry infilling in
cement mortar. Install relief drains instructed by the SO before rock
joints are sealed or infilled.

(b)

The extent of rock joints and depth of materials in rock joints to be

excavated prior to sealing and infilling shall be as directed by the SO.

(a)

Concrete for buttresses shall be Grade 20/20 unless otherwise stated in

the Contract.

(b)

Drainage which is required behind buttresses shall consist of relief

drains connected to 50mm diameter PVC outlet pipes laid at a gradient
of at least 1 in 50. Fix the PVC pipes securely to the formwork before
concreting starts.

Concrete
buttresses

Fixing protective
mesh for slopes

26.10

26.11

Orient, lace, suspend down and fix protective mesh for slopes onto the slope
face with dowels at intervals not exceeding 3 m in accordance with the details
as shown on the Standard Drawing in Appendix 1. Position the last column
or row of dowels fixing the sides and base of the protective mesh not more
than 300 mm from the respective edges of the mesh. Avoid laps in vertical
mesh sheets as far as possible. Where necessary, laps between vertical sheets
shall be at least 300mm minimum and the lapping sheets shall be laced in the
same way as adjacent vertical sheets as shown on the Standard Drawing in
Appendix 1.
Protective mesh for slopes shall be PVC coated galvanized steel wire woven
into a double twist hexagonal mesh. Each hexagon shall be 80 mm60 mm.
The steel wire shall be at least 2.2 mm diameter and the PVC coating shall be
at least 0.4 mm thick. PVC coating on steel wire shall comply with BS 4102
or equivalent. The colour of PVC coating is to be approved by the SO. Wire
for protective mesh shall comply with BS 1052. Galvanized coating on wires
shall comply with BS EN 10244-2. The tolerance on the opening of mesh
shall comply with BS EN 10223-2. Tying wire for protective mesh shall be
2.2 mm diameter PVC coated galvanized soft annealed steel wire. Bolts for
fastening protective mesh to rock or structure shall be galvanized mild steel
hooks. Hooks, fixing pins, steel plates and washers for fixing the protective
mesh to slope face shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO 1461.

26-3

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

SPRAYED CONCRETE
Glossary of terms

Preparation of
slope surface

Nozzlemen and
equipment for
spraying
concrete

26.12

26.13

26.14

The term sprayed concrete refers to the concrete produced by the projection
of a wetted aggregate/cement mixture onto an area by means of air pressure
applied through a continuously feeding pressure vessel. The following
definitions cover the meaning of certain words and terms commonly used in
this type of work:
(i)

Blow pipe: air jet operated by nozzlemans helper in sprayed concrete

gunning to keep rebound or other loose material out of the work.

(ii)

Ground wire: small gauge high-strength steel wire used to establish

line and grade for sprayed concrete.

(iii)

Nozzle: attachment at end of sprayed concrete material hose from

which material is jetted at high velocity.

(iv)

Nozzleman: workman on sprayed concrete crew who manipulates the

nozzle, controls consistency and makes final disposition of the
material.

(v)

Overspray: the aggregate and cement or wet sprayed concrete carried

by the escaping air perpendicular to the nozzle stream and parallel to
the surface of application, 360 degree around the point of application.
The material is deposited not at the point of application.

(vi)

Rebound: aggregate and cement or wet sprayed concrete which

bounces away from a surface against which sprayed concrete is being
projected.

(vii)

Sand pocket: a porous area low in cement content.

(a)

Remove weak material along joints or seams in slope surfaces to

which sprayed concrete will be applied to a depth equal to the width
of the weak zone. Construct tree rings for all existing trees within
the slope surfaces to which sprayed concrete will be applied in
accordance with Standard Drawing in Appendix 2. The space
between tree ring and tree trunk at ground level shall be at least
200mm. Before sprayed concrete is applied, protect all tree trunks,
tubular railings, utility pipes, structures and other facilities and street
furniture etc. with approved means to prevent from being
contaminated by sprayed concrete particles. The Contractor shall be
responsible for cleaning and making good all contaminated surfaces
to the satisfaction of the SO.

(b)

When the soil surface temperature exceeds 25C or the moisture

content is less than 10%, water the surface to be sprayed using
sprays unless otherwise instructed by the SO. Do not use hoses
without sprays. Carry out spraying of water onto the slope surface
not more than 1 hour before spraying of concrete starts.

(a)

Apply sprayed concrete using the dry process in which water and
admixtures are added at the nozzle. Alternatively, apply sprayed
concrete using the wet process in which wet ready-mixed concrete is
supplied to the nozzle.

(b)

Equipment for the dry-mix process shall be capable of projecting a

mixture of cement, fine and coarse aggregate and water at high
velocity on to the surface of the slope to produce a dense
homogenous cover. The equipment shall be fitted with weightbatching facilities.

26-4

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Trial panel

26.15

(c)

Equipment for the wet-mix process shall be capable of projecting a

mixture of wet ready-mixed concrete at high velocity onto the
surface of the slope to produce a dense homogenous cover.

(d)

Only employ skilled operators experienced in the use of sprayed

concrete. The nozzlemen must have adequate experience of work of
a similar nature to that required in the Contract. Submit details of
the experience of the proposed nozzlemen to the SO for approval at
least 14 days prior to the commencement of spraying.

(a)

Construct a trial panel at least 50mm thick and at least 3m3m for
sprayed concrete on the surface to be treated. Estimate the average
percentage rebound for each trial panel and use it in the calculations
of the cement content of the applied concrete.

(b)

Where required by the SO, construct trial panels for different type of
spraying equipment and different nozzlemen. Make test panel to
establish the suitability of the sprayed concrete mix, spraying
equipment and nozzlemen and test it as stated in Clauses 26.24 to
26.28 in connection with every trial panel.

Fixing
reinforcement

26.16

Fix securely fabric reinforcement for sprayed concrete to the slope by steel
nails or anchor bolts and lay it without sharp bends or creases. Place the
fabric reinforcement centrally in the sprayed concrete and support it clear of
the ground and away from all surface irregularities with adequate number of
cover blocks in accordance with the specified concrete cover. Fix cover
blocks on top of the fabric reinforcement immediately above the cover blocks
on the lower side to assist nozzlemen to ascertain the thickness of sprayed
concrete and cover on top of the fabric reinforcement during spraying. The
minimum cover shall be 30mm. Laps between adjacent sheets of fabric
reinforcement shall be at least 150mm or 40 times the diameter of the lapping
wires whichever is greater.

Weepholes and
expansion joints
in sprayed
concrete

26.17

(a)

Construct 50mm diameter weepholes in accordance with the

following:
(i) On soil surfaces, at 1.5m staggered centres in each direction,
and
(ii) On rock faces, on rock joints and at locations/spacings as
directed by the SO.

Spraying
concrete

26.18

(b)

Extend and construct all weepholes to the full thickness of the

sprayed concrete with an outward inclination of 1 in 10.

(c)

Construct expansion joints on soil slopes in sprayed concrete in line

with the expansion joints of adjacent U-channels, berm slabs and
concrete structures etc. or at 15m intervals maximum without
adjacent U-channels, berm slabs and concrete structures. The lines
of joints between panels shall be straight and continuous and shall
form a regular pattern approved by the SO.

(d)

Construction joints in sprayed concrete shall comply with the

requirements specified in Clause 6.51.

(a)

Measure the surface temperature and moisture content of the soil,

and submit the results to the SO, immediately before sprayed
concrete is applied.

(b)

For the dry-mix process, the aggregates for sprayed concrete shall be
kept dry before mixing. Natural sand shall not be used unless with
the prior agreement of the SO. The water shall be added at the
nozzle at the instant of application. The air and water supply, the rate

26-5

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

of application and all other factors affecting the quality of the work
shall be adjusted to produce dense concrete with no sloughing.
For the wet-mix process, the ready-mixed concrete shall comply with
Clause 6.44 unless otherwise approved by the SO.
For both the dry-mix process and the wet-mix process, rebound
material shall not be reused and shall be removed within 8 hours
after spraying.

Colour pigment
in sprayed
concrete

26.19

(c)

Apply sprayed concrete in layers not exceeding 50mm thick to the

total thickness stated in the Contract. The maximum panel
dimension shall not exceed 15m.

(d)

Apply sprayed concrete perpendicular to the surface to be sprayed,

and do not position the nozzle further than 1.5 metres from the
surface during spraying.

(a)

Where ordered, mix colour pigment approved by the SO thoroughly

with the sprayed concrete mix, and apply a layer of 25mm thick of
the coloured sprayed concrete to form the total thickness stated in
the Contract.

(b)

Submit details of the colour pigments (e.g. specification and colour

samples etc.) and the method statement for the approval of the SO
prior to application. The pigment shall comply with ASTM C979
and the sprayed concrete with pigment shall have the
characterization of light fast, lime proof, weather resistance and
durability like concrete. Colour to be employed shall be directed by
the SO.

Curing sprayed
concrete

26.20

Cure sprayed concrete for at least 4 days after application by one of the
methods as stated in Clause 6.52.

Inspection of
sprayed concrete

26.21

Sound completed areas of sprayed concrete using a wooden mallet. Cores of

75mm diameter shall be taken from the completed area of sprayed concrete at
the rate of 1 no. per every 150m2 of sprayed surface or part thereof at locations
determined by the SO for checking the quality and thickness of the sprayed
concrete as well as cover to reinforcement. Whenever any defect is found, carry
out further investigation to locate the extent of the defect. Areas which in the
opinion of the SO are substandard or hollow shall be removed and resprayed at
the Contractors own expense. The Contractor shall be responsible to patch up
the core holes with cement mortar of colour matched with the adjacent surfaces.

Submission of
particulars

26.22

(a)

Submit the following particulars of the proposed materials and

methods of construction to the SO:
(i)

Type and performance of mixing and spraying plant,

(ii)

Details of water sprays and associated pumps for surface

spraying,

(iii)

Method of curing,

(iv)

Details of trial panels and test panels,

(v)

Methods of measuring surface temperature and moisture

content of the soil,

(vi)

Methods of achieving the specified thickness of sprayed

concrete and the specified cover to reinforcement and methods
of measuring the thickness and cover after spraying,

(vii)

Method of fixing of reinforcement,

26-6

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(viii)

Details of materials and mix design,

(ix)

Details of dry mix process and/or wet mix process for applying
sprayed concrete,
Name and details of the experience of the nozzlemen who will
be employed on the Works,

(x)

(b)

(xi)

Details of working platform,

(xii)

Method of forming expansion joints, and

(xiii)

Sequence of spraying on sloping surfaces.

Submit the particulars to the SO for approval at least 14 days before

sprayed concrete is used.

Records of
sprayed concrete

26.23

Keep records of sprayed concrete operations on the Site, and submit them daily
to the SO. The records shall contain details of the quantities of all materials
used at each location.

Test panels

26.24

(a)

Determine the strength of sprayed concrete from concrete cores cut

from a test panel constructed at the same time as sprayed concrete is
applied.

(b)

Construct one test panel for each application in a day or as directed by

the SO.

(c)

The test panel shall be 250mm thick and shall be at least 1m1m. The
mould shall be securely fixed in position at the same height and
inclination as the surface being sprayed. Construct the panel by
spraying concrete into the mould at the same time as the concrete to be
tested is applied. Cure the test panel by the same method as the
sprayed concrete.

(a)

Provide three concrete cores from each test panel. Do not take cores
within 125mm from the edges of the panel.

(b)

Concrete cores shall be 100mm diameter and shall be the full depth of
the test panel.

(c)

The method of taking concrete cores shall be in accordance with CS1.

(a)

Test each concrete cores to determine the compressive strength.

(b)

The method of preparing and testing the cores to determine the

compressive strength shall be in accordance with CS1. Test three
concrete cores at 28 days.

Concrete cores
from test panels

Testing of
concrete cores

26.25

26.26

Compliance
criteria

26.27

The results of tests for compressive strength of concrete cores shall be

interpreted in accordance with CS1. Adjustment to the measured strength in
respect of the age of the core when tested shall not be made unless permitted by
the SO. The minimum compressive strength of concrete cores, converted to
estimated in-situ cube strength in accordance with CS1, shall be 20 MPa at 28
days.

Non-compliance

26.28

If the result of any test for compressive strength from sprayed concrete does not
comply with the specified requirements for the property, submit particulars of
proposed changes to the materials, mix design, methods of production or
methods of construction to the SO. Further trial mixes shall be made, and
further trial panels shall be constructed unless otherwise permitted by the SO.

26-7

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

ROCK DOWELS
Rock dowels

26.29

Rock dowels shall comply with CS2 and shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO
1461. Rock dowels shall have non-corrodible centralizers capable of ensuring
an even annulus of grout around the steel bar to the approval of the SO. A
typical layout of rock dowels is as shown in Appendix 3.

Grout for rock

dowels

26.30

(a)

Grout for rock dowels shall be as stated in Clauses 26.47-26.57.

Drilling and
preparation of
rock dowel holes

26.31

(a)

The drilling of rock dowels shall be as stated in Clause 26.58.

(b)

The diameter of the hole shall be at least:

(i)

20mm larger than the diameter of the rock dowel bar, or

(ii)

20mm larger than the outer diameter of the connectors, if used,

or

(iii)

50mm,

whichever is the largest.

Grouting for
rock dowels

Records of rock
dowels

26.32

26.33

(c)

Prior to installation of rock dowels, flush the hole with clear water until
the return runs clear. On completion of flushing, use compressed air to
blow out any standing water from the hole.

(a)

Grouting for rock dowels shall be as stated in Clauses 26.47-26.57,

except as in (b) and (c) of this Clause.

(b)

Rock dowels shall be grouted over the complete length of the drillhole in
which the dowel is installed. Centralizers shall be fitted to rock dowels
before grouting to ensure an even annulus of grout. No jacking or
hammering of the dowels shall be carried out during the whole process
of insertion of dowels into drillholes. Rock dowels shall be grouted
immediately after insertion into the drillholes, and shall be over their
whole length in one single operation. Grout shall be introduced at the
lower end of drillholes with downward inclinations, and displace all air
and water through the top of the drillhole.

(c)

If considered necessary by the SO, the drillhole shall be grouted as in (b)

above, but with the rock dowels to be pushed into the hole only after it
has been completely filled with the grout and also when no grout leakage
can be observed.

Keep records of installation of rock dowels on the Site, and submit a copy to
the SO within 7 days after each installation operation. The records shall
contain details of the location, length, inclination and level of each rock dowel
installed.
SOIL NAILS

Material

26.34

(a)

Soil nail bars shall be of high yield deformed bars and comply with CS2.
All steel components for soil nails shall be galvanized to BS EN ISO
1461.

(b)

Steel reinforcement for soil nail heads shall be Grade 500B ribbed steel
reinforcing bars to CS2.

(c)

Nuts shall be of Grade 4 steel and comply with BS 4190.

(d)

Reinforcement connectors shall comply with Clause 6.24.

26-8

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(e)

Bearing plates shall be of Grade S275 steel plate and comply with BS
EN 10025. Steel plates for pull-out and performance tests shall be
square with length not less than 300mm and ratio of length to thickness
not larger than 10. Holes in steel plates for soil nail heads shall be
drilled perpendicular to the face of the steel plate and centre of the hole
shall be at a position of within 2mm from the centroid of the plate. The
clearance between the steel bar and the hole of the steel plate shall not be
more than 2mm.

(f)

Concrete for soil nail heads shall be grade 30/20 or 30 MPa sprayed
concrete and shall comply with Clauses 26.47-57 and Clauses 26.12-28
respectively.

(g)

Soil nails shall have non-corrodible centralizers capable of ensuring an

even annulus of grout around the steel bar. The nominal diameter of the
centralizers shall not differ from the specified diameter of the drillhole by
more than 10 mm. Wires and ties for fixing and anchoring packers,
centralizers and grout pipes etc. shall be made of non-corrodible
materials. Determine the spacing of the centralizers and the suitability of
the method of fixing the centralizers, grout pipes and corrugated
sheathing where required by carrying out trials on site until no damage,
deformation and displacement of the centralizers, grout pipes and
corrugated sheathing are observed on completion of assembling all
components, during inserting and withdrawing the soil nails. Once
approval is given, no change to the type, method and arrangement of
fixing of the centralizers, grout pipe and corrugated sheathing shall be
made without the prior approval of the SO.

(h)

For soil nails using threaded type reinforcement connectors but without
galvanized coating on either the threads inside the connectors or the
threads at the ends of reinforcement bars, use heat-shrinkable sleeve of a
proprietary type as approved by the SO as an alternative to galvanization
as a corrosion protection measure to the connections. Clean thoroughly
any rust on the threads of reinforcement bars and connectors before
being connected together.

(i)

A typical layout and design of soil nails is as shown in Appendix 4.

Galvanized
coating

26.35

All steel components for soil nails shall be hot dip galvanized in BS EN ISO
1461.

Grout for soil

nails

26.36

Grout for soil nails shall comply with Clauses 26.47-26.57 except that the water
cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45 and PFA shall not be used unless agreed by
the SO.

Drilling and
preparation of
soil nail holes

26.37

(a)

The drilling and preparation of soil nail holes shall be as stated in

Clause 26.58.

(b)

The minimum hole diameter shall be 100mm.

(c)

For installation of soil nails on masonry walls, ensure that the masonry
wall is not to be damaged during the whole process of soil nail
installation operation, and submit the proposal to the SO for approval
before carrying out such work.

(d)

Clear drillholes of all debris and standing water immediately before

grouting. Before the soil nails are installed, furnish the SO with all
necessary equipment and assistance to check the inclination, bearing,
cleanliness and length of all drillholes.

(a)

Submit the following particulars of materials and methods of

construction for soil nails to the SO for approval at least 28 days before
start of pull-out test :-

Submission on
soil nails

26.38

26-9

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(b)

Pull-out test

26.39

(i)

Details and samples of soil nail bars, coupling sleeves, nuts,

washers, plates, connectors, centralizers, grout pipes,
corrugated sheathing, and packers for isolating the bond
length,

(ii)

Details of galvanizer to be employed for galvanizing the steel

components,

(iii)

Details of working platform,

(iv)

Method of drilling and details of drilling equipment,

(v)

Method of grouting and details of grouting equipment,

(vi)

Details of equipment for testing soil nails, including test and

calibration certificates,

(vii)

Details of testing assembly including details of datum for

deformation measurement and bearing pad,

(viii)

Details of heat-shrinkable sleeve for protecting the

connections between reinforcement bars if galvanized coating
to either the threads inside connectors or at the ends of
reinforcement bars is not applied, together with details of the
heat application equipment for shrinking the sleeves, and

(ix)

Method of repairing damaged heat shrinkable sleeves during

heat application or other installation process of soil nails.

Test and calibrate all equipment for testing soil nails by approved
laboratories not more than 3 months prior to the date of carrying out the
tests. Submit test and calibration certificates to the SO at least 7 days
before the test.

Install and test soil nails for pull-out tests prior to the installation of permanent
soil nails. The number of pull-out tests shall be as shown on the drawings or as
instructed by the SO. Soil nails subjected to pull-out tests shall not form part of
the permanent works, and their locations shall be indicated on site. The testing
arrangement shall be as shown in Sheet 2 of Appendix 5, and further details of
the testing arrangement including the set-up and support for the testing
apparatus shall be submitted for the SOs approval. The apparatus for
measuring loads and deformations shall have an accuracy of 2 kN and 0.05 mm
respectively. The apparatus for measuring deformation shall be capable of
measuring a displacement of up to 50mm. The apparatus shall be tested and
calibrated by approved laboratories not more than 6 months prior to the date of
carrying out the tests. Submit test and calibration certificates to the SO at least
one week before the test. Set up the loading apparatus in such a way that no
loading, other than the pull-out load, acts on the steel bar at the nail head. The
reaction of the pull-out load from the loading apparatus shall act on a
sufficiently sized rigid bearing plate placed against a temporary cut face at
normal to the alignment of the steel bar to ensure adequate load spreading and
to avoid eccentric loading. Position monitoring instruments carefully, and
support them independently to record the extension of the soil nail steel bar and
any movement of the steel bearing plate. The following procedure shall be
adopted:
(a)

Soil nail shall be grouted over the length as specified in the drawings
or as directed by the SO. Isolate the length to be grouted by means of
an approved packer that can prevent grout from leaking through to the
free-length section during grouting and that can ensure that the
proposed bonded section is effectively grouted to the required length
as shown in the drawings. The size of the packer shall be compatible
with the diameter of the drillhole. The entire free length of the steel

26-10

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

bar shall be properly debonded or capped to ensure that the test load
can be directly transferred to the bonded zone in case of grout leak
through the packer. Do not carry out the pull-out test until the grout
has reached a cube strength of 21 MPa.

Submission on
pull-out test
record

Permanent soil
nail installation
and grouting

26.40

26.41

(b)

The maximum test load shall be either 90% of the yield load of the
steel bar of the test soil nail (Tp) or the ultimate soil/grout bond load
(Tult)unless directed otherwise by the SO.

(c)

Load the test nail in stages: from the initial load (Ta) via two
intermediate test loads (TDL1 and TDL2) to the maximum test load. TDL1
and TDL2 are the loads that result in the bonded zone tested to the
design working bond strength and 2 times the working bond strength
respectively. An initial load (Ta) equal to 5% of Tp or TDL1, whichever
is smaller shall be applied. All loadings including Ta, TDL1, TDL2 and
Tp shall be specified in the drawings or as directed by the SO.

(d)

During the first two loading cycles, maintain the intermediate loads,
TDL1 and TDL2 for 60 minutes for deformation measurement. After the
measurement has been completed, the load shall be reduced to Ta and
the residual deformation shall be recorded. In the last cycle, the test
load shall be increased gradually from Ta straight to maximum test
load and then maintained for deformation measurement. The
measurement at each of the cycles shall be taken at time intervals of 1,
3, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 and 60 minutes. The test nail shall be
considered to be able to sustain the test load if the difference of nail
movements at 6 and 60 minutes does not exceed 2mm or 0.1% of the
grouted length of the test nail. In this case, the test shall proceed to the
next loading cycle or be terminated if the test nail is subject to Tp. If
the deformation in the last 10 minutes is larger than 0.05mm, the load
shall be held longer as directed by the SO.

(e)

If the nail fails to sustain the test load TDL1, TDL2 or Tp, terminate the
test and record the nail movement against residual load with time. The
measurements shall be taken at time intervals of 1, 3, 6, 10 and every
10 minutes thereafter over a period for at least two hours. Where
required the measurements shall be continued and at intervals as
directed by the SO.

(f)

Throughout the test, the soil nail movement as well as the movement of
the bearing plate versus the applied load shall be measured, recorded
and plotted on a graph along with all other relevant information in the
format as shown respectively in sheet 2 and 3 of Appendix 5, unless
otherwise approved by the SO.

(g)

Where required, pull out the whole soil nail from the drillhole for the
SOs inspection. The drillhole so left shall then be filled by grouting.
Where the steel bar remains in-situ after the pull-out test, the bar shall
be cut-off flush with the finished ground and the remaining part of the
drillhole grouted.

(a)

Provide drilling records of holes selected for pull-out tests to the SO

within 24 hours after drilling.

(b)

Submit results of pull-out tests to the SO within 3 days of completion

of the test.

(a)

During the whole process of soil nail installation, do not carry out
jacking or hammering of the soil nail bars. Soil nails shall be grouted
immediately over their whole length in one single operation after
insertion into the drillholes. Soil nails which are not immediately
grouted after insertion and are left overnight in the drillhole shall be
withdrawn from the drillhole and the drillhole shall be checked for

26-11

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

cleanliness before re-insertion.

Performance test

26.42

(b)

Secure soil nails in position by non-corrodible centralizers to ensure an

even annulus of grouting to be applied around the steel bar.

(c)

Wires and ties for fixing and anchoring packers, centralizers and grout
pipes etc. shall be made of non-corrodible materials. The method of
fixing and spacing of the centralizers shall be determined by carrying
out trials on site until no deformation of the centralizers is observed on
completion of assembling all components forming the soil nails. Once
approval is given, no change to the type, method of fixing and spacing
of the centralizers shall be made without the prior consent of the SO.

(d)

Grouting for soil nail holes shall be as stated in Clauses 26.47-26.57,

except as stated in (a), (b) and (c) above.

Carry out performance tests on selected permanent soil nails as directed by the
SO. Each group of soil nails of the same type and those grouted in one day
shall be tested. The number of performance tests to be carried out shall be 6%
of the total number of permanent soil nails (in any case at least one) in the
group. The apparatus for measuring loads and deformation shall have an
accuracy of + 2 kN and + 0.05 mm respectively. Test and calibrate the
apparatus by approved laboratories not more than 3 months prior to the date of
carrying out of the tests. The following procedure for performance tests shall
be adopted:
(a)

Do not carry out the performance test until the grout has reached a
cube strength of 21 MPa.

(b)

The test load (Tp) shall be (1.0 + designed minimum factor of safety
against pullout failure at soil-grout interface)/2 times the working load
required, which shall not be greater than 80% of the yield stress of the
steel bar forming the soil nail.

(c)

Apply an initial load (Ta) equal to 20% of Tp.

(d)

Then load the soil nail up to Tp as specified in GS Clause 26.42(b) and

maintain the loading for 20 minutes. Take measurements of the
deformation with the load held constant at time interval of 1, 2, 3, 5, 6,
10, and 20 minutes. If the nail deformation between 1 minute and 10
minutes exceeds 1 mm or the deformation in the last 10 minutes
exceeds 0.05mm, hold the maximum test load Tp for an additional 40
minutes and record deformations at 30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes. If the
deformation in the last 10 minutes exceeds 0.05mm, the load shall be
held longer as directed by the SO.

(e)

Reduce the load to Ta and the extension recorded. Then unload the
soil nail as well as that of the bearing plate.

(f)

Throughout the test, the deformation of the soil nail as well as that of
the bearing plate versus the applied load shall be measured and
recorded in a format as shown on Sheet 4 of Appendix 5, unless
otherwise approved by the SO. Submit the results to the SO within 3
days after completion of the test.

(g)

A soil nail shall be considered as failed if,

(i)

It is pulled out before or after the maximum allowable test load

Tp as specified in GS Clause 26.42(b) is reached, or

(ii)

The nail deformation between 6 minutes and 60 minutes at the

maximum allowable test load Tp exceeds 2 mm, or

26-12

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(iii)

The soil nail head movement has exceeded

e f in which

ef = Tp L/(EA) + 5mm
where

Tp

Test load in performance test as specified in GS

Clause 26.42(b)

Total length of soil nail

Cross sectional area of steel bar

Young's modulus of steel bar

Report the failure to the SO immediately.

(h)

For any one failure of performance test, select two additional soil nails
from the group and carry out further performance tests. If either one of
these 2 additional soil nails also fails to reach the test load specified in
Clause 26.42(b) above, the particular group of soil nails shall be
considered as not complying with the specified requirements.

Submission on
performance test
record

26.43

Submit results of performance tests to the SO within 3 days of completion of the

test.

Non-compliance

26.44

Submit remedial proposal for replacement soil nail installation for those group
of soil nails which have failed the performance test.

Soil nail heads

26.45

Construct soil nail heads in accordance with the details as shown on the
Standard Drawings in Appendix 4 as specified.

Records of soil
nails

26.46

Keep records of installation of soil nails, and submit a copy to the SO within 7
days after each installation operation. The general soil nail data, drilling and
grouting records, pull out test record tests and plottings and performance test
records shall be recorded and presented in a format as shown in Sheets 1 to 4 of
Appendix 5, unless otherwise approved by the SO.
GROUTING FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

Grout material

26.47

(a)

Cement grout for the drillholes shall consist of cement, sand and water.
Obtain prior approval from the SO if admixtures are to be used.

(b)

Sand for grout shall be clean dry crushed natural stone complying with
BS 1199 and BS 1200, and shall have a particle size distribution such
that 100% passes a 2 mm BS test sieve and not more than 30% passes a
0.2 mm BS test sieve. Natural sand shall not be used unless with the prior
agreement of the SO.

(c)

Water for grout shall be clean fresh water having a temperature not
exceeding 30C or less than 5C.

(d)

Cement grout shall have a minimum cube strength of 30 MPa at 28 days.

The water cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45.

(e)

The amount of bleeding of grout shall not exceed 0.5% by volume 3

hours after mixing or 1.0% maximum when measured at 23 + 1.7C in a
covered glass or metal cylinder of 100 mm internal diameter and with a
grout depth of approximately 100 mm. In addition, the water shall be
reabsorbed by the grout within 24 hours.

26-13

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Mixing grout

Pressure
grouting

Loss or leakage
of grout

Standpipes and
capping

26.48

26.49

26.50

26.51

(f)

The flow cone efflux time of grout shall not be less than 15 seconds.

(a)

Mix grout material by weight batching. The mix proportions may be

adjusted if approved by the SO depending on the results of the trial
grouting, water tests in the hole or the results of previously grouted holes.

(b)

The time during which the grout is mixed in high speed mixers shall be
suitable for the type of mixer used. Grout shall be continuously agitated
in a holding tank after mixing and shall be screened before being
circulated in the grout lines. Circulate mixed grout continuously in such
a manner that grout which is not taken in a hole can be returned to the
holding tank.

(c)

Grout to which a retarding agent has not been added, and which is not
used within 30 minutes after mixing, shall not be used for grouting.

(a)

Unless otherwise permitted by the SO, holes in rock should be grouted in

grouting stages not exceeding 3 m. Grouting may be carried out in either
an upstage or a downstage sequence.

(b)

Ground other than rock shall be grouted in such a manner that grout can
be injected at various points along the grout hole in a multi-stage
operation. The grouting method shall employ perforated pipes with
rubber sleeve valves unless otherwise permitted by the SO.

(c)

Grouting pressures shall initially be 100 kPa per 4 metres depth of hole
and shall not exceed the overburden pressure unless permitted by the SO.

(d)

Holes shall be grouted in a continuous operation at the grouting stages

and pressures as approved. Unless otherwise permitted by the SO,
grouting shall be carried out by injecting the grout under pressure into
each grouting stage of the hole until the grouting stage refuses to take
further grout.

(e)

If in the opinion of the SO grouting of any hole or grouting stage has not
been completed due to excessive grout take, low pressures, excessive
leakage or other causes, the hole shall be redrilled or flushed out with
water and re-injected with grout.

(a)

If during the grouting of any drill hole, grout is found to flow from
adjacent grout holes in quantities which in the opinion of the SO are
sufficient to interfere seriously with the grouting operation or to cause
appreciable loss of grout, cap the holes temporarily. If in the opinion of
the SO capping is not essential, leave ungrouted holes open to allow air
and water to escape.

(b)

If during the grouting of any hole grout is found to flow from joints in the
geological formation at the Site or any other location, the leaks shall be
plugged or caulked in a manner agreed by the SO.

(c)

Inform the SO immediately, if during the grouting of any hole the grout
take increases suddenly by a significant amount.

(a)

Unless otherwise permitted by the SO, grout holes shall be capped after
drilling and before grouting. Capping shall be by a suitably sealed grout
connection, standpipe, packer or other methods agreed by the SO. The
cap shall seal the hole to prevent contamination or clogging of the hole
until grouting operations start.

(b)

Install standpipes, where required, in holes after drilling. Seal the pipe
into the hole using cement grout consisting of OPC and water in the
proportions 1:1 by volume.

26-14

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Submission on
record of
grouting

Requirement for
tests

26.52

26.53

(c)

Standpipes for grouting shall be standard black metal pipe complying

with BS 1387.

(d)

With permission from the SO, non-metallic grout pipe may be used for
grouting rock dowels, rock bolts and soil nails when pressure grouting is
not normally required.

Submit a record of grouting for each hole to the SO within 24 hours after
completion of grouting of the hole. The record shall contain the following
details:
(i)

Hole location and reference number,

(ii)

Depth of hole,

(iii)

Collar level and hole inclination,

(iv)

Type of grout and grout mix proportions,

(v)

Volume of grout injected,

(vi)

Grouting stage numbers and lengths,

(vii)

Grouting pressures,

(viii)

Details of grout injections,

(ix)

Times and details of any interruptions, leakages and equipment

malfunctions.

Carry out the following tests for each batch of grout upon instruction from the
SO:
(i)

Grout-flow cone efflux time

(ii)

Crushing strength

(iii)

Bleeding of grout

A batch of grout for geotechnical works is any quantity of grout used for
grouting geotechnical works in one continuous operation in one day.
Grout flow cone
efflux time

26.54

Provide one sample of grout from each batch of grout to determine the flow
cone efflux time. The method of testing shall be in accordance with ASTM
C939-87.

Crushing
strength of grout

26.55

(a)

Provide one sample of grout from each batch of grout to determine the
crushing strength of the grout. Provide samples not more than one hour
after the grout has been mixed, and protect them from moisture content
changes before test cubes are made.

(b)

Make nine 100 mm test cubes from each sample of grout taken as stated
in Clause 26.54. Three test cubes shall be tested to determine the
crushing strength at 3 days, three test cubes shall be tested to determine
the crushing strength at 7 days, and three test cubes shall be tested to
determine the crushing strength at 28 days.

(c)

The method of making, curing and testing the test cubes shall be as stated
CS 1.

(a)

Complete bleeding test immediately prior to each application of grout for

geotechnical works in a day or as directed by the SO. One sample of
grout shall be provided from each batch of grout to determine the amount

Bleeding of grout

26.56

26-15

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

of bleeding of the grout.

Non-compliance

26.57

(b)

Test grout for geotechnical works for bleeding in accordance with

ASTM C940-98a.

(c)

Provide samples not more than 30 minutes after the grout has been
mixed, and protect them from moisture content changes before the tests
for amount of bleeding are carried out.

(d)

Each sample of grout taken as stated in (a) and (b) above shall be divided
into three specimens. Each specimen shall be tested to determine the
amount of bleeding.

(e)

Place a portion of each specimen in a covered cylinder with a diameter of

100 + 10 mm, to a depth of 100 + 5 mm and the amount of bleeding
measured by a scale fixed to the outside of the cylinder.

If the result of any test for grout does not comply with the specified
requirements as stipulated in Clause 26.47, submit particulars of proposed
changes to the materials, grout mix or methods of production to the SO. Further
grouting trials shall be carried out unless otherwise permitted by the SO.
DRILLING OF HOLES FOR GEOTECHNICAL WORKS

Drilling and
casings

26.58

(a)

Carry out drilling for holes using rotary or percussive-rotary drill with
air or water as the flushing medium. Water flush shall not be allowed
in case of soil nail holes unless otherwise permitted by the SO. The
set-up of drilling plant and ancillary equipment shall be in such a
manner that water, dust, fumes and noise generated in the course of
drilling and grouting operation shall be sufficiently diverted,
controlled, suppressed and muffled.

(b)

Use casings to prevent collapsing of the drillhole and to permit

unobstructed insertion of the bar or grout pipe, unless otherwise
permitted by the SO. Remove these casings immediately before or
simultaneously with the grouting in such a manner that the grout hole
will not collapse and the injection of grout will not be hindered.

(c)

Reflush drillholes which have been drilled more than one day before
grouting of the hole starts with compressed air immediately before
grouting commences.

(d)

(e)

The permitted deviation of drillholes shall be + 2 to the vertical and

horizontal alignment as specified by the SO. The cover to the lower
end of the bar shall be at least 50 mm.
Do not carry out drilling within a 15 metres radius zone of any fresh
grouted soil nail or rock dowel completed within the last 24 hours.

DRAINAGE AND EROSION CONTROL

Relief drains

26.59

(a)

Relief drains shall be of Netlon 20-100FC or 30-200FC type as

specified in the Contract or alternative products having equivalent
functions or performance approved by the SO. PVC flanges for
connecting relief drains to outlet pipes shall be as shown on the
Standard Drawing in Appendix 6.

(b)

Submit the following particulars of the proposed materials and

methods of construction for relief drains to the SO :(i)

Details of relief drains and outlets, and

(ii)

Method of fixing relief drains to the slope face.

26-16

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Granular filter

26.60

(c)

Submit the particulars to the SO for approval at least 14 days before

fixing of relief drains starts.

(d)

Submit samples to the SO for approval of the source and type of each
material at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted.

(e)

Construct a trial length of relief drains of at least 2 m.

(f)

Fix relief drains in position before surface protection or remedial

measures are applied. Carry out fixing in a manner which will not
affect the serviceability of the relief drains or outlets. Discharge
water collected in relief drains to outlets agreed by the SO.

(a)

Granular filter shall consist of durable, inert, natural material free

from clay, organic material and other impurities. Design granular
filter materials in accordance with the design criteria stated in GEO
Publication 1/93 and current amendments.

(b)

Submit the following particulars of the proposed materials and

methods of construction for granular filters to the SO:
(i)

Whether granular filter material is to be supplied ready mixed

or is to be mixed on the Site,

(ii)

Source of supply, including name of supplier of ready mixed

material,

(iii)

Quantity of each constituent if the material is to be mixed on

the Site,

(iv)

Constructional plant and methods of mixing for material

mixed on the Site,

(v)

Method of storage and location of storage areas on the Site,

(vi)

Methods of deposition and compaction of material,

(vii)

Results of three tests for particle size distribution of the fill

material against which the granular filter is to be placed, and

(viii) Details of filter design including calculations and grading

envelopes.
(c)

Submit the particulars to the SO for approval at least 14 days before

deposition of granular filter material starts.

(d)

Submit samples to the SO for approval of the source and type of each
material at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted.

(e)

Do not handle or store granular filter material in a manner which will

result in mixing of the different types and sizes or in segregation,
contamination, deterioration or erosion of the material.

(f)

Place stockpiles of granular filter material on well-drained, prepared

areas, and separate them by dividing walls of sufficient height to keep
the different materials separate.

(g)

Mix thoroughly granular filter material by the method approved by

the SO, and remix material which has been stockpiled before
deposition.

(h)

Compact granular filter materials in accordance with the requirements

for rock fill materials as stated in Clause 3.20.

26-17

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(i)

Deposit granular filter material in a manner which will not result in

segregation or contamination of the material.

(j)

Deposit granular filter material in such a manner that a continuous

free draining zone is formed. Clean and scarify the surface of each
layer before the next layer is deposited unless otherwise permitted by
the SO.

(k)

A batch of granular filter material is any quantity of granular filter

material of the same type and grading delivered to the Site at any one
time.

(l)

(i)

Provide one sample of granular filter material from each

500m3 or part thereof of the material delivered to the Site.

(ii)

Unless otherwise permitted by the SO, provide one sample of

granular material from each 500m3 or part thereof of granular
filter material which has been deposited and compacted.

(iii)

The size of each sample taken as stated in Clause 26.60(l)(i)

shall be 10 kg. The method of sampling shall be in
accordance with CS3.

(iv)

Samples taken as stated in Clause 26.60(l)(ii) shall consist of

material excavated from the compacted layer to form a flat
bottomed, steep sided hole of approximately 0.13 m2 to the
complete depth of the compacted layer. A template shall be
used to fix the edges of the hole if necessary. The sides and
bottom of the hole shall be at least 50mm from other types of
fill material.

(i)

Test each sample of granular filter material to determine the

particle size distribution.

(ii)

The method of testing shall be in accordance with the wet

sieving method stated in Geospec 3, Test Method 8.2.

(i)

If the result of any test for particle size distribution on a

sample of granular filter material taken as stated in Clause
26.60(l)(i) does not comply with the specified requirements
for particle size distribution, provide additional samples from
the same batch and carry out additional tests for particle size
distribution.

(ii)

The batch shall be considered as not complying with the

specified requirements for particle size distribution if the
result of any additional test for particle size distribution does
not comply with the specified requirements for particle size
distribution.

(iii)

If the result of any test for particle size distribution on a

sample of granular filter material taken as stated in Clause
26.60(l)(ii) does not comply with the specified requirements
for particle size distribution, provide additional samples from
the same batch and carry out additional tests for particle size
distribution. The number of additional samples shall be as
stated in Clause 26.60(l)(ii).

(iv)

The batch shall be considered as not complying with the

specified requirements for particle size distribution if the
result of any additional test for particle size distribution does
not comply with the specified requirements for particle size
distribution

(m)

(n)

26-18

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Geotextile filter

26.61

(o)

Typical details of filter blanket for fill slope are as shown in the
Standard Drawing in Appendix 7.

(a)

Geotextile filter shall be a proprietary type approved by the SO and

shall have the properties stated in the Contract.

(b)

Submit the following particulars of the proposed materials and

methods of construction for geotextile filter to the SO:
(i)

Manufacturers name and source of supply,

(ii)

Details of geotextile filter including manufacturers literature,

(iii)

A certificate for the geotextile filter showing manufacturers

name, the date and place of manufacture and showing that the
geotextile filter complies with requirements stated in the
Contract, and including results of tests stated in the Contract,

(iv)

Calculations showing that the geotextile filter complies with

the filtration characteristics stated in the Contract,

(v)

Details of previous uses of the geotextile filter,

(vi)

Details of quantities to be supplied in each delivery,

(c)

Submit the particulars, including certificates, to the SO for approval

at least 28 days before the first delivery of the geotextile filter to the
Site. Certificates shall be submitted for each batch of geotextile filter
delivered to the Site.

(d)

Submit geotextile filter and two pieces of geotextile filter joined in

accordance with the manufacturers recommendations for each type
of joint to the SO for approval of the source and type of each material
at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted.

(e)

Deliver geotextile filter in secure wrappings to ensure that the

geotextile filter is dry and protected from damage, contamination and
exposure to conditions which may adversely affect it.

(f)

Store geotextile filter on a level surface, and keep it in a secure and

dry condition, which will not result in damage to the fabric or in
contamination of the fabric.

(g)

(i)

The total period for which geotextile filter is exposed to

daylight or other sources of ultra-violet radiation during
handling, delivery, storage and installation shall not exceed 7
days.

(ii)

Do not use geotextile filter which has been damaged or

exposed to daylight or other sources of ultra-violet radiation
for longer than the period stated in Clause 26.61(g)(i) in the
permanent work unless permitted by the SO.

(iii)

Carry out repairs to geotextile filter which has been torn or

damaged during installation using a patch of the same material
extending at least 300 mm beyond the edge of the damaged
area. Do not carry out repairs on geotextile filter which has
been damaged during storage or storage before installation.

(i)

Install geotextile filter in such a manner that the individual

yarns, webs or layers of the fabric retain their intended
orientation and relative positions with respect to each another.

(h)

26-19

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Filter drainage
pipe

26.62

(ii)

Install, cut and join geotextile filterin in accordance with the

manufacturers recommendations.

(iii)

Laps in sheets of fabric reinforcement which are not stated in

the Contract to be joined shall be at least 300 mm.

(i)

Do not operate constructional plant and other vehicles on installed

geotextile filter, unless in opinion of the SO it is adequately protected
by a cover of fill material or other means agreed by the SO.

(j)

Keep records of installation of geotextile filter on the Site, and submit

a copy to the SO each day. Records shall contain the following
details :-

(a)

(i)

Identification of structures and sections of work where

geotextile filter is installed,

(ii)

Type of geotextile filter, including identification of batch,

(iii)

Date of first exposure of geotextile filter to ultra-violet

radiation before installation,

(iv)

Type of joint, amount of overlap, method of holding in place

and any repairs to geotextile filter carried out during
installation,

(v)

Date of installation of geotextile filter, and

(vi)

Date of final covering of geotextile filter.

(i)

Filter pipes shall comply with the following:

Precast
Vitrified clay pipes
DI pipes
Steel pipes
Porous concrete pipes
Perforated concrete pipes
Pitch fibre pipes
uPVC pipes
Corrugated polyethylene
tubing

(b)

:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:

BS 5911
BS 65
BS 4772
BS 534
BS 1194
BS 5911
BS 2760
BS 4660 and BS 3506
AASHTO
Designation M252

(ii)

Do not use Class O uPVC pipes.

(iii)

Cut the perforations in perforated pipes clearly, and uniformly

space them along the length and circumstance of the pipe.

(iv)

Join uPVC plastic pipes using couplers.

(i)

Submit the following particulars of the proposed materials

and methods of construction for filter pipes to the SO:
Details of type of pipes, including manufacturers
literature,
A certificate showing the manufacturers name, the date
and place of manufacture and showing that the pipes
comply with the requirements stated in the Contract,
Details of previous installations using similar pipes, and
Method of installation.

(ii)

Submit the particulars to the SO for approval at least 28 days

before installation of the filter pipes starts.

26-20

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Erosion control
mats

26.63

(c)

Submit samples to the SO for approval of the source and type of each
material at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted.

(d)

Store coils of plastic tubing for filter pipes flat.

(a)

Mat for erosion control shall be Enkamat type 7020, Tensar

Mat 18 mm thick or Erolan 20 mm thick and Soil Saver 1 pound
per square yard with a tolerance of plus or minus 5% as specified in
the Contract. Subject to the approval of the SO, use alternative mats
for erosion control. The alternative product for Enkamat type 7020
shall be made of nylon and shall have a minimum thickness of 18 mm
and minimum weight of 0.25 kg/m2. The alternative product for
Tensar Mat shall be made of polyethylene and shall have a
minimum thickness of 18 mm and minimum weight 0.45 kg/m2. The
alternative product for Erolan shall be made of polypropylene and
shall have a minimum thickness of 20 mm and minimum weight of
0.55 kg/m2. The alternative product for Soil Saver shall be made of
heavy woven jute mesh of 1 pound per square yard with a tolerance of
plus or minus 5%. All alternative products must be produced by
proprietary manufacturers and specifically designed for the erosion
control of sloping ground.
(i)

Details of materials,

(ii)

Manufactures literature including recommended sequence of

mats installation and hydroseeding,

(iii)

Method of lapping, fixing and anchorage, and

(iv)

Method of placing and tamping of soft soil into the mats, if

required.

(c)

Submit samples to the SO for approval of the source and type of each
material at the same time as particulars of the material are submitted.

(d)

Clear areas to be applied with mats of all roots, rubbish, debris and
loose soils. All local irregular spots and areas shall be either trimmed
or filled with compacted fill material or compacted soil cement to
provide smooth surfaces.

(e)

Lay and fix mats for erosion control onto sloping ground in
accordance with the manufacturers recommended procedures and in
compliance with the following requirements:
(i)

Anchor the mats along the slope crest and each berm level
with at least 200 mm of mat length embedded into the ground
or underneath the concrete berm slabs. The mats shall also be
embedded at least 200 mm into any adjacent structures to be
constructed. The mats shall be rolled out from top down the
slope surfaces. Provide sufficient anchorage pins at a
maximum spacing of 1 m centre to centre to ensure the mats
are in complete and total contact with the ground at every
place. In areas of irregularities due to exposed rocks or
existing structures, provide additional anchorage pins to
prevent any gap or void forming underneath the mats.
Lapping between mats shall be at least 150mm and shall be
formed with the upslope mat over the downslope mat. Do not
form lapping within 1m of any intersection of two slope
surfaces which have a sharp difference in slope gradient or
strike direction.

(ii)

Where recommended by the manufacturer, place and tamp

26-21

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

soft soil into the mats and completely fill all void within the
mats to form an integral composite structure on completion of
laying and anchoring of the mats.
(iii)

Raking drains

26.64

The sequence of hydroseeding and laying of mats shall be in

accordance with the manufacturers recommended sequence.
Lay the protective materials for hydroseeding on top of the
erosion control mat, if specified.

(a)

Type 0 raking drains shall be unlined raking drains. Drain holes shall
be at least 40 mm diameter.

(b)

Type 1 raking drains shall be single pipe raking drains consisting of a

single perforated pipe with a non-perforated invert.

(c)

Type 2 raking drains shall be single pipe raking drains consisting of a

single perforated pipe with a non-perforated invert and enclosed
within a geotextile filter sheath.

(d)

Type 3 raking drains shall be double pipe raking drains consisting of

an outer permanent pipe and an inner removable pipe enclosed within
a geotextile filter sheath. The outer and inner pipes shall be perforated
pipes with a non-perforated invert.

(f)

Pipes for raking drains shall be perforated pipes with non-perforated

invert as approved by the SO. The portion of openings in the
perforated pipe shall cover between approximately two-thirds 50%
and 70% of the circumference of the pipe. The percentage of
opening areas to overall surface area of the pipe shall not be less
than 14% for 40 mm diameter pipe, nor less than 8% for 65 mm or
above diameter pipe. The pipe material shall have the following
physical properties or having equivalent functions:
(i)

Material: non-metallic

(ii)

Minimum tensile strength:

21,300 kN/m2

(iii)

Minimum compressive strength:

22,000 kN/m2

(iv)

Minimum flexural strength:

6,800 kN/m2

Couplers for filter pipes shall also have non-perforated invert and
shall be of similar strength and durability of the pipe materials. The
lapped length of coupler and each end of the filter pipes shall be at
least 100 mm. The elongation at the pipe connection shall be less
than 5mm under a 45 kg pulling force.
(g)

Geotextile filter sheaths for raking drains shall be formed of nonwoven geotextile filter robust enough to prevent tearing, and shall
have the following physical properties or materials having
equivalent functions or performance as approved by the SO:
(i)

Material : non-metallic

(ii)

Minimum tensile strength:

(iii)

Apparent opening size:

(iv)

Coefficient of permeability under 2 kN/m2 : 5 x 10-3 m/s

(v)

Flow rate at 100 mm head under 2 kN/m2 :

26-22

17 kN/m
140 m

195 L/m2s

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Tying wires for jointing pipes and stitching filter sheath shall be
non-metallic wires of minimum breaking load of 400N or similar
approved.
(h)

(i)

(j)

Installation of raking drains.

(i)

The length of raking drains assembled before installation

shall not exceed 12.5 m. Secure connections between
consecutive pipes in such a manner that the cumulative
longitudinal extension of a 12.5m assembled length of pipe
does not exceed 5mm when pulled by hand.

(ii)

Wrap pipes for Type 2 and Type 3 raking drains in

geotextile filter sheath in the following manner prior to
installation to ensure that the overlap and stitching be
located against the non-perforated invert of the pipe. Place
the pipe onto and along the centre of a strip of geotextile
filter with the non-perforated invert uppermost. Draw the
strip of geotextile filter, which shall be of sufficient width to
allow an overlap of at least 50 mm, around the pipe and
stitched together tightly with non-metallic wires. The
stitching shall be tied off onto the pipe and the fabric bound
every 300 mm to prevent dislocation during installation.
Mark the filter sheath to ensure that the non-perforated
invert is correctly positioned during installation.

(iii)

During delivery and installation of raking drains, care must

be taken to ensure that the pipe and geotextile filter sheath
are not damaged. Submit the method of installing the raking
drains to the SO for approval prior to installation.

(iv)

Before installation of drain pipes, check cleanliness of the

drillholes. Whenever any obstruction encountered inside a
drillhole during pipe insertion, withdraw the pipe and clear
the obstruction before re-insertion.
No jacking or
hammering of pipes shall be carried out during the whole
process of pipe insertion.

Drilling for raking drains

(i)

Do not use drilling lubricants other than clean water or air

for drilling holes for raking drains. Use casings to prevent
collapse of the hole and to permit unobstructed insertion of
the pipes and geotextile filter sheath.

(ii)

Position the drillhole entry point within a tolerance of

+75mm. Deviation in alignment shall not exceed + 2 to the
vertical and horizontal alignment as specified by the SO.
Deviation from straight shall not exceed 20 mm in any 3m
length of drillhole. Maintain a positive gradient throughout
the complete length of the hole, and measure the inclination
of holes by a method agreed by the SO.

(iii)

Temporarily plug drillholes or protect them to prevent entry

of deleterious material after drilling.

Keep records of drillholes for raking drains on the Site, and submit a
drillhole log for each drillhole to the SO before installation of the
raking drain starts. The drillhole log shall contain the following
details:
(i)

Drain reference number,

26-23

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

(ii)

Location, inclination, bearings, diameter and length of hole,

(iii)

Details of drilling progress,

(iv)

Details of water seepage related to drilling progress, and

(v)

Description of the materials encountered in the drillhole

related to drilling progress.

PAINTING TO SPRAYED CONCRETE

Painting to
sprayed concrete

26.65

(a)

Where ordered, paint the sprayed concrete with two coats of waterbased paint for external use approved by the SO. The components of
paint shall not be toxic or hazardous to health.

(b)

Submit details of the paint products (e.g. specification and colour

samples etc.) and method statement for the approval of SO prior to
painting. The colour of the paint shall be Antique to BS 5252F and
of the colour code as directed by the SO.

(c)

Do not store paint and associated materials in a dry weatherproof

store. Maintain the store in a cool, well ventilated condition. Tins of
paint and associated materials shall be labelled to show their intended
use, and shall be protected from exposure to conditions which may
adversely affect the material. Store paint and associated materials in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, and do not use
them after the recommended shelf life has been exceeded.

(e)

Mix paint in accordance with the manufacturers instruction prior to

application. Apply each coat of the paint to the surface using an
airless spray at 12m2/litre or equivalent to obtain a uniform finish or
as recommended by the manufacturer. Allow sufficient time gap
between the application of the first and second coat of paint as
recommended by the manufacturer. Protect each coat of paint from
rain for the first 24 hours after application.

SOIL-CEMENT FILL
Soil-cement

26.66

(a)

Soil-cement shall consist of Portland Cement (PC), sand and inorganic

soil in the proportions 1:3:12 by mass unless otherwise stated. The mix
proportion of soil-cement is 1:3:40 by mass when it is applied to the
top layer (maximum 300 mm thick) or other areas as directed or agreed
by the SO.

(b)

PC shall comply with Clause 6.27.

(c)

Sand shall comply with BS 1199 and BS 1200.

(d)

Inorganic soil shall be free from organic matter and shall contain not
more than 30% of soil particles passing a 63 m BS test sieve.

Mixing soilcement

26.67

Mix thoroughly soil-cement in a concrete mixer; hand-mixing of small

quantities of soil-cement may be permitted by the SO.

Deposition and
compaction of
soil-cement fill

26.68

(a)

Place soil-cement fill in its final position and compact within 30

minutes of the cement being added to the mix.

(b)

Compact soil-cement fill as stated in Clause 3.19 to obtain a relative

compaction of at least 95% throughout.

26-24

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

MAINTENANCE STAIRWAYS
Maintenance
stairways on
slope

26.69

(a)

Typical details of concrete maintenance stairways on slopes up to 40

are as shown in Standard Drawings in Appendix 9.

(b)

Typical details of staircase for slopes steeper than 40 are as shown in

the Standard Drawing in Appendix 9.

AS-BUILT RECORD
Particular
requirements

26.70

Submit as-built topographical survey, site formation layout, details drawings

and design calculation to the SO, and they shall cover the following:
(a)

the extent of man-made slopes, if any (including cut and fill slopes) is
to be marked on the as-built drawings. The legend for cut slopes shall
be different from that of the fill slopes;

(b)

the contour lines shall terminate at the boundaries of the cut/fill slopes
and there shall not be any contour lines within the cut/fill slopes;

(c)

any surface protection such as hydroseeding, sprayed concrete,

chunam, etc. and surface drainage system shall be marked clearly on
the as-built drawings;

(d)

any installation such as soil nails, dowel bars, horizontal drains, etc.
shall also be marked on the as-built drawings. The respective grouting
and testing records shall also be submitted. The elevation of the
respective slopes shall be shown;

(e)

any retaining walls layout and details; and

(f)

any other geotechnical features.

26-25

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

Appendix
Drawings

26-26

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 1

FIXING OF WIRE MESH TO

ROCK FACE

SHEET 1 of 1

ARCHITECTURAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT

SCALE
DATE

26-27

DIAGRAMMATIC
JULY 2015

DRAWING NO.
C2205

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 2

TREE RING
( SHEET 1 OF 2 )

Sheet 1 of 2

ARCHITECTURAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT

SCALE
DATE

26-28

DIAGRAMMATIC
JULY 2015

DRAWING NO.
C2104/1

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 2

TREE RING
( SHEET 2 OF 2 )

Sheet 2 of 2

ARCHITECTURAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT

SCALE
DATE

26-29

DIAGRAMMATIC
JULY 2015

DRAWING NO.
C2104/2

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 3

TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF
ROCK DOWEL

Sheet 1 of 1

ARCHITECTURAL SERVICE DEPARTMENT

SCALE
DATE

26-30

DIAGRAMMATIC
JULY 2015

DRAWING NO.
C2202

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 4

Sheet 1 of 3

26-31

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 4

Sheet 2 of 3

26-32

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 4

Sheet 3 of 3

26-33

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

26-34

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

26-35

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

26-36

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

SO)

26-37

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 6

Sheet 1 of 1

26-38

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 7

Sheet 1 of 1

26-39

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 8

Sheet 1 of 2

26-40

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 8

Sheet 2 of 2

26-41

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 9

Sheet 1 of 4

26-42

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 9

Sheet 2 of 4

26-43

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 9

Sheet 3 of 4

26-44

Section 26 Geotechnical Works on Soil and Rock Slopes

APPENDIX 9

Sheet 4 of 4

26-45

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Abandoned bore holes

24.30

Aluminium

16.12

Abbreviations

1.02

Aluminium alloy

17.07

Abbreviations

16.04

Aluminium finish at structural silicone

16.33

Abutments, etc.

12.48

Aluminium windows and doors

17.33

Acceptance

8.16

Anchorages

7.22

Acceptance of welds

15.58

Anchoring

25.72.4

Access and roads

1.25

Anchors in concrete and masonry

16.17

Accessories

12.74

Anchors in stone

16.15

Accessories

18.165

Angles

12.65

Accessories for profiled aluminium sheets

12.85

Anodic coating to aluminium and testing of same

16.31

Accommodation for building services items

22.25

Anti-mould acrylic emulsion paint

21.10

Accommodation for building services items

22.04

Anti-mould liquid

21.05

Accommodation for workmen

1.30

Anti-mould liquid

21.57

Accuracy

9.34

Applicability

1.01

Accuracy

24.20

Application in general

21.53

Accuracy for wall and ceiling finishes

18.19

Application of bituminous emulsion

12.28

Acoustic doors

13.63

Application of liquid membrane

11.12.02

Acoustic plaster

18.35

Application of sealant and gaskets

16.40

Acoustic spray plaster

18.56

Application of soil binders and dye

25.53(e)

Acoustic tiles

13.22

Applications of specification

1.03

Acoustic tiles

13.45

Applied films

20.01.14

Additional damage

25.91

Applied surface treatments

6.75

Additional requirements in testing

16.64

Approval

1.08

Additional test specimens for epoxy coating tests for

6.25.9

Approval

22.05

each batch

Approval of stone

10.03

Adhesive

12.108

Approval of tiles

12.37

Adhesive

13.29

Approved brands and specialist contractors

18.128

Adhesive

18.113

Approved brands and specialist contractors

18.141

Adhesive

18.136

Approved concrete mix

6.43.5

Adhesive for metal

17.12

Aquatic plants

25.61(a)

Adhesives

18.157

Arboricultural work

25.69(i)

Adjoining properties

1.23

Architraves

13.66

Adjustable and fixed steel louvres and frames

17.37

Arrises

18.52

Admixtures

8.06

Artificial plants

25.66

Admixtures and additives

6.36

Artificial plants upkeep

25.107

Admixtures and additives

18.06

Asbestos abatement plan and method statement

2.45

Advertising

1.14

Asbestos containing materials

2.42

Aeration

25.103

Asbestos removal

2.43

After planting

25.29(d)

As-built Records

2.25

Age of concrete

7.58

Assessment of results

7.63

Aggregate

8.04

Attendance on materials supplied by the Employer

1.44

Aggregate for light-weight screeds

18.71

Attendance on Sub-contractors and Specialists

1.42

Aggregates

6.33

Automatic door operators

14.52

Air and leakage test

18.181

Back coating

18.147

Air entraining agent for light-weight screeds

18.72

Backfilling

5.26

Air monitoring

2.52

Backfilling

25.29(b)

Air Pollution Control

2.14

Backfilling behind retaining walls

3.25

Alginate

25.02(g)

Backing materials

18.146

Alignment of wired glass

20.21

Ballast

25.61(d)

Alteration and resiting

22.21

Ballast in pots

25.62(b)

Alternative protective measures

25.69.3(e)

Bamboo stakes

25.24(b)

Aluminium

12.03

Bamboos

25.34(e)

Aluminium

12.06

Barrier Free Access

14.49

B1

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Batch mixing

8.10

Cambers

6.07

Baths

19.04

Carpet grippers

18.156

Bay sizes for floor and roof screeds

18.79

Carpet tiles

18.153

Bedding

12.43

Cast iron

17.06

Bedding & tooling

20.24

Castings

17.28

Bedding and pointing

13.65

Cavity walling

9.36

Before planting

25.28(c)

Cellulose lacquer

21.39

Bimonthly report

25.69.2.5(h)

Cellulose lacquer

21.67

Bitumen felt

12.08

Cement

6.27

Bitumen primer

12.09

Cement

8.03

Bituminous base and wearing courses

24.06

Cement

9.12

Bituminous emulsion

12.25

Cement

18.01

Bituminous products generally

24.04

Cement and sand finish

18.92

Black bitumastic paint

21.18

Cement based premixed plaster

18.59

Black bitumen coating solution

21.19

Cement based premixed plaster application

18.69

Black bitumen coating solution

21.63

Cement paint

21.12

Black enamel

21.27

Cement paint

21.59

Black enamel

21.64

Cement render

18.45

Blasting

3.15

Cementitious content

6.31

Bleeding of grout

26.56

Ceramic floor tiles and floor quarries

18.103

Blockboard

13.14

Ceramic Wash basins

19.08.01

Boarded or strip flooring

13.47

Certificates of seed

25.40(b)

Bolts

14.87

Certification

14.05

Bolts and nuts

15.39

Certification

2.24

Boltwork

22.53

Certification for fire door

14.06

Boltwork

22.59

Certification of Precautionary Measures

2.30

Boltwork

22.65

Chairs

6.21

Bonding

9.37

Chairs, supports and spaces

6.25.2

Bonding Agent

18.07

Chalkboard paint

21.38

Bonding compound

12.10

Chemical cleaning and sealing of stonework

21.79

Bonding compound

12.16

Chemical resisting paint

21.26

Bottom rail

22.39

Chipping finish

12.57

Bottom rail

22.45

Chloride content

6.45

Boulder placing, large size

25.08(b)

Choice of material

1.52

Boulder placing, small and medium size

25.08(a)

Chromium plating

17.23

Boulders

25.04(a)

Classification

18.143

Brackets

22.37

Cleaner's sinks

19.10

Brass rods and sections

17.08

Cleaning

16.81

Brazing

17.19

Cleaning

18.182

Bricks

9.02

Cleaning

20.33

Brickwork & blockwork reinforcement

9.20

Cleaning "Shanghai" plaster

21.80

British Standards European Standards and Codes of

1.06

Cleaning ducts

7.42

Cleaning existing soil and subsoil

25.05(c)

Practice
Broadcast sowing

25.53(a)

Cleaning glazed and mosaic wall tiling and flooring

21.84

Bubbles

12.109

Cleaning glazed sanitar fittings

21.86

Building in

9.42

Cleaning off

24.24

Building Services and Drainage System

2.27

Cleaning synthetic paint and varnich work

21.85

Bulbs

25.56(a)

Cleaning terrazzo and rubbed granolithic work

21.81

Burning off

4.15

Cleaning thermoplastic, vinyl, cork and similar flooring 21.82

Butt welds

15.54

Cleaning water tanks

21.87

Cable ducts

24.31

Cleanliness

1.60

"Canton" tiles

18.105

Cleanliness

6.10

B2

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Cleanliness

6.16

Concrete cover

6.25

Cleanliness

18.11

Concrete cubes

6.55

Cleanliness

21.44

Concrete curing compound

6.37

Clearing ground

25.05(a)

Concrete flat roof

12.32

Clearing Mikania micrantha

2.41

Concrete floor tiles

18.102

Clearing weeds generally

2.40

Concrete hollow block

9.07

Climbers

25.34(d)

Concrete hollow blocks for slabs

6.67

Close-coupled suits, one piece and independent W.C.s

19.11.01

Concrete roofing tiles

18.106

Closure panels and sills

16.67

Concrete strength and transfer

7.35

Coated glass

20.10

Concrete strength and transfer

7.54

Code of practice

12.60

Condensation gutters

16.58

Codes and standards

1.39.2

Conducting of compliance tests and surveys on site

1.67

Codes and standards

16.05

Conifers

25.32(g)

Cold asphalt

24.22

Connections

19.21

Cold cure epoxy paint

21.16

Construction

1.39.5

Cold-formed hollow sections

15.05

Construction

22.78

Cold-formed open sections and profiled steel sheets

15.04

Construction joints

6.51

Colour coated steel sheets

12.82

Construction Joints

8.14

Colour fastness

18.149

Construction of the system

22.01

Colour mixing of facing bricks

9.30

Contact of aluminium and concrete etc.

17.25

Colour pigment in sprayed concrete

26.19

Contact of dissimilar metals

12.07

Coloured finish

18.96

Contact of dissimilar metals

17.26

Compaction

6.50

Containerized plants

25.27

Compaction

24.16

Containerized root ball

25.73.5

Compaction by method specification

3.20

Containers

25.15

Compaction by performance specification

3.19

Contaminated ground

25.05(d)

Compaction Plant

24.15

Contractors responsibility to record existing trees

25.69.2.1

Compartments

22.71

Contractor's design responsibility

16.06

Compatibility

12.88

Contractor's supply

14.02

Compatibility

12.102

Control action

22.46

Compatibility

14.10

Control of pest and disease for preserved trees

25.69.12

Complete stripping of existing decoration

21.48

Control of pests, fungal infestation and disease

25.25.1

Complete stripping of existing decoration

21.50

Co-ordination of services

1.43

Complete tree protection before any site activity start

25.69.3(h)

Co-ordination with building services installation

18.179

Completion of Establishment Works except grass cover 25.109(a)

Coordination with neighbour

2.15

Compliance criteria

26.27

Copings

16.26

Compliance criteria of grass cover before the end of

25.109(b)

Copper

12.02

Copper

12.05

Establishment Works period

Compliance criteria of Laboratory Mix Trials

6.43.4

Coring tests

5.29

Compliance criteria of Plant Trials

6.43.2

Corms

25.56(b)

Compliance criteria: epoxy coatings to reinforcement

6.25.11

Cornices

18.54

Compliance with standards

1.48

Corrosion Protection

16.37

Composite & honeycomb panels

16.24

Corrugated sheets

12.72

Concealed and exposed flashing

16.27

Cover spacers

6.22

Concealed pipes & ducts

21.76

Creation of contaminations

18.175

Concrete

7.04

Criteria for cyclic test

16.49

Concrete and cementitious surfaces

21.47

Criteria for fasteners

16.48

Concrete blinding

6.70

Criteria for framing members and anchors at glass and

16.47

Concrete blinding

8.20

stone

Concrete Breaker

2.19

Criteria for glass

16.51

Concrete bricks and blocks

9.06

Criteria for glass

20.01.09

Concrete buttresses

26.10

Criteria for honeycomb panels and composite panels

16.68

Concrete cores from test panels

26.25

Criteria for interior trim

16.61

B3

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Criteria for operable window

16.66

Design submission

6.02

Criteria for painted finishes

16.63

Designed mixes

6.42

Criteria for skylights

16.69

Detail drawings

17.44

Criteria for snap-on components

16.62

Deviation from specified tolerances

7.30

Criteria for stone

16.52

Diameter at Breast Height

25.69(c)

Criteria for structural silicone

16.50

Dimension

9.32

Criteria for thermal movement

16.56

Dimensional requirements

18.166

Criteria for track and tie-back

16.53

Dimensions

13.34

Criteria for weather seals

16.54

Dimensions and tolerances of hot-rolled or hot-finished 15.03

Crown cleaning

25.74.6

sections and plates

Crushing strength of grout

26.55

Direct planting in receptor site

25.74

CSF

6.29.1

Disposal of C&D Materials

2.23

Cubicle systems generally

22.77

Dissimilar backgrounds

18.14

Cultivating on slopes

25.47(c)

Distortion control

15.50

Cultivation

25.06

Disused drain

2.35

Cultivation for hydroseeding

25.47(b)

Dividing strip

18.87

Cultivation for turfing and sprigging

25.47(a)

Dividing strip

18.98

Cupboard doors

13.58

Document and test results to be supplied by the

6.25.4

Curing of concrete

6.52

manufacturer

Curing of floor finishes, etc.

18.21

Door

22.51

Curing sprayed concrete

26.20

Door

22.57

Curtain rail

14.112

Door

22.63

Curtain rail

14.120

Door & frames general

13.52

Curtain track

14.111

Door fittings

22.73

Curtain track

14.119

Door fittings

22.79

Curving, straightening, heating, shaping and forming

15.30

Door frame

22.52

Cutting

7.14

Door frame

22.58

Cutting and bending

6.19

Door frame

22.64

Cutting and bending reinforcement

6.25.7

Door frames

22.16

Cutting off pile heads

5.24

Door furniture and plates

14.73

Cutting, sawing, drilling and forming holes

15.29

Door guard

14.96

Damaged plants due to vandalism or typhoon

25.94(b)

Door lock

22.76

Damaged tiles

18.138

Door selectors

14.55

Damp proof course

9.40

Door stops

14.91

Damp proof course

10.05

Door viewer

14.97

Damp proof courses

9.10

Door with board finish

13.53

Debonded tendon

7.50

Doors

22.08

Decomposed granite (DG)

25.01(d)

Doors and window frames

13.64

Defects

7.16

Dowels for fixing door frames

14.107

Definitions

3.01

Dragon pots

25.63(b)

Definitions on trees

25.69(a)

Drainage

1.26

Delivery and storage

8.07

Drainage aggregate

25.11(a)

Delivery and storage of gypsum plaster

18.30

Drainage layer

25.63(c)

Delivery and storage of materials

6.38

Draw in pits

24.32

Demolition Plan and Method Statement

2.05

Drawers

13.67

Demolition Workers

2.10

Drawings

17.34

Deposition and compaction of soil-cement fill

3.29

Dressing compound

12.11

Design

11.01

Dressing compound

12.55

Design and manufacture of roller shutters

17.43

Drill anchor bolts

15.08

Design of articles to be coated

17.20

Drilling

24.27

Design requirements

1.39.4

Drilling and casings

26.58

Design submission

5.02

Drilling and preparation of rock dowel holes

26.31

B4

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Drilling and preparation of soil nail holes

26.37

Extent of pruning

25.85

Dripline

25.69(f)

External facing tiles

18.109

Driving

4.12

External facing tiles

18.190

Dry season watering

25.74.3(b)

External facing tiles

18.201

Dry weather

9.27

External glazing generally

20.19

Drying out of wall and ceiling finishes

18.20

External render

18.46

Drying the Works

1.62

External textured paint

21.13

Dubbing out

18.40

External textured paint

21.60

Duct friction

7.37

Extractable cores

7.20

Ducts

7.18

Extraction

4.14

Ducts free from laitance

7.34

Fabricated Soil Mix

25.02(b)

Durability

18.176

Fabricating generally

17.15

Dye, soil binding agent

25.42

Faced work

9.29

Dyeing

18.148

Facing bricks

9.03

Early loading

6.53

Failure

8.17

Earthwork

3.05

Failure of loading test or coring test

5.30

Eaves

12.47

Failure of tests

15.21

Edge clearance

20.22

Failures

6.60

Edge cover (or Glass bite)

20.17.03

Fair-faced finish

6.72

Edge quality

20.01.02

Falsework

6.08

Effect of vibration on adjacent structures and services

5.23

Fastener

16.18

Electrical requirements

18.170

Fasteners in glazing pocket

20.17.05

Electromagnetic fire-hold closers

14.50

Fencing generally

24.37

Embankments

3.23

Fencing wire

24.34

Emulsion paint

21.08

Fencing wire

24.38

Emulsion paint

21.91

Fertilizer

25.29(c)

Emulsion paint

21.96

Fertilizer generally

25.03(a)

Energy reduction factor for followers

5.13

Fertilizing

25.102(e)

Engineering bricks & loadbearing bricks

9.04

Fertilizing ground cover, large and small shrubs,

25.39(c)

Environmental Management Plan

2.22

bamboos and climbers

Environmentally friendly carpets

18.154

Fertilizing indoor plants

25.67(d)

Epoxy coatings to reinforcement

6.25.1

Field tests on actual buildings

16.74

Equivalent sodium oxide (Na2O) content

6.47.2

Fillet welds

15.55

Equivalent standards and imperial sizes

1.12

Filling

3.17

Erection

16.43

Filling existing watercourses

3.24

Erosion control mats

26.63

Filling of foundation pits and trenches

3.22

Establishment works

25.93

Filter drainage pipe

26.62

Exercise care

25.69.2.5

Filter layer

25.11(c)

Existing features

1.21

Filter layer application

25.12(a)

Existing felt roofs

12.33

Fine cold asphalt

24.07

Existing membrane

12.105

Finishes

14.15

Existing services

1.22

Finishes

14.101

Existing services

4.05

Finishes

22.19

Existing soil on site

25.01(b)

Finishes for concrete

8.21

Existing subsoil on site

25.01(c)

Finishes to accessible roofs (frequent foot traffic)

12.111

Expansion joints

12.69

Finishes to aluminium

17.22

Expansion joints

18.120

Finishes to edge of stairs

18.100

Explosive cartridge fixings

13.27

Finishes to non-accessible roofs (maintenance traffic)

12.110

Explosive protection

22.55

Finishing coat

21.56

Explosive protection

22.61

Finishing of joints

9.39

Explosive protection

22.67

Finishing to steel

17.21

Exposed aggregate rendering or "Shanghai" plaster

18.55

Finishings

12.70

Extensions of tendons

7.38

Finishings and Colours, generally

22.13

B5

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Fire and safety requirements

18.169

Fixing wall tiles

18.122

Fire and smoke control assemblies

14.07

Fixing wash basins

19.22

Fire bricks

9.05

Fixings

12.75

Fire cement

18.37

Fixings

12.86

Fire or Explosion

2.34

Fixings

12.90

Fire precautions

1.15

Fixings

12.93

Fire protection

22.56

Fixings

12.97

Fire protection

22.62

Fixings

14.19

Fire protection

22.68

Fixings generally

17.10

Fire protection system

15.67

Flatness

20.01.04

Fire rated glass

20.05

Float glass

20.02

Fire resistance

16.70

Flooding test

12.117

Fire resisting shutters

17.42

Floor and wall tiling generally

18.117

Fire resisting timber door

13.61

Floor sag and other movements

16.55

Fire retardant paints

21.14

Floor seal

21.41

Fire separation seal

18.204

Floor springs

14.41

Firming up

25.100

Floor tile adhesive remover

2.49

Firming, securing and wound treatment

25.69.13.4

Flooring

13.08

First cut

25.49(b)

Fluorescent paint

21.22

Fittings to drawers and cupboards

14.100

Flush doors

13.57

Fit-up with ordinary bolt assemblies

15.41

Flush pulls

14.93

Fixing

13.40

Flushing cistern

19.11.03

Fixing

22.15

Foam backed carpet

18.152

Fixing accessories

12.80

Foam backed vinyl sheet

18.133

Fixing adjustable steel louvre frames

17.40

Folding Partitions generally

22.81

Fixing baths

19.25

Follow up fertilizer

25.50

Fixing battens

13.48

Form of Contract

1.04

Fixing bolts

14.109

Forming and handling soil heaps

25.09(e)

Fixing bolts

14.117

Forming holes and chases

6.10

Fixing brackets

22.43

Forming to re-grade

25.05(e)

Fixing cramps

14.108

Formwork

6.04

Fixing cramps

14.116

Formwork

6.10

Fixing devices

6.10

Formwork

8.01

Fixing external wall tiles

18.123

Formwork ties

6.04

Fixing generally

19.18

Formwork ties and components

6.10

Fixing metal windows and doors

17.36

Foundation pits and trenches

3.13

Fixing mosaic tiles

18.124

Framed joinery generally

13.35

Fixing of cubicle systems

22.80

Framed joints

13.36

Fixing of reinforcement

6.20

Framed, ledged and braced doors

13.55

Fixing plasterboard

18.42

Framework

22.06

Fixing plastic sheet

13.44

Free of moisture

12.106

Fixing protective mesh for slopes

26.11

Free water / cement ratio

6.32

Fixing reinforcement

26.16

Fully tempered glass

20.08

Fixing sheeting

12.79

Fungi, mould and insects

18.171

Fixing slats

22.44

Galvanized coating

26.35

Fixing steel lathing

18.41

Galvanized steel sheet and coil

17.02

Fixing steel mesh

17.30

Galvanized steel tubing

17.27

Fixing stone paving slabs

18.125

Gasket disengagement not permitted

16.60

Fixing stone wall slabs

18.126

Gaskets at structural sealant

20.01.12

Fixing taps

19.20

Gauge

12.42

Fixing urinals

19.24

Gauge boxes

9.21

Fixing W.C. pans

19.23

General

1.39.1

B6

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

General

5.01

Glass fibre membrane

12.26

General

7.01

Glass for glazed panel

22.09

General

16.34

Glass generally

20.01

General attendance

1.41

Glass mosaic tiles

18.187

General protection and cleaning

21.43

Glass mosaic tiles

18.198

Generally

3.08

Glass orientation

20.20

Generally

3.26

Glass replacement

16.59

Generally

6.01

Glass replacement

20.01.10

Generally

6.07

Glass stops and application of sealants

20.17.06

Generally

6.26

Glazed Ceramic Slab Urinal

19.13

Generally

6.40

Glazed ceramic wall tiles

18.108

Generally

7.28

Glazed ceramic wall tiles

18.185

Generally

7.40

Glazed ceramic wall tiles

18.196

Generally

7.56

Glazed panels

22.17

Generally

9.01

Glazing

16.44

Generally

12.14

Glazing aluminium windows

20.30

Generally

12.76

Glazing beads

13.60

Generally

12.87

Glazing compounds

20.16

Generally

12.91

Glazing materials

16.16

Generally

12.94

Glazing materials

20.01.11

Generally

12.98

Glazing with beads

20.27

Generally

12.99

Glazing with putty

20.25

Generally

12.103

Glossary of terms

26.12

Generally

13.01

Glove bag method

2.46

Generally

13.32

Government of Hong Kong

1.04.1

Generally

15.01

Grading

25.05(b)

Generally

15.16

Grading of aggregate

6.34

Generally

15.33

Granolithic finish

18.93

Generally

15.66

Granular filter

26.60

Generally

16.00

Grass cutting

25.102(c)

Generally

16.10

Gravel

25.11(e)

Generally

16.29

Great Lake Rock

25.04(c)

Generally

18.39

Ground cover

25.34(a)

Generally

18.57

Ground investigation

3.02

Generally

18.89

Grout

18.115

Generally

18.164

Grout

Generally

19.01

Grout for rock dowels

26.30

Generally

19.03

Grout for soil nails

26.36

Generally

20.00

Grout material

26.47

Generally

20.17

Grout vents

7.21

Generally

21.01

Grouting

7.44

Generally

22.23

Grouting equipment

7.41

Generally

22.35

Grouting for rock dowels

26.32

Generally

22.50

Growing medium

25.61(b)

Generally

22.69

GS and T&C Procedure for plumbing & drainage

23.01

Generally

24.09

Guying

25.30(b)

Geotextile filter

26.61

Guying stakes

25.24(e)

Germination

25.40(d)

Guys

25.24(d)

GGBS

6.29.2

Gypsum based premixed plaster

18.60

Glass

16.13

Gypsum based premixed plaster application

18.70

Glass block panels

9.45

Gypsum plaster generally

18.49

Glass blocks

9.08

Gypsum plaster on plasterboard

18.51

Glass fibre

13.18

Gypsum plaster on steel lathing

18.50

B7

flow cone efflux time

26.54

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Gypsum plasters

18.29

Identity label

25.69.2.3

Hand laying and consolidation

24.17

Immediate maintenance

25.74.2

Hand-dug caissons

5.21

Imported soil generally

25.01(a)

Handling

9.18

Inclusions in tempered glass

20.01.05

Handling & storage

18.63

Indicating sign plates

14.98

Handling and storage of plasterboard

18.34

Indoor plants

25.64

Handling and storage of sprigs and turves

25.46(f)

Indoor plants cleaning

25.106

Handling and storage of tendons

7.48

Infilling between

13.49

Handling of reinforcement

6.25.5

Insect and disease control

25.51

Handling, transportation and storage

15.28

Insitu concrete paving

24.02

Hanging components

22.28

In-situ concrete slabs to roads, car parks and paved

6.66

Hardboard

13.15

areas

Hardening admixture

18.86

In-situ concrete slabs to roads, car parks and paved

Hardwood

13.06

areas

Hat and coat hooks

14.95

Inspection

Hazards in tree work

25.110

Inspection of formwork prior to fixing of reinforcement 6.06

Headrail

22.36

Inspection of piles

5.31

Headrail

22.42

Inspection of sprayed concrete

26.21

Health and safely

21.89

Inspection scaffolding

26.01

Heat resisting paint

21.25

Installation

22.70

Heat strengthened glass

20.07

Installation and testing of drill anchor bolts

15.31

Heating

12.61

Installation generally

18.159

Heavy standard trees

25.32(e)

Installation of carpet

18.162

Herbaceous plants

25.57

Installation of heat treated glass

20.17.02

Hessian fabric

22.11

Installation of safety glazing

20.17.01

High quality finishes

18.38

Insulating board

13.16

High quality finishes

21.88

Insulating glass

20.01.03

High strength friction grip bolts

15.42

Insulating roofing tiles

18.107

High strength friction grip bolts nuts and washers

15.07

Insulation

12.113

Hinges and pivots

14.20

Insulation of under cavity floor where required

18.178

Hoarding and Covered Walkway

2.32

Internal lime plaster on lathing

18.48

Hoardings and gantries

1.33

Internal lime plaster on solid backgrounds

18.47

Holding down bolt covers

15.26

Intumescent coating system

15.70

Holding down bolts

15.09

Investigation for positions of piles

5.10

Holes and chases

9.43

Ironmongery

16.82

Holes sizes

15.25

Ironmongery schedule

14.09

Holes, inserts or fixings

6.06

Isolating membrane

12.54

Homogenous coved tile skirting

18.188

Isolating membrane

12.62

Homogenous coved tile skirting

18.199

Jacks

7.24

Homogenous wall tiles

18.189

Joinery with clear finish

13.38

Homogenous wall tiles

18.200

Joint reinforcement

18.33

Horizontal as generally seals

22.84

Jointing

24.19

Hot dip galvanizing

15.63

Joints

7.17

Hydraulic Concrete Crusher

2.18

Joints

9.33

Hydroseeding

25.44

Joints in curtain wall

16.36

Hydroseeding cover

25.45(g)

Joints in formwork

6.10

Hydroseeding mix

25.53(d)

Joints in plasterboard

18.43

Hydroseeding seed mix

25.45(c)

Justification of proposed tolerances

7.29

Hydroseeding solution

25.45(d)

Keys

14.13

Hydrothermal requirements

18.168

Kitchen sinks

19.09.01

Identification

25.70

Knotting

21.31

Identification fo Pipelines

21.78

Known Licensed Source

13.01.3

B8

8.18
12.116

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Labels

16.80

Linoleum

18.134

Laboratory Mix Trials

6.43.3

Linseed oil

21.34

Laboratory tests by approved laboratory

18.193

Linseed oil

21.65

Laboratory tests by approved laboratory

21.94

Lintels

6.68

Laboratory tests of stone

16.77

Lintels

9.46

Laboratory tests of structural silicone assembly

16.75

Liquid applied membrane

11.04.02

Laboratory tests on full scale mock-ups

16.73

Liquid retaining structures

6.42.2

Ladder tape/cord

22.48

Loading capacity of piles

5.04

Ladder tapes/cords

22.40

Loading tests

5.28

Laminated plastic sheet

13.21

Loadings for design and construction

6.03

Laminated safety and security glass

20.11

Location

25.67(c)

Landscape Softworks

25.25(b)

Location of setting blocks

20.17.04

Laps

12.15

Location of Temporary Works

1.24

Laps

12.78

Locking

22.54

Laps

12.95

Locking

22.60

Large diameter bored piles

5.19

Locking

22.66

Large palms

25.32(h)

Locks

14.56

Large shrubs

25.34(c)

Loss or leakage of grout

26.50

Lateral support

4.07

Louvre blades

20.31

Laying

12.19

Louvres

16.25

Laying

12.64

Machine laying

24.14

Laying

18.139

Machinery and pipework

21.77

Laying and jointing

10.11

Machining note

15.27

Laying and jointing ashlar walling

10.19

Maintenance

7.25

Laying floor and roof screeds

18.78

Maintenance access

16.84

Laying floor tiles

18.118

Maintenance during root pruning period

25.72.7

Laying flooring

18.91

Maintenance manual

12.118

Laying glass fibre membrane

12.31

Maintenance manual

16.83

Laying of mastic asphalt

11.10

Maintenance of roads

1.19

Laying of proprietary sheet membrane

11.12.01

Maintenance of Temporary Works

1.39

Laying roof tiles

18.119

Maintenance operations

25.96

Laying sprigs

25.54(a)

Maintenance repair and cleaning

10.24

Laying turves

25.55(a)

Maintenance replacement standby materials

16.28

Laying underlays

18.160

Maintenance stairways on slope

26.66

Lead

12.01

Make good disturbed areas

22.22

Lead

12.04

Making good

20.34

Ledged and braced

13.54

Management

1.39.6

Left-in formwork

6.10

Manufactured soil conditioner

25.02(c)

Light standard trees

25.32(c)

Manufacturers Inspection

15.72

Lighting and power

1.37

Manufacturer's certificates

15.13

Lightning protection

16.71

Manufacturer's instructions

14.11

Lightweight aggregate

25.11(b)

Manufacturer's recommendations

1.47

Lightweight screeds

18.80

Manufacturer's test certificates

7.10

Lightweight Soil Mix

25.02(f)

Manufacturer's test certificates

7.23

Lime

9.15

Manufacturer's tests of sealants

16.76

Lime

18.04

Marble aggregate

18.84

Lime putty

9.16

Marine plywood

13.13

Lime putty

18.05

Marking

4.08

Limestone

25.19

Marking

7.55

Limewash

21.07

Marking materials for roads, carriageways and car parks 21.21

Lining

24.29

Marking paint for ballcourts, playgrounds etc.

21.20

Lining and levelling

15.36

Markings

15.14

Lining panels

22.07

Masonry nails

13.26

B9

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Mass concrete retaining walls

6.65

Mortar

10.04

Mastic asphalt

11.03

Mortar

12.38

Mastic asphalt

12.52

Mosaic tiles

18.110

Mastic asphalt roofing

12.51

Mosquito gauze

13.31

Material

1.45

Movement joints

12.81

Material

7.05

Movement joints

18.22

Material

26.34

Mulch

25.20(a)

Material and construction

22.72

Mulch

25.74.4

Materials

6.61

Mulch for hydroseeding

25.41

Materials

14.14

Mulching

25.29(e)

Materials for grouting of base plates and end plates

15.15

Mulching

25.104

Measurement

7.61

Mulching to ground cover

25.39(a)

Measurement equipment and test certificate

7.26

Mulching to shrubs,climbers bamboos and palms

25.39(b)

Measures to control ASR in concrete

6.47.1

Multi-colour paint

21.11

Mechanical application

18.12

Multi-layer acrylic paint

21.93

Mechanical locking cylinders and keying

14.66

Multi-layer acrylic paint

21.98

Mechanical properties and chemical composition

15.02

Nailing

13.41

Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF)

13.17.1

Nails

12.13

Metal beads

18.53

Nails

12.39

Metal beads Plastic beads

18.25

Nails

13.24

Metal dowels

14.115

Nails for plasterboard

18.32

Metal insert channels for concrete

17.11

Negative skin friction

5.06

Metal stakes

25.24(a)

No-fines concrete

6.47

Metal to metal contact

16.38

Noise Level Control

2.12

Metallic paint

21.24

Non compliance

18.194

Method statement

15.34

Non compliance

21.95

Method statement

25.70.2

Non-availability of specified materials

15.12

Method statement on pruning

25.88

Non-compliance

26.28

Micro conditions of exposure

10.02

Non-compliance

26.44

Minimisation of fibre release

2.50

Non-compliance

26.57

Minimum length of piles

5.11

Non-compliance thickness, adhesion & continuity

6.25.12

Minimum periods before striking

6.12

Non-destructive integrity testing

5.32

Minimum spacing / nos. of piles

5.08

Non-percussion cast in-situ concrete piles

5.20

Mirror glass

20.06

Non-self-clinging climbers against structures

25.38(b)

Mix proportions

1.55

Non-self-clinging climbers on pergolas

25.38(c)

Mix proportions of grout

7.07

Non-slip homogenous floor ties

18.184

Mixes

8.09

Non-slip homogenous floor ties

18.195

Mixes for screeds

18.75

Non-slip strip

18.88

Mixing

6.48

Non-slip strip

18.99

Mixing

7.43

Non-toxic paint

21.28

Mixing

9.23

Notch planting

25.29(f)

Mixing

18.62

Notch planting on slopes

25.29(g)

Mixing grout

26.48

Noxious weeds

25.14(b)

Mixing rendering

18.08

Nozzlemen and equipment for spraying concrete

26.14

Mixing soil-cement

3.28

Nuisance

1.17

Mock up Sample

10.08

Nullahs

3.14

Mock-ups erection and tests

16.72

Number of tests required for non-destructive testing

5.33

Module

22.03

Obstructions

3.09

Module

22.24

Obstructions

4.13

Moisture content

13.03

Odour

18.173

Moisture test

12.114

Office for SO

1.31

Monitoring system and ground settlement

4.06

Old and Valuable Tree

25.69(b)

B10

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

On completion

17.31

Pine bark mulch

25.20(b)

Openings in flush doors

13.59

Pipe through roof

12.24

Operable windows

16.23

Pipes through roofs

12.68

Ordinary bolts, nuts and washers

15.06

Pipes through roofs

18.82

Organic coating finish to aluminium

16.32

Pit planting of large shrubs, bamboos, small palms and

25.29(i)

Origin

17.39

cycas

Other references on arboricultural / tree work

25.69.14

Pit planting of light standard, standard, heavy standard, 25.29(k)

Other requirements

25.52

semi-mature trees, conifers, palms

Other tests

6.59

Pit planting of seedlings, small shrubs, whips, climbers 25.29(h)

Outlets

12.23

and herbaceous plants

Overhead door closers

14.28

Pit safety

25.29(l)

P.V.C. or acrylic sheet

13.20

Pitching

4.11

Packing

14.12

Placing artificial plants

25.68

Packings and clearance

15.24

Placing of tendons

7.33

Packings and grouting

15.37

Planning for transplanting

25.71(c)

Paint

15.65

Plant and Equipment Operator

2.09

Painting in general

15.60

Plant boxes

25.67(a)

Painting in general

21.42

Plant habit

25.13(b)

Painting to sprayed concrete

26.65

Plant labels

25.21

Painting, stripe coats to joints and sharp edges and

15.64

Plant name

25.13(c)

damaged painting

Plant Trials

6.43.1

Panel connector

22.31

Planting

25.29(a)

Panelled doors

13.56

Planting and maintenance of transplanted semi-mature

25.79

Panels

22.82

trees

Panels frames and posts

22.26

Planting bulbs corms, and tubers

25.58

Panic exit devices

14.80

Planting ground cover, small shrubs, climbers and

25.36

Parasitic plants

25.14(a)

herbaceous plants

Parquet flooring

13.10

Planting herbaceous plants

25.59

Parquet flooring

13.51

Planting in plastics mesh containers

25.62(c)

Particular of access

26.02

Planting in pots

25.62(a)

Particular requirements

26.67

Planting large shrubs, and bamboos

25.37

Particulars of hydroseeding

25.45(a)

Planting season

25.25(a)

Partitions

22.02

Plants

25.13(a)

Pass doors

22.85

Plasterboard

18.31

Patching up

25.53(f)

Plastic films

20.01.06

Pea gravel

25.11(d)

Plastic glazing

20.12

Percussion cast in-situ concrete piles

5.17

Plastic mesh containers

25.60(b)

Percussion piles

5.14

Plastic sheets

20.32

Performance test

26.42

Plasticiser

9.17

Permanent soil nail installation and grouting

26.41

Plugs

13.28

Permitted deviations

15.32

Plywood

13.12

Permitted deviations

15.59

Pointing ashlar walling

10.20

Personnel involved in pruning

25.87

Pointing rubble walling

10.17

Pesticidal coating

21.29

Polish

18.137

Pesticidal coating

21.61

Polish

18.140

PFA

6.28

Polishing

25.67(e)

PFAC

6.29

Polyurethane paint

21.17

Photographic record

25.69.2.2(c)

Post-Demolition Precautions

2.31

Physical properties

18.150

Pots

25.63(a)

Pile caps tie beams and dowel bars

5.25

Pots for aquatic plants

25.60(a)

Pile group reduction factor

5.07

Potting medium

25.65

Pile yarn

18.145

Precast concrete paving

24.03

Pinboards

22.13

Precast concrete paving

18.127

B11

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Precast concrete paving blocks

18.112

Pre-transplant preparation

Precast concrete piles

5.15

Pre-transplant preparation for trees of semi-mature size 25.77

Precast prestressed elements

7.57

and above

Precast prestressed tubular piles

5.16

Prime coat

12.30

Precautionary Measures

2.29

Priming in general

21.54

Precautions during demolition, site clearance and

2.39

Priming paints for Structural Steel

21.03

Priming paints in general

21.02

alteration

25.72

Precautions generally

2.37

Prior approval

25.69.2.4(c)

Precautions in carrying out excavation

25.69.6

Profile of ducts

7.31

Precautions prior to demolition, site clearance and

2.38

Profiled aluminium sheets

12.84

Profiled compressed particle sheets and accessories

12.96

alteration
Precautions to avoid root damage

25.69.8

Profiled glass-fibre reinforced plastic sheets

12.89

Prelimiary ground investigation

4.04

Profiled sheets

12.73

Preliminary ground investigation

5.09

Profiled unreinforced rigid PVC sheets

12.92

Preliminary stripping of slope

26.05

Programme

25.72.2

Preliminary Works

2.28

Programme and method statement for transplanting

25.71(b)

Preparation and painting of new surfaces

15.61

trees

Preparation before site clearance commences

25.69.2.4

Programme for the Works

16.08

Preparation for piles for Sonic Logging

5.35

Programme for transplanting semi-mature trees and

25.76.1

Preparation for road marking materials

21.71

above

Preparation for slope treatment works

26.04

Programme for transplanting shrubs

25.75(b)

Preparation of background

18.13

Programming

25.69.1

Preparation of base

12.17

Programming hydroseeding

25.53(b)

Preparation of base

12.27

Properties

7.06

Preparation of base for monolithic finish

18.17

Proportion

9.22

Preparation of existing decorated surfaces

21.49

Proprietary brand name materials or products

1.09

Preparation of hardened or existing concrete

18.16

Proprietary fire protection board

15.71

Preparation of joints

15.38

Proprietary flexible sheet membrane

11.04.01

Preparation of joints for welding

15.51

Proprietary suspended ceiling systems

13.23

Preparation of new surfaces

21.46

Props

6.09

Preparation of piles for Dynamic Testing

5.37

Props & bracings

6.04

Preparation of piles for Integrity Testing

5.36

Protection

7.47

Preparation of piles for non-destructive integrity testing 5.34

Protection

16.79

generally

Protection

17.24

Preparation of slope surface

26.13

Protection

18.23

Preparation of stone for ashlar walling

10.18

Protection

25.73.4

Preparation of stone for rubble stone walling

10.10

Protection and cleaning

18.163

Preparation of surfaces

24.11

Protection during transit

25.28(a)

Preparation of surrounds

20.18

Protection during transit

25.73.6

Preparation of tree/shrub seed

25.53(c)

Protection fences and barriers

26.03

Preparation of welding procedure specifications

15.46

Protection from changes in ground levels

25.69.4

Preparation of Work

18.180

Protection from drilling

25.69.7

Preparatory work in general

21.45

Protection from excavation including trenching

25.69.5

Preparing sheets

12.77

Protection from increased exposure

25.69.2.5(e)

Pre-planting fertilizer

25.03(b)

Protection from instability

25.69.9

Prescribed mix concrete with 100% recycled coarse

8.22

Protection from overloading

1.61

Protection from physical damage and soil compaction

25.69.3(a)

aggregages
Pre-seeding fertilizer

25.40(g)

by construction activities

Preserved tree

25.69(h)

Protection from weather

1.58

Pressure gauges

7.27

Protection of filter layer

25.12(b)

Pressure grouting

26.49

Protection of completed works

18.183

Pretensioning proposal

7.52

Protection of existing roof

12.107

B12

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Protection of existing work

18.10

Registered Structural Engineer

2.03

Protection of hydroseeding

25.53(g)

Regrading

25.47(d)

Protection of immediately finished concrete

8.15

Regular control of pests, fungal infestation and disease

25.105

Protection of liquid applied membrane

11.13.02

Regulating course

24.13

Protection of newly erected stone work

10.22

Regulations

1.11

Protection of prepared ground

25.07

Regulations, Ordinances and Codes of Practice

2.54

Protection of proprietary sheet membrane

11.13.01

(Asbestos)

Protection to adjacent buildings and structures

2.16

Regulations, Ordinances, Codes of Practice & Practice

Protective fencing

25.108

Notes

Protective fencing for planting works

25.22

Regulations, Ordinances, etc (same as 2.01)

6.76

Protective finishes

18.177

Regulations, Ordinances, etc. (same as 2.01)

8.23

Protective layer

25.45(f)

Regulations, Ordinances, etc.(same as 2.01)

3.30

Protective treatments

16.30

Reinforcement

8.02

Prototypes

13.39

Reinforcement

12.59

Prototypes

17.14

Reinforcement

12.63

Provision of details before commencement of works

4.03

Reinforcement connectors

6.24

Provision of drawings and calculations

5.03

Related work

16.03

Provisions of drawings and calculations

16.09

Release agents

6.04

Pruning during Establishment Works period

25.102(a)

Release bond agent

18.158

Pruning method

25.102(b)

Relief drains

26.59

Pruning of preserved trees

25.69.10

Remelting mastic asphalt on Site

11.09

Pruning techniques

25.86

Removal of boulders

26.08

Pull-out test

26.39

Removal of Demolition Waste

2.21

Purity

25.40(e)

Removal of excavated material

3.10

Qualification testing of welding procedure

15.47

Removal of protective measures

25.69.3(i)

Quality

18.142

Removal of temporary protective fencing

25.69.3(d)

Quality generally

1.46

Removal of water

1.59

Quick release fertilizer

25.18(b)

Render stops

16.41

Rainwater outlets

12.67

Repair for damage

25.69.2.5(b)

Raking drains

26.64

Repair of damage to and replacement of preserved trees 25.69.13.1

Raking out and pointing flashings

9.44

and other affected plants

Random rubble

10.12

Repair works

25.69.13.2

Rate of fertilizer

25.33(c)

Repairs to epoxy coatings on site

6.25.8

Ready-mixed concrete

8.11

Replacement

25.69.13.7(b)

Ready-mixes

6.44

Replacement

25.71(f)

Rebates, glazing beads and putty

21.68

Replacement

25.75(d)

Recesses

7.46

Replacement of damaged glass

20.17.07

Record

7.39

Replacement planting

25.94(a)

Record drawings

24.33

Replacement planting due to parasitic plants

25.97

Record on transplanting

25.71(d)

Replacement planting of damaged trees/plants

25.69.13.6

Record survey

3.03

Replanting from holding nursery to receptor site

25.74.1

Record survey and drawings

5.03

Report on occurrence of damage to preserved trees

25.69.13.3

Records

7.45

Report on tree problems

25.69.2.5(g)

Records

12.115

Report sheets

5.27

Records of rock dowels

26.33

Requirement for tests

26.53

Records of soil nails

26.46

Requirements applicable to mock-up, samples and

16.65

Records of sprayed concrete

26.23

building

Redecoration of existing painted surfaces

15.62

Requirements in respect of tree felling

25.69.2.4(a)

Reflecting paint

21.23

Requirements in respect of tree transplanting

25.69.2.4(b)

Reflective paint

12.58

Requirements on removal of the damaged trees/plants

25.69.13.7

Reflectorization of road marking materials by surface

21.73

Resin for MDF panels

13.29

Resistance to wear

18.151

Restricted access within Tree Protection Zone

25.69.2.5(c)

application
Registered Electrical Worker

2.08

B13

2.01

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Restriction

12.50

Samples of hydroseeding materials

25.45(h)

Restrictions on crown pruning

25.72.1

Samples of materials

25.40(c)

Restrictions on the use of hardwood

1.66

Sampling and analysis

2.44

Restrictive uses

25.69.2.5(a)

Sampling during laying of mastic asphalt

11.11

Re-tempering

18.67

Sampling of fresh concrete

6.54

Re-use steel sheet pile from other site

4.17

Sand

9.14

Ridges and hips

12.45

Sand

18.03

Ripping

25.05(f)

Sand

25.02(e)

Roads, car-parks and paved areas generally

24.01

Sand finishing

12.56

Rock crushing plants

3.06

Saw Cut Method

2.20

Rock dowels

26.29

Scaffolding etc.

1.34

Rock splitting

26.07

Scaling and trimming of rock slopes

26.06

Roller shutters and doors

17.41

Scarifying

25.05(g)

Rolling

25.49(a)

Scope of the Works

16.01

Roof vent

12.112

Scope of Work

19.02

Roofing system

12.100

Scope of work

25.80

Root ball preparation

25.72.5

Screeds generally

18.74

Root barriers

25.24(g)

Screen fabric

22.29

Root pruning and undercutting

25.26

Screen panels

22.27

Root pruning in stages

25.72.6

Screens

1.32

Root pruning in stages

25.77.1

Screwing

13.42

Root pruning period

25.72.3

Screws

13.25

Rootballs

25.16

Sealants

16.21

Rough board finish

6.73

Sealers

21.04

Routing

25.69.2.5(f)

Sealing

20.28

Rubber tiles and sheet

18.135

Sealing and infilling of rock joints

26.09

Running bonded joints

13.37

Sealing ducts

7.32

Safety

1.16

Sealing flooring

21.83

Safety

22.75

Seaming and jointing carpet

18.161

Safety Precautions

7.03

Securing

25.33(d)

Safety precautions in tree surgery work

25.81

Securing stakes and ties

25.101

Safety precautions in tree work

25.111

Security - before delivery

6.17.2

Safety Protection

2.33

Security - before delivery

6.58.2

Sample for turfing and sprigging

25.46(g)

Security - before delivery for grinding preparation

15.19.2

Sample of materials

1.53

Security - before delivery to laboratory

15.19.3

Samples

6.71

Security - delivery

6.17.3

Samples

9.09

Security - delivery

6.58.3

Samples

12.101

Security - delivery

15.19.4

Samples

13.04

Security - removal of non-compliant re-bars

6.17.5

Samples

14.08

Security - sampling

6.17.1

Samples

17.13

Security - sampling

6.58.1

Samples

17.35

Security - sampling

15.19.1

Samples

18.09

Security - stock management

6.17.4

Samples

18.101

Security - stock management

15.19.5

Samples

18.129

Security at completion

1.64

Samples

18.144

Security locks

14.61

Samples

20.13

Seed

25.40(a)

Samples

22.34

Seedling trees

25.32(a)

Samples

22.41

Self-clinging climbers against structures

25.38(a)

Samples & drawings

17.38

Semi-flexible PVC tiles

18.130

Samples of face brickwork and blockwork

9.26

Semi-mature trees

25.32(f)

Samples of finished work

1.54

Semi-rigid resin bonded glass fibre slab

13.19

B14

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Sequence of installation

16.42

Source in Progress to Creditable Certification

13.01.2

Sequence of work

25.69.3(c)

Sowing / hydroseeding acceptance

25.53(h)

Sequence of work

25.69.13.5

Spandrel glass

20.01.08

Serpentine boulders

25.04(b)

Spatterdash

18.15

Setting and location blocks

20.23

Spatterdash

18.66

Setting blocks

20.15

Special tiles

12.40

Setting out

12.18

Special tiles

12.49

Setting out

16.35

Specialist Contractor

11.02

Settlement characteristics of piles

5.05

Specialist Contractor for Demolition

2.02

Shear stud welding

15.57

Specialist materials

1.50

Shear studs

15.10

Specialist work

1.49

Sheathing

7.19

Specification by name

14.03

Sheet glass

20.03

Specification in Manufacturer's recommendations

1.07

Sheet pile record

4.16

Specified

1.10

Sheets to curved roofs

12.83

Sprayed mineral coating

15.69

Shims

16.19

Spraying concrete

26.18

Shower fittings

19.06

Spreading and filling up soiling materials

25.10(a)

Shower trays

19.05

Sprig species

25.46(b)

Signboards

1.35

Sprigging acceptance

25.54(b)

Silicone Sealant

19.17

Sprigs

25.46(a)

Single source

1.51

Squared coursed rubble

10.15

Site accommodation for contractor

1.28

Squared rubble brought up to courses

10.14

Site Engineer

2.07

Squared rubble walling exceeding 300mm thick

10.16

Site meetings

1.40

Squared uncoursed rubble

10.13

Site supervisory staff and preservation and protection of 25.69.2

Squat type W.C.

19.11.02

existing trees

Stain

21.35

Size of trees

25.13(d)

Stainless steel

17.09

Skirting

12.66

Stainless steel sinks

19.09.02

Skirting

22.33

Stainless Steel Slab Urinal

19.14

Skirtings

12.21

Staking

25.30(a)

Skirtings

22.12

Staking for whips

25.29(j)

Skirtings

22.18

Standard

14.04

Slag

15.52

Standard mixes

6.41

Slats

22.38

Standard trees

25.32(d)

Sliding gear

14.92

Standards and ISO Certification

18.61

Sloping formwork

6.10

Standards of pruning

25.69.11

Slotted steel angle

17.05

Standards of transplanting

25.71(e)

Slotted steel angle

17.29

Standards of transplanting shrubs

25.75(c)

Slow release fertilizer

25.18(a)

Standpipes and capping

26.51

Slurry

18.114

Staples

18.27

Small palms and cycas

25.32(i)

Steel

16.11

Small shrubs

25.34(b)

Steel

17.01

Smoke and intrumescent seals

13.62

Steel fence posts and gates

24.36

Softwood

13.05

Steel 'H' piles

5.18

Soil nail heads

26.45

Steel lathing

18.24

Soil stabilizer

25.02(h)

Steel mesh

17.03

Soil-cement

3.27

Steel reinforcement

6.14

Soiling for indoor plants

25.67(b)

Steel sheet pile sections

4.01

Solar protection

12.71

Steel tubing

17.04

Solid surfacing sinks

19.09.03

Steel windows and doors

17.32

Solid surfacing wash basins

19.08.02

Stockpile areas

25.09(a)

Sound insulation

22.20

Stockpile maintenance

25.09(d)

Source

14.01

Stockpile reclamation

25.09(c)

B15

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Stockpile stability

25.09(b)

Supervision

18.68

Stone

10.01

Supervisor

2.47

Stone

16.14

Supply, delivery, storage and laying of road marking

21.72

Stone aggregate

18.83

materials

Stone chippings

12.12

Support legs

22.32

Stone chippings

18.36

Supports

25.61(c)

Stone chips

25.02(i)

Supports for non-self-clinging climbers

25.35

Stone cleaner

21.40

Surface condition

7.12

Stone fabrication

16.45

Surface dressing

12.20

Stone slabs

18.111

Surface dressing

24.08

Stone wall cladding

18.116

Surface dressing existing areas

24.23

Stopping

21.32

Surface finish

12.35

Storage

6.18

Surface finishes

18.18

Storage

7.49

Surface finishes for screeds

18.81

Storage

13.02

Surface finishes on flooring

18.94

Storage

19.15

Surface finishes on granolithic

18.95

Storage

20.14

Surface hardener

18.85

Storage of formwork

6.05

Surface preparation for fill material

3.16

Storage of grass seed

25.40(f)

Surface preparation for liquid membrane

11.08.02

Storage of plant material on site

25.28(b)

Surface preparation for sheet membrane

11.08.01

Storage of reinforcement

6.25.6

Surface retarders

6.04

Storage of release agents and surface retarders

6.05

Surface retarders and release agents

6.06

Storage of waste

2.53

Surfaces containing asbestos

21.51

Storage of welding consumables

15.49

Surfaces of cutting

3.12

Storage sheds

1.29

Surfaces preparation

12.104

Storing

9.19

Survey

2.26

Straightness

7.13

Suspended ceilings

13.46

Stressing

7.36

Suspension system

22.86

Striking

6.11

Synthetic paint

21.15

Structural requirements

16.46

Synthetic paint

21.92

Structural requirements

18.167

Synthetic paint

21.97

Structural sealant

20.17.08

Tack coat

24.05

Structural sealant glazing

20.26

Tack coat

24.12

Studdings

22.14

Tack welds

15.53

Submission

15.22

Tapes and Gaskets

20.29

Submission

6.42.1

Taps

19.07

Submission

6.47.3

Teak

13.07

Submission before hydroseeding starts

25.45(b)

Technical requirements for safety in bamboo

1.39.7

Submission of Documents

2.04

scaffolding

Submission of particulars

26.22

Technical requirements for safety in metal scaffolding

1.39.8

Submission on performance test record

26.43

Technically Competent Persons

2.06

Submission on pull-out test record

26.40

Temperature

7.53

Submission on record of grouting

26.52

Temperatures

24.10

Submission on soil nails

26.38

Tempered & laminated glass

20.01.01

Submissions

1.39.3

Temporary attachments

15.56

Submittals

15.68

Temporary bracings or restraints

15.35

Subsequent cuts

25.49(c)

Temporary passenger lifts

1.38

Substitution

25.17

Temporary protective fencing

25.69.3(b)

Substrate preparation

18.65

Temporary protective hessian armouring

25.69.3(f)

Sundries

14.94

Temporary protective mulching

25.69.3(g)

Supervising officer

1.05

Temporary works for earthworks

3.04

Supervision

7.02

Tender submission

4.02

B16

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Tender submission

16.07

Timber connectors

14.114

Tensioning

7.51

Timber for external use

13.01.1

Terrazzo

18.97

Time required for testing of epoxy coated reinforcement 6.25.13

Terrazzo floor tiles

18.104

Timing

25.73

Test certificate

6.15

Timing of pruning

25.84

Test Certificate and routine testing of road marking

21.75

Tinted glass

20.09

Toe Coring

5.35.1

materials
Test cores

6.57

Tolerance

4.10

Test cube security cages

1.57

Tolerance for excavation

3.11

Test for determining the degree of compaction of

3.21

Tolerance for filling

3.18

Tolerance of substrate

18.64

compacted fill
Test for Fabricated Soil Mix

25.02(k)

Tolerances

1.65

Test for manufactured soil conditioner

25.02(d)

Tolerances

9.35

Test for Topsoil

25.02(j)

Tolerances

10.07

Test Loads

7.59

Tolerances in setting out of piles

5.22

Test panels

26.24

Tools and equipment

25.92

Test records

7.62

Top Down Method

2.17

Test reports

16.78

Top-dressing

25.43

Test specimens

6.17

Top-dressing

25.55(b)

Test specimens

7.11

Topsoil

3.07

Testing

9.24

Topsoil

25.02(a)

Testing

12.53

Towel rail

14.113

Testing

24.28

Towel rail

14.121

Testing and test record

6.58

Toxicity

18.172

Testing arrangement

7.60

Traffic control

1.18

Testing Laboratory

6.25.14

Traffic on floor tiling, etc

18.121

Testing of bolts, nuts and washers

15.20

Translucent & obscured glass

20.04

Testing of concrete cores

26.26

Transplanting semi-mature trees and above

25.76

Testing of epoxy coating

6.25.10

Transplanting shrubs, climbers, groundcovers and

25.75(a)

Testing of mastic asphalt

11.05

bamboos

Testing of materials

6.39

Transplanting trees, palms and conifers

25.71(a)

Testing of materials

8.08

Transport and placing

8.12

Testing of membrane

11.06

Transportation, storage and handling

10.21

Testing of sections and plates

15.17

Transporting and placing

6.49

Tests

1.56

Traps

19.16

Textured emulsion paint

21.09

Treatment of cavities and wet pockets

25.90

Thermal insulation and fire-safing insulation

16.22

Treatment of wounds and other injuries

25.89

Thickness

18.90

Tree crown spread

25.69(d)

Thickness & weights of glass

20.01.13

Tree height

25.69(e)

Thickness of floor screeds

18.77

Tree lifting and protection

25.78

Thickness of road marking materials

21.74

Tree pit bases

25.33(a)

Thickness of wall render

18.76

Tree Protection Zone

25.69(g)

Thinning

25.102(d)

Tree schedule

25.69.2.2(b)

Through thickness properties

15.18

Tree survey plan

25.69.2.2(a)

Ties

25.24(c)

Tree survey record

25.69.2.2

Ties to concrete

9.38

Tree/shrub species for hydroseeding

25.45(e)

Tile grouting

18.192

Trees and shrubs

1.20

Tile grouting

18.203

Trees in paved areas

25.33(b)

Tiles

12.36

Trial mixes

6.43

Tiles adhesives

18.191

Trial mixes of grout

7.08

Tiles adhesives

18.202

Trial panel

26.15

Tilt control

22.47

Tripod staking

25.33(e)

Timber

13.33

Trunk Protection

25.24(f)

B17

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.

Clause No.

Tubers

25.56(c)

Wall ties

10.06

Turf

25.46(c)

Walling built against concrete, etc.

10.23

Turf maintenance

25.55(c)

Warning signs

2.48

Turf sample

25.46(d)

Warranty

12.119

Turf species

25.46(c)

Wash coat

12.29

Turnbuckles and other elements

15.11

Washable matt-finished vinyl cloth

22.10

Twenty percent recycled coarse aggregates

6.42.3

Washers

15.40

Tying wire

6.25.3

Waste disposal

2.51

Tying wire

18.28

Waste outlets

19.19

Type and number of coats

21.70

Watchmen

1.27

Type of premixed plaster

18.58

Water

1.36

Type of Tiling

12.41

Water

6.35

Types of pruning

25.83

Water

8.05

Types of walling

10.09

Water

9.13

Unbacked flexible PVC vinyl sheet

18.132

Water

18.02

Undercoating

21.55

Water

25.95

Undercoats generally

18.44

Water bar

14.110

Underground voids

2.36

Water bar

14.118

Undergrowth within Tree Protection Zone

25.69.2.5(d)

Water leakage control

16.57

Underlay

18.155

Water Pollution Control

2.13

Underlays

6.69

Water repellant liquid

21.06

Underlays

8.19

Water repellant liquid

21.58

Unglazed vitreous mosaic wall tiles

18.186

Water tanks

6.63

Unglazed vitreous mosaic wall tiles

18.197

Watering

25.48

Uniformity

9.31

Watering

25.73.1

Unsound surfaces and substrates

21.52

Watering

25.98(a)

Unsuitable and surplus soiling material

25.10(b)

Watering Time

25.98(b)

Uplifting

25.73.3

Watering upon transplanting

25.74.3(a)

Urinals

19.12

Waterproof joints of steel sheet roofing

12.83.1

Use during construction

24.21

Waterproofing joints of steel sheet roofing

12.34

Use of chemicals

25.31

Watertight construction

6.64

Use of diesel hammers

5.12

Wax polish

21.37

Use of mortars

9.25

Wax polish

21.66

Use of PFA, PFAC, CSF and GGBS

6.30

Weather boarding

13.11

Use of release agents

6.10

Wedging and pinning

9.41

Use of the Site

1.13

Weeding

25.99

Valleys

12.46

Weeding to rootball

25.74.5

Vapour barrier

18.73

Weep hole filters

16.20

Varnish

21.36

Weepholes and expansion joints in sprayed concrete

26.17

Ventilation

22.74

Welders and testing of welders

15.44

Verges

12.22

Welding

7.15

Verges

12.44

Welding

15.23

Vermin

18.174

Welding

15.43

Vertical blinds

22.49

Welding

16.39

Vertical seals

22.83

Welding and splicing

4.09

Video Recording System

2.11

Welding consumables

15.48

Vinyl tiles

18.131

Welding generally

17.16

Vision glass

20.01.07

Welding of aluminium alloy

17.17

Void formers

6.04

Welding of reinforcement

6.23

Volatile Organic Compound content

21.90

Welding of stainless steel

17.18

Wall mounted rails

22.30

Welding record

15.45

Wall ties

9.11

Well casing

24.25

B18

Index 2 Subjects and Clause Numbers

Clause No.
Well screen

24.26

Wet weather

9.28

Wet weather

24.18

Whips

25.32(b)

White spirit

21.33

Wire mesh cages

25.60(c)

Wire netting

18.26

Wood block flooring

13.09

Wood block flooring

13.50

Wood chipboard

13.17

Wood preservative

13.30

Wood preservative

13.43

Wood preservative

21.30

Wood preservative

21.62

Wood preservative to external timber

13.30.1

Wood preservatives

6.04

Work at completion

1.63

Work below ground

6.06

Workability

6.46

Workability

6.56

Worked surface finishes

6.74

Workmanship

6.62

Workmanship

11.07

Workmanship

14.102

Workmanship of tree surgery work

25.82

Workmanship on transplanting shrubs

25.75.1

Workmanship on tree felling

25.70.1

Works included

16.02

Wound sealant

25.23

Wrapping of root ball

25.73.2

Writing

21.69

Yellow Soap Stone

25.04(e)

Ying Rock

25.04(d)

Clause No.

B19

Index 3 - List of Standards

Standards with edition

appropriate for use

Description

APHA 4500-C1-B, 18th Edition Chloride, Argentometric method

(1992)
APHA 4500-SO42-C, 18th Edition Sulphate, gravimetric method with ignition of residue
(1992)
BS 1014:1975
Specification for pigments for Portland cement and Portland cement
products
BS 1199 & BS 1200:1976
Specifications for building sands from natural sources

Clause No.

6.35
6.35
6.36

BS1210

Specification for wood screws

3.27(iii) &
26.47(b)
13.25

BS 1521:1972

Specification for waterproof building papers

6.69

BS 1881-124:1988

6.47.2

BS 2499:1973

Testing concrete Part 124: Methods for analysis of hardened

concrete
Specification for hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements

BS 2499:1973

Ditto

6.62

BS 3148:1980

Ditto

6.35

BS 3892: Part 1:1997

BS 3900: Part C5:1992

Pulverized-fuel ash Part 1: Specification for pulverized-fuel ash for 6.28

use with Portland cement
Method of test for paints (Determination of film thickness)
6.25.10

BS 4027:1980

Specification for sulphate-resisting Portland cement

6.27

BS 4074:1982

Specification for metal props and struts

6.04

BS 4254:1983

Specification for two-part polysulphide-based sealants

6.61

BS 4254:1983

Ditto

6.62

BS 4447:1973(1990)

Specification for the performance of prestressing anchorages for

post-tensioned construction
Ditto

7.22

6.14

BS 4482:1985

Specification for cold reduced steel wire for the reinforcement of

concrete
Ditto

BS 4483:1998

Specification for steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete

6.14

BS 4483:1998

Ditto

6.15

BS 4483:1998

Ditto

6.17

BS 4486:1980

Specification for hot rolled and hot rolled and processed high tensile 7.09
alloy steel bars for the prestressing of concrete
Concrete admixtures Part 1: Specification for accelerating and
6.36
retarding water-reducing admixtures
Ditto
8.06

BS 4447:1973(1990)
BS 4482:1985

BS 5075-1:1982
BS 5075-1:1982

C1

6.61

7.23

6.17

Index 3 - List of Standards

Standards with edition

appropriate for use

Description

Clause No.

8.06

BS 5075-3:1985

Concrete admixtures Part 2: Specification for air-entraining

admixtures
Concrete admixtures Part 3: Specification for superplasticising
admixtures
Ditto

BS 5212

Cold applied joint sealant systems for concrete pavements

6.61

BS 5212

Ditto

6.62

BS 5212-1:1990

Part 1: Specification for joint sealants

6.61

BS 5212-2:1990

Part 2: Code of Practice for the application and use of joint sealants

6.61

BS 5212-3:1990

Part 3: Methods of test

6.61

BS 5215:1986

Specification for one-part gun grade polysulphide-based sealants

6.61

BS 5215:1986

Ditto

6.62

BS 5328-1:1991

Concrete Part 1: Guide to specifying concrete

6.44

BS 5328-2:1991

Concrete Part 2: Methods for specifying concrete

6.44

BS 5328-3:1990

6.44

BS 5975:1982

Concrete Part 3: Procedures to be used in producing and

transporting concrete
Concrete Part 4: Specification for the procedures to be used in
sampling, testing and assessing compliance of concrete
Specification for high tensile steel wire and stand for the prestressing
of concrete
Code of practice for temporary works procedures and the permissible
stress design of falsework
Code of practice for falsework

BS 5975:1982

Ditto

6.02

BS 6213:1982

Guide to selection of constructional sealants

6.62

BS 6699:1992

6.29.2

BS 7295-1:1990

Specification for ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use with

Portland cement
Fusion bonded epoxy coated steel bars for the reinforcement of
concrete Part 1: Specification for coated bars
Ditto

BS 7295-1:1990

Ditto

6.25.11

BS 7295-2:1990

6.25.1

BS 7295-2:1990

Fusion bonded epoxy coated steel bars for the reinforcement of

concrete Part 2: Specification for coatings
Ditto

BS 8004:1986

Code of practice for foundations

6.49

BS 8008:1996

BS 8666:2005

Safety precautions and procedures for the construction and descent of 5.21
machine-bored shafts for piling and other purposes
Scheduling, dimensioning, bending and cutting of steel
5.25
reinforcement for concrete. Specification
Ditto
6.19

BS EN 196-2:2005

Methods of testing cement Part 2: Chemical analysis of cement

6.42.1

BS EN 196-2:2005

Ditto

6.47.2

BS 5075-2:1982
BS 5075-3:1985

BS 5328-4:1990
BS 5896:1980
BS 5975:2008+A1:2011

BS 7295-1:1990

BS 8666:2005

C2

6.36
8.06

6.44
7.09
1.39.2(xi)
6.01

6.25.1
6.25.10

6.25.4

Index 3 - List of Standards

Standards with edition

appropriate for use
BS EN 196-3:1995

Description

Clause No.

BS EN 196-3:1995

Methods of testing cement - Part 3: Determination of setting time and 6.35

soundness
Ditto
6.42.3

BS EN 196-6:1992

Methods of testing cement Part 6: Determination of fineness

BS EN 197-1:2000
BS EN 197-1:2000

Cement Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity criteria 6.27

for common cements
Ditto
6.28

BS EN 197-1:2000

Ditto

6.29

BS EN 197-1:2000

Ditto

6.42.1

BS EN 197-1:2000

Ditto

6.42.3

BS EN 197-1:2000

Ditto

8.03

BS EN 1008:2002

Mixing water for concrete. Specification for sampling, testing and

assessing the suitability of water, including water recovered from
processes in the concrete industry, as mixing water for concrete
Ditto

6.35

Silica fume for concrete Part 1: Definitions, requirements and

conformity criteria
Wood-based panels for use in construction. Characteristics,
evaluation of conformity and marking

6.29.1

BS EN 1008:2002
BS EN 13263-1:2005+A1:2009
BS EN 13986

BS EN 15167-1:2006
BS EN 15167-1:2006

6.42.1

6.47.2

13.09
13.29
13.29.1
6.29.2

Ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use with concrete, mortar

and grout Part 1: Definitions, specifications and conformity criteria
Ditto
6.42.1

CS3

Ground granulated blastfurnace slag for use with concrete, mortar

and grout Part 2: Conformity evaluation
Construction Standard CS2: 2012 - Steel Reinforcing Bars for the
Reinforcement of Concrete
Construction Standard CS3:2013 Aggregates for Concrete

CSA-A23.5-M86

Supplementary cementing materials

Code of Practice for

Structural Use of Concrete
2004 (Second Edition)

Code of Practice for structural use of concrete

5.02, 5.25,
6.24, 6.26,
7.01

Code of Practice for the

Structural Use of Steel 2011

Code of Practice for the Structural Use of Steel

European E1 emission
standard

European E1 emission standard

1.39.2,
15.01, 5.18,
15.32,
15.58,
15.59
13.22

BS EN 15167-2:2006
CS2

C3

6.29.2
26.34
6.33, 6.34
6.41,
6.42.3
Table 6.16,
6.47.2,
8.04, 26.60
6.29.1

gs zoiz
FOR BUILDING
http://www.archsd.gov.hk
Queensway Government Offices, 66 Queensway, Hong Kong